TOEFL

Peterson’s MASTER TOEFL VOCABULARY About Peterson’s, A Nelnet Company Peterson’s (www.petersons.com) is a leading provider of education information and advice, with books and online resources focusing on education search, test preparation, and financial aid. Its Web site offers searchable databases and interactive tools for contacting educational institutions, online practice tests and instruction, and planning tools for securing financial aid. Peterson’s serves 110 million education consumers annually. For more information, contact Peterson’s, A Nelnet Company, 2000 Lenox Drive, Lawrenceville, NJ 08648; 800338-3282; or find us on the World Wide Web at: www.petersons.com/about Portions of this book were previously published in Reading and Vocabulary Workbook for the TOEFL Exam and Ultimate Word Success. © 2006 by Elizabeth Davy and Karen Davy TOEFL is a registered trademark of Educational Testing Service (ETS). This book is not endorsed or approved by ETS. Editor: Wallie Walker Hammond; Manufacturing Manager: Ray Golaszewski ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by the copyright herein may be reproduced or used in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, Web distribution, or information storage and retrieval systems—without the prior written permission of the publisher. ISBN-13: 978-0-7689-2328-5 ISBN-10: 0-7689-2328-X Printed in the United States of America 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 08 07 06 First Edition Petersons.com/publishing Check out our Web site at www.petersons.com/publishing to see if there is any new information regarding the test and any revisions or corrections to the content of this book. We’ve made sure the information in this book is accurate and up-to-date; however, the test format or content may have changed since the time of publication. OTHER TITLES IN SERIES: Peterson’s Master TOEFL Reading Peterson’s Master TOEFL Writing Skills Contents ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii How This Book Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Special Study Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii You’re Well on Your Way to Success . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii Give Us Your Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii Top 10 Strategies to Raise Your Score . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix PART I: TOEFL VOCABULARY BASICS 1 All About TOEFL Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Vocabulary on the TOEFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Strategies for Learning and Remembering New Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Summing It Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 PART II: DIAGNOSING STRENGTHS AND WEAKNESSES 2 Practice Test 1: Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Answer Key and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 PART III: TOEFL VOCABULARY REVIEW 3 Words in Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Strategies for Defining Words from Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Answer Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Summing It Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 4 Everyday and Specific Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Strategies for Learning Related Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 How Thoughts Are Related . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Answer Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Summing It Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 5 All About Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Word Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Strategies for Learning Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 How Roots Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 v ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ vi Contents ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Learning Words with Greek Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 ○ ○ Learning Words with Latin Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ○ ○ Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ○ ○ Answer Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 6 All About Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Summing It Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 ○ ○ Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ○ ○ Strategies for Learning Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ○ ○ How Prefixes Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ○ ○ Learning Words with Greek Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 ○ ○ Learning Words with Latin Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ○ ○ Prefixes for Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ○ ○ Anglo-Saxon Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ○ ○ Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ○ ○ Answer Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 7 All About Suffixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Suffixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Strategies for Learning Suffixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 How Suffixes Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Suffixes That Describe State of Being . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Suffixes That Indicate Occupations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Suffixes That Show Resemblance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Suffixes That Show Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Twelve Useful Suffixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Answer Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Summing It Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 PART IV: TWO PRACTICE TESTS Practice Test 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Answer Key and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Practice Test 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Answer Key and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Summing It Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ Before You Begin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ HOW THIS BOOK IS ORGANIZED If you are preparing for any version of the TOEFL, you are not alone. Almost a million people all over the world took the TOEFL last year. A high score on this test is an essential step in being admitted to undergraduate or graduate programs at almost all colleges and universities in North America. But preparing for this test can be a difficult, often frustrating, experience. Peterson’s Master TOEFL Vocabulary, used as a self-tutor, will help you improve your vocabulary skills. You’ll learn many of the “right” words—words you don’t already know but that are likely to appear on your test. • • Top 10 Strategies to Raise Your Score gives you test-taking strategies. Part I provides TOEFL vocabulary basics, including strategies for learning and remembering new words. • Part II provides a diagnostic test to determine your strengths and weaknesses. • Part III provides the basic vocabulary review. The words you’ll encounter start with those that are relatively simple. They become relatively difficult as you continue through the book. Various learning strategies, such as learning root words, are reviewed. • Part IV consists of two additional practice vocabulary tests. They will show you how well you have mastered the vocabulary skills presented in this book. SPECIAL STUDY FEATURES Peterson’s Master TOEFL Vocabulary is designed to be user-friendly. To this end, it includes features to make your preparation much more efficient. Overview The review chapters begin with a bulleted overview, listing the topics to be covered in the chapter. This will allow you to quickly target the areas in which you are most interested. vii ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ viii Before You Begin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Bonus Information As you work your way through the book, keep your eyes on the margins to find the following: NOTE Notes highlight critical information about improving your vocabulary. TIP Tips draw your attention to valuable concepts, advice, and shortcuts for tackling the harder vocabulary words. Summing It Up The review chapter ends with a point-by-point summary that captures the most important concepts. They are a convenient way to review the chapter’s key points. Practice Tests The three practice tests, including the diagnostic test, are designed to help you prepare with little anxiety. YOU’RE WELL ON YOUR WAY TO SUCCESS The TOEFL tests your vocabulary with “vocabulary-in-context” questions in which you must determine the meaning of words as used in a specific sentence, as well as indirectly through the use of reading comprehension passages and questions. The more words you know, the better your chances of narrowing down the choices to the correct one. Peterson’s Master TOEFL Vocabulary will help you to fine tune your vocabulary skills. GIVE US YOUR FEEDBACK Peterson’s publishes a full line of resources to help guide international students through the college admission process. We welcome any comments or suggestions you may have about this publication and invite you to complete our online survey at www.petersons.com/booksurvey. Or you can fill out the survey at the back of this book, tear it out, and mail it to us at: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Your feedback will help us to provide personalized solutions for your educational advancement. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Publishing Department Peterson’s 2000 Lenox Drive Lawrenceville, NJ 08648 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Before You Begin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ix ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ TOP 10 STRATEGIES TO RAISE YOUR SCORE 1. As with other sections of the TOEFL, be familiar with the directions and examples so you can begin work immediately. 2. For each passage, begin by briefly looking over the questions (but not the answer choices). Try to keep these questions in mind during your reading. 3. Scan passages to find and highlight the important facts and information. 4. Read each passage at a comfortable speed. 5. Answer the questions, referring to the passage when necessary. 6. Eliminate answers that are clearly wrong or do not answer the question. If more than one option remains, guess. 7. Mark difficult or time-consuming answers so that you can come back to them later if you have time. 8. Timing is an important factor. Don't spend more than 10 minutes on any one reading and the questions about it. 9. Concentration is another important factor. The reading section is one of the longer sections of the test. Your practice and hard work will help you. 10. Relax the night before the exam. www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ PART I ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ TOEFL VOCABULARY BASICS ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ CHAPTER 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ All About TOEFL Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ All About TOEFL Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ • Vocabulary on the TOEFL • Strategies for learning and remembering new words • Summing it up VOCABULARY ON THE TOEFL TOEFL vobabulary questions ask you to identify the meanings of words and phrases that appear in the reading passages. The words and phrases that are tested are important to understanding the entire passage, and, for the most part, you will have to figure out their meanings. On the TOEFL iBT, however, if there are technical or unusual words in the passage, you will see the definition presented in a box. STRATEGIES FOR LEARNING AND REMEMBERING NEW WORDS Read Reading is probably the single best way to improve your vocabulary. When you’re preparing for the TOEFL, read materials that contain the words that you are most likely to encounter. Use a Dictionary and Thesaurus If you’re serious about improving your testworthy vocabulary, you must have (and use!) a good dictionary. (A good thesaurus also helps a lot, but more on that later.) A dictionary is an alphabetical reference list of the words in the language. 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ chapter 1 OVERVIEW ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4 PART I: TOEFL Vocabulary Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ A dictionary entry always includes the following components: • • • • • • Spelling Pronunciation Part(s) of speech Irregular forms of the word Definition Etymology (the derivation and development of words) An entry may also contain synonyms and antonyms of the word; prefixes, suffixes, and other elements in word formation; and abbreviations. Most people think that all dictionaries are the same. After all, all dictionaries are chock full of words listed in alphabetical order. They all have pronunciation guides, word definitions, and word histories. However, all dictionaries are not the same. Different types of dictionaries fit different needs. For example, dictionaries have been written just for scholars who research the history of language. The most famous scholarly dictionary is The Oxford English Dictionary. An unabridged dictionary, the OED (as it’s often called) contains more than 500,000 entries. Don’t rush right out to buy one to stash in your bookcase, however, because the OED now contains about 60 million words in 20 volumes. If shelf space is an issue and you simply can’t live without an OED, however, online and CD-ROM versions are available from www.oed.com. Dictionaries have been created just for adults, college students, high school students, and elementary school students, too. The following list includes the bestselling general dictionaries and the Web addresses for the online versions, when available: • The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language (Houghton Mifflin Co.: www.bartleby.com/61) • Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary (Merriam-Webster, Inc.: www.m-w.com/ dictionary.htm) • • • • Merriam-Webster’s Pocket Dictionary (Merriam-Webster, Inc.) The New Shorter Oxford English Dictionary (Oxford University Press, Inc.) The Random House College Dictionary (Random House, Inc.) Webster’s New World College Dictionary (Hungry Minds, Inc.) Which dictionary should you purchase and use? Since more than 30,000 dictionaries are currently offered for sale online, you’ve got some shopping to do. Here’s what you need: • A dictionary that contains all the words that you are likely to encounter on standardized tests. This will most likely be the same dictionary that you can use in college, in your personal life, and in your professional life. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The words explained in terms that you can understand. • An online dictionary can’t fulfill all your needs, unless you like to tote around your laptop and fire it up all the time. Always have a print dictionary to use, even if you have an online version. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ When you’re trying to find a word in the dictionary, always begin by making an educated guess as to its spelling. The odds are in your favor. However, the more spelling patterns you know for a sound, the better your chances of finding the word quickly. You can find a pronunciation chart in the beginning of any dictionary. Once you’ve narrowed down your search and you’re flipping through the pages, use the guide words, located on the upper-corners of the pages, to guide your search. Then, follow strict alphabetical order. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ A size that fits your needs. You might wish to buy a hardbound dictionary to use at home when you study and a smaller paperback to keep in your backpack or briefcase for immediate reference. ○ ○ ○ ○ • • definitions ○ plural ○ part of speech ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ etymology (word history) can-dy (kan’de), n. pl. -dies, v., -died, -dying. —n. 1. any of a variety of confections made with sugar, syrup, etc. combined with other ingredients. 2. a single piece of such a confection. —vt: 3. to cook in sugar or syrup, as sweet potatoes or carrots. 4. to cook in heavy syrup until transparent, as fruit, fruit peel, or ginger. 5. to reduce (sugar, syrup, etc.) to a crystalline form, usually by boiling down. vi: to become candied. see vt. [ME sugre candy candied sugar < MF sucre candi; candi << Ar qandi or sugar = qand sugar (< Pers; perh. orig. piece of sugar candy; if so, akin to Skt khanda piece)] ○ ○ ○ spelling, pronunciation ○ ○ ○ ○ The following diagram shows how to read a sample entry. The part of speech is indicated by the n. It’s an abbreviation for “noun.” Look at the third entry. The vt: right before the 3. shows that the word can be used as a transitive verb (a verb that must be followed by a direct object). The vi: at the end of the fifth entry shows that the word can also be used as an intransitive verb (a verb that does not need a direct object to make sense in a sentence). • The pl. at the beginning of the entry shows how you can make the word plural (more than one). Here, the singular “candy” becomes the plural “candies.” ○ • ○ Notice the pronunciation comes right after the entry word. It’s in parentheses— (kan’de). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ • ○ ○ ○ ○ Let’s look a little closer at the entry: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6 PART I: TOEFL Vocabulary Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ • The definitions follow the plural forms of the word. The word “candy” has several different meanings. They are arranged by the part of speech: the first definitions show what “candy” means when used as a noun; the second group shows what “candy” means when used as a verb. • The information at the very end of the entry is the etymology or history of the word. This shows how the word was formed and came into English. A thesaurus is a reference book that contains synonyms and antonyms. The word thesaurus comes from a Greek word that means “collection” or “treasure.” A thesaurus is especially helpful when you’re trying to express an idea but you don’t know how to phrase it. It is also a helpful reference book when you are trying to find a better word than the one you’ve been using. This helps you state exact shades of meaning rather than approximations. As a result, your vocabulary increases by heaps and heaps of words. This is clearly a big advantage when it comes to preparing for a standardized test. In a thesaurus, words with similar meanings are grouped together. To find a synonym for a word in a traditional print thesaurus, you must use the index at the back of the book. However, new editions and online versions of a thesaurus are arranged like a dictionary in alphabetical order. If you look up the word exciting in a print thesaurus, you would find this entry: excitement [n] enthusiasm; incitement action, activity, ado, adventure, agitation, animation, bother, buzz*, commotion, confusion, discomposure, disturbance, dither*, drama, elation, emotion, excitation, feeling, ferment, fever, flurry, frenzy, furor, fuss, heat*, hubbub*, hullabaloo, hurry, hysteria, impulse, instigation, intoxication, kicks*, melodrama, motivation, motive, movement, passion, perturbation, provocation, rage, stimulation, stimulus, stir, thrill, titillation, to-do, trepidation, tumult, turmoil, urge, warmth, wildness. SEE CONCEPTS 38, 410, 633. SEE CONCEPTS in the print thesaurus takes you to the Concept Index, which helps you link different related ideas. In this way, you can find the exact shade of meaning you need. Use the key in the beginning of the print thesaurus to understand different symbols. In this entry, for example, the * shows that a word is colloquial or the slang level of usage. Online thesaurus programs are especially useful for distinguishing among homonyms. If you intended to type “whether” but instead keyboarded “weather,” the thesaurus will give you synonyms like atmospheric conditions, climate, meteorology, and the elements. This can help you keep your homonyms straight. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ While both a print and an online thesaurus unquestionably will help you beef up your vocabulary, in general, a print thesaurus will give you more options than an online thesaurus. That’s because the print versions have more words in them. Therefore, you’ll need a print thesaurus even if you have an online version. Use a print thesaurus when you need a wider variety of choices. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ How well do you pronounce testworthy words? Take the following self-test to see. Cover the third column with a piece of paper. Then read each word and its definition. Pronounce each word. Last, check the third column to see how well you did. ○ ○ ○ The most effective way to learn how to pronounce new words is by using a dictionary. Get a reliable desk or pocket dictionary. It’s the best source for the words you need to get you where you want to go. ○ ○ Even the lowly word picture can get warped as pitcher. As a result, no one knows what anyone else is talking about. Incorrect pronunciations can make it impossible to define the word, too. ○ ○ ○ In addition, people often insert an extra letter or two, which can make the word unrecognizable. For instance, ambidextrous (able to use either hand) has four syllables and is correctly pronounced am-bi-deks-trus. But sometimes speakers add an extra syllable to get am-bi-deks-tree-us or am-bi-deks-tru-us. ○ ○ ○ The pronunciation problem is especially acute with words that can function as more than one part of speech. The word ally is a case in point. As a noun, it’s pronounced aleye. As a verb, it’s pronounced uh-lie. ○ ○ ○ People have also been known to drop letters. For instance, the food poisoning known as salmonella is correctly pronounced sal-muh-nel-uh. Dropping the L results in sam-uhnel-uh. ○ ○ ○ Knowing the meaning of a word is only half the battle; you also have to know how to pronounce it. It’s astonishing how many words are misunderstood simply because they are mispronounced. Words get mangled in surprisingly inventive ways. For example, people often switch letters. For example, abhor (hate) becomes uh-bor rather than ab-hor. ○ ○ ○ ○ Pronounce Words Correctly ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8 PART I: TOEFL Vocabulary Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Word Meaning Pronunciation Amish Pennsylvania Dutch ah-mish aplomb assurance uh-plahm awry wrong, crooked uh-ry banquet feast bang-kwit buffet self-service meal buh-fay buoy floating marker boo-ee Celtic Irish kel-tik denouement conclusion day-noo-mah entrepreneur business person ahn-truh-pruh-nur fracas noisy fight fray-kis hegemony leadership hi-jem-uh-nee insouciant carefree in-soo-see-int khaki light brown kak-ee larynx voice box lar-ingks mausoleum tomb maw-suh-lee-um niche corner nich (rhymes with “itch”) penchant inclination pen-chint posthumous after death pahs-chuu-mus quagmire swamp kwag-myr remuneration payment ri-myoo-nuh-ray-shin shallot onion shal-it or shuh-laht toupee hairpiece too-pay vehement fiery, passionate vee-uh-mint verbiage wordy vur-bee-ij worsted yarn wuus-tid Use Word Cards One of the most effective ways to make a word your own is through repetition. Going over the word can help you master its meaning as well as pronunciation and usage. Try this idea: buy a stack of 3 × 5 index cards. As you read through the following chapters, write each difficult word on the front of an index card, one word per card. Then, write the definition on the back. Here’s a sample: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 9 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ FRONT: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ matriarch ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ BACK: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ the female head of a family or tribe Synonym Antonym ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ ○ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ ○ 1. adapt 2. authentic 3. chronic 4. conquer 5. frustrate 6. indulge 7. naïve 8. punish 9. relinquish 10. sullen ○ ○ Word ○ ○ ○ Complete the following chart by writing at least one synonym and antonym for each word. Then, see how many more synonyms and antonyms you can brainstorm. Possible answers follow. ○ ○ ○ Synonyms are words that are nearly the same in meaning as other words. Antonyms are words that are opposites. Learning different synonyms and antonyms can help you swell your vocabulary. Go ahead and try it now. ○ ○ ○ ○ Learn Synonyms and Antonyms ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10 PART I: TOEFL Vocabulary Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Suggested answers: Word Synonyms Antonyms 1. adapt adjust, accustom, accommodate disarrange, dislocate 2. authentic genuine, real, legitimate fake, counterfeit, bogus, imitation 3. chronic habitual, ongoing, constant one time, single 4. conquer defeat, vanquish, overwhelm surrender, yield, forfeit, give up 5. frustrate baffle, beat, disappoint facilitate, encourage 6. indulge tolerate, humor, allow, permit prohibit, deter, restrain, enjoin 7. naïve innocent, ingenuous worldly, urbane, suave 8. punish discipline, castigate reward, compensate, remunerate 9. relinquish quit, renounce perpetuate, keep 10. sullen irritable, morose, moody cheerful, jolly, blithe, happy Understand a Word’s Unstated Meanings Every word has a denotation, its dictionary meaning. In addition, some words have connotations, their understood meanings or emotional overtones. For example, both house and home have the same denotation, a shelter. Home, however, carries a connotation of warmtl!and love not present in house. Use Word Parts A surprisingly large number of words can be divided into parts that you can figure out easily. If you can define the parts, then you can often decode the entire word. This is a crucial skill on standardized tests, when you’re under time constraints. There are three main word parts to know: roots, prefixes, and suffixes. • • A root is a base or stem form of many words. Roots are covered in depth in Chapter 5. A prefix is a letter or a group of letters placed at the beginning of a word to change its meaning. Prefixes are covered in depth in Chapter 6. • A suffix is a letter or a group of letters placed at the end of a word to change its meaning. Suffixes are covered in depth in Chapter 7. For example, if you know the Latin root ami means “like” or “love,” you can easily figure out that amiable means “pleasant and friendly.” Similarly, you could deduce that amorous means “loving.” Even if you can’t define a word exactly, recognizing the different parts of the word still will give you a general idea of the word’s meaning. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 11 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Create your own mnemonics to help you remember the easily confused words that you are most likely to encounter on standardized tests. ○ ○ ○ Likewise, stationary means “standing still” (both words stationary and standing contain an “a”) while stationery is paper used for writing letters (both words stationery and letter contain “er”). Desert and dessert become easier to define when you remember that dessert has a double “s,” like strawberry shortcake. ○ ○ ○ Mnemonics are memory tricks that help you remember everything from the order of the planets to your grocery list. Mnemonics are another technique you can use to help you distinguish between easily confused words. For example, to remember that principal means “main” (as in the principal of a school), look at the last three letters: the principal is your pal. To remember that principle means “rule,” remember that both words end in le. ○ ○ ○ ○ Use Mnemonics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ How can you figure out that maritime must mean “related to the sea, nautical”? Use context clues: ○ ○ ○ Just after midnight on April 15, 1912, one of the most dramatic and famous of all maritime disasters occurred, the sinking of the Titanic. The Titanic was the most luxurious ship afloat at the time, with its beautifully decorated staterooms, glittering crystal chandeliers, and elaborate food service. ○ ○ When you take standardized tests, you’ll be expected to define unfamiliar words. You can often get clues to the meaning of unfamiliar words by the information surrounding the word, its context. When you use context and context clues, you interpret a word’s specific meaning by examining its relationship to other words in the sentence. To figure out the meaning of the unfamiliar word, you make inferences based on what you already know and the details that you are given in the sentence or paragraph. Here’s an example: ○ ○ ○ ○ Use Context Clues The Titanic was an oceanliner. Sentence details “The Titanic was the most luxurious ship afloat. . .” ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Restatement context clues ○ ○ Inferential context clues ○ Contrast context clues ○ ○ • • • ○ ○ Context clues come in different forms. The most common types of context clues include: ○ ○ The “unsinkable” Titanic vanished under the water at 2:20 a.m., April 15. There were about 2,200 passengers aboard, and all but about 700 died. The tragedy was made even worse by the crew’s futile rescue attempts. Since there were not enough lifeboats, hundreds of people died who could have survived. ○ ○ Try it yourself by defining futile as it is used in the following passage: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ What you already know ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Let’s look at each type. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 12 PART I: TOEFL Vocabulary Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Restatement Context Clues Here’s how one writer defined the word levee right in the passage: The Army Corps of Engineers distributed 26 million plastic bags throughout the region. Volunteers filled each bag with 35 pounds of sand and then stacked them to create levees, makeshift barriers against the floodwaters. Right after the word levee, readers get the definition: “makeshift barriers against the floodwaters.” You can also use an entire passage to get a general sense of difficult words. For example, define epidemic as it is used in the following sentence: “Nearly 40 million Americans are overweight; obesity has become an epidemic.” Since the sentence describes the epidemic as affecting “40 million people,” odds are good that epidemic means “something that happens to a large group of people.” Sometimes you won’t be able to pinpoint the precise meaning. Here, for instance, you might infer that an epidemic indicates a widespread threat, but you might miss the subtle connection between epidemic and disease. Nonetheless, this clue might be just enough to help you define a new word that you encounter on a standardized test. Each of the following sentences contains a restatement context clue. The unfamiliar word is in italics and the definition is in parentheses. As you read, cover the answer in parentheses and see if you can figure it out. 1. Fatty deposits on artery walls combine with calcium compounds to cause arteriosclerosis, hardening of the arteries. Arteriosclerosis means (“hardening of the arteries”) 2. The upper part of the heart on the left side, the left atrium, receives blood returning from circulation. Atrium means (“the upper part of the heart”) 3. In many Native American tribes, the shaman, or medicine man, acted as a ceremonial priest. Shaman means (“medicine man”) 4. I believe that life is short, so we should enjoy what we eat. As a result, I consume mass quantities of confectioneries, candies, and keep my dentist on retainer. Confectioneries means (“candies”) 5. She jumped into the fray and enjoyed every minute of the fight. Fray means (“fight”) 6. As with all electric currents or discharges, lightning will follow the path of least resistance. This means that it will take the route that is easiest for it to travel on. Current means (“discharges”) the path of least resistance means (“the route that is easiest for it to travel on”) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7. Many settlers on the vast American plains in the late nineteenth century used sod, or earth, as a building material for their houses. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8. Then, arrange a handful of mulch, dead leaves, on the top of the soil. ○ ○ ○ Sod means (“earth”) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Patent medicines means (“homemade medicines that were sold without a prescription”) ○ ○ 10. To make a living, he created so-called patent medicines, homemade medicines that were sold without a prescription. ○ ○ Pharmacist means (“someone who dispenses medical drugs”) ○ ○ 9. Born in 1831, John Styth Pemberton was a pharmacist, someone who dispenses medical drugs, who moved to Atlanta, Georgia, in 1869. ○ ○ ○ Mulch means (“dead leaves”) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ When you make an inference, you combine what you already know with spoken or textual clues to discover the unstated information. You may have heard this referred to as “reading between the lines” or “putting two and two together.” In graphical form, the process of making an inference looks like this: ○ ○ As you have just read, sometimes the unfamiliar word may be defined right in the text. Other times, however, you will have to infer the meaning from what you already know and from details you heard or read. This takes a bit of detective work. ○ ○ ○ ○ Inferential Context Clues ○ ○ ○ Text Clues + What I Know = Inference What I Know = Inference was a forerunner + fore means “before” or “precede” = forerunner means “before” ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ + ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Context Clue ○ ○ In 1862, in order to support the Civil War effort, Congress enacted the nation’s first income tax law. It was a forerunner of our modern income tax in that it was based on the principles of graduated, or progressive, taxation and of withholding income at the source. ○ ○ ○ Try the following example: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ It is hard to use literal language when talking about nature because people tend to talk about nature using figurative language. ○ ○ You can also figure out an unknown word when an opposite or contrast is presented. When you do this, you’re making an inference. For example, you can define literal by finding its contrast in the sentence: ○ ○ ○ ○ Contrast Context Clues ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14 PART I: TOEFL Vocabulary Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Literal language must be the opposite of “figurative language”. If you know that figurative language is words and expressions not meant to be taken at face value, you can infer that “literal” must mean the strict or exact meaning. Other synonyms would include verbatim or word-for-word. Use contrast clues to infer the meaning of menace in the following sentence: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Menace means “threat.” You can infer this from the contrast between “menace” and “peacemaker.” The following words express contrast. Watch for them as you read passages on standardized tests. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ I was afraid that my latest mother-in-law would be a menace to our already cranky family, but she turned out to be a great peacemaker. but conversely however in contrast on the other hand still nevertheless yet Using context is an important way to define unfamiliar words on the TOEFL. Use all the different types of context clues as you decode these unfamiliar words in italics. Most natural hazards can be detected before their threat matures. But seisms (from the Greek seismos, earthquake) have no known precursors, so they come without warning, like the vengeance of an ancient warrior. For this reason, they continue to kill in some areas at a level usually reserved for wars and epidemics— 11,000 people in northeastern Iran died on August 31, 1968, not in the ancient past. Nor is the horror of the lethal earthquake completed with the heavy death toll. The homeless still living are left to cope with fire, looting, pestilence, fear, and the burden of rebuilding what the planet so easily shrugs away. Word Pronunciation Definition seisms si-zums earthquakes precursors pre-cuhr-zurs warnings, forerunners vengeance ven-gehnce revenge, retribution lethal lee-thal deadly pestilence pes-til-ence a deadly widespread disease, like the plague ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Expressions That Show Contrast ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 15 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Definition metamorphosed meh-tah-mor-fozd changed transition tran-si-shun development or change phenomenon fe-nahm-ih-nan event, occurrence illustrious ih-lus-tree-us distinguished, celebrated eminent eh-min-ent famous ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Pronunciation Pronunciation Definition economic eek-a-nom-ik having to do with money initially in-ih-shall-ee at first elaborate i-lab-or-it complex desperation des-per-a-shun extreme need craze crayz fad, fashion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ When you read, you often come across a word that you think you know but that doesn’t make sense in the sentence you’re reading. That’s your clue that the word has more than one meaning. In this case, you must choose the meaning that fits the context. ○ ○ ○ Context clues are especially crucial when you encounter words with more than one meaning. The word favor, for example, has many different meanings. Here are six of them: a kind act, friendly regard, being approved, a gift, to support, and to resemble. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Word ○ ○ ○ A worldwide economic Depression in the 1930s left many people unemployed. One such person was Charles Darrow of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, who had lost his job as a heating engineer. To try to make a living, Darrow invented a board game he called “Monopoly.” Initially, Darrow tried to sell his idea to the leading game manufacturer in America, but Parker Brothers turned the game down because it felt the game was too elaborate to play. In desperation, Darrow used his own money to have 5,000 games made by a small company. He sold the games himself, and the craze spread. Seeing the success of the game, Parker Brothers changed its mind and purchased the game for manufacturing and distribution. In 1975, twice as much Monopoly money was printed in the United States as real money. All told, nearly 100 million Monopoly sets have been sold since 1935. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Word ○ ○ The film industry metamorphosed from silent films to the “talkies” in the late 1920s, after the success in 1927 of The Jazz Singer. Mickey Mouse was one of the few “stars” who made a smooth transition from silent films to talkies with his 1928 cartoon Steamboat Willie. Within a year, hundreds of Mickey Mouse clubs had sprung up all across the United States. By 1931, more than a million people belonged to a Mickey Mouse club. The phenomenon was not confined to America. In London, Madame Tussaud’s illustrious wax museum placed a wax figure of Mickey alongside its statues of other eminent film stars. In 1933, according to Disney Studios, Mickey received 800,000 fan letters—an average of more than 2,000 letters a day. To date, no “star” has ever received as much fan mail as Mickey Mouse. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 16 PART I: TOEFL Vocabulary Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Follow these three simple steps: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. Read the sentence and find the word with multiple meanings. ○ ○ 2. Look for context clues that tell you which meaning fits. For example: Nico was resigned to working overtime on Friday night. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3. Substitute a synonym for the word and see if it makes sense. If not, try another meaning for the word. Continue until you find the right meaning. ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. Resigned has multiple meanings. Resigned means “quitting a job.” It also means “giving in unhappily but without resistance.’ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2. Since Nico is working overtime, he is not quitting his job. Therefore, the second meaning of resigned should fit. Here are some examples of multiple-meaning words: Word Example Meaning Example Meaning address home address residence graduation address speech game play a game sport have a game leg injured catholic catholic tastes universal, wide Catholic religion of the Roman church rash have a rash skin problem rash action hasty Learn Word Histories In the 1600s, people believed that toads were poisonous, and anyone who mistakenly ate a toad’s leg instead of a frog’s leg would die. Rather than swearing off frog’s legs, people sought a cure for the “fatal” food poisoning. Performing in public, “quack” healers would sometimes hire an accomplice who would pretend to eat a toad, at which point his employer would whip out an instant remedy and “save” his helper’s life. For his duties, the helper came to be called a “toad-eater.” Since anyone who would consume anything as disgusting as a live toad must be completely under his master’s thumb, “toad-eater” or “toady” became the term for a bootlicking, fawning flatterer. And that’s how the word toady came to be. English is a living language. From its Germanic beginnings, English absorbed influences from a wide variety of sources, including classical Greek and Latin to Italian, French, Spanish, and Arabic languages. English continues to absorb new words as our culture changes. In addition, a significant part of our vocabulary is artificially created to meet new situations. Exploring the history of these words, their etymology, can help you learn many useful everyday words. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3. Using the synonym agreeable for resigned: Nico was agreeable to working overtime on Friday night. The sentence makes sense, so you have found the correct meaning for resigned. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 17 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Saying words aloud or hearing somebody else say them helps you to recall them later. Try reading sample sentences and definitions aloud as well. ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocalize as You Learn ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ It’s not enough to “learn” a word once. Unless you review it, the word will soon vanish from your memory banks. This book is packed with quizzes and word games to help refresh your memory. ○ ○ ○ ○ Review, Review, Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 18 PART I: TOEFL Vocabulary Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ • Vocabulary questions on the TOEFL ask you to identify the meanings of words and phrases as they appear in the reading passages. • The strategies for learning and remembering new words are: Read. Use a dictionary or thesaurus. Pronounce words correctly. Use word cards. Learn synonyms and antonyms. Understand a word’s unstated meanings. Use word parts. Use mnemonics. Use context clues. Learn word histories. Vocalize as you learn. Review, review, review. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ SUMMING IT UP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ PART II ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ DIAGNOSING STRENGTHS AND WEAKNESSES ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ CHAPTER 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 21 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com answer sheet ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ✁ ANSWER SHEET PRACTICE TEST 1: DIAGNOSTIC Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 23 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) idiotic (D) challenging ○ ○ ○ 5. The actress had to raise her voice in order to be audible in the balcony. ○ ○ (A) musical ○ (B) dramatic ○ The correct answer is (C). The sentence, “His students think he is strange,” is closest in meaning to, “His students think he is odd.” ○ ○ (D) humorous (B) brilliant ○ (C) strange (A) useless ○ (B) friendly 4. It is futile to go shopping when you don’t have any money. ○ His students think he is odd. (A) dangerous ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: In questions 1–15 each sentence has a word or phrase underlined. Below each sentence there are four other words or phrases, marked (A), (B), (C), and (D). You are to choose the one word or phrase that best keeps the meaning of the original sentence if it is substituted for the underlined word or phrase. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ PRACTICE TEST 1: DIAGNOSTIC ○ ○ (C) heard ○ ○ (D) appreciated ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7. Earthquakes occur frequently in parts of California. ○ (D) most popular ○ (D) execute ○ (B) most important ○ (C) justify ○ (B) permit (A) most expensive (C) most difficult ○ (A) understand ○ 1. Oil is one of the principal sources of energy. ○ 6. Dictators do not tolerate opposition of any kind. ○ ○ As soon as you understand the directions, begin work on the problems. ○ (D) often ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) integration (B) education (B) summary (C) separation (C) critique (D) torture ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) evaluation ○ ○ 3. The assignment was to write a synopsis of our favorite novel. 8. The Rev. Dr. Martin Luther King fought to put an end to racial segregation in the United States. ○ (D) exist ○ (C) spontaneously (B) prosper ○ (B) annually (A) reproduce (C) transcend ○ (A) instantly ○ 2. No one can survive for very long without water. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) dramatization diagnostic test ○ ○ ○ ○ 24 PART II: Diagnosing Strengths and Weaknesses ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 9. The number of illiterate young people in her country continues to rise. 13. A familiar adage says that the early bird gets the worm. (A) unable to read and write (A) proverb (B) without children (B) lady (C) sports participants (C) gentleman (D) wealthy (D) book 10. Since his wound was superficial, only a small bandage was required. (A) frivolous (A) a baking mixture (C) deep (B) more customers (D) supercilious (C) money (A) snowstorm (B) hurricane (C) tornado (D) thunderstorm (A) illegal (B) circumstantial ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 12. Tennis wear has become a very lucrative business for both manufacturers and tennis stars. (C) expansive ○ ○ (D) bread 15. At every faculty meeting, Ms. Volatile always manages to put her foot in her mouth. (A) trip over her big feet (B) say the wrong thing (C) move rapidly ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 11. The main road will be closed until the blizzard ends. (D) profitable ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14. A television ad shows a busy baker with a new computer that the advertiser claims will help him “make dough.” (B) on the surface ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com (D) fall asleep Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 25 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ANSWER KEY AND EXPLANATIONS B 6. B 11. A 2. D 7. D 12. D 3. B 8. C 13. A 4. A 9. A 14. C 5. C 10. B 15. B The correct answer is (B). If your answer is wrong, write the word on a 3 × 5-inch card. Include the synonyms main, chief, and major. As you continue to study in this book, add to your file all words that you discover you do not know. Keep the cards in alphabetical order for easy reference. 6. The correct answer is (B). The key words in this sentence are dictators and opposition. You know that dictators by nature do not (B), permit opposition, so the other three alternatives will not fit with what you know about dictators. 7. The correct answer is (D). The word frequently is commonly used, so you should know its meaning. 8. The correct answer is (C). Knowing about Martin Luther King will help you answer this item correctly. The fact that segregation and separation both begin with se may lead you to the correct answer here. However, there is no guarantee that all words that begin with the same syllable will mean the same thing. 9. The correct answer is (A). The word illiterate is composed of two parts—il, which is a prefix meaning not, and literate, which means able to read and write. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ 11. The correct answer is (A). All four alternatives relate to a serious weather disturbance. You would have to know that only a blizzard creates the hazard of snow. ○ The correct answer is (C). All of the alternatives relate to an actress’s experience on stage. The key word in this sentence is balcony. What would be necessary for an actress if there are people in the balcony? She would have to be (C), heard, not musical, dramatic, or appreciated. ○ 5. ○ The correct answer is (A). Neither brilliant nor challenging would describe the experience of shopping with no money. Idiotic is not a word used to describe the shopping experience. ○ 4. 10. The correct answer is (B). The prefix super means above. Another clue is that only a small bandage is needed, so the wound must not be deep. It is true that a frivolous person is superficial, but the word applies to people not to inanimate things. Supercilious might be the correct answer, since it begins with the same prefix. You would have to know that supercilious means haughty and therefore applies only to people. ○ The correct answer is (B). If you know that critique and evaluation have approximately the same meaning, critical writing, then you can assume that neither is the correct answer. Dramatization of a novel would certainly not be an assignment a teacher would give. By elimination and using your good sense, you get the correct answer. ○ 3. The correct answer is (D). All four choices can be used to make a meaningful sentence. Therefore, you had to know that survive is the same as (D), exist. If you do not know the meaning of the words given as alternatives, add them to your card list. ○ 2. ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. answers diagnostic test ○ ○ ○ ○ 26 PART II: Diagnosing Strengths and Weaknesses ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 12. The correct answer is (D). 13. The correct answer is (A). Familiarity with old sayings such as the one given in this sentence—the early bird gets the worm—will give you answer (A), proverb. The other alternatives are senseless in the context of this sentence. 14. The correct answer is (C). This is a difficult item because the word dough is a slang expression for (C), money. The advertiser is making a play on words to get a humorous effect, since a baker necessarily makes dough, a mixture of flour and water. The computer will help the baker make more money, not more baking mix. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com 15. The correct answer is (B). To put your foot in your mouth is an idiomatic expression that means (B), to say the wrong thing. Like most such expressions, this would be impossible to translate literally into another language. It has simply become a frequently used expression that is generally understood by native speakers. Another such expression is to have a heart, which means to be sympathetic. PART III ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ TOEFL VOCABULARY REVIEW ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ CHAPTER 3 Words in Context Chapter 4 Everyday and Specific Vocabulary Chapter 5 All About Roots Chapter 6 All About Prefixes Chapter 7 All About Suffixes ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ OVERVIEW • Strategies for defining words from context At some point, there may be a word you do not know the meaning of and there may be no prefix or root to help you. In this case, you must look at the context of the word. The context of a word is the setting in which the word occurs in speech or in written materials. You usually learn words by hearing or seeing them in context, and developing this ability will help you learn more words. The following includes exercises for words in context. These passages and vocabulary exercises are not as difficult as those you might find on the TOEFL since the purpose of this book is to teach vocabulary. STRATEGIES FOR DEFINING WORDS FROM CONTEXT • In some cases, if you come across an unusual word, the definition of the word is close to it. Try to understand the definition and apply it to the word in context. • • Look for another word or phrase in the context that has the same meaning. • Every time you read, practice looking for contextual clues. This will encourage you to analyze the meaning of what you read and will also train you to think about words and their meanings. In some contexts, direct clues are not given but are implied. In this case, you must think about the context and guess what the meaning of the word can be. Even if you cannot determine its exact meaning, you will be able to determine its general meaning. 29 chapter 3 • Summing it up ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 30 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ As you read the following passage, see if you can get the meaning of the underlined words from the context in which they appear. Then, do the vocabulary builders that follow. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ To the Editor: Your article on plans for aiding the elderly to pay their housing costs was not quite clear in several aspects. I would like to clarify the requirements and exemptions available for those who qualify. In the first place, a tenant 62 years old or older must live in a rent-controlled or rent-stabilized dwelling, pay more than one third of his or her income for rent, and have a yearly income of $8,000 or less. Such a tenant must apply for exemption from rent increases and must reapply each year thereafter. Once is not enough. It is understood, however, that should the landlord make a major improvement, a new furnace for example, all tenants must accept rent raises to pay for increased comfort. The elderly, poor tenant is not excluded from such a rent increase. Landlords receive tax exemptions as reimbursement for the money they lose in not increasing rent for the elderly. In New York City, the cost of these tax reductions is $41 million a year, a tremendous figure, but likely to be higher if more of the poor elderly learn they may apply for exemptions. The city is so slow in processing applications that some tenants have paid the full rent. They ought not to have done so. They are fully protected by the law and, once they have applied for exemption, they do not have to pay rent increases. I appeal to you to clarify this issue so that the elderly poor of our city may become aware of the housing benefits for which they qualify. Clara Torres Office of Housing for the Elderly 1. Tenants over 62 can apply for benefits at the Office of Housing for the Elderly. (A) poor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Choose the correct meaning of the underlined word. ○ ○ ○ (B) people over 62 ○ ○ (C) people who need aid 2. If you don’t get that furnace repaired before winter, we will freeze to death. (A) fire escape (B) heater (C) water container (D) staircase ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) people who need housing ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 31 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Since landlords get reimbursements, they shouldn’t complain about losing money. (A) bills ○ 3. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) increases ○ ○ (C) payments ○ ○ ○ ○ The elderly are not excluded from rent raises that all tenants have to pay when the landlord makes a major improvement. (A) obliged ○ 4. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) housing benefits ○ ○ (B) included ○ ○ (C) excited ○ ○ ○ ○ When their rent increased from $200 to $400 a month, they protested against such a tremendous increase. (A) light ○ 5. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) eliminated ○ ○ (B) difficult ○ ○ (C) huge ○ ○ ○ ○ Because the city is slow in processing applications, many of the elderly do not get housing benefits. (A) providing ○ 6. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) tiring ○ ○ (B) working on ○ ○ (C) raising ○ ○ ○ ○ The landlord notified his tenants that their rent would be increased the following month. (A) janitors ○ 7. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) trying ○ ○ (B) friends ○ ○ (C) occupants ○ ○ ○ ○ Reading a daily newspaper will make you aware of what is going on in the world. (A) knowledgeable ○ ○ (B) ignorant ○ ○ ○ (C) alike ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) dependent ○ 8. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) poor people ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 32 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 1 Answers 1. The correct answer is (B). 2. The correct answer is (B). 3. The correct answer is (C). 4. The correct answer is (D). 5. The correct answer is (C). 6. The correct answer is (B). 7. The correct answer is (C). 8. The correct answer is (A). Vocabulary Builder 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. It is inevitable that smoking will damage your health. (A) invading ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Try to get the meaning of the underlined word from its context in the following sentences. Choose the correct synonym. If you cannot figure it out, look the word up in your dictionary. ○ ○ (B) unhealthy ○ ○ (C) unavoidable 2. What you need after a hard week’s work is a little frivolity over the weekend. (A) luxury ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) intriguing ○ ○ ○ (B) harmony ○ ○ (C) fireworks 3. The general planned a new stratagem to conquer the rebel forces. (A) strafing ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) triviality ○ ○ (B) scheme ○ ○ (C) bomb 4. Only a quack would recommend a lettuce diet to an athlete. (A) charlatan (B) duck (C) coach ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) headquarters (D) doctor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 33 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The expression “out of the frying pan and into the fire” means to go from one dilemma to a worse one. (A) situation ○ 5. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) predicament ○ ○ (C) embarrassment ○ ○ He made one last futile effort to convince her and left the house. (A) difficult ○ 6. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) aura ○ ○ (B) favorable ○ ○ ○ (C) firm ○ ○ ○ After climbing to the zenith, he slowly worked his way down the mountain. (A) zero ○ 7. ○ ○ ○ (D) ineffectual ○ ○ (B) top ○ ○ (C) cabin ○ ○ ○ (D) mountain ○ ○ ○ A glib answer will not serve for a serious question. (A) gross ○ 8. ○ ○ (B) capable ○ ○ (C) facile ○ ○ Mary set off on her vacation with the intention of finding a tall, dark, handsome, debonair companion. ○ 9. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) ignorant ○ ○ (A) doleful ○ ○ (B) decent ○ ○ (C) urbane ○ 10. Ponce de Leon searched in vain for a means of rejuvenating the aged. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) mercenary ○ ○ (A) making young again ○ ○ (B) making weary again ○ ○ (C) making wealthy again ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) making merry again ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 34 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 2 Answers 1. The correct answer is (C). 2. The correct answer is (D). 3. The correct answer is (B). 4. The correct answer is (A). 5. The correct answer is (B). 6. The correct answer is (D). 7. The correct answer is (B). 8. The correct answer is (C). 9. The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Many English words are made up of a combination of word elements. A root is a word element, often taken from Latin or Greek, that serves as a base to which other elements are added to modify the root itself. A prefix is a word element placed at the beginning of a root, and a suffix is attached to the end of a root or word. Both prefixes and suffixes change the meaning of the root and form a new word. Recognizing and understanding word elements provide a valuable system of analyzing words, figuring out their meaning, and comparing them to find relationships with words you already know. Using this system, you will also be able to organize and learn words in groups rather than individually. Here are some common Latin and Greek prefixes. Study them and look up the meanings of the words you do not know in the Example column. Prefix Meaning Example ab, a away from abduct, amoral ad, ac, ag, at to advent, accrue, aggressive, attracts ante before antedated anti against antipathy bene well benefit circum around circumnavigate com, con, col together compliant, conducive, collate contra against contrary de from, down delete, descend dis, di apart disperse, dilate ex, e out exit, elicit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. The correct answer is (A). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 35 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Meaning Example extra beyond extracurricular hyper excessively hypertension, hyperactive in, im, il, ir, un no intrepid, impossible, illicit, irreparable, unlikely inter between intercultural intra, intro, in within intramural, introduction, inside mal bad malediction per through permeate peri around perimeter post after postoperative pre before precedence, predecessor pro forward, for propose, proponents re again review semi half semicolon sub under submarine super above supervisor trans across transport ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Prefix ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. The men had to __________ their canoe through the woods to the river’s edge. carry across ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Use the words in the Example column, above, to complete these sentences. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2. That sentence requires a(n) __________. half colon ○ ○ ○ 4. The law requires that there be a(n) _______ from the second floor apartment. way out ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3. His _______________ condition was excellent. after the operation ○ ○ ○ 6. Our new president is much more popular than his ___________________. one who came before ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5. Magellan ___________ the world. sailed around ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7. After the protest march, the crowd __________. split apart ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 36 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8. In the evolution of animals, plants ___________ insects. came before 9. We never agree; his opinions are always _______ to mine. against 10. There seems to be a natural _____________ between cats and dogs. feeling against 11. Workmen at the refinery find that the smell of oil ___________ their clothing. goes through 12. Students engage in many ____________________ activities. beyond the curriculum 13. The Greek and Turkish students had a(n) ____________ exchange. between two cultures 14. It is __________ for him to see you today. not possible 15. Living in a(n) _________________ is most confining. underwater vehicle 16. He got a job as a(n) ____________ in a dress manufacturing company. person above 17. The chairman of the board takes ____________ over the other board members. right to come before 18. The __________ of conservation protested against strip-mining. people for 19. Cutting your salt consumption will __________ your health. do well for 20. The professor has to ____________ his test papers. put together 21. Let’s ____________ our algebra for the exam tomorrow. go over again 22. The terrorists planned to __________ the American general. take away 23. Some students give more of their time to ______________ sports than to their assignments. within the school 24. What is the _______________ of this triangle? distance around ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 25. A magnet _____________ iron and its alloys. draws to itself ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 37 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The correct answer is semicolon. 3. The correct answer is postoperative. 4. The correct answer is exit. 5. The correct answer is circumnavigated. 6. The correct answer is predecessor. 7. The correct answer is dispersed. 8. The correct answer is antedated. 9. The correct answer is contrary. ○ ○ 2. ○ The correct answer is transport. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ Vocabulary Builder 3 Answers ○ ○ 10. The correct answer is antipathy. ○ ○ ○ 11. The correct answer is permeates. ○ ○ 12. The correct answer is extracurricular. ○ ○ 13. The correct answer is intercultural. ○ ○ ○ 14. The correct answer is impossible. ○ ○ 15. The correct answer is submarine. ○ ○ ○ 16. The correct answer is supervisor. ○ ○ 17. The correct answer is precedence. ○ ○ 18. The correct answer is proponents. ○ ○ ○ 19. The correct answer is benefit. ○ ○ 20. The correct answer is collate. ○ ○ 21. The correct answer is review. ○ ○ ○ 22. The correct answer is abduct. ○ ○ 23. The correct answer is intramural. ○ ○ ○ 24. The correct answer is perimeter. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 25. The correct answer is attracts. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 38 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Study these suffixes. Be sure that you understand what each of the words in the Example column means before you do the exercise. Suffix Meaning Example able, ible capable of being expendable, comprehendible al relating to traditional ance relating to alliance ary relating to aviary ation action provocation cy quality potency ence relating to complacence er one who worker fy make beautify ic pertaining to atmospheric ious full of gracious ist person who practices psychiatrist ity condition complexity ize to make like stabilize less without penniless ment result, state contentment Vocabulary Builder 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. A person with no money is _______________. 2. Something that is potent has _______________. 3. The state of being content is called _______________. 4. Something capable of being comprehended is _______________. 5. A person full of grace is _______________. 6. A celebration that has become a tradition is considered _______________. 7. Two countries that are allied form a(n) _______________. 8. The area where birds (avi) are kept is called a(n) _______________. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: From the Example column above, choose a word that best fits the following definitions. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 39 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Something capable of being expended is considered _______________. ○ ○ ○ ○ 11. A person who practices psychiatry is a(n) _______________. ○ ○ 10. When weather forecasters talk about the pressure of the atmosphere, they refer to _______________ pressure. ○ ○ 9. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 16. A complacent person is noted for his or her _______________. ○ ○ 15. When you make something stable, you _______________ it. ○ ○ 14. When someone provokes you, we can say he or she has given you ________. ○ ○ ○ 13. If something is described as complex, we can say it has _______________. ○ ○ ○ ○ 12. Someone who works is a(n) _______________. ○ ○ ○ 17. To make a house beautiful is to _______________ it. 2. The correct answer is potency. 3. The correct answer is contentment. 4. The correct answer is comprehendible. 5. The correct answer is gracious. 6. The correct answer is traditional. 7. The correct answer is alliance. 8. The correct answer is aviary. 9. The correct answer is expendable. ○ ○ The correct answer is penniless. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ Vocabulary Builder 4 Answers ○ ○ 10. The correct answer is atmospheric. ○ ○ 11. The correct answer is psychiatrist. ○ ○ ○ 12. The correct answer is worker. ○ ○ 13. The correct answer is complexity. ○ ○ ○ 14. The correct answer is provocation. ○ ○ 15. The correct answer is stabilize. ○ ○ 16. The correct answer is complacence. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 17. The correct answer is beautify. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 40 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. Someone who employs others is a(n) _______________. 2. A person who favors conservation is a(n) _______________. 3. The condition of being sane is _______________. 4. Something giving comfort is _______________. 5. Something full of infection is _______________. 6. The result of adjusting is _______________. 7. A person without sense is _______________. 8. A person with ideals is a(n) _______________. We can say he or she is _______________. 9. A lenient judge is noted for his _______________. 10. To commit something to memory is to _______________ it. 11. A turbulent sea is characterized by its _______________. 12. To excite intensely as if by an electric shock is to _______________ another person. Vocabulary Builder 5 Answers 1. The correct answer is employer. 2. The correct answer is conservationist. 3. The correct answer is sanity. 4. The correct answer is comfortable. 5. The correct answer is infectious. 6. The correct answer is adjustment. 7. The correct answer is senseless. 8. The correct answer is idealist/idealistic. 9. The correct answer is leniency. 10. The correct answer is memorize. 11. The correct answer is turbulence. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: See if you can use the suffixes given in the previous exercise to form new words. When you have finished, check your dictionary to make sure you spelled all the words correctly. 12. The correct answer is electrify. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 41 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Here are ten groups of words that are frequently confused and misused. Look at the definitions; then fill in the correct word in the sentences. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 6 ○ adapt, adopt ○ 1. ○ ○ Adapt means to adjust. ○ ○ (B) It is difficult to _______________ to a new environment. ○ ○ (A) The committee decided to _______________ the new regulations. ○ ○ ○ Adopt means to take by choice. ○ adverse, averse ○ 2. ○ ○ Adverse means acting against. ○ (A) The jury made an _______________ decision, so he was hanged. ○ ○ ○ Averse means having a strong dislike. ○ ○ (B) An anorexic is _______________ to food. ○ ○ allusion, delusion, illusion ○ ○ Allusion means an implied or indirect reference. ○ ○ Delusion means a false belief. ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) A good painter can give you the _______________ of broad space in his works. ○ ○ (B) I am not familiar enough with mythology to understand all the _______________ s to it in this poem. ○ (A) That poor man is under the _______________ that he is the president. ○ ○ ○ Illusion means an unreal image. ○ 3. ○ complement, compliment ○ 4. ○ ○ Complement means to complete or make perfect. ○ ○ council, counsel ○ ○ Council means an elected group to make decisions. ○ ○ (B) The group was famous for its good _______________. ○ (A) The _______________ advised the president to raise taxes. ○ ○ Counsel means advice. ○ 5. ○ ○ (B) They are just the right flowers to _______________ the table setting. ○ ○ (A) I must _______________ you on your choice of flowers for the party. ○ ○ ○ Compliment means to praise. ○ ○ elicit, illicit ○ ○ Elicit means to draw out. ○ (A) The detective attempted to _______________ information about the ○ ○ ○ Illicit means against a law or rule. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) _______________ drug ring. ○ 6. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 42 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7. explicit, implicit Explicit means clear and fully expressed. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Implicit means meant though not plainly expressed. ○ ○ (A) The manual gives ___________ instructions on how to repair a bicycle. 8. ingenious, ingenuous ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) There was definitely an ___________ threat in the way he glared at her. ○ ○ Ingenious means clever at inventing things. ○ ○ Ingenuous means simple, naive, and inexperienced. ○ ○ (A) An _______________ high school student invented a video game. 9. infer, imply ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) Katy is so _______________ she will believe anything you tell her. ○ ○ Infer means to draw the meaning from. ○ ○ Imply means to suggest. ○ ○ (A) I _______________ from what you just said that the engagement is over. 10. immigrate, emigrate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) Did you mean to _______________ that you don’t love me anymore? ○ ○ Immigrate means to come into a country to make one’s home there. ○ ○ Emigrate means to leave one’s country to go and live in another. ○ ○ ○ (A) Many venturesome people _______________ from England to Australia. Vocabulary Builder 6 Answers 1. A. adopt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) If you _______________ to this country, you will have to learn the language. 2. A. adverse ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ B. adapt 3. A. delusion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ B. averse ○ ○ ○ B. allusion 4. A. compliment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ C. illusion 5. A. council B. counsel ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ B. complement ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 43 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ A. elicit ○ 6. ○ A. explicit ○ 7. ○ ○ ○ B. illicit ○ ○ ○ B. implicit ○ A. ingenious ○ 8. ○ ○ ○ B. ingenuous ○ A. infer ○ 9. ○ ○ ○ B. imply ○ ○ 10. A. emigrate ○ ○ ○ B. immigrate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Write the word next to the definition. Your answers are words used in this chapter. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 7 A one-room apartment ______________________________ 2. Occupant of a building ______________________________ 3. Advanced in years ______________________________ 4. Repayment ______________________________ 5. Machine for heating a building ______________________________ 6. Hint ______________________________ 7. A clever trick to obtain an end ______________________________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. The correct answer is studio. 2. The correct answer is tenant. 3. The correct answer is elderly. 4. The correct answer is reimbursement. 5. The correct answer is furnace. 6. The correct answer is imply. 7. The correct answer is stratagem. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 7 Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 44 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ When a word has more than one meaning, the dictionary will number each separate definition; the first meaning given is usually the most common use of the word. When looking up a word in the dictionary, you should know which definition provides the meaning of the word as it is used in the particular context. Vocabulary Builder 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. (1) on the surface; not deep ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Choose the appropriate definitions for the underlined words. Write the number in the space provided. ○ ○ (2) not serious; not complete ○ ○ ____ The article gave a superficial analysis of the country’s economic woes. 2. (1) working very well; sharp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ____ The parachutist was treated for superficial cuts and bruises. ○ ○ (2) severe; strong ○ ○ ____ She suffered from acute back pain after the accident. 3. (1) thoroughly planned ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ____ Most animals have an acute sense of smell. ○ ○ (2) intentional; on purpose ○ ○ ____ It was an accident; she didn’t break the vase deliberately. 4. (1) merciful in judgment (2) allowing less than the highest standards ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ____ The President is taking deliberate steps to balance the federal budget. ○ ○ ○ ○ ____ Some people felt that the jury was too lenient with the man who shot the senator. 5. (1) concerning people who have a close relationship ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ____ It is believed that lenient teachers produce mediocre students. ○ ○ (2) personal; private ○ ○ ____ The two women are intimate friends. 6. (1) to become or make strong (2) to combine into fewer or one ____ The two major labor unions consolidated to form one large powerful union. ____ The United States is attempting to consolidate its position in the Caribbean. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ____ They share even their most intimate thoughts. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 45 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (1) to eat or drink ○ ○ (2) to use up ○ ○ (3) to destroy ○ ○ ____ Typing his boss’s correspondence consumed most of the secretary’s time. ○ ____ The tennis player contracted hepatitis after consuming tainted fish. ○ ○ ○ ____ The entire apartment was consumed by fire. ○ 7. ○ (1) a particular government ○ 8. ○ ○ ____ The nation is sure to prosper under the new regime. ○ ○ ____ After following a strict regime, the injured gymnast returned to competition. ○ ○ ○ (2) a plan to improve one’s health ○ (1) causing a feeling of pity ○ 9. ○ ____ The supervisor is so pathetic that his entire staff is threatening to resign. ○ ○ ○ (2) worthless; unsuccessful ○ ○ ○ ____ We were awakened by the kitten’s pathetic cries. ○ ○ 10. (1) to cause to have no effect ○ ○ (2) to disprove; deny ○ ○ ○ ____ The governor issued a statement in an attempt to negate the accusations against him. ○ ○ ○ ____ Thermal insulation negates the effect of the cold. The correct answer is 2/1. 2. The correct answer is 2/1. 3. The correct answer is 2/1. 4. The correct answer is 1/2. 5. The correct answer is 1/2. 6. The correct answer is 2/1. 7. The correct answer is 3/1/2. 8. The correct answer is 2/1. 9. The correct answer is 2/1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 8 Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. The correct answer is 1/2. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 46 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 9 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ NOTE 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Select the one word from the choices given that best completes each of these sentences. Write it in the space provided. ○ (B) nonchalant ○ A rule for the nega- The dying man’s speech was so _______________ that no one was able to interpret his last request. (A) indiscreet ○ (C) incoherent ○ m, or p; ir before r; ○ 2. ○ ○ Due to many years of _______________, the Smiths had nothing to fall back on when it was time for them to retire. (A) illiteracy ○ ○ ○ (B) impunity ○ ○ (C) inflexibility 3. Certain pessimists feel that a nuclear war in our time is _______________. (A) inevitable ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) imprudence ○ ○ (B) illicit ○ ○ (C) disconcerting 4. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) impossible The personnel manager could not even consider her for the position because of her _______________ appearance. (A) inept ○ ○ (B) inflexible ○ ○ (C) unkempt 5. We received the _______________ news today that there would be no raises this year. (A) disreputable (B) uncanny (C) incongruous (D) disconcerting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) disheartened ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ other letters. ○ ○ and in or un before (D) impotent ○ before l; im before b, ○ ○ tive prefixes is il www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 47 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ It was truly miraculous that the child was _______________ after falling six stories. (A) unscathed ○ 6. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) uncanny ○ ○ (C) irreparable ○ ○ Modern architecture often seems _______________ in a city rich in history. (A) unlikely ○ 7. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) illiterate ○ ○ (B) unwitting ○ ○ ○ (C) incongruous ○ ○ ○ ○ Serpico is known for his _______________ efforts to expose fellow police officers who accepted bribes. (A) incalculable ○ 8. ○ ○ ○ (D) unkempt ○ ○ (B) inexorable ○ ○ (C) unwieldy ○ ○ ○ ○ Barbara’s parents received a report from her teacher that said, “Barbara is an excellent student, but she talks to her friends _______________ during class.” (A) ineptly ○ 9. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) illicit ○ ○ (B) incoherently ○ ○ (C) unerringly ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. A civil war pits brother against brother and causes _______________ harm to a nation’s morale. (A) uncompromising ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) incessantly ○ ○ (B) incalculable ○ ○ (C) invariable ○ ○ ○ (D) infallible The correct answer is (C). 2. The correct answer is (D). 3. The correct answer is (A). 4. The correct answer is (C). 5. The correct answer is (D). 6. The correct answer is (A). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 9 Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 48 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7. The correct answer is (C). 8. The correct answer is (B). 9. The correct answer is (D). 10. The correct answer is (B). Vocabulary Builder 10 Directions: Write the number of the word in Column B that has the same meaning as the word in Column A. Put the number on the line provided. A B _____ a. sure 1. inexorable _____ b. unable to do things 2. imprudent _____ c. unharmed 3. incoherent _____ d. inflexible 4. incongruous _____ e. unwise, not careful 5. disreputable _____ f. forbidden 6. infallible _____ g. disjointed, garbled 7. incessant _____ h. not neat 8. illiterate _____ i. very great 9. incalculable _____ j. of bad character 10. disconcerted _____ k. unable to read and write 11. illicit _____ l. inappropriate 12. inept _____ m. constant 13. unscathed _____ n. upset 14. inevitable _____ o. unavoidable 15. unkempt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 49 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The correct answer is 6. b. The correct answer is 12. c. The correct answer is 13. d. The correct answer is 1. e. The correct answer is 2. f. The correct answer is 11. g. The correct answer is 3. h. The correct answer is 15. i. The correct answer is 9. j. The correct answer is 5. k. The correct answer is 8. l. The correct answer is 4. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ a. ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 10 Answers The correct answer is 10. o. The correct answer is 14. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ n. ○ ○ ○ m. The correct answer is 7. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 50 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ EXERCISES: ANTONYMS Directions: Choose the word among the four alternatives that is the opposite (antonym) of the underlined word. 1. I ate lunch with a most convivial group of my friends. 6. The convicted robber hoped the judge would give him a lenient sentence. (A) lively (A) easy (B) large (B) unmerciful (C) unsociable (C) acute (D) old (D) frightening 2. I prefer muted colors in my living room. (A) changeable (A) large and brightly lit (C) dull (B) quiet (D) mauve (C) noisy ○ ○ 3. She came for Christmas laden with gifts for everyone. (D) dark 8. As he lay dying, his speech was incoherent. (A) later (A) inaudible (B) provided (B) organized (C) unloaded (C) interesting (D) lifted (D) indecent 4. She had a cozy little apartment in Boston. (A) uncomfortable (B) dirty (C) lazy (D) warm (A) superior (B) deep (C) attractive ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5. She was a very superficial person with a large group of frivolous friends. (D) horrible (A) discreet (B) uncanny (D) neat 10. His career in the illicit drug trade ended with the police raid this morning. (A) irregular (B) legal (C) elicited ○ ○ ○ 9. If you want to make a good impression on my father, you will have to be less unkempt than you are now. (C) literate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7. Hector takes his dates to intimate restaurants where there is candlelight. (B) bright ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) secret ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 51 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14. I cannot stand professors who think they are infallible. ○ (A) imperfect (B) inexorable (B) activating (C) inept (C) refreshing (D) inflexible (B) able to enjoy intramural sports ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) indiscreetly ○ ○ (B) inevitably (C) seldom ○ (A) able to read and write 15. My brother-in-law talks incessantly. ○ 12. A frightening number of illiterate students are graduating from college. (D) sensibly ○ (D) debilitating ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) pleasing ○ ○ 11. Having planned our weekends to watch football, we found the news of the players’ strike most disconcerting. ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) unable to pass an examination in reading and writing ○ ○ (D) inflexible ○ ○ ○ ○ 13. John was so insubordinate that he lost his job within a week. ○ ○ (A) fresh ○ ○ (B) understanding ○ ○ (C) indiscreet ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) obedient exercises ○ ○ ○ ○ 52 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ EXERCISES: MEANING FROM CONTEXT Directions: Select a word from the list below that best completes the following sentences. compete vast chagrin affluent innovation lucrative amenities rejuvenated apathy stereotype 1. The use of audiovisual materials in foreign language teaching was one of the most important __________s in recent years. 2. __________ Middle Easterners have been buying some of England’s ancient estates. 3. Wearing his ten-gallon hat, the Texan has become the __________ of the American Westerner. 4. Doing volunteer work at the hospital is not a very __________ pastime. 5. You have made a(n) __________ improvement in your handwriting since you took that calligraphy course. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com 6. In order to __________ in today’s market, we are going to lower our prices. 7. Mrs. Golightly had cosmetic surgery and appears much __________. 8. Imagine his __________ when he discovered he had forgotten to pay his electric bill and the company turned off his power. 9. The automatic washing machine is one of the __________ without which I cannot live. 10. Many a crime has gone unpunished because of the __________ of bystanders. Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 53 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ EXERCISES: SYNONYMS ○ ○ ○ ○ 6. The doctor warned her that adequate diet was of paramount importance in effecting a cure. (A) moving (B) poverty (B) chief (C) embarrassment (C) healing (D) challenge (D) saving (B) stand together (D) hard (C) work together ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) salespeople (D) test (D) contact ○ ○ ○ (C) inner part ○ (B) customers ○ (B) change ○ (A) clinic (A) conveniences (C) delay (B) friends (D) register (C) expenses ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) compare ○ ○ (A) contend 9. I’d rather stay in a hotel with all the amenities than camp in the woods. ○ 4. She plans to compete in the marathon. ○ ○ (A) entrance ○ 8. Peter advised his clientele that he would be on vacation for the month of January. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) get together ○ 3. Dr. Jones suggested that final examinations be discontinued, an innovation I heartily support. ○ ○ (C) varying ○ (A) put together ○ (B) huge ○ (A) very 7. Occasionally, the most unlikely people manage to collaborate successfully. ○ 2. The space shuttle covered vast distances. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) anger ○ ○ 1. She was overcome by chagrin at the checkout counter when she discovered she had left her wallet at home. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Choose the best synonym for the underlined word. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) scoff (C) large (B) save (D) expensive (C) yield ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) showy ○ ○ 10. The night before this exam I tried not to succumb to sleep. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) try ○ (A) ossified (D) sports ○ 5. His new yacht is certainly an ostentacious display of his wealth. exercises ○ ○ ○ ○ 54 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 11. He inherited a lucrative business from his father. 16. Although he knew she had work to do, he tried to entice her to go to the beach. (A) lucid (A) trace (B) wealthy (B) enervate (C) losing (C) tempt (D) profitable (D) thrice 12. Apathy toward his studies prevented his graduation. (A) indirection (A) destitute (C) indecision (B) arrogant (D) indication (C) wealthy (A) slimmed again (C) made young again (B) fixed conception (D) made comfortable again (C) disagreeable type ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 18. A domineering husband, he is the stereotype of a male chauvinist. (A) musician 14. Her early skill with numbers was indicative of a genius in mathematics. ○ ○ (D) afraid (B) subjugated again ○ ○ ○ 13. Her large weight loss has rejuvenated her. (A) giving direction (D) opposite 19. The senator formerly supported the president’s budget plans ardently. (B) giving indication (A) expertly (C) giving assistance (B) zealously (D) giving approval (C) arduously 15. Do you think your question is pertinent to the matter we are discussing? (A) perceptive (D) entirely 20. The hurricane caused great havoc in the islands. (B) appropriate (A) winds (C) discriminating (B) treatment (D) apparent (C) destruction (D) immersion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 17. Having spent all my money on tuition, I am not affluent enough even to go to the movies. (B) indifference ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 55 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Down Powerful 1. Suffix meaning after 5. Adjust 2. Very bad 10. Eager 3. Make longer, increase 14. Prefix meaning out 4. Prefix meaning three 15. Praise 5. Severe 17. Either/_____ 6. Auxiliary verb 18. Synonym for kind, type 7. Neither moral nor immoral 20. Prefix meaning nine 8. Afternoon 21. Suffix meaning person who 9. Deca ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ Across ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: This crossword puzzle is a review of the vocabulary used in this chapter. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ EXERCISES: PUTTING IT TOGETHER ○ 10. Acting against 11. Musical piece for two 23. Neuter pronoun 12. Antonym of yes 24. Abbrev. for Rhode Island 13. Speaking three languages 26. Camper’s “house” 16. Someone illiterate is _____ literate. 27. Abbreviation for place 19. Exclamation 28. Prefix meaning not 23. Negative prefix used with coherent 29. Cause to have no effect 25. _____ rained last night. 32. Prefix meaning three 27. Prefix meaning for ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 22. Triplets ○ ○ does something exercises ○ ○ ○ ○ 56 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Down 33. Abbreviation for small bedroom 30. Alcoholic drink 35. Prefix meaning not 31. _____tire, whole 36. Negatives 32. Rise and fall of the sea 38. Fierce animal 33. Condition of being sane 39. Preposition: _____ Monday 34. Abbreviation for mister 40. Abbreviation for advertisement 37. Opposite of subtle 41. Very poor 38. Loaded 45. Exist 39. Full of oil 46. Prefix meaning from 42. Latin for and 47. Neuter pronoun 43. First word in letter salutation 48. Work together 44. Ruin, destruction 52. Advanced degree 45. Employer 53. Delicious 48. Eat or drink 54. Huge 49. See 17 across 55. Article 50. Antonym of front 56. Abbreviation for elevation 51. Spoil 57. Possessive adjective 52. British spelling of meters 58. Slang for doctors 53. Prefix meaning above 59. Prefix meaning two 58. Someone who does things 60. Preposition: _____ home 59. Another definition for 29 across 61. _____ soon _____ possible 60. Suffix meaning relating to 62. Foot covering 62. Hurt your toe 63. Decade 63. _____ the truth 64. Abbreviation for near 65. Antonym of lose 65. Troubles 66. Use the eyes 67. Tempt 68. Preposition: _____ January 69. Pay back 70. Abbreviation for Social Security 72. Adverb suffix 71. Abbreviation for extra-terrestrial 73. Where a bird lives 74. Someone who is penniless has _____ money 75. Abbreviation for street ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Across ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 57 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ANSWER KEY C 6. B 11. A 2. B 7. A 12. A 3. C 8. B 13. D 4. A 9. D 14. A 5. B 10. B 15. C ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Antonyms innovation 6. compete 2. Affluent 7. rejuvenated 3. stereotype 8. chagrin 4. lucrative 9. amenities 5. vast 10. apathy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Meaning from Context C 8. B 15. B 2. B 9. A 16. C 3. B 10. C 17. C 4. A 11. D 18. B 5. B 12. B 19. B 6. B 13. C 20. C 7. C 14. B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Synonyms answers ○ ○ ○ ○ 58 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Putting It Together ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Words in Context ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 59 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ • Every time you read, practice looking for contextual clues. ○ ○ • Try to understand the definition and apply it to the word in context. ○ ○ ○ be close to it. ○ • If you come across an unusual word, the definition of the word may ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ SUMMING IT UP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ • Strategies for learning related words • How thoughts are related • Summing it up STRATEGIES FOR LEARNING RELATED WORDS Learning vocabulary in sets of words that are related to each other makes it easier for you to learn the words. It makes your study more structured than learning words in a random way. It also gives you a clue to the meaning of an unknown word. For example, when you see the term “check out” under the subject “library,” you will realize it is something you do when you are in a library. • You should make lists of words that are related to one subject to help you remember them. Keep adding to the list as you learn another word that’s related to that area. • Use a technique that will help you remember the words. You may memorize them or use visual or other clues to help you remember. • Words related to people and places are tested in the short dialogues and also appear in the longer conversations in the Listening Comprehension section of the TOEFL. • In the TOEFL short dialogues, you should listen for the word that will be a clue to either the person’s occupation or the location. HOW THOUGHTS ARE RELATED In addition to providing you with a thorough review, this section of readings will concentrate on thought relations within sentences, paragraphs, and longer passages. It is important to be able to recognize and understand signal words or connectives, which introduce, connect, order, and relate individual ideas to larger and often more general concepts. 61 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ chapter 4 OVERVIEW ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 62 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Study these connectives, paying close attention to their function. Connectives Function and, also, as well as, besides, finally, furthermore, in addition to, in conclusion, moreover more information will follow examples, for example, kinds, types, sorts, ordinal numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.), others, several, some, such as, the following, ways examples will follow even if, however, in spite of, instead of, nevertheless, on the other hand, rather, still, yet, despite an opposite idea will follow all but, except exceptions will follow as a result of, because, due to, in order to, on account of, since cause as a consequence, as a result, consequently, so, so as to, so that, therefore effect after, as soon as, before, if, provided that, should, while, without, unless, until, following conditions to be met as, before. . .after, like some. . .other, than, once. . .now comparison Look at the following example. Note that the connectives are underlined and the ideas connected are circled. Can you determine the function of each connective? If necessary, refer back to the table. Mr. Green had sent his secretary to pick up his car, which he had taken to the garage in order to have the brakes repaired. While returning with Mr. Green’s car, the secretary, driving on Main Street, entered the intersection at Elm after the light changed from green to red. She sounded her horn but nevertheless collided with a car that had entered the intersection from Elm Street after the light had turned green. As you read the following passage, underline the signal words and circle the related ideas. Then give the function of each. When a death occurs, the family has religious, social, and legal responsibilities. If the deceased has left an explicit set of papers in an accessible file, arrangements will be much easier for the family to make. For example, such papers should include the deed for a burial plot (if there is one), a statement as to whether cremation or burial is desired, a copy of the birth certificate, and the names and addresses of all family members and friends who should be notified. Furthermore, the papers should include information on bank accounts, safe deposit boxes, and insurance policies, as well as the will. The person in charge of the funeral will need ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 63 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ to know how much money is available in order to determine the expenses he or she may reasonably incur for the family. If feasible, the person who makes the funeral arrangements should not be one of the bereaved. A melancholy widow may not be able to make objective decisions regarding expenses, such as for a coffin. Whoever makes the funeral arrangements realizes that he or she is deputized to make legally binding contracts with a funeral director and others, which will probably be honored some months later when funds from the estate are released. One of the duties of the person in charge of the funeral is to prepare a death notice for the newspapers. Often the mortician arranges for the insertion of the notice. Included in the information should be the date of death, the names of the family members, and the time and place of the forthcoming interment. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Choose the correct synonym for the following underlined words. ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 1 ○ ○ ○ The deceased left you all of her jewelry. (A) missing person ○ 1. ○ ○ (B) dead person ○ ○ (C) wealthy person ○ ○ ○ (D) relative ○ ○ ○ She left explicit instructions regarding her burial. (A) vague ○ 2. ○ ○ (B) exciting ○ ○ (C) irregular ○ ○ Because the information was easily accessible, we found it immediately. (A) acceptable ○ 3. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) clear ○ ○ (B) accessory ○ ○ ○ (C) reachable ○ ○ ○ Property deeds belong in a safe-deposit box. (A) actions ○ ○ ○ (B) legal papers ○ ○ (C) wills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) addresses ○ 4. ○ ○ ○ (D) probable ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 64 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5. He was careful not to incur too many bills for the widow to pay. (A) inquire ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) pay ○ ○ (C) acquire 6. A funeral is a melancholy event. (A) meaningful ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) change ○ ○ (B) medical ○ ○ (C) expensive 7. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) sorrowful The family deputized a close friend to make the funeral arrangements. (A) disputed ○ ○ (B) deprived ○ ○ (C) delegated 8. The funeral director gave the death notice to the local newspaper. (A) obituary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) dispatched ○ ○ (B) funeral ○ ○ (C) burial 9. The undertaker waited three months after the funeral for his bill to be paid. (A) tax collector (B) beginner (C) mortician (D) priest 10. In tropical countries, the interment takes place within 24 hours of a death. (A) intermittent (B) burial (C) mourning period (D) interruption ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) biography ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 65 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2. The correct answer is (D). 3. The correct answer is (C). 4. The correct answer is (B). 5. The correct answer is (C). 6. The correct answer is (D). 7. The correct answer is (C). 8. The correct answer is (A). 9. The correct answer is (C). ○ The correct answer is (B). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 1 Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The Central Park Conservancy raised $39,000 in private donations to employ twenty-five high school students from the New York area. With commendable zeal, the participants are embellishing the park, as well as weeding and cleaning unkempt areas. Although their employment is merely interim work over the summer, the youths share an affinity for horticulture. Collaboration with the Conservancy only whets their appetites for further endeavors with nature and ecology. ○ ○ Now try to find the signal words and their functions in the following paragraph. ○ ○ ○ 10. The correct answer is (B). ○ ○ ○ ○ John and Mary _______________ on all their books; she writes the text and he does the artwork. (A) study ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Choose the word that best completes the sentence. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 2 ○ ○ (B) collaborate ○ ○ (C) discuss ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ His efforts to keep the peace were so _______________ that he was awarded the Nobel Peace Prize. (A) lucrative ○ ○ (B) mercenary ○ ○ (C) commendable ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) heavy ○ 2. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) divide ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 66 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3. They worked from dawn to dusk with such _______________ that they were exhausted. (A) boredom ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) detraction ○ ○ (C) debility 4. Before they sold their house, they spent two months _______________ it. (A) trying ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) zeal ○ ○ (B) embellishing ○ ○ ○ (C) sifting 5. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) planting The _______________ in the program were high school students. (A) donations ○ ○ (B) endeavors ○ ○ (C) gardens 6. In the _______________ between shows, the actress went to Paris. (A) rush ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) participants ○ ○ (B) closing ○ ○ (C) interim 7. He felt such a close ____________ for animals that he became a veterinarian. (A) distaste ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) practice ○ ○ (B) affinity ○ ○ (C) approach 8. A bite of chocolate cake only _______________ my desire for more. (A) spares ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) likeness ○ ○ (B) lets ○ ○ ○ (C) changes ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) whets 9. Working in the park stimulates his interest in _______________. (A) archaeology (B) horticulture (C) zoology ○ ○ ○ (D) biology ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 67 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. We’ll have to clean up this _______________ yard before the guests arrive. (A) tired ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) unlikely ○ ○ (C) undone ○ ○ ○ (D) unkempt The correct answer is (B). 2. The correct answer is (C). 3. The correct answer is (D). 4. The correct answer is (B). 5. The correct answer is (D). 6. The correct answer is (C). 7. The correct answer is (B). 8. The correct answer is (D). 9. The correct answer is (B). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 2 Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Divorce settlements attempt to make an equitable distribution of a couple’s assets. Wrangles are common over who gets the car, the furniture, or the dog, but people overlook future needs and income. Two important issues will have to be decided by the courts. Can the divorced wife continue to have health coverage under her former husband’s policy? Is the divorced wife entitled to a share of her ex-husband’s pension? So far the subject of health insurance has created much dissension. Most insurance companies exclude former wives from their definition of a worker’s dependents. In order to circumvent his ex-wife’s exclusion from his health plan, many a husband has concealed his divorce from his employer. Divorced spouses of military men anticipate that a newly approved bill will allow them 180 days’ medical coverage and continued coverage for serious ailments if they were married for at least 20 years during their husbands’ service career. Ex-wives are faring better in the pension-sharing dilemma than they are in obtaining health coverage. The courts have set a precedent in awarding pension funds to divorced women, particularly if there are defaults in alimony and childsupport payments. Nevertheless, the Employee Retirement Income Security Act prohibits the payment of a pension to anyone other than the worker. Litigation of ex-wives seeking a share in their former husbands’ pensions contends that the ○ ○ Before you do the vocabulary builder that follows the reading, locate all the signal words and determine their functions. You will probably find that this will help you achieve a better understanding of the information included here. ○ ○ ○ Here is a longer passage. Look at the first sentence. Can you guess what the article is about? ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 68 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ERISA was passed for the purpose of protecting workers from creditors’ attempts to attach pensions, not from their ex-wives. In a recent decision, the Supreme Court gave exclusive pension rights to the military retiree whose retirement plan is not under the jurisdiction of state property laws. On the other hand, the former wives of retired foreign service personnel are legally entitled to a share of these retirees’ pensions in proportion to the length of their marriage. Obviously, there is no panacea for the ills besetting the legal system. Divorced women can only pray for significant benefits from future legislation. Vocabulary Builder 3 Directions: In this exercise, put the number of the synonym in Column B beside the word in Column A. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ B _____ a. equitable 1. illness _____ b. assets 2. example _____ c. wrangle 3. cure _____ d. ailment 4. quarrel _____ e. fare 5. succeed _____ f. dilemma 6. impartial _____ g. precedent 7. property _____ h. default 8. fail _____ i. panacea 9. predicament Answers a. The correct answer is 6. b. The correct answer is 7. c. The correct answer is 4. d. The correct answer is 1. e. The correct answer is 5. f. The correct answer is 9. g. The correct answer is 2. h. The correct answer is 8. i. The correct answer is 3. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 69 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ In this group of words, the noun is formed by adding ion to the verb. Note the spelling change in some of them. ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 4 ○ Noun anticipation celebrate celebration circumvent circumvention direct direction donate donation exhilarate exhilaration insert insertion intimidate intimidation legislate legislation litigate litigation object objection participate participation select selection Recent _______________ has raised taxes on luxury items. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ If there are any words that you do not understand from the list above, look them up in your dictionary. Then, select the word from the four choices that best completes the sentence. Write the correct form in the space provided. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ anticipate ○ ○ Verb legislate donate ○ celebrate direct object anticipate ○ ○ ○ Unless a will is written clearly, _______________ among family members may be inevitable. ○ 3. ○ ○ insert ○ Half the enjoyment of a vacation is the _______________ of it. ○ 2. ○ ○ object celebrate select ○ litigate circumvent ○ participate object Americans _______________ the Fourth of July with a bang. ○ 5. ○ ○ intimidate ○ I hope you don’t _______________ to my smoking. ○ 4. ○ ○ legislate direct legislate ○ celebrate We were surprised by the _______________ of candidates for the legislature. ○ 6. ○ ○ ○ donate direct select ○ anticipate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ circumvent ○ participate ○ anticipate ○ object ○ The police department _______________ trouble at the antinuclear demonstration this afternoon. ○ 7. ○ ○ ○ insert ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 70 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8. It is difficult to _______________ additional material in a manuscript once it has been prepared for the printer. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ direct donate celebrate 9. He gave a generous _______________ to the public television station. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ insert celebrate participate direct 10. Thousands of runners _______________ in the annual Boston Marathon. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ donate exhilarate intimidate participate Vocabulary Builder 4 Answers 1. The correct answer is legislation. 2. The correct answer is anticipation. 3. The correct answer is litigation. 4. The correct answer is object. 5. The correct answer is celebrate. 6. The correct answer is selection. 7. The correct answer is anticipates. 8. The correct answer is insert. 9. The correct answer is donation. 10. The correct answer is participate. Vocabulary Builder 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ celebrate 1. Tom insisted upon a fair share of the partnership’s profits. (A) spare ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Choose the correct synonym for the underlined word in the following sentences. Use your dictionary if you need to. ○ ○ (B) division ○ ○ (C) merit 2. The president held a brief press conference. (A) documented (B) long (C) pleasant (D) short ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) help ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 71 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ In spite of his rude behavior on the tennis court, John has many ardent admirers. (A) arduous ○ 3. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) eager ○ ○ (C) wild ○ ○ ○ (D) fabulous ○ ○ ○ An affable response frequently turns away wrath. (A) pleasant ○ 4. ○ ○ (B) loud ○ ○ ○ (C) polite ○ ○ ○ It is extremely hazardous to try to break up a fierce dog fight. (A) cross ○ 5. ○ ○ ○ (D) angry ○ ○ (B) ravenous ○ ○ (C) noisy ○ ○ ○ (D) violent ○ ○ ○ Superstition may easily lead you astray. (A) irrational belief ○ 6. ○ ○ (B) succession ○ ○ (C) logic ○ ○ ○ ○ Queen Victoria’s palatial country home draws many visitors to the Isle of Wight. (A) palatine ○ 7. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) misdirection ○ ○ (B) paltry ○ ○ (C) palace-like ○ ○ ○ (D) partial ○ ○ The little boy certainly has distinguished godparents. ○ ○ (A) mother and father ○ ○ (B) sponsors at the baptism ○ ○ (C) religious supporters ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) loving relatives ○ 8. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 72 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 9. The principal threatened to expel him from school if he didn’t behave better. (A) excise ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) exert ○ ○ (C) send out 10. He sang the hymn to the accompaniment of the church choir. (A) voices ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) try out ○ ○ (B) support ○ ○ (C) meter Vocabulary Builder 5 Answers 1. The correct answer is (B). 2. The correct answer is (D). 3. The correct answer is (B). 4. The correct answer is (A). 5. The correct answer is (D). 6. The correct answer is (A). 7. The correct answer is (C). 8. The correct answer is (B). 9. The correct answer is (C). 10. The correct answer is (B). Vocabulary Builder 6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) music 1. The spy was hanged for ________________ with the enemy. working together 2. I spend my weekends at my beach house, far from the noise and _______________ of the big city. overcrowding 3. The defense attorney could not find a witness whose version of the incident ________ with that of the accused. agreed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Now use the vocabulary words to complete these sentences. Be sure to use the correct form. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 73 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The children are making so much noise that I can’t ___________________ on my work. give complete attention 6. Reading is an essential __________ of any language course. part 7. How did you ever come up with that unappetizing ___________? mixture 8. The priest promised to __________ evil and help those in need. fight 9. If only we had made sure that we were truly ____________________ before we made our nuptial vows! able to live together ○ 5. ○ Certain drugs have been blamed for _______________ defects and should not be prescribed for pregnant women. before birth ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 15. Only my older sister knows my secrets; she and I have _______________ in each other since we were children. talked freely ○ ○ ○ 14. Thousands of athletes from around the world ___________ in the Olympic Games. try to win ○ ○ 13. White wine is a _____________________ to a good seafood dinner. something that completes ○ ○ ○ 12. If he is serious about a career in journalism, he ought to develop a more ________________ style of writing. short and clear ○ ○ ○ 11. Every morning at nine the boss and her secretary _____________ on the work plan for the day. talk together ○ ○ ○ 10. The decision concerning the withdrawal of troops was made at a ___________ between the Attorney General and the President. meeting ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2. The correct answer is congestion. 3. The correct answer is concurred. 4. The correct answer is congenital. 5. The correct answer is concentrate. 6. The correct answer is component. 7. The correct answer is concoction. 8. The correct answer is combat. ○ The correct answer is collaborating. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 6 Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 74 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 9. The correct answer is compatible. 10. The correct answer is conclave. 11. The correct answer is confer. 12. The correct answer is concise. 13. The correct answer is complement. 14. The correct answer is compete. 15. The correct answer is confided. Vocabulary Builder 7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. He reads periodicals that are pertinent to his profession. (A) appropriate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Choose the alternative that has the same meaning as the underlined word. ○ ○ (B) apparent ○ ○ (C) perceptive 2. I like chocolate as well as licorice. (A) but the opposite ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) discriminating ○ ○ ○ (B) in spite of ○ ○ (C) and 3. Before Smith went on vacation, he left explicit instructions for the painting of his apartment. (A) colorful ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) rather than ○ ○ (B) clear ○ ○ ○ (C) verbal 4. I’m looking for a little cabin in the woods where I won’t be accessible to my relatives. (A) acceptable (B) probable (C) reachable (D) accessory ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) written ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 75 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ John and Mary worked on their garden with such zeal this summer that they grew more tomatoes than they could eat. (A) fertilizers ○ 5. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) garden tools ○ ○ (C) unwillingness ○ ○ ○ ○ No one could decide whether she married him for mercenary motives or she loved him in spite of his millions. (A) money-loving ○ 6. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) enthusiasm ○ ○ (B) mercurial ○ ○ (C) unknown ○ ○ ○ ○ Because he had defaulted in his car payments, the bank repossessed the car. (A) erred ○ 7. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) lucrative ○ ○ (B) deprived ○ ○ (C) failed ○ ○ ○ ○ Because he had invited two girls to the dance, he found himself in a terrible dilemma. (A) predicament ○ 8. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) delayed ○ ○ (B) romance ○ ○ (C) argument ○ ○ No matter how hard we try, there is no way to circumvent taxes. (A) pay in installments ○ 9. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) discussion ○ ○ (B) get around ○ ○ (C) travel around ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. Because their birthdays occurred in the same month, they shared a birthday party. (A) celebrated ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) round up ○ ○ (B) spared ○ ○ (C) merited ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) experienced together ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 76 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 11. He’s such an affable fellow that people sometimes take advantage of him. (A) accessible ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) good-natured ○ ○ (C) wealthy 12. A recent bride enjoys concocting special dinners for her husband. (A) putting together ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) weak ○ ○ (B) inventing ○ ○ (C) coordinating 13. Married couples can get a divorce if they find they are not compatible. (A) able to budget their money ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) cooperating ○ ○ (B) capable of having children ○ ○ (C) capable of living harmoniously 14. The consensus among his sisters was that he ought to get married. (A) agreement ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) able to share an apartment or house ○ ○ (B) survey ○ ○ (C) statistics 15. The newscaster gave a concise account of the tragedy. (A) long and detailed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) concentration ○ ○ ○ (B) sad and depressing ○ ○ (C) complicated and intricate Vocabulary Builder 7 Answers 1. The correct answer is (A). 2. The correct answer is (C). 3. The correct answer is (B). 4. The correct answer is (C). 5. The correct answer is (D). 6. The correct answer is (A). 7. The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) short and clear ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 77 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 9. The correct answer is (B). ○ The correct answer is (A). ○ ○ ○ ○ 8. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ ○ 11. The correct answer is (B). ○ ○ 12. The correct answer is (A). ○ ○ ○ 13. The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ 14. The correct answer is (A). ○ ○ ○ 15. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Put the number of the definition or synonym in Column B beside the appropriate word in Column A. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 8 ○ ○ B ○ A 1. move slowly and aimlessly _____ b. meander 2. increase _____ c. pilfer 3. elementary, initial _____ d. complement 4. jubilant song _____ e. amenity 5. draw out _____ f. augment 6. steal _____ g. paean 7. pleasantness _____ h. rudimentary 8. fixed pattern representing a type of person _____ i. habitat 9. natural locality of plant or animal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ _____ a. stereotype ○ ○ 10. make complete 2. Comprehending calculus is impossible if you have only a __________ knowledge of mathematics. 3. Wildlife sanctuaries protect the __________ of birds and the plants on which they feed. 4. Absent-minded and thoughtful, Dr. James is the __________ of a college professor. ○ On Sundays, I love to __________ through the woods and bird watch. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Use the words above to complete the following sentences. ○ ○ ○ _____ j. elicit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 78 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5. He will have to find a second job to __________ his income. 6. Vocabulary exercises __________ the work required for reading comprehension. 7. The detective tried to __________ the truth from the captured felon. 8. The superintendent was trying to catch the person who had __________ from the children’s desks. 9. The hotel we stayed in last weekend didn’t have a single __________ , so we left after one night. 10. At the Thanksgiving service, the congregation sang a __________ . Vocabulary Builder 8 Answers a. The correct answer is 8. b. The correct answer is 1. c. The correct answer is 6. d. The correct answer is 10. e. The correct answer is 7. f. The correct answer is 2. g. The correct answer is 4. h. The correct answer is 3. i. The correct answer is 9. j. The correct answer is 5. 1. The correct answer is meander. 2. The correct answer is rudimentary. 3. The correct answer is habitats. 4. The correct answer is stereotype. 5. The correct answer is augment. 6. The correct answer is complement. 7. The correct answer is elicit. 8. The correct answer is pilferred. 9. The correct answer is amenity. 10. The correct answer is paean. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 79 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 11. élite 21. non sequitor 2. alumnus, alumna 12. ennui 22. nouveau riche 3. bête noire 13. rapport 23. par excellence 4. carte blanche 14. faux pas 24. parvenu 5. cliché 15. forte 25. pecadillo 6. connoisseur 16. gourmet 26. potpourri 7. coquette 17. macabre 25. savoir faire 8. coup de grace 18. magnum opus 28. suave 9. dilettante 19. misanthrope 29. tyro 10. double entendre 20. misogynist 30. virtuoso She talked about her troubles ad infinitum, so we all went home early. 2. He is an alumnus of Boston University, and she is an alumna of Princeton. 3. My bête noire has always been spelling. 4. The Queen was given carte blanche wherever she went. 5. The speaker’s lecture was full of clichés, which annoyed his audience greatly. 6. As a connoisseur of modern art, he was invited to all of the gallery openings. 7. Carmen was a coquette whom no man could resist. 8. As far as he was concerned, the coup de grace in the divorce settlement was his wife’s getting the dog. 9. He will never be anything more than a dilettante in art. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. At the bachelors’ party, everything that was said seemed to have a double entendre. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ Now study these sentences that give you examples of how these words are generally used in English sentences. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ad infinitum ○ ○ ○ When reading in English, you will come across foreign words that have been incorporated into the language. Below is a list of some of the most commonly used foreign words. Find out what they mean, add them to your cards, then do the exercises that follow. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ 14. Not thanking the hostess for dinner was a faux pas on my part. ○ ○ 13. It is important for teachers to establish a good rapport with their students. ○ ○ 12. That movie was so bad that I nearly passed out from ennui. ○ ○ ○ ○ 11. Only the élite were invited to the royal wedding. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 80 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 15. Mathematics is definitely John’s forte. 16. Charlie’s Chophouse is not for gourmets. 17. The children were frightened by the macabre Halloween decorations. 18. After thirty years of intense work on his magnum opus, he found a publisher. 19. His denunciation of just about everyone and everything earned him the reputation of a misanthrope. 20. He was so old when he got married that his friends had begun to think that he was a misogynist. 21. Helen’s conversation is so full of non sequitors that we cannot understand her. 22. The neighbors are obviously nouveau riche and don’t have the vaguest notion of good taste. 23. Perlman is a violinist par excellence. 24. A parvenue, he was not accepted by the old families of Bar Harbor. 25. His wife was used to his pecadillos and forgave them. 26. Stew is a potpourri of meat and vegetables. 27. She showed a great deal of savoir faire for such a young girl. 28. A suave gentleman never lacks invitations to dinner. 29. A tyro in the business world usually earns very little money. 30. Wynton Marsalis is a virtuoso in the music world. Vocabulary Builder 9 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. Students beguile their leisure hours in computer stores. (A) cause time to pass unnoticed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Determine the meaning of the underlined word from the context. ○ ○ (B) begin ○ ○ (C) waste regrettably 2. He devised a computer game and sold it to Atari. (A) played (B) bought (C) invented ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) fool around (D) divided ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 81 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Manufacturers are donating computers to schools. ○ 3. ○ ○ (A) giving ○ ○ ○ (B) going ○ ○ (C) dedicating ○ ○ ○ (D) deducting ○ ○ ○ I am not ingenious enough to invent a video game. (A) studious ○ 4. ○ ○ (B) clever ○ ○ (C) glorious ○ ○ Currently, students appear to be learning and having fun simultaneously. (A) electrically ○ 5. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) indigenous ○ ○ (B) concurrently ○ ○ (C) sometimes ○ ○ ○ ○ It is said that you can intimidate your enemies by speaking in a low voice and carrying a big stick. (A) frighten ○ 6. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) at the present time ○ ○ (B) attack ○ ○ (C) harass ○ ○ ○ (D) make peace with ○ ○ ○ Avid opera lovers are willing to stand in line for hours. (A) musical ○ 7. ○ ○ (B) averse ○ ○ (C) eager ○ ○ ○ (D) tedious ○ ○ ○ Einstein was a brilliant mathematician. (A) shining ○ 8. ○ ○ (B) very intelligent ○ ○ ○ (C) famous ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) learn ○ A computer may be used in the math classroom to implement the lesson. (A) implant ○ ○ (C) entreat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) carry out ○ 9. ○ ○ ○ (D) foreign ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 82 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. Physics is an enigma to me. (A) energy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) problem ○ ○ (C) mystery 11. A hundred dollars will suffice to buy a home computer. (A) be saved ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) trial ○ ○ (B) be charged ○ ○ (C) be suffered 12. The kids spoke a jargon of their own that no one else understood. (A) accent ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) be enough ○ ○ (B) unintelligible talk ○ ○ (C) vocabulary 13. It was a minute crack in the motor block that ruined the car. (A) hidden ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) foreign language ○ ○ (B) multiple ○ ○ (C) many-sided 14. Studying vocabulary can be an irksome task. (A) easy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) very small ○ ○ ○ (B) pleasant ○ ○ (C) tedious 15. The tennis player protested the call with great fervor. (A) passion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) irate ○ ○ (B) favor ○ ○ (C) fever Vocabulary Builder 9 Answers 1. The correct answer is (A). 2. The correct answer is (C). 3. The correct answer is (A). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) dislike ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 83 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5. The correct answer is (D). 6. The correct answer is (A). 7. The correct answer is (C). 8. The correct answer is (B). 9. The correct answer is (D). ○ The correct answer is (B). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ 11. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ 12. The correct answer is (B). ○ ○ ○ 13. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ 14. The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ 15. The correct answer is (A). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Determine the meaning of the underlined word from the context; then select the best synonym. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 10 ○ ○ ○ Mr. Morton went downstairs to receive them. (A) get ○ 1. ○ ○ (B) welcome ○ ○ (C) say goodbye to ○ ○ ○ ○ Lady Augustus, though economical in most things, spent a lot of money on clothes. (A) awkward ○ 2. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) sign for ○ ○ (B) extravagant ○ ○ (C) thrifty ○ ○ ○ (D) careless ○ ○ They lived luxuriously even though they had no income. ○ ○ (A) expensively ○ ○ (B) cheaply ○ ○ (C) usury ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) beautifully ○ 3. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 84 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4. Arabella never stirred anywhere without her maid. (A) mixed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) moved ○ ○ (C) stayed 5. It would be grievous to her to live without her maid. (A) pleasant ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) resided ○ ○ (B) grateful ○ ○ (C) painful 6. The expensive purse was a necessary appendage to Arabella. (A) something added ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) tearful ○ ○ (B) application ○ ○ (C) dependent 7. He never betrayed himself to anyone but the butler. (A) made known ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) servant ○ ○ (B) fooled ○ ○ (C) bewildered 8. She was graceful and never moved awkwardly. (A) smoothly ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) bestowed ○ ○ ○ (B) clumsily ○ ○ (C) merrily 9. She prided herself on her graceful walk. (A) was proud (B) was pricked (C) was happy (D) was sorry ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) gracefully ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 85 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. He, on the other hand, always seemed to drag. ○ ○ (A) dread to move ○ ○ ○ (B) dress carelessly ○ ○ (C) walk fast ○ ○ ○ 11. A woman who marries for money, not love, is indeed mercenary. (A) loving money ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) move too slowly ○ ○ (B) disinterested ○ ○ (C) responsible ○ ○ ○ (D) meticulous The correct answer is (B). 2. The correct answer is (C). 3. The correct answer is (A). 4. The correct answer is (B). 5. The correct answer is (C). 6. The correct answer is (A). 7. The correct answer is (A). 8. The correct answer is (B). 9. The correct answer is (A). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Builder 10 Answers ○ ○ ○ 10. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 11. The correct answer is (A). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 86 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ EXERCISES: SYNONYMS Directions: Choose the alternative that has the same meaning as the underlined word. 1. Before you can take calculus, you need more than a rudimentary knowledge of algebra. (B) viewed (B) thorough (C) returned (C) elementary (D) overlooked ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) superficial 2. The augmentation in the population has created a fuel shortage. 7. Dick met Jane at a secluded rendezvous overlooking the avenue. (A) restaurant (A) augury (B) park (B) increase (C) meeting place (C) demand (D) picnic ground (D) necessity ○ ○ ○ (A) circled 3. Detective Smith used various means to elicit a confession from the murderer. 8. Dauntless men and women crossed America in covered wagons. (A) foreign (A) make (B) fearless (B) force (C) adventuresome (C) frame (D) penniless (D) draw out 4. It seems inevitable that the world will end from natural causes. (B) unhurt (C) unhappy (C) impressionable (D) undeterred ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) inestimable ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) unsurprised (B) unavoidable 5. Dr. Salk was lauded for his work with the polio vaccine. 10. A week’s sojourn in Paris can be very expensive. (A) shopping (A) rewarded (B) sightseeing (B) merited (C) journey (C) praised (D) stay (D) heralded ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 9. The pilot miraculously survived the crash unscathed. (A) invariable ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6. The spacecraft orbited the earth many times. (A) rude ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 87 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14. The Sphinx was an enigma to all but Oedipus. ○ (A) mystery (B) problem (B) too much (C) enemy (C) objectionable (D) entity (C) plagiarized sections (D) graduate ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) supporter ○ (B) improper language ○ (B) professor ○ (A) ungrammatical sentences ○ (A) student ○ 15. As an alumnus of Harvard, he felt compelled to contribute to the building fund. ○ 12. You should try to avoid clichés if you want to be a creative writer. ○ (D) talkative ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) welcome ○ ○ 11. A younger sister is obnoxious to have around when the older sister’s boyfriend comes to the house. ○ ○ ○ (D) trite phrases ○ ○ ○ 13. He devised a folding toothbrush for travelers. ○ ○ (A) sold ○ ○ (B) bought ○ ○ (C) invented ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) described exercises ○ ○ ○ ○ 88 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ EXERCISES: PUTTING IT TOGETHER ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Try to do this crossword puzzle; it is a review of the vocabulary used in previous chapters. Down 1. Studies or looks at again 1. Elementary 4. Make more beautiful 2. Dull, uninteresting 10. Prefix meaning eight 3. Consumes 11. Delegated 5. Deep, round container 13. Works together 6. Animal used for wool 16. Short form of middle 7. Prefix meaning between 18. Hexa 8. Science of growing fruit, vegetables, 20. Bends the head to show agreement and flowers 9. Antonym of give 22. Confusion 12. Auxiliary verb 24. Ability 14. Preposition: _____ school 26. Friendly, pleasant 15. Irrational belief 27. Feeling of boredom, weariness 17. Excites 28. Kidnap 18. Abbreviation for Social Security 30. Possessive adjective 19. Neuter pronoun 31. Salary increase 21. Fail, as in payments ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Across ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 4: Everyday and Specific Vocabulary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 89 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Down ○ Across 23. Join together 36. Past of sit 25. _____ I were you. . . 37. Abbreviation for saint 29. Vagabond 38. Indefinite article 32. Suffix indicating someone 39. Property who practices 34. Wander aimlessly 40. Threaten, making someone 35. Very large ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 33. Avoid by going around ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 38. Classified _____ ○ act through fear exercises ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 90 PART III: TOEFL Vocabulary Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Peterson’s MASTER TOEFL WRITING SKILLS About Peterson’s, a Nelnet company Peterson’s (www.petersons.com) is a leading provider of education information and advice, with books and online resources focusing on education search, test preparation, and financial aid. Its Web site offers searchable databases and interactive tools for contacting educational institutions, online practice tests and instruction, and planning tools for securing financial aid. Peterson’s serves 110 million education consumers annually. For more information, contact Peterson’s, 2000 Lenox Drive, Lawrenceville, NJ 08648; 800-338-3282; or find us on the World Wide Web at www.petersons.com/about. © 2007 Peterson’s, a Nelnet company Previously published as Grammar Workbook for the TOEFL Exam © 1971, 1974, 1976, 1978, 1980, 1985, 1989, 1992, 1994, 1996, 1998 Editor: Wallie Walker Hammond; Production Editor: Linda Seghers; Manufacturing Manager: Raymond Golaszewski; Composition Manager: Gary Rozmierski ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by the copyright herein may be reproduced or used in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, Web distribution, or information storage and retrieval systems—without the prior written permission of the publisher. ISBN-13: 978-0-7689-2329-2 ISBN-10: 0-7689-2329-8 Printed in the United States of America 10 9 8 7 First Edition 6 5 4 3 2 1 08 07 06 Petersons.com/publishing Check out our Web site at www.petersons.com/publishing to see if there is any new information regarding the tests and any revisions or corrections to the content of this book. We’ve made sure the information in this book is accurate and up-to-date; however, the test format or content may have changed since the time of publication. OTHER TITLES IN SERIES Peterson’s Master TOEFL Reading Skills Peterson’s Master TOEFL Vocabulary Contents ............................................................................... Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How This Book Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Study Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . You’re Well on Your Way to Success . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Give Us Your Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top 10 Strategies to Raise Your Score . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix ix ix x x xi xii PART I: TOEFL WRITING BASICS 1 All About TOEFL Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The TOEFL Essay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Integrated Writing Task of the TOEFL iBT . . . . . . . . . . . Summing It Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 8 9 PART II: DIAGNOSING STRENGTHS AND WEAKNESSES 2 Practice Test 1: Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Answer Key and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 PART III: TOEFL WRITING REVIEW 3 Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adverbs Like Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Split Infinitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Dangling Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Adjective/Adverb Confusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adjectives after Verbs of Sensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Noun Adjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Hyphenated or Compound Adjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Demonstratives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Few, Little, Much, and Many . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 vi Contents ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Sameness and Similarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comparatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Superlatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cause and Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Too, Very, and Enough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercises: Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answer Key and Explanations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summing It Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 46 48 50 53 55 57 61 64 65 4 Verbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Tense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Time Clauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Verbs of “Demand” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Wishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Conditionals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Modals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Verbals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Past Participles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Present and Perfect Participles and Infinitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Exercises: Verbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Answer Key and Explanations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Summing It Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 5 Pronouns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relative Pronouns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal Pronouns—Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Who/Whom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possessives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Faulty Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Those Modified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercises: Pronouns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answers and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summing It Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Basic Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Indirect Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Order of Adverbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Embedded Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 To/For (Purpose) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Double Subjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Clauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Exercises: Basic Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 www.petersons.com 91 91 93 95 98 100 102 104 107 108 109 110 Contents vii ................................................................. 7 Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Wordiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Substandard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Words Often Confused, Group I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Words Often Confused, Group II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Words Often Confused, Group III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Correlative Conjunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Subject/Verb Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Parts of Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Prepositions (General Use) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Prepositions in Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Exercises: Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Answer Key and Explanations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Summing It Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 PART IV: THREE PRACTICE TESTS Practice Test 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Answer Key and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Practice Test 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Answer Key and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Practice Test 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Answer Key and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Answer Key and Explanations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Summing It Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Before You Begin ............................................................................... HOW THIS BOOK IS ORGANIZED If you are preparing for any version of the TOEFL, you are not alone. Almost a million people all over the world took the TOEFL last year. A high score on this test is an essential step in being admitted to graduate or undergraduate programs at almost all colleges and universities in North America. But preparing for this test can be a difficult, often frustrating experience. Peterson’s Master TOEFL Writing Skills, used as a self-tutor, will help you improve your writing skills. • Top 10 Strategies to Raise Your Score gives you test-taking strategies. • Part I includes basic information about the TOEFL writing section. • Part II provides a diagnostic test to determine your strengths and weaknesses. • Part III provides the basic grammar and writing review. The exercises progress from relatively simple to relatively difficult as you continue through the book. Various skills, such as error identification and writing style, are reviewed. • Part IV includes three additional practice writing tests. They will show you how well you have mastered the writing skills presented in this book. SPECIAL STUDY FEATURES Peterson’s Master TOEFL Writing Skills is designed to be user-friendly. To this end, it includes features to make your preparation much more efficient. Overview The review chapter begins with a bulleted overview, listing the topics to be covered in the chapter. This will allow you to quickly target the areas in which you are most interested. ix x Before You Begin ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Summing It Up The review chapter ends with a point-by-point summary that captures the most important concepts. They are a convenient way to review the chapter’s key points. Bonus Information Look in the page margins of your book for the following test prep tool: NOTE Notes highlight critical information about a concept in the review section. These notes will provide you with additional study tools. YOU’RE WELL ON YOUR WAY TO SUCCESS Remember that knowledge is power. By using Peterson’s Master TOEFL Writing Skills as a supplement to your other TOEFL test preparation, you will fine-tune your writing skills and abilities. GIVE US YOUR FEEDBACK Peterson’s publishes a full line of resources to help guide you and your family through the college admission process. We welcome any comments or suggestions you may have about this publication and invite you to complete our online survey at www.petersons.com/booksurvey. Or you can fill out the survey at the back of this book, tear it out, and mail it to us at: Publishing Department Peterson’s 2000 Lenox Drive Lawrenceville, NJ 08648 Your feedback will help us to provide personalized solutions for your educational advancement. www.petersons.com Before You Begin xi ................................................................. 1. As with other sections of the TOEFL, be familiar with the directions and examples so you can begin work immediately. 2. Come up with a plan. Make sure your essay has an introduction, a body, and a conclusion. 3. Brainstorm for 3 to 5 minutes. Write down words and phrases that are related to your topic. 4. Write simple sentences to help you put your ideas into a complete form. 5. Order your ideas in a logical pattern to support your thesis. 6. Use specific, detailed examples from your thoughts to develop your ideas. 7. Choose effective words and include transitional words and phrases to unify your work. 8. Set aside 2–4 minutes for revising, editing, and proofreading. Make sure everything you included says what you mean. 9. Make sure you have written about the given prompt only and that you have answered the question completely. 10. Concentration is another important factor. Your practice and hard work will help you. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ TOP 10 STRATEGIES TO RAISE YOUR SCORE xii Before You Begin ................................................................. ............................................................................................ ABBREVIATIONS The following is a list of the abbreviations used in the review sections of this book. adj. adjective adv. adverb aux. auxiliary cl. clause CN count noun comp. comparative conj. conjunction d.o. direct object fut. future infin. (or to 1 V) infinitive i.o. indirect object irr. irregular n noun ncn non-count noun neg. negative obj. object part. participle past part. past participle past perf. past perfect perf. part. perfect participle pl. plural prep. preposition pres. present pron. pronoun qw question word s subject sing. singular suprl. superlative to 1 have 1 past part. perfect infinitive to 1 v (or infin.) infinitive v simple form of the verb v 1 ing present participle or gerund www.petersons.com P ART I ......................................................... TOEFL WRITING BASICS ..................................................................... CHAPTER 1 All About TOEFL Writing All About TOEFL Writing ............................................................................... • The TOEFL essay • The independent writing task of the TOEFL ibt • Summing it up THE TOEFL ESSAY An essay is a short literary composition on a single subject that usually presents the personal view of the author—you. In the fourth and last section of the TOEFL, you will write an essay about a topic that will be assigned to you. You will have 30 minutes to write a three- to five-paragraph essay on that topic. You must write on the topic you are assigned. An essay on any topic other than the one assigned will receive a score of “0.” Before the topic is presented, you must choose whether to type your essay on the computer or to hand write your essay on the paper essay answer sheet provided. Scratch paper will be given to you for making notes. For the paper-based TOEFL, the final version must be on the single-page, two-sided essay answer sheet. For the CBT or iBT version of the TOEFL, you will compose the final version of your essay in the “essay box” on the computer screen. The essay topic will be presented to you on the computer screen. You will not know the topic ahead of time. Although you must write only on the topic that is assigned to you, there is a way to prepare for this section. Your essay score will depend upon your ability to compose a well-written essay that answers the question in a relatively short period of time—in this case, 30 minutes. Your essay must be well organized and well developed; you must provide the reader with clearly appropriate details to support your thesis or illustrate your ideas. Your writing should show, throughout the essay, that you’re comfortable expressing complex ideas in the English language. You should also use a variety of grammatical structures (clauses, tenses, etc.) and use a vocabulary that is appropriate to your topic. 3 chapter 1 OVERVIEW 4 PART I: TOEFL Writing Basics ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Preparing Your First Version of the Essay THE PLAN Writing is a process, like a recipe for a special meal. You have a good chance of succeeding as an essayist if you follow these directions. The first step in the writing process is to have a plan. An essay should have: • an introduction, • a body, and • a conclusion. In the introduction, you get the reader’s attention and tell the reader what you are going to write about. You also give the reader any special information that guides the reader to the body of your essay. In the case of a TOEFL essay, the introduction should be one paragraph that contains four to five sentences. The body of the essay should be made up of one to three paragraphs that contain the ideas you want to communicate to the reader. The conclusion, which should be one paragraph, summarizes what you wrote in the body and reveals the conclusion you want the reader to make. Do not write the essay without planning. Begin the process by “brainstorming.” BRAINSTORMING In all writing classes, there is an exercise called brainstorming, which helps you start the flow of ideas necessary for an essay. This process involves writing words and phrases that are related to your topic as they come into your head. For example, look at the following topic: What are some of the qualities of a good parent? Use specific details and examples to explain your answer. Depending on your beliefs, you might write down the following words while brainstorming: Strength of character Love of family life Earn a living Spends time with children Set an example Help children with emotional problems in adolescence www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Writing 5 ................................................................. These are simple sentences that help you put ideas into complete form, but the sentences are in no way the final version that you will submit. You might come up with sentences such as: • A parent should earn money to provide food, clothing, and shelter for his or her family. • A parent should not work so many hours that he or she ignores the family. • Parents should show affection to their children, hugging and being affectionate with them as their culture calls for. • Parents should encourage their children to study in school by setting the example of working hard at their jobs and at home. Writing these sentences should take you about 5 minutes. LOGICAL ORDER After you have written your sentences, put them into a logical order. That is, arrange the order of sentences so that they relate to one another in a logical sequence. Then, decide which sentences should go into the introduction, the body, and the conclusion. You will probably find that you need more sentences. If so, write them at this time, and place them in the appropriate paragraphs in the appropriate section of the essay. Do not spend too much time writing the sentences. In the margins next to the sentences, write numbers that will indicate the proper order of the sentences. This should take 3 to 5 minutes. WRITE TOPIC SENTENCES FOR ALL THE PARAGRAPHS IN YOUR ESSAY A topic sentence contains the controlling idea of a paragraph and tells the reader what the paragraph is about. Look at your sentences and decide which one should begin the introductory paragraph, which ones should begin the paragraphs in the body, and which one should begin the conclusion. You may have already written some topic sentences. If not, write those that are needed. This should take you about 5 minutes. WRITE THE ESSAY You now have 10 minutes to put the essay into final shape. You have all the ideas, sentences, and paragraphs in the correct order, but you need to check your sentences for grammar and spelling errors. Then, following the numbers in your margin, write your sentences in the correct order in the final draft. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ WRITE SENTENCES ABOUT WHAT YOU BRAINSTORM 6 PART I: TOEFL Writing Basics ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Write About One Choice You now have a process to write the essay, but there are rules that you should follow when looking at your assigned topic. There are 185 possible topics for the essay, but there are only four ways that the topic is stated. If you learn to recognize the kind of topic that you have been assigned, you will be able to organize your writing more efficiently. Most essay topics ask you to make a choice. For example: Some people prefer to eat at food stands or restaurants. Other people prefer to prepare and eat food at home. Which do you prefer? Use specific reasons and examples to support your answer. You probably enjoy eating in restaurants and at home, depending on your mood, your work schedule, or your diet. However, do not write an essay that says that sometimes you like eating in a restaurant and sometimes at home. You must choose one or the other if you want to write an essay that answers the question correctly. Other topics ask you whether you agree or disagree with a statement. Others will ask you to tell which is better or whether you support one thing or another. These topics require you to choose only one thing and write about it. Do not write about both. One kind of topic can easily deceive you. Read the following: Nowadays, food has become easier to prepare. Has this change improved the way people live? Use specific reasons and examples to support your answer. This topic asks you to make a choice, but it may not be obvious. It is not about food. It’s about the way food preparation affects the way people live. You have to choose between two possible opinions. Opinion one is “The change in food preparation has improved the way people live.” The other is “The change has not improved the way people live.” Make sure your essay covers the right topic. SINGLE TOPICS There are some types of questions that ask you to choose the topic yourself. These topics are often referred to as “desert island questions.” For example: If you had to live on a desert island and could have only one book to read, what would it be? Explain your answer, using specific reasons and details. The topic question gives you the circumstances of your choice, but it leaves the choice of the details of your answer up to you. A more likely topic is as follows: If you could study a subject that you have never had the opportunity to study, what would you choose? Explain your choice, using specific reasons and details. www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Writing 7 ................................................................. academic subject, not necessarily one that you always wanted to study, but also one that might have helped you in a particular way or one that your parents would have been pleased about. Whatever subject you write about, you must provide details about your desires or those of your parents. Or, you could write about the way the course would have helped your work. CAUSE AND EFFECT TOPICS Some topics require you to identify causes, effects, and causes and effects together. Look at the following example: How do movies or television influence people’s behavior? Use reasons and specific examples to support your answer. In this example, the statement gives you the cause, “movies or television.” It is your job to write about the effect of these media on people’s behavior. In the following example, the statement gives you the effect: Why do you think some people are attracted to dangerous sports or other dangerous activities? Use specific reasons and examples to support your answer. The effect is “some people are attracted to dangerous sports or other dangerous activities.” You must write about the causes of this attraction. In the following example, you are required to write about both cause and effect: People do many different things to stay healthy. What do you do for good health? Use specific reasons and examples to support your answer. You must write about what you do for good health, which is the cause. You must also write about the effect of what you do. “MANY THINGS” TOPICS Topics often require you to report several facts. For example: Films can tell us a lot about the country where they were made. What have you learned about a country from watching its movies? Use specific examples and details to support your response. To write this essay, you have to choose a film from a country other than your own—a film that is about the country that produced it. You have to say what you learned about that country from watching its movies. If the movies had been Francis Ford Coppola’s The Godfather, Parts 1, 2, and 3, what would you have learned about America? About Italian immigrants in America? About Italian-American actors? About the causes of organized crime in America? www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Here is the desert island question in a slightly different form. You have to write about one 8 PART I: TOEFL Writing Basics ................................................................. ............................................................................................ About family life, religion, and divorce? About political and economic power? Let’s look at the next example: People listen to music for different reasons and at different times. Why is music important to many people? Use specific reasons and examples to support your choice. This topic has been the subject of magazine articles, long books, and even encyclopedias. You must write not about the kinds of music found throughout the world but about the reasons that people listen to it, e.g., relaxation, religious devotion, or artistic engagement. Before you begin writing your essay, make sure you are focusing on the correct idea. CLASSIFYING THE TOPICS In the TOEFL Bulletin, there is a list of 185 topics from which your assigned topic will be chosen. You should become familiar with this list and take extra time to practice writing essays before you take the computer-based TOEFL test. To see a list of possible assigned topics, go to www.toefl.org and download the entire list. To help yourself become familiar with the topics, try to break them down into categories such as the following: Going to College Work Going to Elementary and High School Spending Money Parents and Children Travel and Transportation Food Technology New Things in Your Life Society The Media The Culture of Your Country Personal Preferences Ecology Your Beliefs Sports and Recreation Using the steps you learned here, practice writing on a variety of these topics from each of the categories. There is no way to memorize an essay or all of the questions, but you can become more comfortable with the types of questions and the process of writing an essay under timed conditions. THE INTEGRATED WRITING TASK OF THE TOEFL iBT On the TOEFL iBT, you will read a passage and then hear a lecture that is related to the topic of the passage. You will be asked to summarize the listening passage and explain how it relates to the points in the reading passage. The suggested length of your written response is between 150 and 225 words. You must remember to make sure that your response clearly relates to the question posed. This is not a writing exercise that asks for your opinion. Also remember that you are being asked to explain the points you’ve heard. www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Writing 9 ................................................................. • Your writing should show that you’re comfortable expressing complex ideas in the English language. • Structure your essay and acquaint yourself with the possible topics you may encounter on the test. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ SUMMING IT UP P ART II ......................................................... DIAGNOSING STRENGTHS AND WEAKNESSES ..................................................................... CHAPTER 2 Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ✁ -------------------------------------------------------------------- Error Identification A O B O C O D 1. O A O B O C O D 20. O A O B O C O D 38. O A O B O C O D 2. O A O B O C O D 21. O A O B O C O D 39. O A O B O C O D 3. O A O B O C O D 22. O A O B O C O D 40. O A O B O C O D 4. O A O B O C O D 23. O A O B O C O D 41. O A O B O C O D 5. O A O B O C O D 24. O A O B O C O D 42. O A O B O C O D 6. O A O B O C O D 25. O A O B O C O D 43. O A O B O C O D 7. O A O B O C O D 26. O A O B O C O D 44. O A O B O C O D 8. O A O B O C O D 27. O A O B O C O D 45. O A O B O C O D 9. O A O B O C O D 28. O A O B O C O D 46. O A O B O C O D 10. O A O B O C O D 29. O A O B O C O D 47. O A O B O C O D 11. O A O B O C O D 30. O A O B O C O D 48. O A O B O C O D 12. O A O B O C O D 31. O A O B O C O D 49. O A O B O C O D 13. O A O B O C O D 32. O A O B O C O D 50. O A O B O C O D 14. O A O B O C O D 33. O A O B O C O D 51. O A O B O C O D 15. O A O B O C O D 34. O A O B O C O D 52. O A O B O C O D 16. O A O B O C O D 35. O A O B O C O D 53. O A O B O C O D 17. O A O B O C O D 36. O A O B O C O D 54. O A O B O C O D 18. O A O B O C O D 37. O A O B O C O D 55. O A O B O C O D 56. O A O B O C O D 60. O A O B O C O D 63. O A O B O C O D 57. O A O B O C O D 61. O A O B O C O D 64. O A O B O C O D 58. O A O B O C O D 62. O A O B O C O D 65. O A O B O C O D 19. O Sentence Completion A O B O C O D 59. O 13 answer sheet ANSWER SHEET PRACTICE TEST 1: DIAGNOSTIC Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ............................................................................... ERROR IDENTIFICATION Directions: For the Error Identification questions, each sentence contains four underlined words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that must be changed in order for the sentence to be correct. Mark your answer on the answer sheet provided. 1. Beautiful is in the eye of the (A) (B) (C) beholder. (D) 5. The young girl dreamed a dream (A) that she was being carried (B) (C) away by monsters. (D) 2. The baby showed a noticeable (A) distaste for these kind of pre(B) (C) pared baby food. (D) 6. If it will rain this afternoon, we (A) (B) will have to cancel the picnic. (C) (D) 3. They cannot go camping right (A) now because they are (B) taking care of a three-weeks-old (C) (D) baby. 7. Are you familiar of the latest (A) (B) (C) scientific developments in (D) the field? 8. Henry is the sort of a man who (A) (B) will give you the shirt off (C) (D) his back. 4. They went into the Superstition (A) Mountains in search for the (B) Lost Dutchman’s Mine and were 9. Give the package to whomever (A) has the authority to sign for it. (B) (C) (D) never heard from again. (C) (D) 15 practice test 1 65 QUESTIONS • 40 MINUTES 16 PART II: Diagnosing Strengths and Weaknesses ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 10. When he visited the doctor, the doctor (A) told John that he should gone to the (B) (C) hospital immediately. (D) 18. The children were surprised when the (A) teacher had them to close their books (B) (C) unexpectedly. (D) 11. Robert often wishes he was better (A) (B) prepared for his exams, but he will 19. Do you think you could lend me (A) good pair of gloves to wear to the (B) (C) (D) wedding? probably never change his poor study (C) (D) habits. 12. This refrigerator is very old to keep (A) (B) things at a proper temperature. (C) (D) 13. The meeting was so length that many (A) (B) people had to leave before it concluded. (C) (D) 14. John was quick to inform us that his (A) (B) (C) friend Vicky was most popular, intelli(D) gent girl in his class. 15. The director of the program advised (A) the students to avoid to waste time (B) reading material that was so out-of(C) (D) date. 16. There was 21. The Joneses have visited Hawaii and (A) Alaska, and they assure me that they (B) (C) like Alaska the best. (D) 22. We must have a exact count of the (A) (B) number of people expected to attend (C) the closing ceremonies. (D) 23. The stage production that we saw in (A) (B) New York was very much as the one we (C) had previously seen in London. (D) enough time (A) to completely fill out the form before (B) (C) the bell rang. (D) 24. Did you hear many news about the (A) political situation while you were in (B) (C) (D) that country? 17. Margie and Mary must have ate some (A) (B) bad food in the restaurant because they (C) were very ill shortly after they left. (D) 25. Both John, Bob and Tom are outstanding (A) (B) golfers and reasonably good tennis (C) (D) players. www.petersons.com not 20. His speech was a careful worded at(A) (B) tempt to evade his responsibility in the (C) (D) matter. Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic 17 ................................................................. 28. Economics, with their widespread range (A) (B) of practical application, is of great inter(C) est to government leaders throughout the (D) world. 34. Some members of the committee were (A) opposed to use the club members’ (B) (C) money to redecorate the meeting hall. (D) 35. I was very shocked to see how much my (A) (B) grandmother she had aged since the (C) (D) last time we visited. 36. Our supervisor finally noticed that it 29. The Tyrrels had such warm welcome (A) from their family that they were overwhelmed and could not speak for a (B) (C) few minutes. (D) 30. Even though he was exhausted, John (A) wrote to his parents a letter explaining (B) (C) (D) the situation. 31. Since I have so many letters to write, I (A) (B) am going to buy several boxes of (C) stationary. (D) 32. Our friends got a bank loan for to buy (A) (B) (C) a new car. (D) was we, Diana and me, who always (A) (B) (C) turned in our reports on time. (D) 37. In our opinion that girl is enough (A) (B) beautiful to be a movie star. (C) (D) 38. The report that Karl wrote on the (A) mating behavior of the bees in this area (B) was definitely better than Bob. (C) (D) 39. We were pleased to have the opportunity to watch such talented dancers (A) to perform a highly acclaimed new (B) (C) (D) ballet. 40. The flag is risen at 6:30 every morning (A) (B) (C) without fail. (D) www.petersons.com diagnostic test 27. The article suggests that when a person (A) is under unusual stress you should be (B) especially careful to eat a well-balanced (C) (D) diet. 33. By the time Robert will finish writing (A) (B) the first draft of his paper, most of the (C) other students will be completing their (D) final draft. ............................................................................................ 26. Kathy was definitely a faster swimmer (A) than anyone on her team and appeared (B) (C) headed for the state championship. (D) 18 PART II: Diagnosing Strengths and Weaknesses ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 41. When the Claybornes bought their new home, they painted every room, laid (A) (B) carpet in the living room and hall, and had refinished the kitchen cabinets. (C) (D) 42. That student from Mexico who is rooming (A) (B) with Bill Smith reminds me to my uncle. (C) (D) 43. When they travel to Europe, the (A) Harrises like to stay in Paris and visiting as many art galleries as possible. (B) (C) (D) 44. She never is diligent about practicing (A) (B) (C) (D) the piano. 45. During that terrible snowstorm, the (A) police demanded that people stayed off (B) (C) Highway 101 except in cases of emer(D) gency. 46. He refused to tell us why was he crying. (A) (B) (C) (D) 47. Please be sure that everybody has their (A) (B) ticket ready to give to the man at the (C) (D) door. 48. We believe that he already feels very badly about his mistake and we (A) have decided to take no further action. (B) (C) (D) www.petersons.com 49. They who are willing to spend the (A) (B) (C) necessary time will find this workshop to be a rewarding experience. (D) 50. Please see if you can repair the (A) (B) door’s knob before Saturday morning. (C) (D) 51. The passenger only had a five-dollar (A) bill with him when he boarded the bus. (B) (C) (D) 52. It is not longer necessary for all employ(A) (B) ees to wear an identification badge (C) in order to work in the vault. (D) 53. In the chapter one of that book there is (A) (B) a really good explanation of photosyn(C) thesis, complete with illustrations. (D) 54. The salesman told me that a good set of (A) tires were supposed to last at least (B) (C) (D) twenty thousand miles. 55. Sitting under an umbrella at a tiny (A) table in a sidewalk cafe, Bob was startled when a gust of wind suddenly (B) (C) carried it away. (D) Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic 19 ................................................................. 56. Riding my bicycle home from school, ________ as I went around the corner. (A) (B) (C) (D) a car hit me I was striked by a car I was struck by a car I was struck with a car 57. Doctor Martin is the kind of doctor _______ will take pains to be thorough. (A) (B) (C) (D) which who whom what 58. The two doctors received an award of several thousand dollars ________. (A) to be divided equally between them (B) which was supposed to be divided in an equal way between them (C) to be divided equally among them (D) which was to be divided between them in such a way that they would each receive an equal share 59. ________, he was able to answer all the questions on the examination. (A) Reading all the required material (B) Having reading all the required material (C) Having read all the required material (D) As it was the case that he had read all the required material 60. Exhausted, we went directly to bed and ________. (A) ignored him knocking on our door (B) ignored his knocking on our door (C) his knocking on our door was ignored by us (D) ignored his knocking with our door 61. John does not swim as ________. (A) (B) (C) (D) fastly as Fred fast than Fred fast as Fred fast like Fred 62. Shakespeare wrote many plays, but in my opinion The Merchant of Venice was the ________. (A) (B) (C) (D) better best goodest most good 63. ________ that the president’s economic policy will help curb inflation. (A) (B) (C) (D) The hope It is hoped Hoping To hope 64. ________ your helpful suggestions, we are sending you a copy of our latest book. (A) (B) (C) (D) In consideration of For consideration of With consideration for In consideration with 65. John studied accounting and ________ while he was at Yale. (A) (B) (C) (D) also pursued economics economics he also studied economics economics was also studied by him www.petersons.com diagnostic test Directions: In the Sentence Completion questions, one or more words are left out of each sentence. Under each sentence, you will see four words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that completes the sentence correctly, and mark your answer on the answer sheet provided. ............................................................................................ SENTENCE COMPLETION 20 PART II: Diagnosing Strengths and Weaknesses ................................................................. ............................................................................................ ANSWER KEY AND EXPLANATIONS Error Identification 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. A C D B A B B A A C B 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. A A D B B B C B A D B 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. C A A C B B A B D C A 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. B C C B D B A C D B A 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. C D B A A C A A A B D 1. The correct answer is (A). (Beauty). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Parts of Speech, page 162. 10. The correct answer is (C). (should go). Chapter 4, “Verbs”—See Modals, page 75. 2. The correct answer is (C). (this kind). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Demonstratives, page 38. 11. The correct answer is (B). (were better prepared). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Wishes, page 71. 3. The correct answer is (D). (threeweek-old). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Hyphenated or Compound Adjectives, page 37. 12. The correct answer is (A). (too old). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Too, Very, and Enough, page 55. 4. The correct answer is (B). (in search of). See Chapter 7, “Style”— Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. 5. The correct answer is (A). (dreamed that). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Wordiness, page 136. 6. The correct answer is (B). (If it rains). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Conditionals, page 73. 7. The correct answer is (B). (familiar with). See Chapter 7, “Style”— Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. 8. The correct answer is (A). (sort of man). See Chapter 7, “Style”— Substandard, page 139. 9. The correct answer is (A). (to whoever has). Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— See Who/Whom, page 95. www.petersons.com 13. The correct answer is (A). (so long that). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Cause and Result, page 50. 14. The correct answer is (D). (the most popular). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Superlatives, page 48. 15. The correct answer is (B). (to avoid wasting). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Verbals, page 77. 16. The correct answer is (B). (fill out completely). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Split Infinitives, page 29. 17. The correct answer is (B). (must have eaten). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Past Participles, page 81. 18. The correct answer is (C). (had them close). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Verbals, page 77. Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic 21 ................................................................. 20. The correct answer is (A). (carefully worded). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Adjective/Adverb Confusion, page 32. 34. The correct answer is (B). (opposed to using). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Verbals, page 77. 21. The correct answer is (D). (Alaska better). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Comparatives, page 46. 35. The correct answer is (C). (grandmother had aged). See Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—Double Subjects, page 120. 22. The correct answer is (B). (an exact count). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Articles, page 53. 23. The correct answer is (C). (much like the one). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Sameness and Similarity, page 44. 36. The correct answer is (C). (Diana and I). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Personal Pronouns—Case, page 93. 37. The correct answer is (B). (beautiful enough). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Too, Very, and Enough, page 55. 38. The correct answer is (D). (better than Bob’s). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Comparatives, page 46. 25. The correct answer is (A). (John, Bob, and Tom). See Chapter 7, ”Style”— Correlative Conjunctions, page 157. 39. The correct answer is (B). (perform OR performing). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Verbals, page 77. 26. The correct answer is (C). (anyone else). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Comparatives, page 46. 40. The correct answer is (A). (is raised). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Usage, page 142. 27. The correct answer is (B). (he or she should be). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Person, page 102. 41. The correct answer is (C). (and refinished). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Tense, page 67. See also Chapter 7, “Style”—Parallelism, page 133. 28. The correct answer is (B). (with its widespread). Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— See Number, page 104. 29. The correct answer is (A). (such a warm welcome). Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—See Cause and Result, page 50. 30. The correct answer is (B). (wrote a letter to his parents) OR (wrote his parents a letter). See Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—Indirect Objects, page 111. 31. The correct answer is (D). (stationery). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Words Often Confused, Group III, page 154. 32. The correct answer is (C). (loan to buy) OR (loan for a new car). See Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—To/For (Purpose), page 118. 42. The correct answer is (D). (reminds me of). See Chapter 7, “Style”— Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. 43. The correct answer is (B). (to visit). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Parallelism, page 133. 44. The correct answer is (A). (is never). See Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”— Order of Adverbs, page 113. 45. The correct answer is (C). (stay off). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Verbs of “Demand,” page 70. 46. The correct answer is (D). (why he was). See Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”— Embedded Questions, page 116. www.petersons.com diagnostic test 24. The correct answer is (A). (much news). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Few, Little, Much and Many, page 39. answers 33. The correct answer is (A). (Robert finishes). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Time Clauses, page 69. ............................................................................................ 19. The correct answer is (B). (a good pair). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Articles, page 53. 22 PART II: Diagnosing Strengths and Weaknesses ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 47. The correct answer is (B). (his ticket). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Number, page 104. 52. The correct answer is (A). (no longer). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Negation, page 57. 48. The correct answer is (A). (feels very bad). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Adjectives after Verbs of Sensation, page 34. 53. The correct answer is (A). (In chapter one). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, page 42. 49. The correct answer is (A). (Those who are). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Those Modified, page 107. 54. The correct answer is (B). (was supposed). See Chapter 7, “Style”— Subject/Verb Agreement, page 159. 50. The correct answer is (C). (door knob). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Noun Adjectives, page 35. 55. The correct answer is (D). (the umbrella OR the table). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Faulty Reference, page 100. 51. The correct answer is (A). (had only a five-dollar bill). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Adverbs Like Only, page 28. Sentence Completion 56. C 57. B 58. A 59. C 60. B 61. C 62. B 63. B 64. A 65. B 56. The correct answer is (C). Choice (A), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Dangling Modifiers, page 30. Choice (B), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Past Participles, page 81. Choice (D), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Prepositions (General Use), page 164. 59. The correct answer is (C). Choice (A), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Present and Perfect Participles and Infinitives, page 84. Choice (B), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Past Participles, page 81. Choice (D), see Chapter 7, “Style”— Wordiness, page 136. 57. The correct answer is (B). Choice (A), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Relative Pronouns, page 91. Choice (C), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Who/ Whom, page 95. Choice (D), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Relative Pronouns, page 91. 60. The correct answer is (B). Choice (A), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Possessives, page 98. Choice (C), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Voice, page 129. Choice (D), see Chapter 7, “Style”— Prepositions (General Use), page 164. 58. The correct answer is (A). Choice (B), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Wordiness, page 136. Choice (C), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Usage, page 142. Choice (D), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Wordiness, page 136. www.petersons.com 61. The correct answer is (C). Choice (A), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Adjective/Adverb Confusion, page 32. Choice (B), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Sameness and Similarity, page 44. Choice (D), See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Sameness and Similarity, page 44. 62. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Superlatives, page 48. Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic 23 ................................................................. diagnostic test www.petersons.com answers 64. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B), (C), and (D), See Chapter 7, “Style”—Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. 65. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Wordiness, page 136. See also Chapter 7, “Style”—Voice, page 129. ............................................................................................ 63. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—Clauses, page 121. P ART III ......................................................... TOEFL WRITING REVIEW ..................................................................... CHAPTER 3 Modifiers CHAPTER 4 Verbs CHAPTER 5 Pronouns CHAPTER 6 Basic Patterns CHAPTER 7 Style Modifiers ............................................................................... • Adverbs like only • Split infinitives • Dangling modifiers • Adjective/adverb confusion • Adjectives after verbs of sensation • Noun adjectives • Hyphenated or compound adjectives • Demonstratives • Few, little, much, and many • Cardinal and ordinal numbers • Sameness and similarity • Comparatives • Superlatives • Cause and result • Articles • Too, very, and enough • Negation • Summing it up This chapter deals with words that are modifiers—that is, they modify other words in a sentence. 27 chapter 3 OVERVIEW 28 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ ADVERBS LIKE ONLY Adverbs such as only should be placed as close as possible to the adjectives, verbs, or other adverbs they modify. NOTE Some other adverbs are—just, nearly, hardly, almost, and scarcely. ADV. ADJ. She has only three dollars. ADV. VERB He only saw her; he did not speak to her. ADV. ADV. Only downstairs can one find a real bargain. Error Examples WRONG: We only have four hours to finish this paper. RIGHT: We have only four hours to finish this paper. WRONG: She just wants to take one class. RIGHT: She wants to take just one class. WRONG: That house nearly costs sixty thousand dollars. RIGHT: That house costs nearly sixty thousand dollars. WRONG: She was so quiet that hardly he noticed her. RIGHT: She was so quiet that he hardly noticed her. WRONG: They almost drove six hundred miles. RIGHT: They drove almost six hundred miles. Skill Builder 1: Adverbs like Only Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if the adverb is not placed as closely as possible to the word it modifies. 1. If you go to window five, you will have to wait only five minutes. 2. You can use these machines only between 9 a.m. and 5 p.m. 3. He hardly knows any English. 4. That shirt almost cost twenty dollars. 5. Just ten people will be able to go today. 6. You hardly have enough time to do the first exercise. 7. We had to wait nearly ten minutes for the movie to begin. 8. She scarcely slept five hours last night. 9. We want to borrow only ten dollars. 10. The soldiers only killed one person during the battle. www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 29 ................................................................. C C X X C 1. 2. 3. (hardly any English). Hardly modifies any. 4. (almost twenty dollars). Almost modifies twenty. 5. X C X C X 6. (hardly enough time). Hardly modifies enough. 7. 8. (scarcely five hours). Scarcely modifies five. 9. 10. (only one person). Only modifies one. SPLIT INFINITIVES The infinitive is to 1 the simple form of the verb (V). Do not put an adverb between to and V. TO 1 V ADV. He refused to fill out the form completely. TO 1 V ADV. They have decided to repeat the directions carefully. TO 1 V ADV. We hope to inform him quickly. Error Examples WRONG: He wanted to carefully read the directions. RIGHT: He wanted to read the directions carefully. WRONG: To thoroughly understand the subject, ask an expert. RIGHT: To understand the subject thoroughly, ask an expert. WRONG: He was looking for a way to rapidly complete the job. RIGHT: He was looking for a way to complete the job rapidly. Skill Builder 2: Split Infinitives Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if any word comes between to and the simple form of the verb. 1. We decided to leave the area quickly. 2. He seemed to easily understand the situation. 3. To really make him happy would be impossible. 4. She used a scale to accurately weigh the vegetables. 5. Do not try to completely finish your homework before dinner. 6. To hastily read the material is not enough for good comprehension. 7. He began to chatter about the event excitedly. 8. Please try to entirely revise your work before you leave. 9. The teacher wanted to know positively whether or not the students could come to the picnic. 10. Bob is going to soon decide on his future course of study. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Answers 30 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Answers C 1. X 6. (To read the material hastily) X 2. (to understand the situation easily) C 7. X X 8. (to revise your work entirely) 3. (To make him really happy) C 9. X 4. (to weigh the vegetables accurately) X X 5. (to finish your homework completely) 10. (to decide soon) DANGLING MODIFIERS The subject of the main clause must be the same as the understood subject of the introductory phrase. In other words, the introductory phrase modifies the subject of the main clause. INTRODUCTORY PHRASE MAIN CLAUSE Looking at his watch, Mr. Jones got up and left. SUBJECT Who looked at his watch? Mr. Jones Who got up and left? Mr. Jones INTRODUCTORY PHRASE MAIN CLAUSE Compared to his father, John is a tall man. SUBJECT Who is compared to his father? John Who is a tall man? John INTRODUCTORY PHRASE MAIN CLAUSE To make a collect phone call, Mary must speak to the operator. SUBJECT Who is making a collect phone call? Mary Who must speak to the operator? Mary INTRODUCTORY PHRASE MAIN CLAUSE While a dancer in New York, Kathy injured her leg. SUBJECT Who was a dancer in New York? Kathy Who injured her leg? Kathy www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 31 ................................................................. WRONG: Running home from school, a dog bit me. RIGHT: Running home from school, I was bitten by a dog. WRONG: When only a child, my father took me to the circus. RIGHT: When only a child, I was taken to the circus by my father. WRONG: Hidden in his pocket, George left the room with the key. RIGHT: Having hidden the key in his pocket, George left the room. WRONG: To understand the directions, they must be read carefully. RIGHT: To understand the directions, one must read them carefully. Skill Builder 3: Dangling Modifiers Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is a dangling-modifier error. 1. Playing in the street, the truck hit the child. 2. By painting and repairing as needed, your home can be kept in good condition. 3. Before leaving, Jane kissed me goodbye. 4. Addressed and stamped, I dropped the letter in the slot. 5. While a student at college, my mother met my father. 6. Walking toward the church, the stained-glass windows looked beautiful. 7. To understand the subject, a great deal of studying must be done. 8. Skiing down the steep hill, my heart beat crazily. 9. Watching her daughter play, Mary thought about life as a mother. 10. Once learned, a language cannot easily be forgotten. 11. When only a child, my father taught me how to play soccer. 12. Studying and reading, the day passed quickly. 13. To make a good cup of coffee, one must begin with high-quality coffee beans. 14. Sitting alone in his room, the strange noise frightened him. 15. Wrapped in pretty, green paper, Phyllis put the package on the table. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Error Examples 32 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Answers X 1. (Playing in the street, the child was hit by the truck.) X 8. (Skiing down the steep hill, I felt my heart beat crazily.) X 2. (By painting and repairing as needed, one can keep one’s home in good condition.) C 9. C 10. X 11. (When I was only a child, my father taught me how to play soccer.) C 3. X 4. (After I had addressed and stamped the letter, I dropped it in the slot.) X C 12. (Studying and reading, I passed the day quickly.) 5. C X 13. 6. (Walking toward the church, I noticed the beautiful stainedglass windows.) X X 14. (Sitting alone in his room, he was frightened by the strange noise.) 7. (To understand the subject, one must do a great deal of studying.) X 15. (Having wrapped the package in pretty green paper, Phyllis put it on the table.) ADJECTIVE/ADVERB CONFUSION NOTE a. Most adverbs end in -ly. b. Some words have the same form for the adjective and adverb: Adjective Adverb late late fast fast hard hard (Do not add -ly to these words.) c. The adverb for the adjective good is well. 1. Adjectives modify nouns (N) and pronouns. ADJ. N ADJ. N His recent accident caused a sudden change in his behavior. PRON. ADJ. He is intelligent. 2. Adverbs modify verbs (V). VERB ADV. VERB ADV. He had an accident recently, and his behavior changed suddenly. VERB ADV. He spoke intelligently. 3. Adverbs also modify adjectives. ADV. ADJ. He grew an especially small tree. ADV. ADJ. He was a highly motivated young man. ADV. ADJ. It was a cleverly planned operation. 4. Adverbs also modify other adverbs. ADV. ADJ. She could run very quickly. www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 33 ................................................................. WRONG: Do it carefully, if not perfect. RIGHT: Do it carefully, if not perfectly. WRONG: He is an extreme pleasant person. RIGHT: He is an extremely pleasant person. WRONG: It was an interesting designed museum. RIGHT: It was an interestingly designed museum. WRONG: He worked hardly at the factory all day. RIGHT: He worked hard at the factory all day. WRONG: You should order that book real soon. RIGHT: You should order that book really soon. WRONG: My sister plays the piano very good. RIGHT: My sister plays the piano very well. Skill Builder 4: Adjective/Adverb Confusion Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an adjective or adverb error. 1. The bus arrived lately, so I missed my first class. 2. We did not pass the test, but we certainly tried hard. 3. The train left at exactly 5:00 p.m. 4. When Ms. Smith went to Germany, she bought an exquisitely carved vase. 5. They had a real good chance of winning the national competition. 6. Computers process data efficiently. 7. We worked hard and saved enough money to take a trip. 8. There was a hasty called meeting to discuss the bus strike. 9. He was thorough interested in the subject. 10. That dress fits her perfectly. 11. She likes her students to arrive prompt for class. 12. We studied really hard for the test. 13. He was bright and attractive. 14. The child ran fastly to get to school. 15. He wrote his paper really good. 16. The careful organized tour of the city was a huge success. 17. You cannot possibly imagine how embarrassed I was yesterday. 18. Although he plays soccer well, he plays tennis bad. 19. I read an interestingly written report. 20. The time went by very fastly on our vacation. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Error Examples 34 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Answers X 1. (late). See note b. C 2. C 3. C 4. Note: In this sentence, the adverb exquisitely modifies the adjective carved; however, a similar sentence could be constructed using the adjective exquisite to modify the noun vase (. . . an exquisite, carved vase). X 5. (really good chance). See rule 3. C 6. C 7. X 8. (hastily called). See rule 3. X 9. (thoroughly interested). See rule 3. C 10. X 11. (to arrive promptly). See rule 2. C 12. C 13. X 14. (fast). See note b. X 15. (really well). See rule 2 and note c. X 16. (carefully organized). See rule 3. C 17. X 18. (plays tennis badly). See rule 2. C 19. X 20. (very fast). See note b. ADJECTIVES AFTER VERBS OF SENSATION The following verbs of sensation are generally followed by adjectives*, not by adverbs: feel, look, seem, appear, taste, smell, and sound. VERB ADJ. He feels bad. VERB ADJ. The soup smells delicious. VERB ADJ. She looked nervous before the test. Error Examples WRONG: Those flowers smell sweetly. RIGHT: Those flowers smell sweet. WRONG: That loud music sounds badly to me. RIGHT: That loud music sounds bad to me. WRONG: He looks handsomely in black. RIGHT: He looks handsome in black. * These are also called “predicate adjectives.” www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 35 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an adjective or adverb error. 1. I felt sadly when I read the letter. 2. That gossip sounds malicious. 3. The wine tastes awfully, like vinegar. 4. The girls look adorable in their party costumes. 5. Our neighbor’s music sounded loudly last night. 6. Laurie seemed quiet after she read her friend’s letter. 7. The roses and lilacs smell nicely every spring. 8. Do not drink that milk; it tastes sourly. 9. My sister has always looked heavy because she has broad shoulders. 10. He appeared nervously as he began to take the exam. Answers X C X C X 1. (sad) C 6. 2. X 7. (nice) 3. (awful) X 8. (sour) 4. C 9. 5. (loud) X 10. (nervous) NOUN ADJECTIVES The first noun (N) in the following pattern is used as an adjective. N N You are all language students. a. When nouns are used as adjectives, they do not have plural or possessive forms. b. EXCEPTIONS: The following nouns always end in -s but are singular in number when they are used as names of courses or sciences: physics, mathematics, economics. N N He is an economics teacher. BUT: ADJ. N The current economic situation is extremely uncertain. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 5: Adjectives after Verbs of Sensation 36 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Error Examples WRONG: He is taking some histories classes this semester. RIGHT: He is taking some history classes this semester. WRONG: John turned in his term’s paper this morning. RIGHT: John turned in his term paper this morning. WRONG: My friend is an economic major. RIGHT: My friend is an economics major. Skill Builder 6: Noun Adjectives Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the noun adjective. 1. Tom drove past the police’s station on his way to work. 2. Joan Sutherland is my favorite opera singer. 3. I need to have my car’s license renewed. 4. During the power shortage, the streets lights went out. 5. He wanted to take an economic class. 6. Many people are worried about the current world’s situation. 7. The news reporter was at the scene of the accident. 8. Phyllis and Julie put up the party decorations. 9. Three footballs teams were tied for first place. 10. Mike is the new mathematics professor. 11. We need some paper napkins for the picnic. 12. The students did not like the dormitory’s rules. 13. The marble floor felt like ice. 14. The television’s repairman picked up my television set this morning. 15. I went to three dances recitals last year. 16. John bought some leather gloves yesterday. 17. I need to buy a plane’s ticket. 18. He took many languages courses when he was in New York. 19. She put a new table lamp in her living room. 20. He is taking an advanced physic course this semester. www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 37 ................................................................. X 1. (police station). See note a. C 11. C 2. X 12. (dormitory rules). See note a. X 3. (car license). See note a. C 13. X 4. (street lights). See note a. X X 5. (an economics class). See note b. 14. (television repairman). See note a. X 15. (dance recitals). See note a. X 6. (world situation). See note a. C 16. C 7. X 17. (plane ticket). See note a. C 8. X 18. (language courses). See note a. X 9. (football teams). See note a. C 19. X 20. (physics course). See note b. C 10. HYPHENATED OR COMPOUND ADJECTIVES Nouns (N) are sometimes found as part of hyphenated or compound adjectives (adjectives of more than one word joined by hyphens). These nouns are never plural. HYPHENATED ADJ. I bought a four-hundred-year-old painting in Hong Kong. HYPHENATED ADJ. The president gave a ten-minute speech. Error Examples WRONG: I lived in a two-hundred-years-old house in Rome. RIGHT: I lived in a two-hundred-year-old house in Rome. WRONG: He bought a three-hundred-dollars suit. RIGHT: He bought a three-hundred-dollar suit. WRONG: The teacher told us to read the five-hundred-pages book. RIGHT: The teacher told us to read the five-hundred-page book. WRONG: I have four fifty-minutes classes every day. RIGHT: I have four fifty-minute classes every day. WRONG: She has just bought a new four-doors Ford. RIGHT: She has just bought a new four-door Ford. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Answers 38 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 7: Hyphenated or Compound Adjectives Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error with a hyphenated adjective. 1. We signed up for a three-hour lab. 2. The police suspected a thirty-years-old man. 3. My mother bought some five-dollars-a-pound cheese. 4. John got a ten-speed bicycle for his birthday. 5. I visited the five-thousand-years-old pyramids in Egypt last summer. 6. John and Sue brought me a two-ounces bottle of French perfume. 7. My parents are going on a four-week European tour next month. 8. Most ten-month-old babies cannot walk. 9. They are studying the five-hundred-pages manual. 10. The Smiths have just purchased a ten-rooms house. Answers C 1. X 6. (two-ounce bottle) X 2. (thirty-year-old man) C 7. X 3. (five-dollar-a-pound cheese) C 8. C 4. X 9. (five-hundred-page manual) X 5. (five-thousand-year-old pyramids) X 10. (ten-room house) DEMONSTRATIVES The demonstratives this and that (singular) and these and those (plural) must agree in number with the nouns they modify. SING. SING. John does not like this kind of class. PL. PL. What do you think of these kinds of chairs? Error Examples WRONG: These type of potato is native to Peru. RIGHT: This type of potato is native to Peru. WRONG: That kinds of women are likely to succeed in business. RIGHT: Those kinds of women are likely to succeed in business. WRONG: Jane never buys these brand of canned goods. RIGHT: Jane never buys this brand of canned goods. www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 39 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error with the demonstrative modifiers. 1. They did not like those kinds of imported cars. 2. The farmers could not find any buyers for these class of wheat. 3. This kind of story is not suitable for young children. 4. Those kinds of books are fascinating and helpful. 5. Do you think we should buy these kind of flowers for the front yard? 6. Mary never shops in those kind of expensive specialty shops. 7. He took that news badly. 8. Bob should not have bought these pair of shoes. 9. This movies are restricted to people over 17 years of age. 10. Although Bill has owned many kinds of cars, he has never considered buying this kind before. Answers C 1. X 6. (those kinds) X 2. (this class) C 7. C 3. X 8. (this pair) C 4. X 9. (these movies) X 5. (these kinds) C 10. FEW, LITTLE, MUCH, AND MANY 1. Few, fewer, and fewest, as well as many, are followed by plural count nouns (PL. CN). PL. CN There are few students from Japan in our English class. PL. CN This year we received fewer replies to our ad than ever before. PL. CN John has the fewest chapters left to read of anyone in the class. PL. CN There are many reasons to study hard for that test. 2. Little, less, and least, as well as much, are followed by non-count nouns (NCN). NCN He gave me a little advice about choosing a school. NCN Susan has less money than I. NCN He did the least amount of work of anyone in the class. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 8: Demonstratives 40 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ NCN There is not much time to finish this job completely. a. In general, plural count nouns can be recognized by the -s plural form. However, do not forget that the following words are plural: people, men, women, children, and police. b. The following are examples of non-count nouns: fruit, homework, bread, money, furniture, and time. Do not add -s to these words. c. The word news looks plural, but it is a non-count noun. Example: Little news is coming from that country. d. For number and amount see Chapter 7 “Style” and look under Usage on page 142. Error Examples WRONG: There are much books on the shelf. RIGHT: There are many books on the shelf. WRONG: There is not many industry in that town. RIGHT: There is not much industry in that town. WRONG: He had few winter clothing when he arrived. RIGHT: He had little winter clothing when he arrived. WRONG: You need a little dollars to buy this book. RIGHT: You need a few dollars to buy this book. WRONG: Lloyd scored the least points in the basketball game. RIGHT: Lloyd scored the fewest points in the basketball game. WRONG: Isabelle bought less than ten items. RIGHT: Isabelle bought fewer than ten items. www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 41 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error with many, few, much, or little. 1. I do not like many sugar in my coffee. 2. They did not put much furniture in their new office. 3. We did not have much knowledge about physics. 4. Of the four people injured in the accident, the child needed the fewest medical attention. 5. John had so few news from his parents that he was worried. 6. I usually have little money at the end of the month. 7. Debby spent less time studying for the exam than Robin did. 8. He predicted that few people would die of radiation poisoning. 9. Bill has the least cavities of anyone in his class. 10. We wanted to go on vacation, but we had few money. 11. There were so few good seats left that we decided not to buy tickets to the concert. 12. Nowadays, much women are becoming lawyers. 13. That party did not have much entertainment. 14. There is not many news available on that subject. 15. During the war, our government received fewer information about the situation in that country. 16. There were a little people waiting to buy tickets. 17. He had so many homework that he could not go to the movies. 18. Although she was rich, she wore little jewelry. 19. There were so much campus police at the football game that there was no trouble. 20. He did not eat many fruit in the winter. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 9: Few, Little, Much, and Many 42 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Answers X 1. (much sugar). See rule 2. X 12. (many women). See rule 1a. C 2. C 13. C 3. X 14. (much news). See rule 2c. X 4. (least medical attention). See rule 2. X 15. (less information). See rule 2. X X 5. (little news). See rule 2c. 16. (a few people). See rule 1a. C X 6. 17. (much homework). See rule 2b. C 7. C 18. C 8. X X 9. (the fewest cavities). See rule 1. 19. (many campus police). See rule 1a. X 20. (much fruit). See rule 1b. X 10. (little money). See rule 2. C 11. CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS There are two kinds of numbers, cardinal and ordinal. EXAMPLES CARDINAL ORDINAL ONE FIRST TWO SECOND THREE THIRD FOUR FOURTH FIVE FIFTH SIX SIXTH TEN TENTH TWENTY-ONE TWENTY-FIRST The following two patterns are used to designate items in a series: 1. Ordinal numbers are used in this pattern: the 1 ordinal 1 noun (N) THE 1 ORDINAL 1 N The first book of the series is about verbs. 2. Cardinal numbers are used in this pattern: noun (N) 1 cardinal N 1 CARDINAL Book One of the series is about verbs. a. Use the with ordinal numbers. b. Do not use the with cardinal numbers. c. Be careful to use the correct word order for each pattern. www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 43 ................................................................. WRONG: We are supposed to read the chapter seven for homework. RIGHT: We are supposed to read chapter seven for homework. WRONG: Pick up your boarding passes at gate the fifth. RIGHT: Pick up your boarding passes at gate five. WRONG: Terminal first on your right is Pan American. RIGHT: The first terminal on your right is Pan American. WRONG: We reviewed lesson the tenth in class today. RIGHT: We reviewed lesson ten in class today. WRONG: The subway stop second is Broadway. RIGHT: The second subway stop is Broadway. Skill Builder 10: Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is a number error. 1. The first checkout stand is for cash customers only. 2. The answer is in the line fifteen on page four. 3. Do the exercise one in your book. 4. Pick up your receipt at teller fourth. 5. The car designers modified their plans for the hundredth time. 6. Pick up your check at window the third. 7. I met him on the second day of the fall semester. 8. You will find the bread in aisle the first. 9. The well-known basketball player from Chicago made the first points of the game. 10. The instructions are on the six page. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Error Examples 44 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Answers C 1. X 2. (in line fifteen). See pattern 2b. X 3. (Do exercise one). See pattern 2b. OR (Do the first exercise). See pattern 1. X C 4. (at teller four). See pattern 2. OR (the fourth teller). See pattern 1. X 6. (at the third window). See pattern 1. OR (at window three). See pattern 2. C 7. X 8. (in the first aisle). See pattern 1. OR (in aisle one). See pattern 2. C 9. X 10. (on page six). See pattern 2. 5. SAMENESS AND SIMILARITY Sameness and similarity are expressed by the following patterns: 1. like or the same as Your car is like mine. (similarity) Your car is the same as mine. (sameness) 2. the same 1 noun 1 as N John is the same height as Bill. N Mary is the same age as Valerie. 3. as 1 adjective 1 as ADJ. John is as tall as Bill. ADJ. Mary is as old as Valerie. Error Examples WRONG: I would like to have an apartment as the one my friend has. RIGHT: I would like to have an apartment like the one my friend has. WRONG: Their backyard is as beautiful like a picture. RIGHT: Their backyard is as beautiful as a picture. WRONG: He looks as his grandmother. RIGHT: He looks like his grandmother. WRONG: This book is the same long as that one. RIGHT: This book is as long as that one. WRONG: John is as tall than Bob. RIGHT: John is as tall as Bob. WRONG: Mike’s eyes are the same color that mine. RIGHT: Mike’s eyes are the same color as mine. WRONG: Her job pays the same salary like mine. RIGHT: Her job pays the same salary as mine. www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 45 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if the comparative pattern is incorrect. 1. I would like to go to a school as the one my sister goes to. 2. His hair is the same length as mine. 3. Your apartment is the same size to mine. 4. That garden is as beautiful like the one in the park. 5. Elizabeth is the same weight as her girlfriend. 6. Your homework is the same as mine. 7. She looks as her mother. 8. This blouse is the same expensive as that one. 9. I would like to buy some earrings like yours. 10. He is as intelligent than his brother. 11. Your sofa is almost like hers. 12. He looks like his grandfather. 13. Tom’s suit is the same style that Bob’s. 14. This material feels like silk. 15. Your shoes are the same color like mine. Answers X 1. (like the one). See pattern 1. C C 2. X X 3. (as mine). See pattern 2. 10. (as intelligent as). See pattern 3. X 4. (as beautiful as). See pattern 3. C 11. C 12. 9. C 5. X 13. (style as). See pattern 2. C 6. C 14. X 7. (like her mother). See pattern 1. X 15. (color as). See pattern 2. X 8. (the same price as). See pattern 2. OR (as expensive as). See pattern 3. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 11: Sameness and Similarity 46 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ COMPARATIVES 1. One-syllable adjectives and two-syllable adjectives ending in -y* form the comparative by adding -er. ADJ. ADJ.1 -ER John is tall, but Bill is taller. ADJ. ADJ.1 -ER Mr. Smith is busy, but Mr. Brown is busier. 2. Most two- and three-syllable adjectives form the comparative by putting more before the adjective. ADJ. MORE 1 ADJ. Betty is beautiful, but her sister is more beautiful. 3. Some adjectives have irregular comparatives (IRR. COMP.) and must be memorized. Examples: good, better; bad, worse. ADJ. IRR.COMP. This book is good, but that one is better. ADJ. IRR.COMP. This soup is bad, but that soup is worse. 4. Than is the only structure word that can follow comparatives. COMP. 1 THAN Their problem is worse than your problem. a. Do not use both -er and more in the same comparative structure. b. Be careful to use only than after a comparative structure. c. Be careful to use the comparative for two items, not three or more. For three or more, use the superlative. See Superlatives in this chapter on page 48. Error Examples There are two main kinds of errors with comparatives: errors in structure and errors in logic. STRUCTURE ERRORS WRONG: Betty is more smarter than her classmates. RIGHT: Betty is smarter than her classmates. WRONG: This building is more expensive as that one. RIGHT: This building is more expensive than that one. WRONG: Jane had much longer hair that her sister. RIGHT: Jane had much longer hair than her sister. WRONG: I own two cars, a Ford and a Chevrolet. I like the Chevrolet the best. RIGHT: I own two cars, a Ford and a Chevrolet. I like the Chevrolet better. * Change the -y to -i before adding -er. www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 47 ................................................................. Do not compare two nouns that cannot be compared. WRONG: John’s salary was much larger than Bob. (Salary cannot be compared to Bob.) RIGHT: John’s salary was much larger than that of Bob. OR John’s salary was much larger than Bob’s. WRONG: The number of people at the meeting is larger than last week. (Number cannot be compared to week.) RIGHT: The number of people at the meeting is larger than that at last week’s meeting. Do not compare a noun to itself. WRONG: Mary is smarter than anybody in her class. (Mary is a member of the class. Mary cannot be smarter than herself.) RIGHT: Mary is smarter than any other student in the class. OR Mary is smarter than anybody else in the class. WRONG: Alaska is larger than any state in the United States. (Alaska is one of the states in the United States. It cannot be larger than itself.) RIGHT: Alaska is larger than any other state in the United States. Skill Builder 12: Comparatives Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the comparative pattern. 1. This book is more better than that one. 2. This year’s prices will certainly be much higher as last year’s prices. 3. Since there were two possible ways to get to New York, we had to decide which one was better. 4. The customs in his country are more traditional than those in the United States. 5. Her letter was more friendlier than his. 6. She was happier than anybody in her family. 7. Nancy was luckier than Fred in Las Vegas. 8. Betty’s homework is usually more organized than that of any other student’s in the class. 9. The weather was much hotter this year than 1970. 10. The final exam was more difficult than the mid-semester exam. 11. The first performance was more crowded as the second one. 12. The new student reads faster than anyone else in the class. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ LOGIC ERRORS 48 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 13. Fred’s project proposal was much more economical than Brad’s. 14. Robert’s new home is more expensive than any house in the neighborhood. 15. Henry had a rather bad accident, and it was a miracle that he was not hurt more worse than he was. Answers X X C C X X C C 1. (is better than). See rule 4a. 2. (higher than). See rule 4b. 3. 4. 5. (was friendlier than). See rule 4a. 6. (happier than anybody else in her family). See the second logic error. 7. 8. X 9. (much hotter this year than that in 1970). See the first logic error. 10. 11. (more crowded than the second one). See rule 4b. 12. 13. 14. (any other house). See the second logic error. 15. (hurt worse than). See rule 3. C X C C X X SUPERLATIVES Use the superlative to make a comparison among three or more things. NOTE Use the comparative for two items. See Comparatives on page 46 of this chapter. 1. One-syllable adjectives and two-syllable adjectives ending in -y form the superlative by adding -est. Always use the in the superlative pattern. THE 1 ADJ. 1 -EST Bill is taller than John, but Bob is the tallest. THE 1 ADJ. 1 -EST Bill is happier than John, but Bob is the happiest. 2. Two- and three-syllable adjectives form the superlative by putting the most before the adjective. THE MOST 1 ADJ. Susan is more beautiful than Betty, but Jane is the most beautiful. 3. Some adjectives have irregular superlatives (IRR. SUPRL.) that must be memorized. For example: good, the best; bad, the worst. THE 1 IRR. SUPRL. Your book is better than his book, but our book is the best. THE 1 IRR. SUPRL. Your problem is worse than mine, but his problem is the worst. a. Always use the in the superlative pattern. b. Be careful not to use -est and most in the same superlative pattern. c. Do not put than after the superlative. d. Be careful to use the superlative for three or more items. www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 49 ................................................................. WRONG: Yesterday was coldest day of the year. RIGHT: Yesterday was the coldest day of the year. WRONG: John is the smartest student than anyone else in the class. RIGHT: John is the smartest student in the class. WRONG: We went to Ann’s Restaurant, Ted’s Diner, and Tom’s Cafe, and Ann’s Restaurant served better food. RIGHT: We went to Ann’s Restaurant, Ted’s Diner, and Tom’s Cafe, and Ann’s Restaurant served the best food. WRONG: I took mathematics, French, and history last semester, and the mathematics course was the better. RIGHT: I took mathematics, French, and history last semester, and the mathematics course was the best. WRONG: She was the most beautifulest woman I had ever seen. RIGHT: She was the most beautiful woman I had ever seen. Skill Builder 13: Superlatives Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the superlative pattern. 1. They were the most poorest people I had ever seen. 2. Germany is one of the most highly industrialized nations in the world. 3. When he won the contest, he was the most surprised person than the other contestants. 4. I went to Belgium, Holland, and England last year, and I liked Belgium better. 5. Is the Sahara the largest desert in the world? 6. August is hottest and most humid month of the year. 7. It was the most biggest building I had ever seen. 8. That company sold the most sophisticated computer equipment that we had ever found. 9. Dr. Henderson was the most thorough doctor than Jane had ever known. 10. John, Phyllis, and Mary were all saving money to go to Egypt, and John saved the most. 11. Paula, Susie, and Jill bought new homes, but Paula’s was more elegant. 12. Peking is most densely populated city in the world. 13. The damage caused by the hurricane was the worst than had ever occurred in that state. 14. She bought a new color television, a stereo unit, and an AM/FM radio, and the television was the most expensive. 15. Mary is the fastest runner than the other team members. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Error Examples 50 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 16. You can use any of these three pens, but the red one is the best for marking on heavy material. 17. That place serves the goodest ice cream in town. 18. Dr. Jones was certainly among the smartest men I had ever known. 19. He got the baddest grade he had ever received on an exam. 20. The crimes committed by that murderer were the most heinous in the history of that town. Answers X C X X C X X C X 1. (the poorest people). See rule 3b. 2. 3. (the most surprised person of all the contestants.). See rule 3c. 4. (Belgium the best). See rule 3d. 5. 6. (the hottest and the most humid month). See rule 3a. 7. (the biggest building). See rule 3b. 8. 9. (doctor that). See rule 3c. C X X X C X 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. C X C X C 16. 17. (the best ice cream). See rule 3. 18. 19. (the worst grade). See rule 3. 20. (the most elegant). See rule 3d. (the most densely). See rule 3a. (the worst that). See rule 3c. (the fastest runner on the team). See rule 3c. CAUSE AND RESULT Cause-and-result clauses are expressed by the following patterns: 1. So a. so 1 adjective 1 that ADJ. He was so tired that he fell asleep. b. so 1 adverb 1 that ADV. He reads so slowly that he can never finish his homework. c. *so 1 many or few 1 count noun 1 that CN She had so many problems that she could not concentrate. CN There were so few tickets sold that the concert was cancelled. d. *so 1 much or little 1 non-count noun 1 that NCN The storm caused so much damage that the people were forced to leave their homes. NCN They had so little interest in the project that it failed. * For problems with many and much, see Few, Little, Much, and Many on page 39 of this chapter. www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 51 ................................................................. a. such 1 adjective 1 plural count noun 1 that ADJ. PL. CN They were such good students that they did very well on the TOEFL. b. such 1 adjective 1 non-count noun 1 that ADJ. NCN It was such good cake that we asked for more. 3. So or such (singular count nouns can use either of the following patterns) a. so 1 adjective 1 a 1 singular count noun 1 that SING. CN He had so bad a headache that he left early. b. such 1 a 1 adjective 1 singular count noun 1 that SING. CN He had such a bad headache that he left early. a. Be careful not to omit a before a singular count noun. b. The pattern of cause-and-result is expressed by so/such . . . that. ............................................................................................ 2. Such NOTE Do not use too Error Examples or as. WRONG: The doctor had too many patients that he could not see them all. RIGHT: The doctor had so many patients that he could not see them all. WRONG: It was so good game that the stadium was packed. RIGHT: It was such a good game that the stadium was packed. OR It was so good a game that the stadium was packed. WRONG: The book was as interesting that I could not put it down. RIGHT: The book was so interesting that I could not put it down. WRONG: He is so shy as he never speaks in class. RIGHT: He is so shy that he never speaks in class. WRONG: They had a such good time in Rome that they always dreamed of going back. RIGHT: They had such a good time in Rome that they always dreamed of going back. WRONG: He gave me so good advice that I was very grateful to him. RIGHT: He gave me such good advice that I was very grateful to him. www.petersons.com 52 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 14: Cause and Result Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the cause-and-result clause. 1. They had so a good meal at that restaurant that they wanted to go there again. 2. They were such talented actors that their movie was a great success. 3. The store had too few customers that it closed. 4. It was such a long lesson that we could not finish it in one day. 5. He was as rich that he owned four homes. 6. He is so forgetful as he never pays his rent on time. 7. She was such a good student that she won a scholarship. 8. They had a such bad day that they got depressed. 9. It was so warm weather that we went to the swimming pool. 10. The old woman’s handwriting was so faint that I could hardly read it. 11. The stars are so far from the earth that we cannot see most of them. 12. I had too many things to do that I could not finish them all. 13. It was so confusing as I could not understand it. 14. He spoke such good Arabic that he surprised everyone. 15. The building was as large that we had difficulty finding his office. Answers X 1. (so good a meal) OR (such a good meal). See pattern 3a. X C 2. C 10. X 3. (had so few customers that). See pattern 1c. C 11. X C 4. 12. (had so many things to do that). See pattern 1c. X 5. (was so rich that). See pattern 1a. X 13. (so confusing that). See pattern 1a. X 6. (so forgetful that). See pattern 1a. C 14. X C 7. 15. (so large that). See pattern 1a. X 8. (had such a bad day that) OR (had so bad a day that). See pattern 3. www.petersons.com 9. (was such warm weather that). See pattern 2. Chapter 3: Modifiers 53 ................................................................. 1. Use a or an with an unspecified singular count noun. Use an before a word that begins with a vowel or a vowel sound. I saw a puppy in the park yesterday. The woman asked for an exact count. He is an honest man. 2. Use the with specified singular and plural count nouns. The puppy I saw in the park was black and white. The engineers from Clearwater Company designed a new system for water purification. 3. Do not use an article with plural count nouns used in a general sense. Dogs make good pets. Astronauts go through rigorous training programs to prepare for space flights. 4. Do not use an article with non-count nouns used in a general sense. I do not like seafood. Honesty is the best policy. Error Examples WRONG: We went to the store and bought new stove. RIGHT: We went to the store and bought a new stove. WRONG: Everyone should have a equal opportunity to get an education. RIGHT: Everyone should have an equal opportunity to get an education. WRONG: They had an accident in new car they bought last week. RIGHT: They had an accident in the new car they bought last week. WRONG: It is traditional to have the flowers at a wedding. RIGHT: It is traditional to have flowers at a wedding. WRONG: The honesty is a virtue. RIGHT: Honesty is a virtue. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ ARTICLES 54 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 15: Articles Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an article mistake. 1. John’s friends had a farewell party for him last Friday. 2. He tried hard to get good grade on the test. 3. It is always difficult to make the decisions. 4. When he lived in Paris he went to parties every weekend. 5. They gave me a electric typewriter for my birthday. 6. Paul began to think that he would never find the happiness. 7. The old man no longer believed that money was the most important thing in life. 8. He wanted to try on pair of jogging shoes at the shoe store. 9. In all his life he had never wanted to try the wine. 10. She does not have an understanding of the subject yet. 11. I just saw boys from Africa that I met at the International House party last week. 12. Teachers usually spend many hours correcting papers. 13. Some people believe that the frankness is the best policy in any situation. 14. The man who fixed my air-conditioning unit accidentally broke the fan. 15. The doctors have to go to school for many years to complete their education. Answers C 1. X X 2. (a good grade). See rule 1. C 10. X 3. (to make decisions). See rule 3. X 11. (saw the boys). See rule 2. C 4. C 12. X 5. (an electric typewriter). See rule 1. X 13. (that frankness is). See rule 4. C 14. X 6. (find happiness). See rule 4. X 15. (Doctors have to go). See rule 3. C 7. X 8. (on a pair of jogging shoes). See rule 1. www.petersons.com 9. (to try wine). See rule 4. Chapter 3: Modifiers 55 ................................................................. Compare the meanings and patterns of too, very, and enough: 1. Very means to a high degree, but does not suggest impossibility or undesirability. VERY 1 ADJ. Mary is very intelligent. 2. Too suggests impossibility or undesirable degree. TOO 1 ADJ. 1 TO 1 V She is too sick to come to class today. 3. Enough suggests possibility or sufficient degree. ADJ. 1 ENOUGH 1 TO 1 V He is tall enough to play basketball. a. In patterns 2 and 3 above, do not use any other structure word after the adjective or adverb except to. b. In the above patterns adverbs can be used in the same position as adjectives. Example: Mary sings very well. c. Enough can come before or after a noun to express sufficiency. He had money enough to buy a new car. ............................................................................................ TOO, VERY, AND ENOUGH NOTE Be careful to put enough AFTER the adjective. Be careful to put to 1 V (infinitive) OR He had enough money to buy a new car. AFTER enough. Error Examples WRONG: This meat is too delicious. RIGHT: This meat is very delicious. WRONG: It was very late to catch the plane. RIGHT: It was too late to catch the plane. WRONG: He was enough old to get a driver’s license. RIGHT: He was old enough to get a driver’s license. WRONG: His English was enough good as for him to pass the TOEFL. RIGHT: His English was good enough for him to pass the TOEFL. WRONG: We had very much time to finish our work. RIGHT: We had enough time to finish our work. www.petersons.com 56 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 16: Too, Very, and Enough Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error with too, very, or enough. 1. I had enough experience to get the job. 2. This soup is too good. 3. It was too late to go to the theater. 4. He is enough intelligent to do well in school. 5. Paul had very much money to buy a new motorcycle. 6. I am very disappointed in his behavior. 7. He made too many good friends when he studied abroad. 8. She spoke French well enough to be a translator. 9. He did not speak English as well enough to be understood. 10. The envelope was thin enough to slide under the door. 11. The sofa was big enough as to seat four people comfortably. 12. This paragraph is not enough good as to be acceptable. 13. His TOEFL score was high enough to be accepted. 14. She was too happy when she heard the news. 15. She was enough old to get married. Answers C 1. X X 2. (very good). See rule 1. C 3. X 4. (intelligent rule 3a. X 5. (had enough money). See rule 3c. C 9. (English well enough). See rule 3c. C 10. X 11. (big enough to seat). See rule 3c. X 12. (good enough to). See rule 3. C 13. 6. X 14. (very happy). See rule 1. X 7. (made many good friends). See rule 2. X 15. (old enough). See rule 3a. C 8. www.petersons.com enough). See Chapter 3: Modifiers 57 ................................................................. 1. Not is an adverb that negates verbs. Not is used in the following patterns: n auxiliary 1 not 1 V 1 ing AUX. 1 NOT 1 V 1 -ING He is not going to the party. AUX. 1 NOT 1 V 1 -ING He is not making any money. n auxiliary 1 not 1 V AUX. 1 NOT 1 V He does not like to study on the weekends. AUX. 1 NOT 1 V We do not want any coffee, thank you. n auxiliary 1 not 1 past participle AUX. 1 NOT 1 PAST PART. He has not been here for days. AUX. 1 NOT 1 PAST PART. They have not seen any deer. n modal* 1 not 1 V MODAL 1 NOT 1 V We will not accept your opinion. MODAL 1 NOT 1 V You should not eat too many sweets. 2. No is an adjective that indicates the absence of something. It modifies nouns. It is used in the following pattern: n Verb 1 no 1 noun V 1 NO 1 N There is no charge for towels at the pool. V 1 NO 1 N He has no passport. 3. None is a pronoun meaning not any or not one. Use none when the noun it replaces has been mentioned already. PRON. The children ate all the cookies. When I arrived, there were none left. (none 5 no cookies) PRON. They asked me to contribute some money but I had none. (none 5 no money) None may also be used in the following pattern: n None 1 of the 1 noun In this pattern, the noun that none refers to is placed after of the. PRON. 1 OF THE 1 N When I arrived, none of the cookies were left. PRON. 1 OF THE 1 N None of the children know how to swim. * For an explanation of modals, see the section in Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Verbs of “Demand” on page 70. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ NEGATION 58 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. Two negative words in one sentence make the sentence an affirmative statement; for example, “Do not leave without an umbrella.” (“Be sure to take your umbrella.”) ............................................................................................ NOTE 4. Remember to use any after negative words to express the absence of quantity for plural count nouns and non-count nouns. (Anyone, anybody, anywhere, anymore, and anything can also be used in negative sentence constructions.) NEG. ANY NCN I do not have any free time today. NEG. ANY PL. CN There were not any students from China this year. NEG. ANYMORE He does not go to school anymore. NEG. ANYONE We did not see anyone leave the building. 5. There are some words that have negative meanings even though they do not appear to be negative, for example: hardly, scarcely, rarely, seldom, without, and only. Do not use another negative word with these words. (See notes.) NEG. He had scarcely enough money for the bus. NEG. They went to bed without dinner. 6. Negative infinitives (to 1 V) are formed by putting not before the infinitive (not 1 to 1 V). NOT 1 TO 1 V She said not to talk during the program. NOT 1 TO 1 V They told us to relax and not to worry . 7. Remember that no longer is an idiomatic negative expression of time. He no longer lives here. They no longer play golf together. a. To express a negative idea, use only one negative word. b. Never use not longer when longer means time. Error Examples WRONG: He is no going on vacation this summer. RIGHT: He is not going on vacation this summer. WRONG: There is not butter in the refrigerator. RIGHT: There is no butter in the refrigerator. WRONG: There were none children at the playground. RIGHT: There were no children at the playground. WRONG: We do not have no class Friday. RIGHT: We do not have any class Friday. WRONG: They seldom do not go to the movies. RIGHT: They seldom go to the movies. WRONG: I encourage you to do not wait for him. RIGHT: I encourage you not to wait for him. www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 59 ................................................................. WRONG: He ran out of money and could not longer continue school. RIGHT: He ran out of money and could no longer continue school. WRONG: The children went to the movies without no money. RIGHT: The children went to the movies without any money. WRONG: I searched all day for some new shoes, but there were none shoes I liked. RIGHT: I searched all day for some new shoes, but there were none I liked. Skill Builder 17: Negation Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in negation. 1. He could not lend me $5 because he did not have only $3. 2. There were several of his friends at the restaurant, but none of mine came. 3. The rules required us to form an orderly line and to do not talk. 4. None of the shoes on sale fit me. 5. You are no going to finish the test in time. 6. Rarely does one see such a handsome man. 7. He could not longer tolerate that situation. 8. There were not cheaper beds left at that furniture store. 9. The director told the chorus to sit down and not to whisper. 10. By the time I arrived, there was no birthday cake left. 11. He could not scarcely believe what I told him. 12. That couple has none children. 13. Do not go to the mountains without no sturdy hiking boots. 14. We were no interested in what they were selling. 15. No longer can the world afford to waste its natural resources. 16. He did not have no good reason for hitting him. 17. If I were you I would no take that course. 18. The Smiths could afford to pay only $40,000 for a new home, and they were quite dismayed to learn that there were none available in that price range. 19. The children could not hardly believe their eyes when they saw a giraffe for the first time. 20. They foolishly drove into the desert without any extra water. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ WRONG: She said to sit quietly and to not open our books. RIGHT: She said to sit quietly and not to open our books. 60 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Answers X 1. (he had only $3). See rule 5. X 13. (without sturdy hiking boots). See rule 5. C 2. X 3. (and not to talk). See rule 6. X 14. (were not interested). See rule 1. C 4. X 5. (are not going to). See rule 1. C 15. C 6. X 16. (did not have any good reason). See rule 4. X 7. (no longer). See rule 7. X X 17. (would not take). See rule 1. 8. (no cheaper beds). See rule 2. C 18. C 9. X C 10. 19. (could hardly believe). See rule 5. X 11. (could scarcely). See rule 5. C 20. X 12. (no children). See rule 2. www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Modifiers 61 ................................................................. Directions: Each of the sentences below contains four underlined words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that must be changed in order for the sentence to be correct. Write your answer on the line or on a separate sheet of paper. 1. He found an interesting lithograph as (A) the one he had seen on his trip to (B) (C) (D) Spain. 2. I told him as forceful as possible that he (A) (B) would not be allowed to enter the room (C) without written permission. (D) 3. Dr. Fields received so large bill when he (A) checked out of the hotel that he did not (B) (C) have enough money to pay for a taxi to (D) the airport. 4. Although David had originally agreed to (A) help her, he later decided it would be more (B) time-consuming that he had anticipated. (C) (D) 5. The hunters were able to take their (A) limit of game with few effort in spite of (B) (C) (D) the unusually rainy weather. 6. In spite of the wonderful acting, sensi(A) tive photography, and well-developed (B) plot, the three-hours movie could not (C) (D) hold our attention. 7. The weatherman suggests keeping small (A) (B) children out of the sun because he predicts that today will be hottest day (C) (D) of the year. 8. The American businessmen were perplexed by the much considerations that (A) the foreign company had to take into (B) account before arriving at a decision. (C) (D) 9. The new zoo, with its elaborate moat (A) system and open spaces, was (B) enough roomy to accommodate even (C) (D) very large animals comfortably. 10. All of the players were anticipating the (A) last game of the series, which they (B) expected to be real exciting. (C) (D) 11. Having given serious consideration to a (A) job offer from another company, Bob finally decided to completely forget (B) about the offer and to continue at his (C) (D) old job. www.petersons.com exercises Error Identification ............................................................................................ EXERCISES: MODIFIERS 62 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 12. I scarcely have enough money to pay (A) (B) (C) the bill I received for medical services. (D) 13. After having dinner in that restaurant (A) last night, I felt badly and my wife had (B) (C) to take me to the hospital. (D) 14. Before leaving for her two-week vaca(A) (B) tion, Sharon had to quickly prepare the (C) monthly financial report. (D) 15. A prize was awarded to millionth (A) (B) person who bought a year’s subscrip(C) (D) tion to the magazine. 16. Although Niagara Falls in the United (A) States is not as high than Angel Falls (B) in Venezuela, more tourists visit Niagara Falls because it is more accessible. (C) (D) 17. Seriously burned in a terrible car (A) accident, the doctor was not sure that John could be protected from infection (B) long enough for his body to begin to (C) heal itself. (D) 18. My friend Dorothy, who just got back (A) (B) from Paris, said that the view from the top of the Eiffel Tower was too breath(C) (D) taking. www.petersons.com 19. After a long, seemingly futile search, (A) Professor Clayborne was finally able to (B) locate the five volume of the series he (C) needed to continue his research. (D) 20. They only publish stories that are (A) (B) suitable for young children to read. (C) (D) 21. Because of the long, detailed questions (A) (B) and the unfamiliar format, John could not scarcely finish the test on time. (C) (D) 22. Clark spent many years studying East(A) (B) ern philosophy in his search for the (C) meaning of the life. (D) 23. Although he had scaled many of the (A) world’s tallest mountains, he was still (B) looking for more taller peaks to climb. (C) (D) 24. The mechanic recently purchased these (A) (B) set of tools in order to be able to work (C) on large diesel trucks. (D) 25. We all looked forward to going on our (A) (B) class’s picnic on the last day of the (C) (D) semester. Chapter 3: Modifiers 63 ................................................................. 27. Driving across the bridge, the sailboat (A) with its sails billowing in the wind was (B) (C) (D) a beautiful sight to see. 30. istration, he finally decided on a physic (B) (C) (D) major. As he was driving me home, he told me (A) that he not longer spent his winters in (B) (C) (D) Florida. 28. They could not help noticing the article (A) (B) posted about a unusual flying object (C) seen recently. (D) www.petersons.com exercises 29. Even though my friend considered a (A) career in economics or business admin- ............................................................................................ 26. They were completely unprepared for (A) the difficulties of caring for a (B) three-months-old baby on their Euro(C) (D) pean trip. 64 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ ANSWER KEY AND EXPLANATIONS Error Identification 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A A A C C C 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. D A C D B A 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. B C B B A D 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. C A C D D B 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. C C A C D C 1. The correct answer is (A). See Sameness and Similarity, page 44. 16. The correct answer is (B). See Sameness and Similarity, page 44. 2. The correct answer is (A). See Adjective/Adverb Confusion, page 32. 17. The correct answer is (A). See Dangling Modifiers, page 30. 3. The correct answer is (A). See Cause and Result, page 50. 18. The correct answer is (D). See Too, Very, and Enough, page 55. 4. The correct answer is (C). See Comparatives, page 46. 19. The correct answer is (C). See Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, page 42. 5. The correct answer is (C). See Few, Little, Much, and Many, page 39. 6. The correct answer is (C). See Hyphenated or Compound Adjectives, page 37. 20. The correct answer is (A). See Adverbs like Only, page 28. 21. The correct answer is (C). See Negation, page 57. 7. The correct answer is (D). See Superlatives, page 48. 22. The correct answer is (D). See Articles, page 53. 8. The correct answer is (A). See Few, Little, Much, and Many, page 39. 23. The correct answer is (D). See Comparatives, page 46. 9. The correct answer is (C). See Too, Very, and Enough, page 55. 24. The correct answer is (B). See Demonstratives, page 38. 10. The correct answer is (D). See Adjective/Adverb Confusion, page 32. 25. The correct answer is (C). See Noun Adjectives, page 35. 11. The correct answer is (B). See Split Infinitives, page 29. 26. The correct answer is (C). See Hyphenated or Compound Adjectives, page 37. 12. The correct answer is (A). See Adverbs like Only, page 28. 13. The correct answer is (B). See Adjectives after Verbs of Sensation, page 34. 14. The correct answer is (C). See Split Infinitives, page 29. 15. The correct answer is (B). See Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, page 42. www.petersons.com 27. The correct answer is (A). See Dangling Modifiers, page 30. 28. The correct answer is (C). See Articles, page 53. 29. The correct answer is (D). See Noun Adjectives, page 35. 30. The correct answer is (C). See Negation, page 57. Chapter 3: Modifiers 65 ................................................................. • Modifiers are words that modify other words in sentences. • Adverbs such as only should be placed as close as possible to the adjectives, verbs, or other adverbs they modify. • The introductory phrase modifies the subject of the main clause. • Verbs of sensation are generally followed by adjectives and not by adverbs. These modifiers are called predicate adjectives. • Do not compare two nouns that cannot be compared. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ SUMMING IT UP Verbs ............................................................................... • Tense • Time clauses • Verbs of “demand” • Wishes • Conditionals • Modals • Verbals • Past participles • Present and perfect participles and infinitives • Summing it up TENSE The following are common verb-tense rules: 1. Present Perfect. Use the present perfect only when the action has started in the past and still relates to the present. I have been in the United States for six months. She has played the piano since she was a child. 2. Past Tense. Use the past tense when the action occurred or existed in the past. I went to California last summer. He visited several museums in Spain. 3. Past Perfect. Use the past perfect only to express an activity that happened before another past activity. The movie had begun when we arrived. I had already left when he called. 67 chapter 4 OVERVIEW 68 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Error Examples WRONG: I have finished a game of tennis with John when Bob arrived. RIGHT: I had finished a game of tennis with John when Bob arrived. WRONG: Since Bob graduated last year, he had been traveling around Europe. RIGHT: Since Bob graduated last year, he has been traveling around Europe. WRONG: It has taken me a long time to do the homework last night. RIGHT: It took me a long time to do the homework last night. WRONG: Since 1976, he is living in Brazil. RIGHT: Since 1976, he has been living in Brazil. NOTE It is possible to use the past perfect in sentences where before or after show sequence, but it is not necessary. OR Since 1976, he has lived in Brazil. Skill Builder 1: Tense Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the verb tense. 1. I have been in Mexico during the summer of 1970. 2. Mary had prepared dinner when I arrived, so we were able to eat immediately. 3. Three years ago he had been a student at a university in California. 4. We have collected stamps for many years. 5. We took the bus downtown, did a few errands, and had gone to lunch. 6. Since he bought a new car, he has been driving to work every day. 7. Last night they have recognized us from the party we went to earlier in the week. 8. Since Ted graduated, he has been working with his father. 9. The doctor had seen ten patients since eight o’clock this morning. 10. He is studying English for the last five years. Answers X C 1. (I was in Mexico). See rule 2. X 7. (they recognized us). See rule 2. 8. 2. C X 3. (He was a student). See rule 2. X C 4. 9. (has seen ten patients). See rule 1. X 5. (and went to lunch). See rule 2. X C 6. 10. (He has studied English). See rule 1. www.petersons.com Chapter 4: Verbs 69 ................................................................. Use the simple present tense in future-time clauses (when the action will take place sometime in the future). Never use will or going to in future-time clauses.* Time clauses are introduced by such words as: when, while, after, before, as soon as, etc. Also see Conditionals in this chapter on page 73. Future-time clauses: PRES As soon as they get their degrees , they are going home. FUTURE-TIME CL. PRES When I see him , I will give him your message. FUTURE-TIME CL. Error Examples WRONG: Whenever you will be in town, call me. RIGHT: Whenever you are in town, call me. WRONG: As soon as I will get all the vaccinations I will need, I will be leaving for Southeast Asia. RIGHT: As soon as I get all the vaccinations I need, I will be leaving for Southeast Asia. WRONG: After Dave is going to break the track record, many universities will offer him scholarships. RIGHT: After Dave breaks the track record, many universities will offer him scholarships. Skill Builder 2: Time Clauses Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is a mistake in the time clause. 1. You should visit that part of the country when it will be spring. 2. It will get cold in the desert when winter will come. 3. As soon as you learn to swim, I will take you to our cabin at the lake. 4. When the children are going to visit their grandmother, Henry and I will be going to Europe. 5. When Bruce visits him tomorrow, his doctor will probably tell him to increase his medication. 6. Will you buy me a wool jacket when you will be in Scotland? 7. The actress who plays this role will receive an award when the critics will see her performance. * Other tenses may also be used in time clauses, but the present tense must be used in future-time clauses when the main clause is in the future. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ TIME CLAUSES 70 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 8. When I have time, I will try to run two miles. 9. When the fire engines go down the street, all the dogs in the neighborhood howl. 10. As soon as Joan will get a good job, she is going to buy a condominium. Answers X X C X C 1. (when it is spring) X 6. (when you are in Scotland) 2. (when winter comes) X 7. (critics see) 3. C 8. 4. (the children visit their grandmother) C 9. X 10. (Joan gets) 5. VERBS OF “DEMAND” NOTE Use not to make the verb negative. Do not use don’t. The weatherman suggested that people not use Highway 7. The simple verb (V) is used for all persons in a noun clause after the following verbs: demand recommend be necessary insist urge be required require advise be essential suggest request be important ask (when it means request) V The doctor recommended that she have surgery. V I suggest that he be ready on time. V She asked that all employees attend the meeting. Error Examples WRONG: The doctor advised that I am going on a diet. RIGHT: The doctor advised that I go on a diet. WRONG: The restaurant suggested that we arrived on time for our reservation. RIGHT: The restaurant suggested that we arrive on time for our reservation. WRONG: The instructions ask that we don’t use a red pen. RIGHT: The instructions ask that we not use a red pen. WRONG: The law requires that students are in school a certain number of days a year. RIGHT: The law requires that students be in school a certain number of days a year. WRONG: It was important that money was collected for the cause. RIGHT: It was important that money be collected for the cause. www.petersons.com Chapter 4: Verbs 71 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the verb in the noun clause after a “demand” verb. 1. The supervisor recommended that all employees took a course in speed-reading. 2. They request that you be fluent in Spanish. 3. My doctor urges that I am stopping smoking immediately. 4. It was essential that the train leave on time. 5. The professor advised that John had a private tutor for a few weeks. 6. The admiral demanded that his crew has inspection twice a day. 7. They asked that she not call before 8:00 a.m. 8. The gracious hosts insisted that Mr. Smith did not leave so early. 9. I suggested that he wear black for the ceremony. 10. The police require that a driver renews his license every three years. Answers X 1. (employees take) C 7. C 2. X X 3. (that I stop smoking) 8. (that Mr. Smith not leave) See Note. C 4. C 9. X X 5. (that John have) X 6. (that his crew have) 10. (that a driver renew) WISHES 1. Present wishes are expressed in the past tense. PAST Ralph wishes that he had $1,000,000. (but he doesn’t) PAST Mary wishes that she lived in New York. (but she doesn’t) PAST Grace wishes that she did not have a test tomorrow. (but she does) 2. Always use were in present wishes for to be. He has often wished that he were older. (but he’s not) I often wish that I were in Hawaii. (but I’m not) We often wish that we were not so busy. (but we are) They often wish that they were not living in Chicago. (but they are) www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 3: Verbs of “Demand” 72 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. After the verb wish, the noun clause may be introduced by the conjunction that. ............................................................................................ NOTE 3. Past wishes are expressed in the past perfect. PAST PERF. Hiromi wishes that she had studied more English before arriving in the United States. (but she didn’t) PAST PERF. Kathy and Bob wish that they had gotten married before she went to Africa. (but they didn’t) PAST PERF. The children wish they had not disobeyed their mother. (but they did) Error Examples WRONG: Steven wishes that he has a bigger apartment. RIGHT: Steven wishes that he had a bigger apartment. WRONG: Helen wishes that she does not live in a dormitory. RIGHT: Helen wishes that she did not live in a dormitory. WRONG: The actor wishes he was not required to perform every evening. RIGHT: The actor wishes he were not required to perform every evening. WRONG: Ted wishes that he did not lose his job last month. RIGHT: Ted wishes that he had not lost his job last month. WRONG: Bob wishes that he bought that house last spring. RIGHT: Bob wishes that he had bought that house last spring. WRONG: I wish that I was living in a warmer climate. RIGHT: I wish that I were living in a warmer climate. Skill Builder 4: Wishes Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the verb that expresses a wish. 1. They wish they were able to spend more time in London. 2. My father wishes that he does not have to retire at age 65. 3. The farmer wished that he does not lose money on his cotton crop. 4. Abdulla wishes that his soccer team were the national champions. 5. The doctor wishes that he has more free time to play golf. 6. Each of her children wishes that he did not ignore the advice that she gave him. 7. I wish that I was earning more money and working less time. 8. My mother wishes that my father does more work around the house. 9. We wish that we did not have to go to the library this Saturday. 10. My friend Kate wishes she was still living in France. www.petersons.com Chapter 4: Verbs 73 ................................................................. C 1. X 2. (he did not have to). See rule 1. X 3. (he had not lost). See rule 3. C 4. X 5. (that he had). See rule 1. X 6. (he had not ignored). See rule 3. X 7. (that I were earning). See rule 2. X 8. (father did). See rule 1. C 9. X 10. (she were still living). See rule 2. CONDITIONALS There are two kinds of conditions—real and unreal: 1. Real conditions are used for possible situations. The present tense is used in the if-clause (or conditional clause), and the future tense is used in the result clause. PRES. FUT. If he comes to school, I will give him your message. (It is possible that he will come.) 2. Unreal conditions are used for impossible or unreal situations. a. In present time, the past tense is used in the if-clause and would, could, or might 1 the simple verb (V) is used in the result clause. PAST COULD 1 V If he studied, he could get good grades. (He doesn’t study.) PAST WOULD 1 V If he came to school, I would give him your message. (He doesn’t come to school.) b. In past time, the past perfect is used in the if-clause, and would, could, or might 1 have 1 the past participle are used in the result clause. PAST PERF. WOULD 1 HAVE 1 PAST PART. If he had come to school, I would have given him your message. (He didn’t come to school.) Summary If 1 present. . . . . . . . . . future (result) If 1 past . . . . . . . . . . . . . would 1 V (result) If 1 past perfect . . . . would 1 have 1 past part. (result) a. In general, avoid using would in the if-clause. b. In present-time unreal if-clauses, the correct form of the verb to be for all persons is were. If he were rich, he would go to Europe to study. If I were you, I would study harder. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Answers 74 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Error Examples WRONG: If I will win the contest, I will buy a new car. RIGHT: If I win the contest, I will buy a new car. WRONG: If you had lost your job, what would you do? RIGHT: If you lost your job, what would you do? OR If you had lost your job, what would you have done? WRONG: If I had been there, I would make a speech. RIGHT: If I were there, I would make a speech. OR If I had been there, I would have made a speech. WRONG: If they had ask me, I would have given them my opinion. RIGHT: If they had asked me, I would have given them my opinion. WRONG: If Bob had studied more, he would have pass the test. RIGHT: If Bob had studied more, he would have passed the test. WRONG: If Jane had known it was supposed to rain, she would have took an umbrella. RIGHT: If Jane had known it was supposed to rain, she would have taken an umbrella. WRONG: If I would have a degree from that university, I would get a good job. RIGHT: If I had a degree from that university, I would get a good job. WRONG: If he would have been on time, we would have asked him to the party. RIGHT: If he had been on time, we would have asked him to the party. Skill Builder 5: Conditionals Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the use of the conditional. 1. If he had not tried to jump over the stream, he would not break his leg. 2. If he would be taller, he would be a good basketball player. 3. If my apartment would be larger, I would not have to move. 4. If he was ready, we would begin the lesson. 5. If classes had finished sooner, I would go to Canada last month. 6. If Betty would have driven more carefully, she would not have had that accident. 7. If I will finish studying, I will go to the movies with you. 8. If the king had known the truth, he would have been very angry. 9. If Bob had practiced playing tennis more, he will not have lost the game. 10. If he had been here earlier, I would have saw him. www.petersons.com Chapter 4: Verbs 75 ................................................................. 12. If you will take a trip this summer, where will you go? 13. If Bob had received his check on time, he had certainly bought a new suit. 14. If she were the only person available, we would have to hire her. 15. If she had told me that she did not have enough money, I would pay for her trip last summer. Answers X 1. (he would not have broken) See rule 2. See also Verbs— Past Participles, page 81. C 8. X X 9. (he would not have lost). See rule 2. 2. (If he were taller). See rule 2b. X X 3. (If my apartment were larger). See rule 2b. 10. (I would have seen him). See rule 2. See also Verbs—Past Participles, page 81. C 11. X 12. (If you take). See rule 1. X 13. (he would certainly have bought). See rule 2a. C 14. X 15. (I would have paid). See rule 2b. X 4. (If he were ready). See rule 2b. X 5. (I would have gone). See rule 2. X 6. (If Betty had driven). See rule 2b. X 7. (If I finish). See rule 1. MODALS 1. After all modals, use the simple form of the verb (V). The following is a list of modals: can could must may should will might would shall MODAL 1 V They can walk five miles without getting tired. MODAL 1 V They could walk five miles without getting tired. 2. Use the past participle after the modal 1 have. MODAL 1 HAVE 1 PAST PART. Mr. and Mrs. Smith might have enjoyed the party. MODAL 1 HAVE 1 PAST PART. He should have sent in his application earlier. MODAL 1 HAVE 1 PAST PART. We should not have eaten such a big dinner. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ 11. If I had seen him, I would have reminded him about his appointment. 76 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 3. When you change direct speech to indirect speech, could, would, should, and might do not change form. DIRECT INDIRECT “You should always do your homework.” The teacher said that I should always do my homework. “I might ask her out.” He said that he might ask her out. 4. Use must have 1 past participle for past conclusion only. The ground is wet; it must have rained. (conclusion) 5. Use had 1 infinitive for past obligation. I had to go to the dentist yesterday. (obligation) Error Examples WRONG: Beth must to take the bus yesterday because her car was being repaired. RIGHT: Beth had to take the bus yesterday because her car was being repaired. WRONG: We must to water our plants regularly. RIGHT: We must water our plants regularly. WRONG: They could walked to school because it was close. RIGHT: They could walk to school because it was close. WRONG: The show will have begin by the time we arrive. RIGHT: The show will have begun by the time we arrive. WRONG: John said that he might have gone to Harvard next year. RIGHT: John said that he might go to Harvard next year. Skill Builder 6: Modals Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the modals. 1. My brother has to walk ten miles to buy some gas last weekend. 2. There is no one outside the theater; the performance must have been cancelled. 3. They must to sign up for that class by this Friday. 4. We would have went to Florida, but it was having an unusual cold spell. 5. Mrs. Jones told me that she might have baked a cake for my birthday tomorrow if she has time. 6. Susan said she might leave before dinner. 7. They might go to the store a few minutes ago. 8. When my baby got very ill, I must have called the doctor immediately. 9. The boys should not had made so much noise. 10. I will be very happy when I graduate this year. www.petersons.com Chapter 4: Verbs 77 ................................................................. X 1. (had to walk). See rule 5. C 6. C 2. X 7. (might have gone). See rule 2. X 3. (must sign up). See rule 1. X 8. (I had to call). See rule 4. X 4. (would have gone). See rule 2. See also Verbs—Past Participles, page 81. X 9. (should not have made). See rule 1. X 5. (might bake). See rule 3. C 10. VERBALS 1. The following verbs can be followed by the infinitive (to 1 V) as the direct object: agree forbid mean care forget offer decide hope plan deserve intend pretend fail learn refuse TO 1 V Mr. Smith and Mr. Parker deserve to be promoted. TO 1 V They decided to leave early. TO 1 V The secretary offered to come in early. TO 1 V He hopes to see them again. 2. The following verbs can be followed by the gerund (V 1 ing) as the direct object: admit deny postpone appreciate enjoy practice avoid finish stop cannot help keep suggest consider V 1 ING She enjoyed meeting them. V 1 ING I have never considered quitting my job. V 1 ING He finishes studying every evening at ten. V 1 ING He admitted committing the crime. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Answers 78 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 3. The following verb phrases (verb 1 preposition) can be followed by the gerund (V 1 ing). Remember that gerunds, not infinitives, follow prepositions in general and not just the prepositions in this list. See also Style—Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. be accustomed to decide on plan on be interested in get through put off be opposed to keep on think about be used to look forward to think of PREP. 1 V 1 ING She was not used to living in a dormitory. PREP. 1 V 1 ING He kept on driving even though he was tired. PREP. 1 V 1 ING He has been looking forward to meeting you. 4. Use the simple form of the verb (V) after the causative verbs let, make, and have when the second verb is active. V He made the children look both ways before crossing the street. V The teacher let him leave early. V The teacher had the class begin to write a composition when the bell rang. Use a past participle after the causative verbs have and get when the second verb is passive in meaning. PAST PART. She had her passport stamped at the immigration office. PAST PART. They got their house painted last summer. 5. The following verbs of perception are followed by the simple form of the verb (V) or the present participle (V 1 ing): feel see hear smell notice watch observe V V 1 ING I heard the baby cry. OR I heard the baby crying . OR Jane observed him leaving . V Jane observed him leave. www.petersons.com V 1 ING Chapter 4: Verbs 79 ................................................................. WRONG: The professor forbids the students leaving early. RIGHT: The professor forbids the students to leave early. WRONG: She could not help to laugh at his foolishness. RIGHT: She could not help laughing at his foolishness. WRONG: I am opposed to go to war. RIGHT: I am opposed to going to war. WRONG: Do not let those children to eat a lot of candy. RIGHT: Do not let those children eat a lot of candy. WRONG: I was surprised to see a person to cry at that movie. RIGHT: I was surprised to see a person cry at that movie. OR I was surprised to see a person crying at that movie. WRONG: She had her phone hook up when she returned from abroad. RIGHT: She had her phone hooked up when she returned from abroad. WRONG: He had his annual chest X-ray taking yesterday. RIGHT: He had his annual chest X-ray taken yesterday. Skill Builder 7: Verbals Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error with the verbal (infinitive, gerund, simple verb, or participle) that follows the main verb. 1. Blocks from the stadium, we could hear the people to cheer. 2. Do you think you might enjoy living in a small town? 3. I always make the children to pick up their toys. 4. The official offered to help me get my papers in order. 5. I had the paperboy stop delivering papers for the month of July. 6. Since you need more money, you should not stop to try to find a better job. 7. He was not used to making decisions by himself. 8. Jane had her blood pressure taking recently. 9. What made the student decide leaving early? 10. I am looking forward to see you again soon. 11. What do you think of our having a party to celebrate? 12. She had her shoes dyed to match her dress. 13. She could not help noticing the man to cry. 14. One should avoid eating a heavy meal late in the evening. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Error Examples 80 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 15. We had Tom to make the dinner reservations. 16. Since he promised to take care of it, his parents let the boy to buy a dog. 17. He was not used to living alone. 18. Bob had his gas and electricity turn on when he moved into his new apartment last week. 19. When will you get through to read that book? 20. The doctor had Mrs. Jones take ten pills a day for her heart. 21. Their boss never has them to stay past 5:00 p.m. 22. They saw the thief running from the bank. 23. The professor had us to read the first half of the book by Monday. 24. Please do not fail registering before the deadline. 25. As I entered the house, I smelled the food cooking. 26. We had our university identification pictures taken yesterday. 27. The law of that country forbids anyone under 18 driving a car. 28. The teacher made us using our imaginations. 29. The class could not help to laugh when the teacher dropped all his papers. 30. When we decided to stay in Mexico longer, we had our visas renewed. Answers X C X C C X C X X X C C X C X 1. (hear the people cheer) OR (hear the people cheering). See rule 5. 2. 3. (make the children pick up). See rule 4. 4. 5. 6. (stop trying to find). See rule 2. 7. 8. (pressure taken recently). See rule 4. 9. (decide to leave early). See rule 1. 10. (looking forward to seeing). See rule 3. 11. 12. 13. (noticing the man cry) OR (noticing the man crying). See rule 5. 14. 15. (Tom make the dinner). See rule 4. www.petersons.com X C X X C X C X X C C X X X C 16. (let the boy buy). See rule 4. 17. 18. (electricity turned on when). See rule 4. 19. (get through reading). See rule 3. 20. 21. (has them stay). See rule 4. 22. 23. (had us read the first). See rule 4. 24. (do not fail to register). See rule 1. 25. 26. 27. (forbids anyone under eighteen to drive). See rule 1. 28. (made us use our). See rule 4. 29. (could not help laughing). See rule 2. 30. Chapter 4: Verbs 81 ................................................................. The past participle is used in the following: 1. Present Perfect PAST PART. He has broken the world’s track record. 2. Past Perfect PAST PART. Mary had spoken to John about the matter before I arrived. 3. Unreal Past Conditional PAST PART. PAST PART. If he had been here on time, he would have heard the news. 4. Passive PAST PART. The president’s reelection was taken for granted by his constituents. 5. Perfect Infinitive PAST PART. I would like to have grown up on a farm. 6. Perfect Participle PAST PART. Having swum ten laps in the Olympic pool, he was exhausted. 7. Adjective PAST PART. The stolen watch was a very expensive piece of jewelry. 8. Past Modal PAST PART. Molly said that I should not have gone to that movie. 9. Introductory Verbal Phrase PAST PART. Seen from a distance, the house appeared to be in good condition. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ PAST PARTICIPLES 82 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ The following are some of the verbs in English whose past participle forms (with the exception of hurt and hear) are different from the past tense forms. Verb Past Participle Verb Past Participle be been know known begin begun ride ridden break broken ring rung choose chosen run run do done see seen drink drunk show shown drive driven sing sung eat eaten speak spoken fly flown steal stolen forgive forgiven swim swum give given take taken go gone tear torn grow grown throw thrown hear heard wear worn hurt hurt write written Error Examples WRONG: He has sang in the choir for ten years. RIGHT: He has sung in the choir for ten years. WRONG: I saw him after he had ran for five miles. RIGHT: I saw him after he had run for five miles. WRONG: The president’s large black limousine was drived by a chauffeur. RIGHT: The president’s large black limousine was driven by a chauffeur. WRONG: Children are to be saw and not heard. RIGHT: Children are to be seen and not heard. WRONG: Having heared the joke before, I did not find it funny the second time. RIGHT: Having heard the joke before, I did not find it funny the second time. WRONG: The class could have began on time if the teacher had not been late. RIGHT: The class could have begun on time if the teacher had not been late. WRONG: The breaked lamp was lying in little pieces on the rug. RIGHT: The broken lamp was lying in little pieces on the rug. www.petersons.com Chapter 4: Verbs 83 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error with the past participle. 1. By the time Joan arrived, all of the food had been ate. 2. Having stolen the money, the thief ran down the street as fast as he could. 3. John had gave his speech when Bob was finally able to get to the meeting. 4. Wrote in 1847, the opera has never enjoyed popular success. 5. The professor told the class that they should have known the correct answer. 6. Claire has not wore her new coat since she came to Florida. 7. Betty began to cry when she realized that her new dress was torn. 8. Never having flied before, Mark was very excited as he drove to the airport. 9. I would like to have rang the bell earlier. 10. If he had shown the official his passport, he would not have had any problems. 11. She has began to look like her mother. 12. That old horse has been ridden by children for years. 13. I would not have did it if he had not made me nervous. 14. The broke chair had only three legs. 15. He claims to have hurted his leg in the game last night. Answers X 1. (had been eaten). See rule 4. X C 2. C 10. X 3. (had given his speech). See rule 2. X 11. (She has begun). See rule 1. C X 12. 4. (Written in 1847). See rule 9. X C 5. 13. (would not have done). See rule 3. X 6. (has not worn). See rule 1. X 14. (broken chair). See rule 7. C 7. X 15. (to have hurt). See rule 5. X 8. (Never having flown). See rule 6. 9. (to have rung). See rule 5. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 8: Past Participles 84 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ PRESENT AND PERFECT PARTICIPLES AND INFINITIVES 1. Present participles (V 1 ing) in introductory verb phrases express action of the same time as the main verb. same time ∧ V1ING PAST Looking out the window, I saw John on his bicycle yesterday. same time ∧ V1ING PRES. Looking at the ocean, I get a sense of peace and calm. 2. Perfect participles (having 1 past participle) in introductory verb phrases express action that occurred prior to the main verb’s action. PERF. PART. PAST Having taken a shower, I went to bed. (I took a shower before I went to bed.) PERF. PART. PRES. Having lost all our money, we have to return from our vacation early. (We lost our money, and now we have to go home early.) 3. The present infinitive (to 1 V) expresses action that occurs at the same time as or future to the main verb. PRES. INFIN. PRES. I hope to pass the test tomorrow. (To pass is future to hope.) PRES. INFIN. PRES. I wanted to leave early yesterday. (To leave is same time as or future to wanted.) 4. The perfect infinitive (to 1 have 1 past participle) expresses action that occurred prior to the main verb’s action. PRES. PERF. INFIN. I hope to have passed the test I took yesterday. (I hope now that I passed the test I took yesterday.) PRES. PERF. INFIN. He is reported to have died yesterday. (He apparently died yesterday and now his death is being reported.) PAST PERF. INFIN. He was reported to have died the day before. (He apparently died the day before his death was reported.) PRES. PERF. INFIN. I would like to have lived in the seventeenth century. (I wish now that I had lived at some time in the past.) www.petersons.com Chapter 4: Verbs 85 ................................................................. WRONG: Getting a driver’s license, Paul was able to drive from Boston to Los Angeles. RIGHT: Having gotten a driver’s license, Paul was able to drive from Boston to Los Angeles. WRONG: When I saw you yesterday, I would have liked to have stopped and talked to you. RIGHT: When I saw you yesterday, I would have liked to stop and talk to you. WRONG: She is reputed to be a spy during World War II. RIGHT: She is reputed to have been a spy during World War II. WRONG: He is said to having written a great novel. RIGHT: He is said to have written a great novel. Skill Builder 9: Present and Perfect Participles and Infinitives Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the participle or the infinitive. 1. They chose not to have attended the meeting. 2. She would have liked to study abroad. 3. The notorious criminal is reported to having surrendered yesterday. 4. Applying at the University of Arizona, she anxiously awaited her acceptance. 5. They are presumed to die in the crash last weekend. 6. Having studied diligently, he found the examination quite easy. 7. Writing the letter, she mailed it on her way to work. 8. The police officer wanted to give me a ride home. 9. Catching several fish, they cooked them for dinner. 10. Betty should have remembered to call me last night. Answers X 1. (chose not to attend). See rule 3. C 6. X 7. (Having written). See rule 2. C 2. C X 8. 3. (to have surrendered). See rule 4. X 9. (Having caught). See rule 2. X 4. (Having applied). See rule 2. X 5. (to have died). See rule 4. C 10. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Error Examples 86 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ EXERCISES: VERBS Part A Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the verb. 1. Mr. and Mrs. Jones stopped smoking a year ago and have not started again. 2. After jogging, I was so hungry that I could have ate a horse. 3. Many people who were opposed to use nuclear energy in any form demonstrated against the opening of the new nuclear power plant. 4. The license bureau demands that a person renew his license before it expires. 5. For several years now, the student body is attempting to gain more influence over university policies. 6. If I will get the money in time, I will go to California on my next vacation. 7. After agreeing to make the necessary changes in the contract, Mr. Martin had his secretary type the amended version for us to sign. 8. Much to his surprise, when Robert arrived in London, he had found several relatives waiting for him at the airport. 9. Reading several books on that subject, Bill considered himself an expert. 10. Ralph wishes that he went to the bank this morning before he went to work. Part B Directions: In the Sentence Completion questions below, one or more words are left out of each sentence. Under each sentence, you will see four words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that completes the sentence correctly, then write it in the space provided in the book or on a separate sheet of paper. 1. They told me that I ________ the tap water in that country. (A) (B) (C) (D) must not have drank could not drunk should not have drunk could have drink 2. The doctor was very surprised that his patient had let his condition ________ so much before calling him. (A) (B) (C) (D) deteriorate to deteriorate to deteriorating deteriorating www.petersons.com 3. If he had applied by August 15, the university ________ him this semester. (A) (B) (C) (D) would accepted had accepted should have accept would have accepted 4. When we finally bought stock in that company, the market ________ its peak and the stock was declining in value. (A) (B) (C) (D) did already reach has already reached was already reached had already reached Chapter 4: Verbs 87 ................................................................. to have wrote to have written to have writing have written 6. Last year in the middle of the most severe drought in recent history, the already dwindling tribe ________ finally to leave its ancestral land and to look for a new place to live. (A) (B) (C) (D) had decided decided has decided decides 7. It was important that they ________ before the curtain went up last night. (A) (B) (C) (D) arrive have arrived arrived had arrived (A) (B) (C) (D) to tremble trembles trembled trembling 9. The babysitter agreed ________ the children before putting them to bed. (A) (B) (C) (D) for bathing to bath to bathe to giving a bath 10. When the famous pianist was a child, he was accustomed to ________ for several hours a day. (A) (B) (C) (D) practice practicing practiced be practicing www.petersons.com exercises (A) (B) (C) (D) 8. I could see Susan’s hands ________ slightly as she placed her papers on the podium and prepared to address the audience. ............................................................................................ 5. They are said ________ a dynamic new play. 88 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ ANSWER KEY AND EXPLANATIONS Part A C 1. C 7. X 2. (could have eaten). See Past Participles, page 81. X 8. (he found). See Tense, page 67. X 3. (opposed to using). See Verbals, page 77. X C 4. 9. (Having read). See Present and Perfect Participles and Infinitives, page 84. X 5. (has been attempting). See Tense, page 67. X 6. (If I get). See Conditionals, page 73. X 10. (that he had gone). See Wishes, page 71. Part B 1. C 2. A 3. D 4. D 5. B 6. B 7. A 8. D 9. C 10. B 1. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Modals, page 75. 6. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Tense, page 67. 2. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B), (C), and (D), see Verbals, page 77. 7. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B), (C), and (D), see Verbs of “Demand,” page 70. 3. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A), (B), and (C), see Conditionals, page 73. 8. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A), (B), and (C), see Verbals, page 77. 4. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A), (B), and (C), see Tense, page 67. 9. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Verbals, page 77. 5. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), (D), see Present and Perfect Participles and Infinitives, page 84. 10. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Verbals, page 77. www.petersons.com Chapter 4: Verbs 89 ................................................................. • Common verb-tense problems are related to the present perfect, past tense and past perfect. It is possible to use the past perfect in sentences where before or after show sequence, but it is not necessary. • There are two kinds of conditions—real and unreal. Real conditions are used for possible situations. Unreal conditions are used for impossible or unreal situations. • After all modals, use the simple form of the verb. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ SUMMING IT UP Pronouns ............................................................................... • Relative pronouns • Personal pronouns—case • Who/whom • Possessives • Faulty reference • Person • Number • Those modified • Summing it up RELATIVE PRONOUNS Who, whom, which, that, and whose are relative pronouns used to introduce relative clauses (adjective clauses). For the who/whom problem, see page 95. 1. Who and whom are used for people. I saw the man who is famous for inventing plastic. Give it to the man whom you already know. 2. Which is used for nonrestrictive, or nonessential, clauses; that is, clauses that are not essential to the meaning of the sentence. Note that nonessential clauses are always preceded and followed by a comma. The 104 bus, which is always late, should arrive at 4 p.m. at the shopping center. 3. That is used for restrictive, or essential clauses. You do not use a comma with essential clauses. Here is the man that can answer your questions. Did you find the book that you wanted to buy? 91 chapter 5 OVERVIEW 92 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 4. Whose is used to show possession. It can be followed by persons or things. This is the man whose car was towed away. Do you know the doctor whose children I teach? Error Examples WRONG: He is the student which always arrives late. RIGHT: He is the student who always arrives late. OR He is the student that always arrives late. WRONG: Saudi Arabia is a country who exports oil all over the world. RIGHT: Saudi Arabia is a country that exports oil all over the world. WRONG: We visited the building what is famous for its unusual design. RIGHT: We visited the building, which is famous for its unusual design. OR We visited the building that is famous for its unusual design. WRONG: There was a story in the paper about the man that his car was stolen. RIGHT: There was a story in the paper about the man whose car was stolen. Skill Builder 1: Relative Pronouns Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the relative pronoun. 1. I like novels who deal with philosophical questions. 2. The company did not want to hire a man that his experience was so limited. 3. The family whose house burned down was on television. 4. She wore a dress what everyone considered extravagant. 5. The train, which goes to Flower Square, will arrive at any moment. 6. The ship that we boarded in Rio was bound for Marseilles. 7. John did not want to do business with a man which had been in prison. 8. Take your car back to the man who sold it to you. 9. That is the baby which has been in the incubator for three months. 10. The woman that her photograph was in the paper is making a speech at the town hall tonight. www.petersons.com Chapter 5: Pronouns 93 ................................................................. X 1. (novels that deal). See rule 3. X X 2. (a man whose experience). See rule 4. 7. (a man who) OR (a man that). See rules 1 and 3. C 8. C 3. X X 4. a dress that). See rule 3. 9. (the baby who) OR (the baby that). See rules 1 and 3. C 5. C 6. X 10. (woman whose photograph). See rule 4. PERSONAL PRONOUNS—CASE 1. Subject pronouns (I, you, he, she, it, we, and they) are used in the subject position and after the verb to be. S They arrived safely last night. BE 1 S PRON. It was they who knocked on the door last night. 2. Object pronouns (me, you, him, her, it, us, and them) are used as objects of verbs and prepositions and as subjects of infinitives. VERB OBJ. I told him the news. PREP. OBJ. Between you and me, the economic situation looks bad. S INFIN. We asked him to bring a salad to the party. a. Pronouns in apposition* are in the same case as the pronouns they follow. Example: Let’s (Let us), you and me, go dancing Friday night. Us is the object of let. You and me must also be in the objective case. b. Pronouns after the conjunctions as or than should be subject pronouns when they function as subjects. S He is as tall as I (am tall). S John plays soccer as well as he (plays soccer). S They are more diligent students than we (are). c. The correct forms of the reflexive pronouns for him and them are himself and themselves, NOT hisself or theirselves. * An appositive is a noun or pronoun that follows another noun or pronoun and identifies the first noun or pronoun. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Answers 94 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Error Examples WRONG: Jane and him planned to go to the movies. RIGHT: Jane and he planned to go to the movies. WRONG: She sold the car to Mary and he. RIGHT: She sold the car to Mary and him. WRONG: I never met a man as kind as him. RIGHT: I never met a man as kind as he. WRONG: For you and I arriving on time will be difficult. RIGHT: For you and me arriving on time will be difficult. WRONG: He specifically told them, Bob and he, to get ready. RIGHT: He specifically told them, Bob and him, to get ready. WRONG: Several times during the semester the teacher asked he to speak to the class. RIGHT: Several times during the semester the teacher asked him to speak to the class. WRONG: Ask him to do it hisself. RIGHT: Ask him to do it himself. WRONG: They do not want to go by theirselves. RIGHT: They do not want to go by themselves. Skill Builder 2: Personal Pronouns—Case Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in pronoun case. 1. I was surprised to learn that Betty and him were hurt in the accident. 2. I often remember when Paul and I visited Rome. 3. He moved the furniture by hisself. 4. She gave us, Margaret and I, the notes we missed in class. 5. They were sitting by themselves next to the swimming pool. 6. That project is the responsibility of Susan and she. 7. Let us keep this secret between you and me. 8. Do not forget to give the message to Bob and me. 9. The tourists asked us, my cousin and me, how to get to the museum. 10. Please be sure to notify my husband or I when the package arrives. 11. The children assembled the toy house by theirselves. 12. How often do you have the opportunity to meet a man as intelligent as him? 13. For the majority of us the issue is rather confusing. 14. Mary will never be as rich as I. 15. It is her, the one whom nobody likes. www.petersons.com Chapter 5: Pronouns 95 ................................................................. X 1. (Betty and he were hurt). See rule 1. C 2. X C 9. X 10. (my husband or me). See rule 2. 3. (by himself). See rule 2c. X 11. (by themselves). See rule 2c. X 4. (Margaret and me). See rule 2a. X 12. (as intelligent as he). See rule 2b. C 5. C 13. X 6. (of Susan and her). See rule 2. C 14. C 7. X 15. (It is she). See rule 1. C 8. WHO/WHOM Who and whoever are subject pronouns. Whom and whomever are object pronouns. 1. In general, the patterns for who and whoever are: a. who (whoever) 1 verb S WHO 1 VERB The woman who sang yesterday has studied voice for years. S WHO 1 VERB Who came to the party? S WHOEVER 1 VERB Give the money to whoever needs it. S WHOEVER 1 VERB I said that whoever had finished could leave. b. whom (whomever) 1 subject 1 verb OBJ. WHOM 1 S 1 VERB The woman whom I met yesterday is a voice teacher. OBJ. WHOMEVER 1 S 1 VERB Give it to whomever you like. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Answers 96 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 2. Sometimes expressions like the following separate who (whoever) or whom (whomever) from its own verb or subject and verb: “I think” “she said” “we know” “do you know” S WHO ∧ VERB He is a student who we believe can do the job. S WHO ∧ VERB Give the job to the person who you think is best suited for it. OBJ. WHOM ∧ S 1 VERB He is a man whom I feel you can trust. S WHOEVER ∧ VERB Tell the story to whoever you think should hear it. Error Examples WRONG: I saw the man who John spoke to. RIGHT: I saw the man whom John spoke to. WRONG: Do not speak to people whom are strangers. RIGHT: Do not speak to people who are strangers. WRONG: Take your problem to the person whom you think can help you. RIGHT: Take your problem to the person who you think can help you. WRONG: She gave it to the only person who she believed. RIGHT: She gave it to the only person whom she believed. WRONG: They will award the prize to whomever is best. RIGHT: They will award the prize to whoever is best. WRONG: They chose whomever was most interested. RIGHT: They chose whoever was most interested. www.petersons.com Chapter 5: Pronouns 97 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is a who/whom error. 1. I met the new people whom I thought were from your country. 2. You should ask advice from people who you trust. 3. Ask whoever is willing to come early. 4. There is the new director who I think you met before. 5. The man who you think is a doctor is actually a male nurse. 6. She was the person who the teacher chose to speak at the final ceremony. 7. It is pleasant to be with people who like us and whom we like. 8. Ask anyone who you think is interested to join the team. 9. Whom do you think will be ready on time? 10. Take this to whomever the supervisor chose to do the job. 11. The lawyer whom handled that case disappeared. 12. Assign this project to whoever you like. 13. Deliver this envelope to whomever answers the door. 14. It was Jack and I who he thought were at fault in the situation. 15. Many women whom are working would prefer to be at home. Answers X 1. (who I thought were). See rules 1a and 2. X X 2. (whom you trust). See rule 1b. C 10. X 11. (who handled). See rule 1a. C 3. X X 4. (whom I think you met). See rules 1b and 2. 12. (to whomever you like). See rule 1b. X C 5. 13. (whoever answers). See rule 1a. X 6. (whom the teacher chose). See rule 1b. C 14. X C 7. 15. (who are working). See rule 1a. C 8. 9. (who do you think will). See rules 1a and 2. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 3: Who/Whom 98 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ POSSESSIVES Use the possessive case* with gerunds (V 1 ing used as a noun). NOTE It’s is not a possessive pronoun but a contraction of it is. POSSESSIVE V 1 ING I resented their interrupting our conversations. POSSESSIVE V 1 ING His swimming is getting a lot better. POSS. V 1 ING Because of your leaving late, you will have to take a taxi in order to catch your train. Error Examples WRONG: Susan did not like him making a lot of noise while she was studying. RIGHT: Susan did not like his making a lot of noise while she was studying. WRONG: Betty cannot remember you telling her that story. RIGHT: Betty cannot remember your telling her that story. WRONG: They did not like him calling so late at night. RIGHT: They did not like his calling so late at night. WRONG: I approve of one living on his own before marriage. RIGHT: I approve of one’s living on his own before marriage. WRONG: I could not sleep last night because of them shouting next door. RIGHT: I could not sleep last night because of their shouting next door. WRONG: The chairman congratulated us on us winning the contest. RIGHT: The chairman congratulated us on our winning the contest. WRONG: When we had a dog, I can remember it chasing birds. RIGHT: When we had a dog, I can remember its chasing birds. WRONG: Professor Jones was angry at me coming late to class every day. RIGHT: Professor Jones was angry at my coming late to class every day. * Remember that the possessive pronouns are my, your, his, her, its, our, their, and one’s. www.petersons.com Chapter 5: Pronouns 99 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error with the possessive pronoun. 1. Our neighbors complained about our playing the stereo too loudly. 2. I sadly thought of you saying good-bye. 3. Were you surprised at their buying a new car? 4. I cannot imagine his refusing that job. 5. What did you think of them leaving so abruptly? 6. My neighbor has a lovely cat, but it meowing bothers me at night. 7. Him playing the drums day and night made his roommates very angry. 8. Her winning first prize delighted us a great deal. 9. I really appreciate your trying to arrive on time. 10. Mrs. Allen was concerned about me having to drive so far every day. 11. Your telling him that might disturb him a great deal. 12. His family was elated when they heard of him winning the race. 13. Mr. Smith was upset by their fast driving. 14. Did the teacher mind us whispering in the back of the room? 15. My boss finally approved of me taking my vacation in August. Answers C 1. C X 2. (your saying good-bye) X 10. (my having to drive) C 3. C 11. C 4. X 12. (his winning) X 5. (their leaving) C 13. X 6. (its meowing). See note. X 14. (our whispering) X 7. (His playing) X 15. (my taking) C 8. 9. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 4: Possessives 100 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ FAULTY REFERENCE The antecedent* of a pronoun must be clearly understood. ANTECEDENT PRON. When Betty was in college, she wrote to her family every week. (She clearly refers to Betty.) ANTECEDENT PRON. As Bob got off the plane, he waved to his father. (He clearly refers to Bob.) ANTECEDENT PRON. As Don explained his theory to me, I found it fascinating. (It clearly refers to theory.) Error Examples WRONG: Mary told Paula that she had to read Plato’s Republic. (She can refer to Mary or Paula.) RIGHT: Mary told Paula, “I have to read Plato’s Republic.” WRONG: Paul saw his friend as he was walking across the campus. (He can refer to Paul or his friend.) RIGHT: While Paul was walking across the campus, he saw his friend. WRONG: Sylvia and Mary saw a movie yesterday, and she said it was wonderful. (She can refer to Sylvia or Mary.) RIGHT: Sylvia and Mary saw a movie yesterday, and Sylvia said it was wonderful. WRONG: I put the vase on the glass table and it broke. (It can refer to vase or table.) RIGHT: The vase broke as I put it on the glass table. WRONG: In the book it says to cook the meat for several hours. (It has no antecedent in this context.) RIGHT: The book says to cook the meat for several hours. * An antecedent is the noun or pronoun to which a pronoun refers. www.petersons.com Chapter 5: Pronouns 101 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if the pronoun does not clearly refer to one antecedent or if it has no antecedent. 1. Mr. Smith told Mr. Jones that he had lost a lot of money in the stock market. 2. In the telephone directory, it says to call directory assistance in that situation. 3. When Peter finished the examination, he gave it to the professor. 4. Cathy saw her friend as she was driving home from work. 5. When John put a new frame on the picture, it looked strange. 6. The laundry was not dry enough for Susan to bring it into the house. 7. He put all his savings in the stock market, and it suffered great losses that year. 8. When Jack was in the navy, he learned electronics. 9. In the newspaper it says there is renewed interest in the silver market. 10. The A Team played the B Team yesterday, and now it is in first place. Answers X C 6. X 2. (The telephone directory says). See fifth error example. 7. (and the stock market suffered). See fourth error example. C 8. C 3. X X 4. (As Cathy was driving home from work, she saw her friend.) See second error example. 9. (The newspaper says). See fifth error example. X 10. (and now the A Team is in first place). See third error example. X X 1. (Mr. Smith told Mr. Jones, “I have lost.”) See first error example. 5. (the picture looked strange). See fourth error example. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 5: Faulty Reference 102 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ PERSON Do not carelessly change the person of a pronoun. PRON. A student has to expect to work hard when he goes to college. OR A student has to expect to work hard when she goes to college. PRON. One should brush one’s teeth twice daily. OR PRON. One should brush his teeth twice daily. a. A student, a person, or one can use the following third-person singular pronouns: he, she, or he or she; him, her, or him or her; and his, her, or his or her. A student must renew his or her library card every year. b. The possessive pronoun for one can be one’s or his or her (see also note a) but never ones. Error Examples WRONG: A person can expect to receive a traffic ticket when we drive too fast. RIGHT: A person can expect to receive a traffic ticket when he drives too fast. WRONG: When one has a toothache, you should go to the dentist. RIGHT: When one has a toothache, one should go to the dentist. WRONG: One should remember to pay your telephone bill on time. RIGHT: One should remember to pay one’s telephone bill on time. WRONG: One should have ones teeth checked regularly. RIGHT: One should have one’s teeth checked regularly. www.petersons.com Chapter 5: Pronouns 103 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error with the person of the pronoun. 1. When a person eats well, you feel well. 2. For successful completion of this exercise, one must give his complete attention to the task at hand. 3. One should always pay your rent promptly. 4. One should never forget his obligations to his family. 5. One often forgets one’s early failures. 6. When a person is learning to play a musical instrument, we must practice several hours a day. 7. When one goes through life, we meet many challenges. 8. One can always rely on one’s friends in time of need. 9. When a person goes to a foreign country, he must expect many things to be different. 10. When you find yourself in an air-conditioned theater, one often wishes he had a sweater. Answers X 1. (he feels). See first error example and note a. C 2. X 3. (one’s rent). See third error example. C 4. C 5. X 6. (he must). See first error example. X 7. (one meets) OR (he meets). See second error example and note a. C 8. C 9. X 10. (when one finds oneself). See second error example. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 6: Person 104 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ NUMBER* 1. Pronouns must agree in number with their antecedents (the noun or pronoun to which they refer). ANTECEDENT PRON. Many of the people in Ubudu live their whole lives in poverty. ANTECEDENT PRON. A person should love his parents. ANTECEDENT PRON. Great music can inspire and move people with its beauty. 2. The following indefinite pronouns are singular and take singular pronouns: each, either, neither, one and all words ending in -one, -body, or -thing, such as anybody, nothing, and everybody. ANTECEDENT PRON. Each of the women took off her hat. ANTECEDENT PRON. Everyone should bring their book to class. ANTECEDENT PRON. I knew one of the students, but I could not remember her name. ANTECEDENT PRON. Nobody in that office knows what he is supposed to do. ANTECEDENT PRON. PRON. Everyone in the class should do her own work herself. 3. When compound subjects are joined by neither . . . nor or either . . . or, the pronoun will agree with the subject nearer the verb. S S (nearer the verb) PRON. Neither my mother nor my sisters could lend me their sewing machine. S S (nearer the verb) PRON. Either my sisters or my mother will lend me her typewriter. 4. Some words appear to be plural but are actually singular. Some of these are: physics, mathematics, economics, news, and politics. ANTECEDENT PRON. Politics interests me as it affects the economy. Error Examples WRONG: Modern music, including disco and rock ’n roll, reflects modern society in their themes and musical qualities. RIGHT: Modern music, including disco and rock ’n roll, reflects modern society in its themes and musical qualities. (The antecedent of its is music.) WRONG: Every woman can find their place in the world. RIGHT: Every woman can find her place in the world. (The antecedent of her is woman.) * Note to student: It is advisable to study this section after you study Subject-Verb Agreement, page 159. www.petersons.com Chapter 5: Pronouns 105 ................................................................. WRONG: Either Paul or his parents will let me use his car. RIGHT: Either Paul or his parents will let me use their car. (The antecedent of their is parents.) WRONG: Every one of the students wrote their names on the paper. RIGHT: Every one of the students wrote his name on the paper. (The antecedent of his is one.) WRONG: Each of the boys should have their teeth checked. RIGHT: Each of the boys should have his teeth checked. (The antecedent of his is each.) WRONG: Neither of the girls had remembered to bring their notebook. RIGHT: Neither of the girls had remembered to bring her notebook. (The antecedent of her is neither.) WRONG: I asked everybody to do their best. RIGHT: I asked everybody to do his or her best. (The antecedent of his or her is everybody.) WRONG: Did anybody do the work themselves? RIGHT: Did anybody do the work himself? (The antecedent of himself is anybody.) WRONG: Mathematics has always interested me with their concrete yet abstract nature. RIGHT: Mathematics has always interested me with its concrete yet abstract nature. (The antecedent of its is mathematics.) Skill Builder 7: Number Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in number agreement of a pronoun and its antecedent. 1. Every one of my girl friends has given their opinion of me. 2. Every person who asked was permitted to bring his or her book to class to use during the examination. 3. Neither the doctor nor her patients had an opportunity to express their feelings. 4. I am looking for a person who has forgotten their suitcase. 5. Each of the children may use the swimming pool if he promises to be careful. 6. Neither my sisters nor my mother has remembered her promise to me. 7. Many of the students explained his situation to me personally. 8. If anybody is in the office, they will answer their telephone. 9. If everybody who had come to the meeting had brought their report with them, the meeting would have gone a lot more smoothly. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ WRONG: Neither the stars nor the moon shone their light on us. RIGHT: Neither the stars nor the moon shone its light on us. (The antecedent of its is moon.) 106 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 10. Neither the cat nor the dogs will eat the food I bought for him. 11. One of my daughters has left her purse on the coffee table. 12. Neither of the police officers was willing to give me his name. 13. The news from that country is well known for their objectivity. 14. Either the boss or her workers will have to give a little of their time to solve this problem. 15. Great works of art, such as the Mona Lisa and Whistler’s Mother, can be deceptive in their simplicity. 16. One sometimes gives up something they want for the sake of others. 17. One of the first students to come into the room could not find his name on the list. 18. Nobody lost their patience even though the meeting was long and boring. 19. Everybody must pay their fair share toward the gift. 20. All of my friends brought their husbands with them to my party. Answers X 1. (her opinion). The antecedent of her is one. See rule 2. C 11. C 12. C 2. X C 3. X 4. (his suitcase). The antecedent of his is person. See rule 1. 13. (for its objectivity). The antecedent of its is news. See rule 4. C 14. 15. C 5. C C 6. X X 7. (their situation). The antecedent of their is many. See rule 1. 16. (one wants) OR (he wants). The antecedent of one or he is one. See rule 2. C 17. X 18. (his patience). The antecedent of his is nobody. See rule 2. X 19. (his fair share). The antecedent of his is everybody. See rule 2. C 20. X X X 8. (he will answer his telephone) The antecedent of he and his is anybody. See rule 2. 9. (his report with him). The antecedent of his and him is everybody. See rule 2. 10. (for them). The antecedent of them is dogs. See rule 3. www.petersons.com Chapter 5: Pronouns 107 ................................................................. The demonstrative pronoun those can be followed by a phrase or clause that modifies it. CLAUSE ............................................................................................ THOSE MODIFIED NOTE The personal No one is allowed in the room except those who have paid. pronouns they PHRASE and them should Those waiting to see the doctor may go in now. not be modified by a phrase or Error Examples clause. WRONG: They who need a receipt should sign here. RIGHT: Those who need a receipt should sign here. WRONG: For them interested in learning, the university offers a good program. RIGHT: For those interested in learning, the university offers a good program. WRONG: We invited only them we like to the party. RIGHT: We invited only those we like to the party. Skill Builder 8: Those Modified Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the demonstrative pronouns. 1. She told her secret to only those she trusted. 2. He will consider hiring only them currently studying art. 3. The police turned the crowd away since only they with a permit could protest. 4. Please send this pamphlet to those who have expressed an interest in this study. 5. This line is for them with discount coupons. 6. For them of you who appreciate good music, there is an excellent concert this evening. 7. For them who like to travel to a warm place, Fiji is a paradise. 8. The chairman of the board will talk to those whom he has already interviewed. 9. Those who wish to bring their children to the party may do so. 10. They who arrive early will get the best selection of seats. Answers C 1. X 2. (those currently studying art) X 3. (those with a permit) C 4. X 5. (those with discount coupons) X 6. (those of you who appreciate good music) X 7. (those who like to travel) C 8. C 9. X 10. (Those who arrive early) www.petersons.com 108 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ EXERCISES: PRONOUNS Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error with the pronoun. 1. When one has many problems, he should try to solve them one at a time. 2. Mary could never understand him wanting to be a nurse. 3. I often think back to the time when mutual friends introduced Paul and I. 4. Claire noticed many people who had been waiting hours to buy their tickets. 5. When the children realized that they were by theirselves in the dark, they became really frightened. 6. In the course of life one should always remember their old friends. 7. Do you remember the teacher that his daughter became a doctor? 8. For them of you who wish to know more about journalism, we recommend that you order a book from the following list. 9. Neither my aunt nor my cousins were able to explain their behavior. 10. Mary was surprised to realize that it was us, her old school friends, calling her from Paris. 11. The dean asked all the students, including Betty and I, to show our visitor every possible courtesy. 12. Give the refunds to those who have filled out the correct form. 13. They say that English can be a very difficult language for one to learn in his later years. 14. Modern society has many problems that they must solve. 15. Elaine met the actress who you admire so much. 16. Bob called to his old friend John as he walked across the campus. 17. In the paper it says it is going to rain today. 18. Did you ever see a man as tall as he? 19. Neither of the girls remembered to give I her notebook. 20. I am worried about your having to review so much material. www.petersons.com Chapter 5: Pronouns 109 ................................................................. 1. C 12. X 2. (his wanting). See Possessives, page 98. C 13. X X 3. (Paul and me). See Personal Pronouns—Case, page 93. 14. (it must solve). See Number, page 104. X C 4. 15. (whom you admire). See Who/Whom, page 95. X 5. (by themselves). See Personal Pronouns—Case, page 93. X X 6. (one’s old friends) OR (his old friends). See Person, page 102. 16. (As Bob walked across the campus, he called to his old friend John.). See Faulty Reference, page 100. X 7. (teacher whose daughter). See Relative Pronouns, page 91. 17. (The paper says). See Faulty Reference, page 100. C 18. X X 8. (For those of you). See Those Modified, page 107. X 19. (to give me). See Personal Pronouns—Case, page 93. C 9. C 20. X 10. (it was we). See Personal Pronouns—Case, page 93. X 11. (including Betty and me). See Personal Pronouns—Case, page 93. exercises www.petersons.com answers C ............................................................................................ ANSWERS AND EXPLANATIONS 110 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ • • • SUMMING IT UP Who, whom, which, that, and those are relative pronouns and are used to introduce relative clauses (adjective clauses). I, you, he, she, it, we, and they are subject pronouns and are used in the subject position and after the verb to be. Me, you, him, her, it, us, and them are object pronouns and are used as objects of verbs and prepositions and as subjects of infinitives. www.petersons.com Basic Patterns ............................................................................... • Indirect objects • Order of adverbs • Embedded questions • To/for (purpose) • Double subjects • Clauses • Summing it up INDIRECT OBJECTS Some verbs may be followed by two objects (an indirect object and a direct object). The following shows the patterns used when verbs take two objects. 1. Some verbs may use the following two patterns: I.O. D.O. My father often gives me a gift. OR D.O. 1 TO 1 OBJ. My father often gives a gift to me. Some other verbs like give are: bring, send, offer, pass, take, tell, read, write, teach, and sell. 2. Some verbs may use the following two patterns: I.O. D.O. John usually buys Mary a gift. OR D.O. 1 FOR 1 OBJ. John usually buys a gift for Mary. Some other verbs like buy are: fix, make, and get. 111 chapter 6 OVERVIEW 112 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 3. Some verbs use only the following pattern: D.O. 1 TO 1 OBJ. He explained his idea to us. Some other verbs like explain are: announce, describe, deliver, mention, say, report, and return. 4. Some verbs may use only the following pattern: I.O. D.O. I asked Mary a question. Some other verbs like ask are: cost and charge. Error Examples WRONG: Susan’s friend sent to her a beautiful silk dress from China. RIGHT: Susan’s friend sent her a beautiful silk dress from China. OR Susan’s friend sent a beautiful silk dress to her from China. WRONG: John fixed the broken lamp to Harold. RIGHT: John fixed the broken lamp for Harold. WRONG: The professor explained me the difficult point of grammar. RIGHT: The professor explained the difficult point of grammar to me. WRONG: The new suit cost over forty dollars to me. RIGHT: The new suit cost me over forty dollars. WRONG: The store charged over fifteen dollars to me to alter the jacket I bought. RIGHT: The store charged me over fifteen dollars to alter the jacket I bought. Skill Builder 1: Indirect Objects Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an indirect object error. 1. We returned the defective merchandise to the store immediately. 2. I hope you will write to me long letters while you are away. 3. When do you think you can deliver them the package? 4. That is the third time you have asked me the same question. 5. My mother is making for Mary a new skirt. 6. Please pass the potatoes to me after you take some. 7. The belt buckle cost over ten dollars to Bob. 8. He taught to me everything he knew. 9. When she was abroad, Laura got several pairs of earrings for her mother. 10. He sent me a beautiful letter from Spain. www.petersons.com Chapter 6: Basic Patterns 113 ................................................................. C X X C X 1. 2. (write me long letters) OR (write long letters to me). See rule 1. 3. (deliver the package to them). See rule 3. 4. 5. (is making Mary a new skirt) OR (is making a new skirt for Mary). See rule 2. C X X C C 6. 7. (cost Bob over ten dollars). See rule 4. 8. (taught me everything) OR (taught everything he knew to me). See rule 1. 9. 10. ORDER OF ADVERBS 1. In general, place adverbs (or adverbial phrases) after the verb or after the object, if any. (Do not separate the subject from the verb or the verb from its object.) The two patterns are: a. Subject 1 verb 1 adverb S 1 VERB 1 ADV. He works here . b. Subject 1 verb 1 object 1 adverb or adverbial phrase He wants to eat soon. S 1 VERB 1 OBJ. ADV. PHRASE We see them from time to time . 2. Some adverbs can come before a single-word verb or the main verb. ADV. VERB He promptly left the room. ADV. MAIN VERB He was quickly escorted from the room. 3. Single-word adverbs of frequency usually come after the verb to be and before a single-word verb or the main verb. (Note: Common adverbs of frequency are: often, rarely, sometimes, frequently, occasionally, ever, never, seldom, usually, and always.) BE ADV. He is never on time. ADV. VERB I often see her. ADV. MAIN VERB I had frequently noticed her. 4. Still comes before a single-word verb or the main verb in affirmative sentences and before the auxiliary in negative sentences. MAIN VERB He is still waiting for you. AUX. He still has not answered my questions. 5. In general, the order of final adverbs is place and then time. PLACE TIME He went to Europe last summer. PLACE TIME I saw him at the library last night. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Answers 114 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Error Examples WRONG: John in the classroom is waiting. RIGHT: John is waiting in the classroom. WRONG: Betty is writing in her bedroom letters. RIGHT: Betty is writing letters in her bedroom. WRONG: Alex played with great passion the piano. RIGHT: Alex played the piano with great passion. WRONG: I write sometimes letters to my parents. RIGHT: I sometimes write letters to my parents. WRONG: John waited seldom for me. RIGHT: John seldom waited for me. WRONG: He rarely is on time. RIGHT: He is rarely on time. WRONG: Bob prepares once in a while dinner. RIGHT: Bob prepares dinner once in a while. WRONG: She bought yesterday several new dresses. RIGHT: She bought several new dresses yesterday. WRONG: They wrote during the summer to us. RIGHT: They wrote to us during the summer. WRONG: He sold immediately the gold watch. RIGHT: He sold the gold watch immediately. WRONG: He has read before that book. RIGHT: He has read that book before. WRONG: He is studying still in the library. RIGHT: He is still studying in the library. WRONG: They have not still finished. RIGHT: They still have not finished. WRONG: He sent his daughter in the summer to college. RIGHT: He sent his daughter to college in the summer. www.petersons.com Chapter 6: Basic Patterns 115 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the placement of the adverb. 1. He hopes to Rome to be able to go. 2. The doctor sees patients only in the afternoon. 3. David last evening went to the movies. 4. He executed with verve the difficult piano passage. 5. He found several useful books in my bookcase. 6. He wants still to move to London next year. 7. I observe frequently his behavior. 8. He recently met with his new advisor. 9. Tom lately has been working on his new book. 10. He was suddenly amused by her spontaneity. 11. He wrote usually in that unconventional style. 12. They still do not appreciate their good luck. 13. Jill during her college years lived in France. 14. Has he seen the city before? 15. Karl still has not remembered where he put his keys. 16. The teacher posted on her office door her office hours. 17. He is often accused of not being a serious person. 18. Betty noticed rarely my hard work. 19. John last night telephoned me. 20. He went to the kitchen in the middle of the night for a glass of water. Answers X 1. (He hopes to be able to go to Rome.) See rule 1, pattern 1a. X 7. (I frequently observe.) See rule 3. C 2. C 8. X 3. (David went to the movies last evening.) See rule 1, pattern a, and rule 5. X 9. (Tom has been working on his new book lately.) See rule 1, pattern b. X 4. (He executed the difficult piano passage with verve.) See rule 1, pattern b. C 10. X 11. (He usually wrote). See rule 3. C 5. C X 12. 6. (He still wants). See rule 4. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 2: Order of Adverbs 116 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ X 13. (Jill lived in France during her college years.) See rule 1, pattern a, and rule 5. C 17. X C 18. (Betty rarely noticed my hard work.) See rule 3. 14. X C 15. 19. (John telephoned me last night.) See rule 1, pattern b. X 16. (The teacher posted her office hours on her office door.) See rule 1, pattern b. C 20. EMBEDDED QUESTIONS 1. The pattern for an embedded question in a statement is question word 1 subject 1 verb or question word/subject (same word) 1 verb. QW 1 S 1 V I cannot see what the sign says . QW 1 S 1 V She does not know where she should go. QW/S 1 V They did not know who bought the car. 2. The pattern for an embedded question in a question is the same as for an embedded question in a statement. (See rule 1.) QW1 S 1 V Do you know who he is ? QW/S 1 V Did he say who called ? 3. Do not use do, does, or did as auxiliaries in these patterns. Error Examples WRONG: I did not understand what did they mean. RIGHT: I did not understand what they meant. WRONG: Do you know where is John? RIGHT: Do you know where John is? WRONG: I was surprised when he told me how much does he study every day. RIGHT: I was surprised when he told me how much he studies every day. WRONG: He told me when was he free during the week. RIGHT: He told me when he was free during the week. WRONG: Tell me where they do go after class every day. RIGHT: Tell me where they go after class every day. www.petersons.com Chapter 6: Basic Patterns 117 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the pattern for embedded questions. 1. I will ask how much do they sell for. 2. Did the professor tell you when is the next test? 3. I wonder when it is going to begin. 4. Forget about where we are going to play tennis as it is starting to rain. 5. Did you see what did he do? 6. Do you remember how much the tuition was? 7. Ask the operator what is the charge for a three-minute call to New York. 8. We don’t know when will we see our friends again. 9. He forgot where he parked his car. 10. Would you please ask them where is the subway entrance. 11. He sent a telegram saying when he would arrive. 12. I forgot to ask him what time does the class begin. 13. Bill did not realize what time it was when I knocked on the door. 14. Can you tell us who that distinguished-looking gentleman is? 15. Ask Mr. Blake what does his daughter study at the university. 16. Can you be sure where will he be this Friday afternoon? 17. We should find out how hot is it in the summer before we decide to vacation there. 18. Can anyone explain why he had that terrible attitude? 19. We never found the village where were born our parents. 20. She does not know who did paint that beautiful mural. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 3: Embedded Questions 118 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Answers X 1. (how much they sell for). See rule 3. C 11. X 2. (when the next test is?). See rule 2. X 12. (what time the class begins). See rule 3. C 3. C 13. C 4. C 14. X 5. (what he did?). See rule 3. X 15. (what his daughter studies). See rule 3. C 6. X 16. (where he will be). See rule 2. X 7. (what the charge is). See rule 1. X 17. (how hot it is). See rule 1. C 18. X 8. (when we will see). See rule 1. X C 9. 19. (where our parents were born). See rule 1. X 20. (who painted). See rule 3. X 10. (where the subway entrance is). See rule 1. TO/FOR (PURPOSE) Patterns for expressing purpose: 1. for 1 noun phrase N PHRASE John went to California for a rest . 2. to 1 simple form of the verb (that is, the infinitive) TO 1 VERB John went to California to ski . Error Examples WRONG: She moved to New York for getting a better job. RIGHT: She moved to New York to get a better job. OR She moved to New York for a better job. WRONG: They went to the country for having a vacation. RIGHT: They went to the country for a vacation. OR They went to the country to have a vacation. WRONG: We used the projector for to show a movie. RIGHT: We used the projector to show a movie. www.petersons.com Chapter 6: Basic Patterns 119 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is a to/for (purpose) error. 1. He went to the lecture for hearing about the latest agricultural techniques. 2. They studied hard to pass the TOEFL. 3. We saved money this year for to take a trip to Hong Kong. 4. They bought that book for trying to learn Japanese. 5. He is studying for a master’s degree in marketing. 6. I came to the United States for to visit my relatives. 7. She is desperately looking for work. 8. John went to the doctor’s office for his yearly check-up. 9. Let’s go shopping this afternoon for finding some camping equipment for our trip. 10. Susan went to the printer’s office to order some wedding invitations. Answers X 1. (to hear). See rule 2. C 2. X 3. (year to take a trip) OR (year for a trip). See rules 1 and 2. X C 4. (book to try to learn). See rule 2. X 6. (United States to visit). See rule 2. C 7. C 8. X 9. (to find). See rule 2. C 10. 5. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 4: To/For (Purpose) 120 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ DOUBLE SUBJECTS Do not use a noun and a pronoun as a subject. Only one is necessary. S He saw my uncle the other day. S The woman in the red dress is my teacher. S It is easy to see from here. Error Examples WRONG: My brother he is always borrowing my car. RIGHT: My brother is always borrowing my car. WRONG: Their method of teaching it is very good. RIGHT: Their method of teaching is very good. WRONG: I could not believe that my boyfriend he told me a lie. RIGHT: I could not believe that my boyfriend told me a lie. Skill Builder 5: Double Subjects Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is a double-subject error. 1. That subject it has always been difficult for me. 2. I could not believe it when my boss gave me a raise. 3. That is the man who he told me the bad news. 4. They told me that their uncle was arriving this afternoon. 5. You and I we always have a good time together. 6. The TOEFL test it is a real challenge. 7. That lobster is delicious because it is so fresh. 8. Carol said that she and her sister they had bought a new car. 9. The president was acquitted in the scandal. 10. Your husband had a good excuse for arriving late. Answers X 1. (subject has always) X 6. (test is a real) C 2. C 7. X 3. (who told me) X C 4. 8. (she and her sister had bought) X 5. (You and I always) OR (We always) C 9. C 10. www.petersons.com Chapter 6: Basic Patterns 121 ................................................................. Independent Clauses 1. Every sentence must have at least one independent clause. An independent clause consists of at least one subject and one finite verb and is a complete thought. The following are examples of independent clauses: S V The president spoke. S V Betty made some iced tea. V S He is a doctor. S V They arrived at 2:00. S V I was there. 2. Two independent clauses can be joined by and, but, or, nor, or for. S V S V He went to the bank, but it was closed. S V S V She had never been to Los Angeles before, and she was quite surprised at the rush-hour traffic jams. Dependent Clauses 3. A sentence may have one or more dependent clauses, each one of which must have its own subject and finite verb. A dependent clause must be attached to an independent clause. It is incomplete by itself. There are three kinds of dependent clauses: noun, relative (adjective), and adverb. A noun clause functions as a subject or an object. Each noun clause, which has its own subject and verb, may be an embedded statement or an embedded question. n Embedded statements are often introduced by that. S V That he was a criminal surprised me. (N cl. as obj.) S V I know (that) he is from Canada. (N cl. as obj.) n Embedded questions are introduced by wh- words. S V I do not know what time the party begins. (N cl. as obj.) S V He talked about what he had learned in his class. (N cl. as obj. of prep.) www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ CLAUSES 122 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ A relative clause functions as an adjective. Each relative clause, which has its own subject and verb, is introduced by one of the following words: who, whom, which, that, and whose. S V I do not know the lady who lives next door. S V He is a man (whom)* I respect. S V That is a fern plant, which never blooms. S V This is the book (that)* I borrowed from John. S V That is the couple whose house burned down. An adverb clause functions as an adverb. Each adverb clause has its own subject and verb. The following is a list of commonly used words that introduce adverb clauses: before, after, because, since, while, when, if, and although. Introductory adverb clauses are followed by a comma. S V Before she left, I told her. S V When it began to rain, we left. S V If I have time, I will help you. S V Although he tried hard, he did not win the race. S V We talked to her after she had surgery. S V He did not go in because he was late. S V I have not seen him since he arrived. S V They met him when they were at college. • Be sure that every dependent clause is attached to an independent clause. • Remember that all clauses, independent and dependent, have their own subject and finite verb. • A finite verb is one that can be conjugated and shows tense, that is, ends in -ed, -s, etc. A gerund (V 1 ing) or an infinitive (to 1 V) is not a finite verb. • In this grammar explanation, when any word appears in parenthesis, it is optional in the sentence. • Remember that two independent clauses are joined by coordinate conjunctions (and, but, etc.). They cannot be joined by a comma only. *Note: Whom and that, when used as objects, are optional. www.petersons.com Chapter 6: Basic Patterns 123 ................................................................. WRONG: Give my regards to everyone asks about me. RIGHT: Give my regards to everyone who asks about me. WRONG: Thinking for many centuries that the world was flat. RIGHT: It was thought for many centuries that the world was flat. WRONG: President Kennedy committed the U.S. to being first to land men on the moon, he died before he saw his dream realized. RIGHT: President Kennedy committed the U.S. to being first to land men on the moon, but he died before he saw his dream realized. WRONG: To believe that smoking causes some forms of cancer. RIGHT: It is believed that smoking causes some forms of cancer. WRONG: That Mt. Everest is the highest peak in the world. RIGHT: I know that Mt. Everest is the highest peak in the world. OR Mt. Everest is the highest peak in the world. WRONG: Because I did not have enough money to go on vacation this year. RIGHT: Because I did not have enough money to go on vacation this year, I stayed home. OR I did not have enough money to go on vacation this year. WRONG: We were surprised when saw her. RIGHT: We were surprised when we saw her. WRONG: Where they would be staying in Greece. RIGHT: She told me where they would be staying in Greece. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Error Examples 124 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 6: Clauses Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is a clause error. 1. It is hoped that man will someday inhabit other planets. 2. Learning that the university plans to construct a new sports arena next year. 3. Since it was cool and overcast, we canceled the picnic. 4. Why he quit his job with that prestigious company. 5. Some people consider marriage to be the most important thing could happen in life. 6. That Columbus was not the first man to set foot in the New World. 7. He found the book he had been looking for under the sofa. 8. We went to San Diego, we spent many happy hours on the beach. 9. To think that everyone needs some form of physical exercise. 10. The store had a huge end-of-summer sale, and hundreds of people were at the door when it opened. 11. If any questions, please ask me for help. 12. That he survived that terrible accident surprised everyone who heard the news. 13. There is the artist whose painting received an award. 14. She is the only person in this country knows how to operate that new equipment. 15. I noticed that the new couple next door not at home last week. Answers C 1. C 7. X 2. (It was learned that). See rule 3 and note b. X 8. (Diego, and we spent). See rule 2. C 3. X X 4. (I cannot understand why he quit his job.). See rule 3, (noun clause). 9. (It is thought that). See rule 3. C 10. X 11. (If you have any). See rule 3, (adverb clause). C 12. C 13. X 14. (country who knows). See rule 3, (relative clause.) X 15. (door was not). See rule 3. X 5. (thing that could). See rule 3, (relative clause). X 6. (Columbus was not the first man to set foot in the New World OR That Columbus was not the first man to set foot in the New World is not surprising.) See rule 3 (noun clause). www.petersons.com Chapter 6: Basic Patterns 125 ................................................................. Directions: Each sentence below contains four underlined words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that must be changed in order for the sentence to be correct. Circle your answer in the book or mark your answer on a separate sheet of paper. 1. I did not understand their predicament (A) until John explained me all the details (B) (C) of the mishap. (D) 2. Even though we had been to her house (A) several times before, we did not remember (B) exactly what street was it on. (C) (D) 3. We are never happy with what we have (A) (B) in life; the grass always is greener on (C) (D) the other side of the fence. 4. The opera, even though performed by (A) (B) amateurs, it was excellent. (C) (D) 5. Because of their countries’ great need for (A) expertise in computer programming, the (B) students were sent for studying in the (C) (D) United States. 7. I was surprised to hear that the store (A) charged Dr. Brown an extra amount (B) when it delivered to his office his new (C) (D) sofa. 8. When John asked Tomoko, the Japanese student, what she did think of the (A) museum, she quickly replied that it (B) had taught her a great deal about the (C) (D) history of the area. 9. His father mentioned to me that Robert (A) had written to him requesting money (B) (C) for buying a new car. (D) 10. The author of this new book she is plan(A) ning to write a sequel in order to capitalize (B) (C) on the publicity she has received recently. (D) 6. Mr. Shimoto was planning to send (A) to me a package from Japan as soon as (B) (C) he arrived home from his trip to (D) Hawaii. www.petersons.com exercises Error Identification ............................................................................................ EXERCISES: BASIC PATTERNS 126 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Sentence Completion Directions: In the sentences below, one or more words are left out of each sentence. Under each sentence, you will see four words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that completes the sentence correctly, then write it in the space provided in the book or on a separate sheet of paper. 1. ________ is indispensable to the economy of that region. (A) (B) (C) (D) That copper mining It is copper mining Although copper mining Copper mining 2. She read ________. (A) several chapters in the library last night (B) last night several chapters in the library (C) last night in the library several chapters (D) in the library several chapters last night 3. Doris went to the nicest store in the city ________ presents for her children. (A) (B) (C) (D) for to get for getting to get to getting 4. The man on the horse ________ a famous movie star. (A) (B) (C) (D) he is is he who is is 5. Please do not ever mention ________. (A) (B) (C) (D) that subject again to us that subject to us again to us that subject again again to us that subject www.petersons.com 6. She cannot remember where ________ her black jacket. (A) (B) (C) (D) did she leave she did leave she left left she 7. The doctor explained ________ that we should have a complete physical examination once a year. (A) (B) (C) (D) us for us to us at us 8. Would you please tell us when ________. (A) (B) (C) (D) the next bus comes comes the next bus does the next bus come the next bus does come 9. That attractive man ________ my cousin who is visiting us from France. (A) (B) (C) (D) who is he is is is he 10. They ________ to our proposal. (A) (B) (C) (D) have not still responded have not responded still have still not responded still have not responded Chapter 6: Basic Patterns 127 ................................................................. 1. C 2. D 3. C 4. C 5. D 6. B 7. D 8. A 9. D 10. A 1. The correct answer is (C). See Indirect Objects, page 111. 6. The correct answer is (B). See Indirect Objects, page 111. 2. The correct answer is (D). See Embedded Questions, page 116. 7. The correct answer is (D). See Order of Adverbs, page 113. 3. The correct answer is (C). See Order of Adverbs, page 113. 8. The correct answer is (A). See Embedded Questions, page 116. 4. The correct answer is (C). See Double Subjects, page 120. 9. The correct answer is (D). See To/For (Purpose), page 118. 5. The correct answer is (D). See To For (Purpose), page 118. 10. The correct answer is (A). See Double Subjects, page 120. Sentence Completion 1. D 2. A 3. C 4. D 5. B 6. C 7. C 8. A 9. C 10. D 6. The correct answer is (C). See Embedded Questions, page 116. 2. The correct answer is (A). See Order of Adverbs, page 113. 7. The correct answer is (C). See Indirect Objects, page 111. 3. The correct answer is (C). See To/For (Purpose), page 118. 8. The correct answer is (A). See Embedded Questions, page 116. 4. The correct answer is (D). See Double Subjects, page 120. 9. The correct answer is (C). See Double Subjects, page 120. 5. The correct answer is (B). See Order of Adverbs, page 113. 10. The correct answer is (D). See Order of Adverbs, page 113. www.petersons.com exercises 1. The correct answer is (D). See Clauses, page 121. answers Error Identification ............................................................................................ ANSWER KEY AND EXPLANATIONS 128 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ SUMMING IT UP • Some verbs may be followed by two objects: an indirect object and a direct object. • In general, place adverbs (or adverbial phrases) after the verb or after the object, if any. • Do not separate the subject from the verb or the verb from its object. • Patterns for expressing purpose are for 1 noun phrase and to 1 simple form of the verb. www.petersons.com Style ............................................................................... • Voice • Parallelism • Wordiness • Substandard • Usage • Words often confused, group I • Words often confused, group II • Words often confused, group III • Correlative conjunctions • Subject/verb agreement • Parts of speech • Prepositions (general use) • Prepositions in combinations • Summing it up VOICE In English, the active voice is more common than the passive voice, although the passive voice is acceptable and even preferred at times. 1. The passive voice is preferred when the actor is unknown or unimportant. PASSIVE The cure for cancer will probably be discovered by some unknown scientist in a laboratory. PASSIVE That church was built in 1549. (Who built the church is unimportant and not mentioned.) 2. The passive voice is often used when discussing history. PASSIVE The war was fought over gold. 129 chapter 7 OVERVIEW 130 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 3. Use the active voice when the actor is more important than the action. ACTORS ACTIVE The children ate spaghetti for dinner. ACTORS ACTIVE We watched the news. 4. Avoid using active and passive in the same sentence if possible. PASSIVE PASSIVE The flowers were planted and the trees were trimmed. ACTIVE ACTIVE Susan cooked the dinner and washed the dishes. 5. Use one verb instead of two when possible. Rita enjoys good food and music. Not: Rita enjoys good food and music is also enjoyed by her. Error Examples In the following examples, we cannot say that the first sentence is absolutely wrong. In certain contexts, it may even be preferred. However, generally speaking, the corrected sentence (the second sentence) is preferable. We are calling the first sentence AWKWARD and the second sentence BETTER. AWKWARD: Ice cream was eaten at the party by the children. BETTER: The children ate ice cream at the party. AWKWARD: Workers built the pyramids about 5,000 years ago. BETTER: The pyramids were built about 5,000 years ago. AWKWARD: Some people painted pictures of animals on ancient cave walls. BETTER: Pictures of animals were painted on ancient cave walls. AWKWARD: The house was bought by my mother and father in 1970. BETTER: My mother and father bought the house in 1970. AWKWARD: Henry likes swimming, and golfing is also liked by him. BETTER: Henry likes swimming and golfing. AWKWARD: Sally loves children, and her summers are spent working in a summer camp. BETTER: Sally loves children and spends her summers working in a summer camp. AWKWARD: The rainbow was seen by us as the storm began to subside. BETTER: We saw the rainbow as the storm began to subside. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 131 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence seems correct as written. Write an “A” (for awkward) on the line if the choice of voice seems incorrect. 1. Steak was eaten by me last night. 2. When we work hard, we accomplish a lot. 3. Jane wrote a very good composition for her writing class. 4. We laughed when the clown fell out of the car. 5. Workers built the road in two years at a cost of five million dollars. 6. The people loved their leader and his mistakes were forgiven by them. 7. The phone was answered by John on the first ring. 8. Paul teaches English in high school and writes short stories in his free time. 9. Most American cars are built in Detroit, Michigan. 10. My uncle worked hard all his life and left a sizable estate when he died. 11. My father and I played chess for several hours yesterday. 12. As we neared the house, a small dog sitting on the porch could be seen by us. 13. Some people committed a lot of crimes in this neighborhood last month. 14. If you studied more, your tests could be easily passed. 15. The students opened their books and began to read. 16. As John approaches his fortieth birthday, he is reassessing the direction of his life. 17. The light was turned on by me as I entered my bedroom. 18. That electronics company is expanding, and many new products are being developed by them. 19. Soldiers fought the Battle of Hastings in 1066. 20. Her earrings were put on by Jane before she went to the party. 21. During the war thousands of persons were forced to leave their homes. 22. Claire painted the living room, and a new carpet was laid by her. 23. Jack works hard during the week and his free time is spent sailing his new boat. 24. The students were carefully selected and they represented the class well. 25. Bob plays the piano, and the guitar is played by him also. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 1: Voice 132 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Answers A 1. (I ate steak last night.) See rule 3. C 15. C C 16. 2. A C 3. C 4. 17. (I turned on the light as I entered my bedroom.) See rules 1 and 4. A 5. (The road was built in two years at a cost of five million dollars.) See rule 1. A A 6. (The people loved their leader and forgave his mistakes.) See rule 4. 18. (That electronics company is expanding and developing many new products.) See rule 4. A 19. (The Battle of Hastings was fought in 1066.) See rule 2. A 20. (Jane put on her earrings before she went to the party.) See rule 3. C 21. A 22. (Claire painted the living room and laid a new carpet.) See rule 4. A 23. (Jack works hard during the week and spends his free time sailing his new boat.) See rule 4. A 7. (John answered the phone on the first ring.) See rule 3. C 8. C 9. C 10. C 11. A 12. (As we neared the house, we could see a small dog sitting on the porch.) See rule 4. A 13. (A lot of crimes were committed in this neighborhood last month.) See rule 1. A 14. (If you studied more, you could easily pass your tests.) See rules 1 and 4. 24. (The carefully selected students represented the class well.) See rule 4. A 25. (Bob plays the piano and the guitar.) See rule 5. A www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 133 ................................................................. 1. Items in a series must be parallel; that is, they must have the same grammatical form. a. Nouns N N N He likes music, art, and history. b. Gerunds V 1 ING V 1 ING V 1 ING swimming , dancing , and horseback riding . c. Adjectives ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. He is tall, dark, and handsome. d. Infinitives INFIN. INFIN. INFIN. They wanted to paint the living room, to lay a new carpet, and to buy a new sofa. PAST PAST PAST The Romans conquered, colonized, and governed much of the world. f. Past Perfect Tense PAST PERF. PAST PERF. He had finished the game, had taken a shower, and had eaten lunch by the time I got to his house. 2. Structures joined by and, but, as, or, than, or although must have the same grammatical form. N PHRASE and third NOTE The auxiliary had may be omitted and third verb phrases. b. But ADJ. ADJ. That verb form is not active, but passive. V 1 ING V 1 ING Taking the bus can be as costly as taking a plane. INFIN. INFIN. He wanted to borrow a car or to rent one while his car was being repaired. e. Than V 1 ING V 1 ING Eating in a restaurant is more fun than cooking at home. f. Although in the second in the second N PHRASE He enjoyed the music of Spain and the sculpture of France . d. Or The preposition to infinitives. PAST PERF. c. As NOTE may be omitted e. Past Tense a. And ............................................................................................ PARALLELISM INFIN. INFIN. Although he liked to eat good food, he did not like to pay high prices for it. www.petersons.com 134 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Error Examples WRONG: When they were in Mexico, they saw museums, ruins, and folk dancing. RIGHT: When they were in Mexico, they saw museums, ruins, and folk dances. WRONG: He is young, intelligent, and has charm. RIGHT: He is young, intelligent, and charming. WRONG: She likes to read, to travel, and painting. RIGHT: She likes to read, to travel, and to paint. WRONG: They came out of the building hurriedly, hailed a cab, and jump into it. RIGHT: They came out of the building hurriedly, hailed a cab, and jumped into it. WRONG: Her husband had bought a house, found a job, and chose a school for the children before she arrived. RIGHT: Her husband had bought a house, found a job, and chosen a school for the children before she arrived. WRONG: We enjoyed the varied cuisine and going to the excellent theater in New York. RIGHT: We enjoyed the varied cuisine and the excellent theater in New York. WRONG: That soup should not be served hot, but at a cold temperature. RIGHT: That soup should not be served hot, but cold. WRONG: Renting an apartment can be as expensive as to buy a house. RIGHT: Renting an apartment can be as expensive as buying a house. WRONG: He did not like to swim or skiing. RIGHT: He did not like to swim or to ski. WRONG: Going on vacation is more fun than to work in the summer. RIGHT: Going on vacation is more fun than working in the summer. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 135 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in parallelism. 1. When he was a college student, he learned to play tennis, to golf, and swimming. 2. Do not speak out, but raise your hand. 3. To face adversity, to solve problems, and to overcome difficulties all give one a sense of satisfaction. 4. We enjoyed the perfect weather and seeing fjords in Norway. 5. Go to Window A, ask for a form, and bring it back to me. 6. Before he died, he had sold his house, wrote a will, and set up a trust fund. 7. Her hobbies are reading, playing the piano, and gardening. 8. Being a homemaker is as difficult as working in an office. 9. After years of dealing with the public, she developed great charm, wit, and confident. 10. On their vacation they enjoyed swimming at the beach, walking through the quaint streets, and sitting in the picturesque parks. 11. He could not decide whether to get a job or studying. 12. Although he was quick to criticize, he was slow praising his students. 13. The presidential candidate was a man of intellectual strength, moral character, and personal integrity. 14. The bellhop took my bags to my room, opened the door, and puts them at the foot of the bed. 15. Jogging is more vigorous exercise than to play golf. Answers X 1. (and to swim). See rule 1d. X C 2. C 10. C 3. X 11. (or to study). See rule 2d. X 4. (and the fjords). See rule 2a. X 12. (slow to praise). See rule 2f. C 5. C 13. X 6. (written a will). See rule 1f. X 14. (and put them). See rule 1e. C 7. X C 8. 15. (than playing golf). See rule 2e. 9. (and confidence). See rule 1a. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 2: Parallelism 136 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ WORDINESS A general rule in English might be that “shorter is better.” That is, when the same idea can be expressed directly in fewer words, choose the shorter version. There are several ways to do this: 1. Avoid unnecessary passive constructions. See Voice on page 129 of this chapter. 2. Avoid unnecessary relative clauses where an adjective, participal phrase, prepositional phrase, or appositive is enough. ADJ. The tall man bought the car. Not: The man who is tall bought the car. PART. PHRASE The young girl waiting by the door would like to see you. Not: The young girl who is waiting by the door would like to see you. PREP. PHRASE The package on the table is ready to be mailed. Not: The package that is on the table is ready to be mailed. APPOSITIVE Hawaii, the fiftieth state, is a favorite vacation spot. Not: Hawaii, which is the fiftieth state, is a favorite vacation spot. 3. Be as direct as possible. It was an important discovery. Not: It was a discovery of great importance. He noticed a pretty girl. Not: He noticed a girl who was pretty. She did enzyme research from 1950 to 1964. Not: She spent a total of fourteen years, from 1950 to 1964, in the research area of enzymes. He walked down the stairs quickly. Not: He walked down the stairs in a quick manner. 4. Avoid redundancy (repetition of the same idea). She returned on Monday. Not: She returned back on Monday. His virtue was well known. Not: His virtue and goodness were well known. (Virtue is goodness.) www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 137 ................................................................. In the following examples, we cannot say that the first sentence is absolutely wrong. However, generally speaking, the corrected sentence (the second sentence) is preferable. We are calling the first sentence WEAK and the second sentence PREFERRED. WEAK: The examination was finished by all the students within the allocated time. PREFERRED: All the students finished the examination in time. WEAK: The professor, who was tall and blond, lectured about medieval architecture. PREFERRED: The tall, blond professor lectured about medieval architecture. WEAK: Paul read Jane’s letter in an excited state of mind PREFERRED: Paul excitedly read Jane’s letter. WEAK: The committee discussed the problem for a long time without being able to come to the point where a decision could be reached. PREFERRED: The committee discussed the problem for a long time without reaching a decision. WEAK: Crime and illegal acts are on the rise. PREFERRED: Crime is on the rise. (Crime is illegal acts.) WEAK: The girl who was wearing the colorful bathing suit is my cousin. PREFERRED: The girl wearing the colorful bathing suit is my cousin. WEAK: The glass figurine that was on display in the store window appealed to me. PREFERRED: The glass figurine on display in the store window appealed to me. WEAK: Boston, which is the capital of Massachusetts, has many universities and colleges. PREFERRED: Boston, the capital of Massachusetts, has many universities and colleges. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Error Examples 138 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 3: Wordiness Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence seems correct as written. Write a “W” on the line if the sentence seems wordy (to have too many words). 1, The man indicated a negative response by shaking his head. 2. The house will probably be finished in four months. 3. The house on the corner burned down last night. 4. Jane went to the store with the purpose of selecting and purchasing a new dress. 5. Running on foot through the street, the thief was apprehended by the police. 6. My wife and I argued for hours before deciding to send our son to summer camp. 7. Bob saw several pieces of art that were expensive. 8. Jenny received several speeding tickets. 9. The ballerina danced her dances for hours. 10. Professor Blanton, who is the college president, will speak on this topic. 11. Betty opened the mysterious package cautiously. 12. The saleswoman in the red dress insulted me. 13. Three hours was the length of time that we found necessary to drive to New York. 14. The Louvre, a world-famous art museum, is in Paris, France. 15. The book was read by me in four hours. Answers W 1. (The man shook his head.) OR (The man said no.) See rule 3. W C 2. W C 3. W 4. (Jane went to the store to buy a new dress.) See rule 3. 10. (Professor Blanton, the college president, will speak on this topic.) See rule 2. C 11. 9. (The ballerina danced for hours.) See rule 4. 5. (Running through the street, the thief was apprehended by the police.) See rule 3. C 12. W 13. (It took us three hours to drive to New York.) See rule 3. C 6. C 14. W 7. (Bob saw several expensive pieces of art.) See rule 2. W 15. (I read the book in four hours.) See rule 1. C 8. W www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 139 ................................................................. Some words or phrases are not acceptable as standard written English. 1. Ain’t should not be used as a negative form of to be. John is not here. I am not ready. They are not coming. 2. Anywheres, nowheres, everywheres, and somewheres are incorrect forms of anywhere, nowhere, everywhere, and somewhere. I cannot find him anywhere. Mary put her purse somewhere. 3. Alright is an incorrect form of all right. Do you feel all right? 4. Kind of a and sort of a are incorrect forms of kind of and sort of. (In other words, the a is unnecessary and incorrect.) That is a kind of plant that grows in Africa. John is the sort of man who worries about other people. 5. Mad should not be used to mean angry when it precedes the preposition “with.” The teacher was very angry with John. 6. Off of is an incorrect form of off. The couple stepped off the bus. 7. Suspicion is a noun and cannot be used as a verb. The correct verb form is suspect. Mary suspects that her assistant may be stealing from her. 8. The reason is because is an incorrect form of the reason is that. The reason that John cannot attend the meeting is that he is sick. 9. Is where and is when are incorrect ways of defining the meaning of a word. “To imitate” means “to act the same way as someone else.” A “cookout” is “an outdoor party where food is generally cooked over charcoals.” 10. Different than is an incorrect form of different from. John is different from his father. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ SUBSTANDARD 140 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Error Examples WRONG: Betty ain’t a good student. RIGHT: Betty is not a good student. WRONG: The doctor looked everywheres for his prescription pad. RIGHT: The doctor looked everywhere for his prescription pad. WRONG: The party was not wonderful, but at least the food was alright. RIGHT: The party was not wonderful, but at least the food was all right. WRONG: That was the strangest kind of an animal that Harry had ever seen. RIGHT: That was the strangest kind of animal that Harry had ever seen. WRONG: Sometimes a father can get very mad at his children. RIGHT: Sometimes a father can get very angry with his children. WRONG: We try not to get off of the subject. RIGHT: We try not to get off the subject. WRONG: The police suspicion that a local resident committed the crime. RIGHT: The police suspect that a local resident committed the crime. WRONG: The reason that Mary is so upset is because she lost her wallet. RIGHT: The reason that Mary is so upset is that she lost her wallet. WRONG: To “hyperventilate” is when one “breathes too fast or too deeply.” RIGHT: To “hyperventilate” is to “breathe too fast or too deeply.” WRONG: California is different than Arizona. RIGHT: California is different from Arizona. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 141 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if substandard (unacceptable, incorrect) English is used. 1. Most situations turn out all right in the long run. 2. Gerald explained that the reason he was late was because he had had car trouble. 3. A “loan-word” is “a word that has come from another language.” 4. The Smiths bought a kind of a car that gets good mileage. 5. “Parallel” is “when objects are an equal distance apart at every point.” 6. The vase was made of a sort of material found only in Australia. 7. The children were nowheres to be found. 8. Henry took the picture off the wall and put it away. 9. It looked like a terrible accident, but everyone in the car was alright. 10. I believe the reason he left college was that he ran out of money. 11. The Browns ain’t coming to the church meeting tonight. 12. I hope you do not suspicion that I cheated on the exam. 13. A “knock-out” is “when a person is rendered unconscious by a blow.” 14. The man acted so strangely that his family thought he was mad. 15. Good and bad people can be found anywheres in the world. 16. Do you find the United States much different than your country? 17. The pen rolled off of the table and onto the floor. 18. What sort of coat was the customer looking for? 19. When John saw his grades, he felt very mad at his professor. 20. What kind of a person could do a thing like this! Answers C X C X X C X C X C X 1. 2. (the reason he was late was that). See rule 8. 3. 4. (a kind of car). See rule 4. 5. (“Parallel” means that objects are). See rule 9. 6. 7. (nowhere). See rule 2. 8. 9. (all right). See rule 3. 10. 11. (are not coming). See rule 1. X X C X X X C X X 12. (you do not suspect). See rule 7. 13. (A “knock-out” is “a blow that causes unconsciousness.”) See rule 9. 14. 15. (anywhere). See rule 2. 16. (different from). See rule 10. 17. (off the table). See rule 6. 18. 19. (very angry with his professor). See rule 5. 20. (kind of person). See rule 4. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 4: Substandard 142 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ USAGE Some words have similar meanings, but cannot be used interchangeably; that is, a choice must be made according to the grammatical situation. 1. Between/Among Between is used with two persons or things. I cannot decide between these two blouses. Among is used for three or more persons or things. He was standing among several students. 2. Amount/Number Amount is used with non-count nouns. NCN He has a large amount of money. Number is used with count nouns. CN She has a large number of children. 3. In/Into In is used with non-motion verbs. He is waiting in the kitchen. Into is used with verbs of motion. He ran into the kitchen. 4. Sit/Set Sit cannot take an object. Sit tells what a person or thing does for himself or by itself. The principal parts of sit are: sit (simple form) He sits by the window. sat (past form) Bob sat in his room and read. sat (past participle) The guests have already sat down. sitting (present participle) The vase is sitting on the table. Set must have an object. Set tells what a person does for someone or something else. The principal parts of set are: OBJ. set (simple form) Do not set your glass on the piano. set (past form) She set her purse on the floor last night. set (past participle) Have you set the table yet? setting (present participle) Setting the vase on the coffee table, Mary noticed that the vase had a crack in it. OBJ. OBJ. OBJ. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 143 ................................................................. Lie cannot take an object. Lie tells what a person or thing does for himself or by itself. The principal parts of lie are: lie (simple form) John lies on his bed for a few minutes after lunch every day. lay (past form) Mary lay on the sofa all yesterday afternoon. lain (past participle) The watch had lain unnoticed for several days before I found it. lying (present participle) A man was lying injured in the street after the accident. Lay must have an object. Lay tells what a person or thing does for someone or something else. The principal parts of lay are: OBJ. lay (simple form) You should lay the tiles very evenly. laid (past form) Mary laid her son on his bed early this afternoon. laid (past participle) That hen has laid six eggs this week. laying (present participle) The workers are laying the carpet now. OBJ. OBJ. OBJ. 6. Rise/Raise Rise cannot take an object. Rise tells what someone or something does for himself or by itself. The principal parts of rise are: rise (simple form) The temperature rises sharply in the afternoon. rose (past form) The sun rose at seven yesterday. risen (past participle) Prices have risen a great deal lately. rising (present participle) The baby’s temperature is rising by the hour. Raise must have an object. Raise tells what someone or something does for someone or something else. The principal parts of raise are: OBJ. raise (simple form) Please raise the window a little. raised (past form) The Browns raised their children. raised (past participle) The store has raised its prices. raising (present participle) The new book is raising many OBJ. OBJ. OBJ. interesting questions. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ 5. Lie/Lay 144 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 7. Learn/Teach Learn is a verb that can be followed directly by an infinitive as an object. INFIN. She learned to speak French. Teach is a verb that can be followed by an infinitive as an object. However, this infinitive must have its own subject. (See Personal Pronouns—Case, page 93.) S INFIN. I taught John to speak French. S INFIN. I taught him to speak French. 8. Can/May Can is a modal that means ability. Mary can speak French. John can play the piano. May is a modal that means permission. May I leave now? John may have the last piece of cake. 9. Hanged/Hung Hanged and hung are both correct past participle forms of the verb hang. BUT: Hanged refers to executions (killings) of persons. PERSON The murderer was hanged by the neck until dead. Hung refers to things. THING The picture was hung over the fireplace. Error Examples WRONG: I believe we can handle this matter between the three of us. RIGHT: I believe we can handle this matter among the three of us. WRONG: The students had a large amount of problems. RIGHT: The students had a large number of problems. WRONG: The government has a large number of plutonium stored in a western state. RIGHT: The government has a large amount of plutonium stored in a western state. WRONG: The frightened man rushed in the police station. RIGHT: The frightened man rushed into the police station. WRONG: She sat her new chair between the sofa and the buffet. RIGHT: She set her new chair between the sofa and the buffet. WRONG: Miss Jones learned us to swim in a few days. RIGHT: Miss Jones taught us to swim in a few days. WRONG: Can I please have your attention? RIGHT: May I please have your attention? www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 145 ................................................................. WRONG: The live wire laid in the street for hours after the storm. RIGHT: The live wire lay in the street for hours after the storm. WRONG: Susan likes to lay down for a short nap every afternoon. RIGHT: Susan likes to lie down for a short nap every afternoon. WRONG: We certainly hope that prices do not raise so quickly again. RIGHT: We certainly hope that prices do not rise so quickly again. Skill Builder 5: Usage Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in usage. 1. The picture was hung over the fireplace. 2. That grandfather clock has sat in that same spot for forty years. 3. The volcano had lain dormant for fifty years when it suddenly erupted. 4. There was a surprising number of news coming from that country. 5. The bread dough has raised enough and is now ready to be baked. 6. The children’s papers were hung about the classroom. 7. He distributed his wealth among his children, Betty, and John. 8. Ellen can run faster than Beth. 9. They have already risen their family and are now free to travel. 10. A large amount of people showed up for the grand opening. 11. The jeweler has carefully set the diamond into a new mounting. 12. The harried student dashed quickly in the classroom. 13. When Betty arrived home, she found her husband laying on the sofa asleep as usual. 14. Parents usually feel proud when their baby learns to take his first few steps. 15. Children often ask if they can have candy. 16. The car suddenly left the road, slammed into a low wall, and turned over several times. 17. Never leave your purse lying where someone might be able to steal it. 18. The army had hanged several deserters in the weeks before the war finally ended. 19. John’s father learned him to repair heavy equipment. 20. Mrs. Jones had carefully lain her children’s clothes out ready for the children to put on. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ WRONG: The clothes were neatly hanged on the clothesline. RIGHT: The clothes were neatly hung on the clothesline. 146 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Answers C 1. C 11. C 2. X C 3. 12. (dashed quickly into). See rule 3. X 4. (surprising amount of news). See rule 2. X 13. (lying on the sofa). See rule 5. C 14. X 5. (has risen enough). See rule 6. X C 6. 15. (if they may have candy). See rule 8. X 7. (between his children, Betty and John). See rule 1. C 16. C 17. C 8. C 18. X 9. (have already raised). See rule 6. X 19. (taught him to repair). See rule 7. X 10. (large number). See rule 2. X 20. (had carefully laid). See rule 5. WORDS OFTEN CONFUSED, GROUP I The following words are often confused: 1. Accept/Except Accept is a verb that means “to give a positive answer” or “to receive.” Susan accepted his offer of a job. (gave a positive answer) The club accepted three new members. (received) Except as a verb means “to exclude” or “to keep out.” The boys excepted John from their club. (They did not accept him.) Except is more commonly used as a preposition, meaning “with the exception of.” PREP. Everybody except Jane went to the party. (Jane was not a member of the group that went to the party.) 2. Advice/Advise Advise is a verb. VERB The doctor advised her to quit smoking. Advice is a noun. N He gave me some good advice. 3. All Ready/Already All ready is an adjective phrase meaning “completely ready.” ADJ. PHRASE We were all ready to leave at eight o’clock. Already is an adverb of time meaning “by or before a specific time.” ADV. They had already left at five o’clock. (by five o’clock) ADV. He had already eaten when I arrived. (before I arrived) www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 147 ................................................................. Altogether is an adverb meaning “completely.” ADV. I am altogether tired. All together is an adjective phrase meaning “in a group.” ADJ. PHRASE The children are all together now and ready to go to the park. 5. Beside/Besides The preposition besides means “except.” Everyone besides John went to the party. The preposition beside means “next to.” John was standing beside me. (NOT: besides me) 6. Cloth/Clothes Cloth is a noun (usually used as a non-count noun) that means “material or fabric.” NCN She bought some white cloth to make a wedding dress. Clothes is a plural count noun meaning “garments used to cover the body.” PL. CN She bought a lot of clothes when she was in Paris. PL. CN Beautiful clothes are usually expensive. 7. Desert/Dessert A desert is “a dry area of the world with little vegetation.” A large percentage of the world’s surface is a desert where very little grows. A dessert is “a sweet food usually eaten at the end of a meal.” We had apple pie and ice cream for dessert. 8. Differ From/Differ With To differ from is “to be dissimilar.” Men differ physically from women. To differ with is “to disagree with.” I differ with you on this issue. (I disagree with you.) 9. Emigrate/Immigrate To emigrate means “to leave one country to live in another.” In the early part of this century many people emigrated from Europe. They went to live in the United States. To immigrate means “to move to a new country.” In the early part of this century many people from Europe immigrated to the United States. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ 4. Altogether/All Together 148 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 10. Farther/Further Farther means “to or at a more distant point in space.” (actual distance) We have to drive a few miles farther. Further means “to or at a more distant point in time, degree, or quantity.” (figurative distance) Let us consider this problem further. (time) We should do further research on this matter. (quantity) Be careful not to excite the children further. (degree) Error Examples WRONG: John did not except my invitation to the party. RIGHT: John did not accept my invitation to the party. WRONG: You will find your umbrella besides the table. RIGHT: You will find your umbrella beside the table. WRONG: Please advice him that he must hurry. RIGHT: Please advise him that he must hurry. WRONG: Susan gave Paul some excellent advise. RIGHT: Susan gave Paul some excellent advice. WRONG: Please ask the students not to stand altogether in the hall. RIGHT: Please ask the students not to stand all together in the hall. WRONG: I am all together disgusted with his behavior. RIGHT: I am altogether disgusted with his behavior. WRONG: Has John really finished his homework all ready? RIGHT: Has John really finished his homework already? WRONG: Dinner is already to be served. RIGHT: Dinner is all ready to be served. WRONG: Mary bought new cloth to wear to the party. RIGHT: Mary bought new clothes to wear to the party. WRONG: Be careful to take lots of water when you cross the dessert. RIGHT: Be careful to take lots of water when you cross the desert. WRONG: Would you like a piece of cake for desert? RIGHT: Would you like a piece of cake for dessert? WRONG: New York differs with Washington, D.C. RIGHT: New York differs from Washington, D.C. WRONG: When discussing politics, Bob frequently differs from his father. RIGHT: When discussing politics, Bob frequently differs with his father. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 149 ................................................................. WRONG: I believe Martha’s house is further down the road. RIGHT: I believe Martha’s house is farther down the road. WRONG: Do you feel it is necessary to think about this matter farther? RIGHT: Do you feel it is necessary to think about this matter further? Skill Builder 6: Words Often Confused, Group I Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in word choice. 1. He has all ready spent next month’s allowance. 2. Mary looked all day for clothes suitable to cover the worn pillows. 3. Will John take his doctor’s advice? 4. In a surprise vote the board excepted John from membership. 5. Can you get everybody altogether for the meeting in ten minutes? 6. Helen enjoys wearing the clothes she designs. 7. The two political candidates certainly differed loudly from one another. 8. One reason people will emigrate from their country is to escape political persecution. 9. Did you look besides the sofa for your book? 10. Do not try to drive further today. 11. Will you accept my apologies? 12. Why did so many people immigrate from Uruguay to go to Australia? 13. I was surprised at the advise he gave me. 14. Steve differs with his father in physical appearance. 15. Let me give you some farther instruction. Answers X X C C X C X 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C 8. (already). See rule 5. (cloth). See rule 6. (all together). See rule 4. (differed loudly with). See rule 8. X X C X X X X 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. (beside the sofa). See rule 2. (farther). See rule 10. (emigrate from). See rule 9. (advice). See rule 3. (differs from). See rule 8. (further instruction). See rule 10. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ WRONG: During times of economic hardship, people may have to immigrate from their native land. RIGHT: During times of economic hardship, people may have to emigrate from their native land. 150 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ WORDS OFTEN CONFUSED, GROUP II The following words are often confused: 1. Formally/Formerly Formally means “in a formal way.” The meeting was conducted very formally. Formerly means “previously,” or “at an earlier time.” June was formerly a member of that club. 2. Healthful/Healthy Healthful means “good for one’s health.” Vegetables are healthful foods. Healthy means “in a good condition of health.” All of his children are healthy. 3. Illusion/Allusion An illusion is “a false idea” or “unreal image.” The magician created the illusion that he was flying through the air. An allusion is “an indirect reference.” The professor made an allusion to Greek mythology. 4. Imply/Infer To imply is “to suggest without stating directly.” Only the speaker or writer can imply. Susan implied that she was not happy with her job. To infer is “to make a conclusion based on evidence not directly stated.” Only the listener or reader can infer. I inferred from her letter that Susan was not happy with her job. 5. Its/It’s Its is the singular possessive pronoun for things. PRON. The tree lost its leaves when the weather turned cold. It’s is the contraction for it is. It’s a nice day today. (It is a nice day today.) 6. Leave/Let To leave means “to go away from.” He leaves school at three o’clock every day. To let means “to permit.” John let me borrow his car. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 151 ................................................................. ADJ. This blouse is too loose. I need a smaller size. To lose is a verb meaning “to leave behind by accident” or “to unintentionally cease having.” VERB I often lose my car keys. 8. Most/Almost The adjective most is the superlative form of many, meaning “the largest number.” ADJ. Most people like ice cream. The adjective most is also the superlative form of much, meaning “the largest amount.” ADJ. Most coffee comes from Brazil. Almost is an adverb meaning “slightly less than,” “not quite,” or “very nearly.” ADV. Almost all the students are here. ADV. He is almost ready to leave. ADV. He almost won the race. 9. Plane/Plain The noun plane often means “airplane.” N His plane will arrive in Chicago at nine o’clock. The adjective plain means “simple,” “not fancy,” or “undecorated.” ADJ. Her dress was very plain. 10. Principal/Principle The adjective principal means “chief” or “very important.” The noun principal means “chief official.” ADJ. The principal reason for his failure was his lack of interest in his job. N He wants to talk to the principal of the school. The noun principle means “fundamental truth.” N He is studying the principles of accounting. 11. Quiet/Quite Quiet is an adjective meaning “not noisy.” ADJ. It was a very quiet party. Quite is an adverb meaning “completely” or “to a degree.” ADV. He is quite nervous today. ADV. He is quite tall. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ 7. Loose/Lose The adjective loose means “not tight.” 152 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Error Examples WRONG: He spoke formerly and eloquently on that serious subject. RIGHT: He spoke formally and eloquently on that serious subject. WRONG: John was formally a member of that club, but he resigned. RIGHT: John was formerly a member of that club, but he resigned. WRONG: Fruit is a very healthy food. RIGHT: Fruit is a very healthful food. WRONG: The politician made a clever illusion to the political problems his chief rival was having. RIGHT: The politician made a clever allusion to the political problems his chief rival was having. WRONG: Mary never said it directly, but she inferred that she did not like me. RIGHT: Mary never said it directly, but she implied that she did not like me. WRONG: Would you please leave me do this job by myself. RIGHT: Would you please let me do this job by myself. WRONG: Linda cannot wear this belt because it is too lose. RIGHT: Linda cannot wear this belt because it is too loose. WRONG: Did you loose your watch? RIGHT: Did you lose your watch? WRONG: Most everybody who is supposed to come is here already. RIGHT: Almost everybody who is supposed to come is here already. WRONG: Which plain are you taking to New York? RIGHT: Which plane are you taking to New York? WRONG: The principle of my daughter’s school was educated in Europe. RIGHT: The principal of my daughter’s school was educated in Europe. WRONG: We spent a quite evening at home together. RIGHT: We spent a quiet evening at home together. WRONG: The ship lost it’s way from Florida to Bimini. RIGHT: The ship lost its way from Florida to Bimini. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 153 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in word choice. 1. Do you think that its difficult to learn a foreign language? 2. The modern art piece they chose was plain but bold. 3. The principle fact I would like you to remember concerns the human personality. 4. Are you quite sure you wish to spend that much for one chair? 5. His wife was formerly married to the Spanish Ambassador. 6. Her parents are quite old, but relatively healthful. 7. The young actress was able to create the allusion that she was middle-aged. 8. From reading his letter, I inferred that he was having financial problems. 9. He put his keys in his coat pocket so that he would not loose them. 10. Can you let the student continue with this course if he makes up all missed work? 11. Please leave him find out the truth by himself. 12. I do not trust that man; he has absolutely no principles. 13. I most fell off my seat laughing when I saw the clown chase the bull. 14. I think my battery has a loose connection. 15. Are you trying to infer that I should study more? Answers X 1. (it’s difficult). See rule 5. C 2. X 3. (principal fact) OR (The principle I would like). See rule 10. X 9. (would not lose them). See rule 7. C 10. X 11. (let him find out). See rule 6. C 12. X 13. (almost fell off my seat laughing). See rule 8. C 4. C 5. X 6. (relatively healthy). See rule 2. C 14. X 7. (create the illusion). See rule 3. X 15. (trying to imply). See rule 4. C 8. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 7: Words Often Confused, Group II 154 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ WORDS OFTEN CONFUSED, GROUP III The following words are often confused: 1. Respectfully/Respectively Respectfully means “with respect.” The audience rose respectfully when the president entered. Respectively means “in the order given.” The Thompsons lived in Chicago, Los Angeles, and New York respectively. 2. So/So That So is a conjunction joining a clause of result to a main clause. It rained a lot that year, so there were lots of wildflowers to enjoy. (result) So that joins a clause of purpose to a main clause. We wore raincoats so that we would not get our clothes wet. (purpose) 3. Stationary/Stationery Stationary means “in a fixed position.” The only time most children are stationary is when they are asleep. Stationery refers to writing supplies. That stationery store sells fancy writing paper and envelopes. 4. Their/There/They’re Their is the third-person plural possessive pronoun. PRON. They sold their home to a couple from London. There is (1) an adverb of place or (2) an expletive that tells of existence. ADV. Your package is there on the counter. EXPLETIVE There are fifty states in the United States. They’re is the contraction of they are. They’re ready to see you now. 5. To/Too/Two (See also Chapter 3, “Modifiers,” Too, Very, and Enough, page 55). To is (1) part of the infinitive form or (2) a preposition. INFIN. I like to walk in the rain. PREP. I walked to the store. Too is an adverb indicating an excess. ADV. It is too hot today to study. Two is a number (2). I have two children, John and Greg. 6. Weather/Whether Weather is a noun meaning “atmospheric conditions.” N It is nice weather today for a picnic. Whether is a conjunction meaning “if.” CONJ. I do not know whether he will come to the party. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 155 ................................................................. Who’s is the contraction for who is. I do not know who’s coming tonight. Whose is (1) a question word or (2) a possessive relative pronoun. QW Whose book is this? PRON. I met the man whose daughter is in my class. Error Examples WRONG: Last summer I visited the capital cities of Connecticut, Massachusetts, and Rhode Island respectfully. RIGHT: Last summer I visited the capital cities of Connecticut, Massachusetts, and Rhode Island respectively. WRONG: I bought a car so I would not have to walk to work. RIGHT: I bought a car so that I would not have to walk to work. WRONG: A model must sometimes remain stationery for hours at a time. RIGHT: A model must sometimes remain stationary for hours at a time. WRONG: Please put the piano over their near the window. RIGHT: Please put the piano over there near the window. WRONG: Robin is really much to nervous to be in public relations. RIGHT: Robin is really much too nervous to be in public relations. WRONG: Bob is not sure weather or not he will be able to attend your opening next week. RIGHT: Bob is not sure whether or not he will be able to attend your opening next week. WRONG: Who’s purse do you think this is? RIGHT: Whose purse do you think this is? www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ 7. Who’s/Whose 156 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 8: Words Often Confused, Group III Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in word choice. 1. The whether is usually nice in Hawaii all year round. 2. They’re buying a home in the city next year. 3. We met two of my father’s business associates at the dinner. 4. Did you find out whose coming early? 5. I love to browse in stationary stores. 6. Bob thinks this material is too difficult for first-year students. 7. The students left there books on the floor during the exam. 8. The audience applauded respectively at the end of her speech. 9. Do not send any of these booklets too people who did not put their complete address on the form. 10. He parked his car on the street so that he would not have to pay for parking in the garage. Answers X 1. (The weather is). See rule 6. X 7. (their books). See rule 4. C 2. X C 3. 8. (applauded respectfully). See rule 1. X 4. (who’s coming). See rule 7. X 9. (to people). See rule 5. X 5. (stationery stores). See rule 3. C 6. www.petersons.com C 10. Chapter 7: Style 157 ................................................................. The following is a list of Correlative Conjunctions. Remember that they are always used in the following pairs. Do not mix them up. both . . . and either . . . or neither . . . nor not only . . . but also whether . . . or That music is both disturbing and loud. Either he is going to get a job here or he is going to study in Los Angeles. He is neither well qualified nor sufficiently experienced for that position. He refused to say whether he would come to the meeting in person or send a representative. That horse is not only the youngest one in the race but also the only one to win two years in a row. a. Do not use both . . . and for three or more nouns or adjectives. Mary, Blair, and Margie are going to arrive late. OR Mary and Blair, as well as Margie, are going to arrive late. b. Whether may sometimes be used alone. I do not know whether she received the package. Error Examples WRONG: Both John, Ernest, and Paul are going to the game. RIGHT: John and Ernest, as well as Paul, are going to the game. OR John, Ernest, and Paul are going to the game. WRONG: That book includes only not records but also cassettes. RIGHT: That book includes not only records but also cassettes. WRONG: She won the dance competition because she had both originality as well as grace. RIGHT: She won the dance competition because she had both originality and grace. WRONG: She decided not only to start a diet, but to join an exercise class also. RIGHT: She decided not only to start a diet, but also to join an exercise class. WRONG: That coin is not only valuable but rare also. RIGHT: That coin is not only valuable but also rare. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ CORRELATIVE CONJUNCTIONS 158 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ WRONG: Neither the public or private sector of the economy will be seriously affected by this new regulation. RIGHT: Neither the public nor private sector of the economy will be seriously affected by this new regulation. WRONG: He refused to work either in Chicago nor in Detroit. RIGHT: He refused to work either in Chicago or in Detroit. Skill Builder 9: Correlative Conjunctions Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is a correlative conjunction error. 1. Some students can neither write or speak accurately. 2. That course includes not only TOEFL preparation but also techniques of test taking. 3. They like both living abroad as well as living at home. 4. Tom won not only the 100-yard dash but the broad jump also. 5. He is neither limber nor quick. 6. Either you will attend class regularly or you can expect a low grade. 7. Whether out of necessity or greed, he accepted the bribe. 8. Both the president and the vice-president gave speeches last night. 9. The play was both long, boring, and depressing. 10. He is both deceptive as well as irresponsible. Answers X 1. (neither write nor speak) C 7. C 2. C 8. X 3. (both living abroad and living). X X 4. (not only the 100-yard dash, but also the broad jump) 9. (was long, boring, and depressing) OR (long and boring, as well as depressing). See note a. C 5. C 6. www.petersons.com X 10. (both deceptive and irresponsible) Chapter 7: Style 159 ................................................................. Singular subjects take singular verbs. Plural subjects take plural verbs. S VERB The secretary in this office comes to work at eight. S VERB The secretaries in this office come to work at eight. Problems in determining the subject: 1. Subjects are never found in prepositional phrases. S PREP. PHRASE VERB The price of all these items is twenty dollars. S PREP. PHRASE VERB The characters in this story are well developed. 2. Here and there are not subjects. Look after the verb to find the subject. VERB S Here comes the bus. VERB S There are many good reasons to study language. 3. The subject also follows the verb in this pattern: ADV. VERB S On the door was a wreath of flowers. ADV. VERB S Around the corner are several small shops. 4. Expressions introduced with words such as along with, besides, like, as well as, and including do not change the number of the subject. S. VERB Mr. Jones, along with his wife and six children, is going to Paris. S VERB The weather, as well as economic conditions, is a consideration S VERB Several candidates, including John Baker, are going. 5. When two subjects are joined by either . . . or or neither . . . nor, the subject closer to the verb determines its number. S S VERB Neither Mary nor her sisters are going to the party. S S VERB Either my sisters or my mother is going to the wedding. 6. Some words look plural but are singular. Among these words are economics, mathematics, physics, news, and politics. S VERB The news was good. S VERB Mathematics is a challenging field. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ SUBJECT/VERB AGREEMENT 160 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 7. The subject of a relative clause, who, which, or that, is singular or plural depending on its antecedent. ANTECEDENT S VERB The students who come to class every day generally progress rapidly. ANTECEDENT S VERB Bob is one of my friends who are helping me paint my house. ANTECEDENT S VERB Bob is the only one of my friends who is helping me paint my house. Error Examples WRONG: His influence over the last ten years have grown considerably. RIGHT: His influence over the last ten years has grown considerably. WRONG: Over the fireplace hangs several small paintings. RIGHT: Over the fireplace hang several small paintings. WRONG: Neither the moon nor the stars is visible. RIGHT: Neither the moon nor the stars are visible. WRONG: A study of all possible causes of these multiple fractures are in order. RIGHT: A study of all possible causes of these multiple fractures is in order. WRONG: There occurs to me a few possible explanations for his behavior. RIGHT: There occur to me a few possible explanations for his behavior. WRONG: His furniture, including a dining room table and six chairs, are being sold. RIGHT: His furniture, including a dining room table and six chairs, is being sold. WRONG: I asked all the students who was willing to help to meet me at the school. RIGHT: I asked all the students who were willing to help to meet me at the school. WRONG: The college newspaper prints only the news that are of interest to the students and faculty. RIGHT: The college newspaper prints only the news that is of interest to the students and faculty. WRONG: Either the students or the teacher were mistaken. RIGHT: Either the students or the teacher was mistaken. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 161 ................................................................. Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in subject-verb agreement. 1. There are several jobs available. 2. Along the beach was several small boats that had been washed ashore. 3. Neither my sisters nor my brother is ready to begin college. 4. The lack of logic in his arguments never cease to surprise me. 5. She was determined to study nuclear physics, which was the most difficult course offered at that school. 6. Students who have difficulty with this subject should try to find someone who is willing to tutor them. 7. Either her husband or her children is going to be upset no matter what decision she makes. 8. Betty is one of the women who is responsible for writing that. 9. My uncle, as well as my father, are going to Canada on business. 10. The only one of his friends who is upset with John is Bob. Answers C 1. X X 2. (were several small boats). See rule 3. 7. (or her children are going). See rule 5. X 8. (the women who are responsible). See rule 7. X 9. (is going). See rule 4. C 3. X 4. (never ceases). See rule 1. C 5. C 6. C 10. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 10: Subject/Verb Agreement 162 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ PARTS OF SPEECH* NOTE There are some exceptions to these general rules. Sometimes a word can be identified as a noun, adjective, adverb, or verb by its suffix (ending). 1. The following suffixes usually indicate nouns: -ion, -sion, -tion population -acy accuracy -age image -ance, -ence permanence -hood childhood -ar, -or scholar, doctor -ism socialism -ist artist -ment government -ness happiness -y beauty -ty reality, capacity 2. The following suffixes usually indicate adjectives: -al natural -ful beautiful -ly friendly -ic chronic -ish childish -like childlike -ous populous, numerous -y happy -ate accurate -able, -ible capable, terrible 3. The following suffix usually indicates adverbs: -ly happily, readily, beautifully 4. The following suffixes usually indicate verbs: -ify beautify -ate populate -ize realize * See also Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Adjective/Adverb Confusion, page 32. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 163 ................................................................. WRONG: I was amazed at her natural beautiful. RIGHT: I was amazed at her natural beauty. WRONG: His illness was chronically. RIGHT: His illness was chronic. WRONG: Happily is a rare state of being. RIGHT: Happiness is a rare state of being. WRONG: He had an unhappy childlike. RIGHT: He had an unhappy childhood. WRONG: You should reality the truth. RIGHT: You should realize the truth. WRONG: That country has a very large populate. RIGHT: That country has a very large population. Skill Builder 11: Parts of Speech Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error in the part of speech according to the suffix. 1. Bob hopes to beauty his home by painting and carpeting. 2. Lawrence is a very happily man. 3. Japan is a very populous nation. 4. What do you think is the real of that situation? 5. Her manner was friendly and natural. 6. Dr. Smith’s capacity for hard work was incredible. 7. I never questioned his accurately. 8. Jane was surprised that he spoke so childish. 9. That new medicine will not be readily available until next year. 10. Does the book list the populous of that country in 1950? Answers X 1. (Bob hopes to beautify). See rule 4. C 6. X 7. (his accuracy). See rule 1. X 2. (a very happy man). See rule 2. X 8. (so childishly). See rule 3. C 3. C X 9. 4. (the reality of that situation). See rule 1. X C 5. 10. (the population). See rule 1. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Error Examples 164 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ PREPOSITIONS (GENERAL USE) A preposition is generally used to show the relationship between its object and other words in the sentence. The kinds of relationships that can be shown are as follows: NOTE Use by 1 N (no article) for communication and transportation. Examples: by phone, by radio, by telegram, by train, by car, by boat NOTE Never use for 1 V 1 ing to express the purpose of the verb. Example: He went to the store for buying WRONG bread. 1. Place (in, on, under, over, etc.) Your book is in the desk drawer. 2. Direction (to, toward, into, etc.) The student ran into the room. 3. Time (in, on, at, etc.) We can meet at three o’clock. 4. Agent (by) This book was written by an elderly woman. 5. Instrument (by, with) I heard the news by telephone. (communication) She came by plane. (transportation) He opened the door with a key. (instrument; tool) 6. Accompaniment (with) They like spaghetti with red sauce. Mrs. Jones went to the bank with her husband. 7. Purpose (for) (See also Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—To/For (Purpose), page 118.) He went to the store for bread. 8. Partition/Possession (of) They painted the front of the building. He broke the top of the table. 9. Measure (by, of) We buy our rice by the pound. Please buy a quart of milk. 10. Similarity (like) John looks like his father. 11. Capacity (as) Bill worked as a lifeguard this summer. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 165 ................................................................. WRONG: We damaged the front to the car. RIGHT: We damaged the front of the car. WRONG: That store sells flour for the 25-pound sack. RIGHT: That store sells flour by the 25-pound sack. WRONG: Betty worked like a secretary for a few months. RIGHT: Betty worked as a secretary for a few months. WRONG: For dinner we had chicken by rice. RIGHT: For dinner we had chicken with rice. WRONG: Your son is waiting for you to his office. RIGHT: Your son is waiting for you in his office. WRONG: The next performance begins in sundown. RIGHT: The next performance begins at sundown. WRONG: We went to the bank to money. RIGHT: We went to the bank for money. WRONG: These artifacts are made with Indians living in Peru. RIGHT: These artifacts are made by Indians living in Peru. WRONG: Jane went for Chicago with train. RIGHT: Jane went to Chicago by train. WRONG: Susan sings as her mother. RIGHT: Susan sings like her mother. www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ Error Examples 166 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 12: Prepositions (General Use) Directions: Write a “C” on the line if the sentence is correct. Write an “X” on the line if there is an error with the preposition. 1. We drove the car into the driveway. 2. They came to visit us with a car. 3. The movie was reviewed by the critic. 4. He came to the United States for an education. 5. Did you notice that Bob walks as his father? 6. He opened the door by key. 7. Paula looks nothing like her sister. 8. They purchased the fabric for the yard. 9. Barbara enjoyed working as a bank teller for one summer. 10. He went to the store for buying a newspaper. 11. We would like to invite you to our home for dinner on your birthday. 12. He did not notice that the leg for the chair was broken before he sat down. 13. John went to the store to buy two pounds butter. 14. Would you please bring us some coffee with our meal. 15. They met at the movies 7:00. Answers C 1. C X 2. (by car). See rule 5. X 10. (for a newspaper). See rule 7. C 3. C 11. C 4. X 12. (leg of the chair). See rule 8. X 5. (walks like his father). See rule 10. X 13. (pounds of butter). See rule 9. C X 14. 6. (with a key). See rule 5. X C 15. (at 7:00). See rule 3. 7. X 8. (by the yard) See rule 9. www.petersons.com 9. Chapter 7: Style 167 ................................................................. 1. The following verb plus preposition combinations always appear as follows and must be learned together: ............................................................................................ PREPOSITIONS IN COMBINATIONS NOTE The correct verb agree on (something) We agree on that point. agree with (a person) I agree with you on that matter. approve of Betty approves of exercising. arrive at OR in They arrived in Tokyo last night. complain about Please do not complain about the prices. consent to She consented to her daughter’s marriage. comment on She commented on his new suit. consist of Water consists of hydrogen and oxygen. depend on I am depending on good weather for my party. laugh at We laughed at his silly behavior. object to Do you object to my smoking? succeed in He succeeded in making everyone angry. form to use after a preposition is a gerund (V 1 ing). 2. Some other verb plus preposition combinations take two objects. compare . . . with OR to Do not compare me with (OR to) my sister. excuse . . . for I cannot excuse you for being late. prefer . . . to She prefers coffee to tea. remind . . . of He reminded me of my appointment. thank . . . for I thanked him for letting me use his car. 3. There are many adjective 1 preposition combinations that occur with the verb to be. be afraid of Henry is afraid of dogs. be accustomed to I was accustomed to seeing him every day. be aware of Are you aware of his problem? be bored with Jane is bored with school. be certain of You cannot be certain of the date. be disappointed with Susan was disappointed with that restaurant. be familiar with Is Doctor Jones familiar with that new technique? be famous for Wisconsin is famous for its cheese. be frightened by Do not be frightened by the thunder and lightning. be happy with The Joneses are very happy with their new home. be in favor of Are you in favor of women’s liberation? be interested in John is interested in attending a large university. be opposed to He is really opposed to buying a new car. be satisfied with He is not satisfied with his new radio. www.petersons.com See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Verbals, rule 3, page 78. 168 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ be surprised at OR by Do not be surprised at his behavior. be tired of Maria is very tired of working six days a week. be worried about Mark is very worried about his sick child. 4. Some prepositions exist in fixed phrases. according to According to the news, the government has fallen. along with Can you take this package, along with these letters, to the post office? as well as I enjoy art as well as history. because of Because of the rain, there will be no picnic. by means of The thief entered the house by means of an open window. by way of John went to Paris by way of London. in addition to In addition to going to school full-time, Patricia works part-time. in case of In case of fire, pull this alarm. in consideration of In consideration of all your help, I would like to take you to dinner. in contrast to OR with In contrast to last summer, this summer is cool. in deference to In deference to his age, we did not argue with him. in hopes of We came here in hopes of meeting the president. in lieu of He gave an oral report in lieu of a written report. in pursuit of The police were in pursuit of the thief. in search of They went into the mountains in search of gold. in spite of In spite of his good intentions, he did not study very much. in the face of In the face of a severe drought, the tribe moved to a new location. in terms of He was a good husband in terms of earning a good living. Error Examples WRONG: Is John familiar enough for this part of town to find your house? RIGHT: Is John familiar enough with this part of town to find your house? WRONG: In spite the rain, the party has not been canceled. RIGHT: In spite of the rain, the party has not been canceled. WRONG: My son was surprised with his teacher’s decision. RIGHT: My son was surprised at (OR by) his teacher’s decision. WRONG: He continued to work in the face to his doctor’s disapproval. RIGHT: He continued to work in the face of his doctor’s disapproval. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 169 ................................................................. WRONG: Bob is always complaining for the heat in Arizona in the summertime. RIGHT: Bob is always complaining about the heat in Arizona in the summertime. WRONG: How do you think Rome compares by Paris? RIGHT: How do you think Rome compares to Paris? WRONG: Veronica is tired by waiting for me to get ready. RIGHT: Veronica is tired of waiting for me to get ready. WRONG: Do you object with my cutting some of your flowers? RIGHT: Do you object to my cutting some of your flowers? WRONG: Do you think it is fair to excuse him by being late? RIGHT: Do you think it is fair to excuse him for being late? WRONG: Betty reminds me to my sister. RIGHT: Betty reminds me of my sister. WRONG: Who is in favor for adjourning the meeting early? RIGHT: Who is in favor of adjourning the meeting early? WRONG: What time do you think you will arrive to London? RIGHT: What time do you think you will arrive in London? WRONG: He asked if he could paint the apartment in lieu for a month’s rent. RIGHT: He asked if he could paint the apartment in lieu of a month’s rent. WRONG: One cannot depend with luck to bring success. RIGHT: One cannot depend on luck to bring success. WRONG: He studied art in addition with his regular course of studies. RIGHT: He studied art in addition to his regular course of studies. WRONG: George is not accustomed at speaking in public. RIGHT: George is not accustomed to speaking in public. WRONG: Clyde is quite satisfied by his new apartment. RIGHT: Clyde is quite satisfied with his new apartment. WRONG: Can we agree with a date for our next meeting? RIGHT: Can we agree on a date for our next meeting? www.petersons.com ............................................................................................ WRONG: Clyde is bored for living in the country. RIGHT: Clyde is bored with living in the country. 170 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ Skill Builder 13: Prepositions in Combinations Directions: Put “C” if the sentence is correct. Put “X” if there is an error with the preposition. 1. Did you agree to your father on which car you should buy? 2. They arrived to Paris sometime early in the summer. 3. Were the students accustomed to leaving early on Fridays? 4. Whether we leave early or late depends about your schedule. 5. The doctor objected to the patient’s leaving the hospital a day early. 6. David was surprised at the amount of time necessary to fix the car. 7. Henry was not very satisfied with the lab report that he wrote. 8. Switzerland is famous of its beautiful mountains. 9. The soldier showed great courage in the face of death. 10. This home certainly does not compare favorably at our old one. 11. The committee was in favor of increasing his salary. 12. Were you tired with waiting for her to call? 13. He did not expect us to comment to his newly decorated office. 14. Are you familiar to early American art? 15. He spent his life in search for absolute truth. Answers X 1. (agree with your father). See rule 1. X 2. (arrived in). See rule 1. C 3. X 4. (depends on your schedule). See rule 1. C 9. X 10. (compare favorably to) OR (compare favorably with). See rule 2. C 11. X 12. (tired of waiting). See rule 3. C 5. X 13. (comment on). See rule 1. X 6. (surprised at) OR (surprised by). See rule 3. X 14. (familiar with). See rule 3. X C 15. (in search of). See rule 4. 7. X 8. (famous for its beautiful mountains). See rule 3. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 171 ................................................................. Directions: For the Error Identification questions, each sentence contains four underlined words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that must be changed in order for the sentence to be correct. Circle your answer in the book or mark your answer on a separate sheet of paper. 1. The design for the new community (A) center combines both refreshing origi(B) nality as well as an impressive respect (C) for the traditional architecture of the (D) area. 2. He described his best friend as being (A) adventuresome, witty, and successful, (B) (C) but very plane-looking. (D) 3. In order to earn enough money to (A) complete his education, John worked last summer like a lifeguard at a girls’ (B) (C) (D) camp. 4. When I was at the grocery store, I (A) realized that the prices of many items (B) (C) had been rised. (D) 5. The natives of that region gathered (A) plants and hunted small animals, but supplies were bought by them in the (B) (C) market-place, which they visited infrequently. (D) 6. Our trek in the Sahara Dessert was (A) (B) extremely fascinating, totally challeng(C) ing, and enormously relaxing. (D) 7. The political polls indicated that most (A) people were not as much in favor with (B) (C) the new law as was previously thought. (D) 8. We did not hire him because his only (A) (B) experience was coaching a high school basketball team, leading a parochial (C) school choir, and to work as a substi(D) tute teacher. 9. The new teacher was both surprised (A) and delighted when she realized that (B) her class consisted with many students (C) from faraway countries. (D) 10. According to my calculations, the cost of two dozen roses are fifty dollars, (A) which is considerably less than (B) the sixty-two dollars I was charged. (C) (D) www.petersons.com exercises Error Identification ............................................................................................ EXERCISES: STYLE 172 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 11. In contrast of his earlier behavior, the (A) young man demonstrated surprising (B) maturity in the face of severe stress. (C) (D) 12. I told them to take there boots off (A) (B) outside so they would not bring in a lot (C) (D) of snow. 13. Try to image what life was like for the (A) (B) (C) early settlers of that part of the world. (D) 14. Emergency relief, including medicine, (A) clothing, and foodstuffs, were sent to (B) (C) the earthquake zone immediately following news of the disaster. (D) 15. It was so ferociously hot yesterday that (A) our supposed day of outdoor enjoyment (B) ended with everyone’s laying in the (C) (D) shade. Sentence Completion Directions: In the Sentence Completion questions, one or more words are left out of each sentence. Under each sentence, you will see four words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that completes the sentence correctly, then write it in the space provided in the book or on a separate sheet of paper. 1. The young couple liked to buy, redecorate, and ________ older homes for a profit. (A) (B) (C) (D) resold reselling resell to resell 2. The management was shocked to realize that its trusted employee was ________ of stealing a large sum of money from the company. (A) (B) (C) (D) suspicioned suspicioning suspected suspicion www.petersons.com 3. Not only having graduated magna cum laude ________, Steve made his family very proud of him. (A) and also having finished first in the national competition (B) also having finished first in the national competition (C) but having finished first in the national competition (D) but also having finished first in the national competition 4. ________ his earlier study, Dr. Melon’s new study indicates a general warming trend in global weather. (A) (B) (C) (D) In In In In contrast contrast contrast contrast of to by as Chapter 7: Style 173 ................................................................. there they’re their they 6. The reason he wants to take a leave of absence is ________. (A) because he is needing a complete rest (B) because he needs a complete rest (C) that he needs a complete rest (D) because a complete rest is needed by him 7. The teacher objected to the students’ ________ their opened umbrellas near the door. (A) (B) (C) (D) sitting having sat setting sat love loving feelings feelings of love loveliness 9. The rich young newlyweds bought a beautiful new home and ________. (A) (B) (C) (D) their pool was installed had a pool installed had a pool being installed a pool was installed 10. My boss ________ my taking two weeks’ leave without pay. (A) (B) (C) (D) consented consented consented consented 12. Henry went to the conference ________ about government contracts. (A) to learn (B) with the purpose of learning (C) in order to have the opportunity to learn (D) in order to be in a position to learn 13. Try as he might, he could never manage to get an ________ balance in his checkbook. 8. He was a dynamic figure who inspired awe, devotion, and ________ in his followers. (A) (B) (C) (D) (A) they came to the realization that this problem was one that had no solution (B) realizing that it was insolvable (C) they were able to understand that this problem which seemed merely difficult was, in reality, insolvable (D) the insolvability of the problem was realized by them to for of about (A) (B) (C) (D) accuracy accurately accurate accurateness 14. The professor asked the students ________. (A) not only to write a report or give a speech (B) either to write a report or give a speech (C) neither to write a report or give a speech (D) neither to write a report but give a speech 15. She writes such ________ poetry that it is hard to believe she has never had a formal education. (A) (B) (C) (D) beauty beautiful beautifully beautify www.petersons.com exercises (A) (B) (C) (D) 11. The students worked on the problem for several minutes before ________. ............................................................................................ 5. The workers have finished pouring the floors, and ________ waiting for the house to be framed. 174 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ ANSWER KEY AND EXPLANATIONS Some of the incorrect answers contain more than one kind of error. However, in general, we have limited our error-references to those points contained in this chapter. Error Identification 1. C 2. D 3. B 4. D 5. B 6. B 7. C 8. D 9. C 10. A 11. A 12. A 13. A 14. C 15. D 1. The correct answer is (C). (and). See Correlative Conjunctions, page 157. 9. The correct answer is (C). (consisted of). See Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. 2. The correct answer is (D). (plainlooking). See Words Often Confused, Group II, page 150. 10. The correct answer is (A). (is). See Subject/Verb Agreement, page 159. 3. The correct answer is (B). (as). See Prepositions (General Use), page 164. 4. The correct answer is (D). (had been raised). See Usage, page 142. 5. The correct answer is (B). (bought supplies). See Voice, page 129. 6. The correct answer is (B). (Sahara Desert). See Words Often Confused, Group I, page 146. 7. The correct answer is (C). (in favor of). See Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. 8. The correct answer is (D). (working). See Parallelism, page 133. 11. The correct answer is (A). (contrast to). See Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. 12. The correct answer is (A). (their). See Words Often Confused, Group III, page 154. 13. The correct answer is (A). (to imagine). See Parts of Speech, page 162. 14. The correct answer is (C). (was sent). See Subject/Verb Agreement, page 159. 15. The correct answer is (D). (lying). See Usage, page 142. Sentence Completion 1. C 2. C 3. D 4. B 5. B 6. C 7. C 8. A 9. B 10. A 11. B 12. A 13. C 14. B 15. B 1. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Parallelism, page 133. 3. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A), (B), and (C), see Correlative Conjunctions, page 157. 2. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Substandard, page 139. 4. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. www.petersons.com Chapter 7: Style 175 ................................................................. 6. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Substandard, page 139 and Voice, page 129. 12. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B), (C), and (D), see Wordiness, page 136. 7. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Usage, page 142. 13. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Parts of Speech, page 162. 8. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B), and (C), see Parallelism, page 133. Choice (D), The meaning of loveliness does not fit here. 9. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A) and (D), see Voice, page 129. Choice (C), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Verbals, page 77. 14. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Correlative Conjunctions, page 157. 15. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Parts of Speech, page 162. 10. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B), (C), and (D), see Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. exercises www.petersons.com answers 11. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A) and (C) see Wordiness, page 136. Choice (D), see Voice, page 129. ............................................................................................ 5. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Words Often Confused, Group III, page 154. 176 PART III: TOEFL Writing Review ................................................................. ............................................................................................ • SUMMING IT UP In English, the active voice is more common than the passive voice, although the passive voice is acceptable and even preferred at times. • Items in a series must be parallel; that is, they must have the same grammatical form. • A general rule in English might be that “shorter is better.” When the same idea can be expressed directly in fewer words, choose the shorter version. www.petersons.com P ART IV ......................................................... THREE PRACTICE TESTS ..................................................................... PRACTICE TEST 2 PRACTICE TEST 3 PRACTICE TEST 4 ✁ -------------------------------------------------------------------- Error Identification A O B O C O D 1. O A O B O C O D 10. O A O B O C O D 18. O A O B O C O D 2. O A O B O C O D 11. O A O B O C O D 19. O A O B O C O D 3. O A O B O C O D 12. O A O B O C O D 20. O A O B O C O D 4. O A O B O C O D 13. O A O B O C O D 21. O A O B O C O D 5. O A O B O C O D 14. O A O B O C O D 22. O A O B O C O D 6. O A O B O C O D 15. O A O B O C O D 23. O A O B O C O D 7. O A O B O C O D 16. O A O B O C O D 24. O A O B O C O D 8. O A O B O C O D 17. O A O B O C O D 25. O A O B O C O D 26. O A O B O C O D 31. O A O B O C O D 36. O A O B O C O D 27. O A O B O C O D 32. O A O B O C O D 37. O A O B O C O D 28. O A O B O C O D 33. O A O B O C O D 38. O A O B O C O D 29. O A O B O C O D 34. O A O B O C O D 39. O A O B O C O D 30. O A O B O C O D 35. O A O B O C O D 40. O A O B O C O D 9. O Sentence Completion 179 answer sheet ANSWER SHEET PRACTICE TEST 2 Practice Test 2 ............................................................................... ERROR IDENTIFICATION Directions: For the Error Identification questions, each sentence contains four underlined words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that must be changed in order for the sentence to be correct. Mark your answer on the answer sheet provided. 4. John stayed up all night long (A) (B) trying to solve a physics (C) (D) problem. 1. Since William had been seri(A) ously ill for several months, his (B) parents were concerned about (C) him wanting to return to school (D) full-time. 5. Michael wants to become a (A) general practitioner as his fa(B) ther and to move to a small 2. The mother cried as her child (A) laid on the examination table (B) (C) after the accident. (D) town as soon as he graduates. (C) (D) 6. In spite of their trepidation, the (A) parents let their two oldest (B) children driven alone to New (C) Mexico to ski. (D) 3. The students were quite surprised to find these kind of (A) (B) archeological ruins in the particular area that they had chosen (C) (D) for the dig. 7. Life in modern society lacks the (A) sense of permanent that is so (B) (C) important to social stability. (D) 181 practice test 2 40 QUESTIONS • 25 MINUTES 182 PART IV: Three Practice Tests ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 8. As soon as they will finish the new (A) (B) business administration building, our (C) offices are going to be moved. (D) 15. Ever since he arrived, he has been (A) (B) complaining about constantly the (C) (D) weather. 9. In spite of suffering some minor incon(A) (B) veniences, Dr. Blake and his wife en- 16. The living room was enough large (A) (B) to accommodate two long sofas easily. (C) (D) joyed living in a three-hundred-years-old (C) (D) house in London last summer. 10. If Tom would have sent in his papers (A) (B) sooner, he would have been accepted for (C) (D) this semester. 11. Professor Layton was equally fond of (A) (B) his two children, but he had to admit 12. that he found the youngest an easier (C) child to handle. (D) By the beginning of next year, much of (A) (B) the people who live in that area may (C) have difficulty finding employment. (D) 13. Even though the child pretended (A) sleeping, when we opened the bedroom (B) (C) door we were not deceived. (D) 14. Be careful to give the caterers a (A) (B) accurate count of the number of people whom you expect to go to the wedding (C) (D) reception. www.petersons.com 17. Approving of my choice of colleges, my (A) father said that he was willing (B) to completely pay for all the costs of my (C) (D) education. 18. In spite of the exceedingly favorable (A) (B) financial benefits she is receiving, Linda now wishes that she was not stationed (C) in Alaska for three years. (D) 19. When the seamstress tried to sew the (A) button on with a plastic needle, it (B) (C) (D) broke. 20. We all laughed when Helen said she (A) (B) could not remember what day was it. (C) (D) 21. The children soon forgot that it was (A) them, their parents, who had encour(B) (C) aged them to continue their education. (D) 22. Having ran for three miles, I was (A) (B) exhausted but exhilarated. (C) (D) Practice Test 2 183 ................................................................. 24. Our company looks forward to have you (A) on staff, and we will assist you in any (B) (C) way possible in order to make your (D) move pleasant. SENTENCE COMPLETION Directions: In the Sentence Completion questions, one or more words are left out of each sentence. Under each sentence, you will see four words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that completes the sentence correctly and mark your answer on the answer sheet provided. in the book or on a separate sheet of paper. 26. It was ________ that we went for a hike in the mountains. (A) (B) (C) (D) so nice a day such nice day so nice day such nice a day 27. I was surprised to see ________ at the concert. (A) (B) (C) (D) those number of people that amount of people that number of people those amount of people 28. The art museum is internationally acclaimed not only for its sixteenthcentury Flemish collection ________ for its early Picasso collection. (A) (B) (C) (D) and but but also as well as 29. ________ that the hope for cancer control may lie in the use of a vaccine. (A) (B) (C) (D) To believe It is believed Believing The belief 30. Everyone was ________ the threat of military intervention in that area. (A) (B) (C) (D) frightened for frightened frightened to frightened by 31. If Dorothy had not been badly hurt in a car accident, she ________ in last month’s marathon. (A) (B) (C) (D) would participate participated would have participated would had participate www.petersons.com practice test 2 25. The theater arranged a private showing (A) of the film for Peter and I so that we (B) (C) could review it before our deadline. (D) ............................................................................................ 23. Harold announced that he could (A) not longer tolerate the conditions of the (B) (C) contract under which he was working. (D) 184 PART IV: Three Practice Tests ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 32. On our last trip to Europe, we spent a lot of time visiting ________ churches and castles. (A) (B) (C) (D) old enough very old enough old too old 33. Our success depends ________ the project by December. (A) (B) (C) (D) on finishing finishing about finishing on to finish 34. Be sure to wake ________ at 7:00. (A) (B) (C) (D) we Paul and me us, Paul and I Paul and I 35. When Betty met Sue, ________. (A) (B) (C) (D) she was a student at Stanford Sue was a student at Stanford she is a student at Stanford at Stanford Sue was a student 36. Nancy sometimes wishes that she ________ in a small town. (A) (B) (C) (D) was not living did not lived does not live were not living www.petersons.com 37. When the professor called on him, ________. (A) John repeated again the correct answer (B) John repeated the correct answer (C) John repeated the answer which was correct (D) the correct answer was repeated by John 38. These seats are reserved for ________. (A) (B) (C) (D) those on the executive committee they on the executive committee them on the executive committee those who find themselves in the position of being on the executive committee 39. Barbara has been pursuing a career in architecture ________ she graduated in May. (A) (B) (C) (D) when until for since 40. Our buyer has gone to New York ________ new fall clothes. (A) (B) (C) (D) to choose for to choose for choosing for having chosen Practice Test 2 185 ................................................................. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D B B D B 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. C B B D A 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. C B B B D 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. B C C D D 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. B A B A B 1. The correct answer is (D). (his wanting). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Possessives, page 98. 12. The correct answer is (B). (many). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Few, Little, Much, and Many, page 39. 2. The correct answer is (B). (lay). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Usage, page 142. 13. The correct answer is (B). (to be sleeping). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Verbals, page 77. 3. The correct answer is (B). (these kinds). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Demonstratives, page 38. 4. The correct answer is (D). (physics). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Noun Adjectives, page 35. 6. The correct answer is (C). (drive). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Verbals, page 77. 7. The correct answer is (B). (permanence). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Parts of Speech, page 162. 8. The correct answer is (B). (they finish). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Time Clauses, page 69. 9. The correct answer is (D). (threehundred-year-old). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Hyphenated or Compound Adjectives, page 37. 10. The correct answer is (A). (Tom had sent). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Conditionals, page 73. 11. The correct answer is (C). (the younger). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Comparatives, page 46. 15. The correct answer is (D). (about the weather constantly). See Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—Order of Adverbs, page 113. 16. The correct answer is (B). (large enough). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Too, Very, and Enough, page 55. 17. The correct answer is (C). (to pay for the costs of my education completely). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Split Infinitives, page 29. 18. The correct answer is (C). (were not stationed). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Wishes, page 71. 19. The correct answer is (D). (the button broke) OR (the needle broke). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Faulty Reference, page 100. 20. The correct answer is (D). (it was). See Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”— Embedded Questions, page 116. 21. The correct answer is (B). (they). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Personal Pronouns—Case, page 93. 22. The correct answer is (A). (having run). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Past Participles, page 81. www.petersons.com practice test 2 5. The correct answer is (B). (like). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Sameness and Similarity, page 44. 14. The correct answer is (B). (an accurate). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Articles, page 53. answers Error Identification ............................................................................................ ANSWER KEY AND EXPLANATIONS 186 PART IV: Three Practice Tests ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 23. The correct answer is (B). (no longer). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Negation, page 57. 25. The correct answer is (B). (me). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Personal Pronouns—Case, page 93. 24. The correct answer is (A). (having). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Verbals, page 77. Sentence Completion 26. A 27. C 28. C 29. B 30. D 31. C 32. B 33. A 34. B 35. B 36. D 37. B 38. A 39. D 40. A 26. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B), (C), and (D), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Cause and Result, page 50. 34. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Personal Pronouns—Case, page 93. 27. The correct answer is (C). Choice (A), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Demonstratives, page 38. Choice (B), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Usage, page 142. Choice (D), same as A and B. 35. The correct answer is (B). Choice (A), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Faulty Reference, page 100. Choice (C), same as A. See also Chapter 7, “Style”—Parallelism, page 133. Choice (D), see Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”— Order of Adverbs, page 113. 28. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Correlative Conjunctions, page 157. 29. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—Clauses, page 121. 30. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A), (B), and (C), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. 31. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Conditionals, page 73. 32. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Too, Very, and Enough, page 55. 33. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B), (C), and (D), see Chapter 7, “Style”−Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. See also Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Verbals, page 77. www.petersons.com 36. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A) and (C), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Wishes, page 71. Choice (B), incorrect negative formation (did not live). 37. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Wordiness, page 136. See also Chapter 7, “Style”—Voice, page 129. 38. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B) and (C), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Those Modified, page 107. Choice (D), See Chapter 7, “Style”— Wordiness, page 136. 39. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A), (B), and (C), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Tense, page 67. 40. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B), (C), and (D), see Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—To/For (Purpose), page 118. ✁ -------------------------------------------------------------------- Error Identification A O B O C O D 1. O A O B O C O D 10. O A O B O C O D 18. O A O B O C O D 2. O A O B O C O D 11. O A O B O C O D 19. O A O B O C O D 3. O A O B O C O D 12. O A O B O C O D 20. O A O B O C O D 4. O A O B O C O D 13. O A O B O C O D 21. O A O B O C O D 5. O A O B O C O D 14. O A O B O C O D 22. O A O B O C O D 6. O A O B O C O D 15. O A O B O C O D 23. O A O B O C O D 7. O A O B O C O D 16. O A O B O C O D 24. O A O B O C O D 8. O A O B O C O D 17. O A O B O C O D 25. O A O B O C O D 26. O A O B O C O D 31. O A O B O C O D 36. O A O B O C O D 27. O A O B O C O D 32. O A O B O C O D 37. O A O B O C O D 28. O A O B O C O D 33. O A O B O C O D 38. O A O B O C O D 29. O A O B O C O D 34. O A O B O C O D 39. O A O B O C O D 30. O A O B O C O D 35. O A O B O C O D 40. O A O B O C O D 9. O Sentence Completion 187 answer sheet ANSWER SHEET PRACTICE TEST 3 Practice Test 3 ............................................................................... ERROR IDENTIFICATION Directions: For the Error Identification questions, each sentence contains four underlined words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that must be changed in order for the sentence to be correct. Mark your answer on the answer sheet provided. 1. Lawrence never lost the respect (A) for his parents who had (B) struggled so hard to put him (C) through medical school. (D) 5. The interesting designed stair(A) way led directly to a large (B) ballroom where everyone (C) was waiting for us. (D) 2. I doubt weather he will enter (A) (B) the doctoral program this fall 6. Even though they have been (A) (B) looking for an apartment for a (B) (C) month now, they have not been because of his financial prob(C) (D) lems. able to find one anywheres. (D) 3. If Jackie and Mary had been in (A) (B) better physical condition, they (C) might enjoyed the hike more. (D) 4. Not having passed the law (A) exam, the state refused (B) to issue him a license to practice. (C) (D) 189 7. I have reserved six front-row (A) (B) seats for the basketball play-off (C) (D) game last night. practice test 3 40 QUESTIONS • 25 MINUTES 190 PART IV: Three Practice Tests ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 8. The five hours of classes the students have every day are audio-lingual, read(A) ing, writing, laboratory, and to choose (B) (C) an extra special-interest course. (D) 9. The crops are already showing signs of (A) dehydration and probably cannot sur(B) vive another week without no rain. (C) (D) 10. The children had such difficult time (A) when they began school in their new (B) neighborhood that their parents de- 15. Let’s take one of this pamphlets and (A) look up the special flights to Hawaii in (B) (C) (D) November. 16. Samuel’s new position as head of the (A) editorial staff is certainly a more (B) demanding one than Henry. (C) (D) 17. Susan was determined to leave the (A) office by 4:30 for catching the early (B) (C) train home. (D) 18. The newlyweds found a style of living cided never to move again. (C) (D) 11. He had his tailor made an exotic (A) (B) oriental-looking robe for opening night. (C) (D) 12. Teamwork requires that a player (A) the ball to whomever is in the (C) position to make the goal. pass (B) best (D) 13. There were never any secrets among my (A) sister and me when we were growing up. (B) (C) (D) 14. Dr. Lacey was the kind of administrator which tried to maintain high morale (A) (B) among his staff by encouraging open (C) (D) communication. www.petersons.com in Italy as satisfying that they wished (A) (B) (C) that they could stay there forever. (D) 19. Those who had already purchased tick(A) (B) ets were instructed to go to gate first (C) immediately. (D) 20. The cost of gasoline has raised (A) (B) tremendously in the last eight-month (C) (D) period. 21. It is important that you turned off the (A) (B) heater every morning before you leave (C) (D) for class. Practice Test 3 191 ................................................................. 25. I was very embarrassed at the (A) inauguration last week when I set in (B) (C) the wrong chair on the stage. (D) SENTENCE COMPLETION Directions: In the Sentence Completion questions, one or more words are left out of each sentence. Under each sentence, you will see four words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that completes the sentence correctly, then mark your answer on the answer sheet provided. 26. There ________ in that part of the country. (A) (B) (C) (D) are not much industry is not many industry are not many industry is not much industry 27. The Marcus Aurelius, ________ went down at sea in 1970, is reputed to have had great wealth on board. (A) (B) (C) (D) that which which who what 28. He ________ since he lost his job. (A) (B) (C) (D) has been feeling bad is feeling badly had been feeling badly is feeling bad 29. Let’s put a new ________ on the window sill. (A) (B) (C) (D) flower’s box flowers’ box flower box flowers box 30. I let my cousin ________ my car when he came to visit me. (A) (B) (C) (D) to borrow borrow borrowing borrowed 31. John remembered his parents’ anniversary and ________. (A) (B) (C) (D) sent them some flowers to them sent some flowers sent to them some flowers some flowers to them sent 32. The plans for that building were drawn up in 1965 but ________. (A) their implementation was not put into action until 1970 (B) the plans for that building were not implemented until 1970 (C) were not implemented and started until 1970 (D) were not implemented until 1970 www.petersons.com practice test 3 23. Dr. Alvarez looked tiredly as he ap(A) (B) proached the podium to give his fare(C) well speech to the graduating class. (D) 24. Their office has not still returned the (A) (B) (C) original document to us. (D) ............................................................................................ 22. With regard to your letter of October (A) 26, we are quiet disappointed to learn (B) (C) that you are unable to accept the job at (D) this time. 192 PART IV: Three Practice Tests ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 33. The doctor ________. (A) adviced that Jim every afternoon (B) adviced that Jim every afternoon (C) advised that Jim every afternoon (D) advised that Jim every afternoon lie down lay down lie down lay down 34. John will most likely ________, but Kathy will probably stay home. (A) (B) (C) (D) coming be come come had come 35. ________ told us to turn our topics in by Friday. (A) (B) (C) (D) Our Our Our Our professor he professor who professor professor that 36. During her vacation in Europe, Margaret visited museums, went shopping, and ________ a lot of interesting people. (A) (B) (C) (D) had met was meeting met has been meeting www.petersons.com 37. It was essential that we ________ the lease before the end of the month. (A) (B) (C) (D) sign signed had signed were signing 38. The opening of the new freeway has made traffic conditions in the city ________. (A) (B) (C) (D) more good the better better more better 39. If their train arrives ________ not make it to the theater on time. (A) (B) (C) (D) lately, we will late, we would more later, we will late, we will 40. When traveling in a foreign country, one should be careful to carry ________ at all times. (A) (B) (C) (D) their passport your passport one’s passport hers passport Practice Test 3 193 ................................................................. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A A D A A 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. D A C D A 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. B C A A A 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. D C B C B 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. B B A C C 1. The correct answer is (A). (lost respect). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Articles, page 53. 12. The correct answer is (C). (whoever). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Who/Whom, page 95. 2. The correct answer is (A). (whether). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Words Often Confused, Group III, page 154. 13. The correct answer is (A). (between). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Usage, page 142. 3. The correct answer is (D). (might have enjoyed). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Conditionals, page 73. 14. The correct answer is (A). (who). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Relative Pronouns, page 91. 4. The correct answer is (A). (Since Howard did not pass the law exam,). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Dangling Modifiers, page 30. 15. The correct answer is (A). (these). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Demonstratives, page 38. 6. The correct answer is (D). (anywhere). See Chapter 7, “Style”— Substandard, page 139. 7. The correct answer is (A). (I reserved). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Tense, page 67. 16. The correct answer is (D). (Henry’s). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Comparatives, page 46. 17. The correct answer is (C). (to catch). See Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—To/For (Purpose), page 118. 18. The correct answer is (B). (so satisfying). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Cause and Result, page 50. 8. The correct answer is (C). (and an). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Parallelism, page 133. 19. The correct answer is (C). (gate one). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, page 42. 9. The correct answer is (D). (without rain). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Negation, page 57. 20. The correct answer is (B). (has risen). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Usage, page 142. 10. The correct answer is (A). (such a difficult time). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Cause and Result, page 50. 21. The correct answer is (B). (turn off). See Chapter 4, “Verbs—Verbs of “Demand,” page 70. 11. The correct answer is (B). (make). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Verbals, page 77. 22. The correct answer is (B). (quite). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Words Often Confused, Group II, page 150. www.petersons.com practice test 3 5. The correct answer is (A). (interestingly). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Adjective/Adverb Confusion, page 32. answers Error Identification ............................................................................................ ANSWER KEY AND EXPLANATIONS 194 PART IV: Three Practice Tests ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 23. The correct answer is (A). (tired). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Adjectives after Verbs of Sensation, page 34. 25. The correct answer is (C). (sat). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Usage, page 142. 24. The correct answer is (C). (still has not returned). See Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—Order of Adverbs, page 113. Sentence Completion 26. D 27. B 28. A 29. C 30. B 31. A 32. D 33. C 34. C 26. The correct answer is (D). Choice (A), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Subject/ Verb Agreement, page 159. Choice (B), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Few, Little, Much, and Many, page 39. Choice (C), same as A and B. 27. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Relative Pronouns, page 91. 28. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B), (C), and (D), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Tense, page 67, and Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Adjectives after Verbs of Sensation, page 34. 29. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Noun Adjectives, page 35. 30. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Verbals, page 77. 31. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B), (C), and (D), see Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—Indirect Objects, page 111. 32. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A), (B), and (C), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Wordiness, page 136. 33. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Words Often Confused, Group I, page 146. See also Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Verbs of “Demand,” page 70, and Chapter 7, “Style”—Usage, page 142. www.petersons.com 35. C 36. C 37. A 38. C 39. D 40. C 34. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Modals, page 75. 35. The correct answer is (C). Choice (A), see Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”— Double Subjects, page 120. Choices (B) and (D) see Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—Clauses, page 121. 36. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Parallelism, page 133. 37. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B), (C), and (D), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Verbs of “Demand,” page 70. 38. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Comparatives, page 46. 39. The correct answer is (D). Choice (A), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Adjective/Adverb Confusion, page 32. Choice (B), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Conditionals, page 73. Choice (C), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Comparatives, page 46. 40. The correct answer is (C). Choice (A), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Number, page 104. Choices (B) and (D), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Person, page 102. ✁ -------------------------------------------------------------------- Error Identification A O B O C O D 1. O A O B O C O D 10. O A O B O C O D 18. O A O B O C O D 2. O A O B O C O D 11. O A O B O C O D 19. O A O B O C O D 3. O A O B O C O D 12. O A O B O C O D 20. O A O B O C O D 4. O A O B O C O D 13. O A O B O C O D 21. O A O B O C O D 5. O A O B O C O D 14. O A O B O C O D 22. O A O B O C O D 6. O A O B O C O D 15. O A O B O C O D 23. O A O B O C O D 7. O A O B O C O D 16. O A O B O C O D 24. O A O B O C O D 8. O A O B O C O D 17. O A O B O C O D 25. O A O B O C O D 26. O A O B O C O D 31. O A O B O C O D 36. O A O B O C O D 27. O A O B O C O D 32. O A O B O C O D 37. O A O B O C O D 28. O A O B O C O D 33. O A O B O C O D 38. O A O B O C O D 29. O A O B O C O D 34. O A O B O C O D 39. O A O B O C O D 30. O A O B O C O D 35. O A O B O C O D 40. O A O B O C O D 9. O Sentence Completion 195 answer sheet ANSWER SHEET PRACTICE TEST 4 Practice Test 4 ............................................................................... ERROR IDENTIFICATION Directions: For the Error Identification questions, each sentence contains four underlined words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that must be changed in order for the sentence to be correct. Mark your answer on the answer sheet provided. 1. One should always avoid (A) (B) to change lanes without first (C) signaling. (D) 5. Physics is a demanding field (A) that has attracted many people (B) to challenge their complexities. (C) (D) 2. Their custom it is to name the (A) (B) first child after the paternal (C) (D) grandfather. 6. The president gave to his advis(A) (B) ers the new five-month austerity (C) (D) plan. 3. While staying in Los Angeles, (A) we were able not only to conduct (B) our business but as well as to (C) visit many popular tourist at(D) tractions. 7. The board of directors felt that (A) Clark Weston was more better (B) suited for the position than Will(C) (D) iam Orly. 8. Having lost his job, Edward (A) was only able to finish one (B) (C) semester of college before he 4. Kathy studies very hard, and (A) she is seen in the library (B) (C) night and day. (D) was forced to leave school. (D) 197 practice test 4 40 QUESTIONS • 25 MINUTES 198 PART IV: Three Practice Tests ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 9. I cabled them my arrival time so they (A) (B) (C) could meet me at the airport. (D) 10. In order to do well on an exam, not only (A) (B) should one know the required material well, but you should also maintain a (C) (D) relaxed attitude. 11. He is said to having been an excellent (A) (B) opera singer in his youth. (C) (D) 12. I have setted the package beside the (A) (B) box of geraniums on the front porch in case I have to leave before you (C) arrive. (D) 13. The coach said that they should (A) have gone to the gym every day next (B) week to get in shape for the tourna(C) (D) ment game. 14. Having served on that committee for (A) (B) two years, Dr. Anderson is bored of it (C) and is looking for someone to take his (D) place. 15. Jane’s decision will probably depend (A) largely to her ability to find a compe(B) (C) tent person to take care of her young (D) daughter. www.petersons.com 16. A bouquet of beautiful tulips (A) were displayed in an antique vase on (B) (C) the large mahogany dining-room table. (D) 17. He has been the first violinist with the (A) (B) London Philharmonic before he retired (C) (D) ten years ago. 18. Dr. Little is planning on moving to a (A) warmer climate as soon as he will retire (B) (C) (D) next year. 19. The teacher asked them who had (A) completed their tests to turn in their (B) papers and to leave the room as (C) quietly as possible. (D) 20. The native population in the northern part of the country has little opportuni(A) ties to get the kind of education (B) (C) necessary to compete in modern society. (D) 21. The authorities were determined to (A) discover the identity of the murderer, (B) whom they feared would soon claim (C) another innocent victim. (D) 22. My brother has always helped me (A) in time of need, and I wish that he was (B) (C) (D) here now. Practice Test 4 199 ................................................................. 24. I must tell you that you looked so (A) (B) handsomely in your red outfit the other (C) (D) night. SENTENCE COMPLETION Directions: In the Sentence Completion questions, one or more words are left out of each sentence. Under each sentence, you will see four words or phrases. Select the one word or phrase that completes the sentence correctly, then mark your answer on the answer sheet provided. in the book or on a separate sheet of paper. 26. One should be careful to check the grease and oil in ________ periodically. (A) (B) (C) (D) their car one’s car our car your car 27. I wish I had not signed that contract without ________. (A) first having consulted a lawyer (B) not first having consulted a lawyer (C) first having consulted lawyer (D) first having consulting a lawyer 28. He likes ________ classical music on the piano. (A) (B) (C) (D) only to play to only play only playing to play only 29. The reason they are not coming is ________. (A) because they are angry with the hosts (B) that they are mad at the hosts (C) that they are angry with the hosts (D) because they are mad at the hosts 30. I went to my adviser to ask him ________. (A) (B) (C) (D) what courses should I take should I take what courses I should take what courses what courses I should take 31. He hopes ________ before spring break. (A) to completely finish his term paper (B) to finish his term paper completely (C) completely to finish his term paper (D) to finish completely his term paper www.petersons.com practice test 4 25. A common held belief is that man (A) (B) has evolved from lower forms of life. (C) (D) ............................................................................................ 23. Their free trip, which they won on a (A) (B) television game show, include four days (C) in London and a Week in Paris. (D) 200 PART IV: Three Practice Tests ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 32. Learning to do routine car maintenance oneself is often easier ________ competent people to do it. (A) (B) (C) (D) as finding than to find than finding as to find 33. Of all the sports he played, ________. (A) he liked tennis least (B) it was tennis which was his least liked (C) tennis was liked least by him (D) tennis was disliked by him most 34. ________, she was an excellent tennis player. (A) (B) (C) (D) Because practiced constantly She practiced constantly Because practicing constantly Because she practiced constantly 35. Social critics often point out the fact that the fast pace of modern life is causing people to ________. (A) become increasingly nervous and also even more high-strung (B) become increasingly nervous and high-strung (C) become increasingly nervous and to become increasingly high-strung (D) increasingly become nervous and high-strung www.petersons.com 36. That town was no longer the sleepy little village it ________. (A) (B) (C) (D) has been being has been was had been 37. If we had known ________, we could have invited him to speak at our ceremonies. (A) (B) (C) (D) whom was who he was who was he he was who 38. I will meet you ________. (A) (B) (C) (D) of the second floor on the floor two of the floor two on the second floor 39. They were shipwrecked on a tiny island off ________. (A) the coast belonging to Japan (B) of the coast of Japan (C) the coast which belongs to Japan (D) the coast of Japan 40. That fire yesterday could ________ the whole building. (A) (B) (C) (D) of burned down have burn down burned down have burned down Practice Test 4 201 ................................................................. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C A C B D 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B B B C D 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 1. The correct answer is (C). (changing). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Verbals, page 77. 2. The correct answer is (A). (custom is). See Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”— Double Subjects, page 120. 3. The correct answer is (C). (but also). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Correlative Conjunctions, page 157. 4. The correct answer is (B). (Kathy studies hard in the library night and day). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Voice, page 129. B A B C B 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. B A D A A 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. C D C C A 12. The correct answer is (A). (have set). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Past Participles, page 81. See also Chapter 7, “Style”—Usage, page 142. 13. The correct answer is (B). (should go). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Modals, page 75. 14. The correct answer is (C). (bored with it). See Chapter 7, “Style”— Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. 15. The correct answer is (B). (largely on). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Prepositions in Combinations, page 167. 16. The correct answer is (B). (was displayed). See Chapter 7, “Style”— Subject/Verb Agreement, page 159. 6. The correct answer is (B). (gave his advisers). See Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—Indirect Objects, page 111. 17. The correct answer is (A). (had been OR was). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Tense, page 67. 7. The correct answer is (B). (was better). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Comparatives, page 46. 18. The correct answer is (D). (he retires). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Time Clauses, page 69. 8. The correct answer is (B). (was able to finish only one semester). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Adverbs like Only, page 28. 19. The correct answer is (A). (those). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Those Modified, page 107. 9. The correct answer is (C). (so that). See Chapter 7, “Style”—Words Often Confused, Group III, page 154. 10. The correct answer is (D). (one should) OR (he should). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Person, page 102. 11. The correct answer is (B). (have been). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Present and Perfect Participles and Infinitives, page 84. 20. The correct answer is (A). (few). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Few, Little, Much, and Many, page 39. 21. The correct answer is (C). (who). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Who/ Whom, page 95. 22. The correct answer is (D). (were). See Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Wishes, page 71. 23. The correct answer is (C). (includes). See Chapter 7, “Style”— Subject/Verb Agreement, page 159. www.petersons.com practice test 4 5. The correct answer is (D). (its). See Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Number, page 104. answers Error Identification ............................................................................................ ANSWER KEY AND EXPLANATIONS 202 PART IV: Three Practice Tests ................................................................. ............................................................................................ 24. The correct answer is (C). (handsome). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Adjectives After Verbs of Sensation, page 34. 25. The correct answer is (A). (commonly). See Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Adjective/Adverb Confusion, page 32. Sentence Completion 26. B 27. A 28. D 29. C 30. D 31. B 32. C 33. A 34. D 26. The correct answer is (B). Choice (A), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Number, page 104. Choices (C) and (D), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”— Person, page 102. 27. The correct answer is (A). Choice (B), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Negation, page 57. Choice (C), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Articles, page 53. Choice (D), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Present and Perfect Participles and Infinitives, page 84. 28. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A) and (C), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Adverbs like Only, page 28. Choice (B), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Split Infinitives, page 29. 29. The correct answer is (C). Choices (A), (B), and (D), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Substandard, page 139. 30. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A), (B), and (C), see Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—Embedded Questions, page 116. 31. The correct answer is (B). Choice (A), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Split Infinitives, page 29. Choices (C) and (D), see Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”— Order of Adverbs, page 113. 32. The correct answer is (C). Choice (A), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Comparatives, page 46. Choice (B), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Parallelism, page 133. Choice (D), same as A and B. www.petersons.com 35. B 36. D 37. B 38. D 39. D 40. D 33. The correct answer is (A). Choices (B) and (D), see Chapter 7, “Style”— Wordiness, page 136. Choice (C), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Voice, page 129. 34. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A), (B), and (C), see Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”—Clauses, page 121. 35. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A) and (C), see Chapter 7, “Style”— Wordiness, page 136. Choice (D), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”—Split Infinitives, page 29. 36. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A), (B), and (C), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Tense, page 67. 37. The correct answer is (B). Choice (A), see Chapter 5, “Pronouns”—Who/ Whom, page 95. Choices (C) and (D), see Chapter 6, “Basic Patterns”— Embedded Questions, page 116. 38. The correct answer is (D). Choice (A), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Prepositions (General Use), page 164. Choice (B), see Chapter 3, “Modifiers”— Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, page 42. Choice (C), same as A and B. 39. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A) and (C), see Chapter 7, “Style”— Wordiness, page 136. Choice (B), see Chapter 7, “Style”—Substandard, page 139. 40. The correct answer is (D). Choices (A) and (C), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”— Modals, page 75. Choice (B), see Chapter 4, “Verbs”—Past Participles, page 81. NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES Peterson’s Book Satisfaction Survey Give Us Your Feedback Thank you for choosing Peterson’s as your source for personalized solutions for your education and career achievement. Please take a few minutes to answer the following questions. Your answers will go a long way in helping us to produce the most user-friendly and comprehensive resources to meet your individual needs. When completed, please tear out this page and mail it to us at: Publishing Department PETERSON’S, A Nelnet Company 2000 Lenox Drive Lawrenceville, NJ 08648 You can also complete this survey online at www.petersons.com/booksurvey. 1. What is the ISBN of the book you have purchased? (The ISBN can be found on the book’s back cover in the lower right-hand corner. ) ______________________ 2. Where did you purchase this book? ❑ Retailer, such as Barnes & Noble ❑ Online reseller, such as Amazon.com ❑ Petersons.com ❑ Other (please specify) _____________________________ 3. If you purchased this book on Petersons.com, please rate the following aspects of your online purchasing experience on a scale of 4 to 1 (4 = Excellent and 1 = Poor). 4 3 2 1 Comprehensiveness of Peterson’s Online Bookstore page ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Overall online customer experience ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ 4. Which category best describes you? ❑ High school student ❑ Parent of high school student ❑ College student ❑ Graduate/professional student ❑ Returning adult student ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Teacher Counselor Working professional/military Other (please specify) _______________________ 5. Rate your overall satisfaction with this book. Extremely Satisfied Satisfied Not Satisfied ❑ ❑ ❑ 6. Rate each of the following aspects of this book on a scale of 4 to 1 (4 = Excellent and 1 = Poor). 4 3 2 1 Comprehensiveness of the information ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Accuracy of the information ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Usability ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Cover design ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Book layout ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Special features (e.g., CD, flashcards, charts, etc.) ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Value for the money ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ 7. This book was recommended by: ❑ Guidance counselor ❑ Parent/guardian ❑ Family member/relative ❑ Friend ❑ Teacher ❑ Not recommended by anyone—I found the book on my own ❑ Other (please specify) _____________________________ 8. Would you recommend this book to others? Yes Not Sure No ❑ ❑ ❑ 9. Please provide any additional comments. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ Remember, you can tear out this page and mail it to us at: Publishing Department PETERSON’S, A Nelnet Company 2000 Lenox Drive Lawrenceville, NJ 08648 or you can complete the survey online at www.petersons.com/booksurvey. Your feedback is important to us at Peterson’s, and we thank you for your time! If you would like us to keep in touch with you about new products and services, please include your e-mail here: ___________________________________________ 

Second edition Oxford Practice Grammar with answers John Eastwood Oxford University Press Oxford University Press Great Clarendon Street, Oxford OX2 6DP Thanks Oxford New York Auckland Bangkok Buenos Aires Cape Town Chennai Dar es Salaam Delhi Hong Kong Istanbul Karachi Kolkata Kuala Lumpur Madrid Melbourne Mexico City Mumbai Nairobi Sao Paulo Shanghai Singapore Taipei Tokyo Toronto The author and publisher would like to thank: with an associated company in Berlin Oxford and Oxford English are trade marks of Oxford University Press. ISBN 0 19 431369 7 (with answers) ISBN 0 19 431427 8 (with answers with CD-ROM) ISBN 0 19 431370 0 (without answers) all the teachers in the United Kingdom and Italy who discussed this book in the early stages of its development; the teachers and students of the following schools who used and commented on the pilot units of the first edition: The Bell School of Languages, Bowthorpe Hall, Norwich The Eckersley School of English, Oxford Eurocentre, Brighton Eurocentre, London Victoria King's School of English, Bournemouth Academia Lacunza International House, San Sebastian, Spain First published 1992 (reprinted nine times) Second edition 1999 Tenth impression 2002 Printing ref. (last digit): 6 5 4 3 2 1 the teachers and students of the following schools who used and commented on the first edition of this book: Anglo World, Oxford Central School of English, London Linguarama, Birmingham No unauthorized photocopying Thomas Lavelle for his work on the American English appendix; © Oxford University Press 1992, 1999 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Oxford University Press. This book is sold subject to the condition that it shall not, by way of trade or otherwise, be lent, resold, hired out, or otherwise circulated without the publisher's prior consent in any form of binding or cover other than that in which it is published and without a similar condition including this condition being imposed on the subsequent purchaser. Illustrated by Richard Coggan Designed by Richard Morris, Stonesfield Design Typeset by Tradespools Ltd., Frome, Somerset Printed in China Rod Bolitho for his valuable advice on what students need from a grammar book. The author would also like to thank: Stewart Melluish, David Lott and Helen Ward of Oxford University Press for their expertise and their commitment in guiding this project from its earliest stages to the production of this new edition; Sheila Eastwood for all her help and encouragement. Contents Introduction page vi Key to symbols vii Starting test viii Words and sentences 1 2 3 Word classes: nouns, verbs, adjectives, etc 2 Sentence structure: subject, verb, object, etc 4 Direct and indirect objects 6 Verbs 4 5 6 7 The present continuous 8 The present simple 10 Present continuous or simple? 12 State verbs and action verbs 14 Test 1: Present tenses 16 8 9 10 The past simple 18 The past continuous 20 Past continuous or simple? 22 Test 2: Past simple and past continuous 24 11 12 The present perfect (1) 26 The present perfect (2): just, already, yet; for and since 28 The present perfect (3): ever, this week, etc 30 Present perfect or past simple? (1) 32 Present perfect or past simple? (2) 34 Test 3: Present perfect and past simple 36 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 The present perfect continuous 38 Present perfect continuous or simple? 40 The past perfect 42 Review of the past simple, continuous and perfect 44 The past perfect continuous 46 Test 4: Past and perfect tenses 48 21 Review of present and past tenses 50 Test 5: Present and past tenses 54 22 23 24 25 26 27 Introduction to the future 56 Will and shall 58 Be going to 60 Will and be going to 62 Present tenses for the future 64 When I get there, before you leave, etc 66 Test 6: The future with will, be going to and present tenses 68 28 29 30 Will be doing 70 Will have done and was going to 72 Review of the future 74 Test 7: The future 76 31 32 33 The verb have 78 Short forms, e.g it's, don't 80 Emphatic do 82 34 35 36 37 38 39 Yes/no questions 84 Short answers, e.g. Yes, it is. 86 Wh-questions 88 Subject/object questions 90 Prepositions in wh-questions 92 Who, what or which? 94 Test 8: Questions 96 40 41 42 43 Negative statements 98 Negative questions 100 Question tags, e.g. isn't it? 102 So/Neither do I and I think so 104 Test 9: Questions, negatives and answers 106 Questions, negatives and answers Modal verbs 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Ability: can, could and be able to 108 Permission: can, may, could and be allowed to 110 Possibility and certainty: may, might, could, must, etc 112 Necessity: must and have to 114 Necessity: mustn't, needn't, etc 116 Should, ought to, had better and be supposed to 118 Asking people to do things 120 Suggestions, offers and invitations 122 Will, would, shall and should 124 It may/could/must have been, etc 126 Test 10: Modal verbs 128 The passive 54 55 56 57 58 59 Passive verb forms 130 Active and passive (1) 132 Active and passive (2) 134 Special passive structures 136 Have something done 73$ To be done and being done 140 Test 11: The passive 142 This, my, some, a lot of, all, etc The infinitive and the ing-form 60 61 62 63 64 Verb + to-infinitive 144 Verb + ing-form 146 Verb + to-infinitive or verb + ing-form? 148 Like, start, etc 150 Remember, regret, try, etc 152 Test 12: Verb + to-infinitive or ing-form 154 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 Verb + object + to-infinitive or ing-form 156 Question word + to-infinitive 158 Adjective + to-infinitive 160 For with the to-infinitive 162 The infinitive with and without to 164 Verb/Adjective + preposition + ing-form 166 Afraid to do or afraid of doing? 168 Used to do and be used to doing 170 Preposition or linking word + ing-form 172 See it happen or see it happening? 174 Some structures with the ing-form 176 Test 13: The infinitive and the ing-form 178 76 Ship and water: countable and uncountable nouns 180 A carton of milk, a piece of information, etc 182 Nouns that can be either countable or uncountable 184 Agreement 186 Singular or plural? 188 Pair nouns and group nouns 190 Two nouns together 192 Test 14: Nouns and agreement 194 91 92 93 94 95 This, that, these and those 216 My, your, etc and mine, yours, etc 218 The possessive form and of 220 Some and any 222 A lot of, many, much, (a) few and (a) little 224 96 All, half, most, some, no and none 226 97 Every, each, whole, both, either and neither 228 Test 16: This, my, some, a lot of, all, etc 230 Pronouns 98 99 100 101 102 103 Nouns and articles (a/an and the) 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 A/an and the (1) 196 A/an and the (2) 198 A/an, one and some 200 Cars or the cars? 202 Prison, school, bed, etc 204 On Friday, for lunch, etc 206 Quite a, such a, what a, etc 208 Place names and the 210 Test 15: A/an and the 214 Personal pronouns, e.g. I, you 232 There and it 234 Reflexive pronouns 236 Emphatic pronouns and each other 238 The pronoun one/ones 240 Everyone, something, etc 242 Test 17: Pronouns 244 Adjectives and adverbs 104 105 106 107 108 109 Adjectives 246 The order of adjectives 248 The old, the rich, etc 250 Interesting and interested 252 Adjective or adverb? (1) 254 Adjective or adverb? (2) 256 Test 18: Adjectives and adverbs 258 110 Comparative and superlative forms 260 111 Comparative and superlative patterns (1) 264 112 Comparative and superlative patterns (2) 266 Test 19: Comparative and superlative 268 113 114 115 116 117 Adverbs and word order 270 Yet, still and already 274 Adverbs of degree, e.g. very, quite 276 Quite and rather 278 Too and enough 280 Test 20: Adverbs and word order 282 Prepositions 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 Prepositions of place 284 In, on and at (place) 288 In, on and at (time) 290 For, since, ago and before 292 During or while? By or until? As or like? 294 Preposition + noun, e.g. on holiday 296 Noun + preposition, e.g. trouble with 298 Adjective + preposition, e.g. proud of 300 Test 21: Prepositions 302 Verbs with prepositions and adverbs 126 127 128 129 130 131 Prepositional verbs, e.g. wait for 304 Verb + object + preposition 306 Phrasal verbs (1) 308 Phrasal verbs (2) 310 Phrasal verbs (3) 312 Verb + adverb + preposition 314 Test 22: Verbs with prepositions and adverbs 316 Reported speech 132 133 134 135 136 Direct speech and reported speech 318 Reported speech: person, place and time 320 Reported speech: the tense change 322 Reported questions 324 Reported requests, offers, etc 326 Test 23: Reported speech 328 Relative clauses 137 Relative clauses with who, which and that 330 138 The relative pronoun as object 332 139 Prepositions in relative clauses 334 140 Relative structures with whose, what and it 336 141 The use of relative clauses 338 142 Relative pronouns and relative adverbs 340 143 Relative clauses: participle and to-infinitive 342 Test 24: Relative clauses 344 Conditionals and wish 144 145 146 147 148 149 Conditionals (1) 346 Conditionals (2) 348 Conditionals (3) 350 Review of conditionals 352 If, when, unless and in case 354 Wish and if only 356 Test 25: Conditionals and wish 358 150 151 152 153 But, although and in spite of 360 To, in order to, so that and for 362 Review of linking words 364 Links across sentences 366 1 2 3 4 5 6 Word formation 368 The spelling of endings 370 Punctuation 372 Pronunciation 374 (missing) American English 377 Irregular verbs 383 Linking words Appendices Key to the starting test 385 Key to the exercises 386 Key to the tests 414 Index 425 (missing) Introduction Who is this book for? What's new about this edition? Oxford Practice Grammar is for students of English at a middle or 'intermediate' level. This means students who are no longer beginners but who are not yet expert in English. The book is suitable for those studying for the Cambridge First Certificate in English. It can be used by students attending classes or by someone working alone. There have been many changes in both the content and design of the book. The number of units has been increased from 120 to 153. There are more two-page units and fewer four-page units. The 25 tests are a new feature. There is also a Starting test to help students find out what they need to study. There are many more dialogues and illustrations on the explanation pages. Many of the examples and situations are new. What does the book consist of? The book consists of 153 units, each on a grammatical topic. The units cover the main areas of English grammar. Special attention is given to those points which are often a problem for learners: the meaning of the different verb forms, the use of the passive, conditionals, prepositions and so on. Many units contrast two or more different structures such as the present perfect and past simple (Units 14-15). There are also a number of review units. The emphasis through the whole book is on the meaning and use of the forms in situations. Most units start with a dialogue, or sometimes a text, which shows how the forms are used in a realistic context. There are also 25 tests. These come after each group of units and cover the area of grammar dealt with in those units. Each unit consists of an explanation of the grammar point followed by a number of exercises. Almost all units cover two pages. The explanations are on the left-hand page, and the exercises are on the right-hand page. There are a few four-page units, with two pages of explanation and two pages of exercises. The examples used to illustrate the explanations are mostly in everyday conversational English, except when the structure is more typical of a formal or written style (e.g. Unit 75B). There are also appendices on a number of other topics, including word formation, American English and irregular verbs. • There are many new exercises and more different types of exercise. The number of appendices has been increased from two to six. This new edition features a group of characters whose lives are the basis for many of the situations in both the explanations and the exercises. (But you can still do the units in any order.) How should the book be used? There are various ways of using the book. If you know that you have problems with particular points of grammar, then you can start with the relevant units. The contents list and index will help you find what you want. Or you can do the Starting test (see page viii) and then use the results to decide which parts of the book to concentrate on. Or you can start at the beginning of the book and work through to the end, although the grammar topics are not ordered according to their level of difficulty. When you study a unit, start with the explanation page and then go on to the exercises. Often you can study a part of the explanation and then do one of the exercises. The letter after each exercise title, e.g. (A), tells you which part of the explanation the exercise relates to. If you have made mistakes in your answers to the exercises, look back at the explanation. What about the tests? There are 25 tests at intervals through the book. You can do a test after you have worked through a group of units. At the beginning of each test you are told which units are being tested. The tests do two things. Firstly, they enable you to find out how well you have mastered the grammar. (If you get things wrong, you can go back to the relevant unit or part of a unit.) Secondly, the tests give you practice in handling exam-type questions. Many of the test questions are similar to those used in the Cambridge First Certificate Use of English Paper. What's the best way to learn grammar? It is usually more effective to look at examples of English rather than to read statements about it. The explanations of grammar in this book are descriptions of how English works; they are a guide to help you understand, not 'rules' to be memorized. The important thing is the language itself. If you are learning about the present perfect continuous, for example, it is helpful to memorize a sentence like We've been waiting here for twenty minutes and to imagine a situation at a bus stop like the one in Unit 16A. The explanation - that the action happens over a period of time lasting up to the present - is designed to help towards an understanding of the grammar point. It is not intended that you should write it down or memorize it. Active learning will help you more than passive reading, so it is important to do the exercises and to check your answers. Another way of actively learning grammar is to write down sentences you see or hear which contain examples of the grammar you are studying. You may come across such sentences in English books or newspapers, on television or on the Internet. You may meet English speakers. For example, someone may ask you How long have you been living here? Later you could note down this sentence as a useful example of the present perfect continuous. It is also a good idea to collect examples with a personal relevance like I've been learning English for three years. Key to symbols The symbol / (oblique stroke) between two words means that either word is possible. I may/might go means that / may go and I might go are both possible. In exercise questions this symbol is also used to separate words or phrases which need to be used in the answer. Brackets ( ) around a word or phrase mean that it can be left out. There's (some) milk in the fridge means that there are two possible sentences: There's some milk in the fridge and There's milk in the fridge. The symbol ~ means that there is a change of speaker. In the example How are you? ~ I'm fine, thanks, the two sentences are spoken by different people. The symbol > means that you can go to another place in the book for more information. > 7 means that you can find out more in Unit 7. The symbol ► in an exercise means an example. Starting test This test will help you to find out which parts of the book you need to spend most time on. You don't have to do the whole test at once - you could do numbers 2 to 22 first to test your knowledge of verbs. Choose the correct answer - a), b), c) or d). Some of the questions are quite difficult, so don't worry if you get them wrong. This book was written to help you get them right in future! Words and sentences 1 We gave ................................ a meal. a) at the visitors b) for the visitors c) the visitors d) to the visitors Verbs 2 I'm busy at the moment........................................on the computer. a) I work b) I'm work c) I'm working d) I working 3 My friend ................................ the answer to the question. a) is know b) know c) knowing d) knows 4 I think I'll buy these shoes........................................really well. a) They fit b) They have fit c) They're fitting d) They were fitting 5 Where .................................... the car? a) did you park b) did you parked c) parked you d) you parked 6 At nine o'clock yesterday morning we ....................... for the bus. a) wait b) waiting c) was waiting d) were waiting 7 When I looked round the door, the baby......... a) is sleeping b) slept c) was sleeping d) were sleeping 8 Here's my report...................................... it at last. a) I finish b) I finished c) I'm finished d) I've finished 9 I've ........ made some coffee. It's in the kitchen. a) ever b) just c) never d) yet ......... quietly. 10 We...................................... to Ireland for our holidays last year. a) goes b) going c) have gone d) went 11 Robert... ... ill for three weeks. He's still in hospital. a) had been b) has been c) is d) was 12 My arms are aching now because ........ since two o'clock. a) I'm swimming b) I swam c) I swim d) I've been swimming 13 I'm very tired. over four hundred miles today. a) I drive b) I'm driving c) I've been driving d) I've driven 14 When Martin the car, he took it out for a drive. a) had repaired b) has repaired c) repaired d) was repairing 15 Janet was out of breath because ... a) she'd been running b) she did run c) she's been running d) she's run 16 Don't worry. I a) not b) shall c) willn't d) won't be here to help you. 1. Word classes: nouns, verbs, adjectives, etc A Introduction Look at the different kinds of word in this sentence. Pronoun Verb Determiner Adjective I have an important Noun conference Preposition Noun Adverb at work tomorrow, Linking word Pronoun Verb Adverb Adjective So I am rather busy. B What kind of word? There are eight different kinds of word in English. They are called 'word classes' or 'parts of speech'. Here are some examples from the conversations in the cafe. The numbers after the examples tell you which units in the book give you more information. 1 Verb: have, am, is, would, like, come, are, sitting, look 4-75 Noun: conference, work, coffee, party, Saturday, Jessica, friends, corner 76-82 Adjective: important, busy, good, cheap 104-109 Adverb: tomorrow, rather, really, here 113-117 Preposition: at, to, on, in 118-125 Determiner: an, this, our, the 83-97 Pronoun: I, it, you 98-103 Linking word: so, and 150-153 C Words in sentences Some words can belong to different classes depending on how they are used in a sentence. VERBS Can I look at your photos? We work on Saturday morning. NOUNS I like the look of that coat. I'll be at work tomorrow. 1 Exercises 1 What kind of word? (B) Read this paragraph and then say which word class each underlined word belongs to. To help you decide, you can look back at the examples in B. Andrew didn't go to the cafe with the other students. Rachel told him they were going there, but he wanted to finish his work. Andrew isn't very sociable. He stays in his room and concentrates totally on his studies. He's an excellent student, but he doesn't have much fun. ? ? 1 2 3 4 5 6 to preposition cafe noun the…………………………. told………………………… they………………………. there ……………………. he ………………………… finish …………………… 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 sociable ............................... in ……………………… and ……………………. totally ……………………. an ……………………… excellent ……………………. but …………………… fun ………………….. 2 What kind of word? (B) Read this paragraph and then write the words in the spaces below. Write the first three verbs under 'Verb', and so on. Do not write the same word more than once. Henry thinks Claire is wonderful. He loves her madly, and he dreams of marrying her, but unfortunately he is rather old for her. Today they are at a cafe with their friends Sarah and Mark, so Henry can't get romantic with Claire. But he might buy her some flowers later. Verb think Noun Henry Adjective . Adverb Preposition Determiner Pronoun Linking word 3 Words in sentences (C) Is the underlined word a verb, a noun or an adjective? ? ? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Shall we go for a walk? Shall we walk into town? Laura wanted to talk to Rita. Laura wanted a talk with Rita. The windows aren't very clean. Doesn't anyone clean the windows? We went to a fabulous show in New York. Laura wanted to show Rita her photos. Henry thought Claire looked beautiful. A strange thought came into Emma's head. Sarah is feeling quite tired now. Studying all night had tired Andrew out. noun verb 2. Sentence structure: subject, verb, object, etc Sentence structure The parts of a sentence are the subject, verb, object, complement and adverbial. A statement begins with the subject and the verb. There are five main structures which we can use to make a simple statement. 1 SUBJECT VERB My arms are aching. Something happened. 2 SUBJECT VERB OBJECT / need a rest. Five people are moving the piano. The subject and object can be a pronoun (e.g. I) or a noun phrase (e.g. the piano). 3 SUBJECT VERB COMPLEMENT This piano is heavy. It was a big problem. The complement can be an adjective (e.g. heavy) or a noun phrase (e.g. a big problem). The complement often comes after be. It can also come after appear, become, get, feel, look, seem, stay or sound. For adjectives and word order see Unit 104B. 4 SUBJECT VERB ADVERBIAL It is on my foot. Their house is nearby. An adverbial can be a prepositional phrase (e.g. on my foot) or an adverb (e.g. nearby). 5 SUBJECT VERB OBJECT OBJECT It s giving me backache. David bought Melanie a present. We use two objects after verbs like give and send (see Unit 3). B Adverbials We can add adverbials to all the five main structures. My arms are aching terribly. I really need a rest. Of course this piano is heavy. Fortunately their house is nearby. To everyone's surprise, David actually bought Melanie a present yesterday. 34, 36 Word order in questions 113 Adverbs and word order page 377 Seem, look etc in American English 2 Exercises 1 Parts of the sentence (A) Mike and Harriet are on holiday. They have written a postcard to David and Melanie. Look at each underlined phrase and say what part of the sentence it is: subject, verb, object, complement or adverbial. ► We're having a great time. object 1 The weather is marvellous. 4 We're on a farm. 2 We really enjoy camping. 5 We like this place. 3 It's great fun. 6 The scenery is beautiful. 2 Sentence structure (A) After moving the piano, the five friends had a rest and a cup of tea. Look at this part of their conversation and then write the letters a)- e) in the correct place. a David: That was a difficult job. I agree. b Tom: I'm on my deathbed. c Mike: d David: Someone should give us a medal. e Harriet: I've made some more tea. ► 1 2 3 4 Subject + verb Subject + verb + object Subject + verb + complement Subject + verb + adverbial Subject + verb + object + object b ........... 3 Word order (A) Put the words in the correct order and write the statements. ► is / Melanie / very nice Melanie is very nice. 1 football / likes / Tom ……………………………………………… 2 an accident / David / had ……………………………………………… 3 moved / the piano / we ……………………………………………….. 4 a tall woman / Harriet / is ……………………………………………….. 5 sat / on the floor / everyone ……………………………………………….. 6 gave / some help / Mike's friends / him ............................................................................. 4 Adverbials (B) These sentences are from a news report. Write down the two adverbials in each sentence. Each adverbial is a prepositional phrase or an adverb. ► Prince Charles opened a new sports in Stoke centre in Stoke yesterday. yesterday 1 He also spoke with several young people. 2 The sports centre was first planned in 1994. 3 Naturally, the local council could not finance the project without help. 4 Fortunately, they managed to obtain money from the National Lottery. 3 Direct and indirect objects A Introduction Henry gave Claire some flowers. Here the verb give has two objects. Claire is the indirect object, the person receiving something. Some flowers is the direct object, the thing that someone gives. Henry gave some flowers to Claire. Here give has a direct object (some flowers) and a phrase with to. To comes before Claire, the person receiving something. Here are some more examples of the two structures. INDIRECT OBJECT DIRECT OBJECT Emma gave Rachel I'll send my cousin We bought all the children a CD. a postcard. an ice-cream. DIRECT OBJECT Emma gave the CD I'll send a postcard We bought ice-creams PHRASE WITH TO/FOR to Rachel. to my cousin. for all the children. B To or for? We give something to someone, and we buy something for someone. We can use to with these verbs: bring, feed, give, hand, lend, offer, owe, pass, pay, post, promise, read, sell, send, show, take, teach, tell, throw, write Vicky paid the money to the cashier, OR Vicky paid the cashier the money. Let me read this news item to you. OR Let me read you this news item. We showed the photos to David, OR We showed David the photos. We can use for with these verbs: book, bring, build, buy, choose, cook, fetch, find, get, leave, make, order, pick, reserve, save They found a spare ticket for me. OR They found me a spare ticket. I've saved a seat for you. OR I've saved you a seat. Melanie is making a cake for David, OR Melanie is making David a cake. C Give + pronoun Sometimes there is a pronoun and a noun after a verb such as give. The pronoun usually comes before the noun. Henry is very fond of Claire. He gave her some flowers. We use her because Claire is mentioned earlier. Her comes before some flowers. Henry bought some flowers. He gave them to Claire. We use them because the flowers are mentioned earlier. Them comes before Claire. 3 3 Exercises l Give (A) Look at the Christmas presents and write sentences about them. Put one of these words at the end of each sentence: necklace, scarf, sweater, tennis racket, watch ► Harriet gave Mike a watch. Indirect object or to? (A) Write the information in one sentence. Put the underlined part at the end of the sentence. Sometimes you need to. ? Daniel lent something to Vicky. It was his calculator. —> Daniel lent Vicky his calculator. ? Mark sent a message. It was to his boss. —> Mark sent a message to his boss. 1 Emma sold her bike. Her sister bought it. —> Emma 2 Tom told the joke. He told all his friends. —> Tom ................... 3 Melanie gave some help. She helped her neighbour. —► Melanie 4 Ilona wrote to her teacher. She wrote a letter. —> Ilona ................................................ 3 To or for? (B) Mark's boss at Zedco is Mr Atkins. He is telling people to ? Give these papers to my secretary. 3 ? Could you make some coffee for us? 4 1 Book a flight me, could you? 5 2 Can you post this cheque . . t h e hotel? 6 do things. Put in to or for. Don't show these plans Leave a message Fetch the file Write a memo anyone. my secretary. me, could you? all managers. 4, Give + pronoun (C) Complete each answer using the words in brackets. Sometimes you need to use to or for. ? Matthew: Why is everyone laughing? (a funny story / us) Vicky: Daniel told us a funny story. ? Trevor: There's some fish left over, (it / the cat) Laura: I'll feed it to the cat. 1 Mark: What are you doing with those bottles? (them / the bottle bank) Sarah: I'm taking ....................................................................................................... 2 Trevor: How are things with you, Daniel? (a job / me) Daniel: Fine. Someone has offered ....................................................................................................... 3 David: What about those papers you found? (them / the police) Tom: Oh, I handed 4 Emma: It's pouring with rain, look, (my umbrella / you) Rachel: It's OK. I'll lend .......................................................................................................... 4 The present continuous A Introduction The present continuous means that we are in the middle of an action. B Form The present continuous is the present tense of be + an ing-form. / am looking OR I'm looking you/we/they are looking OR you/we/they're looking he/she/it is looking OR he/she/it's looking NEGATIVE QUESTION I'm not looking you/we/they aren't looking he/she/it isn't looking am I looking? are you/we/they looking? is he/she/it looking? I'm getting the lunch ready. The train is coming, look. We're looking for a post office. Rachel isn't wearing her new dress. What are you doing? Who is Vicky dancing with? For rules about the spelling of the ing-form see page 370. C Use We use the present continuous to say that we are in the middle of an action. I'm waiting for the train. (I'm at the station now.) I'm getting the lunch ready. (I'm in the kitchen now.) I'm waiting means that I am in the middle of a period of waiting. The wait is not yet over. We can also use the present continuous when we are in the middle of something but not actually doing it at the moment of speaking. / must get hack to the office. We're working on a new project. I'm quite busy these days. I'm doing a course at college. We can use the present continuous when things are changing over a long period. The number of cars on the road is increasing. The earth is slowly getting warmer. For the future meaning of the present continuous see Unit 26A. I'm playing badminton with Matthew tomorrow. 6 Present continuous or simple? 7 State verbs and action verbs 3 Exercises 1 Form (B) Look at the pictures and say what people are doing. Use these verbs: carry, paint, play, ride, take Use these objects: a bicycle, a parcel, a photo, a picture, basketball ► He's riding a bicycle. 1 2 3 4 2 Form (B) Rachel is in the computer room at college. Complete her conversation with Andrew. Put in a present continuous form of the verb. Andrew: What (►) are you doing? (you / do) Rachel: (►) I'm writing (I / write) a letter to a friend. He's a disc jockey. Vicky and I (1) ........................... (try) to organize a disco. Andrew: That sounds a lot of work. How (2)…. (you / find) time for your studies? Rachel: Well, as I said, Vicky (3) ...................................(help) me. (4) (we / get) on all right. (5) (we / not / spend) too much time on it. (6) ................................. (it / not / take) me away from my studies, don't worry about that. Oh, sorry, (7) ....... .. (you / wait) for this computer? Andrew: Yes, but there's no hurry. Rachel: (8) (I / correct) the last bit of the letter. I've nearly finished. 3 Use(C) What can you say in these situations? Add a sentence with the present continuous. ► A friend rings you up in the middle of 'Neighbours', your favourite soap opera. Is it important? I'm watching 'Neighbours'. 1 A friend is at your flat and suggests going out, but you can see rain outside. I don't want to go out now. Look,......................................................... 2 A friend rings you up at work. Sorry, I can't talk now. ............................................................................................................. 3 You want to get off the bus, but the man next to you is sitting on your coat. Excuse me, .............................................................................................................. 4 A friend wants to talk to you, but you have just started to write an important letter. Can I talk to you later? ....................................................................................................... 5 You have been ill, but you're better now than you were. I'm OK now .......................................................................................................................................... 4 The present simple A Use We use the present simple for • thoughts and feelings: / think so, I like it. • states, things staying the same, facts and things that are true for a long time: We live quite near (see Unit 7). • repeated actions: We come here every week. and also • in phrases like I promise, I agree, etc: I promise I'll pay you back. • in a negative question with why to make a suggestion: Why don't we go out? For the future meaning of the present simple see Units 26 and 27. The new term starts next week. B Positive forms I/you/we/they get he/she/it gets In the present simple we use the verb without an ending. I get the lunch ready at one o'clock, usually. We always do our shopping at Greenway. Most children like ice-cream. You know the answer. But in the third person singular (after he, she, it, your friend, etc), the verb ends in s or es. For spelling rules see page 370. It gets busy at weekends. My husband thinks so, too. Sarah catches the early train. She faxes messages all over the world. C Negatives and questions NEGATIVE QUESTION I/you/we/they do not get OR don't get he/she/it does not get OR doesn't get do I/we/you/they get? does he/she/it get? We use a form of do in negatives and questions (but see Unit 37). We use do and don't except in the third person singular, where we use does and doesn't. We don't live far away. He doesn't want to go shopping. Do you live here? ~ Yes, 1 do. What does he want? ~ Money. We do not add s to the verb in negatives and questions. NOT He-doesn't gets and NOT Does he gets? 6 Present continuous or simple? 7 State verbs and action verbs 4 Exercises 1 Use (A) Look at each underlined verb and say what kind of meaning it expresses. Is it a thought, a feeling, a fact or a repeated action? ? Matthew loves sport. a feeling ? Sarah often works late at the office. a repeated action 1 1 hate quiz programmes. 2 We play table tennis every Thursday. 3 The computer belongs to Emma. 4 These plates cost £20 each. 5 I believe it's the right thing to do. 6 I'm hungry. I want something to eat. 7 I usually go to work by bus. 8 It's OK. I understand your problem. 2 Forms (B-C) Complete the sentences by putting in the verbs. Use the present simple. You have to decide if the verb is positive or negative. ? Claire is very sociable. She knows (know) lots of people. ? We've got plenty of chairs, thanks. We don't want (want) any more. 1 My friend is finding life in Paris a bit difficult. He............ (speak) French. 2 Most students live quite close to the college, so they .................. .......... (walk) there. 3 My sports kit is really muddy. This shirt ............................................... (need) a good wash. 4 I've got four cats and two dogs. I ........................................... (love) animals. 5 No breakfast for Mark, thanks. He ...............................................(eat) breakfast. 6 What's the matter? You ............................................(look) very happy. 7 Don't try to ring the bell. It .............................................. (work). 8 I hate telephone answering machines. I just............................................. (like) talking to them. 9 Matthew is good at badminton. He ............................................ (win) every game. 10 We always travel by bus. We .......................................... (own) a car. 3 Forms (B-C) Complete the conversation. Put in the present simple forms. Rita: (►) Do you like (you / like) football, Tom? Tom: (►) / love (1 / love) it. I'm a United fan. (1)………………………… …… (I / go) to all their games. Nick usually (2) ................................................. (come) with me. And (3) ............................................... (we / travel) to away games, too. Why (4) ............................................. (you / not / come) to a match some time? Rita: I'm afraid football (5)………………………………….. (not / make) sense to me — men running after a ball. Why (6) ...................................................... (you / take) it so seriously? Tom: It's a wonderful game. (7) ................................................ (I / love) it. United are my whole life. Rita: How much (8)………………………………….. (it / cost) to buy the tickets and pay for the travel? Tom: A lot. (9) ............................. (I / not / know) exactly how much. But (10) (that / not / matter) to me. (11) ............................ (I / not / want) to do anything else. (12) .......................... (that / annoy) you? Rita: No, (13) .......................... (it / not / annoy) me. I just (14) (find) it a bit sad. 5 Present continuous or simple? PRESENT CONTINUOUS PRESENT SIMPLE We use the present continuous for something happening now. / am speaking to you live means that Kitty is in the middle of a live broadcast. Here are some more examples. It's raining at the moment. I'm watching this programme. Look. That man is taking a photo of you. We use the present simple for repeated actions. / often speak live to the camera means that she does it again and again. It always rains at the weekend. I watch television most weekends. He's a photographer. He takes lots of photos. B Thoughts, feelings and states We normally use the present simple to talk about thoughts and feelings. / think it's a good programme. Kitty likes her job. We also use it to talk about states (see Unit 7) and permanent facts. Reporting means a lot to her. Paper burns easily. We also use the present simple in I promise, I agree, I refuse, etc. I promise I'll write to you. It's all right. I forgive you. C Temporary or permanent? PRESENT CONTINUOUS PRESENT SIMPLE We use the present continuous for a routine or situation that we see as temporary (for a short period). I'm working at a sports shop for six weeks. At the moment they're living in a very small flat. We use the present simple for a routine or situation that we see as permanent. / work at a sports shop. It's a permanent job. They live in a very nice flat. D Always PRESENT CONTINUOUS PRESENT SIMPLE We can use always with the present continuous to mean 'very often', usually with the added meaning of too often'. Tom is always inviting friends here. (= He invites them very often.) I'm always making silly mistakes. (= I make silly mistakes too often.) Always with the present simple means 'every time'. Tom always invites us to stay at Christmas. (= He invites us every Christmas.) / always make silly mistakes in exams. (= I make mistakes in every exam.) 5 Exercises 1 Present continuous or simple? (A-B) At work Mark is talking to Alan in the corridor. Complete their conversation. Put in the present continuous or simple of the verbs. Mark: (►) Are you looking (you / look) for someone? Alan: Yes, (►) / need (I / need) to speak to Neil. He isn't in his office. Mark: (1)……………………………. (he / talk) to the boss at the moment. (2)…………………………….. (I / think) (3)…………………………… (they / discuss) money. Alan: Oh, right. And what about you? (4)…………………………….. (you / look) for someone too? Mark: Yes, Linda. (5) ......................................... (you / know) where she is? Alan: Oh, she isn't here today. She only (6) (work) four days a week. (7) ................ (she / not / work) on Fridays. She'll be here on Monday. Mark: Thank you. (8) .......................................... (you / know) a lot about Linda. Alan: Well, most days (9) ....................................... (I / give) her a lift, or(10) ............... (she / give) me one. (11) ……………………..(she / live) quite close to me. (12) .......................................(it / save) petrol. Mark: Yes, of course. Good idea. Yes, (13) ........................................(1/ agree). Well, (14) ........... ............... (I / waste) my time here then. I'll get back to my computer. 2 Present continuous or simple? (A-C) Complete the sentences. Put in the present continuous or simple of the verbs. ► I'm writing (I / write) to my parents. / write (I / write) to them every weekend. 1 ....... (it / snow) outside. ......................................... (it / come) down quite hard, look. 2 Normally ....................... (I / start) work at eight o'clock, but .................. (I / start) at seven this week. We're very busy at the moment. 3 I haven't got a car at the moment, so...........................................(I / go) to work on the bus this week. Usually .............................. (I / drive) to work. 4 The sun ....................... (rise) in the east, remember. It's behind us so ........ (we / travel) west. 5 I'm afraid I have no time to help just now .......................................... (I / write) a report. But ....................... (I / promise) I'll give you some help later. 6 .................. (I / want) a new car ............................................(I / save) up to buy one. 3 Always (D) Complete the sentences. Use always and the present continuous or simple. ► Melanie: Tom talks too much, doesn't he? Rita: Yes, and he's always talking about football. ► Laura: You forget your keys every time. Trevor: I try to remember them, but / always forget. 1 Claire: Sarah takes the train every day, doesn't she? Mark: Yes, ..................................................................................................................... the train. 2 Vicky: Rachel misses lectures much too often in my opinion. Emma: I agree............................................................................................................... lectures. 3 Mike: Every time I drive along here, I go the wrong way. Harriet: But it's very simple, isn't it? Why......................... the wrong way? 4 David: Trevor and Laura argue much too often, I think. Melanie: I know .................................................................................................................................... 7 State verbs and action verbs A States and actions STATES ACTIONS A state means something staying the same. The flat is clean. The farmer owns the land. The box contained old books. State verbs cannot usually be continuous. NOT The farmer is owning the land. An action means something happening. I'm cleaning the flat. The farmer is buying the land. He put the books in the box. Action verbs can be simple or continuous. He put I He was putting everything away. Some state verbs: be, believe, belong, consist of, contain, depend on, deserve, exist, hate, know, like, love, matter, mean, own, need, prefer, remember, resemble, seem, understand B I think/I'm thinking etc Sometimes we can use a verb either for a state or for an action. STATES (simple tenses) I think you're right. (= believe) We have three cars. (= own) I come from Sweden. (= live in) I see your problem. (= understand) Do you see that house? (= have in sight) This picture looks nice. She appears very nervous. (= seems) The bag weighed five kilos. The coat fits. (= is the right size) ACTIONS (simple or continuous) I'm thinking about the problem. We're having lunch. (— eating) I'm coming from Sweden. (= travelling) / usually come on the plane. Mark is seeing his boss. {= meeting) I see Daniel quite often. I'm looking at this picture. She appeared/was appearing in a film. They weighed/were weighing my bag. I'm fitting a lock to the window. These examples with the verb be are about how people behave. PERMANENT QUALITY TEMPORARY BEHAVIOUR Claire is a very sociable person. That man is an idiot. being very sociable today. Andrew is You are being an idiot this morning. (= You are behaving like an idiot.) We use am/are/is being only to talk about behaviour, not about other things. I'm better now, thanks. Are you ready? Is anyone interested? I like/I'm liking etc We can use some state verbs in the continuous to talk about a short period of time. PERMANENT STATE (simple tenses) / love/enjoy parties. I like school. Holidays cost a lot of money. SHORT PERIOD (continuous) I'm loving/enjoying this party. I'm liking school much better now. This trip is costing me a lot of money. Sometimes we can use either the simple or the continuous with no difference in meaning. You look well, OR You're looking well. We feel a bit sad. OR We're feeling a bit sad. 7 Exercises 1 States and actions (A) Tom is on the Internet. He's telling people about himself. Say which verbs express states and which express actions. ► 1 2 3 4 5 I surf the Net most evenings, action My flat is in the town centre................................ I drive a taxi in the daytime ................................. I own two cars. ......................... I go to lots of parties. I love football. .......................... 2 I think/I'm thinking etc (B) Complete the conversation. Choose the correct form of the verb. Emma: Hi, Matthew. What (►) do you look/are you looking at? Matthew: Oh, hi. These are photos of me when I was a child. Emma: Oh, look at this one. (1) I think/I'm thinking you look lovely, Matthew. Matthew: (2) I have/I'm having some more photos here. Emma: Look at this. Why such a big coat? Matthew: It was my brother's. That's why (3) it didn't fit/it wasn't fitting properly. Emma: Oh, (4) I see/I'm seeing. And (5) you have/you're having your tea here. And in this one (6) you think/you're thinking about something very serious. Matthew: This is a photo of the village (7) I come/I'm coming from. Emma: Oh, that's nice. Matthew: And I caught this fish, look. (8) It weighed/It was weighing about half a kilo. Emma: What a nice little boy! And what a sentimental old thing you are now! 3 The verb be (B) Put in the correct form of be. ? Daniel is doing some of the work. He s being very helpful at the moment. ? I 'm tired. I want to go home. 1 The children......................................... very polite today. They don't usually behave so well. 2 I'm afraid Melanie can't come because she .......................................ill. 3 Of course you can understand it. You ...........................................stupid, that's all. 4 We .......................... interested in doing a course here. 5 Vicky ...................................... very lazy at the moment. She's done no work at all today. 4 I like/I'm liking etc (C) Write a sentence which follows on. Choose from these sentences. / think it's going to be perfect for me. And I've still got a chance to win. I've never wanted to change it. It uses so much petrol. It's too expensive to buy. I play it every weekend. ► I enjoy the game. 1 play it every weekend. 1 I'm enjoying the game. ................................................................................................................................... 2 The car costs a lot of money. .......................................................................................... 3 The car is costing a lot of money. ........................................................................................................ 4 I'm liking my new job .................................................................................................................... 5 I like my job.......................................................................................................................................................... Test 1 Present tenses (Units 4-7) Test1A Read the conversation between two students. Then look at the answers below and write the correct answer in each space. Lisa: Who (►) is Michelle talking to? Amy: I can't see Michelle. Lisa: You(l)…………………………… looking in the right place. She's over there. Amy: Oh, that's Adrian. He's new here. Lisa: Really? Where (2)…………………. ........... he live? (3)……………………………..you know? Amy: No, 1(4)...........................................know anything else about him. Lisa: What (5) .................................... they talking about, I wonder? Amy: Well, he (6) ............................... look very interested. He's got a very bored expression on his face. And he (7) saying anything. ► a) are 1 a) aren't 2 a) are 3 a) Are 4 a) aren't 5 a) are 6 a) aren't 7 a) aren't b) do b) doesn't b) do b) Do b) doesn't b) do b) doesn't b) doesn't c) does c) don't c) does c) Does c) don't c) does c) don't c) don't d) is d) isn't d) is d) Is d) 'm not d) is d) isn't d) isn't Test lB Read Tessa's postcard to Angela and write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. We're (►) having a great time here. It's beautiful, and the sun (1) ........................... Yesterday I went water-skiing! What (2) you think of that? shining. I'm (3) at a table in our hotel room and writing a few postcards. The room is fine, but we (4) ......................................like the food very much. But it (5) matter because we (6) out to a restaurant every evening. We're both (7) very lazy at the moment. I (8) ………………………………….. up quite late in the morning, and Nigel (9) ………………………..up even later. You know of course how much Nigel's work (10) to him and how he's (11) talking about it. Well, the holiday is so good that he's forgotten all about work. So it's the perfect holiday. The only problem is that it's (12) us a lot of money. But we'll worry about that later. Test l C Each of these sentences has a mistake in it. Write the correct sentence. ► The children is doing their homework now. The children are doing their homework now. 1 The girls are play tennis at the moment. …………………………………………… 2 Both my brothers likes sport. ………………………………………….. 3 Anna wearing her new coat today ………………………………………….. 4 What colour you like best? …………………………………….. 5 My suit case is weighing ten kilos? …………………………………….. 6 At the moment I stay at a hotel. ……………………………………… 7 Robert catсh the same bus every month …………………………………….. 8 What is this word mean here …………………………………… Test lD Complete the conversations. Put in the correct form of each verb. Use the present continuous or the present simple. ► A: Is Janet in, please? B: Yes, but / think (I / think) she's busy at the moment. She's washing (she / wash) her hair. 1 A: ..............(I / think) of buying a new computer. B: But computers (cost) so much money. What's wrong with the one we've got? A: ... (it / get) out of date now. 2 A: Your new trousers ........................................ (look) nice. B: Thank you. The trouble is . . . (they / not / fit) properly. .......... (I / not / know) why I bought them, really. 3 A: What ( y o u/ d o) ? B:……………………. (I / weigh) this letter.................. (I / need) to know how many stamps to put on it. 4 A: ........... (I / think) this road is really dangerous. Look how fast that lorry B: 5 A: B: 6 A: B: A: 7 A: B: A: B: 8 A: B: A: ............. ( 1 / agree). People shouldn't go so fast. ………………….. (I / like) musicals. And this is a great show, isn't it? ....................... (you / enjoy) it? Yes, I am. ......................................(I / love) every minute of it. ...........................(I / always / fall) asleep. I just can't keep awake. What time ............................................ (you / go) to bed? About ten o'clock usually. But ....................................... (it / not / make) any difference. Could you post the goods to me, please? Yes, certainly. ...............(I / live) at a guest house at the moment as ........... (1 / look) for a flat. So could you send it to my work address? Yes, of course. And you'll have the goods by the end of the week,.... .. .... .. ... .... .. .. .. . (1 / promise). Why ................. (you / want) to change the whole plan? I'm just not happy with it. And ......................... (1 / not / understand) why ............................... (you / be) so difficult about it. 8 The past simple A Introduction B Positive forms A regular past form ends in ed. It happened very quickly. The van crashed into the cat I posted the letter yesterday. once owned a caravan For spelling rules, see page 370. We Some verbs have an irregular past form. The car came out of a side road. Vicky rang earlier. I won the game. I had breakfast at six. The train left on time. We took some photos. For a list of irregular verbs, see page 383. The past simple is the same in all persons except in the past tense of be. I/he/she/it was you/we/they were C I was ill last week, Those cakes were nice. Negatives and questions We use did in negatives and questions (but see Unit 37). NEGATIVE QUESTION I/you/he/she/it/we/they did not stop OR didn't stop did I/you/he/she/it/we/they stop? The car did not stop. The driver didn't look to his right. What did you tell the police? ~ Nothing. Did you ring home? ~ Yes, I did. We do not use a past form such as stopped or rang in negatives and questions. NOT The- car didn't stopped and NOT Did you rang? We also use was and were in negatives and questions. NEGATIVE QUESTION I/he/she/it was not OR wasn't you/we/they were OR weren't was I/he/she/it? were you/we/they? I wasn't very well last week. The gates weren't open. Where was your friend last night? Was your steak nice? D Use We use the past simple for something in the past which is finished. Emma passed her exam last year. We went to the theatre on Friday. Elvis Presley died in 1977. I knew what the problem was. When did you buy this car? ~ About three years ago. 10 Past continuous or simple? 14-15 Present perfect or past simple? 8 Exercises 1 Positive forms (B) What did Claire do on holiday last month? Look at her photos and use these words: go out dancing, have a picnic, lie on the beach, play volleyball, swim in the sea ► She lay on the beach 1 ………………………………………………….. 2……………………………………………………... 3……………………………………………. 4. ………………………………………….. 2 Positive forms (B) Complete the newspaper story about a fire. Put in the past simple forms of the verbs. Two people (►) died (die) in a fire in Ellis Street, Oldport yesterday morning. They (1)………………......................(be) Herbert and Molly Paynter, a couple in their seventies. The fire (2)………………………………..(start) at 3.20 am. A neighbour, Mr Aziz, (3)……………………………… (see) the flames and (4) …………………………… (call) the fire brigade. He also (5)………………………......... (try) to get into the house and rescue his neighbours, but the heat (6)…………………………….. (be) too great. The fire brigade (7) (arrive) in five minutes. Twenty fire-fighters (8) ……………………….. (fight) the fire and finally (9)……………………………. (bring) it under control. Two fire-fighters (10)…………………………… (enter) the burning building but (11)……………………………… (find) the couple dead. 3 Negatives and questions (C) Complete the conversation. Put in the past simple negatives and questions. Claire: (►) Did you have (you / have) a nice weekend in Paris? Mark: Yes, thanks. It was good. We looked around and then we saw a show. (1) ..................................... (we / not / try) to do too much. Claire: What sights (2) ........................................... (you / see)? Mark: We had a look round the Louvre. (3)……………………………. (I / not / know) there was so much in there. Claire: And what show (4)............................................... (you / go) to? Mark: Oh, a musical. I forget the name. (5) ..................... (I / not / like) it. Claire: Oh, dear. And (6).............................................. (Sarah / enjoy) it? Mark: No, not really. But we enjoyed the weekend. Sarah did some shopping, too, but (7) ........................... (I / not / want) to go shopping. 9 The past continuous A Introduction The past continuous means that at a time in the past we were in the middle of an action. B Form The past continuous is the past tense of be + an ing-form. I/he/she/it was playing you/we/they were playing NEGATIVE QUESTION I/he/she/it wasn't playing you/we/they weren't playing was I/he/she/it playing? were you/we/they playing? Soft music was playing. People were walking in the park. I wasn't dreaming. I really was in New York City. Why did you give our secret away? What were you thinking of? Was Matthew already waiting for you when you got there? C Use Read this conversation. Melanie: / rang at about three yesterday afternoon, but you weren't in. I didn't know where you were. David: Oh, I was helping Mike. We were repairing his car. It took ages. We were working on it all afternoon. Melanie: It was raining. 1 hope you weren't doing it outside. David: No, we were in the garage. So I didn't get wet. But I'm afraid I got oil all over my new trousers. Melanie: Why were you wearing your new trousers to repair a car? David: / don't know. I forgot I had them on. It was raining at three o'clock means that at three o'clock we were in the middle of a period of rain. The rain began before three and stopped some time after three. We were working all afternoon means that the action went on for the whole period. David is stressing the length of time that the work went on. We use the continuous with actions. We do not normally use it with state verbs (see Unit 7). For states we use the past simple. 1 didn't know where you were, NOT I wasn't knowing... 10 Past continuous or simple? 9 Exercises 1 Form (B) Today is the first of January, the start of a new year. Most people are feeling a bit tired. What were they doing at midnight last night? Use these verbs: dance, drive, listen, watch, write Use these phrases after the verb: an essay, his taxi, in the street, television, to a band ► Claire was listening to a band. 1 Trevor and Laura ................................................................................................................................. 2 Vicky and Rachel ........................................................................................... 3 Tom ..................................................................................................................................................... 4 Andrew .............................................................................................................................................. 2 Form (B) Complete the conversation. Put in the past continuous forms. Jessica: (►) I was looking (I / look) for you, Vicky. I'm afraid I've broken this dish. Vicky: Oh no! What (1)………………………………………..(you / do)? Jessica: (2)…………………………. .................. (I / take) it into the kitchen. I bumped into Emma. (3)………………………………………. (she / come) out just as (4) ……………………….. (I /go) in. Vicky: I expect it was your fault. (5)......................................................... (you / not / look) where (6)………………. ................................ (you/ go). Jessica: Sorry. I'll buy you another one as soon as I have some money. 3 Use(C) What can you say in these situations? Add a sentence with the past continuous to say that an action lasted a long time. ► You had to work yesterday. The work went on all day. / was working all day. 1 You had to make phone calls. The calls went on all evening. 2 You had to wait in the rain. The wait lasted for half an hour. 3 You had to make sandwiches. This went on all afternoon. 4 You had to sit in a traffic jam. You were there for two hours. 5 Your neighbour played loud music. This went on all night. 10 Past continuous or simple? A Introduction A reporter is interviewing Mike and Harriet. Reporter: Mike and Harriet, tell me what you saw. Harriet: Well, when we were driving home last night, we saw a strange object in the sky. Mike: As we were coming down the hill into town, it just suddenly appeared in front of us. We stopped the car and got out. Harriet: It was a very clear night. The stars were twinkling. Mike: It was a spaceship. It seemed quite big. It had some strange writing on the side. And a light was flashing on the top. Harriet: As we were watching it, it suddenly flew away and disappeared. PAST CONTINUOUS We use the past continuous for an action that we were in the middle of. We were driving home. (We were in the middle of our journey.) A light was flashing. We do not normally use the past continuous for states. See Unit 7. NOT The spaceship was seeming ... NOT It was having writing ... NOT I wasn't knowing ... PAST SIMPLE We use the past simple for a complete action in the past. We drove home. (We finished our journey.) The spaceship flew away. We also use the past simple (not normally the continuous) for states. See Unit 7. The spaceship seemed quite big. It had writing on the side. I didn't know what it was. B It happened as I was driving We often use the past continuous and simple together when one (shorter) action comes in the middle of another (longer) one. As we were driving down the hill, a strange object appeared in the sky. While Laura was sitting in the garden, it suddenly began to rain. You drove right past me when I was waiting for the bus. The appearance of the strange object comes in the middle of the longer action, the drive down the hill. Shorter action: An object appeared. In the three sentences above, the past continuous comes after as, while or when (As we were driving ...). We can also use when before the past simple. We were driving down the hill when a strange object appeared in the sky. David was making lunch when the phone rang. But we use two past simple verbs for one action after another. When we saw the spaceship, we stopped the car. (= We saw it and then we stopped.) C The sun was shining PAST CONTINUOUS We often use the past continuous to describe the background. The sun was shining. The stars were twinkling. PAST SIMPLE We use the past simple for actions in a story, We arrived at the beach. The aliens landed quietly. 10 Exercises 1 Past continuous or simple? (A-B) David is always having accidents. His girlfriend Melanie is talking about some of the accidents. Write her sentences from these notes. Each sentence has one verb in the past continuous and one in the past simple. ? when / he / carry / a suitcase / he / drop / it / on his foot When he was carrying a suitcase, he dropped it on his foot. ? he / break / his leg / when / he / ski He broke his leg when he was skiing. 1 he / sit down / on a chair / while / I / paint / it 2 as / he / run / for a bus / he / collide / with a lamppost 3 his hair / catch / fire / when / he / cook / chips 4 when / he / hold / a beautiful vase / he / suddenly / drop / it 5 he / sit / in the garden / when / a wasp / sting / him / on the nose 2 Past continuous or simple? (A-B) Put in the correct form of the verb. Rita: I hear the lights (►) went (go) out in your flats last night. Emma: Yes, (►) / was watching (I / watch) a documentary on TV when suddenly (1)……….. ........................ (we / lose) all the power. But (2)…………………………...(it / come) on again after about ten minutes. Vicky: Rachel (3)…………………………… (come) down the stairs when the lights (4)…………………………… (go) out. She almost (5)…………………………. (fall) over. Daniel: Matthew and I (6)……………………. .........(play) table tennis at the time. Andrew: (7)………………................. (I / work) on the computer. (8) (I / lose) a whole hour's work. But this morning (9) (I/get) up early and (10)……………………… (do) it again. 3 Past continuous or simple? (A-C) Find the second part of each sentence. Put each verb into the correct form. ? Vicky (have) a beautiful dream when she (touch) the wire. ? When Andrew (see) the question, when I (find) a £10 note in it. 1 The train (wait) when the alarm clock (ring). 2 I (read) a library book the crowd (rush) in. 3 Sarah (have) an electric shock he (know) the answer immediately. 4 When the doors (open), they (see) that the sun (shine). 5 When the campers (wake), when we (arrive) at the station. ? Vicky was having a beautiful dream when the alarm clock rang. ? When Andrew saw the question, he knew the answer immediately. 1 2 3 4 .................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Test 2 Past simple and past continuous (Units 8-10) Test 2A Put in the past simple of the verbs in brackets. ► The car stopped (stop) at the lights. 1 We…………………….. ... (leave) the cinema before the end of the film. 2 The streets………………………….(be) crowded with people. 3 My grandmother……………………… (die) last year. 4 Everyone…………………………. (have) a marvellous time. 5 We……………………………… (not / like) the food they gave us. 6 Claire……………………………. ... (go) to Egypt last month. 7 The accident……………………….. (happen) last weekend. 8 It………………………….. (not / be) a very comfortable journey. 9 I…………………………………… (know) that ages ago. Test 2B Write a second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► There were lights on the spacecraft, (had) The spacecraft had lights on it. 1 I had my old coat on. (wearing) 2 I was on holiday, and you were on holiday, too. (we) 3 It isn't true that I made a mistake, (didn't) 4 The boys were in the middle of a game of cards, (playing) 5 No one told me about the change of plan, (know) 6 My friend was the winner of the competition, (won) 7 Is it a fact that the Romans built this wall? (did) Test 2C Lorna Bright is a long-distance walker. Look at this part of her diary describing a morning's walk along the coast. Write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. It was a fine day (►) when I started out on the last part of my walk around the coast of Britain. The sun was(l)……………………….. , and a light wind (2)………………………… .. blowing from the southwest. I was pleased that it (3)…………………………… raining. I knew by now that I (4)………………………………like rain. In fact I (5)…………………………… it. I (6)…………………………. ... along the cliff top and then down into the lovely little fishing village of Wellburn, past a cafe where people (7)…………………………….. having morning coffee. Three miles past Wellburn I (8)…………………………. down for five minutes and (9)………………………….. a drink. Now it (10)…………………………… getting warmer, so I (11)………………………….. off one of my sweaters. 1(12)………………………… stop for long because 1 ( 1 3 ) … …… … … … …… … … to reach Seabury by lunch-time. (14)……………………………. I finally got there, it (15)……………….. just after half past twelve. Test 2D Each of these sentences has a mistake in it. Write the correct sentence, The hotel were very quite. The hotel was very quiet. 1 It was peaceful, and-the birds-were sing. 2 1 washed my hair when the-phone rang. 3 You came to the club last night. 4 It taked ages to ge home. 5 5. We tried to keep quiet because the baby sleeping 6 As I was watching him, the man was suddenly running away. 7 We pass a petrol station two minutes ago. 8 Everything was seeming OK. 9 Where bought you that-bag? 10 When I heard the alarm I was having-the-room immediately. Test 2E Complete the sentences. Put in the correct form of each verb. Use the past continuous or past simple. ► When Martin arrived (arrive) home, Anna was talking (talk) to someone on the phone. Martin started (start) to get the tea. 1 I…………………………. (lie) in the bath when the phone……………………………. (ring). It ………………………(stop) after a few rings. 2 I t……………………………… (be) cold when we ......................... . . . (leave) the house that day, and alight snow………….. ..........................(fall). 3 Your friend who…………….. ......................... (come) here the other day .........……………………. (seem) very nice. I………………….. ............... (enjoy) meeting her. 4 When I……………………………… (see) the man, he ................................... (stand) outside the bank. He……………………………… (have) a black baseball cap on. 5 When I……………………………. . . . (open) the cupboard door, a pile of books (fall) out. 6 I………………………… (walk) along the street when I suddenly…………………………….. (feel) something hit me in the back. I ……………………………… (not / know) what it was. We………………………………………. (go) to London yesterday, but on the way We………………………………….. (hear) about a bomb scare in Oxford Street. So We…………………………………… (drive) back home straightaway. 8 Something very strange .………………………….. (happen) to me on my way home from work yesterday afternoon. I ………………………….. (drive) along the bypass at the time. Suddenly I…………………………. (see) my mother in the seat beside me. But she died three years ago. 11 The present perfect (1) The present perfect tells us about the past and the present. The aircraft has landed means that the aircraft is on the ground now. B Form The present perfect is the present tense of have + a past participle. I/you/we/they have washed OR I/you/we/they've washed he/she/it has washed OR he/she/it's washed NEGATIVE QUESTION I/you/we/they haven't washed he/she/it hasn't washed have I/you/we/they washed? has he/she/it washed? Regular past participles end in ed, e.g. washed, landed, finished. We've washed the dishes. Have you opened your letter? The aircraft has landed safely. How many points has Matthew scored? The students haven't finished their exams. C Irregular forms Some participles are irregular. I've made a shopping list. We've sold our car. I've thought about it a lot. Have you written the letter? She hasn't drunk her coffee. For a list of irregular verbs see page 383. There is a present perfect of be and of have. The weather has been awful I've had a lovely time, thank you. D Use When we use the present perfect, we see things as happening in the past but having a result in the present. We've washed the dishes. (They're clean now.) The aircraft has landed. (It's on the ground now.) We've eaten all the eggs. (There aren't any left.) They've learnt the words. (They know the words.) You've broken this watch. (It isn't working.) 12-13 More on the present perfect 14-15 Present perfect or past simple? page 377 American English 11 Exercises 1 Form (B) Add a sentence. Use the present perfect. ► I'm tired. (I / walk / miles) I've walked miles. 1 Emma's computer is working now. (she / repair / it) 2 It's cooler in here now. (I / open / the window) 3 The visitors are here at last, (they / arrive) 4 Mark's car isn't blocking us in now. (he / move / it) 5 We haven't got any new videos, (we / watch / all these) 2 Irregular forms (C) Look at the pictures and say what the people have done. Use these verbs: break, build, catch, see, win Use these objects: a film, a fish, a house, his leg, the gold medal ► She's won the gold medal. 1. 2. 3 4 3 Review (A-D) Trevor and Laura are decorating their house. Put in the verbs. Use the present perfect. Laura: How is the painting going? (►) Have you finished ? (you / finish) Trevor: No, I haven't. Painting the ceiling is really difficult, you know. (1) ................... (I / not / do) very much. And it looks just the same as before. This new paint (2) ....................................................... (not / make) any difference. Laura: (3) ..................................................... (you / not / put) enough on. Trevor: (4) ........................................... (1 / hurt) my back. It feels bad. Laura: Oh, you and your back. You mean (5)………………………………………. (you / have) enough of decorating. Well, I'll do it. Where (6) .................………………………… (you / put) the brush? Trevor: I don't know. (7) ............................................................ ( i t / disappear). (8)………………………………………. (I / look) for it, but I can't find it. Laura: You're hopeless, aren't you? How much (9)………………………………… (you / do) in here? Nothing! (10) ............................................................ (I / paint) two doors. Trevor: (11)………………………………………… (I / clean) all this old paint around the window. It looks much better now, doesn't it? Laura: (12)……………………………………… (we / make) some progress, I suppose. Now, where (13) ........................................................ (that brush /go)? Oh, (14)……………………………………..... (you / leave) it on the ladder, look. 12 The present perfect (2): just, already, yet; for and since A Just, already and yet We can use the present perfect with just, already and yet. Just means 'a short time ago'. Vicky heard about the concert not long ago. Already means 'sooner than expected'. They sold the tickets very quickly. We use yet when we are expecting something to happen. Vicky expects that Rachel will buy a ticket. Just and already come before the past participle (heard, sold). Yet comes at the end of a question or a negative sentence. Here are some more examples. We've just come back from our holiday. I've just had an idea. It isn't a very good party. Most people have already gone home. My brother has already crashed his new car. It's eleven o'clock and you haven't finished breakfast yet. Has your course started yet? But for American English see page 377. B For and since We can use the present perfect with for and since. Vicky has only had that camera for three days. Those people have been at the hotel since Friday. I've felt really tired for a whole week now. We've lived in Oxford since 1992. NOT We live-here-sinee-1992. Here something began in the past and has lasted up to the present time. We use for to say how long this period is {for three days). We use since to say when the period began (since Friday). We use how long in questions. How long has Vicky had that camera? ~ Since Thursday, I think. How long have Trevor and Laura been married? ~ Oh, for about three years. We can also use the present perfect with for and since when something has stopped happening. / haven't seen Rachel for ages. She hasn't visited us since July. 11,13 More on the present perfect 14-15 Present perfect or past simple? 17 Present perfect continuous or simple? 114 Yet, still and already 121 For, since, ago and before 12 Exercises 1 Just (A) Write replies using the present perfect and just. Use these past participles: checked, eaten, made, remembered, rung, tidied ► We must find out the address. ~ It's all right, I've just remembered it. 1 The children's room looks neat. ~ Yes, they've ............................ 2 Is Daniel making some coffee? ~ It's ready. 3 What happened to that chocolate? ~ Sorry, .................. , ....... 4 Has Rachel got all the answers right? ~ Yes, ............................................. 5 Have you told your sister? ~ Yes, I've .......................................... 2 Just, already and yet (A) Complete the dialogue. Use the present perfect with just, already and yet. Vicky: (►) You haven t done your project yet (you / not do / your project / yet), 1 suppose. Rachel: No, I haven't. (1) ....................................... ……………………………………. (I / not / start / it / yet). Vicky: (2)…………………...................................(I /just / see / Andrew), and he says (3)…………..............................................(he / already / do) about half of it. Rachel: Well, he works too hard. Vicky: (4)………………………………………………………….. (I / not / finish / my plan / yet). Rachel: (5)………………………………….. .........(you / already / begin) to worry about it, haven't you? Take it easy. There's plenty of time. Vicky: (6)……………………………………….. (we / already / spend) too long thinking about it. (7)……………………………………………..(I / not / do / any real work / yet) and (8)……………………………………….. (I / just / realize) that there are only four weeks to the end of term. Rachel: OK. (9)………………………………………. (I / just / decide) to start next week. Well, maybe. 3 For and since (B) Andrew is a very hard-working student. It's midnight and he is still working at his computer. Write sentences with the present perfect and for or since. ► be / at his computer / six hours He's been at his computer for six hours. 1 not / have / any fun / a long time .............................................................. 2 have / a cold / a week ……………………………………….. 3 not / see / his friends / ages ……………………………………… 4 not / do / any sport / last year ……………………………………… 5 be / busy with his studies / months ............................................………… 4 For and since (B) Complete the sentences. ? You ought to wash the car. You haven't washed it for ages. ? I'd better have a shower. I haven't had one since Thursday. 1 I think I'll ring my girlfriend. I haven't .......................................... the weekend. 2 We're going to see some old friends. We haven't............................................... five years. 3 Let's watch a video, shall we? We haven't.............................................. quite a while. 4 We could have a barbecue. We haven't .............................................. last summer. 5 Shall we play tennis? We haven't .............................................. our holiday. 13 The present perfect (3): ever, this week, etc Claire has gone to Australia. Gone there means that she is still there. Claire has been to Australia. Been there means that the visit is over. B Ever and never Mark: Claire: Mark: Claire: Mark: Where have you been this time, Claire? I've just come back from the States. Florida. You get around, don't you? I've never been to Florida. Was it good? It was OK. Not as good as Australia. I might go to Brazil next time. Have you ever been there? No, / haven't. We can use ever and never with the present perfect. We use ever in questions. In Have you ever been to Brazil? the word ever means 'in your whole life up to the present time'. Never means 'not ever'. Here are some more examples. Have you ever played cricket? ~ No, never. Has Andrew ever had any fun? ~ I don't think so. I've never ridden a motor bike in my life. You've never given me flowers before. This is the most expensive hotel we've ever stayed in. C First time, second time, etc After It's/This is the first/second time, we use the present perfect. This is the first time we've been to Scotland, so it's all new to us. This is the second time Rachel has forgotten to give me a message. I love this film. I think it's the fourth time I've seen it. D Today, this week, etc We use the present perfect with today and phrases with this, e.g. this morning, this week, this year. We've done quite a lot of work today. I haven't watched any television so far this week. Have you had a holiday this year? ~ No, not yet. This year is the period which began in January and has lasted up to the present time. 14-15 Present perfect or past simple? 13 Exercises 1 Gone to or been to? (A) Complete the conversation. Put in gone or been. Emma: Hi. Where's Rachel? Vicky: She's (►) gone to the supermarket to get something for a meal. Emma: But I've got some chicken for tonight. I've just (1)…………………………….. to a supermarket on my way home, that new place near the station. Natasha: I haven't (2). ……………. .....................to that one yet. Vicky: Where's Jessica? Isn't she here? Emma: No, she's (3)……………………………… to London. She'll be back tomorrow. 2 Ever and never (B) Write the questions and answers. Use the information in brackets. ► Matthew: (sailing?) Have you ever been sailing? Natasha: (no, windsurfing) No, I've never been sailing, but I've been windsurfing. 1 Laura: (San Francisco?) Mark: (no, Los Angeles) ........…………………………………………………………………………… But …………………………………………………………………………… 2 Tom: (basketball?) …………………………………………………………………………… Trevor: (no, volleyball) ....................................................................……………………………….. But …………………………………………………………………………… 3 Daniel: ('Hamlet'?) …………………………………………………………………………… Vicky: (no,'Macbeth') …………………………………………………………………………… But …………………………………………………………………………… 3 First time, second time, etc (C) What would you say in these situations? Use time and the present perfect. ► You are watching a cricket match. You have never seen one before. This is the first time I've seen a cricket match. 1 You have lost your bank card. It has happened once before. This is 2 The washing-machine has broken down. This has happened twice before. 3 You are in England for the first time in your life. 4 You are staying in a hotel where you once stayed before. 5 You have missed the bus. You've done the same thing about four times before. 4 Today, this week, etc (D) Complete the sentences. Use the present perfect. ► Mark buys a newspaper most mornings, but he hasn't bought one this morning. 1 I see Vicky most days, but ...................... 2 We go to the club most weekends, but ....... 3 We usually have a party each term, but .. 4 Someone usually rings in the evening, but no one 14 Present perfect or past simple? (1) The present perfect tells us about the past and the present. United have won the Cup, so it's theirs now. The past simple tells us about the past, a time which is finished. Last year is in the past. We use the past simple (not the present perfect) to talk about times in the past such as yesterday, last week, in 1994, a hundred years ago. We watched United last week, NOT We have watched United last week. Long ago dinosaurs lived here. NOT Long ago dinosaurs have lived here. Here are some more examples. PRESENT PERFECT Emma has packed her case. (So her things are in the case now.) Mike has repaired the chair. (So it's all right now.) The plane has just landed. I've turned the heating on. (It's on now.) I've dropped my calculator. (It's on the floor now.) PAST SIMPLE Emma packed her case last night. (Her things may be unpacked now.) Mike repaired the chair. (It may be broken again now.) The plane landed ten minutes ago. I turned the heating on earlier, but it's off again now. I dropped my calculator, but it seems to be OK. 6 I've done it. I did it yesterday. Trevor: We've bought a new car. Tom: Oh, have you? What sort? Laura: An Adagio. We bought it last week. We often give a piece of news in the present perfect, e.g. We've bought a new car. (The car is ours now.) We use the past simple, e.g. We bought it last week, to give details or to ask for details about things such as when and where it happened. Here are some more examples. I've found my wallet. ~ Oh, good. Where did you find it? Your parcel has arrived. The postman brought it at eight o'clock. They've closed the factory. ~ Really? When did they do that? C Structures with for, since and last PRESENT PERFECT PAST SIMPLE We can say that something hasn't happened for a long time or since a specific time in the past. We haven't had a party for ages. We haven't had a party since Christmas. We can say that it is a long time since something happened or when was the last time it happened. It's ages since we last had a party. Christmas was the last time we had a party. 14 Exercises 1 I have done or I did? (A) Put in the correct verb form. ? I've done (I / do) all the housework. The flat is really clean now. ? A young couple bought (buy) the house next door. But they didn't live there long. 1 Our visitors……………………………. (arrive). They're sitting in the garden. 2 There's still a problem with the television. Someone ...................................... (repair) it, but then it broke down again. 3………………………… (I / lose) my bank card. I can't find it anywhere. 4 The match………………………… .. (start). United are playing well. 5 My sister………………………….. (run) away from home. But she came back two days later. 6 Daniel………………………….. (earn) some money last week. But I'm afraid he's already spent it all. ………………………..(we / plant) an apple tree in the garden. Unfortunately it died. 8 Prices……………. .................. (go) up. Everything is more expensive this year. 9 Someone……………………. ......... (turn) on the hi-fi. What's that song called? 10 (I / phone) the office at eleven to speak to the manager, but he isn't there today. 11 (I / make) a cake. Would you like a piece? 12 The runner Amos Temila…………………………… (break) the world record for the 1500 metres in Frankfurt. Then two days later in Helsinki, Lee Williams ran it in an even faster time. 2 I've done it. I did it yesterday. (B) Things that have happened today are on the radio and TV news. Give the news using the present perfect and past simple. ► the Prime Minister / visit Luton University / speak to students there / earlier today The Prime Minister has visited Luton University. He spoke to students there earlier today. 1 the train drivers / go on strike / stop work / at twelve o'clock 2 the Queen / arrive in Toronto / fly there / in an RAF aircraft 3 two men / escape from Parkhurst Prison / get away / during the night 4 the actor Howard Bates / die in a car accident / his car / crash into a wall 5 Linda [ones / win the women's marathon / run it / in 2 hours 27 minutes 3 Structures with for, since and last (C) Complete the conversations. ► Mike: This car is filthy. I haven't been to the car wash for about a year. Tom: What! You mean it's twelve months since you last went to the car wash? 1 Laura: I haven't used my camera recently. June was the last time I took a photo. Trevor: Really? I'm surprised you .......................................................... 2 Rachel: I haven't seen Andrew for weeks. Daniel: Nor me. It's .................................................................................................. 3 Tom: What about a game of cards? We haven't played since your birthday. David: Really? You mean my birthday ............................................................. 4 Emma: I feel terrible. It's three days since I ate anything. Vicky: What did you say? You ................ June. him. cards? three days? 15 Present perfect or past simple? (2) PRESENT PERFECT PAST SIMPLE We use the present perfect for a state which has gone on up to the present. (David is still in hospital.) We've lived here for ten years. (And we still live here.) We use the past simple for a state in the past, in a period which is finished. (David's stay in hospital is over.) We lived there for ten years. (We don't live there now.) B Have you (ever)...? and Did you (ever)...? PAST SIMPLE PRESENT PERFECT We use the present perfect for actions in a period of time up to the present. This young director has made four films so far. He has made films means that it is possible he will make more films. Here are some more examples. Have you ever been to America? ~ Yes, twice. I've played table tennis before. We've never had any money. We use the past simple for actions in the past, a period which is finished. The director made many films in his long career. He made films means that his career in films is over. He won't make any more. Did Churchill ever go to America? ~ Yes, I think so. I played table tennis at college. We never had any money in those days. C Today, this week, etc PAST SIMPLE PRESENT PERFECT We use today and phrases with this for a period up to the present. It hasn't rained today. Have you seen this week's magazine? We use yesterday and phrases with last for a past period. It rained yesterday. Did you see last week's magazine? But sometimes today etc can mean a past period. Compare: / haven't seen Rachel today. (It's still daytime.) Has the post come this morning? (It's still morning.) I didn't see Sarah at work today. (The working day is over.) Did the post come this morning? (It's later in the day.) 15 Exercises 1 I've been or I was? (A) Complete this letter to a newspaper. Put in the present perfect or past simple. A few days ago I (►) learned (learn) that someone plans to knock down the White Horse Inn. This pub (VJ has been (be) the centre of village life for centuries. It (1)…………………………… (stand) at our crossroads for 500 years. It (2)…………………………… (be) famous in the old days, and Shakespeare once (3)……………………………. (stay) there, they say. I (4)………………………….. (live) in Brickfield all my life. The villagers (5)………………………………(know) about the plans for less than a week and already there's a 'Save Our Pub' campaign. Last week we (6)…………………………… (be) happy, but this week we're angry. We will stop them, you'll see. 2 Have you (ever)...? and Did you (ever)...? (B) Look at each conversation and choose the best sentence, a) or b). ► Have you heard about the woman walking across the US? ~ Yes, she's reached the Rockies. a)The walk is continuing, b) The walk has finished. 1 Have you ever played beach volleyball? ~ Yes, we played it on holiday. a) The holiday is still going on. b) The holiday is over. 2 Did you know old Mr Green? ~ No, I never met him. a) Mr Green is probably alive, b) Mr Green is probably dead. 3 Wayne Johnson is a great footballer. ~ Yes, he's scored 200 goals for United. a) Wayne Johnson still plays for United, b) Wayne Johnson has left United. 3 Today, this week, etc (C) Put in this, last, today or yesterday. ► Last month prices went up, but this month they have fallen a little. 1 It's been dry so far ............................................ week, but .........…………………….. week was very wet. 2 I went shopping earlier ............................................and spent all the money I earned ............................................ 3 We didn't have many visitors ...............................................year. We've had a lot more ........................... year. 4 I don't feel so tired now. We got up quite late . . . morning. I felt really tired ................................ when we got up so early. 4 Present perfect or past simple? (Units 14 and 15) Put in the verbs. Tom: (►) Have you heard (you / hear) the news about David? Harriet: No. (1) ..............................................(what / happen)? Tom: (2)……….. ............................. (he / have) an accident. He was walking down some steps. (3)……………………………… (he / fall) and (4)…………………………….. (break) his leg. Harriet: Oh, how awful! When (5)............................................... (it / happen)? Tom: Yesterday afternoon. Melanie (6)……………………………….. (tell) me about it last night. Harriet: Last night! (7)…………………………….. (you / know) about it last night, and (8)……………………........... (you / not / tell) me! Tom: Well, (9) ........................................... (I / not / see) you last night. And (10) ........................................... (I / not / see) you today, until now. Harriet: I hope he's all right. (11) ............................................. (he / have) lots of accidents, you know. (12) ............................... (he / do) the same thing about two years ago. Test 3 Present perfect and past simple (Units 11-15) Test 3A Put in the past participles of the verbs in brackets. ► We've found (find) all the answers. 1 Have you………………………. (wash) the car? 2 You haven't .................................. (eat) very much. 3 They've………………….. ......... (open) a new supermarket. 4 You've…………………………… (write) it in pencil. 5 I've……………………… ...... (make) the sandwiches. 6 We've………….. ...................... (have) our lunch. 7 United have………………….. ......... (score) a goal. 8 The balloon has……………… ..................(land) in a field. 9 Who's………………………….. (break) this glass? 10 It's warm because the heating has ....................................... (be) on. 11 Have you .......................................(sell) your flat yet? 12 I've…………………………… (finish) that job at last. Test 3B Complete the second sentence so that it follows on from the first. Use the present perfect. ► My hair is tidy now. I‘ve brushed my hair. 1 The door is open. Someone ......................................... the door. 2 This is Oliver's drawing, look. Oliver ........………….. ...............a picture. 3 The calculator is broken. Someone…………………………… the calculator. 4 United are the winners. United...................................…. the game. 5 There's no more wine in the bottle. We ....................................... all the wine. 6 The floor is clean now. I ....................................... the floor. 7 I know my number now. I………………………. .....my number by heart. 8 The guests are here now. The guests ....................................... 9 I'm still working on the computer. I....................................... with the computer yet. Test 3C Decide which word is correct. ► I'd like to borrow this book. Has Anna read it yet? a) done b) for c) just d) yet 1 Ben writes very quickly. He's………………………….. finished his essay, a) already b) been c) for d) yet 2 What are you going to do? ~ I don't know. I haven't decided ........ a) just b) long c) since d) yet 3 I've........................................ to London. I went there in June. a) been b) gone c) just d) yet 4 Have you ......................................done any skiing? a) ever b) for c) just d) long 5 My boyfriend hasn't rung………………………… week, a) for b) last c) since d) this 6 I haven't seen that coat before. How ..........................................have you had it? a) already b) for c) long d) since 7 The girls have .............. to the cinema. They won't be back until ten o'clock. a) already b) been c) gone d) just 8 I haven't seen my parents .......................................... last Christmas. a) already b) before c) for d) since 9 This is the first .................................. I've ever lived away from home. a) already b) since c) that d) time 10 This programme must be new. I've ..........................................seen it before. a) ever b) never c) since d) yet Test 3D Some of these sentences are correct, and some have a word which should not be there. If the sentence is correct, put a tick (/). If it is incorrect, cross the unnecessary have or has out of the sentence and write it in the space. ? Susan has lost her keys. She can't find them anywhere. V ? Christopher has hurt his hand, but it's OK now. has 1 The directors have arrived half an hour ago, but they didn't stay long. 2 It's raining, and Peter has left his umbrella behind, look. 3 It's a long time since your friends have last visited us. 4 None of you have called me for weeks. Aren't we friends any more? 5 We can play tennis now. The others have finished. 6 The company has bought some land, but then it sold it. 7 The computer isn't on now. Someone has turned it off. 8 Tessa has posted the parcel. It's on its way to you. 9 Several bombs have gone off in the city centre. It has happened an hour ago. 10 Simon has left. He and Oliver have left after lunch. Test3E Put in the present perfect or past simple of the verbs in brackets. ? I've had (have) these shoes since my eighteenth birthday. ? I tidied (tidy) my desk, but now it's in a mess again. 1 The last time I ............................................... (go) to Brighton was in August. 2 I'd like to meet a ghost, but I .................................................(never / see) one. 3 I've finished my homework. I ....................................... (do) it before tea. 4 And the race is over! And Micky Simpson................................................ (win) in a record time! 5 I ................... (work) for a computer company for a year. That was after college. 6 What time .................................................(you / get) to work this morning? 7 Martin ............................... (be) to Greece five times. He loves the place. 8 ThePresident .............. (come) out of the building and is going to make a speech. 9 You won't believe this, but I've got some tickets for the concert. ~ Oh, well done. How ........................ (you / get) them? 10 Of course I can ride a bike. But I ..........………. ....................(not / ride) one for years. 11 Marilyn Monroe..................................................(be) in about thirty films. 12 .................. (you / ever / bake) your own bread? ~ No, but I might try it some time. 13 Janet .................................. (be) very ill three years ago. 14 Rupert has left a message for you. He .............................................(ring) last night. 15 (you / see) the news today? ~ No, not yet. I'll watch it at ten. 16 We moved here in 1993. We..................................................(be) here a long time now. 16 The present perfect continuous A Introduction We use the present perfect continuous for an action (waiting). The action happens over a period of time (for twenty minutes). Here the period lasts up to the present - they are still waiting now. B Form The present perfect continuous is the present tense of have + been + an ing-form. I/you/we/they have been waiting OR I/you/we/they've been waiting he/she/it has been waiting OR he/she/it's been waiting NEGATIVE QUESTION I/you/we/they haven't been waiting he/she/it hasn't been waiting have I/you/we/they been waiting? has he/she/it been waiting? We've been standing here for ages. It has been raining all day. Have you been waiting long? Our team hasn't been doing very well lately. C Use We use the present perfect continuous for an action over a period of time leading up to the present (see A). In these examples the action is still going on. We've been waiting here for twenty minutes. (We're waiting now.) Listen. That burglar alarm has been ringing since eight o'clock this morning. We must use the perfect in these situations. NOT We wait here for twenty minutes OR We're waiting-here for twenty-minutes. We can use the present perfect continuous to talk about repeated actions up to now. Natasha has been playing the piano since she was four. We can also use it to talk about an action which ends just before the present. I've been swimming. That's why my hair is wet. D For, since, how long and recently We can use the present perfect continuous with for and since (see Unit 121). My sister has been staying with me for three weeks now. You've been playing on that computer since seven o'clock. We use how long in questions. How long have you been waiting? Note also recently and lately. These both mean 'in the last few days or weeks'. I haven't been feeling very well recently. What have you been doing lately? 17 Present perfect continuous or simple? 121 For and since 16 Exercises 1 Form (B) Put in the verbs. Use the present perfect continuous. Ilona: Sorry I'm late. Emma: It's OK. (►) / haven't been waiting (I / not / wait) long. What(l)………………………………….. (y ou /do )? Ilona: I've been with Mrs King. (2) ........................................... (she / help) me with my English. Emma: Your English is very good. You don't need lessons, surely. How long (3) .......................................................... (you / study) English? Ilona: Er, eight years now. But my accent wasn't so good before I came to England. (4) ..................................................... (I / try) to improve it. Ithink (5) .......................................................... (it / get) better lately. Emma: Your accent is fine, Ilona. Honestly. 2 Use(C) Say what these people have been doing. Use these verbs: argue, cook, drive, wait, work ► 1 2 3 4 Andrew is tired because he's been working all day. Trevor and Laura are upset because ......... …………………………………………. David is hot because....................................................................................……………. Mark feels very stiff because .............................................................. …………….. Henry is annoyed............................................................................................................... all day. a long time for Claire. 3 Use(C-D) What could you say in these situations? Write sentences with the present perfect continuous and a phrase with for. Use these verbs: play, read, swim, talk, travel, work ► A video is on. It began two hours ago, and it hasn't finished yet. The video has been playing for two hours. 1 Matthew went into the water an hour ago. He doesn't want to come out yet. 2 Your friends started their journey around the world three months ago. They've gone about halfway now. 3 Mark got to the office early this morning. Ten hours later he's still there. 4 Melanie rang Rita forty minutes ago, and they're still on the phone. 5 Trevor has got an interesting book. He started it quite a long time ago. Ask him how long. 17 Present perfect continuous or simple? A I have been doing or I have done? Mike has been repairing the car. We use the present perfect continuous for an action happening over a period of time (see Unit 16). We are thinking of Mike doing the repair and getting oil on his hands. Mike has repaired the car. We use the present perfect simple for a complete action (see Unit 11). We are thinking of the finished repair and the result of the repair - that the car is all right now. Here are some more examples. OVER A PERIOD (have been doing) We've been touring Scotland. A strong wind has been blowing all day. Vicky is out of breath. She's been running. I've been writing an essay. I'm tired now. We normally use the continuous form when we say how long. Rachel has been playing music all day. I've been ironing shirts since ten o'clock. How long have you been learning to drive? COMPLETE (have done) We've finished our tour of Scotland. The wind has blown a tree over. Vicky is here at last. She's run all the way. I've written an essay. I can hand it in now We normally use the simple form when we say how much/many. Rachel has played at least twenty CDs. I've ironed eight shirts. How many driving lessons have you had? B States and actions We cannot normally use the continuous form with a state verb (see Unit 7). I've known the secret for a long time, NOT I've been knowing the secret. My parents have had this car for about ten years. We've never been very happy here, I'm afraid. Live and work (= have a job) can be continuous or simple, with no difference in meaning. We've been living here since 1992. OR We've lived here since 1992. Sarah has been working for the company for three years now. OR Sarah has worked for the company for three years now. 17 Exercises 1 I have been doing or I have done? (A) Look at these conversations and put in the correct form of the verb. Use the present perfect continuous or simple. ► Sarah: I feel really tired. Mark: It's because you've been doing (you / do) too much. Sarah: Well, at least I've finished (I / finish) that report now, and I can relax. 1 David: Someone ....................................... ..........(leave) the ladder outside, look. Harriet: I expect that's Mike. (he / clean) the windows. I don't think ..................................................................(he/ finish) yet. 2 Laura: You've got mud on your shoes. Trevor: It's all right, I'll take them off...................................................... (I / work) in the garden. Laura: Yes, it looks a lot tidier. Well done ............................. (you / do) a good job. 3 Tom: ......................................................(I / hear) that you and Harriet are building a garage. How long ..................(you / do) that? Mike: Oh, for about a month now. (we / do) ...................... about half of it. 2 I have been doing or I have done? (A) What would you ask in these situations? Use the present perfect continuous or simple. ? Your friend is wearing glasses. You've never seen him with glasses on before. Ask him how long ... How long have you been wearing glasses ? ? Nick is playing computer games. Ask him how many ... How many computer games have you played ? 1 You meet a group of people walking across country. Ask them how many miles ... 2 Some workmen are digging up the road outside Sarah's house. Ask her how long ... 3 Laura is taking lots of photos of you and your friends. Ask her how many ... 4 You have just woken up from an afternoon sleep and seen that it is raining. Ask your friend how long ... 3 I have been doing or I have done? (A-B) Complete the conversation. Put the verbs in the present perfect continuous or simple. Laura: What are you doing, Trevor? (►) You've been (you / be) in here for ages. You're making an awful mess. Trevor: (1) (I / clear) out this cupboard most of the afternoon. There's a lot of old stuff in here. (2) (I / find) these, look. I aura: (3) (you / sit) there staring at those old boots for the last five minutes. (4) ...... (I / watch) you. (5) ...................................................... (you / be) in a dream. Trevor: They're football boots. (6) (I / have) them since I was about sixteen. (7) (they / be) in here for years. Laura: Well, throw them away. And what about that tennis racket? Is that yours? Trevor: No, it must be yours. (8) .................................................... (I / never / have) a tennis racket. 18 The past perfect A Introduction I felt really tired when I took the train to work yesterday because Sarah and 1 had been to a party the evening before. We hadn't gone to bed until after one. I hadn't been on the train long when I had a bit of a shock. I suddenly realized that I'd left my wallet at home. Then I began to wonder. Had I left it in the office the day before? I just couldn't remember. I wanted to go back to bed. I felt awful. The situation is in the past (I took the train ... I felt tired ...). When we talk about things before this past time, we use the past perfect. Sarah and I had been to a party the evening before. I'd left my wallet at home. We are looking back from the situation of the train journey to the earlier actions - going to a party and leaving home without the wallet. Here are some more examples of the past perfect. It was twenty to six. Most of the shops had just closed. I went to the box office at lunch-time, but they had already sold all the tickets. By 1960 most of Britain's old colonies had become independent. As well as actions, we can use the past perfect to talk about states. I felt better by the summer, but the doctor warned me not to do too much. I'd been very ill. The news came as no surprise to me. I'd known for some time that the factory was likely to close. B Form The past perfect is had + a past participle. He had enjoyed the party, OR He'd enjoyed the party. They hadn't gone to bed until late. Where had he put his wallet? For irregular past participles see page 383. C Present perfect and past perfect Compare these examples. PRESENT PERFECT (before now) My wallet isn't here. I've left it behind. The match is over. United have won. That man looks familiar. I've seen him somewhere before. 19 Review of the past simple, continuous and perfect PAST PERFECT (before then) My wallet wasn't there. I'd left it behind. The match was over. United had won. The man looked familiar. I'd seen him somewhere before. 20 The past perfect continuous 18 Exercises 1 The past perfect (A) Read about each situation and then tick the right answer. ► Two men delivered the sofa. I had already paid for it. Which came first, a) the delivery, or b) V the payment? 1 The waiter brought our drinks. We'd already had our soup. Which came first, a) the drinks, or b) the soup? 2 I'd seen the film, so I read the book. Did 1 first a) see the film, or b) read the book? 3 The programme had ended, so I rewound the cassette. Did I rewind the cassette a) after, or b) before the programme ended? 4 I had an invitation to the party, but I'd arranged a trip to London. Which came first, a) the invitation, or b) the arrangements for the trip? 2 The past perfect (A-B) Add a sentence with the past perfect using the notes. ► Claire looked very suntanned when I saw her last week. She'd just been on holiday, (just / be on holiday) 1 We rushed to the station, but we were too late. ………………………………………………………………………. (the train /just / go) 2 I didn't have an umbrella, but that didn't matter. ................................................................................................................. (the rain / stop) 3 When I got to the concert hall, they wouldn't let me in. ......................................................................................................... (forget / my ticket) 4 Someone got the number of the car the raiders used. ................................................................................................... (steal / it / a week before) 5 I was really pleased to see Rachel again yesterday. …………………………………………………………………….. (not see / her / for ages) 6 Luckily the flat didn't look too bad when my parents called in. ………………………………………………………………………(just / clean / it) 7 The boss invited me to lunch yesterday, but I had to refuse the invitation. ………………………………………………………………... (already / eat / my sandwiches) 3 Present perfect and past perfect (C) Put the verbs in the present perfect (have done) or past perfect (had done). ? It isn't raining now. It's stopped (stop) at last. ? We had no car at that time. We'd sold (sell) our old one. 1 The park looked awful. People .............................................. (leave) litter everywhere. 2 You can have that newspaper. I ............................................(finish) with it. 3 There's no more cheese. We................................................(eat) it all, I'm afraid. 4 There was no sign of a taxi, although I............................................ (order) one half an hour before. 5 This bill isn't right. They ............................................. (make) a mistake. 6 I spoke to Melanie at lunch-time. Someone ..........................................(tell) her the news earlier. 7 I was really tired last night. I ...............................................(have) a hard day. 8 Don't you want to see this programme? It ...............................................(start). 9 It'll soon get warm in here. I............................................... (turn) the heating on. 10 At last the committee were ready to announce their decision. They ……………… .................. (make) up their minds. 19 Review of the past simple, continuous and perfect A Introduction Read this true story. It happened some years ago. A young man walked into a supermarket in Southampton and put a few items of food in a basket. He had chosen a time when not many people were shopping in the store. He found a checkout where no one else was waiting. When the cashier had checked the goods, the man gave her a £10 note. When she opened the till, the man quickly snatched all the money from it and ran out of the store before she realized what was happening. At the time the security guard was standing at the other end of the store. When staff checked the records in the till, they found that the thief had taken only £4.37. As he had left the £10 note behind, the operation had cost him £5.63. B Comparison of tenses We use the past simple to talk about the past (see Unit 8). He snatched the money and ran away. The past simple is used for the actions in the story, to tell us what happened next. We use the past continuous (see Unit 9) for something around a past time or a past action. At the time of the incident, not many people were shopping in the store. The few customers were in the middle of doing their shopping. We use the past perfect (see Unit 18) for things before a past situation. Staff found that the thief had taken only £4.37. The theft of the money happened before they found out how much. C Past simple and past continuous We often use these two forms together when a shorter action comes in the middle of a longer one (see Unit 10B). / was waiting at the checkout when I noticed a strange-looking man. Seeing the man came in the middle of the wait. D Past simple and past perfect When we use these two forms together, we use the past perfect for what happened earlier. A man walked into a supermarket. He had chosen a quiet time. The choice of the time came before the arrival in the supermarket. In this example, one past action followed another. He filled the basket and went to the checkout. We can also use either when ... had done, or after ... did/had done. When he had filled the basket, he went to the checkout. After he had filled (OR After he filled) the basket, he went to the checkout. But when one short action comes straight after another, we use the past simple for both. When she opened the till, he snatched all the money out of it. Note the different meanings. When I switched the TV on, the programme started. I was just in time. When I switched the TV on, the programme had started. I missed the beginning. We can use the past perfect or the past simple with before or until. There is no difference in meaning. The man arrived at the store before it had opened/before it opened. The chairman didnt speak until he had heard/until he heard all the arguments. 19 Exercises 1 Past simple, continuous and perfect (A-D) Look at these sentences and then tick the right answer. ► David and Tom were talking together when a young woman spoke to them. Which took more time, a) what David and Tom said, or b) what the woman said? 1 Mike had put up the tent, but Harriet was still unloading things from the car. Which finished first, a) putting up the tent, or b) unloading? 2 Mark went home and switched off the computer. What did he do first, a) go home, or b) switch off the computer? 3 When Claire arrived, Henry was walking up and down. Which started earlier, a) Claire's arrival, or b) Henry's walking? 4 When Sarah had phoned the office, she drove to the hotel. Did she phone the office a) before, or b) after driving to the hotel? 2 Past simple and past perfect (D) Write the two sentences as one. Use when and the past perfect in either the first or the second part of the sentence. ► I took the book back to the library. I read it. / took the book back to the library when I'd read it. ► The students did the experiment. They wrote a report on it. When the students had done the experiment, they wrote a report on it. 1 Nick saved enough money. He bought a motor bike. 2 Mark put all the dishes away. He dried them. 3 I looked both ways. I pulled out into the road. 4 The golfers went into the clubhouse. They played the last hole. 3 Past simple, continuous and perfect (A-D) Daniel is telling the story of how he forgot his passport. Put the verbs into the correct form. (►) /(happened (it / happen) last August at the airport. A few weeks before, a group of us (1)………………. ....... (decide) to go to Greece together for a holiday. (2)………………… (we / wait) in the queue at passport control when suddenly (3)……………………(I / realize) that (4).................(I / forget) my passport. (5)……………………… (it / be) quite a shock. (6)………………………………… (I / hurry) to a phone and (7) ……………………….. (ring) my parents. (8)……………………………… (they / work) in the garden, but luckily my mother (9)....................................... (hear) the phone. (10) ................................... (they / find) the passport and immediately (11)……………….. ................ (drive) to the airport with it. (12)............………………….. (] / meet) them at the information desk. (13) ........................................ (we / have) no time to talk, but (14)……………….. ........... (I / say) goodbye to them earlier that morning. (15)…………………………… (I / run) all the way to the plane. I was just in time. When (16)………………………..(I / get) there, the passengers (17)…………………(sit) in their seats ready for take-off. When (18) (they / see) me, everyone (19)…………………….......... (start) clapping. 20 The past perfect continuous A Introduction David is talking about a situation in the past (Ifell and broke my leg). When we look back to something before this past time, we use the past perfect simple (see Unit 18) or the past perfect continuous. Past perfect simple: 1 had taken a bus into town. Past perfect continuous: / had been swimming in the pool We use the past perfect continuous for an action which happened over a period of time. The swimming went on for some time before David broke his leg. B Form The past perfect continuous is had been + an ing-form. / had been waiting ages, OR I'd been waiting ages. I had not been paying attention, OR / hadn't been paying attention. Was the ground wet? Had it been raining? C I had been doing or I had done? Compare the past perfect continuous and simple. OVER A PERIOD (had been doing) / found the calculator. I'd been looking for it for ages. Vicky felt tired because she'd been working all day. We are thinking of Vicky's work going on as she got tired. COMPLETE (had done) I finally bought a new calculator. I'd looked everywhere for the old one. Vicky felt pleased because she'd done so much work. We are thinking of Vicky's work as complete. We normally use the continuous with a phrase saying how long. When the company went bankrupt, it had been losing money for months. We normally use the simple form with a phrase saying how much/many. When the company went bankrupt, it had lost over a million pounds. We do not normally use the past perfect continuous for states (see Unit 7). NOT He had been-seeming unwell We also use the past perfect simple for states (see Unit 7). The old man had seemed unwell for some time before he died. D Comparison with other continuous forms Compare the present perfect continuous (has/have been doing) and the past perfect continuous. Vicky looks very upset. I think she's been crying. Vicky looked very upset. I thought she'd been crying. Compare the past continuous (was doing) and the past perfect continuous. When I phoned, Natasha was having a piano lesson. (I phoned during the lesson.) When I phoned, Natasha had been having a piano lesson. (I phoned after the lesson.) 20 Exercises 1 Form (B) Complete the conversation. Put in the past perfect continuous of the verbs. Rachel: How was your job interview? Vicky: Awful. I felt terribly nervous. (►) I'd been worrying (I / worry) about it all week. And I was tired because (1)……………………………………….. (I / work) on my project the night before. (2) .................................................. (I / not look) forward to the interview at all. Rachel: So what happened? Vicky: The woman interviewing me was half an hour late because (3)........ ……………...............................(she / deal) with an unexpected problem, she said. (4) ......................................................... (I / wait) ages, and I'd got even more nervous. Rachel: How did the interview go? Vicky: Well, I tried to sound confident. (5) ..........................………………….. (I / read) a book that said that's what you have to do in job interviews. But I don't know if I gave the right answers. 2 Form and use (A-B) Add a sentence with the past perfect continuous to explain why. Look at the pictures to find the reasons. ► Claire got burnt. She'd been lying in the sun. 1 Vicky looked upset........................................................................................……. 2 Henry was stopped by the police.................................................................. ……. 3 The children started a fire ............................................………………………….. 4 A young man was struck by lightning ..................................................................... Comparison with other tenses (C-D) Put in the correct form of the verbs. ► Tom could hear shouts from the flat next door. His neighbours were arguing (argue) again. 1 Emma went into the sitting-room. It was empty, but the television was still on. Someone..............................................(watch) it. 2 I ……… .............................. (play) tennis, so I had a shower. I was annoyed because I ………………. ................. (not win) a single game. 3 The walkers finally arrived at their destination. They ................ (walk) all day, and they certainly needed a rest. They .............................................. (walk) thirty miles. 4 When I saw Nick last week, he said he .............................................. (stop) smoking. But when I saw him two days later, he……………………………….. (smoke) a cigarette. He looked rather ashamed. 5 I really must go and see the dentist. One of my teeth .........................………….. (ache) for weeks. 6 When Melanie arrived at David's place, he......................... …………… . . (lie) on the sofa reading a detective novel. He ......... ……………………….. (buy) it at the second-hand bookshop, and he .......................................... (read) it for most of the afternoon. TEST 4 Past and perfect tenses (Units 16-20) Test 4A Read the conversation. Then look at the answers below and write the correct answer in each space. Tessa: Hello, Robert. I (►) haven't seen you for ages. Robert: Hello, Tessa. Great to see you. What have you (1)…………………………… doing lately? Tessa: (2)………………………….. just started a new job in computer software. Robert: You (3)……………………………. working for Tuffex Plastics when we last met. Tessa: That's right. I hadn't (4)……………………….. working there long before I got fed up. 1 (5)…………………….. ........realized what a horrible job it would be. But what about you? (6)…………………. ..............you found a job? Robert: Well, six months ago I (7) .........................................working for a car hire company, but then they (8)………… ..........................bankrupt. So I'm out of work now. (9)……….. ......................... been looking around for another job. Tessa: Well, I'm sure you'll find one soon. ► 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a) didn't a) been a) I'd a) did a) be a) didn't a) Did a) been a) go a) I'd b) hadn't b) had b) I'll b) had b) been b) hadn't b) Had b) had b) going b) I'll c) haven't c) has c) I'm c) have c) done c) haven't c) Have c) have c) gone c) I'm d) wasn't d) was d) I've d) were d) had d) wasn't d) Were d) was d) went d) I've Test 4B Write a second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► Susan had a green dress on. (wearing) Susan was wearing a green dress. 1 The doctor began work at six o'clock and is still working, (has) 2 Rupert didn't have his credit card, (forgotten) 3 I didn't want to go without taking a photo, (until) 4 Nancy has been writing the report. It is finished now. (written) 5 My wait in the queue has lasted forty minutes so far. (I) 6 When we arrived, everyone was on the dance floor, (dancing) 7 The computer has been mine for four years, (had) 8 In the middle of our lunch there was a knock at the door, (when) 9 Nigel felt sick from eating too many cakes, (because) Test 4C Write the sentences correctly. ► I like this CD. I've been having it for ages. I've had it for ages. 1 It was my first day back at work. I was on holiday. 2 I'm quite tired now. I play badminton 3 I had to sit down. I'd been havig a shock 4 You need a rest. How much have you been working? 5 The robbery happened at midday, Lots of people walked along the street outside. 6 My sister speaks good English. She is practising her English since last summer. 7 At last I have my qualification. :I've been passing my-exam. 8 Michelle looked really sunburnt. She'd lie in the sun-for-too long. 9 We got to the coach stop at nine yesterday. But the coach has already gone. Test 4D Complete the conversations. Put in the correct form of each verb. ► A: Did you buy (you / buy) anything at the antiques sale yesterday? B: No. / wanted (I / want) to buy some jewellery, but I'd left (I / leave) my credit card at home. 1 A: Are you still copying those addresses? B: No, that's all of them .............................................................(I / finish) now. 2 A: The train is never going to get here. B: How long ..........................................................(we / wait) now? A: At least half an hour..................………………………. (we / be) here since ten to five. 3 A: Did you have a nice chat with Tessa? B: No, not really. When ............................................ (we / drink) our coffee, ................................................ (she / hurry) off home. 4 A: It's terrible about that plane crash, isn't it? B: Yes, awful........................................................... (I / have) breakfast when ……………………………………………..(I / hear) the news. 5 A: So you sing in a rock band, do you? How long .........………………………(you / do) that? B: Oh, since I was sixteen. ...................... ………………….. (we / do) about a dozen concerts. 6 A: Do you know what Polly was so upset about yesterday? B: No, I don't. But I'm sure ……………………………………..(she / cry). Her eyes looked red. A: Perhaps ................................................... (she / have) some bad news. 7 A: The shooting was very frightening, I suppose. B: It certainly was. When we .........………………………………... (hear) the shot, we all .................................................. (throw) ourselves to the floor. 21 Review of present and past tenses A Introduction Study the verb forms. Claire is ready to go on safari. Present continuous: She is waiting for her guide. Present simple: She goes on holiday a lot. Present perfect: She has bought a safari suit. Present perfect continuous: She has been planning her trip for months. Past simple: She bought the suit last week. Past continuous: She was going past Harrods when she saw it in the window. Past perfect: She had already decided that she needed a safari suit. Past perfect continuous: She had been looking for one for a week or two. B I am doing or I do? (Unit 6) PRESENT CONTINUOUS PRESENT SIMPLE We use the present continuous for an action now, something we are in the middle of. / am writing a letter. Claire is wearing a safari suit. We're getting lunch now. We use the present continuous for a feeling over a short period of time. Vicky is liking her course much better this year. We use the present simple for repeated actions, things that happen again and again. ] write home every week. Tom never wears smart clothes. We usually get lunch at about one. We normally use the present simple for thought; and feelings, and for states and permanent facts. Claire likes holidays. Four times twelve makes forty-eight. We use the present simple for a permanent situation or routine. I usually get up quite late, We use the present continuous for a temporary situation or routine. I'm very busy at the moment, so I'm getting up early this week. C I have done or I did? (Units 14-15) PRESENT PERFECT PAST SIMPLE The present perfect tells us about the past and the present. They have locked the door. No one can get in. We use the present perfect for a state which has gone on up to the present. I've known him for ages. He's an old friend. We use the present perfect for actions in a period of time up to the present. / have seen the carnival several times. The past simple tells us about the past, a time which is finished. They locked the door at ten o'clock last night. We use the past simple for a state in the past, I knew him when we were at college together. We use the past simple for actions in the past, I saw the carnival several times as a child. D I have been doing or I have done? (Unit 17) PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS PRESENT PERFECT We use the present perfect continuous for an action over a period of time leading up to the present. We are thinking of the action going on. Daniel's tired. He's been working. I've been reading all afternoon. We've been staying here for a week/since Thursday. We use the present perfect simple for a complete action. We are thinking of the result. At least he's earned some money. I've read 200 pages. E I was doing or I did? (Unit 10) PAST CONTINUOUS PAST SIMPLE We use the past continuous for an action that we were in the middle of. / was reading the paper at half past ten. We use the past simple for a complete action in the past or for a past state. I left the house at half past ten. Vicky had a headache. We often use the past continuous and simple together when a shorter action (simple) comes in the middle of a longer one (continuous). We were looking for the coffee bar when we met Emma. But we use two past simple verbs for one action after another. When we saw Rachel, she waved to us. F I did or I had done? (Units 18-19) We use the past simple to talk about a past situation and the past perfect for things that happened earlier. I threw the magazine away. I'd finished with it. When Sarah found the letter, someone had already opened it. When the new people moved in, the house had been empty for a year. We can use when ... had done to say that one thing finished and then something else happened. When we'd paid the bill, we left the restaurant. But when one short action comes straight after another, we use the past simple for both. When the firework went off, the dog ran away. Compare these two sentences. When we arrived, the others all left. (We arrived and then they left.) When we arrived, the others had all left. (They left before we arrived.) G I had been doing or I had done? (Unit 20) We use these forms when we look back from a situation in the past. PAS! PERFECT CONTINUOUS PAST PERFECT We use the past perfect continuous for an action over a period of time. We are thinking of the action going on. Emma's hand ached because she'd been using the computer. When I finally served the meal, I'd been cooking for'hours. We use the past perfect simple for a complete action. We are thinking of the result, Her work looked really neat because she'd used the computer. I felt quite proud that I'd cooked a meal for eight people. 21 Exercises 1 Present tenses (A-D) Complete the sentences using the notes in brackets. The verbs can be present continuous (am doing), present simple (do) or present perfect (have done). ► 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 We bought this picture a long time ago. We've had it (we / have / it) for ages. Sarah finds her mobile phone very useful…………………………………… .. (she / use / it) all the time. Vicky doesn't know where her watch is………………………………….. (she / lose / it). We're in the middle of decorating our kitchen, so we can't cook any meals. ……………………………………..(we / get / them) from a take-away restaurant this week. Claire is on a skiing holiday………………………………….. (she / enjoy / it), she says on her postcard. The colour of this paint is absolutely awful .................……………………(I/hate/it). These figures certainly should add up………………………….. (I / check / them) several times already. Trevor and Laura like Scrabble...................... ………………………….. (they / play / it) most evenings. These flowers are dying ........................................................................ (you / not water / them) for ages. Present tenses (A-D) Read about each situation. What else do you say? Use the verb in brackets. ► You can't go out with a friend because you have a Saturday job. (work) I'm sorry. I work on Saturdays. 1 You have just met a friend you last saw months ago. (not see) Hello! How are you? .............................................................. 2 Someone has arranged to phone you at this time, and you're ready for the call, (wait) I have to stay by the phone.......................................................................................... 3 Your friend is wearing a very nice jacket you haven't seen before, (like) Oh, that's nice............................................................................................................................. 4 You are watching the snow fall. It started yesterday and is still falling, (snow) I can't believe it................................................................. 3 Present and past tenses (A-F) Read about each situation and then tick the right answer. ► When we were talking, Tom left the room. Which took longer, a) our conversation, or b) Tom's departure? 1 Mark has been a member of the golf club for two years. a) He joined the club two years ago and is still a member. b) He was a member of the club for two years but is not a member now. 2 Vicky is watching the weather forecast. The weather forecast a) hasn't started yet, b) has started but not finished, or c) is over. 3 I've switched off the burglar alarm. Do I think that the alarm a) is off, b) is on, or c) may be on or off? 4 I've been studying all afternoon, and I've got a headache. Am I thinking of a) how much I have learned, or b) the action going on for a long time? 5 We had already travelled some distance when the sun rose. Did our journey start a) before sunrise, b) at sunrise, or c) after sunrise? 6 I'm going to work by bus this week. a) 1 always go to work by bus. b) My routine is different for this week. 4 Present and past tenses (C-E) Put in a pronoun and the correct form of the verb. Use the past continuous (was doing), the past simple (did) or the present perfect continuous (have been doing). ► Mark: Sarah: 1 David: Melanie: 2 Sarah: Trevor: 3 Vicky: Rachel: 4 Harriet: Tom 5 David: Melanie: I rang at one, but you weren't in your office. No, / was having (have) lunch. You look tired. Yes, I expect I do……………………………………….. (work) all day. Is Laura at home? No,……………………………………… (go) out about half an hour ago. I haven't finished this letter yet. It must be a long letter. ...................................... ……………. (write) it since lunch-time. I see you've got some new neighbours. Yes, a young couple……………………………………….. (move) in last month. Did Tom drive you home? Yes,………………………. ....................... (stop) and offered me a lift while...........................................................(wait) for a bus outside the town hall. 5 Present and past tenses (A-G) Complete the conversation. Choose the correct form. Melanie: Nick: Melanie: Nick: Melanie: Nick: Melanie: Nick: How (►) are you getting/do you get on in your new job, Nick? Oh, so (1) you know/you're knowing about my job as a car salesman. (2) David's told/David told me yesterday. Well, I (3) haven't been/wasn't in the job long. (4) I started/I've started on Monday. And how many cars (5) have you been selling/have you sold so far? Well, none yet. Give me a chance. Up to now (6) I've been learning/I've learned all the time. David says you (7) had/were having a sports car once. I've still got it. (8) I had/I've had it for about five years. (9) I don't often drive/I'm not often driving it because (10) I don't like/I'm not liking getting it dirty. Normally ( 1 1 ) I ride/I'm riding my motor bike. And the car is expensive to run. 1 ( 1 2 ) bought/had bought it on impulse. I (13) was working/worked on a building site at the time. For several months before I bought it, (14) I'd done/I'd been doing overtime, and when (15) I'd been earning/I'd earned enough to buy a car, it was a really magical moment. Maybe you'd like a ride in it some time? Melanie: Oh, yes please. That would be lovely. 6 Present and past tenses (A-G) Complete the radio news report. Put in the correct forms of the verbs. Hello. This (►) is (be) Kitty Beamish. (1)…………………………….. (I / speak) to you from Oxford, where the finals of the World Quiz Championships will be held tomorrow. The favourite is Claude Jennings of Cornwall, the man who (2) ....................………………(know) everything. Twelve months ago no one (3) .......................................(hear) of Claude lennings, although (4)…………………………........(he / take) part in quiz competitions for years. Now suddenly he is a big star. So far this year (5)……………………………….. (he / answer) every single question correctly. And he is popular, too. When (6)……………………………….. (he / arrive) here two days ago, hundreds of fans (7)………………………………. (wait) at the station to welcome him. Since his arrival Claude (8)……………………… ....... (read) encyclopedias in his hotel bedroom. He is clearly the man to watch. And now back to the news desk. TEST 5 Present and past tenses (Unit 21) Test 5A Complete the conversations. Put in the correct form of each verb. ► A: Are you ready? B: I won't be a moment. I'm doing (I / do) my hair. 1 A: Could you tell me your address? B: Well,……………………………..(I / live) in a friend's house at the moment. Luckily..........……. .....................(I / find) a place of my own now, but I can't move in until next week. 2 A: Is this your CD? B: No, it isn't mine……………… ...................(I / think)………………(it / belong) to Peter. 3 A: Can I borrow your calculator, please? B: Well,…………………… ......... (I / use) it to work out these figures at the moment………………............... (I / want) to finish doing them, now that…………………………. (I / start). 4 A: Why can't you wash your dirty plates sometimes? ...........................………. (you / leave) them in the sink most of the time. B: OK, sorry. The last few weeks ................................... (I / have) so little time...........................................(I / rush) around all the time. Test 5B Read the story and write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. One day a man was (►) walking past a house in Bournemouth when he (1)………………………......a woman's voice shouting for help. The man (2) ...................…………. someone (3) probably trying to murder her. He ran to a phone box and (4) the police. The police came quite quickly, but by now the shouting had (5) . However, the man (6) ......... ……………………. quite sure that he (7)…………………………… heard cries for help. When the police (8)………………………….. on the door, there was no answer. So they broke down the door and went in. Inside the house was a woman who had just (9)………………………….. out of the shower. She explained to the police that she had (10)…………………………… singing along to the Beatles song 'Help!'. Test 5C Write a second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Begin with the word in brackets. ► Our trip to Africa was in October. (We ...) We went to Africa in October. 1 We've had ten hours of rain. (It...) 2 It's the right thing to do in my opinion. (I ...) 3 Our sofa is in a different place now. (We ...) 4 It was breakfast-time when Susan rang. (I ...) 5 Their game of badminton is always on Tuesday. (They ...) Test 5D Write the correct answer in each space. ► This isn't my first visit to London. I've been here before. a) I'm b) I've been c) I was 1 I've got my key. I found it when................................ for something else. a) I looked b) I've looked c) I was looking 2 Sorry, I can't stop now. ......................................... to an important meeting. a) I go b) I'm going c) I've gone 3 I can't get Tessa on the phone......................................... all afternoon. a) I'm trying b) I try c) I've been trying 4 The bank told me last week there was no money in my account. a) I'd spent b) I spent c) I was spending 5 There's a new road to the motorway. .......................................... it yesterday. a) They'd opened b) They opened c) They've opened it all. Test 5 E Some of these sentences are correct, and some have a word which should not be there. If the sentence is correct, put a tick (V). If it is incorrect, cross the unnecessary word out of the sentence and write it in the space. ? Martin has changed his mind about next weekend. V ? We were enjoyed the holiday very much. were 1 Nancy is practising on the piano. 2 It was lucky that we had been decided to buy our tickets in advance. 3 We were riding our bikes when suddenly I was felt a pain in my leg. 4 We are go camping for three weeks every summer. 5 They have planted some new trees last year. 6 I suddenly realized I had been walking in the wrong direction. 7 Did you know that Anna has been won a prize? 8 No one told me that the goods had arrived the week before. Test 5F Complete the news report. Put each verb into the correct form. The actress Vanessa Kemp (►) has disappeared (disappear). Yesterday she (I)……………….. ................(fail) to arrive at the Prince Charles Theatre in London's West End for her leading role in the comedy 'Don't look now!'. Ms Kemp, who (2)…………………………………(live) in Hampstead, (3)……………………………….. (leave) home at four o'clock yesterday afternoon for the theatre, a journey she (4)……………………………… (make) several times the week before. Two people who (5)……………...................... (walk) past her home at the time (6)……………………………….. (see) her leave. But no one (7)……………………………… (see) her since then. At half past seven she still (8)……………………. ........... (not / arrive) at the theatre. At eight o'clock the theatre manager had to break the news to the audience, who (9) ...................……. .......... (wait) patiently for the play to start. Since yesterday, theatre staff and friends (10)……………………………….. (try) to contact Ms Kemp, but they (II)………………………………….(have) no success so far. The police (12)……………………………… (take) the matter seriously, but they (13)........... ………………….. (believe) that she is unlikely to be in any danger. Her friends all (14) ....................................... (want) to hear from her soon. 22 Introduction to the future A Present, past and future Read this paragraph from Rachel's letter to her aunt and uncle. This is my last year at college, so I'll be leaving in June. And I've already got a job! In September I'm starting work at a bank in London. So I'll be free for most of the summer. I'm going to spend six weeks travelling around the US. My friend Vicky is coming with me. (She finishes college at the same time as me.) We're really looking forward to the trip. We might go to Canada too. Vicky has friends in Toronto. When we talk about the present or the past, we use verb forms to say what is happening now, what happened yesterday, and so on. Vicky has friends in Toronto. We know about things in the present and in the past because they are already real. But talking about the future is more of a problem. There is no single form in English that we can always use for the future. There are many different ways of talking about the future, depending on how we see a future event. It may be something that is fairly sure to happen, but on the other hand it may be just a plan or an intention, or it may be something that you think will happen but you can't be sure about. B Verb forms used for the future Here are some examples of verb forms used to express the future. Be going to > 24 I'm going to spend six weeks in the US. (an intention) Will > 23 A I'll be free for most of the summer, (neutral future) Present continuous > 26A I'm starting work in September, (an arrangement) Present simple > 26B She finishes college at the same time, (a timetable) Will be doing > 28 I'll be leaving in June, (in the course of events) Very often there is more than one possible form that could be used. She'll finish college in June. She finishes college in June. She's finishing college in June. She'll be finishing college in June. Rachel could use any of these in her letter. C Will We often use will as a neutral way of expressing the future, but it is not 'the future tense'. It is only one of the forms we can use. In some situations will is not the right word. After college I'm going to travel around the US. Here Rachel is saying what she intends to do in the future. We cannot use will here. D Being sure and unsure We cannot always be sure about the future. To show that we are unsure we can use might or could (see Unit 46). We might go to Canada. It could snow soon. To show how sure or unsure we are, we often use phrases like I'm sure, definitely, I expect, I (don't) think and probably. I'm sure it'll be all right. We're definitely going to be at the meeting. I expect everyone will be going home. Rachel will probably be late. I think I'm going to sneeze. I don't think Tom's coming tonight. 22 Exercises 1 Present, past and future (A-B) Rachel has received a letter from a friend of hers who left college last year. Find the sentences which refer to the future and write them below. I'm really enjoying my work at the store. I'm learning lots about the job. Soon they're moving me to another store - in Birmingham. They told me about it last week. I'll be leaving here at the end of the month. I feel a bit sad about that. Luckily they'll find a flat for me. The time is going very quickly. I've been here three months. The training programme finishes next summer. 1 like the work, and I want to stay with the company. They'll decide about that next year. I'm just hoping for the best. ► Soon they're moving me to another store — in Birmingham. 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 2 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3 ...................................................................................................................................... 2 Present and future (A-D) Say if the second sentence is about the present or the future. Look at the phrases of time such as at the moment and on Friday. ► I'm busy. I'm cooking a meal at the moment. present 1 I'm nervous. I'm cooking for ten people on Friday. 2 I don't want to go out. I might watch a video later. 3 There's football on TV tonight. I might watch it. 4 We're off at last. We arrive in New York at seven. 5 This train is never on time. We always arrive late. 3 Present and future (A-D) Read each pair of sentences and then answer the question about them. ► a) I'll see you on Thursday. b) I saw you on Thursday. Which sentence is about the future? a 1 a) I'm going to Manchester. I'm waiting for a connecting train. b) I'm going to get a train to Manchester, changing at Birmingham. Which is spoken during the journey? .................... 2 a) We'll know the results of the tests next week. b) We might know the results of the tests next week. Which sentence is more certain? ................... 3 a) I'm doing two exams this year. b) I'm doing some work at the moment. In which sentence has the action already started?... 4 a) What time do we arrive in Swansea? b) What time will we arrive in Swansea? Which question is more likely if you are travelling by car? 5 a) I'm eating at the Thai restaurant tonight. b) I'll eat at the Thai restaurant tonight. Which would you say if you've booked a table? 23 Will and shall We use will to say what we know or think about the future. Will here has a neutral meaning. It does not express the idea that we have already decided to do something or that we are planning something. B Will for instant decisions We also use will for an instant decision, when we decide on something or agree to do it more or less at the moment of speaking. I'm thirsty. I think I'll make some tea. NOT l make some-tea. You've left your computer on. ~ Oh, I'll go and switch it off. We must celebrate. I know, we'll have a party. I don't think I'll do any work tonight. I'm too tired. We also use it to order things. I'll have the ham salad, please. We also use will in offers and invitations (see Unit 51). Offer: I'll peel the potatoes. ~ Oh, thank you. Invitation: Will you come to lunch? ~ Yes, thank you. I'd love to. Promise: I'll pay you back next week. C The form of will The form is will or '11. The west will have rain tomorrow. You'll be late if you don't hurry. Will you be at home this evening? The world will end in the year 2050. The negative is will not or won't. The cost will not be more than £50. I won't have time for a meal. D Shall We can use shall for the future, but only in the first person, after I or we. / will be/I shall be on holiday in August. We will know/We shall know the results soon. But NOT Everyone shall know the results-seen. I will and I shall have the same meaning here, but shall is a little formal. Both I will and I shall can be shortened to I'll, which is pronounced /ail/. I'll be on holiday in August. (= I will OR I shall) Shall has other meanings. We can use it in offers and suggestions (see Unit 51). Offer: Shall I pack up your shopping for you? ~ Oh, thank you. Suggestion: Shall we all go out together? ~ Good idea. We do not use shall in American English (see page 377). 25 Will and be going to 28 Will be doing 29 A Will have done 144 Will in conditionals 23 Exercises 1 Will for the future and for instant decisions (A-B) Read the conversations. Which replies are statements about the future and which are instant decisions? ► What would you like? ~ I'll have an orange juice, please. decision 1 Shall we go out tonight? ~ I'll be too tired, I think. 2 We've lost a tennis ball. ~ I'll help you look for it. 3 I'm worried about the exam. ~ Oh, you'll be all right. 4 I haven't got any transport. ~ Oh, we'll give you a lift. 5 I must fix this shelf some time. ~ We'll be dead before then. 2 Instant decisions (B) Say what your decision is in these situations, or what you offer to do. Use these verbs: answer, carry, have, post, shut ► You and your friend have come into the room. The window is open, and it is cold. /'// shut the window. 1 The phone is ringing. You are the nearest person to it. 2 The choice on the menu is fish or chicken. You hate fish. 3 You are meeting a friend at the station. He has two suitcases. There's a bag, too. 4 Your friend has written a letter. You are going to walk into town past the post office. 3 Will and won't for the future (C) Use the notes to write about what will happen next weekend. ► it / be / warm / tomorrow It will be warm tomorrow. 1 Tom / watch / the match 2 Harriet's party / be / fun 3 Trevor / not put up / the shelves 4 Laura / be / annoyed 5 Andrew / study / all weekend 6 Rachel / not do / any work 4 Will and shall (A, D) Complete the conversation. Put in will or shall. Rachel: What (►) shall we do today? Vicky: It would be nice to go out somewhere. The forecast says temperatures (1) ......................................rise to thirty degrees. Jessica: (2) ...........................................we go for a walk? Rachel: That sounds a bit boring. What about the seaside? We could get a bus. Jessica: How much (3) ........................................it cost? I haven't got very much money. Vicky: It isn't far. It doesn't cost much. Jessica: Everywhere (4) ........................................... be so crowded today because it's a holiday. The journey (5) .......................................... take ages. Rachel: Come on, Vicky. (6) we leave Jessica behind if she's going to be so miserable? 24 Be going to A Intentions We use be going to to talk about something we have decided to do (an intention). David intends to climb up the ladder. Here are some more examples. I'm going to watch the next programme. Emma is going to do an experiment this afternoon. Rachel and Vicky are going to spend six weeks in the State:. We can use I'm not going to for a refusal. I'm sorry, but I'm not going to walk half a mile in the ram. (= 1 don't want to/I'm not willing to walk.) The present continuous can have a very similar meaning to be going to. We can often use either form (see Unit 26A). I'm going to visit my friend at the weekend. I'm visiting my friend at the weekend. We do not use will here. We can use be going to with the verb go (We're going to go out this evening), but the present continuous is more usual. We're going out this evening. B Form We use the present tense of be + going to + a verb. They're going to move house. Matthew is going to play squash. Vicky isn't going to have any lunch. We aren't going to complain. Is Daniel going to apply for the job? ~ / think he is. When are you going to pay this bill? ~ I don't know. I can't at the moment. C Predictions We also use be going to for a prediction based on the present situation, when we can see that something is going to happen. The ladder is moving, so David is going to fall. Here are some more examples. My sister is going to have a baby in March. It's nearly nine now. We're going to be late. Do you think it's going to rain? 25 Will and be going to > 29B Was going to 24 Exercises i Intentions (A-B) Look at the pictures and say what is going to happen. Use these verbs: answer, catch, have, hit, light Use these objects: the ball, a bath, a bus, the firework, the phone ► They're going to have a bath. 1 …………………………………………………….. 2 ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3 ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 4 ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 2 Form(B) Put in the verbs with be going to. Laura: What are you doing with that camera? Trevor: (►) I'm going to take (I / take) it to work. (1)…………………………………….. (I / lend) it to Phil. (2) ................................................ (he / take) a few photos with it. Laura: Why can't he buy his own camera? Trevor: He's got one, but it isn't working properly. (3)..........……………………………… (it / be) a while before he can get it repaired. Laura: Well, how long (4)......................................…………… (he / keep) ours? When (5)………………………………………. (we / get) it back? Trevor: (6)……………………………………….. (he / have) it over the weekend. (7) ...................................................... (we / get) it back on Monday. Laura: Well, I hope (8)………………................................... ( i t / not / get) damaged. 3 Predictions (B-C) What would you say in these situations? Use these words: be sick, crash, get wet, lose, not stop, rain ► The sky is full of dark clouds. /(s going to rain. 1 Now it's starting to rain. There's nowhere to shelter, and you haven't got an umbrella. 2 You feel awful. There's a terrible feeling in your stomach. 3 You are playing Scrabble. The game is nearly over and you are 100 points behind. 4 You can see a plane coming down. It's out of control and falling to the ground. 5 You are waiting for a train. There's one coming, but you don't know if it's the one you want. It's travelling very fast. 25 Will and be going to A Introduction Emma: Aunt Joan: Emma: Aunt Joan: It's my birthday soon. I'll be twenty next Friday. Oh, really? Are you going to have a party? I'm going to have a meal in a restaurant with a few friends. That'll be nice. WILL BE GOING TO Will has a neutral meaning. We use it to talk about facts in the future. I'll be twenty next Friday. The spacecraft will come down in the Pacific Ocean tomorrow morning. We use be going to for an intention, something we have already decided to do. We're going to have a meal. Tom is going to sell his car. Will does not express an intention. It's her birthday. She's going to have a meal with her friends, NOT She'll have a meal. But we often use be going to for an intention and will for the details and comments. We're all going to have a meal. There'll be about ten of us. ~ Oh, that'll be nice. As well as be going to, we can use the present continuous (see Unit 26A). We're going to drive/We're driving down to the South of France. ~ That'll be a long journey. take two days. We'll arrive on Sunday. Yes, it'll B Decisions and intentions WILL BE GOING TO We use will for an instant decision or agreement to do something. There's a postbox over there. I'll post these letters. You still haven't put those shelves up, Trevor. ~ OK, I'll do it tomorrow. Trevor is deciding now. Be going to means that we have already decided. I'm going out. I'm going to post these letters. You still haven't put those shelves up, Trevor. ~ I know. I'm going to do it tomorrow. Trevor has already decided. C Predictions WILL BE GOING TO We can use will for a prediction about the future. We use be going to for a prediction when we see from the present situation what is going to happen in the future. There isn't a cloud in the sky. lt's going to be a lovely day. This bag isn't very strong. It's going to break. I think United will win the game. One day people will travel to Mars. It is often possible to use either form in a prediction. For example, we can also say I think United are going to win the game. Usually be going to is a little more informal and conversational than will. 25 Exercises Will and be going to (A-B) Complete the conversations. Put in will or be going to with the verbs. ? Vicky: Have you got a ticket for the play? Daniel: Yes, I'm going to see (see) it on Thursday. ? Harriet: The alarm's going. It's making an awful noise. Mike: OK, I'll switch (switch) it off. 1 Daniel: Did you buy this book? Matthew: No, Emma did. She……………………………………… (read) it on holiday. 2 Laura: Would you like tea or coffee? Sarah: Oh, I………….. ..........................................(have) coffee, please. 3 Trevor: I'm going to miss a good film on TV because I'll be out tonight. Laura: I ............................................................(video) it for you, if you like. 4 Rachel: I'm just going out to get a paper. Emma: What newspaper ............................................... ………. (you / buy)? 2 Will and be going to (A-C) What would you say? Use will or be going to. ► You want to express your intention to look round the museum. Your friend: Do you have any plans for this afternoon? You: Yes, I'm going to look round the museum. 1 You hate dogs. Dogs always attack you if they get the chance. Your friend: That dog doesn't look very friendly. You: It's coming towards us .................................... 2 You predict the landing of aliens on the earth in the next ten years. Your friend: All this talk about aliens is complete nonsense, isn't it? You: Is it? I think ......................................... 3 You know that your friend's sister has decided to get married. Your friend: Have you heard about my sister? You: Well, I heard that ........................................ 4 You suddenly decide you want to invite Ilona for a meal. Your friend: Did you know Ilona will be in town next weekend? You: No, I didn't. .................................................... 3 Will and be going to (A-C) Complete the news report about the village of Brickfield. Use will or be going to. Sometimes either is possible. We have learned this week that the local council has plans for Westside Park in Brickfield. The council (►) is going to sell (sell) the land to a builder, Forbes and Son. The plans are all ready. '(1)…………………………………….. (we / build) fifty houses,' said Mr Forbes. 'In two years' time everything (2)……………………………………………….. (be) finished. I'm sure people (3)………………………………….. (like) the houses. Most of them (4)……………………………… ....... (be) for young families. And we intend to take care of the environment. (5)…………………………………… (we / not / cut) down all the trees, only a few of them.' But people living near the park are angry. 'This is a terrible idea. We're all against it,' said Mrs Mary Brent. '(6)……………………………………. (we / have) a protest march on Saturday. I expect everyone in Brickfield (7)………………............................... (be) there. We've reached our decision. (8)……………………………….. ..............(we / stop) this plan.' 26 Present tenses for the future A The present continuous for arrangements Tom: Nick: Are you doing anything this evening? Yes, I'm going to an ice hockey match. The Tigers are playing the Kings. I bought my ticket yesterday. We use the present continuous for what someone has arranged to do in the future. Here Nick has arranged to go to the match. (He has bought a ticket.) Here are some more examples. I'm meeting Harriet at six o'clock. David is coming round later on. We're having a party tomorrow. Sarah is going to Paris next week. We also use the present continuous to talk about things happening now (see Unit 4). Present: We're having a party at the moment. Future: We're having a party tomorrow. Here the phrase of time shows whether we mean the present or the future. But sometimes there is no phrase of time, as when Nick says The Tigers are playing the Kings. Here it is clear from Tom's question that the conversation is about a future event. The present continuous for the future and be going to (Unit 24A) have similar meanings. We're having a party next week. (We have made the arrangements.) We're going to have a party next week. (We intend / We have decided to have one.) Often we can use either form. I'm meeting/I'm going to meet Harriet at six o'clock. B The present simple for a timetable Mark: Sarah: What time does your train leave tomorrow? Seven twenty-three in the morning. It gets into Paris at eleven twenty-three. We can use the present simple for the future when we are talking about a timetable, usually a public one such as a train timetable. The train leaves at seven twenty-three tomorrow morning. The match starts at half past seven. Next Friday is the thirteenth. I've got the tour details here. We spend three days in Rome. Compare the present simple for repeated actions (see Unit 6A). The train leaves at seven twenty-three every morning. Be to and be about to We use be to for a future event that is officially arranged. It is often used in news reports. The Queen is to visit Portugal in November. The Student Games are to take place in Melbourne next year. We could also use the present continuous here. The Queen is visiting Portugal in November. We use be about to for the very near future. The plane is at the end of the runway. It is about to take off. Do you want to say goodbye to our visitors? They're about to leave. 26 Exercises 1 The present continuous (A) Read the conversation and say if the verb refers to the present or the future. Mark: (►) What are you reading, Claire? Claire: Oh, it's a guidebook to Brazil. (1) I'm going there next month. (2) My sister and I are having a holiday there. (3) I_m really looking forward to it. (4) We're spending three weeks in Rio. (5) So I'm finding out about all the things we can do there. ► present 3 1 2 4 5 2 The present continuous for arrangements (A) For each situation write a sentence with the present continuous. Use the verbs in brackets. ► Mike and Harriet have accepted an invitation to Tom's party next week, (go) They're going to Tom's party next week. 1 Laura has agreed to be in the office on Saturday, (work) 2 Claire has just bought a plane ticket to Cairo dated 15 May. (fly) 3 Mark has arranged a meeting with his boss at four o'clock this afternoon, (see) 4 Matthew and Daniel have booked a tennis court for tomorrow afternoon, (play) 3 Present tenses for the future (A-B) Put the verbs into the present continuous or the present simple. Emma: (►) Are you doing (you / do) anything tonight? Matthew: Yes, (1)…………………………….. (1 / go) to the station to meet my friend Richard. (2)……………………………… (he / stay) here for the weekend, remember? His train (3)…………………............... (get) in at eight fifteen. Emma: Oh, of course. I'd forgotten about that. Matthew: Maybe we'll see you later. What (4)…………………………….. (you / do) tonight? Emma: Oh, (5)…………………………… (I / go) to the cinema with Vicky and Rachel and a couple of other people. The film (6)…………………………… (finish) quite early, so (7).........................................(we / go) to a pizza place afterwards. 4 Be to and be about to (C) Complete these sentences on the news. Some are spoken by the newsreader in the studio and some by reporters on the spot. Use be to or be about to with the verbs in brackets. ? The new museum is to open (open) in the autumn. ? The Prime Minister is at the microphone now. He is about to start (start) speaking. 1 The leading runner is nearly there now. She (win) the race. 2 Taxes………………. ................... (go) up from next April. 3 The US President ................................. (visit) Ireland in the new year. 4 The riot isn't over yet, but the police are here. They……………………………….. (move) in. 5 The talks on world trade ...................................... (take) place later this year. 27 When I get there, before you leave, etc A Introduction Mark: Did I tell you I've got a meeting in Glasgow at nine o'clock tomorrow morning? I'm driving up there overnight. Sarah: You're going to drive all through the night? You're crazy. You'll be exhausted before you arrive. Why don't you take a train? Mark: I'll be OK. I'll need the car while I'm there. I have to visit some companies in the area. I can sleep when I get home. Study these examples. You'll be exhausted before you arrive, NOT before you'll arrive I'll need the car while I'm there, NOT while I'll be there I can sleep when I get home, NOT when-I'll get-home Each of the sentences has a linking word of time, e.g. before, while or when. The sentences are about the future, about Mark's trip to Glasgow. But after the linking words we use the present simple (arrive, am, get), not will We can start the sentence with a linking word. When I get home, I can sleep. B Linking words We use the present simple for the future after these linking words of time: after, as, as soon as, before, by the time, until, when, while. I'm starting a job in sales after I finish college. As soon as you hear any news, will you let me know? I must get to the bank before it closes. They'll have stopped serving meals by the time we get to the restaurant. We also use the present simple for the future after if (see Unit 144). If you come in late tonight, please don't make a noise. C Present perfect After a linking word of time, we can often use the present perfect for the future. I'm starting a job in sales after I've finished college. As soon as you've heard any news, will you let me know? Compare after I finish college (see B). The meaning is the same. But sometimes there is a difference in meaning between the present simple and the present perfect. When I see the report, I'll make some notes. (I'll do both at the same time.) When I've seen the report, I'll make some notes. (I'll see it and then make notes.) D Present continuous We can also use the present continuous for the future, especially after when and while. When I'm boating along the canal next week, I might be able to relax. Mark is going to listen to music while he's driving to Scotland. 26 Present tenses for arrangements and timetables 27 Exercises 1 When I gat there, before you leave, etc (A-B) Comment on the situations. Start each sentence with when and the present simple. ► Claire: I have to call at the travel agency. I'm going to get some holiday brochures. When Claire calls at the travel agency, she's going to get some holiday brochures. 1 Mark: I want to see the boss. I'm going to discuss my problem. 2 Rachel: I'm going to use the computer later. I'm going to send an e-mail. 3 Tom: I'm visiting David in hospital. I'm going to tell him about United's win. 4 Matthew: I'll be in town tomorrow. I might buy some new trainers. 2 When I get there, before you leave, etc (A-B) Mark and Sarah are continuing the conversation in 27A. Put in the verbs. Use will or the present simple. Sarah: If (►) you take (you / take) a train, (►) it'll be (it / be) much more comfortable. If (1) ................................ (you / need) a car, you can hire one when (2)………………………………..(you / get) to Glasgow. Mark: If (3)…………………………….. (I / hire) a car, (4)…………………………….. (it / be) too complicated. I'd rather take my own. Sarah: It's too dangerous. You might fall asleep on the motorway. Mark: I won't fall asleep. I can play loud music. Anyway, (5)……………………………… (I / get) there much quicker when (6) .......... ………………….. (there / be) no traffic on the road. As soon as (7)……………………… (I / arrive), (8)…………………………………. (I / ring) you, I promise. Sarah: (9)…………………………….. (I / be) worried until (10)…………………………… (I/hear) from you. But don't ring before (11)…………………………….. (I / be) awake in the morning. Mark: (12)…………………………(I / lie) down for a couple of hours before (13)……………………………….(I/go). Sarah: Good idea. (14)……………………………… (you / be) exhausted tomorrow if (15)………………………(you / not / get) some sleep this evening. 3 Present perfect and continuous (C-D) loin each pair of sentences using the word in brackets. ? You can apply for a better job soon. But you need to have more experience first, (when) You can apply for a better job when you've had more experience. ? I'm going to listen to this tape. I'll be travelling on the motorway tomorrow, (as) I'm going to listen to this tape as I'm travelling on the motorway tomorrow. 1 You shouldn't decide now. You need to think about it first, (until) 2 I'll think of you next week. I'll be lying on the beach, (when) 3 We can leave in a minute. I need to pay the bill first, (as soon as) 4 We can discuss it later. We'll be sitting on the plane together, (while) 5 You can use the computer in a minute. I'll have finished with it soon, (when) TEST 6 The future with will, be going to and present tenses (Units 23-27) Test 6A Put in the missing words. Use one word only in each space. ► I don't want a steak. I think I'll have the chicken. 1 There's a fireworks display tomorrow. Janet is ..........................to watch it. 2 We're at that table in the corner............................................you join us? 3 I'm seeing the boss this afternoon. But I must study this report before I ………………………….. her. 4 There will be drinks at the reception, but there will ................................. be any food. 5 The European heads of state are………………………….. meet in Brussels on 3 October. 6 It's a lovely day. ..........................................we go for a walk? 7 My birthday ......................................ona Sunday next year. 8 My brother is engaged. He's ..........................................married in June. 9 You won't be allowed to go to your seat after the play .................. …………........started. 10 Martin's got his coat on. I think he's ....................................... to go out. Test 6B Write the sentences correctly. ► I'm hungry. I think I-have-something- to-eat. I think I'll have something to eat. 1 You say you're getting a coach at nine. What time is it getting-to-London? 2 I'll give Polly the news. I'll tell her when I'll see her this evening. 3 Rupert looks really tired. He's about -felling-asleep. 4 We've arranged to go out. We meet in town-later. 5 I'm going to Spain next week. I-send-you-a-postcard. 6 I'm going to get to the airport early. I can-read-a book--while I'll be waiting. 7 I feel a bit tired, I go to lie-down. 8 Why not come to the party? All your-friends-shall be there. 9 There's been a bomb warning. No one can go into the-building until-the-police-will-have searched-it, Test 6C Read the news report and write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. The Maxi-Shop company is (►) going to build a huge new shopping centre on the edge of Millingham, it was announced yesterday. There (1)................................. be at least three hundred shops, including some big department stores. When the project (2)…………………………… complete, there (3) be hundreds of new jobs for local people. But not everyone is happy. 'We're (4) to fight this plan,' said a spokesperson for the local Environment Group.'|us think what is going (5)…………………………….. happen to our countryside. When shopping malls (6)…………………………….. covered the whole country, there (7)………………………………. be no green fields left. So we're (8)………………………………. a protest meeting tomorrow evening at the town hall. It (9)…………………………….. at half past seven.' Owners of shops in the town centre are also unhappy. 'The new centre (10)……………………. ............ take our customers away,' said one of them. Test 6D Look at the answers below and write the correct answer in each space. ► A: Let's go to the carnival, shall we? B: Yes, good idea. I expect it'll be fun. a) it'll be b) it's c) it's being 1 A: Could I have a word with you, please? B: Sorry, I'm in a big hurry. My train...................................... in fifteen minutes. a) is going to leave b) leaves c) will leave 2 A: Have you decided about the course? B: Yes, I decided last weekend. ................................................... for a place. a) I apply b) I am to apply c) I'm going to apply 3 A: I'm trying to move this cupboard, but it's very heavy. B: Well, ............................................... you, then. a) I help b) I'll help c) I'm going to help 4 A: Is the shop open yet? B: No, but there's someone inside. I think ............................................................ a) it opens b) it's about to open c) it will open 5 A: Do you mind not leaving your papers all over the table? B: Oh, sorry. I'll take them all with me when ............ a) I go b) I'll go c) I'm going 6 A: It's a public holiday next Monday. B: Yes, I know. .......................................................... anything special? a) Are you doing b) Do you do c) Will you do Test 6E Write the sentences using a future form of the verb. Use the word in brackets. ► Express your instant decision to take a taxi. (I'll) /'// take a taxi. 1 Express your intention to have a rest, (going) 2 Express the idea that the timetable shows the start of term on 6 September, (starts) 3 Predict a world war in five years' time, (there) 4 Express the idea that you and ludy have arranged a game of tennis for tomorrow, (playing) 5 Give your prediction of a probable fall in prices, (probably) 6 Warn your passenger about the car crashing, (going) 28 Will be doing A Introduction Rachel: Would you like to come to our party tomorrow, Andrew? Andrew: Er, thanks for the invitation, but I've got lots of work at the moment. I'll be working all day tomorrow. Rachel: You won't be working on Saturday evening, surely. Come on, Andrew, take a break. We'll be starting at about ten o'clock. We can use will be + an ing-form (the future continuous) to talk about future actions. There are two different uses. B Will be doing for continuous actions We use the future continuous for an action over a period of time. It means that at some time in the future we will be in the middle of an action. Andrew can t go to the party. He'll be working all day tomorrow. I'll be out at three o'clock. I'll be playing golf. When the men leave the building, the police will be waiting for them. What will we be doing in ten years' time, I wonder? Compare the past continuous (Unit 9), present continuous (Unit 4) and future continuous. Past: This time last week we were sitting on the beach. Present: At the moment we're sitting on the beach. Future: This time next week we'll be sitting on the beach. Compare will do and will be doing in these sentences. The band will play when the President enters. (The President will enter and then the band will play.) The band will be playing when the President enters. (The band will start playing before the President enters.) C Will be doing for single actions We also use will be + an ing-form for an action which will happen in the course of events because it is part of a plan or part of a schedule of future events. The party will be starting at ten o'clock, (part of the evening's events) The ship will be sailing soon, (part of our journey) More than one form is often possible. Will (Unit 23) or the present continuous (Unit 26A) often have a very similar meaning. The visitors will be arriving/will arrive/are arriving later. We often use the future continuous for something that will happen as part of a routine. I'll call in and see you tomorrow afternoon. I'll be passing your house. It's on my way home from work. Trevor and Laura will be cleaning the house tomorrow. They always do it on Sunday. We can also use will be + an ing-form to ask about someone's plans. Will you be going anywhere near a chemist's this morning? ~ Yes, why? ~ Could you get me some aspirin, please? ~ Yes, of course. How long will you be using this cotnputer? ~ You can have it in a minute. 28 Exercises 1 Will be doing (B) Complete the conversation. Put in a pronoun and the future continuous form of the verb. Daniel: I'm going to go into business when I leave college. Five years from now (►) I'll be running (I / run) a big company. I expect (1)…………………………….. (I / earn) lots of money. Vicky: I don't know what (2)……………………………… (I / do). What about you, Natasha? What (3).............................................. (you / do), do you think? Natasha: I'm too lazy to do any work. I intend to marry someone very rich. (4)………………………………. (I / give) dinner parties all the time. We'll have a cook (5)………………….. ........... (who / do) all the work, of course. And you'll both get invitations. Vicky: You're joking, aren't you, Natasha? I expect (6)………………………………..(you / play) in an orchestra. That's what you really want to do, isn't it? 2 Will be doing (C) Put in the answers. People are saying what they will be doing as part of their routine. ► David: When are you going to the club, do you know? (Nick goes to the club every Friday.) Nick: I'll be going there next Friday. 1 Vicky: Are you likely to see Ilona in the near future? (Emma sees Ilona every day.) Emma: ............................................................................................................. tomorrow. 2 Claire: Are you going to France again soon? (Henry goes to France every summer.) Henry: ............................................................................................................. 3 Jessica: When are you going to play badminton again? (Matthew plays badminton every weekend.) Matthew:............................................................................................................. 4 Andrew: When are you next having lunch in the canteen? (Daniel has lunch in the canteen every day.) Daniel: ............................................................................................................. 3 Will be doing (C) You want to ask a friend to do something for you or to let you do something. Find out if it is convenient for your friend. Use the verbs in brackets. ► You want to have a look at your friend's magazine tonight, (read) Willyou be reading your magazine tonight? 1 You want your friend to take your library book back today, (go to) 2 You want your friend to send your best wishes to Vicky soon, (write to) 3 You want to use your friend's calculator this afternoon, (use) 4 You want your friend to give a photo to Daniel tomorrow, (see) 5 You want your friend to give you a lift to the festival, (drive) 6 You want your friend to give a message to her sister soon, (phone) 29 Will have done and was going to We use will have + a past participle (the future perfect) for something that will be over in the future. Sarah is thinking of a future time (half past eight). At half past eight she will be able to say 'I have finished'. Here are some more examples. / like looking at these pictures, but I'll have had enough by lunch-time. Trevor and Laura will have lived here for four years next April. This chess game is going to last ages. They won't have finished it until midnight. Will you have read this book by the time it's due back to the library? ~ Yes. I'll have finished it by then. We often use the future perfect with expressions of time such as by lunch-time, until midnight, before then, by the time you have to take it back. We can use be going to in the past tense to express an intention in the past. Trevor intended to put the shelves up yesterday. Often the intended action did not happen. In fact Trevor did not put the shelves up. Here are some more examples. / was going to tidy the flat, but I didn't have time. Daniel wasn't going to spend any money, but he saw a jacket he just had to buy. The girls left early. They were going to catch the eight o'clock train. So you went to the airport without a ticket. Where were you going to fly to? The woman walked away just as I was going to speak to her. (just as = at the moment when) We can also use was going to for a prediction in the past. / knew something was going to go wrong with the plan. Would has a similar meaning (see Unit 134C). / knew something would go wrong with the plan. 29 Exercises 1 Will have done (A) Paul wants to be an artist. He's reading about a famous artist called Winston Plummer. Winston Plummer was a great artist, who had a wonderful career. He won lots of prizes before he was twenty. By the age of twenty-five he had had his own exhibition. He was the subject of a TV documentary by the time he was thirty. By the age of thirty-five he had become world-famous. He made millions of pounds from his pictures before he was forty. Paul is daydreaming about his own future career. What is he thinking? ► I hope /'// have won lots of prizes before I'm twenty. 1 Perhaps …………………………………………………............ my own exhibition by the age of twenty-five. 2 I wonder if ......................................................................................... by the time I'm thirty. 3 Maybe ………………………………………………………………………….by the age of thirty-five. 4 I hope ...................................................................................................................... by the age of forty. 2 Will have done (A) How good is your maths? Can you work out the answers? ► It's quarter to six. Melanie is putting something in the oven. It needs to be in the oven for an hour and a half. When will it have cooked? It will have cooked at quarter past seven. 1 It's seven o'clock in the evening, and Andrew is starting to write an essay. He writes one page every fifteen minutes. He plans to finish the essay at midnight. How many pages will he have written? He will have written ............................... pages. 2 It's Monday morning, and Sarah is travelling to work. It's twenty miles from her home to the office. How far will she have travelled to and from work by the time she gets home on Friday? 3 Matthew is doing press-ups — one every two seconds. How many will he have done after five minutes? 3 Was going to (B) Complete the sentences. They are all about being just too late. Use was/were going to with these verbs: go, get, see, pick ► The train left just as Mike was going to get on it. 1 I'm afraid the shop closed just as we……………………………….in. 2 The phone stopped ringing just as Melanie ........……………........ it up. 3 We …………………. ................ a film about the Mafia, but the tickets were sold out. 4 Was going to (B) Trevor is always making excuses for not doing things. Complete his sentences. ► put up the shelves / not have any screws Sorry. I was going to put up the shelves, but I didn't have any screws. 1 paint the door / not feel very well Sorry. ...................................................................................................... 2 repair the lamp / forget Oh, yes. 3 wallpaper the bedroom / not have time Well,............................................................................................................. 30 Review of the future A Introduction CLAIRE IS TALKING TO SARAH OUTSIDE THE TRAVEL AGENT'S. I'm going to New York next week. I'm about to pick up my ticket. I'm going to do some shopping on Fifth Avenue. I need some new clothes, and I'll be buying some Christmas presents, too. I'm only there for two days, so if II be a big rush. There are many different ways of talking about the future in English. Often more than one form is possible. I'll be buying some Christmas presents, too. I'm going to buy some Christmas presents, too. B Talking about the future How we express future time depends on how we see a future event. Here are some ways of talking about what we think will happen in the future. The neutral future A prediction A prediction based on the present A less certain prediction The very near future A future action over a period Something that will be over in the future The sun will rise at 5.45 am tomorrow. Claire's trip will be a big rush. Claire's trip is going to be a big rush. I'm going to be sick! I think it'll be cold in New York. It's probably going to be cold in New York. Claire is about to pick up her ticket. Claire will be shopping non-stop for two days. The sales will have finished by Saturday. Intentions and plans We often want to talk about our decisions and intentions and what we plan to do in the future. It's a lovely coat. It fits perfectly. An instant decision (deciding now) Yes, I'll buy it. An intention (something already decided) I'm going to do some shopping. I think I'll buy this hat, too. A less certain decision or intention I might go to a show. I was going to buy a guidebook, but I forgot. A past intention I'm flying to New York next week. An arrangement I'll be buying some presents, too. In the course of events The President is to address the nation tonight. An official arrangement I'm in New York for two days next week. A timetable 30 Exercises 1 Will, will be doing and will have done (B) Complete the live news report. Put in will and the simple, continuous or perfect form of the verb. The Quiz Marathon (►) will begin (begin) in five minutes. (1)…………………………… (it / be) a big test for the World Quiz Champion, Claude Jennings, (2)……………………………. (who / answer) questions from a group of quiz writers. Claude (3) ............................………. ... (answer) their questions for a very long time. In fact, (4)………………………….. ................ (he / still / give) answers when the rest of us are in bed tonight. Claude hopes that after 24 hours (5)........... …………………….. (he / reply) to about seventeen thousand questions. No meal breaks are planned, so (6)…………………………….. (he / not / eat) anything. If all goes well, his name (7)............................................ (be) in the next Guinness Book of Records. Claude has also got a number of sponsors, and by tomorrow (8) ......................................... (he / earn) at least £10,000 for charity. Well, (9)………………………………. (we / return) this afternoon for news of how Claude is getting on. We think that by then (10)……………………………. (he / get) some way past the five thousandth question. 2 The future (B-C) What do these people say? Pay special attention to the underlined words. ► Tom is predicting a win for United in their next game. Tom: United will win their next game. 1 Andrew intends to get up early tomorrow. Andrew: I .......................................................................................................................... 2 Vicky's train timetable says 'Arrival 10.30'. Vicky: The train ................................................................................................... 3 Daniel has arranged to see his bank manager tomorrow. Daniel: ………………………………………………………… 4 Rachel will go out in the very near future. Rachel: …………………………………….. 5 There's a crowd of demonstrators in the main square of the capital. The police are arriving. Reporter Kitty Beamish is predicting trouble. Kitty:………………………………………………………….. 3 The future (B-C) Complete the conversation. In each sentence choose the best form of the verb to express the future. Usually more than one answer is possible. Mark: Hello, Claire. Sarah tells me (►) you're going (you /go) to New York. Claire: Yes, (1) ……………………………….. (I / spend) a couple of days there next week. (2) ……………………………… (I / look) round the shops. Mark: (3) ……………………………… (that / be) exciting. Claire: Exhausting, you mean. I think (4) …………………………….. (I / be) pretty tired when I get back. Mark: (5) …………………………… (you / stay) with friends? Claire: No, (6) ........................................... (I / stay) at a hotel near Central Park. But (7) ……………………………… (I / see) my friends. (8) …………………………… (I / go) to their apartment for a meal one evening. And it isn't definite yet, but (9) ……………….................. (we / see) a show. Mark: And when (10).............................................. (you / leave)? Claire: My flight (11)…………………………. .......(be) on Tuesday morning. Mark: OK, (12) ……………….. ................. (I / see) you when you get back then. Test 7 The future (Units 23-30) Test 7A Read the telephone conversation. Then look at the answers below and write the correct answer in each space. Amy: When (►) will I see you again? Simon: I don't know. I'm (1) ............ ……………....... to be busy this week. And I'll (2)……………. ...................... going to London on Saturday. Amy: Oh. But you (3)……………………………. be here for my party, won't you? Simon: No, I (4)…………………………… get back until Sunday evening. Amy: 1(5)………………………… ... going to invite you. Simon: Well, I'm sorry I can't come. Amy: What (6)……………………. ..........you doing in London? Simon: Oh, I'm just going (7) ..........................................see one or two people. Look, I must go. I'm cooking something that I think is (8) ... to boil over. ► a) am b) do c) going d) will 5 a) be b) have c) was d) wi 1 a) being b) going c) shall d) will 6 a) are b) going c) to d) wi! 2 a) be b) do c) for d) to 7 a) be b) for c) is d) to 3 a) are b) do c) was d) will 8 a) about b) might c) probably d) wi] 4 a) about b) aren't c) be d) don't Test 7B Some of these sentences are correct, and some have a word which should not be there. If the sentence is correct, put a tick (/). If it is incorrect, cross the unnecessary word out of the sentence and write it in the space. ? They're probably going to knock the building down. V ? We are be going to get a dog soon. be 1 The bus is leaves at eight twenty. 2 The doors of the theatre are about to open. 3 The meeting will be start at half past seven. 4 The festival is for to take place in June. 5 My friend will be calling here tomorrow morning. 6 We were going to eat in the restaurant, but it was full. 7 I have to register for my course before the classes will begin. 8 I will to have finished lunch by two o'clock. Test 7C Put in a form of the verb. Use the future continuous (will be doing), the future perfect {will have done) or was/were going to. ► It's quite a long way, isn't it? We'// have walked (walk) about five miles by the time we get back, I'd say. 1 It'll be better if you don't ring at one o'clock. We………………………….. ... (have) lunch then. 2 I………………. ................(drive) over and see you, but there's something wrong with the car. 3 I've got loads of work. I expect I ......................................(work) all night. And I'm not looking forward to it. 4 I'll have much more time next week because I…………………………….. (do) all my exams then. 5 We……………………………… (buy) that computer game, but they don't make it for the kind of computer we've got. 6 I know you'll put on a wonderful show. You ...................................... (have) so much practice by the time you perform it that it's sure to be brilliant. Test 7D Complete the conversation. Use will, be going to or a present tense. Choose the best form. Sometimes more than one answer is correct. Peter: Hello. Where are you going? Polly: To my evening class. I'm learning Swedish. And next week (►) /'// have (I / have) a chance to speak it for real. (1)……………………………… (I / go) to Sweden for three weeks. (2)………………………………. (I / leave) on Friday. (3)……………………………… (I / visit) some friends there. Peter: (4) …………………………… (that / be) nice. Polly: Well, I'd better hurry. My lesson (5) ....................................... (start) at half past seven, and it's twenty-five past now. Peter: OK. Come and see me when (6) .................................... (you / get) back from Sweden. Polly: Thanks. (7) ......................................... (I / send) you a postcard. Test 7E Write a second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► We have decided to help with the project, (going) We are going to help with the project. 1 We're willing to wait for you. ('11) 2 You can get off this train at Bath, (stops) 3 My friend intended to meet us. (going) 4 Adrian's job interview is on 17 October, (having) 5 Our meal will be over by eight o'clock, (finished) 6 I think I'm going to go on the trip, (might) 7 The fire hasn't gone out yet, but it will in a minute, (about) Test 7F Choose the correct form. ► A: I'd better go. I'm cycling home, and I haven't got any lights on my bike. B: Oh, yes. It'll be/It'll have beeft dark soon. 1 A: I hear the rent on your flat is very expensive. B: Yes it is. I'll move/I'm going to move, I've decided. 2 A: I'd like a photo of Martin and me. B: I'll take/I'm going to take one with your camera, then. 3 A: Have you booked a holiday yet? B: Yes, we go/we're going to Spain. 4 A: What's that man doing up there? B: Oh no! He'll jump/He's going to jump! 5 A: Can I borrow your bike on Monday? B: I'm sorry, but I'll be using/I'll have used it. I always cycle to work. 31 The verb have A Have and have got Look at these examples. HAVE HAVE GOT We have three cats. Emma has toothache. Daniel doesn't have a car. Do you have the address? ~ Yes, I do. We've got three cats. Vicky has got blue eyes. I haven't got any money. Have you got a ticket? ~ No, I haven't. Here have and have got mean the same thing. We can normally use either form. But have got is more informal. Note that we do not use have got in short answers (No, / haven't.). B Forms PRESENT TENSE NEGATIVE QUESTION have I/you/we/they have he/she/it has I/you/we/they don't have he/she/it doesn't have do I/you/we/they have? does he/she/it have? have got I/you/we/they have got OR I/you/we/they've got he/she/it has got OR he/she/it's got 1/you/we/they haven't got he/she/it hasn't got have I/you/we/they got? has he/she/it got? PAST TENSE I/you/he/she/it/we/they had I/you/he/she/it/we/they didn't have did QUESTION I/you/he/she/it/we/they have? NEGATIVE We do not often use had got in the past tense. Tom had several jobs to do. We didn't have time to stop. Why did you have that funny hat on? C The action verb have Here are some examples of have as an action verb. Mark has lunch around one. I have a shower every morning. The children had a game of cards. We had a wonderful holiday. Have expresses an action. Mark has lunch means that he eats lunch. With the action verb have we cannot use got and we cannot use a short form. NOT Mark-has--got lunch-around-one and NOT I've a shower every morning. The action verb have can also be continuous. Mark is having lunch now. We were having a conversation in English. What time are you having your driving lesson? In negatives and questions in simple tenses, we use a form of do. We didn't have a very good time. We don't have parties very often. Where do you have lunch? How often does Vicky have strange dreams? In English we often use expressions like have a talk instead of a verb like talk. Here are some examples, Shall we have a swim? 1 usually have a rest in the afternoon. I had a talk with Daniel. Trevor and Laura are having an argument. 31 Exercises 1 Have and have got (A-B) Look at the pictures and write positive or negative sentences with have or have got. Use these objects: a car, a map, a rabbit, a ticket, an umbrella ► He's got a ticket, OR He has a ticket. 1 2 3 4 ................................. .......................................... 2 Have and have got (A-B) Complete the dialogue. Put in the negative or question forms. Use have got for the present and have for the past. David: (►) Have you got a bike? Mike: Yes, but I don't ride it very often. David: (1) ........... it ......... lights on? Mike: Yes, why? David: Can I leave my bike here and take yours? Mine (2)………………………………. any lights. It (3) ……………………………… any when I bought it. I meant to get some last week, but I (4) .................................... time. Mike: But it's raining now. And you (5).................... ………………… a coat. I'll drive you home, David. 3 The action verb have (C) What does have mean in these sentences? Choose from these verbs: drink, eat, play, receive, spend ► Mark never has breakfast. has = eats 1 We've just had a game of tennis. had = 2 My father has a cup of cocoa every evening, has = 3 We've just had three weeks in Morocco. had = 4 Claire had lots of presents on her birthday. had = 4 The verb have (A-C) Complete the conversation. Use have/have got or the action verb have. Claire: (►) You've got (you / have) an empty plate, Henry. Would you like some more food? Henry: Oh, yes please. I must say, (1) ........................... …………… (we / have) a great time. Luckily (2) ............................................. (you / have) lots of room in here. Claire: Yes, it's a nice big flat, although (3)……………………………… (it / not / have) a balcony. Mark: How was Brazil? (4)………………………………. (you / have) a good holiday? Claire: Yes, (5)..............................................(I / have) a lovely time, thank you. Henry: (6).......... ……………… ....... (you / have) some photos here to show us? Claire: Yes, you must (7)……………………………….. (have) a look at them some time. But I was so busy doing things (8) ....... …………… .................(I / not / have) time to take very many. 32 Short forms, e.g. it's, don't A The use of short forms A short form like it's or don't stands for the full form it is or do not. We leave out one or more letters and we write an apostrophe (') instead. We use short forms in conversational English and in informal writing such as a letter to a friend. Short forms are sometimes called 'contracted forms'. We cannot use a short form when the word is stressed, in a short answer for example. Have you looked in this drawer? ~ Yes, I have, NOT Yes, I've But we can use n't in a short answer: No, I haven't. B The most common short forms Some verbs can have short forms when they come after I, you, etc. VERB am are is/has have had/would will shall SHORT FORMS I'm you're, we're, they're he's, she's, it's I've, you've, we've, they've I'd, you'd, he'd, she'd, it'd, we'd, they'd I'll, you'll, he'll, she'll, it'll, we'll, they'll I'll, we'll A short form can also come after a noun. Vicky's lost her bank card. (Vicky has ...) The card'll be in here. (The card will...) There are also some short forms with question words and with here, there or that. who's, what's, where's, when's, how's, who'd, who'll, what'll here's, there's, that's, there'll, that'll, there'd, that'd There is a negative short form n't which can come after some verbs. aren't, isn't, wasn't, weren't, haven't, hasn't, hadn't, don't /daunt/, doesn't, didn't, won't (- will not), shan't (= shall not), can't , couldn't, mustn't , needn't, mightn't, shouldn't, wouldn't, daren't Sometimes we can shorten either not or the verb. It is not funny. - * It isn't funny. OR It's not funny. You will not believe it. -> You won't believe it. OR You'll not believe it. But we cannot use n't after I. I am not sure. -> I'm not sure, NOT I amn't sure. C 's and 'd 's can be is or has, and 'd can be had or would. She's short, and she's got fair hair. (She is short... she has got...) If I'd known, I'd have told you. (If I had known, 1 would have ...) 32 Exercises 1 Short forms (B) Write the sentences in a more informal style, with short forms. In a business letter In a letter to a friend ► You are quite right. You're quite right. 1 It is a difficult problem. 2 I have seen the results. 3 I do not have any information. 4 We have not reached a decision. 5 I am very excited about it. 6 You need not decide now. 7 It is not yet certain. 8 We will be pleased to see you. 9 Do not worry. 10 I would like to buy a new computer. 11 We are willing to help. 12 We will not know the result for some time. 2 Short forms (B) Complete the dialogues. Put in the short form of these phrases: do not, he is, I am, is not, it is, what is, where is ► How are you? ~ I'm fine, thanks. 1 .............. your luggage? ~ ............................... in Los Angeles. 2 Do you like this shirt? ~ No, I ................................................ It............................................ my style. 3……………………..that smell? ~ My husband……………………………… doing a chemical experiment. 3 's and 'd Write the forms in full. Use is, has, had or would. ► What's your name? 1 I'd like a coffee, please. 2 There's been an accident. 3 That's correct. 4 I'd seen the film before. 5 Who's got the key? h We'd have stopped if we'd seen you. What is your name ? 33 Emphatic do Melanie wants to emphasize the idea that the picture is nice and that she likes it. She wants to say this in a strong and positive way. NEUTRAL It's nice. I like it. EMPHATIC It is nice. I do like it. B Emphatic forms Often we can be emphatic by using a full form like is or have, rather than a short form such as's or 've (see Unit 32). We stress the word when we speak it. Yes, it is late. It's half past one in the morning. My goodness you have done a lot of work. Well done. We can also stress modal verbs such as will and should. You will write to me, won't you? You really should drive more carefully. We almost had an accident. In the present simple we put do before the verb. You're so right. I do agree with you. Your hair is much too long. You do need a haircut. We do hope you can come to our barbecue. I'm getting fed up with those dogs. They do make such a » In the third person singular we use does. The city centre does get crowded, doesn't it? Emma says Matthew doesn't care about her, but he says he does care. We do not add s to the verb. It does look nice, NOT it does-looks-nice. In the past simple we use did. We did enjoy the concert. It was really good. You shouldn't have forgotten. I did remind you. Vicky is quite sure that she did see a ghost. We do not add ed to the verb. We did enjoy it. NOT We did enjoyed it. C The imperative with do We can use do with an imperative for emphasis. Do hurry up, or we'll be late. Oh, do be quiet. I'm trying to concentrate. Here do makes the speaker sound more worried or annoyed. We use this structure only in an informal situation. But we can also use do with an imperative in offers and invitations (see page 122). Do have some more soup. Do take a seat, wont you? Here do sounds very polite. 33 Exercises ► Yes, I will be late home. 1 Emphatic do (A-B) Put in the emphatic forms of these sentences: / like my new portrait. I'm smiling. It's foggy today. Yes, I'll be late home. Yes, I remembered the water. 1………………………………………………………………………… 3 2………………………………………………………………………… 4 .............. ………. ........................... 2 Emphatic do (A-B) Complete the answers. Use a pronoun + emphatic do + a verb. ► Tom: Melanie is always helping people, isn't she? David: Yes, she docs help a lot of people. 1 Trevor: How much did that dress cost? Laura: Well, .............................rather a lot. 2 Jessica: Someone once told me I look like the singer Arlene Black. Natasha: Well, .................... a bit like her, actually. 3 Daniel: This train doesn't stop at our station. Matthew: Are you sure? I think .......................................there. 4 Nick: Why didn't you go to the match on Saturday? Tom: What do you mean? ....................................... to the match. 5 Vicky: Matthew and Emma never quarrel. Rachel: Oh yes, ......................................... All the time, in fact. 3 Emphatic do (A-C) What would you say? Use do, does or did. ► Tell your friend that you worry about your job prospects. You know, / do worry about my job prospects. 1 Say that you finished the crossword today. Actually, .................................................................................................. 2 Admit that your room needs tidying up. I'm afraid ............................................................................................... 3 Explain to your teacher that you find the work difficult. I'm afraid .................................................................................................. 4 Say that you wanted to give the course up. Actually, 5 Offer your friend a chocolate. Here you are............................................................................................... 6 Admit that this place depresses you. You know, ................................................................................................ 34 Yes/no questions A Use A yes/no question is one that we can answer with yes or no. Are you ready? ~ Yes, nearly/No, not quite. Has anyone seen my bag? ~ Yes, it's on the chair./No, I don't think so. These questions are asking for information. For example, Daniel wants to know if Vicky is ready or not. Sometimes yes/no questions have other uses, especially questions with modal verbs. For example, when Matthew says Shall we go then? he is making a suggestion, not asking for information. Here are some examples of the different uses. Making a suggestion: Shall we eat out tonight? Can/Could you write the address Offering: down for me, please? Can I carry something for you? ~ No, Inviting: it's OK, thanks. Would you like to come to a party?Asking permission: Yes, I'd love to. May I use your phone? ~ Yes, of COURSE Requesting: B Form A yes/no question begins with an auxiliary verb. An auxiliary verb is a form of be or have or a modal verb e.g. can. The auxiliary verb comes before the subject. AUXILIARY SUBJECT Is Has Can it David Emma raining? got a car? drive? STATEMENT: QUESTION: It is raining. IS it raining? The main verb be also comes before the subject in a question. Is it cold out there? Are you ready? Was it easy? If there is more than one auxiliary verb, only the first one comes before the subject. Have you been working? Could we have done better? In the present simple and past simple we use a form of do. AUXILIARY Do Does Did SUBJECT the buses Mark you run every day? play golf? like the concert? STATEMENT: QUESTION: A question cannot begin with an ordinary verb such as run, play or like. NOT Plays-Mark-golf? and NOT Liked your the-concert? The verb after the subject does not end in s or ed. NOT Does-Mark plays-golf? and NOT Did you-liked-the-concert? 35 Answers with yes and no They (do) run every day. Do they run every day? 34 Exercises 1 Use (A) Write down the use of each question. Choose from these uses: asking for information (x3), asking permission, inviting, making a suggestion, offering, requesting (x2) ? Could you post this letter for me? requesting ? Can we get a number 35 bus from this stop? asking for information 1 Can I help you with those bags? 2 Shall we stop for a rest? 3 Is it Tuesday today? 4 Could you wait a moment, please? 5 Would you like to have tea with us? 6 Will your friend be here next weekend? 7 May I sit down? 2 Form(B) Claude Jennings, the World Quiz Champion, is going to be on Guy's chat show. Guy is wondering what to ask Claude. Read what Guy is thinking and write down his questions. ► (I expect Claude has won lots of prizes.) Have you won lots of prizes ? 1 (1 wonder if he's a rich man.) ..................................................................................................................... 2 (Perhaps quizzes are his only hobby.) ...............................……………………………………………... 3 (I expect he worked hard at school.) .........…………………………………………………………….. 4 (I wonder if he's got any other interests.) .................. ………………………………………………… 5 (1 wonder if it's an interesting life.) ........................................................................…………………. 6 (Perhaps his wife asks him quiz questions.) ............................................................... ………………… 7 (And maybe he answers questions in his dreams.)…………………………………………………... 3 Yes/no questions (A-B) What would you say in these situations? ► You want to know if Mark has been to Los Angeles. Ask Sarah. Has Mark been to Los Angeles ? 1 You aren't sure if Rachel and Vicky are going to America. Ask them. 2 You want to know if Laura plays tennis. Ask Trevor. 3 You are wondering if Claire enjoyed her holiday. Ask her. 4 You want to suggest to Rachel that you both go for a walk. 5 You need to know if David will be at the club tonight. Ask him. 6 You want to know if the train is on time. Ask Mark. 7 You are wondering if Mike and Harriet go camping. Ask David. 8 You want to ask Matthew if you can borrow his squash racket. 9 You want to know if Nick has got a motor bike. Ask him. 35 Short answers, e.g. Yes, it is. A Answering yes or no Look at the answers to these questions. Is it raining? ~ Yes. Are we going to be late? ~ Yes, we are. Did you say something? ~ No. Did you finish the crossword? ~ No, I didn't. We can sometimes answer a question with a simple yes or no, but we often use a short answer like No, I didn't. We usually put a comma after yes or no. We do not normally use a full sentence, but we can do if we want to add emphasis to the answer. Did you open my letter? ~ No, I didn't open your letter. Sometimes, to be polite, we may need to add information. Did you get the tickets? ~ No, I didn't. There wasn't time, I'm afraid. Sorry. B Form A positive short answer is yes + a pronoun + an auxiliary. SHORT ANSWER QUESTION Auxiliary you working tomorrow? ~ Emma got a computer? ~ I need my passport? ~ they repair your phone? ~ Are Has Will Did Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Pronoun I she you they Auxiliary am. has. will. did. We can also use the main verb be in a short answer. 7s it time to go? ~ Yes, it is. It's ten past eleven. Note that in the present simple and past simple we use a form of do. Do you like classical music? ~ Yes, I do. NOT YES I LIKE. A negative short answer is no + a pronoun + an auxiliary + n't. QUESTION Auxiliary Is Have Will Does SHORT ANSWER the photocopier working now? ~ the children gone to sleep? ~ there be food at the party? ~ this train stop at Derby? ~ No, No, No, No, Pronoun it they there it Auxiliat isn't. haven't. won't. doesn't. But note No, I'm not. Are you working tomorrow? ~ No, I'm not. NOT No-,-I-amn't. C Answering requests, suggestions, offers and invitations To answer a request, suggestion, etc, we normally use a phrase like Yes, of course or Yes, please rather than a short answer. If we answer in the negative, we have to give some explanation. Request: Suggestion: Offer: Invitation: Could you help me move these chairs, please? ~ Yes, of course. OR I'm afraid I'm rather busy. Shall we have a coffee? ~ Yes, OK. OR Sorry, I can't. I have to go. Can I give you a hand? ~ Yes, please. That's very kind of you. OR It's OK, thanks. I can manage Would you like to come to the barbecue? ~ Yes, please. I'd love to. OR I'd love to, but I'll be away Short negative answers would sound strange or impolite here. 35 Exercises 1 Form (B) It's eleven o'clock, and everyone has arrived at a party. Put in the short answers. ► Have you got a drink? ~ Yes, I have, thank you. I've just put it down somewhere. 1 Can you speak Arabic? ~ ......................................... , but not very well. 2 Is it raining outside? ~................................................. It's just started. 3 Has David come with you? ~ ...................…………………. . He's in hospital, actually. 4 Did you come by car, Tom? ~ .................................................It took ages because of all the traffic. 5 Are those people over there your friends? ~.....………………………….. .1 don't know them at all. 6 Do you like England? ~ ................................................. -I'm enjoying my stay here. 7 Is your brother here? ~ ................................................. He's away on business at the moment. 8 Have you seen Nick recently? ~.................................................I think he's moved away. 2 Form (B) It's one o'clock in the morning, and the party is in full swing. People are still talking. Put in the short answers. ► Are you French? ~ No, I'm not. I'm Italian. I'm from Milan. 1 Will you and Laura be here in August? ~................................................. We're going to France. 2 Did you remember to bring the photos? ~ ................................................ I'll give them to you in a minute. 3 Has Rita broken up with her boyfriend? ~................................................. It's all over, she told me. 4 Did you see that documentary about the ozone layer on television last night? ......................................... I was working late, unfortunately. 5 Does Laura like these old songs? ~ ............................................. She loves Elvis Presley. 6 Are you and Mike staying the night here? ~ ................................................ We have to get home tonight. 7 Can we afford a taxi? ~ .................................................It's quite a long way. 8 Are you OK, Vicky? ~................................................. I feel really awful. 3 Answering questions (A-C) Which would normally be the best answer? ► Are you busy today? a) Yes, busy, b) V Yes, I am. 1 Is it too hot in here for you? a) No, it isn't, b) No, I'm fine, thanks. 2 Do you know Emma? a) Yes. b) Yes, we live in the same building. 3 Tell me, did you steal my money? a) No. b) No, I didn't steal your money. 4 Do you live on the campus? a) Yes, I do. b) Yes, I live on it. 5 Would you like to come out with us for the day? a) Yes, I would like, b) Yes, please. 6 Is it the eighteenth today? a) Yes, it is. b) Yes, it is the eighteenth of November today. 7 Did you bring my CD? a) No. b) No, sorry. I forgot it. 8 Can I carry your bags? a) No, you can't, b) It's all right, thanks. 36 Wh-questions A Introduction Reporter Kitty Beamish is interviewing some guerrilla fighters. Guerillas: For Kitty: our freedom. We Why are you fighting? can help them What can you do for the people? Very soon. When will the war be over? A wh-question begins with a question word. Question words are who, what, which, whose, where, when, why and how. We use a wh-question to ask for information. B Form Most wh-questions begin with a question word + an auxiliary verb + the subject. (For another form of whquestion, see Unit 37.) An auxiliary verb is a form of be or have or a modal verb, e.g. can. QUESTION WORD AUXILIARY SUBJECT What Where When is have can Kitty you we doing? put the map? travel safely? The main verb be also comes before the subject in questions. Where is Kitty? How are you? What was that noise? If there is more than one auxiliary verb, only the first one comes before the subject. The guerrillas have been hiding. Where have the guerrillas been hiding? I should have said something. What should I have said? In the present simple and past simple we use a form of do. QUESTION WORD AUXILIARY SUBJECT Where How What people the radio the guerrillas do does did meet? work? say? An ordinary verb such as meet, work or say cannot come before the subject. NOT Where meet-people? and NOT How works-the-radio? The verb after the subject does not end in s or ed. NOT How-does-the-radio-works? and NOT What did-the-guerrillas-said? Question phrases Look at these question phrases with what and how. What time is your friend arriving? ~ Half past eight. What colour is your toothbrush? ~ Yellow. What kind of/What sort of club is it? ~ A nightclub. How old is your sister? ~ She's twenty. How often do you go out? ~ About once a week, usually. How far is the beach? ~ Only five minutes walk How long will the meeting last? ~ An hour or so, I expect. How many televisions have you got? ~ Three How much money did you spend? ~ About a hundred pounds. 36 Exercises 1 Wh-questions (A-B) What would you say in these situations? ► You are talking to a man at a party. Ask him where he works. Where do you work? 1 You want to know what the date is today. Ask your friend. 2 You've forgotten when the course finishes. Ask your friend. 3 Your friend is having a party. You'd like to know who he has invited. Ask him. 4 Your favourite band are going to give a concert. Ask how you can get tickets. 5 You are in town with a friend, and you are wondering where the two of you are going to have lunch. What do you ask? 2 Question words and phrases (A-C) Quiz champion Claude Jennings is answering questions. Put in these words and phrases: how far, how long, how often, how many, what, what colour, what kind, when, where, who Quiz-master: Claude: ► What colour is the Greek flag? Blue and white. 1. .................................. is Melbourne? It's in Australia. 2. …………………….centimetres are there in a kilometre? A hundred thousand. 3. ……………………. did the Second World War end? In 1945. 4 ………… ................. did Romeo love? Juliet. 5 ……………….. ....... is Sirius? It's a star. 6 ……………………..is it from Los Angeles to San Francisco? About 400 miles. 7 …………….. ....... are the Olympic Games held? Every four years. 8 ……………………of food is Cheddar? It's cheese. 9 ………….. ........... is a game of rugby? Eighty minutes. 3 Wh-questions (A-C) Guy is interviewing a guest on his chat show. It's the actress Melissa Livingstone, who is in the TV soap opera 'Round the Corner'. Put in Guy's questions. ► Guy: How often do you record 'Round the Corner'? Melissa: Oh, we record it every day. It's a full-time job, you know. 1 Guy: And .........................................................................................................it? Melissa: In Birmingham, at the BBC studios. 2 Guy: ……………………………………………………………………………….. Melissa: How many? Well, let me see, I think we've done a thousand programmes. 3 Guy: ……………………………………………………………………………….. Melissa: I'm not going to tell you. How much money I earn is my business. 4 Guy: OK, I'm sorry. .......................................................... ……………. Melissa: Oh, a long time ago. I started acting when I was twelve. 5 Guy: ………………………………………………………………………… Melissa: My plans for the future? I just want to go on with 'Round the Corner'. 37 Subject/object questions A Who and what Who is interviewing Kitty? Who is Kitty interviewing? Who and what can be the subject of a question. The word order is the same as in a statement. Who and what can also be the object. An auxiliary (e.g. did, will) comes before the subject. SUBJECT OBJECT Who rang you? (Someone rang you.) Who is helping you? (Someone is helping you.) What will happen next? (Something will happen next.) Who did you ring? (You rang someone.) Who are you helping? (You are helping someone.) What will they do next? (They will do something next.) Who and what can also be the object of a preposition, e.g. to, with. (For prepositions in questions, see Unit 38.) Compare these sentences. SUBJECT Who was talking to you? (Someone was talking to you.) What wine goes with fish? (Some wine goes with fish.) OBJECT Who were you talking to? (You were talking to someone.) What does this colour go with? (This colour goes with something.) B Which, whose, how many and how much These words can also be either the subject or the object. SUBJECT Which program will work best? (One of the programs will work best.) Whose dog is barking over there? (Someone's dog is barking over there.) How many people came past? (Some people came past.) How much oil got into the river? (Some oil got into the river.) OBJECT Which program will you use? (You will use one of the programs.) Whose dog is Melanie walking? (Melanie is walking someone's dog.) How many people did you see? (You saw some people.) How much oil did you buy? (You bought some oil.) 37 Exercises 1 Who and what as subject and object (A) Read about the situations and answer each question in a single phrase. ► The morning after his party, Tom was cleaning up. David came along and took away some empty bottles for him. Nick had just woken up after spending the night on Tom's sofa. He watched them for a while. a) Who helped Tom? David b) Who did Nick help? no one 1 Nick wants to marry Rita. She's been out with him a few times, but really she's in love with Tom. Unfortunately he isn't in love with her. a) Who is Nick in love with? ..................................... b) Who is in love with Tom? 2 Mark met Sarah at the airport. The plane was two hours late. On the way out they passed Mike standing at a bus stop, but they didn't notice him. a) Who met Sarah?....................................... b) What was Mike waiting for? 3 There was an accident at the crossroads. A lorry crashed into a van that was waiting at the lights. The van slid forward and crashed into a car. The van driver had to go to hospital. a) What hit the van? ..................... b) What did the van hit? 2 Who and what as subject and object (A) People aren't giving you enough information. Ask questions with who or what. ? ? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Something has happened. ~ Oh? What has happened? I've invited someone to tea. ~ Well? Who have you invited? Somebody is having a party. ~ Oh, really? ..................................................……………………………………. I was reading something. ~ Oh? ............................................................................................................................... I've learnt something. ~ Go on, tell me. ....................................................................................... …………….. We should do something. ~ Yes, I know, but ......................................................................................................... Someone is looking for you. ~Oh? ..................................... …………………………………………………… I'm looking for someone. ~ Maybe I can help............................................................. …………………………. Rachel is planning something. ~ Is she? .....................................................……………………………………. Somebody has moved in next door. ~ Oh, really? ...................................................... ……………………….. Something is worrying me. ~ Well, tell me. ..................... ……………………………………………………. I want to meet someone. ~ What do you mean? ................................................................ …………………… 3 Which, whose, how many and how much (B) Harriet is visiting her grandmother, Mrs Evans. It's Mrs Evans's birthday. She can't hear very well, and she sometimes gets confused. Complete her questions. ? ? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Harriet: So ten people have sent cards. 1 met David's friend yesterday. You can keep those photos. Those flowers look lovely. Fifty pounds went missing. I passed Mark's house earlier. The doctor has four children. Doctors earn lots of money. Mike's uncle has died. Trevor's wife is coming later. Mrs Evans: Pardon? How many people have sent cards ? What? Whose friend did you meet ? Photos? Which ..............…………………….. Do they? Which……………………………… Missing? How much .................…………… Pardon? Whose .....................................…….. Really? How many ………………………….. I don't know. How much………………….. What's that? Whose………………………… Oh? Whose …………………………………... 38 Prepositions in wh-questions A Introduction Daniel and Rachel each ask Vicky a question. In each question, the word what is the object of a preposition (for, about). What are you looking for? (You are looking for something.) What are you worrying about? (You are worrying about something.) The preposition normally comes in the same place as in a statement: looking for, worrying about. NOT FOr what are-you looking? NOT Abouht what are-you-worrying? But in more formal English, the preposition can come before the question word. In which warehouse were the goods stored? OR Which warehouse were the goods stored in? In formal English we use a preposition + whom (not who). From whom did you obtain the information? OR Who did you obtain the information from? Here are some more examples of prepositions in wh-questions. Who are we waiting for? ~ Rachel. What's Nick laughing at? ~ Oh, one of Tom's jokes. Where are you from?/Where do you come from? ~ Bombay. What kind of holiday are you interested in? ~ A package holiday. Who did you go out with last night? ~ Just a friend. B What... for and what... like We can use a question with what... for to ask about purpose. What did you buy this computer magazine for? ~ To read about business software. What are these bricks for? ~ We're going to build a wall. What are they digging the road up for? ~ They're repairing a gas pipe. What... for means the same as why. Why are they digging up the road? ~ They're repairing a gas pipe. We can use what ... like to ask if something is good or bad, interesting or boring, etc. What was the party like? ~ Oh, we had a great time. What's the place like where you live? ~ It's pretty quiet. Note also look like. What does your friend look like? ~ She's very tall and blond. But we use how to ask about someone's well-being. How are you? ~ I'm OK, thanks. And you? How are you getting on in your new job? ~ I'm really enjoying it. Compare these two questions. How's Melanie? ~ Oh, she's fine, thanks. (She is happy/in good health.) What's Melanie like? ~ She's very nice. (She is a nice person.) 38 Exercises 1 Prepositions in wh-questions (A) Ask these people questions with what. Use these verbs and prepositions: look at, look for, point at, talk about, wait for ► What are you looking for ? 1…………………………………………………………3………………………………………………… 2……………………………………………………….4………………………………………………… 2 Prepositions in wh-questions (A) Put in the question. Use what and put the preposition in brackets at the end. ? Melanie: Tom is smiling. He's pleased, (about) Yes, he is. What is he pleased about? David: I'm busy today. I'm getting ready, (for) What are you getting ready for ? I've ? Laura: done something awful. I'm ashamed, (of) Trevor: Haven't you heard of Kitty Beamish? She's famous, (for) 1 Jessica: 2 Andrew: No, I haven't Trevor: Ilona: 3 Sarah: Claire: 4 Matthew: Daniel: 5 Mark is annoyed. He's going to complain, (about) Emma's in a hurry. She's going to be late, (for) I don't feel very relaxed. I feel nervous, (about) Vicky: Rachel: 3 What... for and what... like (B) Trevor has just come home from work. Complete the conversation. Put in for, how, like or what. Trevor: Hello, my love. (►) How are you? Laura: Hello. I'm all right, but I'm in a bit of a rush getting ready for the barbecue. Trevor: Er, I forgot to tell you that I invited two more people. Laura: (1)……………. are you telling me now (2)……………. ? I've bought all the food. I just hope there's enough. Anyway, who are these people? (3)........ ……… are they (4)…………. ... ? Trevor: They're friends of Harriet's. They're very nice people. And after all, (5)…………… are parties (6)……………. ? To meet new people. Laura: It isn't a party, it's a barbecue. (7)…………… .. 's the weather going to be (8)………….. ... ? Trevor: The forecast said it's going to be perfect. Warm and dry. Laura: Good. And (9)…………….. was your day? Trevor: Oh, not too bad. Busy as usual. 39 Who, what or which? A What or which? We can use what or which before a noun. WHAT WHICH What sport do you play? What books do you read? We use what when there is a wide choice of possible answers. We ask What sport? because there are lots of different sports. Which way do we go here? Which finger did you break? We use which when there is a limited number of possible answers. We ask Which way? because there are only two or three ways to go. What sport? (Tennis or golf or football or hockey or ... ?) Which way? (Right or left?) After which we sometimes say the possible answers. Which cafe did you go to, Snoopy's, the Coffee Pot or the Tea Gardens? Which phone shall I use, this one or the one in the office? Sometimes what and which are both possible. What day/Which day is your evening class? What train/Which train will you catch? What platform/Which platform does the train go from? What part/Which part of Italy are you from? B Patterns with who, what and which We can use who, what and which without a noun. Who sent the fax? What do you think of our plan? Which is quicker, the bus or the train? We can use what and which before a noun, but not who. Which secretary sent the fax? NOT Who-secretary-sent the-fax? We can use which with one or ones, or with of. You can have a photo. Which one would you like? You can have some of the photos. Which ones would you like? Which of these photos would you like? But we cannot use who or what before of. Which of the secretaries? but NOT Who-of the secretaries? Who always means a person. Who did you see? (a person) What usually means a thing. It can mean a person only when it comes before a noun. What did you see? (a thing) What doctor/What film did you see? (a person or a thing) Which can mean a person or a thing. Which doctor/film did you see? (a person or a thing) 102 One and ones 39 Exercises 1 What or which? (A) The questions you are asking have a number of possible answers. If the list of answers is incomplete, ask a question with what. If the list is complete, use which. ? (Do you play the piano, or the violin, or the guitar, or ...?) What musical instrument do you play ? ? (Did you go to the Little Theatre or the Theatre Royal?) Which theatre did you go to ? 1 (Did you take the morning flight or the afternoon flight?) 2 (Did you stay at the Grand Hotel or the Bristol?) 3 (Do you like classical music, or jazz, or rock music, or ...?) 4 (Did you buy 'Time' magazine, or 'Newsweek', or a computer magazine, or ...?) 5 (Do you work for EuroChemicals, or ICM, or SenCo, or ...?) 6 (Are you learning English, or Spanish, or Arabic, or Japanese, or ...?) 2 What or which? (A) Rita is moving into a new flat. Trevor has come to see the flat and help her move in. Complete his questions. Put in what or which. ► Trevor: What number is this building? Rita: Forty-two. 1 Trevor: I didn't realize there were only three floors…………….. .. floor is your flat on? Rita: The first floor. 2 Trevor: It's a very nice flat ..................... room will be your living-room? Rita: This one here, I thought. 3 Trevor: ................... colour are you going to paint it? Rita: Oh, I don't know yet. 4 Trevor: .................... time is your furniture arriving? Rita: Three o'clock, they said. 5 Trevor: I'll need some petrol..................... way is the nearest petrol station? Rita: Turn left at the end of the street. 3 Who, what or which? (B) Detectives Wilson and Taylor are looking into the murder of Lord Weybridge at his country house. Put in who, what or which. Wilson: (►) Which of the guests in this house is the murderer, do you think, Taylor? Taylor: I don't know yet. (1)……………….. had the opportunity? (2)……………… of the guests had the chance to do it? Wilson: (3)……………….. happened after dinner last night? That's what we have to find out. Taylor: There must be a motive for the murder. (4)………………… motive could the murderer have? Wilson: Love or money - they're the usual motives. (5)………………… of them is it, I wonder? Taylor: (6)………………… did Lord Weybridge leave his money to? That's the question, Wilson. TEST 8 Questions (Units 34-39) Test 8A Put the words in the right order and ask the question. ► everyone / is / ready Is everyone ready ? 1 been / have / where / you 2 do / postcards / sell / you 3 belong / calculator / does / this / to / who 4 are / here / how / long / staying / you 5 is / like / new / office / what / your 6 are / flights / full / of / the / which 7 carnival / does / start / the / time / what 8 decided / has / holiday / Nancy / on / what Test 8B Put in the correct question word or phrase. ► What did you buy? ~ A box of chocolates. 1………………………… is this building? ~ It's about two hundred years old. 2 …………………………does your team play in? ~ Red. 3………………………….bag are you carrying? ~ Judy's. 4 …………………………money do you earn? ~ About £250 a week. 5…………………………hand do you write with? ~ My right hand. 6……………………….of shop do you work in? ~ A toy shop. 7 ………………………..first stepped on the moon? ~ Neil Armstrong, wasn't it? 8 ………………………..is your mother? ~ She's much better, thank you. 9 ……………………… is it to the post office? ~ About two hundred metres. 10 ………………………do you take a holiday? ~ Once a year. 11………………………..name will you give the baby? ~ We haven't thought of one yet. Test 8C Write the sentences correctly. ► Would-like-you:to go sailing? 1 Do you be-a student here? 2 How many-cakes have eaten you? 3 Enjoyed-you your walk? 4 Where your-friends have gone? 5 What kind of music-do-you like? 6 Does-Peter plays tennis? 7 About what are you-talking? 8 What has it happened? Would you like to go sailing? Test8D Read about each situation and write down the question. ? You want to know if it is raining. Is it raining ? ? You need to ask Polly where she lives. Where do you live? 1 You would like to ask Nancy where she bought her coat. 2 You want to ask Susan if Amy can swim. 3 You want to ask Simon which band he likes best. 4 On the phone you want to know who you are speaking to. 5 You need to know how much video recorders cost. 6 You are asking permission to come in. 7 You need to find out how long the journey takes. 8 You want to ask Adrian what he locked the door for. 9 You want to ask what happens next. 10 You want to suggest that you all go out together. Test 8E Write the questions to which the underlined words are the answers. ► Christopher is going to London by train. How is Christopher going to London ? 1 The Smiths have got three cars. 2 Janet works at the supermarket. 3 Andrea is learning English because she will need it in her job. 4 The film was really romantic. 5 The meeting will take place next Tuesday. 6 Tessa switched off the computer. 7 Mr lohnson's burglar alarm was ringing. 8 Anna went to the dance with Martin. 40 Negative statements A Use Christopher Columbus Christopher Columbus was a famous explorer. At one time people believed that he had 'discovered' America. We know now this isn't true. Columbus was not the first European to travel to the New World. We don't know who was, but the Vikings had sailed there around the year 1000, and probably others before them. In 1492 Columbus sailed to San Salvador in the Bahamas and to other islands, but he never reached the mainland of North America. He actually thought he was in Asia. He certainly didn't discover America. We often use a negative statement to correct a mistaken idea, such as the idea that Christopher Columbus discovered America. B Negative verb forms POSITIVE NEGATIVE are dancing be: have seen have: Moda verb: must stay are not dancing have not seen must not stay OR OR OR aren't d i seen haven't mustn't stay In a negative statement not or n't comes after the auxiliary verb. The auxiliary verb is a form of be, have or a modal verb, e.g. must, can, could. The girls are not dancing. The modem isn't working properly. I haven't seen the new Disney film. David hasn't got a car. 1 mustn't stay long. You can't turn right here. I'm not feeling very awake today. We write n't without a space before it, e.g. isn't, haven't. Not or n't also comes after the main verb be. The photos are not ready yet It isn't very warm in here. If there is more than one auxiliary verb, we put not or n't after the first one. This plate hasn't been washed. You shouldn't have bothered. In the present simple and past simple, we use a form of do. POSITIVE Present simple: work looks Past simple: enjoyed NEGATIVE do not work does not look did not enjoy OR don't work OR doesn't look OR didn't enjoy 1 don't work on Saturdays, NOT I-work not on Saturdays. This part of town doesn't look very nice. I'm afraid we didn't enjoy the day very much. The verb after not or n't does not end in s or ed. NOT It doesn't looks-very nice and NOT We-dtdn't-enjoyed~the~day. C No and not We can use no before a noun or an adjective + noun. The verb is positive. No music is allowed after eleven, OR Music is not allowed after eleven. There are no new houses in the village, OR There aren't any new houses in the village. We do not use no with a verb. NOT Music-is no allowed and NOT The-shops-are no-open. 40 Exercises 1 Use (A) Read the information in A about Christopher Columbus. Then choose a positive or a negative verb. ► Columbus discovered/didn't discover America. 1 The first European to sail to the New World was/wasn't Columbus. 2 Europeans had/hadn't been to the New World before Columbus. 3 We know/don't know definitely who first sailed to America. 4 Columbus landed/didn't land on the North American mainland. 5 People's opinion of Columbus has/hasn't changed over the last 500 years. 6 When Columbus landed on San Salvador, he knew/didn't know where he was. 7 It is/isn't true that Columbus travelled across the United States. 2 Negative verb forms (B) Complete the conversation, Put in the negative forms of these words: can, did, do, does, has, have, is, was, were Rita: Does anyone live in that house next door? Melanie: Yes, he's called Jake. He's rather strange. He (►) hasn't got a job, but he (1)………………. be short of money because he's just bought a new car. Rita: The house (2)………………. look very smart. Melanie: The people who lived there before Jake (3)………………. look after it very well. And they (4)………………. very good at gardening. When Jake bought the house, it had been empty for a while. It (5)………………. very expensive. But he (6)……………. ... interested in doing anything to it, as you can see. Rita: Is he a friend? Melanie: No, we aren't really friends. I (7)………………. know him very well. I say hello when I see him, that's all. I (8) …… ............. seen him for a while, actually. 3 Negative verb forms (B) Vicky and Rachel are good friends, but they are very different kinds of people. Complete the sentences using a negative. ► Vicky gets upset, but Rachel doesn't get upset. 1 Vicky gets headaches. Rachel is lucky. She ......... ………………………………………… 2 Rachel can relax. Vicky is different. She ......................................... …………………….. 3 Rachel missed a lecture yesterday, but Vicky ....................................……………………… 4 Vicky is a nervous person, but Rachel ...............................................……………………… 5 Vicky loses things. Rachel ...................................................................................................... 6 Rachel was a happy child. Vicky.......................................................................................…... 7 Rachel has decided on a career, but Vicky .................................…………………………... 4 No and not (C) Complete this paragraph from a travel article. Put in no or not. Metropolis is (►) not an attractive town. There are (1)……………… parks or gardens in the city centre. I saw (2)……………….. interesting buildings, only factories, offices and blocks of flats. The hotels are (3)……………….. very good, and there are (4)………………. first-class restaurants. (5) ………….tourists visit Metropolis, and I certainly do (6)………………. want to go there again. 41 Negative questions A Introduction Laura asks two negative questions. The first expresses surprise that Trevor hasn't put the shelves up yet. The second is a suggestion that he should put them up now. B Form We make a question negative by putting n't after the auxiliary (e.g have, does). POSITIVE Have you done it yet? What does the advert tell you? Who eats meat? What went wrong? NEGATIVE Haven't you done it yet? What doesn't the advert tell you? Who doesn't eat meat? What didn't go wrong? C The use of negative yes/no questions A negative yes/no question often expresses surprise. Haven't you put those shelves up yet? (= I am surprised that you haven't yet.) Don't the children want the ice-cream? (= I am surprised that they don't want it.) A question with can't can be a complaint or an impolite request. Can't you sit down? You're blocking my view. We can also use a negative yes/no question instead of a statement and a tag. Aren't you a friend of Harriet's? (= You're a friend of Harriet's, aren't you?) D Yes/no answers The answer yes means that the positive is true, and no means that the negative is true. Haven t you repaired the car yet? ~ Yes, I did it yesterday. Haven t you repaired the car yet? ~ No, sorry. I haven't had time. E The use of negative wh-questions We can use Why don't...? for a suggestion. Why don't you put the shelves up now? ~ Well, all right. Why don't we sit on the balcony? ~ Good idea. We can use Why didn't...? to criticize. We'll have to stand now. Why didn't you book seats for us? (= You should have booked seats for us.] We can also use a wh-question to ask for information. Who hasn't checked their baggage in? ~ Oh, I haven't. Sorry. What don't you understand? ~ This paragraph here. 41 Exercises 1 Negative yes/no questions (B-C) What would you say in these situations? Use negative yes/no questions. ► You are surprised to learn that Rita doesn't like football. Don't you like football, Rita ? 1 You find it surprising that Melanie can't drive. 2 It's a surprise that Rachel won't be at the disco. 3 You find out that surprisingly Nick hasn't got a television. Negative yes/no questions (B-C) Complete the conversations using the words in the brackets. ► Mike: I walked home from the town centre, (take / bus) Harriet: You mean you walked all the way? Didn't you take a bus ? 1 Vicky: I think I'd like to lie down for a while, (feel / well) Rachel: Oh, dear. ................................................................................................................................ 2 Matthew: I'm looking forward to getting the photos you've sent, (arrive / yet) Richard: I sent them a week ago .......................................................................................................... 3 David: I saw Rita, but she walked straight past me. (say / hello) Melanie: Without speaking to you? ..................................................................................................... 4 Andrew: I never sit by the pool. I hate water, (swim) Emma: Really? ................................................................................................................................... Yes/no answers (D) Put in yes or no. ► Didn't Mike stop and give you a lift? ~ No, he didn't, but maybe he didn't see me. 1 Aren't you tired after working all day? ~..................... ,1 feel fine. 2 Didn't you write the number down? ~……………… , but I've lost the piece of paper. 3 Haven't you got an umbrella? ~......................, it's here in my bag. 4 Couldn't you get in to the opera? ~..................... , we didn't have tickets. Why not? (B, E) Reporter Kitty Beamish is investigating an accident at the Magic World theme park. A ride crashed, and people were injured. This is what Kitty has found out. ► The people on the ride didn't get enough help. 1 The staff didn't know what to do. 2 They couldn't stop the ride. What questions beginning with why does Kitty ask? ► Why didn't the people on the ride get enough help ? 1 .............................................................................. 2 ………………………………………………… 3 4 5 ………………………………………………………………………………………. . ……………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………….. . 3 4 5 They aren't trained in first aid. The ambulance wasn't called immediately. The doctor didn't have a mobile phone. 42 Question tags, e.g. isn't it? A Use Melanie: Harriet: Melanie: Harriet: It's a lovely day, isn't it? Beautiful. We're having a glorious summer, aren't we? You haven't heard a forecast for the weekend, have you? No, I haven't, but I think it's going to stay sunny. A question tag is a short question added on to a statement. When a tag is spoken, the voice can go down or up. FALLING RISING It's a lovely day, isn't it? With a falling intonation, the speaker thinks the statement is true. Melanie knows that it is a lovely day, and she is inviting Harriet to continue the conversation. The tag is not really a question. You haven't heard a forecast, have you? With a rising intonation, the speaker is less sure, Melanie doesn't know if Harriet has heard a weather forecast or not. The tag is more like a real question. B Form POSITIVE STATEMENT + NEGATIVE TAG It is very warm, isn't it? A negative tag is an auxiliary verb + n't + pronoun. You've played before, haven't you? The children can swim, can't they? It'll be dark soon, won't it? There was a mistake, wasn't there? NEGATIVE STATEMENT + POSITIVE TAG It isn't very warm, is it? A positive tag is an auxiliary verb + pronoun, David hasn't got a car, has he? I shouldn't laugh, should I? You aren't ill, are you? The answer wasn't right, was it? The pronoun (you, he, etc) refers to the subject of the sentence, e.g. you, David. In the present simple and past simple we use a form of do. You live near here, don't you? This coat looks nice, doesn't it? I turned right, didn't I? We don't have to pay, do we? The shower doesn't work, does it? Your horse didn't win, did it? The answer yes means that the positive is true, and no means that the negative is true. Mark works for Zedco, doesn't he? ~ Yes, he does. (He works for Zedco.) Melanie doesn't eat meat, does she? ~ Fes, / think she does. (She eats meat.) Claire is married, isn't she? ~ No, of course she isn't. (She isn't married.) Andrew hasn't got many friends, has he? ~ No. (He hasn't got many friends.) C Requests and suggestions After a request with an imperative (e.g. Wait ...), we can use can you? or could you? Wait here a moment, can you? Give me an example, could you? We can also use You couldn't..., could you? or You haven't..., have you? for a request. You couldn't help me, could you? You haven't got a pound, have you? After Don't... the tag is will you?: Don't make any noise, will you? After Let's ... we use shall we?: Let's sit in the garden, shall we? page 379 Question tags in American English 42 Exercises 1 Use (A) Look carefully at each statement and tag. Say if it is more likely to be a comment (with falling intonation) or a question (with rising intonation). ► This price list is up to date, isn't it? ~ Yes, it is. a question 1 It was a super show, wasn't it? ~ Great. I really enjoyed it. 2 These sweaters are nice, aren't they? ~ I like this one. 3 We've got time for a coffee, haven't we? ~ A quick one maybe. 4 Let me see, the bus goes at ten past, doesn't it? ~ Quarter past 2 Form(B) You are at a barbecue. Add tags to help start a friendly conversation. ? These sausages are delicious, aren't they7. ~ They certainly are. ? You haven't lived here long, have you ? ~ No, only three months. 1 It's quite a big garden, ............................................? ~ Yes, there's plenty of room. 2 There aren't many people here yet,........................ ...................... ? ~ No, but it's still quite early. 3 You're Rachel's friend, .......................................... ? ~ Yes, I'm Vicky. 4 You came in a sports car, ............................................? ~ That's right. 5 These burgers look good,.............................................. ? ~ I can't wait to try them. 6 We can sit on the grass,............................................... ? ~ I think it's dry enough. 7 The weather forecast wasn't very good, ……………………………..? ~ No, it wasn't. 3 Form(B) Complete the conversation. Put in the question tags. Emma: You don't really want to go out with me any more, (►) do you7. Matthew: Of course I do. But I need a bit of time to myself sometimes. Emma: You get plenty of time to yourself, (1) ...............................................? Matthew: Emma, you know what I feel for you. I've told you enough times, (2) ............................................? Emma: Yes, you have. And you're quite happy, (3) ............................................. ? You don't mind, (4) .......................................... ? The situation doesn't bother you, (5) .......................................... ? Matthew: Why are we arguing? There's nothing to argue about, (6)………………………….... ? Emma: You can't ever look at things from my point of view, (7) ............……………………... ? 4 Requests and suggestions (C) What would you say in these situations? Write sentences with a question tag. Use the word in brackets. ► You want to look at a newspaper. Daniel might have one, so ask him. (haven't) You haven't got a newspaper, have you? 1 Suggest to Vicky that you both listen to some music. (Let's) 2 Warn David not to do anything silly. (Don't) 3 You need a train timetable. Emma might have one, so ask her. (haven't) 4 Ask Rachel to pass you the salt. (Pass) 43 So/Neither do I and I think so A So and neither Vicky: I'm hungry. Rachel: So am 1.1 haven't eaten anything all day. Daniel: Neither have I.1 didn't have time for breakfast. We use so after a positive statement and neither after a negative one. I'm hungry. ~ So am I. (= And I'm hungry./I'm hungry, too.) / haven't eaten. ~ Neither have I. (= And I haven't eaten./I haven't eaten either.) The structure is so/neither + an auxiliary + the subject. The auxiliary is a form of be or have or a modal verb, e.g. can. We're really busy at work. ~ So are we. Tom has gone to the match. ~ And so has Nick. David can't drive, and neither can Melanie. The subject comes at the end. NOT We're busy. ~ So we are. In the present simple and past simple we use a form of do. / love old cowboy films. ~ So do I. This phone doesn't work. ~ Neither does this one. United won, and so did Rangers. We can use nor instead of neither. Emma isn't here tonight. Neither/Nor is Matthew. B I think so, etc Vicky: It's 'Round the Corner' at half past seven, my favourite soap opera. Are we going to be back in time? Daniel: I think so. We haven't got far to go now. Rachel: We might miss the beginning. Vicky: Oh, I hope not. I want to know if Bernard really did stea the money. Here I think so means I think we'll be back in time', and I hope not means T hope we don't miss the beginning'. We can use so after be afraid, believe, expect, guess, hope, suppose and think. Do you think you'll get the job? ~ Well, I hope so. Are you going on holiday this year? ~ Yes, I expect so. I don't know for sure if Henry is rich, but I should think so. But we cannot use so after know or be sure. There's been an accident. ~ Yes, I know, NOT / know-so. Are you sure you're doing the right thing? ~ Yes, I'm sure, NOT I-m-sure so. There are two negative structures. NEGATIVE + SO Is it raining? ~ I don't think so. Are you going to the concert? ~ I don't expect so. With expect and think, we normally use the negative and so. POSITIVE + not Is it raining? ~ I hope not. Have we won a prize? ~ I'm afraid not. With be afraid, guess and hope, we use the positive and not. We can use believe and suppose in either structure. Will there be any seats left? ~ I don't suppose so. OR I suppose not. 43 Exercises So and neither (A) Andrew has just met Jessica at a party. They are finding out that they have a lot in common. Put in the structures with so and neither. Andrew: I haven't been to a party for ages. ? Jessica: Neither have 1.1 hate crowded rooms. ? Andrew: Yes, so do I. I'm not a party-goer, really. 1 Jessica: No,………………………………. . I can't make conversation. 2 Andrew: ………………………………. You know, I'm a quiet sort of person. 3 Jessica: And……………………….. .......... I lead a pretty quiet life. 4 Andrew: Well,. …………… ......................... I haven't got many friends. 5 Jessica: ………………………............. And I would really like a good friend. 6 Andrew: Oh, ................................................ 2 So and neither (A) Look at the table and complete the sentences. Music Travel Skiing Cooking ? ? 1 2 3 4 5 6 Mark Claire Melanie Emma / / X X X / / X X X / / / X X / Claire can ski, and so can Melanie. Mark isn't keen on cooking, and neither is Claire. Melanie doesn't like travelling much, and ...............................................…………………… Mark has got lots of CDs, and ............................................................. ……………………. Emma can't ski, and ...................................................................................................................... Claire isn't a music lover, and .....................................……………………………………… Melanie cooks quite often, and .............................................................................................. …. Mark travels quite a lot, and ................................................................................................…… 3 I think so, etc (B) Complete these short conversations. Put in structures with so or not and use the words in brackets. ? ? Laura: Does the library open on Saturdays? (think) Trevor: Yes, / think so. But I'm not absolutely certain. Harriet: You can't go out for an evening meal wearing shorts, (guess) Mike: ! guess not. I'd better put some trousers on. 1 Sarah: Mark: Will there be a lot of people at the concert tonight? (expect) .................................................. Th er e aren't usu ally ver y man y. 2 Daniel: Vicky: 3 David: Melanie: Are you going to apply for the job? (suppose) ……………………………… It's the only one available. Do you think it's going to rain? (hope) Well, ......................................... I 'm jus t ab out t o go ou t. 4 Nick: Will the match tak e place in this weath er? (think) Tom: 5 Claire: Assistant: In fact, I'm sure it won't. Are my photos ready, please? (afraid) …………………………………. . W e'r e h aving pr obl ems w ith t h e ma ch in e. TEST 9 Questions, negatives and answers (Units 34-43) Test 9A Read the conversation. Then look at the answers below and write the correct answer in each space. Judy: ( ►) Shall we go to the party tonight? Lisa: (1) ................... giving a party? Judy: Susan. You know her, (2) ................. you? Lisa: I'm (3) .................... sure. Has she got long dark hair? Judy: Yes, she (4)……………….. And she's quite tall. (5)…………….. you spoken to her? Lisa: No, I don't think (6)……………… . But I know who you mean. There are two sisters, Susan and Janet. They're twins, aren't (7) .....................? Judy: Yes, that's right. Lisa: (8)..................….one is Susan? Judy: Oh, I (9)…………….. know. They both look the same. I can't always tell them apart. Lisa: No, (10)……………… can I. In any case, I haven't been invited to the party. Judy: That (11)…………….. matter. Lisa: OK. (12)…………….. go to it then, shall we? ► 1 2 3 4 5 6 a) Do a) What's a) don't a) isn't a) got a) Haven't a) it b) Shall b) Who's b) know b) no b) has b) Having b) neither c) Would c) Whose c) so c) not c) so c) Not c) so 7 8 9 10 11 12 a) it a) What a) don't a) neither a) doesn't a) Could b) not b) Which b) no b) not b) isn't b) Let's c) they c) Who c) not c) so c) not c) Shall Test 9 B What would you say? Use the word in brackets, and use a question form in each sentence. ► You want to suggest a game of cards, (have) Shall we have a game of cards ? 1 You are asking Tessa where her house is. (live) 2 You want Janet to tell you what she is thinking, (about) 3 You are inviting a friend to come to your room, (like) 4 You are surprised that your friend missed the football match on television, (watch) 5 You are asking permission to take a photo, (may) 6 You are looking for Polly. You are asking her friend for information, (seen) 7 You are asking Nigel about the number of letters he has written, (how) 8 You are asking Nancy about the people coming to her party, (who) 9 You are asking Martin's wife if he cooks every day or once a week, (often) 10 You are asking about the weather tomorrow, (will) Test 9C Each of these replies is wrong. Write the correct reply. ► Is it going to snow? ~ I'm not thinking it. I don't think so. 1 Has the computer arrived? ~ No, not. 2 Don't you like curry? ~ Yes, I hate it. 3 Will you be in tonight? ~ Yes, I expect. 4 Horrible weather. ~It isn't very nice isn't it? 5 Would you like a sweet? ~ Yes, right. 6 I'm quite tired now. ~ Too am I. 7 You might catch my cold. ~ I-don't hope to. 8 The first train didn't stop. ~ Neither-the-second Test 9 D Rupert is at a job interview. Someone is asking him questions. Write the questions. ► Interviewer: Where do you live ? Rupert: Oh, I live in Longtown. 1 Interviewer: …………………………………………………………………………… Rupert: I'm twenty-three. 2 Interviewer: ..................................................................................................... ……… Rupert: Yes, I went to college. 3 Interviewer: .............................................................................………………………. Rupert: My interests? I don't have any, really. 4 Interviewer: ...................................................................................................................... Rupert: Which company? Oh, I work for BX Electric. 5 Interviewer: …………………………………………………………………………….. Rupert: Nothing. There's nothing I don't like about my job. Test9E Put in the missing word. ► How does this phone work? ~ You press this button. 1 The new building looks awful. ~ I agree. It…………….. ... look very nice. 2 Could you give me a receipt, please? ~ Yes, of……………. 3 This chair isn't very comfortable. ~ And………………. is this bed. 4 Didn't you watch 'Frankenstein' last night? ~…………………., I hate horror films. 5 What's this wood……………….. ? ~ I'm going to make a table. 6 I didn't say the wrong thing,………………… I? ~ Well, you weren't very polite. 7 Will there be any free gifts? ~ No, there…………… 8 Have they sent you some money? ~ No, I'm afraid…………..... . 9 Don't drop those plates,…………….. ... you? ~ OK, I'll be careful. 10 How……….. ........ is it to the station? ~ About half a mile. 11 Do those shoes fit you? ~ Yes, I think ......................... 12 Why…………………..we have a picnic? ~ Yes, good idea. 13 …………………foot is hurting? ~ My right one. 14 I feel a bit cold actually. -Yes,…………. ....... do I. 15 Who…………………eaten their ice-cream? ~ Oh, it's mine. I'm just going to eat it. 16 ………………… of these magazines would you like? ~ This one, please. 44 Ability: can, could and be able to A Can and can't Vicky: Natasha: Vicky: Natasha: Vicky: How many instruments can you play, Natasha? Three - the violin, the clarinet and the piano. That's terrific. You haven't got a piano here, though. No, but I can go to the music room in college and play the one in there. I'm not musical at all. I can't even sing. We use can to say that something is possible: that someone has an ability (Natasha can play the piano) or an opportunity (She can go to the music room). Can is usually pronounced but sometimes we say . The negative is cannot or can't . B Can and be able to In the present tense, be able to is a little more formal and less usual than can. Emma is good with computers. She can write/is able to write programs. But in some structures we always use be able to, not can. To-infinitive: It's nice to be able to go to the opera, (NOT to-can-go) After a modal verb: Melanie might be able to help us. Present perfect: It's been quiet today. I've been able to get some work done. For the future we use can or will be able to but NOT will-can. If we earn some money, we can go/we'll be able to go on holiday next summer. I'm afraid I can't come/I won't be able to come to the disco on Friday. But to suggest a possible future action, we normally use can. Let's have lunch together. We can go to that new restaurant. C Could and was/were able to For ability or opportunity in the past, we use could or was/were able to. Natasha could play (OR was able to play) the piano when she was four. In those days we had a car, so we could travel (OR were able to travel) very easily. To say that the ability or opportunity resulted in a particular action, something that really happened,we use was/were able to but not could. The plane was able to take off at eleven o'clock, after the fog had lifted. Luckily Mark was able to get (OR succeeded in getting) the work done in time. The drivers were able to stop (OR managed to stop) before they crashed into each other. Compare these two sentences. The children could swim when they were quite young, (a past ability) The children were able to swim across the river. (a past action) In negative sentences and questions, we can use either form. It was foggy, so the plane couldn't/wasn't able to take off. The pool was closed, so they couldn't/weren't able to have a swim. Could you/Were you able to describe the man to the police? We normally use could (not was/were able to) with verbs of seeing etc, and with verbs of thinking. We could see the village in the distance. As soon as Harriet opened the door, she could smell gas. I couldn't understand what was happening. 44 Exercises ► He can walk on his hands. 1 Can and can't (A) Look at the pictures and say what they can or can't do. Use these words: climb trees, juggle, lift the weights, play the violin, walk on his hands 1…………………………………………………………………………..3………………………………………………………………………………….. 2…………………………………………………………………………..4………………………………………………………………………………….. 2 Can and be able to (B) Harriet is visiting David, who hurt himself when he fell off a ladder. Complete the conversation using can or a form of be able to. Sometimes there is more than one possible answer. Harriet: Hello, David. I'm sorry I haven't (►) been able to come (come) and see you before. I've been really busy lately. How are you? David: I'm OK, thanks. (1)………………………………………. (I / walk) around now. The doctor says (2) ........................................................ (I / go) back to work soon. It'll be nice (3)......................................................….. (get) out again. I hate being stuck here like this. I haven't (4)……………………. .......................... (do) anything interesting. 3 Could and was/were able to (C) ► Which is closer to the meaning of the sentence 'Years ago I could run a marathon'? a) I ran a marathon at one particular time in the past. b) I was once fit enough to run a very long way. 1 Which of these sentences is correct? I was ill, so I couldn't go to the party. I was ill, so I wasn't able to go to the party. a) Only the first one. b) Only the second one. c) Both of them. 2 Which is closer to the meaning of the sentence 'Sarah was able to leave work early yesterday'? a) Sarah left work early yesterday. b) Sarah had the opportunity to leave work early yesterday, but we don't know if she took it. 4 Could and was/were able to (C) Put in could or was/were able to. Sometimes either is possible. Use a negative if necessary. ► Suddenly all the lights went out. We couldn't see a thing. 1 The computer went wrong, but luckily Emma………………………… put it right again. 2 There was a big party last night. You………………………… hear the music half a mile away. 3 I learnt to read music as a child. I............................... read it when I was five. 4 People heard warnings about the flood, and they. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . move out in time. 5 The train was full. I ......................... find a seat anywhere. 45 Permission: can, may, could and be allowed to A Asking permission We use can, could or may to ask for permission. Can I use your pen? Could we borrow your ladder, please? ~ Well, I'm using it at the moment. May I see the letter? ~ Certainly. Could often sounds more polite than can. May is rather formal. B Giving and refusing permission To give permission we use can or may (but not could). You can wait in my office if you like. Could I borrow your calculator? ~ Of course you can. You may telephone from here, (a written notice) May is formal and is not often used in speech. To refuse permission we use can't or may not (but not couldn't). Could we picnic here? ~ I'm sorry. I'm afraid you can't. Members may not bring more than two guests into the club. We can also use must not. Luggage must not be left unattended. C Talking about permission We sometimes talk about rules made by someone else. To do this we use can, could and be allowed to. We use can to talk about the present, and we use could for the past. Present: Each passenger can take one bag onto the plane. Past: In the 1920s you could drive without taking a test. We can also use be allowed to. Present: Passengers are allowed to take one bag onto the plane. Future: Will I be allowed to record the interview on tape? Past: We weren't allowed to look round the factory yesterday. For a general permission in the past we use either could or was/were allowed to. / could always stay/1 was always allowed to stay up late as a child. But to say that the permission resulted in a particular action, something that really happened, we use was/were allowed to (but not could). I was allowed to leave work early yesterday. We were allowed to go into the control room when we looked around the power station. Compare these questions with may and be allowed to. ASKING FOR PERMISSION May I take a photo of you? (= Will you allow it?) ASKING ABOUT PERMISSION Are we allowed to take photos? (= What is the rule?) 45 Exercises 1 Asking permission (A) How would you ask for permission in these situations? Use Can I...?, Could I...? or May I...? and these verbs: borrow, join, look at, use ► You are at a friend's flat. You want to make a phone call. Can I use your phone? 1 You need a calculator. The person sitting next to you has got one. 2 You have gone into a cafe. Three people who you know from work are sitting at a table. You go over to the table. 3 You had to go to a lecture, but you were ill. Your friend went to the lecture and took notes. Next day you are well again and you see your friend. 2 Giving and refusing permission (B) A policeman is telling you what the signs mean. What does he say? Use can and can't and these verbs: drop, go, have, park, play, smoke, turn ? ? 1 2 Policeman: You can't go this way. You can park here. ..................................... ………………………. 3 4 5 ..................................... ........................………. ………………………. 3 Be allowed to (C) Put in the correct forms. Rita: I hear you've moved into a new flat with a couple of friends. Emma: Yes, it's a nice flat, but the landlady is really strict. (►) We aren't allowed to do (we / not / allow / do) anything. It was my birthday last month, and (1)..................................................................(I / not / allow / have) a party. Rita: Oh, (2)…………………………………. .......... (we / allow / have) parties at our place, luckily. (3)…………………...................................... (we / allow / do) anything, more or less. We're hoping to have an all-night party soon, but I'm not absolutely sure if (4) ……………………………………….. (we / allow/hold) it. 4 May I...? or Am I allowed to ...? (C) Are you asking for permission, or are you asking what the rule is? Put in May I... ? or Am I allowed to ...? ? May 1 use your computer? ? Am I allowed to smoke in this cinema? 1 ............................. cross the road here? 2 .............................. ask you a personal question? 3 ............................ rollerblade in this park? 4 ………………… drive a car without insurance? 5 ........................... read your magazine? 46 Possibility and certainty: may, might, could, must, etc A May, might and could Rachel: Whose bag is that? Daniel: / don't know. It may belong to Maria's friend. Vicky: It might be a bomb. It could explode at any moment. We use may or might to say that something is possible or that it is quite likely. We can use them for the present or the future. It may/might be a bomb. (= Perhaps it is a bomb.) / may/might go to the disco tomorrow. (= Perhaps I will go to the disco.) We can use could to say that something is possible. The story could be true, I suppose. (= Possibly it is true.) You could win a million pounds! (= Possibly you will win a million pounds.) Sometimes could means only a small possibility. It is possible (but not likely) that you will win a million pounds. In some situations we can use may, might or could. It may/might/could rain later. After may, might or could we can use a continuous form (be + an ing-form). That man may/might be watching us. (= Perhaps he is watching us.) Sarah may/might be working late tonight. (= Perhaps she will be working late.) I'm not sure where Matthew is. He could be playing squash. (= Possibly he is playing squash.) B May, might and could in the negative The negative forms are may not, might not/mightn't, and could not/couldn't. MAY NOT AND MIGHT NOT COULDN'T Something negative is possible. Daniel may not get the job. Tom might not be in. I mightn't finish the marathon tomorrow. (It is possible that I will not finish it.) Something is impossible. Vicky is afraid of heights. She couldn't climb onto the roof. I'm completely unfit. I couldn't run a marathon. (It is impossible for me to run it.) C Must and can't MUST CAN’T We use must when we realize that something is certainly true. She isn't answering the phone. She must be out. I had my keys a moment ago. They must be here somewhere. Andrew isn't here. He must be working in the library. We use can't when we realize that something is impossible. 53 Might/could/must have been We haven't walked far. You can't be tired yet. Life can't be easy when you have to spend it in a wheelchair. Nick can't be touring Scotland. I saw him hat this morning. page 379 Mustn't in American English t> 51A Could in suggestions 46 Exercises 1 Might be and might be doing (A) Vicky and Rachel are at college. They're looking for their friend Natasha. Complete the conversation. Use may or might and the verb in brackets. Sometimes you need to use the continuous. Vicky: I can't find Natasha. Have you seen her? Rachel: (►) She might be (she / be) in the music room. (►) She may be practising (she / practise). Vicky: No, she isn't there. I thought (1)……………………………………….(she / be) with you. Rachel: It's a nice day. (2)………………………………………………………(she / be) on the lawn. (3) ………………………………………………….. (she / sit) out there reading the paper. Or (4) ………………………………………………(she / have) a coffee. (5) …………………………………………………..(you / find) her in the canteen. Emma: No, I've looked there. Rachel: Well, here comes Jessica. (6) ……………………………………. (she / know). 2 May and might (A-B) Add a sentence with may or might (both are correct). ? I'm not sure if it's going to rain. It might rain. ? I don't know if we'll see an elephant. We may see one. 1 I can't say whether Daniel will win ....................................................................................................….. 2 I haven't decided if I'm having a holiday. ....................................................... ………………………... 3 I don't know if we'll get an invitation. ........................................................................................ ……… 4 I've no idea whether Sarah will be late...................................................................................................... 3 I'm not sure if my friends are visiting me................................................................................ …………. 3 Mightn't and couldn't (B) Put in mightn't or couldn't. ? I've got one or two things to do, so I mightn't have time to come out tonight. ? David couldn't work as a taxi driver. He can't drive. 1 We're going to need lots of glasses. We ......................................... have enough, you know. 2 Mark ………………………………………be in the office tomorrow. He thinks he's getting a cold. 3 We ……………………………………………………. possibly have a dog, living in a small flat like this. ■1 How can you work with all this noise? I ……………………………..work in such conditions. 5 Don't ring tomorrow because I.......................................... be in. I'm not sure what I'm doing. 4 Must, can't and might (A, C) A reporter is interviewing Mrs Miles for a TV news programme. Complete the conversation. Put in must, can't or might. Mrs Miles: My name's Nora Miles, and I'm going to do a parachute jump. Reporter: Mrs Miles, you're seventy-three, and you're going to jump out of an aeroplane. You (►) must be mad. You (1) ...................................... be serious. Mrs Miles: It really (2)…………………………………..be wonderful to look down from the sky. I've always wanted to try it. Reporter: But anything could happen. You (3) .......................................... be injured or even killed. I wouldn't take the risk. Mrs Miles: Well, young man, your life (4) ……………………….. be much fun if you never take risks. You ought to try it. You never know - you (5) ………………………………enjoy it. Reporter: Enjoy it? You (6) ........................................ be joking! 47 Necessity: must and have to A Present, past and future We use must and have to/has to to say that something is necessary. You'll be leaving college soon. You must think about your future. We're very busy at the office. I have to work on Saturday morning. Mark has to get the car repaired. There's something wrong with the brakes. When we use the past, or the future with will, we need a form of have to. Emma had to go to the dentist yesterday, NOT She must go-to~the-dentist yesterday. That wasn't very good. We'll have to do better next time. And in other structures we also use a form of have to, not must. To-infinitive: / don't want to have to wait in a queue for ages. After a modal verb: Emma has toothache. She might have to go to the dentist. Present perfect: Mark has had to drive all the way to Glasgow. For negatives and questions with have to/has to and had to, we use a form of do. / don't have to work on Sundays. Why does Andrew have to study every evening? Did you have to pay for your second cup of coffee? ~ No, I didn't. I don't have to work means that it is not necessary for me to work (see Unit 48B). B Must or have to? Both must and have to express necessity, but we use them differently. MUST HAVE TO We use must when the speaker feels that something is necessary. You must exercise. (I'm telling you.) We must be quiet. (I'm telling you.) We use have to when the situation makes something necessary. I have to exercise. (The doctor told me.) We have to be quiet. (That's the rule.) I/we must can also express a wish. / must buy a newspaper. 1 want to see the racing results. We must invite Claire. She's wonderful company. 1 have to buy a newspaper. The boss asked melt get one. We have to invite Trevor and Laura. They invited us last time. Have got to Have got to means the same as have to, but have got to is informal. We use it mainly in the present. I have to/I've got to make my sandwiches. My father has to/has got to take these pills. Do we have to apply/Have we got to apply for a visa? 48 Mustn't and needn't 47 Exercises 1 Have to (A) Complete the conversations. Use the words in brackets and a form of have to. ► Melanie: David's broken his leg. He's had to go (he's / go) to hospital. Harriet: Oh no! How long will he have to stay (will / he / stay) there? Melanie: I don't know. 1 Claire: I parked my car outside the hairdresser's, and while I was in there, the police took the car away. I've got it back now. But .....................................................(I / pay) a lot of money. Henry: How much............................................ (you / pay)? Claire: Two hundred pounds! 2 Trevor: That door doesn't shut properly. . . (you / slam) it every time. Laura: .................................................... (you / will / fix) it then, won't you? 3 Jessica: You're always taking exams. Why ................................ (you / take) so many? Andrew: …………………………..(I / will / take) a lot more if I want a good job. 4 Mike: We're in a new house now......................................(we / move). The old place was too small. Nick: Did it take you long to find a house? Mike: No, we found one easily. ........................................ (we / not / look) very hard. But it was in bad condition....................................... (we've / do) a lot of work on it. 5 Nick: My brother.........................……………………… (start) work at five o'clock in the morning. Melanie: That's pretty early. What time ................................(he / get) up? Nick: Half past three. 2 Must and have to (B) Write a sentence with must, have to or has to. ► The sign says: 'Passengers must show their tickets.' So passengers have to show their tickets. ► The children have to be in bed by nine. Their parents said: 'You must be in bed by nine.' 1 Laura has to get to work on time. Her boss told her: ................................................................................................ 2 The police told Nick: 'You must keep your dog under control.' So Nick ……………………………………………………………………………….... 3 The pupils have to listen carefully. The teacher says: ……………………………………………………………………. 4 The new sign says: 'Visitors must report to the security officer.' So now ………………………………………………………………………………… 3 Must or have to? (B) Put in must ox have to/has to. Choose which is best for the situation. ► I have to go to the airport. I'm meeting someone. 1 You ...................................... lock the door when you go out. There've been a lot of break-ins recently. 2 Daniel …………………………..go to the bank. He hasn't any money. 3 I ............................... work late tomorrow. We're very busy at the office. 4 You really........................................ make less noise. I'm trying to concentrate. 5 I think you ................................... pay to park here. I'll just go and read that notice. 6 You really ................................. hurry up, Vicky. We don't want to be late. 7 I .................................. put the heating on. I feel really cold. 48 Necessity: mustn't, needn't, etc A Mustn't or needn't? We use must to say that something is necessary (see Unit 47). You must be careful with those glasses. I must remember my key. Now compare mustn't and needn't. MUSTN'T We use mustn't to say that something is a bad idea. You mustn't drop those glasses. They'll break. I mustn't forget my key, or I won't get in. You mustn't wear your best clothes. You'll get them dirty. NEEDN'T We use needn't when something is not necessary, You needn't wash those glasses. They're dean. We needn't make sandwiches. There's a cafe. You needn't wear your best clothes. You can wear what you like. B Don't have to and don't need to We can use don't have to and don't need to when something is not necessary. The meaning is the same as needn't. You don't have to / don't need to wash those glasses. They're clean. Mark doesn't have to /doesn't need to finish the report today. He can do it at the weekend. For American usage see page 379. For the past we use didn't. The food was free. We didn't have to pay/We didn't need to pay for it. C Didn't need to or needn't have? Daniel hadn't booked a seat, but luckily the train wasn't full. He didn't need to stand. Trevor and Laura booked a table for dinner. But the restaurant was empty. They needn't have booked a table. DIDN'T NEED TO NEEDN'T HAVE We use didn't need to when something was not necessary. Standing was not necessary because there were seats. Mark didn't need to hurry. He had lots of time. He drove slowly along the motorway. We didn't need to go to the supermarket because we had plenty of food. We use needn't have + a past participle for something we did which we now know was not necessary, e.g. booking a table. Mark needn't have hurried. After driving at too speed, he arrived half an hour early. We needn't have gone to the supermarket. We already had a pizza for tonight. Sometimes we can use didn't need to when the action happened, even though it was not Mark didn't need to hurry, but he drove at top speed. necessary. He likes driving fast. 48 Exercises i Must, mustn't or needn't? (A) Put in must, mustn't or needn't. ► Laura: You needn't take an umbrella. It isn't going to rain. Trevor: Well, I don't know. It might do. Laura: Don't lose it then. You mustn't leave it on the bus. 1 Vicky: Come on. We ..................... hurry. We ...................... be late. Rachel: It's only ten past. We ................. hurry. There's lots of time. 2 Claire: My sister and I are going a different way. Guide: Oh, you .................... go off on your own. It isn't safe. We.................... keep together in a group. 3 David: I'll put these cups in the dishwasher. Melanie: No, you .................put them in there. It might damage them. In fact, we ..................wash them at all. We didn't use them. 4 Secretary: I ....... forget to type this letter. Mark: Yes, it................. go in the post today because it's quite urgent. But the report isn't so important. You…………….. type the report today. 2 Don't have to (B) An old woman is talking to a reporter from her local newspaper. She is comparing life today with life in the past. Complete her sentences using don't have to, doesn't have to or didn't have to. ► We had to make our own fun in the old days. There wasn't any television then. These days people don't have to make their own fun. 1 There's so much traffic now. You have to wait ages to cross the road. In those days you 2 I had to work long hours when I was young. But children today have it easy. They………………………………………………………………………… 3 My father had to work in a factory when he was twelve. Just imagine! Today a twelve-year-old child 4 There's so much crime today, isn't there? People have to lock their doors now. It was better in the old days when people ...................................................................................................... 5 We had to wash our clothes by hand. There weren't any washing-machines, you know. Nowadays people ............................................................................................................................... 3 Didn't need to or needn't have? (C) Write the sentences using didn't need to or needn't have. ► The previous owners had already decorated the flat, so we didn't need to decorate it ourselves (we / decorate / it / ourselves). 1 Luckily we were able to sell our old flat before we bought the new one, So……………………………………………………………………. (we / borrow/any money). 2 It was very hot yesterday, so I watered all the flowers. And now it's pouring with rain (I / bother). 3 We've done the journey much more quickly than I expected. ...................................................................................................................... (we / leave / so early). 4 K friend had already given me a free ticket to the exhibition, So …………………………………………………………………………. (I / pay / to go in). 5 Service was included in the bill, so…………………………………………………….. (you / tip / the waiter). It was a waste of money. 49 Should, ought to, had better and be supposed to B Should and ought to We use should and ought to to say what is the best thing or the right thing to do. There is no difference in meaning. You're not very well. Perhaps you should see a doctor. Your uncle was very kind to me. I ought to write him a letter of thanks. People shouldn't break/oughtn't to break their promises. We can also use should and ought to in questions to ask for advice. Where should I put this picture, do you think? It's a difficult problem. How ought we to deal with it? After should or ought to we can use a continuous form (be + an ing-form). It s half past six already. I should be cooking the tea. Why are you sitting here doing nothing? You ought to be working. C Had better We use had better to say what is the best thing to do in a situation. It's cold. The children had better wear their coats. The neighbours are complaining. We'd better turn the music down. My wife is waiting for me. I'd better not be late. We could also use should or ought to in these examples, although had better is stronger. The speaker sees the action as necessary and expects that it will happen. D Be supposed to We use be supposed to when we are talking about the normal or correct way of doing things. The guests are supposed to buy flowers for the hostess. Look at these cars. This area is supposed to be kept clear of traffic. The bus driver needs to concentrate. You're not supposed to talk to him. How am I supposed to cook this? ~ It tells you on the packet. We can use was/were supposed to for the past. It's eleven o'clock. You were supposed to be here at ten thirty, you know. 52D Shalt used to ask for advice 49 Exercises 1 Should and ought to (B) Put in should, shouldn't, ought or oughtn't. (Look for the word to.) Vicky: I can't come out tonight, Rachel. I (►) ought to do some more work. I'm behind with everything. I've got so much to do. Rachel: You (1) ....................... worry so much, Vicky. Don't panic. You (2)…………………. to relax sometimes. You (3)………………… take a break. Vicky: I know 1(4) ....................... panic, but I do. I can't help it. Rachel: Anyway, you're doing OK, aren't you? Your results have been good. You (5)………………… be pleased. You (6)…………………. to invent problems for yourself. 2 Had better (C) What would you say in these situations? Add a sentence with 'd better (not) and the words in brackets. ► Vicky doesn't feel well. She's got a headache. What might you say to her? (an aspirin) You'd better take an aspirin. 1 You and Daniel are meeting Rachel. You've both arrived, but she isn't there yet. She is usually late. (wait)...................................................................................... 2 Ilona is leaving her bike outside the swimming-pool. You know it won't be safe if she leaves it unlocked. (lock) 3 Some friends are going to visit you today. Your room is in a mess. What do you think? (tidy) 4 Nick is giving you a lift in his old sports car. There's a speed limit, and there's a police car behind you. (too fast) ........................................................................................ 5 There's an exam tomorrow. Neither you nor Rachel have done any work for it. (some revision) ..................................................................................................................... 3 Be supposed to (D) Add a sentence using be (not) supposed to and these verbs: leave it outside, report to the police, stand in a queue, take two before meals, watch it ► You shouldn't bring your bike in here. You're supposed to leave it outside. 1 I've got some pills......................................................................................... 2 Foreign visitors can't travel freely here. ...................................................... 3 Be careful waiting for a bus in England. .................................................... 4 This film isn't for under-sixteens. ............................................................ Should, ought to, had better and be supposed to (A-D) Complete the conversation. Use should, ought to, had better or be supposed to and the verbs in brackets. Usually there is more than one correct answer. Vicky: What time (►) are we supposed to be (we / be) at the coffee morning? Rachel: The invitation says ten o'clock. Vicky: Well, it's ten now. (1) ................................................ we / hurry). (2)……………………………………… (we / not / be) late. Rachel: Oh, it won't matter if we're a bit late. Vicky: I think it would be rude, wouldn't it? I don't think people (3)............................................ (arrive) late when they've been invited to something. Rachel: You worry too much. (4) ........ ………… ... (you / not / take) everything so seriously, Vicky. It's a coffee morning, not a job interview. (5)……………………………. .............. (we / not / get) there exactly on time. 50 Asking people to do things A Polite requests We can use can or could in a request, when we ask someone to do something. Can everyone be quiet for a minute, please? Can you keep me informed'? ~ Yes, of course. Could you lend me ten pounds until tomorrow? ~ Sorry, I haven't got ten pounds. I wonder if you could explain something to me. ~ I'll try. Could is often more polite than can. In a request we can also use Do you mind . . . ? or Would you mind...? with an ing-form. Do you mind waiting a moment? ~ No, I can wait. Would you mind sitting in the back? ~ No, not at all. We can also use Would you like to ...? Would you like to lay the table for me? ~ Yes, of course. We do not use Do you like ...? for a request, NOT DO YOU LIKE TO LIE THE TABLE FOR ME? It is always worth taking the trouble to use one of these request forms in English. We do not normally say Lay the table for me. This can sound very abrupt and impolite without a phrase like Could you . . . ? B The imperative We can sometimes use the imperative form to tell someone what to do. Bring another chair. Hurry up or we'll be late. We form the negative with don't. Don't be silly. Don't make so much noise. We can use an imperative when we are with friends in an informal situation. But we do not use it to a stranger or in a more formal situation. Excuse me. Could you tell me the way to Oxford Street, please? NOT Tell-me-the way to Oxford Street-please. Would you mind sending me a copy of your catalogue? NOT Send-me-a-copy-of your-catalogue. Even people in authority often avoid using the imperative to give orders. Instead they can use I want/I'd like you to . . . , You must..., or a polite request form. Manager: / want you all to be at the meeting. Policeman: You must wait until you see the green light. Doctor: Could you lie down on the bed, please? C Asking for things We use Can I/we have...? and Could I/we have . . . ? when we ask someone to give us something. Can we have our room key, please? Could I have a receipt, please? We can also say Could you give me a receipt, please?but we do not use the imperative. NOT Give-me-a receipt. When we ask for something in a shop or a cafe, we can simply name what we want, but we must say please A large white loaf, please. Two coffees, please. We can also use I'd like ... or I'll have ... I'd like a chicken sandwich, please. I'll have a coffee. 45 Can and could for permission 52B Would like 50 Exercises 1 Asking people to do things (A-C) Complete these sentences and write them in: Can I... a fork, please? Could ... have a towel, . . . ? Could you ... the ... for me? Would you ... answering the phone? ► Could you open the door for me? 2 ...... ……………………………………… 1 3 ............................................................................. ................................................................................. 2 Asking people to do things (A-C) Mr Atkins is the boss at Zedco. He tells everyone what to do. Complete his sentences. Use these words: can, could, have, like, mind, must, want, wonder, would ► Would you mind making some tea, Alan? 1 You…………………inform me of any developments. 2 Could I ................... the latest sales figures, please? 3 Would you ...................to arrange a meeting some time next week, Fiona? 4 I……………….everyone to read the report. 5 ………………..I see the file, please, Mark? 6 ………………..you mind putting this in writing? 7 I……………..if you could translate this letter, Linda. 8 ……………… you meet our customer at the airport? 3 Asking people to do things (A-C) Read about each situation and then make a request. Use the word in brackets. ► It is cold in the restaurant. Ask the waiter to shut the window, (could) Could you shut the window, please ? 1 You are buying a coat. Ask the assistant for a receipt, (can) 2 You want to know the time. Ask someone in the street, (could) Excuse me ............................................................................................................... 3 You need someone to help you. Ask a friend, (can) 4 You have bought some food, but you haven't got a bag. Ask the assistant, (could) 5 You are carrying a tray. Ask someone to clear a space on the table, (mind) 6 You are on the phone. You want to speak to the manager, (could) 51 Suggestions, offers and invitations A Suggestions We can use Shall we ...? or Let's to make a suggestion. It's a lovely day. Shall we go for a walk? ~ Yes, OK. Let's play some music. ~ Good idea. We can also use could for a suggestion. We could watch this comedy on TV tonight. ~ Well, actually I've seen it before. You could invite a few friends around. ~ Yes, why not? We can also use Why don't...? Why don't we have a look round the market? To ask for a suggestion we use shall, should or can. Where shall/should we go for our holiday? ~ What about Spain? What can I get Claire for her birthday? ~ I've no idea. B Offers We can use will or can to offer to do something. I'll carry your bag. ~ Oh, thanks. We can give you a lift. ~ Oh, that would be great. Thank you. We can also use question forms with shall or can. Shall we pay you the money now? ~ Oh, there's no hurry. Can I get a taxi for you? ~ Yes, please. To offer food or drink, we use would like. Would you like one of these chocolates? ~ Yes, please. Thank you. Would anyone like more coffee? ~ No, thanks. We can also use Will/Won't you have ... ? Will you have a biscuit? ~ Thank you. Won't you have something to drink? ~ Not for me, thank you. In informal speech we can use the imperative. Have a biscuit. ~ Thank you. C Invitations The words we use in invitations are similar to those we use in offers of food and drink (see B). To invite someone, we often use Would you like to ...? Would you like to have lunch with us? ~ Yes, I'd love to. Thank you. Would like can have a verb with to after it, or an object with a noun. Would you like to stay the night. ~ Oh, that's very kind of you. Would you like a bed for the night? ~ Are you sure it's not too much trouble? We can also use Will/Won't you ...? Will you join us for coffee? ~ Yes. Thanks. Won't you sit down? In informal speech we can use the imperative. Come and have coffee with us. Please sit down. 52 Will, would, shall and should 51 Exercises i Suggestions, offers and invitations (A-C) Put the words in the right order and write in the sentences: post I for you I I'll / that letter have / one of these / wont I you for a minute I shall / stop /we a game / like / would /you ► Wont you have one of these? 2 ......................................... 1 ……………………………….. 3 ......................................... 2 Suggestions and offers (A-B) Complete the conversation. Put in could, shall, will or would. Daniel: Where (►) shall we have our picnic, then? Rachel: This looks all right. (1) ......................we sit here? Emma: Oh, I've forgotten the sausages. They're in the car. Matthew: (2) .................... I get them? Emma: Oh, thanks, Matthew. Vicky: We (3)…………………sit by those trees. It looks nicer over there. Rachel: No, it's fine here. Daniel: Yes, it's better here, I think. Emma: (4) ................ you like a sandwich, Vicky? Vicky: Oh, thank you. Emma: (5) ....................you have one, Rachel? Matthew: And here are the sausages. (6)…………….. anyone like one? 3 Suggestions, offers and invitations (A-C) What would you say? There is more than one correct answer. ► A friend has called at your flat. Invite him to come in. Would you like to come in ? 1 Offer your visitor a cup of tea. 2 You don't know what to say in your letter. Ask your friend for a suggestion. 3 You are walking in town with a friend. Suggest having a cup of coffee. 4 A woman you know is afraid to walk home alone. Offer to walk home with her. 5 You are writing to a friend. Invite her to visit you one weekend. 52 Will, would, shall and should A Will and would for predictions We can use will for a prediction (see Unit 25C). It's midnight, and Sarah is still working. She'll he tired tomorrow. We're going to Cornwall for the weekend. ~ Thafll he nice. Wait a minute while I send this e-mail. It won't take long. We use would for a past prediction or a prediction about a possible situation. Past: At midnight Sarah was still working. She would be tired the next day. Possible: How about going to Cornwall next weekend? ~ That would be nice. I wouldn't enjoy a camping holiday. We can use shall instead of will, and should instead of would, but only in the first person, after I and we, I will/shall be twenty-five in June. We would/should like to meet your family. But NOT My-friend- should- like ... Shall and should are a little formal here. B Would like We can use would like, usually shortened to 'd like, when we ask for something. I'd like a brochure, please. We'd like to order our drinks first. This is a more polite way of saying / want a brochure, for example. We also use would like in offers and invitations. Would you like a free gift? Would you like to visit the museum with us? C Decisions and refusals We can use will for an instant decision or for an offer. Decision: Tea or coffee? ~ I'll have coffee, please, (see Unit 23B) Offer: I'll wait for you if you like. ~ Oh, thanks. I won't be long. We use won't and wouldn't for a refusal. The strikers won't go back to work until they get a pay increase. The key went in the lock, but it wouldn't turn. I won't... is a strong refusal. / won't listen to any more of this nonsense. D Shall and should We use Shall I ...? in offers and Shall we ...? in suggestions. Offer: Shall I wait for you? ~ Oh, thanks. I won't be long. Suggestion: Shall we go to the park? ~ Good idea. We also use shall to ask for a suggestion. What shall we have for lunch? We use either shall or should to ask for advice. I'm in terrible trouble. What shall/should I do? We use should to say what is the best thing or the right thing to do. People should exercise regularly. You shouldn't spend all your money as soon as you've earned it. 23 Will and shall 49 Should 51 Suggestions, offers and invitations 52 Exercises 1 Will and would (A-B) Complete the conversation. Put in will, won't, would or wouldn't. Emma: We (►) won't be here next September. It's hard to believe, isn't it? In a few months our student days (1)......... ……….be over. Matthew: It (2)……………………be long now. I wish I had a job. Then 1(3)………………know where I was going. Emma: Who knows what the future (4) ................................ bring? Matthew: Why don't we get married, Emma? Then at least we (5)………………….be together. Emma: I don't think so, Matthew. It (6)…………………be a good idea. Matthew: I couldn't live without you, Emma. Emma: I really (7)………………. like to believe you, Matthew. 2 Some other uses of will and would (B-C) Complete the conversations. Put in will, won't, would or wouldn't with these verbs: eat, give, go, help, let, like, open, stand ► Vicky: Have you noticed how thin Jessica has got? Rachel: She's on a diet. She won't eat anything except carrots. 1 Harriet: Mike and I……………..you get everything ready. Mike: Yes, we're quite willing to lend a hand. 2 Laura: You're late. I thought you were going to leave work early today. Trevor: Sorry. The boss ........................................... me go. 3 Mark: Sarah and I ........................................you a lift, Mike. Sarah: Yes, we're going your way. 4 Harriet: I heard Rita has quarrelled with her boyfriend. Melanie: That's right. If he's invited to the party, she............. 5 Vicky: I've had enough of table tennis for one day. Rachel: OK. Maybe Daniel......................................... a game with me. 6 Trevor: What's wrong with the washing-machine? Laura: When I tried to use it earlier, the door ................... 7 Mike: This lamp is always falling over. Harriet: It ...................................... up properly. 3 Will, would, shall and should (A-D) What would you say? Use will, would, shall or should. ► Offer to make the tea. Shall I make the tea ? 1 Suggest going to the swimming-pool. 2 Refuse to take any risks. 3 Say politely that you want a shower. 4 Tell someone it's best they don't decide in a hurry. 5 Predict the end of the world in the year 3000. 53 It may/could/must have been, etc A Introduction Vicky, Emma and Matthew are at a club in town. Vicky: Where's Daniel? He should have been here half an hour ago. Emma: He may have got lost. It isn't easy to find this place. Matthew: He could have forgotten all about it, I suppose. Emma: He can't have forgotten. We were talking about it this morning. Matthew: Well, something must have delayed him. We can use a modal verb with the perfect (have + a past participle). We use this structure to talk about possible past events. B May have, might have and could have We use these forms to say that possibly something happened in the past. He may have got lost. (= Perhaps he has got lost.) You might have left your keys at work. (= Perhaps you left them at work.) Someone could have stolen them. (= It is possible that someone stole them.) We also use could have for an opportunity that we didn't take or a possible result that didn't happen. We could have gone out somewhere, but we were too tired. You were very lucky. There could have been a terrible accident. May not have, might not have and couldn't have Compare these different uses. MAY/MIGHT NOT HAVE COULDN T HAVE Possibly something did not happen. Daniel may not have caught the bus. I expect he missed it. (Perhaps he didn't catch it.) 7 might not have locked the door. (Perhaps I didn't lock it.) It is impossible that something happened. Daniel couldn't have caught the bus. It doesn't run on Sundays. (It is impossible for him to have caught the bus.) Must have and can't have Must and can't are opposites. MUST HAVE My watch says it's only ten past two. It must have stopped. I realize it is certainly true that my watch has stopped. CAN T HAVE You've only spent five minutes on that job. You can't have done it properly. I realize it is impossible that you did the job properly. Should have and ought to have We use these forms when someone didn't do the right thing. We didn't play very well We should have played better. I got lost. ~ Sorry. I ought to have drawn you a map. It was a lovely old building. They shouldn't have knocked it down. 29A Will have done 46 May, might, could, must, can't 48C Needn't have 49 Should, ought to 146 Would have 53 Exercises It may/could/must have been, etc (B-D) Look at each conversation and choose the best sentence, a) or b). ► Has the car broken down? ~ Well, we may have run out of petrol. a) I'm sure there's no petrol left, b) I think there's no petrol left. 1 You could have had a free holiday. ~ Yes, we could, but the dates weren't convenient. a) We had a free holiday, b) We didn't have a free holiday. 2 Did you record the programme? ~ I can't remember. I might not have done. a) I'm not sure if I recorded it. b) I certainly didn't record it. 3 Can't you find that newspaper? ~ No, someone must have thrown it away. a) It was necessary to throw it away, b) I realize now that it was thrown away. Should and ought to (E and Unit 49B) Complete the replies. Use should/ought to or should have/ought to have. ► Rita: Tom's car was stolen. He hadn't locked it. David: I suppose it's his fault then. He should have locked it. ► Tom: I can't sleep sometimes. My neighbours play music all night. Melanie: That's a nuisance. They shouldn't play music all night. 1 Mark: The picnickers left litter everywhere. Sarah: That's awful................................................................... 2 Emma: Jessica isn't very friendly, is she? She never says hello to people. Matthew: I know. 3 Rachel: I don't think Daniel's going to get that job. He was late for the interview. Natasha: That can't have looked very good. .................................................................. 4 Daniel: Did you see Vicky crossing the road? She didn't look. Emma: She could have been killed..................................................................................... 3 It may/could/must have been, etc (B-E) Complete the conversation. Use cant have, might have, must have and shouldn't have. Harriet: There's a parcel outside. The postman (>)must have left (leave) it. Mike: Well, (1) ........................................................ (he/ leave) it outside. He isn't supposed to do that. Someone (2)…………………………………….. (take) it. Why didn't he ring the bell? Harriet: He always rings. (3).................................................. (you / be) out when he came. Mike: I haven't been out. So (4) .......................................................... (he / ring) the bell. 4 It may/could/must have been, etc (B-E) Complete the sentences. The second person agrees with the first. Use might have, couldn't have, etc. ► Matthew: I'm sure the computer didn't make a mistake. That's impossible. Emma: No, of course the computer couldn't have made a mistake. 1 Mark: I can't see the letter here now. So clearly someone posted it. Alan: Yes, .......................................................................................................... 2 Natasha: It's possible Emma didn't hear the alarm. Rachel: Well, I suppose ..................................................... 3 Sarah: Henry drove at 100 miles an hour. Don't you think that's dangerous? Mark: Yes, I do................................................................................................................. 4 Daniel: I just don't believe that Andrew has failed the exam. Vicky: Andrew? Impossible! ............................................................................... Modal verbs (Units 44-53) Test 10A Decide which word is correct. ► Could I have some more tea, please? a) Could b) Shall c) Will d) Would 1 Everyone's asleep. We…………….. make a noise. a) couldn't b) mustn't c) needn't d) wouldn't 2 you like to go for a ride with us? a) Do b) Should c) Will d) Would 3 I wonder if this is the right way. lt .....notbe. a) can b) could c) might d) must 4 I don't think I want to see this film. ~ Oh, I think you…………….. enjoy it. a) can b) shall c) will d) would 5 I'm quite happy to walk. You .......... drive me home. a) don't b) haven't c) mustn't d) needn't 6 1 show you the way? ~ Oh, thank you. a) Do b) Shall c) Will d) Would 7 It's late. I think we ................. better go. a) had b) have c) should d) would 8 We all tried to push the van, but it…………….. move. a) can't b) couldn't c) won't d) wouldn't Test 10 B Some of these sentences are correct, and some have a word which should not be there. If the sentence is correct, put a tick (/). If it is incorrect, cross the unnecessary word out of the sentence and write it in the space. ? I won't be able to come to the meeting. / ? We didn't needn't have watered the garden because it's raining, didn't 1 Would you like to be in the team? 2 Did people have to bring their own sleeping-bags? 3 I could to ski when I was quite young. 4 Would you mind for checking these figures? 5 We may be go swimming tomorrow. 6 1 knew that I would be sorry later. 7 If you had fallen, you could have been hurt yourself. 8 We're not supposed to use this entrance. 9 You don't have to do all the work yourself. 10 Anna wasn't be allowed to take photos. Test 10C Write a second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► Perhaps Susan knows the address, (may) Susan may know the address. 1 We should be careful, (ought) 2 I managed to finish all my work, (able) 3 I realize that it was a terrible experience for you. (must) 4 It's against the rules for players to have a drink, (allowed) 5 The best thing for you to do is sit down, (better) 6 The report must be on my desk tomorrow morning, (has) 7 It is possible that Joanne did not receive my message, (might) 8 It's impossible for Martin to be jogging in this weather, (can't) 9 Tessa wants a cup of coffee, (like) 10 It was not necessary for Nancy to clean the flat, (didn't) Test 10D Say what the speaker is doing. After each sentence write one of the phrases from the box. asking for advice asking permission expressing a wish ► 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 giving an order inviting making a request Will you have a piece of cake? May I sit down? You must report to me every day. What jobs should I apply for? Would you like to spend the day with us? Shall I do the washing-up? Shall we sit outside? I'm sorry. You can't park here. Could you fill in this form, please? We really must have a nice big party. making a suggestion offering food offering to help refusing permission offering food Test 10 E Here is some information for visitors to New York City. Write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. Before you travel to the US, you (►) must find out what documents you need. British people do not (1)……………………….. to get a visa, but there are different rules for different nationalities. For example, you (2) .........................need to show that you have enough money with you. But there's one rule you can be sure about: everyone (3)………………………. . . to show their passport. The roads in New York are very busy, but don't worry - you (4)……………….. get around cheaply and easily by subway. Remember that you are not (5)………………… to smoke on public transport or in shops. And don't forget either that you are (6) ……………………. to tip taxi drivers and waiters. New York is not the most dangerous city in the US, but you really (7) …………..... walk along empty streets at night. And it is safer if you are (8) .................. to travel around in a group. 54 Passive verb forms A Introduction A passive verb is a form of be + a passive participle, e.g. is baked, was worn. Some participles are irregular (see page 383). B Summary of verb tenses Present simple: Present continuous: Present perfect: Past simple: Past continuous: Past perfect: ACTTVE PASSIVE We bake the bread here. We are baking the bread. We have baked the bread. We baked the bread yesterday. We were baking the bread. We had baked the bread. The bread is baked here. The bread is being baked. The bread has been baked. The bread was baked yesterday. The bread was being baked. The bread had been baked. We form negatives and questions in the same way as in active sentences. The bread isn't baked in a factory. The jacket hasn't been worn for years. Where is the bread baked? Has the jacket ever been worn by anyone else? The future and modal verbs in the passive We use be + a passive participle after will, be going to, can, must, have to, should, etc. The gates will be dosed this evening. This rubbish should be thrown away. The machine has to be repaired. The news might be announced soon. Seats may not be reserved. How can the problem be solved? ACTIVE Future: We will bake the bread next. We are going to bake the bread. Modal verb: We should bake the bread soon. We ought to bake the bread. PASSIVE The bread will be baked next. The bread is going to be baked. The bread should be baked soon. The bread ought to be baked. The passive with get We sometimes use get in the passive instead of be. Lots of postmen get bitten by dogs. I'm always getting chosen for the worst jobs. Last week Laura got moved to another department. Get is informal. We often use it for something happening by accident or unexpectedly. In negatives and questions in the present simple and past simple, we use a form of do. The windows don't get cleaned very often. How did the painting get damaged? We also use get in these expressions: get dressed/changed, get washed (= wash oneself), get engaged/married/divorced, get started (= start), get lost (= lose one's way). Emma and Matthew might get married. Without a map we soon got lost. 54 Exercises i The present continuous passive (B) Look at the pictures and say what is happening. Use these subjects: the car, dinner, a flag, some houses, the seals. Use these verbs: build, feed, raise, repair, serve. ► The car is being repaired. 2 Passive verb tenses (B) Complete the information about Barford Hall. Put in the correct form of these verbs. ► build (past simple) 1 own (present simple) 2 use (past continuous) 4 not look (past perfect) 3 buy (past simple) 5 do (present perfect) 6 use (present simple) The building at the end of the High Street is Barford Hall, which (►) was built in 1827. Today the Hall (1)…………………………………. by Bardale Council. It (2) ........ …………………as a warehouse when it (3) …………………… by the Council in 1952, and it (4) ........................ ……………...after very well. Since then a lot of work (5) ................................on it, and these days the Hall (6)………………………………….. as an arts centre. 3 The future and modal verbs in the passive (C) A press conference is being held. Put in the correct form of the verbs. ► Reporter: Can this new drug prolong human life? Professor: Yes, we believe that human life can be prolonged by the drug. 1 Reporter: Are you going to do any more tests on the drug? Professor: Yes, further tests ............................................................... soon. 2 Reporter: What…………….. the drug .............................................................. ? Professor: It will be called Bio-Meg. 3 Reporter: Can people buy the drug now? Professor: No, it ......................................................... by the public yet. 4 Reporter: Do you think the company should sell this drug? Professor: Yes, I think Bio-Meg .............................................................to anyone who wants it. 4 The passive with get (D) Put in get or got and the passive participle of these verbs: break, change, divorce, hurt, lose ► If we're going out to the theatre, I'd better get changed. 1 Daniel ........................... when he tried to break up a fight. 2 I know the way. We won't ................................................ 3 You'd better wrap up the glasses, so they don't ................................................. 4 They were only married a year before they ............................................... 55 Active and passive (1) A What is the sentence about? Compare these two entries in an encyclopedia. Alexander Graham Bell A British inventor who went to live in Canada and then the USA. Bell invented the telephone. Telephone An apparatus with which people can talk to each other over long distances. The telephone was invented by Alexander Graham Bell. Look at these two sentences. ACTIVE Bell invented the telephone. PASSIVE The telephone was invented by Bell. The two sentences have the same meaning, but they are about different things. One sentence is about Bell, and the other is about the telephone. Each sentence begins with the subject. The subject is the startingpoint of the sentence, the thing we are talking about. The new information about the subject comes at the end of the sentence. We say Bell invented the telephone because we are talking about Bell, and the new information is that he invented the telephone. We say The telephone was invented by Bell because we are talking about the telephone, and the new information is that it was invented by Bell. When the subject is the person or thing doing the action (the agent), then we use an active verb. When the subject is not the agent (is not doing the action), then we use a passive verb. ACTIVE PASSIVE B The passive and by the police, in 1876, etc In a passive sentence, when we want to say who or what did the action, we use by. On our way home we were stopped by the police. The new hospital will be opened by the Queen. The paper was all blown away by the wind. We can give other details about the action. For example, we can use a phrase saying when or where something happens. The telephone was invented in 1876. The visitors will be driven to the airport. The concerts are usually held at the university. Sometimes there is no phrase after the verb. A new swimming-pool is being built. All the documents have been destroyed. For more details see Unit 56. 55 Exercises 1 Active or passive verb? (A) Choose the correct verb forms in this news report about a storm. Millions of pounds' worth of damage (►has caused/has been caused by a storm which ( 1 ) swept/was swept across the north of England last night. The River Ribble ( 2 ) burst/was burst i t s banks after heavy rain. Many people (3) rescued/were rescued from the floods by fire-fighters, who (4) received/were received hundreds of calls for help. Wind speeds (5) reached/were reached ninety miles an hour in some places. Roads (6) blocked/were blocked by fallen trees, and electricity lines (7) brought/were brought down, leaving thousands of homes without electricity. 'Everything possible (8) is doing/is being done to get things back to normal,' a spokesman (9) said/was said. 2 By the police, etc (B) In each of these sentences underline who or what is doing the action (the agent). ► 1 2 3 4 5 6 The traffic was all heading out of town. The photo was taken by my brother. The water was pouring out of the hole. A policeman has been murdered by terrorists. We were woken by the alarm. The guide led a group of tourists around the castle. The dog has bitten several people. 3 Active and passive (A-B) You are telling a friend some news. Use the notes and complete the second sentence. Sometimes you need to use the active and sometimes the passive. ? (Past simple: Claire / go / to Florida / last month) You remember Claire? She went to Florida last month. ? (Present perfect: send / our luggage / to Australia) Bad news about our luggage. It's been sent to Australia. 1 (Past simple: Claude Jennings / win / the quiz competition) Did you hear about the quiz competition? It ................ 2 (Past simple: Mrs Miles / do / a parachute jump / last week) You know Mrs Miles? She .............................................. 3 (Present perfect: a bull / attack / David) Have you heard about David? He's ............ 4 (Present continuous: build / the house) Trevor and Laura have bought a house. It's still ........................ 5 (Present simple: Andrew / like / Jessica) Did I tell you about Andrew? He ............................. 6 (Present perfect: throw away / your stamp collection) Bad news about your stamp collection. It's ................ 7 (Present perfect: Martians / kidnap / my neighbours) Did I mention my neighbours? They've…………… 8 (Past simple: five people / see / the ghost) Did you hear about the ghost? It ............................ 56 Active and passive (2) A The passive and the agent In a passive sentence, we sometimes mention the agent (the person or thing doing the action). We use by with the agent. The cheque must be signed by the manager. The medals were presented by Nelson Mandela. But we mention the agent only if it is important for the meaning of the sentence. Sometimes we do not mention it. 1 We do not mention the agent if it does not add any new information. All our money and passports were stolen. A man was arrested last night. We do not need to say that the money was stolen 'by a thief or that the man was arrested 'by the police'. 2 We do not mention the agent if it is not important. The streets are cleaned every day. Oil has been discovered at the North Pole. Who discovered the oil is less important than the fact that it is there. 3 It is sometimes difficult to say who the agent is. This kind of jacket is considered very fashionable these days. A number of attempts have been made to find the Loch Ness monster. B Empty subjects (they, people, etc) Compare these two sentences. ACTIVE They clean the streets every day. PASSIVE The streets are cleaned every day. The new and important information is how often the streets are cleaned. We are not interested in saying who cleans them. In the active sentence we can use the 'empty subject' they. We sometimes use a sentence with an empty subject instead of the passive, especially in conversation. We can also use the empty subjects people, you, one and someone. ACTIVE People use this footpath all the time. You/One should check the details. Someone took my purse. PASSIVE This footpath is used all the time. The details should be checked. My purse was taken. When do we use the passive? We use the passive in both speech and writing, but it is more common in writing. We see it especially in textbooks and reports. We use it to describe activities in industry, science and technology, and also for official rules. Bananas are exported to Europe. The liquid is heated to boiling point. Payment can be made at any post office. Cars left here will be towed away. In these situations, it is often not important to say who is doing the action, or it is difficult to say. The passive is also often used in news reports. A number of political prisoners have been released. Talks will be held in London next week. 56 Exercises i The passive and the agent (A) Laura is writing to a friend. This is part of her letter. Someone broke into our house at the weekend. The burglar took some jewellery. But luckily he didn't do any damage. A very nice young police officer interviewed me. Detectives found some fingerprints, and the police computer identified the burglar. Police have arrested a man and are questioning him. But they haven't found the jewellery. Now complete the passive sentences in this conversation. Use a phrase with by only if it adds information. Laura: Our house (►) was broken into at the weekend Melanie: Oh no! Laura: Some jewellery (1)............................................. But luckily no damage (2) ............................................ Melanie: Did the police come and see you? Laura: Yes, they did. I (3) ........................................................................... Melanie: I don't suppose they know who did it. Laura: Well, amazingly they do. Some (4) .................................... , and the (5) ............................................................................... A man (6) .......................................................... and (7) Melanie: Wonderful. Laura: There's only one problem. The (8) 2 Active or passive sentence? (A) Write a paragraph from the notes about the first motor car. Some sentences are active and some are passive. Use a phrase with by only if it adds information. The first motor car was made by a Belgian ► a Belgian called Etienne Lenoir / make / the first called Etienne Lenoir. motor car 1. but / Lenoir / not produce / many cars / for sale But Lenoir 2. a German called Karl Benz / start / Commercial commercial production Benz 3 people / now / see / Benz / as the father / of the motor car Empty subjects (B) Reply to what people say. Use the suttject in brackets. ► Daniel: The bus fares have been increased, (they) Vicky: What? You mean they've increased the bus fares again! 1 Melanie: Bicycles should be used for short journeys, (people) David: Yes, I agree................... 2 Emma: A new source of energy has been discovered, (someone) Daniel: What? Did you say that ...................................................... 3 Rachel: This building is going to be knocked down, (they) Vicky: Well, no one told me that …………………………… 4 David: Eggs shouldn't be kept in a freezer, (you) Tom: Really? I didn't know .......................................................... 5 Vicky: Why isn't litter put in the bin? (people) Emma: Exactly. Why don't .......................................................... 57 Special passive structures A I was given ... Look at these sentences. Henry gave some flowers to Claire. Henry gave Claire some flowers. An active sentence with a verb like give can have two different structures (see Unit 3). If we use a passive sentence, either some flowers or Claire can be the subject. Some flowers were given to Claire. This is about the flowers, and it tells us who received them. Claire was given some flowers. This is about Claire, and it tells us what she received. It is quite normal in English for a person to be the subject in a passive sentence like the one about Claire. Mike was sent tickets for the concert. My wife is paid more than 1 am. Andrew has been awarded a prize for his essay. We can use the following verbs in this structure: allow, award, fed, give, grant, hand, leave (in a will), lend offer, owe, pay, promise, sell, send, show, teach B It is said that.. It is said that Henry is in love with Claire. (= People say that Henry is in love with Claire.) We can use the structure it + passive verb + clause with verbs of reporting. We use this structure when we cannot say or do not need to say who the speaker is, for example in news reports. It is thought that the company is planning a new advertising campaign. It was reported that the President had suffered a heart attack. It has been agreed that changes to the scheme are necessary. Here are some verbs we can use in this structure: agree, allege, announce, assure, believe, consider, decide expect, explain, hope, know, report, say, suggest, suppose, think, understand He is said to ... We can also use subject + passive verb + to-infinitive. Henry is said to be in love with Claire. This structure is also used in news reports. United were expected to win. (= People expected that they would win.) The company is thought to be planning a new advertising campaign. (= Someone thinks that it is planning a new advertising campaign.) The President was reported to have suffered a heart attack. (= Someone reported that he had suffered a heart attack.) We can use the following verbs in this structure: believe, expect, find, know, report, say, think, understand We often use be supposed to for things that people say. / might watch this programme. It's supposed to be very funny. 57 Exercises 1 I was given ... (A) Zedco managers are writing a report saying how well the company looks after its employees. Write sentences from the notes. Put the important underlined information at the end of the sentence. ? useful work skills / they are taught to our staff Our staff arc taught useful work skills. ? people with initiative / they are given opportunities Opportunities are given to people with initiative. 1 special training / it is given to new employees 2 staff who perform well / they are given extra payments 3 company shares / they are offered to most employees 4 six weeks' holiday / this is allowed to all Zedco staff 5 women who leave to have children / they are paid a full salary 2 It is said that... (B) Report these rumours. Instead of the active (e.g. People say . . . ) use the passive (e.g. It is said that. . . ) . ► People say this. ____ The quiz champion It is said that the quiz champion Claude jenniiKS has Claude Jennings has lost lost his memory. his memory. Everyone expects this. The soap opera 'Round the Corner' will end next year. It is 2 Journalists suppose so. The footballer Wayne Johnson is earning £1o million a year. 3 Lots of people believe this. The Prime Minister and his wife have separated. 3 He is said to... (C) Now report the rumours in Exercise 2 like this. ► The quiz champion Claude Jennings is said to have lost his memory. 1 The soap opera 'Round the Corner'....................................................... 58 Have something done A Introduction Compare these situations. Claire had the room decorated. (A decorator did the work.) Claire decorated the room. (She did the work herself.) We can use have in a passive structure. Claire had the room decorated means that she arranged for a decorator to do it for her as a professional service. B Form Look at these examples You should Mark usually We You've Our neighbours are Is Melanie HAVE SOMETHING DONE have has had had having having your car his suits the television your hair a new garage a new cooker serviced cleaned repaired cut. built. installed? regularly. at Superclean only last year, Note that we can use the perfect or the continuous (have had, are having). In negatives and questions in simple tenses, we use a form of do. Mark doesn't have his suits cleaned at Fastclean. We didn't have new windows put in because it was too expensive. Do you have your car serviced regularly? Where did you have your hair cut? C Get something done We can also use get something done. We must have another key made. OR We must get another key made. The sentences have the same meaning, but get is more informal than have. Here are some more examples with get. Laura got her shoes repaired. We're getting the carpet cleaned. Where did you get your hair cut? Do you get your heating checked every year? D Have meaning 'experience' We can use have in this structure with the meaning 'experience something', often something unpleasant. We had all our money stolen. The car had its mirror pulled off. 58 Exercises 1 Have something done (A-B) Look at the pictures and say what people are doing or what they did. Use these phrases: her photo, his windows, his car, her eyes, his hair Use these verbs: dean, cut, repair, take, test ► 1 2 3 4 At the moment Trevor is having his hair cut. Last week Mike....................................................................................................................... At the moment Melissa ....................................................................................................... Yesterday David...................................................................................................................... At the moment Rachel ..................................................................................................... 2 Have something done (A-B) Read about each situation and write sentences with have something done. ► Melanie is paying the man who has repaired her bicycle. Melanie has had her bicycle repaired. 1 David went to the hospital. A nurse bandaged his arm. 2 Daniel is going to the dentist. She's going to fill his tooth. 3 Laura is walking around town while her photos are being developed. 3 Get something done (C) Look again at Exercise 2. The jobs are all done now. Complete the questions using get. ► Mike: Where did you get your bicycle repaired, Melanie ? 1 Harriet: Why ........................................................................................................... 2 Emma: Where .......................................................................................................... 3 Sarah: Where .......................................................................................................... 4 Have meaning 'experience' (D) Say what happened to these people. ► Claire (whose luggage was searched in customs) Claire had her luggage searched in customs. 1 Tom (whose car was stolen from outside his house) 2 Rita (whose rent was increased by ten per cent) 3 David (whose electricity has been cut off) 59 To be done and being done Compare the active and passive. ACTIVE PASSIVE to-infinitive: / ought to meet Sarah at the airport. I hope to be met at the airport. ing-form: / insist on meeting you at the airport. I love being met at the airport. (I meet people.) (People meet me.) Here are some more examples. / want to play volleyball. I hope to be chosen for the team. The minister agreed to answer questions. He agreed to be interviewed on television. Why did Tom keep making jokes about me? I don't enjoy being laughed at. You say you remember telling me the news. But I certainly can't remember being told. An ing-form sometimes comes after a preposition. The postman complained about being attacked by Nick's dog. Famous people get tired of being recognized everywhere they go. B Active forms with a passive meaning The active ing-form after need has a passive meaning. The bicycle needs oiling. (= The bicycle needs to be oiled.) The windows need cleaning. (= The windows need to be cleaned.) We cannot use the passive ing-form here. NOT The-bicycle needs being oiled. We sometimes use an active to-infinitive when we talk about a job to be done. I've got some letters to write today. We've got this bill to pay. Here we use the active (to write) because the subject of the sentence (I) is the person who has to do the job. But if the subject is not a person, then we use the passive infinitive. The letters are to be written today. The bill is to be paid without delay. All this mess has to be cleared away. The goods have to be shipped. We can use the structure be + to-infinitive to give an order. The matter is to be given top priority. You're not to drive too fast. After the subject there, we can use either an active or a passive to-infinitive. There are some letters to write/to be written today. There's a bill to pay/to be paid. 62 Verb + active to-infinitive or ing-form 73 Preposition + active ing-form 59 Exercises i Passive forms (A) / am asking the government to allow me into Britain. I am worried about them refusing me entry. I am afraid of your officials sending me away. I don't want you to misunderstand me. I hope someone in Britain will offer me a job. I don't mind them paying me low wages at first. I am willing for my employer to re-train me. I would like Britain to give me a chance. Report what the man says. Use the passive to-infinitive or ing-form. ? He's asking to be allowed into Britain. ? He's worried about being refused entry. 2 Active and passive forms (A) TV reporter Kitty Beamish is interviewing some workers who are protesting about not being paid enough. Complete the workers' statements. Put in an active or passive to-infinitive or ing-form. ► We want to be paid (pay) better wages. 1 We don't enjoy ............................................. (use) as cheap labour. 2 We're tired of (work) for low wages. 3 We expect .......................................... (treat) like human beings. 4 Wedon'twant ............................................. (give) up all our rights. 5 We hope ...................................... (invite) to a meeting with the management. 6 We insist on ................................. (take) seriously. 3 Active and passive forms (A-B) Put in an active or passive to-infinitive or ing-form. Jessica: Are you going to be busy today? Andrew: Well, I've got a few things (►) to do (do). I've got an essay (1)………………………………..(write). And this room ought (2)……………………………… (tidy) up a bit. This carpet needs (3)........... ……………….(hoover). Jessica: I've got some jobs (4) ..................................... (do), too. Most of my clothes need (5) ........................................ (iron). And I've got my project (6) .......................................... (finish) off. I'm worried about (7) ........................................... (miss) the deadline. It has (8) .......................................... (hand) in tomorrow. I don't want (9)……………………………… (be) late with it. Andrew: I don't remember (10)…………………………… (tell) when the project was due in. Jessica: Why? Haven't you done it yet? Andrew: Oh, yes. I handed it in ages ago. The passive (Units 54-59) Test 11A Rewrite these sentences beginning with the underlined words. ► Thieves robbed a woman. A woman was robbed. 1 They may ban the film. 2 They offered Nancy a pay increase. 3 We need to correct the mistakes. 4 Someone reported that the situation was under control. 5 They are testing the new drug. 6 We haven't used the machine for ages. Test 11B Read the story and write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. During periods of terrorist activity by the IRA, people in Britain are always (>)being warned to look out for bombs. Any bag or parcel without an owner (1)…………….. seen as a risk to the public. Some time ago j a cardboard box was found at the entrance to Bristol Zoo one day. It was noticed (2)……………… avisitor and reported to the director. Clearly, if it was a bomb and it went off, people might (3)…………… killed. So army bomb experts (4)……………. called in, and the box was safely blown up in a controlled explosion. Soon afterwards (5)…………….. was reported that the box had (6) ................. left there by a boy wanting to find a new home for his pet rat. He was tired of the rat, he explained, but he was unwilling to (7) ………………..it put to sleep by a vet, so he left it in a box outside the zoo. The director of the zoo is thought (8)……………… be unenthusiastic about looking after people's unwanted pets. No one knows what I the rat thought about (9) .................... blown up. Test 11C Write a second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► We have to test these products, (be) These products have to be tested. 1 Pavarotti sang the song, (by) 2 Nigel's passport was stolen, (had) 3 They pay doctors a lot of money, (are) 4 I hope they'll interview me for the job. (to) 5 Someone was cleaning the floor, (being) 6 A mechanic is repairing Judy's car. (having) 7 Tessa lost her way. (got) 8 Everyone agreed that the plan should go ahead, (it) 9 When did they decorate your kitchen? (get) 10 They say exercise is good for you. (be) Test 11D Which of the two sentences follows on best? ► There's going to be a big art exhibition. a) A lot of visitors will be attracted to it. b) It will attract a lot of visitors. 1 Our neighbours have got a cat and a dog. a)A lot of mice are caught by the cat. b) The cat catches a lot of mice. 2 Last night Martin dreamt he saw his dead grandmother. a) A white dress was being worn by the ghost, b) The ghost was wearing a white dress. 3 We've bought a new computer. a) It can do the job much more quickly, b) The job can be done much more quickly. 4 My grandfather is very ill. a) He's being looked after in the local hospital, b) The local hospital is looking after him. 5 We've completed the experiment. a) The newspapers will publish the results, b) The results will be published in the newspapers. Test 11E Each of these sentences is incorrect. Write the correct sentence. ► Those nice glasses got break. Those nice glasses got broken. 1 The-story was written Agatha Christie. 2 Baseball do play at this stadium. 3 This shirt needs iron. 4 I got cut my haif yesterday. 5 It believes that there is-going to be a war. 6 My parents divorce- themselves last year. 7 I've got a report to be written. 8 To the winner was given a prize. 9 This man on TV supposes to be the tallest person in the world. 60 Verb + to-infinitive A Introduction After some verbs we can use a to-infinitive, e.g. decided to have, arranged to play. Here are some more examples. / expect to get my money back. Sarah agreed to work late at the office. We cant afford to go to Australia. Are you hoping to get a job in London? Melanie has offered to help us when we move house. We can put not before the to-infinitive. Some people just choose not to get married. At least I managed not to lose my temper. With some other verbs we use an ing-form, not a toinfinitive (see Units 61 and 62). Mark has finished playing golf. B Seem and appear We can use a to-infinitive after seem and appear. Sarah seemed to be quite annoyed. The computer program appears to have a bug in it. The person I spoke to didn't seem to know anything about the company's products. We can use a continuous or a perfect to-infinitive. Continuous: Andrew seems to be studying even harder these days. Perfect: David appeared to have hurt himself. C Tend, manage and fail We use tend to for things that usually happen. We tend to get up later at weekends. (= We usually get up later at weekends.) We use manage to for being able to do something. Luckily I managed to find my way here all right. (= I was able to find my way.) We use fail to for things that don't happen. David failed to pay his electricity bill. (= David didn't pay his electricity bill.) D He promised to go, his promise to go Some nouns can come before a to-infinitive. Compare these sentences. Verb + to-infinitive: Mark promised to go shopping. But then he arranged to play golf. Noun + toinfinitive: Mark forgot about his promise to go shopping. Sarah found out about his arrangement to play golf. Here are some nouns we can use: agreement, arrangement, decision, demand, desire, failure, offer, plan, promise, refusal, tendency, threat 61-62 Verb + ing-form 65 Verb + object + to-infinitive 60 Exercises 1 Verb + to-infinitive (A) Say what each speaker did. Use these verbs before a to-infinitive: decide, demand, offer, promise, threaten ► Henry: I really must speak to the manager. Henry demanded to speak to the manager. 1 Trevor: I'll put the shelves up soon, I promise. 2 Claire: OK, I'll buy both the dresses. 3 Melanie: I'll cook the meal if you like. 4 Tom: If you don't control that dog, Nick, I'll shoot it. 2 Seem (B) Complete the answers using seem and a to-infinitive. (Some of the to-infinitives may be continuous or perfect.) ? Vicky: Have Matthew and Emma got over their quarrel? Daniel: I think so. They seem to have got over it. ? Rita: Is Claire in love with Henry? Sarah: Probably not. She doesn't seem to be in love with him. 1 Tom: Do Mike and Harriet really believe there's life on Mars? David: Well, yes.......................................................................................... there is. 2 Victor: Has Ilona's English improved? Emma: Yes, ............................................................................. quite a lot. 3 David: Does Rita like football? Tom: I don't think so....................................................................................... it much. 4 Natasha: Is Daniel working hard, do you think? Rachel: Yes, I think so......................................................................................... hard. 5 Sarah: Has Trevor made a good job of those shelves? Laura: Not really. a very good job of them. 3 Verb + to-infinitive (A-D) Put in the to-infinitive form. (Some may be continuous or perfect.) Use these verbs: come, find, hang, have, invite, leave, take Harriet: Hello, Nick. You managed (►) to find your way then? Nick: Yes, in the end. It's a bit complicated, isn't it? Harriet: Well you're here now. Do you want (1) .......... ………………….your coat up? Mick: Thank you. Harriet: I'm glad you decided (2) ............................................ to our party. Everyone seems (3) .............................................. a good time. We tend (4) ............................................. lots of people to our parties. Nick: Is Tom here? Harriet: No, he couldn't come. He'd already made an arrangement (5) ............................. somebody somewhere in his taxi. Nick: And Rita? Harriet: Er, she was here, but she appears (6)............. ………………….early. I don't know where she's gone. She was with someone. 61 Verb + ing-form After some verbs we can use an ing-form, for example, suggested going, enjoy putting. / usually avoid driving in the rush hour. We'll have to practise throwing the ball into the basket. Have you finished typing that letter? Nick says he's given up smoking. We can sometimes put not before an ing-form. Imagine not having anywhere to live. With some other verbs we use a to-infinitive, not an ing-form (see Units 60 and 62). I don't want to put up a tent in the rain. B Mind We use mind + an ing-form mostly in negative statements and in questions. Andrew doesn't mind having lots of work. He quite likes it. (= He doesn't dislike having lots of work.) Do you mind waiting a moment? ~ No, that's OK. I wouldn't mind travelling around the world some time. C Verbs with can't Note can't or couldn't with help, resist, face and stand. We can put an ing-form after these verbs. / think Tom is very amusing. I can't help laughing at his funny stories. The dress was so beautiful that Claire couldn't resist buying it. Let's eat out, shall we? 1 can't face cooking a meal today. I never go in the bank if it's busy. I can't stand waiting in a queue. D Keep (on) and carry on We use keep or keep on + an ing-form to talk about something continuing, or when it happens again and again. Just keep stirring the mixture until it boils. Nick keeps ringing Rita and asking her out. The runners didn't mind the rain. They just kept on running. For continue see Unit 63C. Carry on means something continuing. Just carry on stirring the mixture until it boils. 65D Verb + object + ing-form 61 Exercises 1 Verb + ing-form (A) Answer the questions using the notes in brackets. ► Mike: Is your car working now? (they / not / finish / repair / it) You: No, they haven't finished repairing it yet. 1 Laura: Have you done the crossword? (I / give up / try) You: No,……………………………………………………… 2 Daniel: There's a story here in the paper about a 110-year-old man. (1 / can / not / imagine / be) You: Good Lord. ........................................................................................................... so old. 3 Tom: Do you like football? (I / enjoy / watch / it / on TV) You: Well,... ... . ... ... . ..... . .. ... .. .. ... .. . ..... . .. ... .. .. ... .. . ..... . .. ... 4 Rachel: Whose idea was it to invite all these people? (suggest / have / a party) You: I'm not sure. Someone .................................................................................. 2 Verbs with can't (C) Use three words from the table to complete each sentence. 1 can't couldn't 2 face help resist stand 3 doing feeling having lying noticing ► Rita said she was OK, but I couldn't help noticing how upset she looked. 1 I hate holidays by the sea. I……………………………………… on a beach all day. 2 [feel really full. I'm afraid I ...................................................... a pudding with my lunch. 3 1 was so tired yesterday I just……………………………………… any housework. 4 Tom's car was stolen, but, as he left it unlocked, I............................…………………. it's his own fault. 3 Verb + ing-form (A-D) Some friends have had a meal together in a restaurant. Put in the ing-forms. Use these verbs: change, discuss, eat, get, miss, ring, try, wait, walk Vicky: Shall we go then? Rachel: Daniel hasn't finished (►) eating yet. Daniel: It's OK. It's just a piece of chocolate. Matthew: Chocolate? After that enormous meal? Daniel: I know. I've eaten too much. When I find something new on the menu, I just can't resist (1) ............................. it. Rachel: How are we getting home? Vicky: I don't mind (2) ............................I feel like some fresh air. Rachel: You're crazy. It's miles. And we've just eaten. Matthew: I suggest (3)…………………. for a taxi. It'll save (4)……………………..around for a bus. Emma: Good idea. I couldn't face (5)…………………. cold again after being in the warm all evening. Rachel: Yes, the bus journey is too complicated. It involves (6)…………………. buses in the centre. We don't want to risk (7).......................... a bus and having to wait half an hour. Daniel: Or we could take a taxi to the bus station and then get a bus from there. Matthew: Well, you can carry on (8)…………………… the problem, but I'm going to ring for a taxi. 62 Verb + to-infinitive or verb + ing-form? Introduction Some verbs are followed by a to-infinitive, and some by an ing-form. VERB + TO-INFINITIVE (Unit 60) VERB + ING-FORM (Unit 61) Harriet decided to have a party. Decide takes a to-infinitive. Harriet suggested having a party. Suggest takes an ing-form. A few verbs take either a to-infinitive or an ing-form (see Units 63-64). Laura started to paint/started painting a picture. B To-infinitive or ing-form? + TO-INFINITIVE + ING-FORM These verbs are followed by a to-infinitive. agree, aim, appear (see 60B), arrange, ask, attempt, beg, can't afford, can't wait (see C), choose, claim, decide, demand, desire, expect, fail (see 60C), guarantee, happen (see D), help (see 69C), hope, manage (see 60C), offer, plan, prepare, pretend, promise, prove (see D), refuse, seem (see 60B), tend (see 60C), threaten, turn out (see D), undertake, want, wish These verbs are followed by an ing-form. admit, avoid, cant face (see 61C), can't help (see 61C), can't resist (see 61C), can't stand (see 61C), carry on (see 61U), consider, delay, deny, detest, dislike, enjoy, excuse, fancy (see C), finish, give up, imagine, involve, justify, keep {on), (see 61D), mention, mind (see 61B), postpone, practise, put off, resent, risk, save, suggest, tolerate C Can't wait and fancy If you can't wait to do something, you are eager to do it. / can't wait to see the photos you took. (= I am eager/impatient to see the photos.) If you fancy doing something, you want to do it. Do you fancy going out for a meal? (= Would you like to go out for a meal?) Fancy is informal. D Happen, turn out and prove We use prove to or turn out to when experience shows what something is like. In the end our forecast proved to be correct. Finding Harriet's house turned out to be more difficult than Nick had expected. Note the meaning of happen to. I happened to see Sarah in town. (= I saw Sarah by chance in town.) E Two forms together We can sometimes use more than one to-infinitive or ing-form together. The government decided to refuse to give in to the terrorists. I want to avoid hurting anyone's feelings. The man denied threatening to kill a policeman. 65 Verb + object + to-infinitive or ing-form 70 Verb + preposition + ing-form 62 Exercises i To-infinitive or ing-form? (A-C) Complete the conversation. Put in a to-infinitive or ing-form. Matthew: Are we going to have a holiday this year? Natasha: Didn't we all decide (►) to spend (spend) our holidays on a Greek island? Matthew: Lovely. I enjoy (►)lying (lie) on the beach. I might manage (1) ..........................................(get) a sun tan. Daniel: I'd love a holiday. I can't wait (2)……………………………….(leave) this place behind. Emma: I don't fancy (3)……………………………. (stay) in one place all the time. I really dislike (4) ....................................... (sit) on the beach all day. Natasha: Well, I don't mind (5) .......................................... (tour) around somewhere. Emma: Matthew, you promised (6) .......................................... (go) to Scotland with me. We were planning (7) ......................................... (hire) a car. Matthew: Scotland? Are you sure? But I couldn't face (8)……………………………… (drive) all the time. Jessica: I'm afraid I can't afford (9)……………………………. . (spend) too much money. Andrew: And I can't justify (10) ............................. ... (take) all that time off from my studies. 2 To-infinitive or ing-form? (A-D) Complete this article from a magazine. Put in the to-infinitive or ing-form of these verbs: accept, argue, be, find, have, insist, lose, plug, repair, say, take, wait If you buy something from a shop, a new stereo for example, you usually can't wait (►)fo plug it in and put some music on. And of course, you expect (►) to find the equipment in working order. But that doesn't always happen, unfortunately. If the thing doesn't work, you should take it straight back to the shop. If you delay (1)…………………………. it back, you will risk (2) ........ ………………. ... your rights as a customer. And you should prepare (3) ................................ on those rights. You may be one of those people who always avoid (4)………………………….. with people, but in this case you should be ready for an argument. The assistant may prove (5)…………………………. a true friend of the customer - it's not impossible - but first he or she will probably offer (6)………………................ the stereo for you. That's all right if you don't mind (7)……………………… a few weeks, but it isn't usually a good idea. What you should do is politely demand (8) ……………………… your money back immediately. You may want to accept another stereo in place of the old one, but you don't have to. You should refuse (9)………………………….. a credit note, lust keep on (10) ............................. that you want your money back. 3 Two forms together (E) What might you say in these situations? Write a sentence with both a to-infinitive and an ing-form. ► Your decision to change your holiday arrangements might upset Vicky. You won't risk that. You don't want to. What do you say to Rachel? I don't want to risk upsetting Vicky. 1 You and Melanie want to complain about your meal in a restaurant. You need to see the manager. Melanie won't ask, but you don't mind. What do you say to her? 2 Matthew doesn't like the idea of going to Scotland. But he promised. He admitted it. What do you tell Emma? 3 The band were playing. They finished just as you arrived. This was quite by chance. What do you tell your friends? Just as I arrived, ............................................................................................................................................. 63 Like, start, etc A Like, love, prefer and hate After like, love, prefer and hate, we can use either a toinfinitive or an ing-form. The meaning is the same. Mrs Miles likes to do/likes doing parachute jumps. She loves to look/loves looking down at the fields below. We always prefer to stay/prefer staying in small hotels. I hate to stand/hate standing up while I'm eating. But compare these two meanings of the verb like. LIKE TO DO Like takes a to-infinitive when it means that we prefer to do something even though we may not enjoy it. I like to check my work carefully before I hand it in. LIKE DOING Like usually takes an ing-form when we use it to talk about hobbies and interests, Claire likes skiing. I don't like swimming much, B Would like, etc After would like, would love, would prefer and would hate, we use a to-infinitive but not usually an ing-form. I'd like to do a parachute jump one day. My sister would love to work as an artist. Mark would prefer to drive rather than take the train. I'm glad I live here. I'd hate to live in a big tit): Compare would like and like. I'd like to lie on the beach today. It's too hot to do anything else. I'd like means 'I want', but it is more polite (see Unit 52B). I like lying on the beach. I always spend my holidays sunbathing. I like means the same as 'I enjoy', C Start, intend, etc We can use either a to-infinitive or an ing-form after these verbs: begin, bother, continue, intend, propose (= intend), start People began to leave/began leaving the theatre before the end of the play. Rachel didn't bother to do/bother doing the washing-up. Do you intend to make/intend making a complaint? The meaning is the same. We do not usually have two ing-forms together. It was starting to get dark, NOT It was-starting-getting dark. 63 Exercises 1 Like and would like (A-B) Write in the words. Begin I like ... or I'd like ... Use these verbs: buy, chase, drive, play, see Use these objects: computer games, rabbits, the manager, this car, this tin ► / like playing computer games. 1…………………………………………………………………………………………..3…………………………………………………………………. 2…………………………………………………………………………………………..4………………………………………………………………….. 2 Like, love, prefer and hate (A-B) Complete the sentences using the words in brackets. ► Mark: I've always wanted to visit San Francisco. Sarah: Me too. I'd love to visit (I'd love) it some time. 1 Harriet: Tom seems to enjoy watching football matches. David: Yes,……………………………………………………………………………….. (he loves) United pla 2 Trevor: I'm glad I don't work as late as Sarah does. Laura: Me too .......................................................................... (1 wouldn't like) such long hour 3 Matthew: I think I'll go and see this new film. Emma: Can I go with you? .................................................. ……………………….. (I'd like) it, to( 4 Rachel: Do you want to come with me or wait here? Vicky: ..................................................................................... . (I'd prefer) with you if that's OB 5 Laura: I think queuing is my least favourite activity. Tom: I agree ..................................................................................................... …………... (I hate, 6 Claire: Does Mark cook for you? Sarah: No, not often...........................................…………………………………. (he doesn't like" 7 Reporter: Have you ever flown in a hot-air balloon? Mrs Miles: No, but ............................................................................. ……… ( I 'd love) in one someda; 8 Rachel: Did you say you're having your teeth looked at today? Emma: Yes, .................................................................................. (I like) them checked once a yeai 3 Start, intend, etc (C) Complete this news report about a stolen taxi. Put in the to-infinitive or the ing-form of these verbs: drive, go, lock, make, search. Sometimes more than one answer is possible. Kevin Paisley, 25, has lost his taxi. It was stolen on Friday afternoon. T just went into the newsagent's for a moment,' said Kevin. T didn't bother (►) to lock the car.' Kevin started (1)………………………………. his own taxi only six months ago. T was just beginning (2)……………………………… a profit,' he said. 'I intend (3)…………………………………on with my work as soon as I get my taxi back.' The police are continuing (4) ...............................................for the stolen car. 64 Remember, regret, try, etc With some verbs, the choice of a to-infinitive or an ing-form depends on the meaning A Remember and forget / must remember to post this letter today. It's important. The clothes are still dirty because I forgot to switch on the machine. We use remember/forget to do for necessary actions. The remembering is before the action. B Regret We regret to inform you that we are not taking on any new staff at present. Regret to do something means to be sorry for something you are doing, e.g. giving bad news. C Try I'm trying to run this computer program. Try to do something means to attempt something, to do your best. D Stop An old man walking along the road stopped to talk to us. Stop to do something means to stop so that you can do it. E Mean I think Nick meant to break that glass. It didn't look like an accident. Mean to do something is the same as to intend to do it. I can remember posting the letter. I posted it on Friday morning. I'll never forget flying over the Grand Canyon. It was wonderful. We use remember/forget doing for memories of the past. The action is before the remembering. I regret spending all that money. I've got none left. Regret doing something means to be sorry because of something that happened in the past. I tried clicking on the box, but it doesn't work. Try doing something means to do something which might solve a problem. There's too much noise. Can you all stop talking, please? Stop doing something means to end an action, to finish doing it. I'm applying for a visa. It means filling in this form. Means doing something expresses the idea of one thing resulting in another. F Go on The teacher introduced herself and went on to explain about the course. Go on to do something means to do something else, to do the next thing. The teacher told everyone to be quiet, but they just went on talking. Go on doing something means to continue doing it. G Need I need to clean my shoes. This means that I must clean my shoes, I have to clean them. My shoes need cleaning. This means that my shoes need to be cleaned (see Unit 59B). 64 Exercises 1 Remember and forget (A) Put in the to-infinitive or the ing-form of the verbs. Laura: Did you remember ( ►) to pick (pick) up those photos today? Trevor: What photos? Laura: Oh, no. I can remember (1) ...................................... (mention) it to you only this morning. Trevor: I can't remember (2) ………………………. ........ (agree) to pick up some photos. Laura: Well, don't forget (3)…………….. ....................... (call) at the shop for them tomorrow. You've got a terrible memory. Yesterday you forgot (4)……………………………… (lock) the door. Trevor: I'm sure I didn't forget (5) ....................................... (lock) it. I can clearly remember (6)…………………… ............. (look) for my keys. They were in my pocket. Laura: You ought to write notes to yourself to remind you. Trevor: That wouldn't be any good. I'd never remember (7) ...........………………….. (look) at them! 2 Remember, regret, try, etc (A-G) Put in the to-infinitive or the ing-form of the verbs. I used to like going to our local cinema. It was old and rather uncomfortable, but it had character. Now they've stopped (►) showing (show) films there. The owner would like to go on (1) …………………… (run) the cinema, but he would need (2)……………………. (make) a lot of improvements, which would mean (3)………………………………(spend) tens of thousands of pounds. I remember (4)……….(watch) the last film at the cinema. It was a murder mystery. It was five minutes from the end, and we were trying (5)………………(work) out who the murderer was when suddenly all the lights went out and the film stopped. We sat in the dark for a few minutes, and then the owner appeared with a torch. I regret (6) ……………………..(tell) you,' he said, 'that our electricity has failed. I don't mean (7)…………………..(disappoint) you, but I'm afraid we can't show you the end of the film. We've tried (8)……………………(phone) the electricity company, but they say they can't help.' He went on (9)………………(explain) to the audience how the film ended. I didn't understand the story. But I don't regret (10)……………………….. . . (go) to the cinema on that last evening. 3 Remember, regret, try, etc (A-G) Write each pair of sentences as one. Use a to-infinitive or an ing-form. ? Trevor didn't ring Laura. He forgot. Trevor forgot to ring Laura. ? Tom and Nick had been playing cards for hours. But they went on with the game. Tom and Nick went on playing cards. 1 Harriet didn't think she could move the piano. She didn't even try. 2 Mike once saw a spaceship. He'll never forget it. 3 What about painting the walls? They need it. 4 Natasha was unkind to Jessica. But she didn't mean it. 5 Andrew was studying. He went on through the night. 6 When Mark was driving, he needed to make a phone call. So he stopped. TEST 12 Verb + to-infinitive or ing-form (Units 60-64) Test 12A Complete the conversations. Put in a to-infinitive or an ing-form. ► A: I hear you sometimes sail to France in your boat. B: That's right. I really enjoy sailing. 1 A: Are you going to organize our trip? B: Yes, of course. I've agreed................................it. 2 A: You wear a uniform at work, don't you? B: Yes, 1 have to, although I dislike ........................... it. 3 A: Do you think they'll approve the plan? B: Yes, I'm quite sure they'll decide ........................... it. 4 A: What time will you be back? B: Oh, I expect…………………… . back some time around nine. 5 A: Did I remind you about the dinner tonight? B: Yes, thank you. You keep................................me. 6 A: Was your decision the right one, do you think? B: Yes, luckily. In the end it proved……………………. the best thing for everyone. 7 A: Do you still work at the post office? B: No, I gave up………… ................ there last year. 8 A: Have ICM bought the company? B: Well, they've offered................................it. 9 A: I'm sorry you had to wait all that time. B: Oh, it's all right. I didn't mind................................. Test 12B Make sentences from the notes. ► Tessa / want / buy / a new coat / soon Tessa wants to buy a new coat soon. 1 we / must / avoid / waste / so much time 2 sometimes / a country / refuse / take part / in the Olympics 3 I / like / see / the Rocky Mountains / some day 4 I / mean / give / Judy / a nice welcome / yesterday 5 I / always / like / see / my doctor / once a year 6 the buses / usually / stop / run / before midnight 7 I / can't face / get up / at five / tomorrow 8 last year / we / make / an agreement / work / together 9 yesterday / you / promise / carry on / shoot / the film 10 my father / seem / get / better / now Test 12C Read the conversation and write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. Anna: I hear you're preparing to (►) leave for Australia. Lisa: That's right. And I'm really looking forward to it. I can't (1)……………….. to get there. I'm hoping (2)....................... see all my friends while I'm there. I'm going to enjoy (3)……………. ... them again after so long. Anna: Martin and I (4)……………… like to go away, but we can't manage it this year. Lisa: There's just one problem that I (5)………………. to sort out. My tickets haven't arrived. I've tried to ring the travel agency, but I can't get through. I'm beginning to regret (6)……………… going there myself to pick them up. Anna: I expect they'll be here tomorrow. Lisa: That's really leaving it to the last minute. It's such a worry. Anna: Well, I know you. You can't (7)………………. worrying, can you? Lisa: No, I can't. I hope this holiday isn't going to turn out (8)…………….. be a disaster. Anna: Of course it isn't. Just keep (9)…………………. trying to get through. Test 12 D Each of these sentences has a mistake in it. Write the correct sentence. ► The man kept-ask us for money. The man kept asking us for money. 1 We've finished to-decorate-the flat. 2 I regret say what I-did. 3 Tessa decided go not to work 4 Do-you mind help me? 5 I'm -beginning getting worried. 6 I cant afford buy-a new-ear. 7 I-hope to-avoid to make things worse 8 Peter seems gone-away-already. Test 12E Write a second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► I wish I hadn't sold my bike, (regret) I regret selling my bike. 1 The children were eager to see their presents, (wait) 2 I hate to get up in the dark, (stand) 3 By chance I saw your brother yesterday, (happened) 4 The shop usually opens ten minutes late, (tends) 5 Would you like to go for a walk? (fancy) 6 The police continued to watch the house, (carried) 7 Seeing Nelson Mandela will always stay in my memory, (forget) 65 Verb + object + to-infinitive or ing-form A Introduction Customer: None of the things I ordered have arrived. They're three weeks late. I expect the goods to arrive on time. Mark: I'm sorry we've kept you waiting so long. Can I find out what the problem is and then ring you back? Some verbs can take an object + a to-infinitive, and some take an object + an ing-form. VERB OBJECT I expect the goods to arrive on time. I'm sorry we've kept you waiting so long. B Verb + object + to-infinitive We asked the doorman to let us in. Nick couldn't persuade Rita to go out with him. The hot weather has caused ice-cream sales to increase. It took ages to download the pictures from the Internet. I didn't mean my suggestion to be taken seriously. (See Unit 59A.) Here are some verbs we can use in this structure: advise, allow, ask, beg, cause, enable, encourage, expect, force, help (see Unit 69C), intend, invite, mean (= intend), order, recommend, remind, take (time), teach, tell, warn C Want + object + to-infinitive We can also use an object + a to-infinitive after want, (would) like, (would) love, (would) prefer and (would) hate. Tom wants United to win. We'd hate the house to be left empty. We can use this structure to give an order (see Unit 50B). I want everyone to come here. I'd like you to listen carefully. We cannot normally use a that-clause. NOT I want that everyone comes here. D Verb + object + ing-form Andrew is so serious. I can't imagine him having a good time. Do you remember Laura taking our photo? A new law has stopped traffic going into the city centre. Here are some verbs we can use in this structure: dislike, imagine, involve, keep, mind, prevent (see Unit 70C), remember, risk, stop (see Unit 70C) E Advise, allow, encourage and recommend We can use these verbs with an ing-form or with an object + a to-infinitive. + [NG-FORM They allow fishing here. I wouldn't recommend walking home alone. + OBJECT + TO-INFINITIVE They allow people to fish here. I wouldn't recommend you to walk home aloni. We do not use suggest + an object + a to-infinitive. I suggested to Nick (that) he should leave, NOT I-suggested Niek-to4eave. 65 Exercises 1 Verb + object + to-infinitive (B) Report what people said. Use the verbs in brackets. ► Police to motorists: Take special care, (warn) The police warned motorists to take special care. 1 Guy to Kitty: Would you like to come on my chat show? (invite) 2 Sarah to Mark: Don't forget to get the theatre tickets, (remind) 3 Dentist to Daniel: You should give up eating sweets, (tell) 4 Police to gunman: Come out with your hands up. (order) 2 Want and would like (C) Complete the sentences using would like or don't/doesn't want. ► Mike won't wear a tie. Harriet is annoyed. She would like him to wear a tie because they're going to a concert. 1 Mrs Miles is going to do a parachute jump, but her son and daughter don't like the idea. They ……………………………………………………….because they think it's dangerous. 2 Henry is falling in love with Claire, but she's worried about this. She …………………………………………………………because she doesn't find him attractive. 3 Natasha may not go on holiday with her friends. They …………………………………………………………………because she's always good fun to be with. 3 Verb + object + to-infinitive or ing-form (B, D) Kitty Beamish is reporting what people have said to her. She combines the two sentences into one. ? 'The lorry skidded. The icy road caused it.' The icy road caused the lorry to skid. ? 'The workers might go on strike. The company can't risk that.' The company can’t risk the workers going on strike. 1 'The suspects might leave the country. The police must stop that.' 2 'Congress opposed him. The President didn't expect that.' 3 'The hostages lay down. The terrorists forced them.' 4 'The pound is falling in value. The government doesn't mind that.' 4 Advise, allow, etc (E) Complete this paragraph from a guidebook to London. Use the to-infinitive or the ing-form. We wouldn't recommend (►) driving (drive) into London in the rush hour. We'd advise you (1) ................... (travel) by train. We'd recommend (2) …………………(buy) a special saver ticket, which is cheaper than the full fare. But the railway companies don't allow you (3)……………….. (use) saver tickets before ten o'clock. This is to encourage people (4) ....................... (take) a later train, which will be less busy. 66 Question word + to-infinitive A Introduction Vicky uses a question word (what) and a toinfinitive (to wear). She is talking about the best thing to do. I don't know what to wear means that I don't know what I should wear. B Structures with what to do, where to go, etc Before the question word we can use a verb such as ask, decide, discover, discuss, explain, find out, forget, know, learn, remember, say, think, understand, wonder. It was a real problem. I couldn't think what to do. We were wondering where to park the car. Matthew wants to know how to work the computer. Have Trevor and Laura decided when to have their barbecue? Sometimes there is a verb + object before the question word. In this structure we can use advise, ask, show, teach and tell. Tom showed me how to change a wheel. The guide didn't tell the tourists when to be back at the coach. Before the question word we can also use the adjectives clear, obvious and sure and the expressions have an idea and make up your mind. I wasn't sure who to ask for help. Claire doesn't have much idea how to cook. A preposition (e.g. of) can come before the question word. There's the question of who to invite to the reception. You need to be informed about what to do in an emergency. C Why, what, whose, which and whether We cannot use why before a to-infinitive. No one could explain why we had to wait, NOT No-one-could- explain-why-to-wait. After what, which, whose, how many and how much, we can use a noun. Sarah and Mark were discussing what colour to paint the walls. We wondered whose story to believe - both drivers said it wasn't their fault. It's difficult to know how much luggage to take with you. We can use whether but not if. We'll have to decide whether to go ahead with the project (or not). NOT We'll have to decide if to go ahead. Melanie wasn't sure whether to ring the doctor or not. I was wondering whether to order some tea. 66 Exercises 1 Structures with what to do, where to go, etc (B) Comment on these situations. ► How do I switch the computer on? 1 What should I say? 2 Where shall we go? 3 How do I stop? ► (not know) He doesn't know how to switch the computer on. 1 (can't think) ............................................................................................................................................... 2 (not sure) ................................................................................................................................................ 3 (not know) ........................................................................................................................................................... 2 Structures with what to do, where to go, etc (B) Look at the questions and then complete the paragraph about a man coming out of prison. Use a question word and a to-infinitive. ► How should he start a new life? 3 How can he find somewhere to live? 1 What can he expect? 4 What should he do? 2 Where should he go? 5 Who can he contact? This man will have problems when he leaves prison. He needs advice on (►) how to start a new life. After a long time in prison, he isn't sure (1)……………………………….. in the outside world and he has no idea (2) ………………………………..He doesn't know (3) ..............................................a place to live either. But he won't be completely alone. A social worker will advise him (4) ............................ ..., so he'll know (5) ...................................... if he needs help. 3 Question word + to-infinitive (B-C) You are finding it very difficult to make your mind up. Complete your answers to the questions. Use a question word and a to-infinitive. ? Rachel: Are you going to buy that sweater? You; I don't know whether to buy it or not. ? Tom: What time do you think we should leave? You: I'm not really sure what time to leave. 1 Daniel: Do you want to do business studies? You: I'm wondering ....................................................... business studies or statistics. 2 Vicky: How much money should we spend on the present? You: I've no idea .....................................................on it. 3 Matthew; Do you intend to join the sports club? You; I can't decide ....................................................... it or not. 4 Vicky: Which route should we take? You: It's difficult to know......................................................... 5 Melanie: Which lottery numbers are you going to choose? You: I haven't decided ....................................................... 67 Adjective + to-infinitive We can use a to-infinitive (e.g. to be) after an adjective (e.g. great). B It is easy to drive the car An adjective + to-infinitive often comes in this structure with it + be. It's important to look in the mirror. It's lovely to see you. It's quite safe to use the ladder. It was silly to make such a fuss. The subject can also be a person. I'm delighted to see you. We're ready to start now. C The car is easy to drive Compare these two sentences. They both mean the same thing. It is easy to drive the car. The car is easy to drive. We do not use it in the second sentence. NOT The-car-is-easy-to-drive-it and NOT The-car it is-easy-to-drive. Here are some more examples. Your writing is difficult to read. A small car would be cheap to run. The parade was fascinating to watch. The ladder is quite safe to use. We can use this structure with adjectives meaning 'good' or bad', e.g. awful, bad, exciting, fascinating, good, marvellous, nice, terrible, wonderful. We can also use it with these adjectives: cheap, convenient, dangerous, difficult, easy, expensive, impossible, safe, simple. D Certain, sure and likely We can use a to-infinitive after certain, sure, likely and unlikely. United are certain/sure to win. (= They will certainly win.) Sarah is likely to be at work. (= She is probably at work.) E For and of After some adjectives we can use for + object + to-infinitive (see Unit 68). It's important for drivers to take care. It isn't safe for children to play on ladders. After an adjective describing how someone behaves (e.g. polite, silly), we can use of. It was polite of Emma to write and thank us. (Emma was polite.) It was silly of me to forget the tickets. (I was silly.) 68 For with the to-infinitive 117 Too and enough 67 Exercises 1 It is easy to drive the car (B) Sarah's job is to write advertisements. She is writing one for Compex computers. Write sentences with it and an adjective followed by a to-infinitive. ► Buy a Compex computer. It isn't expensive. It isn't expensive to buy a Compex computer. 1 Using the computer is very simple. It's very ............................................................................................................ 2 Understanding the handbook isn't difficult. It isn't ............................................................................................................... 3 You can run any kind of software. It's easy. 4 Exploring the world of Compex is absolutely fascinating. 5 Try the ultimate computer experience. Are you ready? 2 The car is easy to drive (C) Sarah isn't happy with her ideas for the Compex advertisement. She is rewriting the first four sentences like this. ► A Compex computer isn't expensive to buy. 1 The computer ........................................................................................................... 2 The handbook ........................................................................................................... 3 .............................................................................................................................. 4 ………………………………………………………………………………… 3 Certain, sure and likely (D) Complete the conversation. Make sentences from the notes in brackets. Nick: Ar e you going t o Mik e and Harriet's p ar ty? Tom: Yes, I am. (►) It's sure to be a good party (it / sure / be / a good party). Nick: Will there be a lot of people there? Tom: Yes, (1) ……………………………………………………………………………..(it / likely / be / pretty crowded). Nick: Has Rita been invited, do you know? Tom: Oh, (2) ................................................................................................................................... (she / certain / b e / ther e). Nick: I don't know that part of town. Is the hous e easy to find? Tom: No, it isn't. Take a map or (3) .......................................................... …………………..(you / unlikely / find / it). 4 For and of (E) Vicky and Rachel are talking about two students they know called Gary and Steve. Complete the conversation. Put in for or of. Vickv: I can't believe that Gary and Steve had a fight in a pub. Don't you think that was very foolish (►)of them? Rachel: Yes, it was especially stupid (1)................. them to quarrel about which football team is the best. There must be something more interesting (2)..................them to talk about. Vicky: I blame Steve. It wasn't very sensible (3) .................him to knock Gary's drink over. Rachel: It was brave (4) ................ Daniel to try to stop the fight. It was awful (5).................. him to get hit on the head with a chair. 68 For with the to-infinitive A Introduction Sarah: I'll just ring the office. The boss is waiting for me to ring her back. Mark: / don't think it was a good idea for you to bring that mobile phone on holiday with you, Sarah. We can use for + object + to-infinitive. Here are some more examples. FOR OBJECT My mother has arranged It's difficult The crowd were impatient It's a nuisance for for for for someone unskilled people the match you TO-INFINITIVE to look after her dog next week. to find work these days. to begin. to have to wait. B For expressing purpose We can use this structure to say why something is done (to express purpose). (See also Unit 151E. Mark photocopied the figures for the Sales Manager to have a look at. (= He photocopied the figures so that the Sales Manager could have a look at them.) The shop provides baskets for the customers to put their purchases in. I'd like to put forward a few suggestions for you to think about. C Too and enough We can use too and enough with this structure. The road is too busy for the children to cross safely. Unfortunately the table was too small for all of us to sit round. Fortunately the table was big enough for all of us to sit round. The guide didn't speak loudly enough for everyone to hear clearly. D For and of FOR OF We often use for + object + to-infinitive after an adjective. Harriet was anxious for the party to be a success. Would it be possible for you to move your car, please? Some of the adjectives we can use with for: anxious, awful, cheap, convenient, dangerous, difficult, eager, easy, exciting, expensive, friendly, good, happy, horrible, impatient, important, interesting, marvellous, necessary, nice, normal, polite, possible, ready, safe, sensible, silly, stupid, terrible, useful, willing, wonderful, wrong After an adjective saying how someone behaves, we use of + object + to-infinitive. It's kind of Melanie to put you up for the night. (Melanie is kind.) It was clever of you to work out the answer. (You were clever.) Some of the adjectives we can use with of: brave, careless, clever, foolish, generous, good, helpful, honest, intelligent, kind, mean, nice, polite, sensible, silly, stupid, wrong Compare these two sentences. It was good for you to come jogging. (= It was good for your health.) It was good of you to come jogging with me. (= It was a kind action by you.) 68 Exercises 1 For with the to-infinitive (A) The second person agrees with what the first one says. Use for and a to-infinitive. ► Daniel: Andrew should take it easy. That would be best. Matthew: Yes, you're right. It would be best for him to take it easy. 1 Trevor: Our new computer should arrive soon. I just can't wait. Laura: Me neither. I............................................................................................. 2 Rachel: Matthew shouldn't marry Emma. It would be a mistake. Vicky: I think so too. 3 Customer: Advertisements should tell the truth. It's important. Mark: I agree. .................................................................................................. 2 For expressing purpose (B) Write the advertisement for a holiday centre. Match the sentence pairs and write sentences with for and a to-infinitive. There are lots of activities. There's a fun pool. There are quiet areas. There are regular shows. There's a siant roller-coaster. ► 1 2 3 4 You can enjoy them. You can relax in them. Guests can take part in them. You can ride on it if you dare. Children can swim in it. There are lots of activities for guests to take part in. …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3 Too and enough (C) Add a sentence with too or enough and: difficult, funny, heavy, high, hot, loud ? Mike and Harriet couldn't lift the piano. It was too heavy for them to lift. ? Tom won't repeat the joke. It isn't funny enough for him to repeat. 1 Emma can't reach the top shelf.................................................................................. 2 We can't understand the poem……………………………………………………. 3 Not everyone could hear the music………………………………………………. 4 The tea had got cold. Daniel couldn't drink it..…………………………………. 4 For and of (D) A)apanese company called Sanko is going to open a new factory in a town in England. Write the sentences from the local newspaper. ► marvellous / the town / have / some new jobs It will be marvellous for the town to have some new jobs. ► clever / our local council / bring / Sanko / here It was clever of our local council to bring Sanko here. 1 difficult / the town / attract / new industry It has been ........................................................................................................................... 2 very generous / the council / give / the land / to Sanko It was ................................................................................................................................ 3 the company / eager / production / begin / soon The company ..................................................................................................................... 69 The infinitive with and without to This is an overview of the different structures with a to-infinitive (e.g. to do) and an infinitive without to (e.g. do). A The to-infinitive We use a to-infinitive: 1 After an adjective (see Unit 67) It's nice to have a place of your own. The car is really cheap to run. 2 After a noun / must take a book to read. (— a book that I can read) We've got a few jobs to do. (= jobs that we must do) 3 With be able to, be about to, be allowed to, be going to, have to, ought to and used to We aren't allowed to park here. The game is about to start. We're going to buy a camcorder. You have to fill in a form. 4 After some verbs, e.g. decide, hope, manage, offer (see Unit 60) Tom decided to leave early. I hope to see you soon. Did you manage to sort out the problem? Henry offered to pay for the meal. 5 After some verbs + object (see Unit 65) Laura persuaded Trevor to put up some shelves. I want you to do something for me. 6 After for + object (see Unit 68) We've arranged for you to visit our head office. It is important for students to register with a doctor. 7 After a question word (see Unit 66) We don't know where to leave our coats. This book tells you how to train race horses. 8 To say why (see Unit 151B) Mark went out to play golf. I need the money to pay the phone bill. B The infinitive without to We use an infinitive without to: 1 After can, could, may, might, must, needn't, shall, should, will, and would We could go to a night club. I must speak to the manager. It might rain later. Sarah will be away for three days. 2 After had better and would rather It's cold. You'd better wear a coat. I'd rather listen to Elvis than the Beatles. 3 After make + object and let + object That programme was funny. It really made me laugh. Trevor will be here at five. His boss is going to let him leave work early. 4 After see or hear + an object (see Unit 74) They saw the lights come on. We all heard the bomb go off. C Help An infinitive after help can be with or without to. Can I help (to) get the tea? Vicky helped me (to) choose a present. 69 Exercises 1 The to-infinitive (A) Comment on these situations. Join each pair of sentences using a to-infinitive. ► Mike will give you a lift. He promised. You: Mike promised to give me a lift. 1 You want to eat. You must have something. You: I must ..................................................................................................... 2 You are having a rest. It's nice. You: It's…………………………………………………………………………... 3 Will Rita speak to Nick? He wants her to. Nick……………………………………………………………………………… 4 Daniel can't repair the video. He doesn't know how to. 5 Claire and her sister are going to Bali. They have decided. 6 Melanie is visiting David. She has gone to the hospital. 7 Vicky is doing some studying. Unfortunately she has to. 8 Sarah must ring the office. It's important. 2 The infinitive without to (B) Put in the missing verbs. Usually more than one answer is correct. ► I've been repairing the car. I really must wash my hands. 1 What's in the letter? Why won't you let me .................it? 2 Did you see that lovely old car ................ past a moment ago? 3 It was a terribly sad story. It made me .................. 4 I don't want to do anything energetic. I'd rather................. on the beach. 5 It's very cold. I think it might................ for the first time this winter. 6 I keep getting this pain in my leg. I think I'd better ................. a doctor. 3 The infinitive with and without to (A-B) Matthew and Emma are at the railway station. Emma is going away for the weekend. Put in the infinitive of the verbs. You have to decide whether or not you need to. Matthew: Are you sure you'll (►) be (be) all right? Emma: Yes, of course. I'm not a child. I can manage (►) to look (look) after myself. Matthew: OK, sorry. Emma: Some friends have invited me (1)........................(visit) them. I'm not going to the North Pole. Matthew: It'll be nice for you (2) ...................... (see) your old friends again. I just know you're going (3)....................... (have) lots of fun. Let me (4) ........................ (buy) you a magazine (5)....................... (read) on the train. Emma: I can't (6) ....................... (read) when I'm travelling. It makes me (7) .........................(feel) sick, even in a train. I'd rather just (8) .......................(look) out of the window. Matthew: OK. Well, you'd better (9) ....................... (get) in. I think it's about (10).........................(leave). Oh, did I remind you (11)....................... (change) at York? Emma: Yes, Matthew, you did. Don't worry, I won't (12) ........................(forget). I know perfectly well how (13)....................... (get) there. 70 Verb/Adjective + preposition + ing-form Introduction Claire: I'm thinking of going to Turkey. Travel agent: Are you interested in travelling around the country, or would you like to stay in one place? Claire: / don't want to do a lot of travelling. Some verbs and adjectives can have a preposition after them (see Units 125-126). / apologized for my mistake. Laura is keen on photography. Sometimes we can use an ing-form after the preposition. apologized Laura is keen I'm thinking Are you interested We're tired I PREPOSITION ING-FORM for making taking going traveling not having on of in of a mistake. photos. to Turkey. around? a place to live. We can use not before the ing-form, e.g. not having. B Verb + preposition + ing-form Don't you believe in discussing things openly? Laura doesn't feel like cooking tonight. Unfortunately Tom insisted on telling us all about United's win. I'm looking forward to seeing my friends again. I've succeeded in getting hold of the CD I wanted. Also: agree with, apologize for, concentrate on, object to, rely on, think of We can use about after ask, complain, dream, speak, talk, think, and wonder. They're talking about building a new swimming-pool. C Verb + object + preposition + ing-form After some verbs we can put an object (e.g. Matthew). Emma accused Matthew of not caring about her. Higher prices will discourage customers from buying. The fire-fighters prevented/stopped the fire (from) spreading. The club has punished its players for fighting during a match. Also: blame ... for, congratulate ... on, thank ... for We can use this structure in the passive. Matthew was accused of not caring. The customers will be discouraged from buying. D Adjective + preposition + ing-form People were annoyed at not being able to see properly. I'm bored with waiting. Vicky is excited about going to America. I'm fed up with living in this awful place. Tom is good at telling jokes. The man was found guilty of stealing from his employers. I'm pleased about/at winning a prize. Also: capable of, fond of, interested in (see Unit 71B), keen on, tired of 125 Adjective + preposition 126 Verb + preposition 70 Exercises 1 Verb + preposition + ing-form (A-B) Complete the conversation between Claire and her sister Sophie. Put in the verbs with these prepositions: for, in, like, of, on Sophie: Where's that little radio of yours? Claire: Oh, it got broken. Henry knocked it off the table. Unfortunately he hasn't succeeded (►) in getting (get) it to work again. Sophie: Oh, what a pity. Claire: It was only a cheap thing. In fact I'd been thinking (1) ........ ……………………. . (buy) a new one. But Henry not only apologized (2) ................................... (break) it, he insisted (3)…………………………… (buy) me a much nicer one. It's in the dining-room. Sophie: Henry is such a gentleman. Claire: He didn't really need to buy me a new one, but I didn't feel (4)…………………………… (argue). 2 Verb (+ object) + preposition + ing-form (A-C) Comment on these situations. Join each pair of sentences using a preposition and an ing-form. ► The police prevented the crime. It didn't take place. The police prevented the crime from taking place. 1 Laura blamed Trevor. He forgot the tickets. Laura ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2 The doctors succeeded. They saved the driver's life. The doctors ............................................................................................................................................. 3 The customers complained. They didn't receive the goods. 4 Emma has accused Matthew. She says Matthew broke his promise. 5 Melanie is insisting. She's going to cook a meal for David. 6 A new traffic scheme has stopped cars. They can't go into the town centre. 7 Everyone congratulated Claude. He won the quiz competition. 8 Some football fans were arrested. They attacked a policeman. 3 Verb/Adjective + preposition + ing-form (A-D) Complete Emma's letter to her friend Kirsty. Put in a preposition and an ing-form. Thank you (►) for inviting (invite) me to come and see you next month. I'm already excited (1)………………………………………………………….(see) you again. You must be very pleased (2)...........................................(get) the job you wanted. Congratulations. Personally, 1 wouldn't be keen (3).......................................... (travel) forty miles to work. I apologize (4)…………………………(not write) sooner, but a week in bed with flu has prevented me (5)……………………….(do) anything. I haven't even felt (6)………………………….. (write) letters until today. I must be getting better because I'm starting to feel bored (7)……………………………… (do) nothing. I'm thinking (8) ..................................... (go) back to work tomorrow. 71 Afraid to do or afraid of doing? A Afraid David is afraid to climb the ladder. (= He doesn't want to climb the ladder because he is afraid.) David is afraid of falling. (= He is afraid because he might fall. Here are some more examples. I was afraid to say anything in front of all those people. Claire was afraid to wander too far from the hotel. / was afraid of sounding foolish, you see. She was afraid of getting lost. B Anxious, ashamed and interested Compare these examples. Zedco are anxious to increase their sales. (= They want to increase their sales.) I'm ashamed to tell you what I scored in the test. (= I don't want to tell you because I'm ashamed.) I'd be interested to meet Laura. (= I want to meet her.) Mark was anxious about presenting his report. (= He was worried because he had to present his report.) I'm ashamed of getting such a low score. {— I'm ashamed because I got such a low score.) Laura is interested in painting. (= It is an interest/a hobby of hers.) / was interested to hear Mike's story. (= I found his story interesting.) C Structures with sorry To apologize for something we are doing, we use a to-infinitive. I'm sorry to tell you this, but your test score is rather low. I'm sorry to ring so late, but it's important. To express regret, we also use a to-infinitive. / was sorry to hear that Mike's uncle had died. To apologize for something we did, we can use about + ing-form. I'm sorry about making all that noise last night. (OR I'm sorry I made all that noise last night.) 71 Exercises 1 Afraid (A) Complete the sentences. Use these words and put the verb into the to-infinitive or ing-form: dive into the water, drop them, fall, move ►He's afraid to dive into the water. 1 She's afraid………………………………. 2 She's afraid……………………….. 3 He's afraid .………………………. 2 Afraid (A) Look at what people say and write a comment about each person. Rewrite the second sentence using afraid to or afraid of. ► Vicky: There's a large bull in the field. I don't want to open the gate. Vicky is afraid to open the gate. ► Claire: I arrived at the airport in good time. 1 thought I might get stuck in traffic. Claire was afraid of getting stuck in traffic. 1 Nick: I was going to do a bungee jump yesterday. But I couldn't jump. 2 Daniel: The policeman looked angry. I didn't want to argue with him. 3 Matthew: I'm keeping my shirt on. I might get sunburnt. 3 Afraid, anxious, ashamed and interested (A-B) Complete the conversation. Put in a to-infinitive or a preposition + ing-form. Laura: I'm ashamed ( ►) to admit (admit) it, but aeroplanes terrify me. I get really anxious (►) about flying (fly). I'm afraid (1)............................. (buy) a plane ticket. I can't stand being on a plane. I'm afraid (2) ...................................... (get) killed. I feel ashamed (3) ………………………………(be) so silly. Sarah: Aren't there things you can do to overcome your fear? Laura: Well, 1 was interested (4)....................…………..(read) in the paper recently that you can go on a course that helps you. I'm anxious (5)…………………………. (book) a place on it very soon. 4 Sorry (C) Complete the conversation. Use a to-infinitive or about + ing-form. Look at the information in brackets. Alan: I'm sorry ( ►) to disturb you (I'm disturbing you), but could I just say something? I'm sorry (1) ……………………………………(I was so rude) last night. I didn't mean what I said. Mark: Oh, that's OK. I'm sorry (2) ………………………………..(I lost my temper). Alan: Right. OK. And, as I said, sorry (3).......... …………….. .....................(I'm interrupting you). 72 Used to do and be used to doing Used + to-infinitive means that something happened regularly or went on for a time in the past. I used to travel means that in the past I regularly travelled, but I no longer do so. Here are some more examples. We used to play that game when we were younger. Nick used to smoke, but he gave it up. I used to like fish, but I never eat it now. There used to be a dancehall here, but they knocked it down. We cannot use this structure in the present tense. Claire travels a lot. NOT Claire uses- to~travel-a-lot. We normally use didn't use to in negatives and did ... use to in questions. We didn't use to have computers, OR We never used to have computers. Where did people use to buy their food before the supermarket was built? Did you use to live in London? Be used to + ing-form means that something is familiar and is no longer strange. I'm used to travelling means that travelling is no longer strange or difficult because I have done it for so long. Here are some more examples. We're used to getting up early. We do it every day. NOT We're used to get up early. Sarah is used to working late at the office. Most visitors to Britain aren't used to driving on the left. I wasn't used to wearing glasses. It seemed very strange at first. We can also say get used to to talk about things becoming more familiar. It was difficult at first, but Mike soon got used to working at night. After her husband died, the old woman had to get used to living on her own. 72 Exercises Used to do (A) 1 Mrs Bell is a hundred years old. She's the oldest person in the village. A radio reporter is interviewing her. Put in used to with the verb. Mrs Bell: I've always lived in the village, but not always in this house. Reporter: Where (►) did you use to live (you / live)? Mrs Bell: When I was a girl, we lived at Apple Tree Farm. (1)……………………………………………… (we / like) it there. Reporter: But life was hard, wasn't it? Mrs Bell: Oh, yes. Things (2) …………………………………….(be) different from the way they are now. In those days (3) ……………………………………….(we / not / have) electricity. Reporter: And (4) …………………………………………… (you / help) with the farm work? Mrs Bell: Yes, (5) ………………………………………………(I / look) after the hens. 2 Used to do and be used to doing (A-B) Look at the pictures and say what the people used to do or are used to doing. Use these verbs: climb, fly, paint, play, sign Use these objects: autographs, badminton, mountains, pictures, planes ? He used to paint pictures. ? She's used to signing autographs. 1 She ……………………………….. 2 They ..................................... 3 He………………………… 3 Used to do and be used to doing (A-B) Put in a to-infinitive or to + ing-form. Use the verbs in brackets. ? When I was a child, I used to dream (dream) of being an astronaut. ? I'm terribly nervous. I'm not used to speaking (speak) to a large audience. 1 It took us ages to get used ................................... (live) in a block of flats. 2 Lots of trains used......................................... (stop) here, but not many do now. 3 Didn't Nick use......................................... (work) on a building site? 4 There didn't use........................................ (be) so many soap operas on television. 5 I'll have an orange juice, please. I'm not used………………………… . (drink) alcohol. 6 David doesn't seem to mind being in hospital. I suppose he's got used ………………………… (be) there. 7 When Laura was at college, she used............................(have) a picture of Elvis Presley on her bedroom wall. 73 Preposition or linking word + ing-form A Introduction Rachel: Jessica: Rachel: Jessica: Rachel: Shall we have some lunch? 1 usually go for a walk instead of eating. I'm on a diet. You're joking, aren't you? Since when? Since discovering I can't get into my old clothes. Well, just buy some new ones, then. We can use an ing-form after some prepositions (e.g. instead of) or linking words (e.g. since). We cannot use an infinitive, NOT instead~of jto~eat. B Preposition + ing-form Here are some more examples. As a result of losing my passport, I had to fill in a complicated form. Vicky and Rachel might go to Canada as well as travelling around the US. You can get skin cancer from being in the sun too long. You aren't in favour of cutting down trees, are you? Sarah went to work in spite of not feeling well. We can't have a party without making a bit of noise. We can use these prepositions before an ing-form: against, as a result of, as well as, besides, by, despite, for, from, how about, in favour of, in spite of, instead of, on, what about, without We use what about/how about + ing-form to make a suggestion. How about giving us some help? We use for + ing-form to say what we use something for. This cloth is for cleaning the floor. We use by + ing-form to say how someone does something. The thief got in by breaking a window. We use on + ing-form to mean 'as soon as'. On hearing the news of David's accident, Melanie burst into tears. (= As soon as she heard the news,...) C Linking word + ing-form Here are some examples. I always have a shower after playing tennis. Although hoping to get the job, Rachel wasn't really expecting to. Sarah wanted to finish the report before going to bed. The man has been unemployed since leaving prison. You should always lock the door when leaving your room. Mark was listening to the car radio while sitting in a traffic jam. We can use these linking words before an ing-form: after, although, before, since, when, while A linking word + ing-form can sometimes be a little formal. We can say the same thing like this. I always have a shower after I've played tennis. Although she was hoping to get the job, Rachel wasn't really expecting to. 70 Verb/Adjective + preposition + ing-form 73 Exercises 1 Preposition + ing-form (B) Complete the sentences using the words in brackets. ► Rachel: Do you want to walk? Vicky: Yes, let's not get a bus. (instead of) Vicky wants to walk instead of getting a bus. 1 Sarah: Did you get through the work? Mark: Yes, I stayed up all night, (by) Mark got through the work ................................................................................... 2 Melanie: When do you take the pills? David: The minute I wake in the morning, (on) David has to take the pills .................................................................................................................................... 3 Mike: So you got the answer? Harriet: Yes, and I didn't use a calculator, (without) Harriet got the answer............................................................................................................................................... 4 Emma: Why the rucksack? Matthew: So I can carry the food, (for) The rucksack is .......................................................................................................................................... 5 Trevor: Sorry I forgot the sugar. Laura: Well, you had it on your list, (in spite of) Trevor forgot the sugar .................................................................................................. 6 Mark: Do you have to do the typing? Secretary: Yes, and book some flights, (as well as) The secretary has to book some flights .................................... 2 Linking word + ing-form (C) This structure is often used in instructions (sentences which tell people what to do). Put in before or after and the ing-form of the verb in brackets. ► Replace the top on the bottle after taking (take) the medicine. 1 Read the contract through carefully ......................................................... (sign) it. 2 You shouldn't have a bath straight ...................................................... (eat) a meal. 3 …………………………(leave) home ring the airport to check that your flight is on schedule. 4 Always put your skis away carefully ............................................................(use) them. 5 Be sure to switch off the electricity ........................................................(change) a fuse. 6 Make sure the safety chain is on ..............................................................(open) the door. 3 Preposition or linking word + ing-form (B-C) Ron Mason owns a supermarket business. Write the sentences for a magazine article about his life. Join two sentences into one using the words in brackets. ► He saw an empty shop. He was walking around town one day. (while) He saw an empty shop while walking around town one day. 1 He thought carefully. He decided to buy it. (before) 2 He bought the shop. He had little money of his own. (despite) 3 He became successful. He gave the customers what they wanted, (by) 4 He put the profit back into the business. He didn't spend it on himself, (instead of) 5 He was happy. He was running his own business, (when) 6 He fell ill. He worked too hard, (as a result of) 1 He has made a lot of money. He bought his first shop ten years ago. (since) 74 See it happen or see it happening? A Introduction David fell down the steps. Rachel saw him fall. David was walking with a stick. Rachel saw him walking across the road. B See it happen After some verbs we can use an object + an infinitive without to. VERB Rachel Vicky Let's We all saw heard watch felt OBJECT INFINITIVE David someone the parade the house fall close go shake. down the steps. the door. past. We can use this structure with these verbs: feel, hear, listen to, notice, see, watch C See it happening We can also use an ing-form after the object. Rachel Can you We I could VERB OBJECT ING-FORM saw hear found feel David someone Matthew an insect walking playing exercising crawling with a stick. the piano? in the gym. up my leg. We can use this structure with these verbs: feel, find, hear, listen to, notice, see, smell, watch D See it happen or see it happening? SEE IT HAPPEN We saw Trevor plant the tree. (He planted the tree. We saw him do the whole job.) / watched Nick light a cigarette. We noticed a young man sit down and order a meal. SEE IT HAPPENING We saw Trevor planting the tree. (He was planting the tree. We saw him in the middle of the job.) I watched Nick smoking a cigarette. We noticed a young man sitting at the table eating a meal. When we talk about a short action, it often does not matter which structure we use. They heard a car turn/turning the corner. I didn't see anyone leave/leaving any litter. 74 Exercises 1 See it happen (B) Henry is in court. He is answering questions about a Mr Lewis, who the police suspect of a number of crimes. Add a sentence using the verb in brackets. ► And you say a second man came into the restaurant? (see) Henry: That's right. / saw him come in. 1 Are you quite certain that Mr Lewis took the envelope? (see) Henry: Yes, absolutely. ........................................................................................... 2 Then Mr Lewis left the restaurant, did he? (watch) Henry: He left soon afterwards ........................................... 3 And he drove away, (hear) Henry: Yes, he did. ........................................................ 2 See it happening (C) Look at the pictures and add a sentence with I can see/hear/smell... and the ing-form of these verbs: bark, burn, come, ring, wave ► The postman is on his way. I can see him coming. 1 There's a phone upstairs. ...................................................................................... 2 There's a woman in the boat. .............................................................................. 3 There are some dogs outside............................................................................ ….. 4 You've forgotten your lunch. ............................................................................... 3 See it happen or see it happening? (D) There has been a bomb explosion in the city centre. TV reporter Kitty Beamish is asking people about it. What did people see or hear? ? Man: The bomb exploded. I heard it. It was a shock. He heard the bomb explode. ? Woman: A man was lying in the road. I saw him. He was just lying there. She saw a man lying in the road. 1 Woman: The building shook. I felt it. I couldn't believe it. 2 Man: People were shouting. I heard them. There was panic. 3 Girl: An alarm was ringing. I could hear it. It went on and on. 4 Boys: The police arrived. We saw them. They were over there. 5 Man: I saw a woman. She was crying. She was in a terrible state. 75 Some structures with the ing-form A Two actions at the same time All afternoon Claire lay in a hammock reading a magazine. When two things are happening at the same time, we can use a main verb (lay) and an ing-form (reading). Here are some more examples. We had to stand in a queue waiting for the bank to open. You can t sit watching television all day. All afternoon, Vicky lay on the sofa thinking about life. We can also use this structure when one action comes in the middle of another. We use the ing-form for the longer action. Matthew injured his knee doing gymnastics. (= He injured his knee while he was doing gymnastics.) I went to sleep listening to the radio. B One action after another When there are two short actions, one straight after the other, we can use an ing-form for the first action. Opening the bottle, Mike poured the drinks. (= He opened the bottle and then poured the drinks.) Turning right into Madison Avenue, the car drove north for two blocks. We can also use the perfect ing-form. Having opened the bottle, Mike poured the drinks. (= After opening the bottle, Mike poured the drinks.) If either of the actions is long, we must use the perfect. Having photocopied all the papers, Sarah put them back in the file. Having repaired the car, Tom took it out for a road test. NOT Repairing the car, Tom took it-out for a road test. These patterns are typical of written English. In spoken English, to talk about one action after another we use a sentence like this. Tom repaired the car and then took it out for a road test. C The ing-form saying why We can use the ing-form to give a reason. The fans queued for hours, hoping to get tickets. (= They queued for hours because they hoped to get tickets.) Being the youngest child, Natasha was her father's favourite. Not knowing the way, I had to ask for directions. We can also use the perfect ing-form to give a reason. Having spent all his money, Daniel couldn't afford a new jacket. We decided not to travel, having heard the terrible weather forecast. 75 Exercises 1 One action in the middle of another (A) Say what accidents these people had. Use these phrases: lift weights, light a fire, open a tin, run, ski Put the verbs describing the longer action in the -ing form. ► Harriet burnt her hand lighting a fire. 1 Matthew ………………………………………….. 2 David ……………………………………………….. 3 4 Vicky .........……………………………………. Trevor ………………………………………… 2 One action after another (B) Rewrite the sentences about a detective. Begin with an ing-form, e.g. doing or having done. Mitchell picked up the phone and dialled a number. He let it ring for five long minutes and then slowly replaced the receiver. He took a gun out of the drawer and put it in his briefcase. He left the office and then had to wait a while for the lift. He reached the ground floor and hurried outside to a taxi. The taxi driver pulled out a gun and shot Mitchell. ? Picking up the phone, Mitchell dialled a number. ? Having let it ring for five long minutes, he slowly replaced the receiver. 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3 The ing-form saying why (C) Match the two parts and join them using an ing-form, e.g. doing or having done. ? Because she didn't want to be late, Harriet turned on the heating. ? As she had worked hard all day, Andrew took it back to the library. 1 Because he had studied the map, Daniel found it hard to communicate. 2 She felt cold, so Vicky ran to the bus stop. 3 Because he didn't know French, Trevor knew which way to go. 4 He had finished the book, so Sarah was exhausted. ? Not wanting to be late, Vicky ran to the bus stop. ? Having worked hard all day, Sarah was exhausted. 1 2 3 4 ........................................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. TEST 13 The infinitive and the ing-form (Units 65-75) Test 13A Some of these sentences are correct, and some have a word which should not be there. If the sentence is correct, put a tick (/). If it is incorrect, cross out the unnecessary word and write it in the space. ? ? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 I'm used to driving in heavy traffic every day. Although of- feeling tired, Polly didn't want to go to bed. It's important for to sign the form. Peter broke his arm in playing rugby. A woman accused Martin of stealing her money. I wasn't sure whether to write a letter of thanks. Do you remember a young man bumping into you? The girl's parents wouldn't let her to stay out so late. The book is too difficult enough for children to understand Police found the woman for lying dead on the floor. Cars are always expensive to repair them. The man died as a result of falling asleep while driving. / of Test 13B This is an advertisement for the book 'Winning in Business'. Put in the correct form of each verb. Are you fed up with (►) being (be) a failure in your job? Wouldn't you rather (►) succeed (succeed)? Do you want (►) to earn (earn) more money? Are you anxious (1)………………………….. (get) ahead? Do you believe in (2)……………………………(make) the most of your talents? Do you sometimes dream about (3)……………………………….. (reach) the top? If the answer is yes, read on. Just imagine yourself (4)……………………………(run) a big successful company. And now you can do something about it instead of (5)…………………………. (dream). It'll happen if you want it (6) . … … … … … … … … . . (happen). Make it a reality by (7)……………………………(order) your copy of the best-selling 'Winning in Business'. It has a ten-point plan for you (8) .......... ………………………..(follow). Do it and you're certain (9)……………………………(be) a success. You'll know what (10)…………………………. (do) in business. You can make other people (11) .................................... (respect) you and persuade them (12)…………………………. (do) what you want. Experts recommend (13)…………………………. (buy] this marvellous book. You'd better (14)…………………………….(order) your copy today. Test 13C Combine each pair of sentences. Use a to-infinitive or an ing-form. Sometimes you also need a preposition, ? We've advised Nancy. She should get a lawyer. We've advised Nancy to get a lawyer. ? I'm getting bored. I've been sitting on the beach. I'm getting bored with sitting on the beach. 1 We saw Rupert. He was looking in a shop window. 2 I remember the clown. He fell over. 3 Tessa wasn't sure. Which way should she go? 4 The porter just stood there. He expected a tip. 5 How about it? Shall we go to the barbecue? 6 Susan is used to it. She's always lived in the country. 7 I'm afraid. I might hurt myself. 8 Christopher apologized. He'd forgotten to pay. 9 The food was too cold. Michelle couldn't eat it. 10 Polly was silly. She gave away the secret. Test 13D Read the story and write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. Calvin Coolidge was elected US President in 1924. He didn't believe (►) in doing too much, and his slogan was'Keep cool with Coolidge'. Soon (1)…………….. moving into the White House, Coolidge invited some old friends (2)…………….. have dinner with him there. They were all people he (3)…………… to know in the old days, and they were simple country people. They were interested (4).…………… see inside the White House, and they were looking forward to (5)…………….. dinner with the President. They thought it was nice (6)………………him (7)…………. ... invite them. But there was one problem. They weren't used (8)……………. attending formal dinners, and they were worried that they wouldn't know (9)……………. to behave. They were afraid (10)………………looking foolish. So they decided it would be best (11)……………….everyone to copy exactly what Coolidge did. At last the day came. During the dinner, when Coolidge picked up his knife and fork, everyone did the same. When he drank, everyone drank, and so on. Finally Coolidge decided to amuse himself (12)………………playing a little trick on his visitors. He tipped some coffee into his saucer. Everyone did the same. (13)……………….done this, he added a little cream and sugar. Everyone did the same. Then, horrified, they watched Coolidge bend down and (14)…………. ... the saucer on the carpet for his cat. Test 13E Complete the conversations. Put in the correct form of each verb. ► A: I'm annoyed about being (be) late. B: Well, I told you to set (set) off in good time, didn't I? 1 A: Did you accuse Nigel of ...................................(break) a plate? B: Well, it was an accident, but he did break it. I saw him………………………….. (knock) it off the table with his elbow. 2 A: 1 came here …………………………….(see) Janet. She must have forgotten I was coming. B: It seems rather careless of her................................. (forget). 3 A: Are you going to have a rest now after………………………... (do) all the cleaning? B: No, I've got some letters ………………………………..(write). 4 A: You say you need some advice? B: Yes, I'm sorry……………………… (bother) you, but I don't know who………………………..... (ask). 5 A: Do you like Scrabble? B: Well, I used …………………………… (play) it quite a lot, but I got fed up with it. I'd rather ......................... (watch) television, actually. 76 Ship and water: countable and uncountable nouns A What is the difference? a ship two boats COUNTABLE UNCOUNTABLE A countable noun (e.g ship) can be singular or plural. We can count ships. We can say a ship/one ship or two ships. An uncountable noun (e.g. water) is neither singular nor plural. We cannot count water. We can say water or some water but NOT a water or two waters. Here are some examples of uncountable nouns. Can I have some water? Shall we sit on the grass? The money is quite safe. I love music. Would you like some butter? Here are some examples of countable nouns. We could see a ship in the distance. Claire has only got one sister. I've got a problem with the car. Do you like these photos? I'm going out for five minutes. B water Nouns after the, a/an and numbers There are some words that go with both countable and uncountable nouns. One of these is the. We can say the ship (singular), the ships (plural) or the water (uncountable). But other words go with one kind of noun but not with the other. COUNTABLE UNCOUNTABLE A/an or one goes only with a singular noun. I need a spoon. Numbers above one go only with plural nouns. We eat three meals a dav. NOT A WATER and NOT A-music. We do not use numbers with an uncountable noun. NOT three We do not use a/an with an uncountable noun. feeds C Nouns after some, many/much, etc Some and any go with plural or uncountable nouns. We can also use plural and uncountable nouns on their own, without some or any. PLURAL UNCOUNTABLE Tom told some jokes. Do you know any jokes? Tom usually tells jokes. But NOT He told joke. Many and a few go only with plural nouns. There weren't many bottles. I made a few sandwiches. 79 Agreement 85 A/an, one and some 95 Many and much We had some fun. That won't be any fun. We always have fun. Much and a little go with uncountable nouns. I don't drink much wine. There was only a little bread left. 76 Exercises 1 What is the difference? (A) Look at the underlined nouns. Are they are countable or uncountable? ? ? 1 2 3 There was a car behind us. I never eat meat. Do you play golf? I had to wait ten minutes. Just tell me one thing. countable uncountable 6 7 8 4 Love makes the world go round. 5 Good luck in your new job. Power stations produce energy. I'm taking a photo. Would you like an apple? 2 A and some (B-C) Laura has been to the supermarket. What has she bought? Use a or some with these words: banana, biscuits, butter, cheese, eggs, flowers, lemon, light bulb, mineral water, magazine, soap, wine ? some/lowers ? a magazine ? some cheese 1 ........................................................ 2 ……………………………………… 3 ……………………………………… 4 .................................................................... 5 ............................................................................. 6 ........................................................................... 7 .................................................................... 8 ……………………………………………… 9 ……………………………………………… Countable and uncountable nouns (A-C) Complete the conversation. Choose the correct form. Jessica: What are you doing, Andrew? Andrew: I'm writing (►)essay/an essay. Jessica: Oh, you've got (1) computer/a computer. Do you always write (2) essay/essays on your computer? Andrew: Yes, but I'm not doing very well today. I've been working on my plan for about three (3) hour/hours now. Jessica: You've got lots of books to help you, though. I haven't got as (4) many/much books as you. That's because I haven't got much (5) money/moneys. Quite often I can't even afford to buy (6) food/a food. Andrew: Really? That can't be (7) many/much fun. Jessica: I'd like to get (8) job/a job I can do in my spare time and earn (9) a/some money. I've got (10) a few/a little ideas, but what do you think I should do? Andrew: I know someone who paints (11) picture/pictures and sells them. Why don't you do that? Jessica: Because I'm no good at painting. 77 A carton of milk, a piece of information, etc a carton of milk two tins of soup kilo of sugar a piece/slice of bread a loaf of bread Milk, soup, etc are uncountable nouns. We cannot use a or a number in front of them. We do not usually say a milk or two soups. But we can say a carton of milk or two tins of soup. Here are some more examples. CARTON, TIN, ETC MEASUREMENTS a carton of orange juice a kilo of cheese a tin of paint a bottle of water PIECE, SLICE, ETC a box/packet of cereal a piece of wood a jar of jam a piece/slice of bread a tube of toothpaste a piece/sheet of paper a glass of water a cup of coffee five metres of cable twenty litres of petrol half a pound of butter a bar of chocolate a loaf of bread We can also use this structure with a plural noun after of. a packet of crisps a box of matches three kilos of potatoes a collection of pictures B A piece of information Advice, information and news are uncountable nouns. We cannot use them with a/an or in the plural. Can I give you some advice? NOT an-advice We got some information from the tourist office, NOT some informations That's wonderful news! NOT a wonderful news But we can use piece of, bit of and item of. Can I give you a piece of/a bit of advice? There are two pieces/bits of information we need to complete the questionnaire. There's a bit of /an item of news that might interest you. These nouns are uncountable in English, although they may be countable in other languages: accommodation, baggage, behaviour, equipment, fun, furniture, homework, housework, litter, luck, luggage, progress, rubbish, scenery, traffic, travel, weather, work Some countable nouns have similar meanings to the uncountable nouns above. COUNTABLE There aren't any jobs. It's a long journey. There were sofas and chairs for sale. We've booked a room. I've got three suitcases. UNCOUNTABLE There isn't any work. Travel can be tiring. There was furniture for sale. We've booked some accommodation. I've got three pieces of luggage. 77 Exercises 1 A carton of milk (A) What did Tom buy at the supermarket? Use of. Milk 0.35 Milk 0.35 ► two cartons of milk 1 kilo flour 0.85 ► a kilo of flour Jam 0.95 1 Matches 0.39 2 Bread 0.65 3 Bread 0.65 4 Chocolate 0.95 5 5 kilos potatoes 1.59 6 Breakfast cereal 1.38 7 Mineral water 0.74 8 Mineral water 0.74 Toothpaste 0.89 Total £10.48 2 Countable and uncountable nouns (B) Complete the sentences. Put in a/an or some. I really ought to do some housework. The people who camped in the field have left ..... ………. rubbish. progress. I've been working on the business plan. I've made .… .. accommodation. The visitors are here for two nights. They're looking for That shop has……………. nice sofa. luggage. You'll have to pay extra for the taxi because you've got ... The flat is quite empty. I need…………..... furniture. I can't possibly fit this guitar into……………. suitcase. You need …………….luck to win at this game. 3 Countable and uncountable nouns (B) You are talking about the holiday you had with a friend. Use these words: accommodation, awful journey, beautiful scenery, chair, fun, good weather, meal. You have to decide whether you need to put a/an or not. ? (It was quite easy to book a place to stay.) Booking accommodation was quite easy. ? (There was nothing to sit on in your room.) But my room wasn't very nice. It didn't even have a chair in it. 1 (You were in a beautiful part of the country.) It was a lovely place, though. There was.......................................... all around us. 2 (The weather was good.) And we had…………………………......................... while we were there. 3 (One evening you went to a restaurant with some other people.) One evening we had ........................................................... with some people we met. 4 (You enjoyed yourselves at the disco.) We went to a disco. We had .........................……………………… there. 5 (Travelling home was awful.) We had ........................................................ home last Saturday. 78 Nouns that can be countable or uncountable A A potato or potato? Some nouns can be either countable or uncountable. For example, a potato is a separate, individual thing, but potato cannot be counted. COUNTABLE I'm peeling the potatoes. Melanie baked a cake for David. Vicky was eating an apple. Someone threw a stone at the police. There's a hair on your shirt. UNCOUNTABLE Would you like some potato? Have some cake/a piece of cake. Is there apple in this salad? The house is built of stone. I must brush my hair, NOT hairs B A sport or sport? Often the countable noun is specific, and the uncountable noun is more general. COUNTABLE Rugby is a sport. (= a particular sport) That's a nice painting over there. We heard a sudden noise outside. John Lennon had an interesting life. UNCOUNTABLE Do you like sport? (= sport in general) Paul is good at painting. Constant noise can make you ill. Life is complicated sometimes. C A paper or paper? Some nouns can be countable or uncountable with different meanings. COUNTABLE / bought a paper. (= a newspaper) I'll have a glass of orange juice, please. Have you got an iron? (for clothes) I switched all the lights on. I've been to France many times. The journey was a great experience. I run a small business. (= a company) We finally found a space in the car park. UNCOUNTABLE / need some paper to write on. I bought a piece of glass for the window. The bridge is made of iron. There's more light by the window. I can't stop. I haven t got time. He has enough experience for the job. I enjoy doing business. (= buying and selling) There's no space for a piano in here. There are hundreds of satellites out in space. A coffee or coffee? Words for drink are usually uncountable: Coffee is more expensive than tea. But when we are ordering or offering drinks, we can say either a cup of coffee or a coffee. Two coffees, please. (= two cups of coffee) Would you like a beer? (= a glass/bottle/can of beer) Some nouns can be countable when we are talking about a particular kind or about different kinds. Chianti is an Italian wine. (= a kind of Italian wine) The use of plastics has greatly increased. (= the use of different kinds of plastic) 78 Exercises 1 A potato or potato? A sport or sport? (A-B) Complete the conversations. Choose the correct form. ► 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Can I pick an apple/some apple from your tree? ~ Yes, of course. I think sport/a sport is boring. ~ Me too. I hate it. We ought to buy some potato/some potatoes. ~ OK, I'll get them. I think painting/a painting is a fascinating hobby. ~ Well, you're certainly very good at it. Did you hear noise/a noise in the middle of the night? ~ No, I don't think so. Is there cheese/a cheese in this soup? ~ Yes, a little. I had conversation/a conversation with Vicky last night. ~ Oh? What about? Shall I put a chicken/some chicken in your sandwiches? ~ Yes, please. Are you a pacifist? ~ Well, I don't believe in war/a war, so I suppose I am. It isn't fair. ~ No, life/a life just isn't fair, I'm afraid. What's the matter? ~ You've got some egg/some eggs on your shirt. 2 A paper or paper? (C) Complete the conversations. Put in these nouns: business (x2), experience (x2), glass, iron, light, paper, space, time. Put a/an or some before each noun. ► Harriet: Mike: 1 Sarah: Mark: 2 Trevor: Laura: 3 Vicky: Rachel: 4 Claire: Mark: Did you manage to park in town? It took me ages to find a space. And all I wanted was to buy some paper to wrap this present in. Are you busy tomorrow? I'm meeting someone in the office. We've got………………………… to discuss. Do you think I need to take………………………. with me for my shirts? Oh, surely the hotel will have one. I was going to have some juice, but I can't find If you turned .……………………… on, you might be able to see properly. I've never met your brother. Oh, he's usually very busy because he runs……………………… . . . But he's been ill recently. The doctor has ordered him to spend.........................……. resting. 5 Daniel: How did your interview go? Emma: Well, I didn't get the job. I think they really wanted someone with………………………. of the work, and that's what I haven't got. So it was a bit of a waste of time. And the train coming back was two hours late. That's…………………………I don't want to repeat. 3 Countable or uncountable? (A-D) Complete Claire's postcard to her sister. Choose the correct form. The island is very peaceful. (►)Life/A life is good here. Everybody moves at a nice slow pace. People have (1) time/a time to stop and talk. It's (2) experience/an experience I won't forget for a long time. There aren't many shops, so I can't spend all my money, although I did buy (3) painting/a painting yesterday. Now I'm sitting on the beach reading (4) paper/a paper. The hotel breakfast is so enormous that I don't need to have lunch. I've just brought (5) orange/an orange with me to eat later. I've been trying all the different (6) fruit/fruits grown in this part of the world, and they're all delicious. 79 Agreemen A Subject and verb Look at these examples of agreement between the subject (e.g. the window) and the verb (e.g. is). SINGULAR PLURAL The windows are open. The door and the window are open. Her eyes were wet. They have got wet. The biscuits taste good. After a singular or an uncountable noun and after he, These methods don't work. After a plural she or it, we use a singular verb. noun or they, and after nouns joined by and, we use a plural verb. The window is open. She was upset. It has been raining. The soup tastes good. This method doesn't work. B Everyone, something, every, all, etc After everyone, something, nothing, etc, we use a singular verb (see also Unit 103C). Everyone was pleased. Something is wrong. But compare these examples with every, each and all. After a phrase with every or each, we use a singular verb. Every seat has a number. Each door is a different colour. After all and a plural noun, we use a plural verb, All the seats have a number. C One of, a number of and a lot of After one of ..., we use a singular verb. One of the photos is missing. After a number of ..., we normally use a plural verb. A number of questions were asked. After a lot of ..., the verb agrees with the noun. Every year a lot of pollution is created, and a lot of trees are cut down. D Any of, either of, neither of and none of When a plural noun comes after any of, either of, neither of or none of, we can use either a singular or a plural verb. Is/Are any of these old maps worth keeping? I wonder if either of those alternatives is/are a good idea. Neither of these cameras works/work properly. None of the plants has/have grown very much. E An amount + a singular verb After an amount of money, a distance, a weight or a length of time, we normally use a singular verb. Eight pounds seems a fair price. A hundred metres isn't far to swim. Ninety kilos is too heavy for me to lift. Five minutes doesn't seem long to wait. We are talking about the amount as a whole, not the individual pounds or metres. 79 Exercises 1 Subject and verb (A) Mark and Sarah are in an antique shop. Complete the conversation by choosing the correct form of the verb. Sarah: This table (►) is/are lovely. Mark: Yes, the wood (1) is/are beautiful, isn't it? Sarah: The style and the colour (2) is/are both perfect for what we want. Mark: These chairs (3) looks/look very stylish, too, but they (4) is/are rather expensive. Sarah: Can you see if the table (5) has/have got a price on? Mark: Yes, it has. It says it (6) costs/cost £2,000. That's ridiculous. Sarah: Don't you think prices (7) has/have gone up recently? Those tables we saw last month (8) wasn't/weren't so expensive. 2 Everyone, every, etc and phrases with of (B-D) Vicky has been to a very grand party. She is telling her parents about it. Put in was or were. I really enjoyed the party. It (►) was wonderful. Each guest (1)…………… welcomed by the hostess in person. All the rooms (2)…………… crowded with people. Everyone (3)………….. enjoying themselves. A lot of people (4)……………..... dancing, and a number of people (5)…………swimming in the pool in the garden. All the people there (6) ................very smart. One of the guests (7)………….. a TV personalitythe chat show host Guy Shapiro. I didn't know many of the guests. None of my friends (8)………….. there. 3 Agreement (A-D) The BBC is making a documentary about police work. A policeman is talking about his job. Choose the correct form. ► Every policeman is/are given special training for the job. 1 No two days are the same. Each day is/are different. 2 But the job isn't/aren't as exciting or glamorous as some people think. 3 Not all policemen is/are allowed to carry guns. 4 A number of police officers here works/work with dogs. 5 An officer and his dog has/have to work closely together. 6 One of our jobs is/are to prevent crime happening in the first place. 7 A lot of crime is/are caused by people being careless. 8 Sorry, I have to go now. Someone has/have just reported a robbery. 4 An amount + a singular verb (E) Combine the questions and answers about travel and holidays into one sentence using is or are. ? Do you know the price of a room? ~ Fifty pounds. Fifty pounds is the price of a room. ? How many public holidays are there? ~ Ten days in the year. Ten days in the year are public holidays. 1 Are you going on a long walk? ~ Fifteen miles. 2 Who's travelling on the bus? ~ Eight students. 3 Was someone waiting for the museum to open? ~ Yes, three people. 4 Do you know the baggage allowance? ~ Twenty kilos. 80 Singular or plural? A Clothes, etc Some nouns have only a plural form (with s) and take a plural verb. The clothes were in the dryer, NOT The clothe was ... The goods have been sent to you direct from our factory, NOT The good has ... My belongings are all packed up in suitcases. PLURAL NOUNS arms (weapons), belongings (the things you own), clothes, congratulations, contents (what is inside something), customs (bringing things into a country), earnings (money you earn), goods (products, things for sale), outskirts (the outer part of a town), remains (what is left), surroundings (the environment, the things around you), thanks, troops (soldiers) Some nouns have both a singular and a plural form with a difference in meaning. SINGULAR Our special price is £10 cheaper than normal. So don't miss this saving of £10. The storm did a lot of damage to buildings. I've got a pain in my back. It really hurts. PLURAL My savings are in the bank. I'm going to take out all the money and buy a new car. The newspaper had to pay £2 million in damages after printing untrue stories about a politician. I checked the figures carefully three times. I took great pains to get them exactly right. B News, etc Some nouns have a plural form (with s) but take a singular verb. The news was worse than I had expected, NOT The news were ... Economics is a difficult subject, NOT Economics are ... NOUNS TAKING A SINGULAR VERB The word news The subjects economics, mathematics/maths, physics, politics and statistics The activities athletics and gymnastics The games billiards and darts The illness measles C Means, etc Some nouns ending in s have the same singular and plural form. This means of transport saves energy. Both means of transport save energy. This species of insect is quite rare. All these species of insect are quite rare. NOUNS WITH ONE FORM crossroads, means, series (e.g. a series of TV documentaries), species (kind, type) Works (a factory) and headquarters (a main office) take either a singular or a plural verb. The steel works has/have closed down. 80 Exercises 1 Clothes, etc (A) Put in the nouns and add s if necessary. ► Claire had to take her luggage through customs (custom). 1 Please accept this gift as an expression of our.....................................(thank). 2 The woman is demanding…………………………(damage) for her injuries. 3 The .................................(pain) was so bad I called the doctor. 4 The old man carried his few (belonging) in a plastic bag. 5 If we pay in cash, we make a ........................... (saving) of ten per cent. 6 More (good) should be transported by rail instead of by road. 7 The gas explosion caused some ................................... (damage) to the flats. 8 We're going to spend all our ................................... (saving) on a new car. 9 The company always takes ................................... (pain) to protect its image. 2 News, etc (B) Look at each group of words and say what they are part of. Start your answers like this: ath..., eco..., geo..., his..., mat..., phy... ► atoms, energy, heat, light physics 1 algebra, numbers, shapes, sums 2 dates, nations, past times, wars 3 the high jump, the long jump, running, throwing ............................ 4 industry, money, prices, work 5 the climate, the earth, mountains, rivers 3 Clothes, news, etc (A-B) Choose the correct verb form. ► The television news is/are at ten o'clock. 1 These clothes is/are the latest fashion. 2 Maths is/are Emma's favourite subject. 3 The troops was/were involved in a training exercise. 4 The contents of the briefcase seems/seem to have disappeared. 5 Darts is/are often played in pubs in England. 6 The athletics we watched was/were quite exciting. 7 The remains of the meal was/were thrown in the bin. 4 Clothes, news, means, etc (A-C) Complete this letter Rachel has received from her sister. Choose the correct forms. (►)Thank/Thanks for your letter. Your news (1) was/were interesting. We must talk soon. What about us? Well, we're living on the (2) outskirt/outskirts of town, not far from the company (3) headquarter/headquarters, where Jeremy works. We've spent nearly all our (4) saving/savings on the house. That wouldn't matter so much if I hadn't crashed the car last week and done some (5) damage/damages to the front of it. More bills! But at least I wasn't hurt. The house is nice actually, but the surroundings (6) isn't/aren't very pleasant. We're on a very busy (7) crossroad/crossroads. I'm doing the course I told you about. Statistics (8) is/are an easy subject, I find, but economics (9) gives/give me problems! 81 Pair nouns and group nouns Pair nouns We use a pair noun for a thing made of two parts which are the same. Some pair nouns are binoculars, glasses, jeans, pants, pyjamas, scissors, shorts, tights, trousers. A pair noun is plural and takes a plural verb. My jeans need washing, NOT my-jean These tights were quite expensive, NOT this-tight We've got some scissors somewhere, NOT a-scissor? jeans scissors glasses binoculars We cannot use a/an or a number with a pair noun. But we can use pair of. I need some jeans, OR I need a pair of jeans, NOT a jean Laura bought four pairs of tights, NOT four-tights B Group nouns A group noun can usually take either a singular or a plural verb. The team was playing well, OR The team were playing well. The government is in crisis, OR The government are in crisis. The choice depends on whether we see the group as a whole or as individual people. Often it doesn't matter whether the verb is singular or plural. But sometimes one form is better than the other. SINGULAR PLURAL The family is a very old and famous one. The orchestra consists of eighty-six musicians. When we mean the group as a whole, we use a singular verb. The family are delighted with their presents. The orchestra don't know what to play. When we mean the individual people in the group, we normally use the plural. We use it and its. The committee has made its decision. We use they, them and their. The class will miss their lessons because they are all going on a trip. Some group nouns: army, audience, band, board, choir, class, club, committee, community, company, council, crew, crowd, family, government, group, management, orchestra, population, press (= newspapers), public, staff, team, union Also: Harrods, the BBC, the United Nations, etc and England (the England team), Manchester United C Police, people and cattle These nouns have a plural meaning and take a plural verb. The police have warned motorists to take extra care. People don't know what the future will bring. The cattle are going to be sold with the farm. page 379 Group nouns in American English 81 Exercises 1 Pair nouns (A) Trevor and Laura are shopping for clothes. Choose the correct form. Trevor: These trousers (►)is/are a bit tight. They (1) doesn't/don't feel very comfortable. And I think the blue ones (2) goes/go better with the jacket. Laura: That jacket (3) is/are too long. Trevor: Well, the jeans (4) fits/fit all right. Perhaps I'll buy the jeans instead. Laura: Yes, the jeans (5) looks/look good on you. I like the style. I think they (6) suits/suit you. Now you get changed while I look for (7) a/some shorts. And I might get (8) a/some skirt. 2 Pair nouns (A) Complete what Rachel says to Vicky. Put one word in each space. This old suitcase was in the corridor. I don't know who left it here. It's been here for about three days, so I'm having a look inside. There's a pair (►)of pyjamas, (1)………….. jeans, two (2)………………of tight sanda (3)………. of sunglasses. There are (4)…………… red shorts, too. 3 Group nouns (B) Complete this TV news report. Choose the correct form of the verb. Zedco (►)have/has just announced that it made a loss of £35 million last year. The management ( 1 ) is/are well aware that they have made mistakes. The press (2) have/has all been printing stories and articles critical of the company. The Zedco board (3) knows/know that they now have some difficult decisions to take. Naturally, the staff (4) is/are worried about their jobs and (5) wants/want a meeting with management as soon as possible. But Chief Executive Barry Douglas says things aren't really so bad. He has said that the company still (6) has/have a great future ahead of it. 4 Group nouns (B-C) Put in a group noun and is or are. Use these nouns: cattle, choir, crew, crowd, orchestra, police, population, team ► The crowd are all enjoying the game. 1 This United .............................................the best one Tom has ever seen. 2 The ………………………………… hoping they can take part in a national singing contest. 3 The ship's.......................................... all very tired after a long sea voyage. 4 The ………………………………. one of the biggest that has played at one of our concerts. 5 The ………………………………….installing cameras to photograph speeding motorists. 6 At the moment beef …………………................... cheap because sales of beef are low. 7 The country's ..........................................growing rapidly because of immigration. 82 Two nouns together A Introduction Look at these phrases. a bread knife = a knife for cutting bread a cookery book = a book about cookery a bus driver = someone who drives a bus my birthday party = a party on my birthday the street lights = the lights in the street a paper bag = a bag made of paper In English we often use one noun before another like this. The two nouns are often written as separate words, but we sometimes use a hyphen (-), or we write them as a single word. a tea break at the tea-table a large teapot There are no exact rules about whether we join the words or not. If you are unsure, it is usually safest to write two separate words. B A souvenir shop, etc Look at these examples. a souvenir shop = a shop selling souvenirs an animal hospital = a hospital for animals through the letter-box = a box for letters The first noun is usually singular. There are some exceptions, e.g. a sports dub, a goods train, a clothes-brush, a sales conference. C A teacup and a cup of tea Look at these pictures. a teacup A teacup is a cup for holding tea. a cup of tea A cup of tea is a cup full of tea (see Unit 11 Here are some more examples. / picked up a cigarette packet. I'll wash the milk bottle. Gary opened a packet of cigarettes. There's a bottle of milk in the fridge. D An ing-form + a noun We can use an ing-form with a noun. a sleeping-bag - a bag for sleeping in a waiting-room - a room for waiting in a washing-machine = a machine for washing clothes E Longer phrases We can use more than two nouns. a glass coffee-table at Sydney Opera House the bedroom carpet the winter bus timetable our Assistant Computer Technology Manager 82 Exercises i Two nouns together (A) Say what these things are. For each picture use two of these nouns: alarm, camera, chair, clock, cycle, luggage, motor, office, racket, television, tennis, trolley ► an office chair 3………………………………………………. 1………………………………………………………..4……………………………………………….. 2…………………………………………………………5………………………………………………. 2 Two nouns together (A-D) Can you say it a better way? Use two nouns together. ► (I read an interesting article in a newspaper yesterday.) / read an interesting newspaper article yesterday. 1 (Have you got any shirts made of cotton?) 2 (What shall I do with this bottle that had lemonade in it?; 3 (Have you got a bag to carry shopping in?) 4 (Is there a shop that sells shoes near here?) 5 (I'd like a table in the corner, please.) 6 (I'll need some boots to climb in.) 7 (Do you operate computers?) 3 Two nouns together (A-E) Look at the definitions and write the words. ? a station from which trains leave a train station ? a bottle once containing medicine and made of glass a glass medicine bottle 1 a wall made of stone 2 a centre where information is given to tourists 3 a towel you use after having a bath 4 clothes for working in 5 a block of offices in the centre of a city 6 a graph showing sales 7 a card that gives you credit 8 a race for horses 9 the Director of Marketing 10 a tour by bicycle at the end of the week TEST 14 Nouns and agreement (Units 76-82) Test 14A Some of these sentences are correct, and some have a word which should not be there. If the sentence is correct, put a tick (/). If it is incorrect, cross the unnecessary word out of the sentence and write it in the space. ? Would you like a piece of chocolate? / ? I like a classical music very much. a 1 That's a wonderful news! 2 Do you own a computer? 3 I heard an interesting piece of information today. 4 I saw your friend playing a golf. 5 There's some luggage in the car. 6 I bought a carton of some milk. 7 The gates were made of an iron. 8 You need an experience to run a business like this. Test 14 B Tessa is talking about her shopping trip. Write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. I spent (►)some time looking round the shops in Oxford Street yesterday. I spent far too (1) ……… … money, of course. I bought some (2)…………... : three dresses, a sweater, a blouse, two (3)…………. of trousers and a skirt. I enjoyed myself- it was great (4)…………….. . The skirt is really nice. A hundred pounds (5).……….. ... quite expensive, but I couldn't resist it. Anyway, it was reduced from a hundred and twenty pounds, so I made a (6)………….. of twenty pounds. One of the dresses (7)…………... fit, I've discovered, but I can take it back next time I go. I had a wonderful time and bought all these lovely things, But it was very crowded. Everyone (8)………….. rushing about. And the traffic (9)…………… terrible. I usually have a coffee and a (10)……………of cake, but the cafes were all full, so I didn't bother. Test 14C Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► Could I have some bread, please? (piece) Could I have a piece of bread, please ? 1 All the windows were broken, (every) 2 The money I earn isn't enough to live on. (earnings) 3 There were bits of paper everywhere, (litter) 4 We went to the hotel to get a meal, (food) 5 Judy bought some binoculars, (pair) 6 I need a new book of cheques, (cheque) 7 I'll have some orange juice, please, (glass) 8 The reporter needed some information, (two) Test 14 D Each of these sentences has a mistake in it. Write the correct sentence. ► Can you lend me some pen to write this cheque? Can you lend me a pen to write this cheque ? 1 We can't sit here because the grass are wet. 2 Do you want a butter on your bread? 3 All my belonging was stolen. 4 Do you have any informations about hotels? 5 The police is questioning two men. 6 Can we have two coffee, please? 7 The news aren't very good, I'm afraid. 8 I just want to go into this shoes shop. 9 It's only a short travel by train. Test 14E Choose the correct form. ► The house is built of stone/a stone. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Each team wear/wears a different colour. Let me give you an advice/a piece of advice. Everyone was watching the football match/the match of football. We had to take our luggage through customs/a customs. The band is/are proud of their success. I haven't got many/much friends. Three hours is/are long enough to look round the museum. I wear this glass/these glasses when I go out. My father had a job at the steelwork/steelworks. We couldn't find an/any accommodation. Do you eat meat/a meat? The contents of the box was/were thrown away. Noise/A noise woke me up in the middle of the night. Cattle was/were driven hundreds of miles by the cowboys. One of the windows is/are open. What would it be like to travel at the speed of light/a light? Is there a sport club/sports club near here? E-mail is a relatively new mean/means of communication. We make furniture out of many different wood/woods. Someone has/have kidnapped the President! 83 A/an and the (1) A Introduction Read this true story about an American tourist in Britain. A man from California was spending a month in Britain. One day he booked into a hotel in Cheltenham, a nice old town in the West of England. Then he went out to look around the place. But the man didn't return to the hotel. He disappeared, leaving a suitcase full of clothes behind. The police were called in, but they were unable to find out what had happened to the missing tourist. It was a mystery. But two weeks later the man walked into the police station in Cheltenham. He explained that he was very sorry, but while walking around the town, he had got lost. He had also forgotten the name of the hotel he had booked into. So he had decided to continue with his tour of the country and had gone to visit a friend in Scotland before returning to pick up the case he had left behind. A/an goes only with a singular noun. With a plural or an uncountable noun we use some. He left a case, (singular) He left some cases, (plural) He left some luggage, (uncountable) The goes with both singular and plural nouns and with uncountable nouns. He needed the case, (singular) He needed the cases, (plural) He needed the luggage, (uncountable) B Use When the story first mentions something, the noun has a or an. A man booked into a hotel in Cheltenham. These phrases are new information. We do not know which man or which hotel. But when the same thing is mentioned again, the noun has the. The man didn't return to the hotel. These phrases are old information. Now we know which man and which hotel - the ones already mentioned earlier in the story. We use the when it is clear which one we mean. A/AN Would you like to see a show? (I don't say which show.) The cyclist was hit by a car. (I don't say which car.) In the office a phone was ringing. (The office has lots of phones.) Has Melanie got a garden? (We do not know if there is one.) The train stopped at a station. (We don't know which station.) We took a taxi. We could hear a noise. I wrote the number on an envelope. THE Would you like to see the show? (= the show we already mentioned) Whose is the car outside? ('Outside' explains which car I mean. / was in bed when the phone rang. {— the phone in my house) She was at home in the garden. (We know she has one.) Turn left here for the station. (= the station in this town) We went in the car. (= my/our car) We could hear the noise of a party. I wrote it on the back of an envelope. C A man/he and the man/someone We use a/an + noun or someone/something when we aren't saying which one. A man/Someone booked into a hotel. He left a case/something behind. We use the + noun or he/she/it when we know which one. The man/He didn't return to the hotel. The case/It contained clothes. 83 Exercises 1 The use of a/an and the (A-C) Complete this true story. Put in a/an or the. (►A man decided to rob (1) ................... bank in the town where he lived. He walked into (2) bank and handed (3) .................. note to one of (4).................... cashiers. (5)…………….. cashier read (6)…………….. note, which told her to give (7)...………….. man some money. Afraid that he might have (8)…………….. gun, she did as she was told. (9) ................... man then walked out of (10)…………….. building, leaving (11)...................note behind. However, he had no time to spend (12)……………….money because he was arrested (13) .................. same day. He had made (14) ................ mistake. He had written (15) ................... note on (16).................... back of (17)………………. envelope. And on (18) .................. other side of (19).............. envelope was his name and address. This clue was quite enough for (20).................. detectives on the case. 2 A man/he and the man/someone (C) Replace the sentences which contain an underlined word. Use a/an or the with the word in brackets. ► We didn't have much time for lunch. David made something for us. (omelette) David made an omelette for us. 1 They ran the race before they held the long jump. Matthew won it easily, (race) 2 The driver turned left. Suddenly someone ran into the road, (child) 3 Vicky was lying on the sofa. She was watching something on television, (film) 4 I had to take a train and then a bus. It was half an hour late, (bus) 5 A shoplifter tried to steal some clothes. The camera videoed her, (thief) 3 The use of a/an and the (A-C) Complete the conversations. Put in a/an or the. ► Laura: Trevor: 1 Mike: Harriet: 2 Melanie: David: 3 Sarah: Mark: 4 Rita: Receptionist: 5 Tom: David: 6 Vicky: Rachel: 7 Andrew: Jessica: Look outside. The sky is getting very dark. I hope there isn't going to be a storm. I'm going out for ................... walk. Have you seen my shoes? Yes, they're on .................... floor in ................... kitchen. Would you like .................... tomato? There's one in .................. fridge. Oh, yes, please. I'll make myself .................... cheese and tomato sandwich. If you're going into ....................city centre, can you post these letters for me? Yes, I'll take them to ................... main post office. I've got ........... problem with my phone bill. Can I see someone about it? Yes, go to ................... fifth floor ....................lift is along the corridor. I didn't know Melanie had .................... dog. It isn't hers. She's just taking it for a walk while .................... owner is away. I've got ................... headache. I've had it all day. Why don't you go to ....................health centre? It's open until six. Guess what. I found ....................£50 note on the pavement this morning. You really ought to take it to ................... police station, you know. 84 A/an and the (2) A Introduction We use a/an and the when we aren't saying which one, and we use the when we know which one. A tourist arrived in Cheltenham to look around the town. Look again at the story and the examples in Unit 83. B The sun, etc When there is only one of the things we are talking about, we use the. The sun was going down. The government is unpopular. A drive in the country would be nice. We shouldn't pollute the environment. Normally there is only one sun or one government in the context. We mean the government of our country and the sun in our solar system. We normally say: the country(side), the earth, the environment, the government, the moon, the ozone layer, the Prime Minister, the sea(side), the sky, the sun, the weather We also use the with cinema, theatre and (news)paper. Do you often go to the cinema? I read about the accident in the paper. Note that we say a/the police officer but the police. A police officer came to the hotel. NOT A-police-came to-the hotel. The police came to the hotel. (= one or more police officers) C A nice day, etc A phrase which describes something has a/an. It was a lovely day. Cheltenham is a nice old town. It's a big hotel. This is a better photo. But we use the with a superlative. It's the biggest hotel in town. This is the best photo. We also use a/an to classify something, to say what kind of thing it is. The play was a comedy. The man's disappearance was a mystery. We use a/an to say what someone's job is. My sister is a secretary. Nick is a car salesman. D A or an? The choice of a or an and the pronunciation of the depend on the next sound. a or the + consonant sound a cup the cup a poster the poster a shop etc a boiled egg a record an or the + vowel sound an aspirin the aspirin an egg the egg an Indian etc an old photo an umbrella It is the sound of the next word that matters, not the spelling. a one-way street a uniform a holiday a U-turn an open door an uncle an hour an MP 84 Exercises The sun, etc (A-B) Complete these sentences about pollution and the environment. Put in a/an or the. ► There was a programme on television about dangers to the environment. 1 There was also ................. article about pollution in ............... paper. 2. …………………ozone layer will continue to disappear if we don't find way to stop it. 3 ………………..world's weather is changing. Pollution is having ........... effect on our climate. 4 Last week .................. oil tanker spilled oil into ................... sea, damaging wildlife. 5 Some professors have signed .................. letter of protest and have sent it to.................... government. 6 If.................. earth was ................... human being, it would be in hospital. 2 The use of a/an and the (A-C) Complete the ► David: Trevor: 1 Henry: Nick: 2 Sarah: Laura: 3 Rita: Harriet: 4 Rachel: Vicky: 5 Mark: Sarah: 6 Matthew: Emma: Matthew: Emma: conversations. Put in a/an or the. How was your trip to the coast? Wonderful. The sun shone all day. We had a great time. Would you like ..................... cigarette? No, thanks. I've given up smoking. It's ............ bad habit. What's your brother doing now? Has he got ........... good job? Yes, he's................. soldier. He's in ........... army. He loves it. It's .................. great life, he says. I went to see Doctor Pascoe yesterday. She's ............ best doctor I've ever had. She's very nice, isn't she? You couldn't meet ........... nicer person. You were .................. long time at ................ supermarket. Yes, I know. There was .................. enormous queue. I was thinking of complaining to................... manager. Why were you late for your meeting? Well, first I had to go to .................. hotel I'd booked into. I took……………. taxi from ................. airport, and................... driver got completely lost. It was................... terrible nuisance .................... man was ................... complete idiot. Is this ..................book you were telling me about? Yes, it's................... really interesting story. What did you say it's about? I knew you weren't listening to me. It's................... science fiction story. It's about .................. beginning of.................... universe. 3 A or an? (D) Put in the abbreviations with a or an. ? a Personal Assistant ? a National Broadcasting Company reporter 1 a Disc Jockey 2 a Very Important Person 3 an Irish Republican Army member 4 a Personal Computer 5 a Los Angeles suburb 6 an Unidentified Flying Object 7 an Annual General Meeting 8 a Member of Parliament a PA an NBC reporter 85 A/an, one and some A A/an and some Look at this example. Trevor has found some money in his old trousers. There's a note and some coins. We use a/an with a singular noun and some with a plural or an uncountable noun (see D). A + singular noun: a note Some + plural noun: some coins Some + uncountable noun: some money B A/an and one A/an and one both refer to one thing. Using one puts more emphasis on the number. Henry gave the taxi driver a note, (not a coin) Henry gave the taxi driver one note, (not two) We use one (not a/an) when we mean one of a larger number. One question/One of the questions in the exam was more difficult than the others. The team wasn't at full strength. One player/One of the players was injured. C A dog = all dogs We often use a plural noun on its own to express a general meaning (see Unit 86). Dogs make wonderful pets. Oranges contain vitamin C. Here dogs means all dogs, dogs in general. These sentences with a/an express the same general meaning. A dog makes a wonderful pet. An orange contains vitamin C. A butcher is someone who sells meat. A video recorder costs about £300. A dog here is less usual than the structure with dogs, but we often use a/an when explaining the meaning ol a word, e.g. a butcher. D Some Some with a plural noun means 'a number of, and some with an uncountable noun means 'an amount of. Claire took some photos. We went out with some friends. Henry bought some flowers. I had some chips with my steak. Can you lend me some money? Andrew is doing some work. Let's play some music. There's some milk in the fridge. Claire took some photos means that she took a number of photos, although we may not know the exact number. We do not use some when we are describing something or saying what kind of thing it is. Vicky has blue eyes. Is this salt or sugar? These are marvellous photos. Those people are tourists. Compare these sentences. I had some chips with my steak, (a number of chips) I had chips with my steak, (chips, not potatoes or rice) 76 Countable and uncountable nouns 83-4 A/an and the 94 Some and any 96 All, most and some 85 Exercises i A/an and some (A) Paul has painted some pictures for a competition. Say what is in the pictures. Use a or some with these words: birds, cat, fish, flowers, fruit, luggage, people ? some people ? a fish 1 ………………… 2 ………………… 3 …………………. 4 ………………… 5 ….. …………… 2 A/an and one (B) Put in a/an or one. ► Have you only got one bedroom? I thought you had two. 1 Melanie wanted something to drink. She was looking for …………… cafe. 2 It was Sunday.................... shop was open, but all the others were closed. 3 ............. of these photos is of you. Would you like it? 4 Shall I take.................. photo of you two together? 3 Adog = all dogs (C) Match each word with the right explanation and write sentences with a/an. carrot line of people ► A carrot is a vegetable. violin book of maps 1 ..............................................………………………... queue vegetable 2 ....................................................................................... atlas tool for digging 3 ……………………………………………………………. spade musical instrument 4 ........................................................…………………… 4 Some (D) What would you say in these situations? Use a noun and decide if you need some or not. ? You and your friend would like a game of cards, but neither of you has a pack. We need some cards. ? You are describing Rachel to someone. Rachel's hair is dark. Rachel has dark hair. 1 You are eating nuts. Offer them to your friend. Would you like ........................................................ ? 2 You want a drink of mineral water. There's a jug on the table, but you don't know what's in it. Is there ....................................................... in this jug? 3 You've come home from a shopping trip with a few clothes. Tell your friend. I've bought ........................................................ 4 You are eating some bread that Melanie baked. It's lovely. Melanie, this is.......................................................... 5 The two women who live next door to you are both studying at the university. Tell your visitor. The women next door are.......................................................... 86 Cars or the cars? We can use a plural noun (e.g. cars, parties) or an uncountable noun (e.g. ice hockey, music) without the. I love parties means that I love all parties, parties in general. B General and specific meanings GENERAL SPECIFIC A plural noun or an uncountable noun on its own has a general meaning. Cars are expensive to buy. Elephants are intelligent animals. I don't understand computers. (= all computers, computers in general) You always need money. Glass is made from sand. I'm quite fond of curry. Natasha is studying music. (= all music, music in general) The + plural noun or uncountable noun has a specific meaning. The cars had both broken down. We saw the elephants at the zoo. The computers crashed at work today. (— the specific computers at my workplace) Laura put the money in her purse. David swept up the broken glass. The curry was delicious, thank you. The music was too loud. (= the music at a specific time, at a party for example) A phrase or clause after the noun often shows that it is specific. Look at the oil on your sweater. The apples you gave me were nice. But the nouns in these sentences have a general meaning. / hate people who never say hello. Life in the old days was hard. Life in the old days is still a general idea, not a specific life. A phrase with of usually takes the. Compare these two structures. a book on Irish history a book on the history of Ireland Special uses of the We use the + singular noun to make general statements about animals and about inventions and discoveries. The tiger can swim. The fly is a common insect. Who invented the camera? The electron is a part of every atom. Here the tiger means all tigers, tigers in general. We use this structure mainly in written English. In speech, Tigers can swim is more usual. We also use the with musical instruments. (But for American English see page 379.) Natasha can play the piano, the violin and the clarinet. We do not use the with sports. Shall we play tennis? NOT Shall we play the tennis? Note that we listen to the radio but normally watch television. 86 Exercises 1 He likes golf (A) Look at the pictures and say what people like. Use these objects: art, chemistry, chips, dogs, golf ► He likes golf. 1………………………………………………………………………3………………………………………………………….. 2………………………………………………………………………4………………………………………………………….. 2 General and specific meanings (B) Complete the conversations. Put in the nouns and decide if you need the. ► Tom: Did you see the football (football) on television last night? Melanie: No, I hate football (football). I was watching the news (news) on the other channel. 1 Rachel: Did your family have a dog when you were younger? Vicky: No, thank goodness. I'm afraid of…………………………………… (dogs). I didn't like …………………………(dogs) that were running around in the park yesterday. I was afraid they were going to attack me. 2 Melanie: You shouldn't drive so much, Mark. You know that…………………………………… (cars) cause ……………………………(pollution), don't you? Mark: Yes, but ............………………............ (cars) these days are cleaner than they used to be. Isn't it........................................................ (aeroplanes) that are mainly responsible for.................................................... (pollution) of the atmosphere? 3 Melanie: I've put some bread out in the garden for …………………………………… (birds). Tom: You like ........................................................ (birds), don't you? Melanie: Yes, I do. I love …………………………………… (wildlife), in fact. I'd much rather live in the country if I could. 4 Laura: You're always reading books about ………………………………….. (history), aren't you? Harriet: It was always my favourite subject. Do you know anything about ................................................ (history) of this area? Laura: No, but if you like looking round .......................................... (museums) and …………………………..(old buildings), we could find out about it together. 3 Special uses of the (C) Put in the correct noun and decide if you need the. Use these nouns: atom, football, guitar, radio, telescope, television ► I was listening to a phone-in on the radio. 1 Rutherford split ............................................................. in 1911. 2 Tom and his friends played ............................................................. in the park. 3 Mike is quite musical. He can play................................................................ 4 The children spend a lot of time watching ................................................................ 5 Galileo developed .............................................................. for use in astronomy. 87 Prison, school, bed, etc A Prison or the prison? Compare these situations. This man is in prison. He went to prison two years ago. We do not use the when we are talking about being in prison as a prisoner. Here are some examples with other buildings. School is over at half past three. (= school activities) Vicky is at college. (She is a student there.) David is in hospital. (He is a patient.) Melanie is going to church. (She is going to a service.) The young woman is in the prison. She has gone to the prison to visit her father. We use the when we mean the prison as a specific building. The young woman is in the prison as a visitor. The school is a mile from here. (= the school building) The meeting was at the college. Melanie waited in the hospital for news. We wanted to look round the church, but it was locked. We can also use jail and university in this way. But we do not leave out the before other nouns for buildings, e.g. the cinema, the factory, the house, the library, the office, the pub, the shop, the station. B Bed, home, etc Here are some phrases with other nouns. bed: home: sea: town: work: in bed, go to bed (to rest or sleep) at home, go home, come home, leave home at sea (= sailing) go to sea (as a sailor) in town, go into town, leave town at work, go to work, leave work page 379 American English But sit on the bed, make the bed But in the house, to the house, in the home But on the sea, by the sea, at/to the seaside, on/to the coast But the town centre, the city, the village But the office, the factory 87 Exercises 1 Prison or the prison? (A) Put in the words in brackets. Decide if you need the. ► The four members of the gang were sent to prison (prison). Their wives drove together to the prison (prison) every week to visit their husbands. 1 Not many people go to................................... (church) regularly nowadays. I saw some tourists walking to .................................(church) last week, but they only wanted to take photos of it. 2 A group of people came out of...................................(cinema), crossed the road and went into ………………………………….(pub). 3 When my father was ill and had to go to ................................... (hospital), my sister went with him in the ambulance. She's a doctor, and she works at ....................................(hospital). 4 Mark has always known what he wanted to do in life. After leaving……………………….. (school), he took a course in business studies at....................................(college). 2 Prison, school, etc (A-B) Complete this paragraph from a magazine article about Melissa Livingstone. Put in the words with or without the. Today Melissa Livingstone is a popular actress and star of the TV soap opera 'Round the Corner'. But as a child she was very unhappy. She didn't do well at (>) school (school) , and she never went to (1).......................................(college). Her greatest pleasure was going to (2) ................................(cinema). Her family lived in an unattractive town and their home was next to (3) ......................(station). Melissa's father, Tom, was a sailor, and he spent months at (4) ........................(sea). He was hardly ever at (5) .........................................(home) and when he was, he didn't do very much. Sometimes he spent all day in (6) ........................................ (bed). Melissa's mother, Susan, had to get up at five o'clock every day to go to (7) ........................................(work). When Tom lost his job he stole a gold cup from (8)........................................(church) Susan used to go to. He had to go to (9) ..............................(prison) for a year. Melissa's mother was horrified at the shame he had brought on the family. 3 Prison, school, etc (A-B) Complete the sentences. Use in, at or to and these words: bed, church, college, factory, home, hospital, library, prison, shop, town, work Decide if you need the. ? ? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 We'll eat out tonight. I'll meet you in town later. This sweater was cheap. I bought it at the shop by the railway station. The weather was awful. We stayed.......................................all weekend. Melanie had an early night last night. She was........................................ at ten. Emma's friend has just had a baby. Emma is going ................... ...... to visit her. Vicky's parents are religious. They go ....................................... every Sunday. Laura doesn't like her job. She just goes...........................to earn some money. I've read these books. I'm taking them back ......................................... The man who did the robbery is no longer..........................................He was let out last month. Jessica is a student. She's ......................................... It's very quiet ......................................when they've turned all the machines off. 88 On Friday, for lunch, etc Introduction Henry: Don't forget we're meeting on Friday for lunch. Sarah: Of course I haven't forgotten. But remind me where we're eating. Henry: The Riverside Restaurant. You've been there before. Claire was with us. It was the Friday before she went to Australia. We had a good lunch. Phrases of time are usually without a/an or the. We're meeting on Friday for lunch. But we use a/an or the if there is a phrase or clause after Friday, lunch, etc. It was the Friday before she went to Australia. We normally use a/an or the if there is an adjective. We had a good lunch. B Years, seasons and months I was born in 1974. We play cricket in summer/in the summer. Winter always depresses me. I start the course in September. That was the year I was born. It was the winter of 1995 when things started to go wrong for the company. C Special times We go away at Christmas. Easter is early this year. I'll be home for Thanksgiving. We had a wonderful Christmas. I started work here the Easter before last. D Days of the week Yes, Thursday will be convenient. I'll see you on Tuesday evening. The storm was on the Thursday of that week. We went surfing at the weekend. E Parts of the day and night I can't sleep at night. I prefer to travel by day/by night. I must get to bed before midnight. We were on the beach at sunset. I hope to get there before dark. F Meals I'll see you at breakfast. We have supper at about eight. I'm going out after lunch. It's warmer in/during the day. Someone got up in/during the night. We're meeting in the morning. They arrived at the hotel in the evening. It was a beautiful sunset. I couldn't see in the dark. We had a quick breakfast. The supper David cooked was excellent. The meal was very nice. We'll need an evening meal. 88 Exercises 1 On Friday, etc (B-E) Complete the conversations. Put in the words and use a/an or the if you need to. ► Rachel: Is it the pop festival on Friday (Friday)? Vicky: I think it's the Friday (Friday) after that. 1 Henry: Will you be in America for .............................................. (Thanksgiving)? Claire: Oh no. That's in .............................................(November), isn't it? 2 Nick: Are you doing anything at.............................................. (weekend)? Tom: Well, I'm going to the match on ............................................. (Saturday), of course. 3 Ilona: Does it snow here at ............................................. (Christmas)? Emma Not often. We haven't had ............................................ (white Christmas) for years. 4 Nick: How long have you lived here? Harriet: We came here in ............................................. (summer) of ............................................(1997). 5 Laura: I'd like to look round the castle in ............................................ (afternoon). Trevor: Well, it's just a ruin. The building dates from ...............................................(year) 900. 6 Mark: I like driving at ............................................. (night) when the roads are quiet. Trevor: Oh, I don't like driving in .............................................(dark). I'd much rather travel during ............................................. (day). 2 A/an or the with meals (F) Laura is talking about the food she and Trevor had on holiday. Put in the words and use a/an or the if you need to. (►) The meals (meals) we had weren't very good. We had (1) ............................................ (breakfast) in the hotel, and that wasn't too bad. We usually went out for (2)............................................... (lunch) because (3).............................................(lunch) they served in the hotel was always the same. And (4).............................................(dinner) we had at the hotel on our first evening was pretty awful, so we tried a few restaurants. On our last evening we had (5) ..............................................(marvellous meal) in a Chinese restaurant. I wish we'd discovered the place a bit sooner. 3 On Friday, for lunch, etc (A-F) Put in the words. Decide if you need to use the. Claire: Hello, Henry. Come in. Henry: Oh, sorry. You're having (►) lunch (lunch). Claire: No, this is (1)........................................ (breakfast). I had a late night. It was long after (2)........................................(midnight) when I got in. Henry: Someone told me you're going away after (3)........................................ (Christmas). Claire: Yes, I'm going to the Seychelles on (4)........................................ (Wednesday). Henry: What a life you lead, Claire. What time do you leave for the airport? Claire: Oh, in (5) .......................................(morning) some time. About ten. It's cheaper to fly at (6)...................................... (night), but I decided it would be easier during (7)........................................ (day). Henry: I can drive you to the airport. I'm usually free on (8)............ …………….(Wednesday) mornings. I'd like to see you off. Claire: That's sweet of you Henry, but I can take a taxi. Henry: I'll just check in my diary that it isn't (9)........................................ (Wednesday) of our next board meeting. No, it's OK. I can do it. And when will you be back? Claire: At the beginning of (10) ....................................... (February). The second, I think. 89 Quite a, such a, what a, etc A Introduction After quite, such and what we can use a phrase with a/an, e.g. a game. There is often an adjective as well, e.g. such a good team. B Very, quite, rather, etc A/an goes before very, fairly, really, etc. It's a very old house. It's a fairly long walk. I made a really stupid mistake. But a/an usually goes after quite. It's quite an old house. There was quite a crowd . A/an can go either before or after rather. It's a rather old house, OR It's rather an old house. We can also use very, quite, rather, etc + adjective + plural or uncountable noun. They're very old houses. This is quite nice coffee. C So and such a so The structure is be + so + adjective. The test was so easy. NOT It was a so easy test. The hill was so steep. It's so inconvenient without a car. The weather is so nice. Tom's jokes are so awful. SUCH A/AN The structure is such + a/an (+ adjective) + noun. It was such an easy test. NOT it-was a such easy test. It was such a steep hill. It's such a nuisance without a car. We can also use such + an adjective + a plural or uncountable noun. We're having such nice weather. Tom tells such awful jokes. Note these sentences with long, far, many/much and a lot of. It's so long since I saw you. It's such a long time since I saw you. Why are we so far from the beach? It's such a long way to the beach. There were so many people. There were such a lot of people. You waste so much time. You waste such a lot of time. We can use this structure with so ... (that) or such ... (that). Emma was so angry with Matthew Vicky got such a nice welcome (that) she (that) she threw a plate at him. almost cried. I was so unlucky you wouldn't believe it. I had such bad luck you wouldn't believe it. D What a In an exclamation we can use what a/an with a singular noun and what with a plural or uncountable noun I + singular noun: What a goal! What a good idea! + plural noun: What lovely flowers! What nice shoes you've got on! + uncountable noun: What rubbish! What fun we had! 116 Quite and rather 89 Exercises Very, quite, rather, so, etc (B-C) What do you say in these situations? ? You're telling someone about the show you saw. It was quite good. You should go and see it. It's quite a good show. ? You are describing Harriet to someone who doesn't know her. She is fairly tall. Well, Harriet is a fairly tall woman. 1 You're talking about the Savoy Hotel, which is very grand. Yes, I know the Savoy. It's ............................................................................... 2 You are talking about your journey. It was quite tiring. I travelled a long way. It was ................................................................................ 3 You are telling someone about Claire's flat. It's really big. I've been to Claire's place. It's ................................................................................ 4 You are telling a friend about your meal with Tom. It was quite nice. We went to that new restaurant. We had................................................................................ 2 So and such (C) Complete the conversation. Put in so or such. Sarah: Sorry I'm ( ►) so late. We had (►) such a lot to do at work. Mark: You shouldn't do (1) .................. much. Sarah: The boss gets in (2) .................. a panic about things. She makes (3).......... ……. a big fuss. Mark: Well, you shouldn't be (4)...................willing to work (5) .................... long hours. No wonder you're (6) .................. tired. You'll make yourself ill, you know. 3 So... that and such ... that (C) Match the sentences and combine them using so or such. ? Sarah was late home. All the tickets sold out. ? Mike hadn't cooked for a long time. He wouldn't speak to anyone. 1 The piano was heavy. He'd almost forgotten how to. 2 Tom was annoyed about United losing. It kept all the neighbours awake. 3 The band was a big attraction. Mark had already gone to bed. 4 Vicky had a lot of work to do. Mike and Harriet couldn't move it. 5 The party made a lot of noise. She was sure she'd never finish it. ? Sarah was so late home that Mark had already gone to bed. ? Mike hadn't cooked for such a long time that he'd almost forgotten how to. 1. …………………………………………………………………………….. 2. …………………………………………………………………………….. 3. …………………………………………………………………………….. 4. …………………………………………………………………………….. 5. …………………………………………………………………………….. 4 What (D) Put in what or what a. ► Come into the sitting-room. ~ Thank you. Oh, what a nice room! 1 Vicky believes in ghosts. ~ Oh,.................. nonsense she talks! 2 Let's go for a midnight swim. ~ ................... suggestion! 3 I think about you all the time, Emma. ~...................lies you tell me, Matthew. 90 Place names and the A Introduction Man: Could you tell me where the Classic Cinema is, please? Rachel: Yes, it's in Brook Street. Go along here and take the second left. Whether a name has the depends on the kind of place it is - for example, a street (Brook Street) or a cinema (the Classic Cinema), a lake (Lake Victoria) or a sea (the North Sea). Most place names do not have the. Europe California Melbourne Brook Street Lake Victoria Some place names have the - for example, a name with the word cinema or sea. the Classic Cinema the North Sea Whether we use the can also depend on the structure of the name. We do not use the with a possessive (*s). at Matilda's Restaurant We often use the in structures with of, with an adjective and with plural names. With of: the Avenue of the Americas With an adjective: the White House With a plural: the Bahamas B Continents, countries, islands, states and counties Most are without the. travelling through Africa a holiday in Portugal on Jersey to Rhode Island from Florida in Sussex Words like republic and kingdom have the. the Irish Republic the United Kingdom (the UK) Plural names also have the. the Netherlands the USA the Canary Islands C Regions Regions ending with the name of a continent or country are without the. Central Asia South Wales Western Australia Most other regions have the. the West the Middle East the Riviera the Midlands Phrases with of have the. the South of France D Hills and mountains Most are without the. She climbed (Mount) Everest. down North Hill Hill ranges and mountain ranges have the. skiing in the Alps over the Rockies E Lakes, oceans, seas, rivers and canals Only lakes are without the. near Lake Michigan beside Coniston Water Seas, oceans, rivers and canals have the. the Mediterranean (Sea) across the Atlantic (Ocean) the (River) Thames the Suez Canal F Cities, towns, suburbs and villages Most are without the. Harehills is a suburb of Leeds. Houston is west of New Orleans. We live in North London. Exceptions are The Hague and The Bronx. Note also the West End (of London). G Roads, streets, squares and parks Most are without the. along Morden Road in Church Street on Fifth Avenue near Berkeley Square through Central Park There are a few exceptions. the High Street The Avenue The Strand The Mall Main roads and numbered roads have the. the Bath road (= the road to Bath) the A5 the M6 (motorway) Bridges Most are without the. over Tower Bridge on Brooklyn Bridge But there are many exceptions. across the Golden Gate Bridge the Severn Bridge (= the bridge over the River Severn) Stations and airports; important buildings We do not use the with most stations and airports; with religious, educational and official buildings or with palaces and houses. to Waterloo (Station) at Orly (Airport) near St Mary's Church Merton College Norwich Museum Lambeth Palace Ashdown House Exceptions are names with of or with a noun (science) or adjective (open). at the University of York in the Palace of Westminster the Science Museum the Open University past the White House Theatres, cinemas, hotels, galleries and centres A possessive form ('s) is without the. St Martin's (Theatre) at Durrant's (Hotel) In the US, names with center are without the. near Lincoln Center But usually theatres, cinemas, etc have the. at the Globe (Theatre) the Plaza (Cinema) outside the Dorchester (Hotel) in the Tate (Gallery) the Brunei shopping centre K Shops and restaurants Most shops and restaurants are without the. shopping at Bloomingdale's at Matilda's Restaurant Names with a noun (body, studio) often have the. at the Body Shop The Studio Cafe 90 Exercises 1 Place names and the (B-F) How much do you know about geography? Put in these names: Andes, Brussels, Irish Republic, Italy, Lake Michigan, River Nile, North, Pennsylvania, Tasmania, United Kingdom, West Indies Decide if you need the. ? Harrisburg is the capital of Pennsylvania. ? Dublin is in the Irish Republic. 1 Chicago lies on the shore of ............................................................................ 2 Sicily is a part of ............................................................................ 3 ........................................................................ are a mountain range in South America. 4 ……………………………………………….is England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland. 5 ......................................................................... is an island to the south of Australia. 6 Jamaica is an island in......................................................... 7 ………………………………………………….. flows through Egypt. 8 ......................................................................... is the capital of Belgium. 9 Manchester is in........................................................................... of England. 2 Roads, buildings, etc (E-J) Complete these sentences from a guide to London. Put in the words and decide if you need the. ? The train to Paris leaves from Waterloo Station (Waterloo Station). ? The National Theatre (National Theatre) is south of the river. 1 You can take a trip by boat along ........................................................................... (Thames). 2 The Serpentine is a lake in ........................................................................... (Hyde Park). 3 You can get to........................................................................... (Heathrow Airport) by underground. 4 Nelson's Column is in .......................................................................... (Trafalgar Square). 5 Walk a little way along .......................................................................... (Westminster Bridge). 6 From there you get a view of .......................................................................... (Houses of Parliament). 7 The Queen lives at ......................................................................... (Buckingham Palace). 8 Earl's Court is in .......................................................................... (West London). 9 ......................................................................... (Ml motorway) goes north from London. 10 ......................................................................... (Ritz) is a very elegant hotel. 3 Roads, buildings, etc (F-K) Complete the conversation. Put in the words and decide if you need the. Sarah: We've just been to (>)the States (States) -to (1) ................................................... (NewYork). Claire: Oh, really? I was there at Christmas. Were you on holiday? Sarah: Yes, and we really needed a break. It was wonderful. We saw (2) ............................................................. (Statue of Liberty), and we walked in (3).............................................................. (Central Park). We did all the sights. We spent a da] m (4).................................................................................................(Metropolitan Museum of Art). And we walked along (5) .............................................................. (Broadway) and around (6).............................................................. (Macy's) department store. Claire: Where did you stay? Sarah: In a small hotel near (7) ................................................ (Washington Square), not far from (8) ................................................. (New York University). Claire: Last time I was there I stayed at (9) ................................................... (Paramount). It's a nice hotel I close to (10) ............................................... (Broadway). 4 Roads, buildings, etc (I-J) A woman is asking Trevor the way. Put in the words and decide if you need the. Woman: Excuse me, can you tell me the way to (►)Millthorpe Station (Millthorpe Station)? Trevor: Yes, go along here and turn left by (1) (Little Theatre) opposite a building called (2) .........................................(Kingston House). The road is (3).......................................... (Wood Lane). Go along there, straight across (4)…………………………… (High Street), past (5)…………………………… (Royal Hotel), and you'll see the station in front of you. Woman: Thank you very much. 5 Roads, buildings, etc (G-K) Look at the addresses and write the sentences. Useful addresses for visitors to Seaport Seaport Bus Station, Queen's Road King Edward College, College Road Grand Theatre, George Street St John's Church, South Street Odeon Cinema, The Avenue Webster's department store, High Street Clarendon Art Gallery, Newton Lane Bristol Hotel, Westville Way ► 1 2 3 4. 5. 6 7 Seaport Bus Station is in Queen's Road. The Grand Theatre....................................................................................... ………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………. 6 Place names and the (B-K) Write the headlines of the articles in this month's edition of'Holiday', a travel magazine. ? walk / along / Princes Street A walk along Princes Street ? holiday / in / Bahamas A holiday in the Bahamas 1 day / at / Blenheim Palace 2 train journey / in / North Wales 3 tour / of / White House 4 beach / on / Riviera 5 shopping trip / to / Harrods 6 small town / in / France 7 trip / across / Severn Bridge 8 walk / around / Lake Windermere 9 visit / to / Tower Bridge 10 journey / across / Rockies 11 look / around / National Gallery 12 boat trip / along / Oxford Canal TEST 15 A/an and the (Units 83-90) Test15A Complete the story about the theft of a river barge. Put in a, an, one or the. This is (►) a true story about ( 1 ) .................... man who chose (2)...................... worst possible time for his crime. It happened in London in (3) ................. summer of 1972. (4) ............... man stole a barge on (5)... .. River Thames (in case you don't know, (6)…………….. barge is a river boat used for carrying goods). (7) .................... owner of (8) ........... …….. barge soon discovered that it was missing and immediately informed (9) .................... police so that they could look for it. Normally (1 0 )……… …… river is quite (11) .....................busy place, and it would be difficult to find what you were looking for. On this day, however, there was (12) ..................... dock strike, and so there was only ( 1 3 ) … … … … … . barge on (14) .................... river. (15) ..................... thief was quickly found and arrested. Test 15B Decide which word or words are correct. ► I think that's an awful thing to say. a) a awful b) an awful c) awful 1 Judy goes to................................... on the bus. a) work b) a work c) the work 2 I don't know what to do. It's ................................... problem. a) quite difficult b) a quite difficult c) quite a difficult 3 ................................. is my favourite sport. a) Golf b) A golf c) The golf 4 .................................starts at nine o'clock. a) School b) A school c) The school. 5 We had ............................... time at the disco yesterday. a) really nice b) a really nice c) really a nice 6 Nigel opened a drawer and took out ...................................... a) photos b) a photos c) some photos 7 Did you learn to play................................... ? a) violin b) a violin c) the violin 8 We can finish the rest of the bread for ..................................... a) breakfast b) a breakfast c) the breakfast 9 While I was in hospital, they gave me..................................... a) X-ray b) a X-ray c) an X-ray 10 I might listen to ..................................... a) radio b) radios c) the radio 11 We need to protect .................................. from pollution. a) environment b) some environment c) the environment 12 Why do they always play ...................................music? a) so terrible b) such terrible c) such a terrible Test15C Read the story about a silly mistake and decide if a word needs to go in the space. If a word is missing, write the word. If no word is missing, write X. This is also (►) a true story. It shows how (►)X plans can sometimes go wrong and how (1) .…………... people can make silly mistakes. This too happened quite (2)……………. long time ago -in (3)…………… 1979, in fact. The scene was (4)……………. old people's home in (5)........ ………..small town in (6) ................. north of England called (7)…………….. Otley. The owners of the home wanted to put (8)................... fence around it to make it more private. The work began soon after (9) .................. Christmas when (10)....................workmen arrived in (11)……………………... lorry with planks of wood which they put up around the building. 'It was (12)…………………..very nice fence,'said (13) ............…….. of the old people. But there was (14)………………… problem. The workmen forgot to leave a gap for the lorry to drive out through. They had to come back the next day to knock down part of (15)…………. fence. '(16) …………a silly mistake!' said another resident. 'It was (17)................... funny we had to laugh. In fact it was (18) ................ most fun we've had for a long time.' Test 15 D Some of these sentences are correct, and some have a word which should not be there. If the sentence is correct, put a tick {V). If it is incorrect, cross the unnecessary word out of the sentence and write it in the space. ? The space capsule came down in the Pacific. V ? My new job starts in the April. the 1 I was so tired I went to bed at nine. 2 We had a very good lunch in the company canteen. 3 The life just isn't fair sometimes. 4 What the clever children you have! 5 We went out and bought some pictures. 6 Tessa was still working at the midnight. 7 I drive past the hospital every morning. 8 A one boy was much taller than all the others. 9 It costs such a lot of money, you know. 10 I'll meet you outside the National Gallery. 11 Have you any idea who invented the fridge? Test 15E Complete the conversation. Put in the words and decide if you need fl, an, some or the. Martin: I think we ought to book (►) a holiday (holiday). Where shall we go? Anna: What about (►) Scotland (Scotland)? I think Edinburgh is (1)................................................. (beautiful city). I love going there. Martin: (2) ................................................(weather) might not be very good. We went there at (3) ............................................... (Easter), and it was freezing, remember. Anna: We could have a walk along (4).................................................(Princes Street) and up to the castle. And I wanted to go to (5) .............................................................(Royal Scottish Museum), but we never found time. Martin: Can't we go somewhere different? Anna: We could spend some time in (6)................................................ (Highlands), I suppose. Martin: When I go on holiday, I want to do something more relaxing than climbing (7)................................................ (mountains). And I find it pretty boring. Anna: How can you say such (8) ................................................ (thing)? Martin: Actually, I'd prefer somewhere warmer and by (9) ................................................. (sea). I think (10) ................................................ (Corfu) would be nice. We might get (11) ................................................ (sunshine) there. I just want to lie on a beach. Anna: Martin, you know I'm not at all keen on (12) ................................................. (beach holidays). 91 This, that, these and those We use this and these for things near the speaker (this printout here). This goes with a singular or uncountable noun, e.g. this report. These goes with a plural noun, e.g. these results. We use that and those for things further away (that table there). That goes with a singular or uncountable noun, e.g. that furniture. Those goes with a plural noun, e.g. those curtains. We can leave out the noun if the meaning is clear. I'm just having a look at this. That's nice, isn't it? Last month's figures were bad, but these are worse. B Places and people When we are in a place or a situation, we use this (not that) to refer to it. There's a wonderful view from this office, just come to the window. This party isn't much fun, is it? Shall we go home? We can use this to introduce people and that to identify people. Jake, this is my friend Rita. That's Andrew over there. On the phone we can use this to say who we are and this or that to ask who the other person is. Hello? This is Laura speaking. Who's this/that, please? C Time This/these can mean 'near in time' and that/those 'further away in time'. I'm working as a tourist guide this summer. I'm pretty busy these days. Do you remember that summer we all went to Spain? Those were the days. 1 can't see you on the third of July. I'm on holiday that week. To refer back to something that has just happened or was just mentioned, we normally use that. What was that noise? ~ I didn't hear anything. Jessica is on a diet. That's why she doesn't want to eat out with us. I've lost my key. ~ Well, that's a silly thing to do. To refer forward to something that is just going to happen or something that we are going to say, we uset This next programme should be quite interesting. I don't like to say this, but I'm not happy with the service here. 13 D this week, this year, etc 91 Exercises 1 This, that, these and those (A) Write each of the words (this, that, these, those) in the correct place. Near Singular Further away this Plural 2 This, that, these and those (A) Complete the sentences. Use this, that, these and those, and these nouns: car, dog, flowers, parcel, trees ► That car has crashed. 1 Would you like ….…………………….. 2 I must post …………………………….. 3 4 The house is behind………………... Whose is ....................………………... This, that, these and those (A-C) Complete the conversations. Use this, that, these and those. ► Mark: Are we going out this evening? Sarah: I can't really. I'll be working late at the office. 1 David: I hear you've got a new flat. Rita: ....................'s right. I've just moved in. 2 Mike: What's the matter? Harriet: It's .....................boots. They don't fit properly. They're hurting my feet. 3 Jessica: It's so boring here. Rachel: I know. Nothing ever happens in ......................place. 4 Emma: What's happened? You look terrible. Vicky: You won't believe .................... , but I've just seen a ghost. 5 Laura: What kind of planes are ..................? Trevor: I don't know. They're too far away to see properly. 6 Matthew: The match is three weeks from today. Daniel: Sorry, I won't be able to play for the team. I'll be away all. … … … … … week. 7 Mark: Zedco. Can I help you? Alan: Hello...................... is Alan. Can I speak to Fiona, please? 8 Daniel: I've had .....................bump on my head ever since someone threw a chair at me. Natasha: Someone threw a chair at you? ......................wasn't a very nice thing to do. 9 Mark: ................... seats aren't very comfortable, are they? Sarah: No, I don't think I'll want to sit here very long. 92 My, your, etc and mine, yours, etc A Introduction Mark: Sarah: Mark: Why have you brought your work home? We're going out. /'// do it later. Let's go now. Shall we take my car? Well, I'd rather not take mine. I think there's something wrong with it. My, mine, your, etc express possession and similar meanings. My car means the car belonging to me; your work means the work you are doing. My comes before a noun, e.g. my car. We use mine on its own. MY, YOUR, ETC First person singular: Second person singular: Third person singular: First person plural: Second person plural: Third person plural: It's my car. Here's your coat. That's his room. It's her money. The dog's got its food. That's our table. Are these your tickets? It's their camera. MINE, YOURS, ETC It's mine. Here's yours. That's his. It's hers. That's ours. Are these yours? It's theirs. B Its and it's We use its before a noun to express the idea of belonging. The street is around here somewhere, but I've forgotten its name. It's is a short form of it is or it has. I think it's time to go. (= it is) It's got a lot colder today, hasn't it? (= it has) C My, your with parts of the body and clothes We normally use my, your, etc with parts of the body and with someone's clothes. Emma shook her head sadly, NOT Emma-shook-the-head sadly. Someone came up behind me and grabbed my arm. You must take off your shoes before you enter a mosque. But we usually use the in the following structure with a prepositional phrase. VERB Someone The stone PERSON grabbed me hit Mike PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE by the arm. on the head. D Own We use own after my, your, etc to say that something belongs to us and to no one else. Rachel has got her own calculator. She doesn't borrow mine, NOT an-own calkulator I don't share any more. I've got a flat of my own. NOT of mine own E A friend of mine Look at these examples. Tom is a friend of mine. (= one of my friends) NOT a friend of me Rachel came to the party with a cousin of hers. (= one of her cousins) I borrowed some magazines of yours. (= some of your magazines) Note also 's in this example: Rita is a friend of Melanie's. 92 Exercises 1 My, your, etc and mine, yours, etc (A) Complete the conversation. Put in the missing words. Laura: Did you and (►) your friends have a nice holiday? Emma: Yes, it was wonderful. We had the best holiday of (1)…………… lives. It didn't start very well, though. Daniel forgot to bring (2)…………. passport. Laura: Oh, dear. So what happened? Emma: Well, luckily he doesn't live far from the airport. He rang (3)…………… parents, and they brought the passport over in (4)……………car, just in time. Laura: You remembered (5)…………… , I hope. Emma: Yes, I had (6)………….. , even though I'm usually the one who forgets things. Actually Rachel thought for a minute that she'd lost (7) Luckily it was in (8)…………... suitcase. Anyway, in the end we had a marvellous time. 2 Its and it's (B) Put in the correct form. ? Unfortunately, the town has lost its only cinema. ? The meeting won't last long. I'll see you when it's over. 1 You should return the book to……………owner immediately. 2 We'd like to go out for a walk, but…………… raining. 3 I'm not buying this tablecloth because………….. got a hole in it. 4 The board has decided that Zedco needs to improve………….. image. 3 Parts of the body and clothes (C) Put in my, your, etc or the. ? I was doing keep-fit exercises when I fell down and hurt my leg. ? Matthew served, and the ball hit Daniel on the knee. 1 A wasp stung me on………….. neck. It really hurt. 2 The mother put both .........…… arms around the child. 3 Aunt Joan kissed Emma on………… . cheek. 4 The fans were all shouting at the top of.…………. voices. 5 Don't just stand there with …………..hands in…………. pockets. My own, a friend of mine, etc (D-E) Correct the sentences which have a mistake. ► We're lucky. We've got an-own-garden. We've got our own garden. 1 I met some nice people. Harriet introduced me to -a fricnd-of-hefsetf. 2 My friends swim every day. They've got their only pool. 3 I enjoy rock-climbing, It's a favourite hobby-to me. 4 I hope Matthew will be here, I've got some-GDs-from his. 5 I don't want to share. I'd like-my very room 93 The possessive form and of A Form We use the possessive of a noun in phrases like the boy's name and Vicky's room. We form the possessive like this. Singular noun: 's boy -> boy's Vicky -> Vicky's Plural noun ending in s: ' boys —> boys' tourists ~> tourists' Plural noun not ending in s: 's men —> men's children —> children's We can use the possessive form with another noun or on its own. I've met Rachel's family, but I haven't met Vicky's. (Vicky's - Vicky's family) B The boy's name or the name of the boy? Compare these structures. THE POSSESSIVE FORM the boy's name the boys' names the men's names PHRASE WITH OF the name of the boy the names of the boys the names of the men Sometimes we can use either the possessive (the boy's name) or a phrase with of (the name of the boy), but often only one is possible. We normally use the possessive with people and animals. my friend's house Claire's idea Daniel's brother our neighbour's garden the dog's owner the policemen's uniforms the women's changing room the Parkers' car We normally use of with things, and not the possessive form. the side of the house NOT the house's side the result of the match NOT the match's result the day of the meeting NOT the meeting's day But we use of with people when there is a long phrase. the house of one of our teachers at college the address of those people we met in Spain NOT those people who we met in Spain's address We can use both structures for places and organizations. London's museums OR the museums of London the earth's atmosphere OR the atmosphere of the earth the company's future OR the future of the company the government's intentions OR the intentions of the government C The possessive of time We can use the possessive to say 'when' or 'how long'. last week's concert today's TV programmes yesterday's news about a month's work a moment's silence ten minutes'walk Note also: in two months' time (two months from now) a week's wages (wages for a week) 93 Exercises The possessive form (A) Write descriptions of the things in the photos. Use boy, girl and children and these words: bike, cat, dog, skateboards, tent, trophies ► the children's dog 1……………………………………….. 2……………………………………….. 3 .............................................................................. 4 .............................................................................. 5 …………………………………………………. 2 The possessive form (A) Laura is showing Melanie her photos. Put in the possessive form of the nouns. Laura: This was taken in (►) my friend's (my friend) garden. It was (1) …………….. ...................(the twins) birthday party. This is Kerry, (2) ………………….. ............(Luke) girlfriend. And that's (3) …………….. ................... (Jason) sister Emily. Melanie: And who are these two? Laura: That's (4)......................................... (Debbie) mother. She's talking to Monica Davis, (5) ……………………….(her children) teacher. And that's (6) ..........................................(the Lanskys) dog sitting on (7) ................................ (Olivia) foot. 3 The boy's name or the name of the boy? (B) Ed Buckman writes detective stories. Here are the titles of some of his stories. Write the titles using either of or a possessive form (with s or s'). ? the mistake / the policeman The Policeman's Mistake ? the bottom / the bottle The Bottom of the Bottle 1 the gun / Mr Hillman 2 the smell / blood 3 the car / the terrorist 4 the middle / the night 5 the death / someone important 6 the money / the gangsters 4 The possessive of time (C) Rewrite the underlined phrases using a possessive form. ? The prices this year are even lower. This year's prices ? From here it's a drive of two hours. a two hours' drive 1 I read about it in the paper yesterday 2 I just want a rest for five minutes. 3 It's the special offer for this month. 4 I'll see you in a week. 94 Some and any A Basic use Some and any go before a plural or uncountable noun (see Unit 85A). There was a bowl and some cornflakes on the table, but there wasn't any milk. We can also use some and any without a noun. Trevor wanted some milk, but he couldn't find any. We normally use some in positive sentences and any in negative sentences or ones with a negative meaning. POSITIVE There's some milk in the fridge. I need some stamps. ~ There are some in the drawer. I met some interesting people last night. We'll have some fun at Disneyland. NEGATIVE I haven't any milk. (= I have no milk.) I haven't got any stamps. Have you got any? I never meet any interesting people nowadays. We won't have any fun without you. We can also use any in a sentence with if. If you have any problems, you can discuss them with your group leaders. I can answer any questions. (= If there are any questions,...) In questions we can use either some or any, but any is more common. We don't know whether the answer will be yes or no. Have we got any butter? Will there be any food for the guests? Did you buy any clothes? We normally use some in offers and requests to make them sound more positive. Would you like some coffee? Could you post some letters for me? We can use some in questions when we think the answer might be yes. Did you buy some clothes? (Perhaps I know that you went out to buy some.) B Someone, anything, etc We choose between someone and anyone, something and anything, and somewhere and anywhere in the same way as between some and any. Someone has spilt water everywhere. Would you like something to eat? Let's go out somewhere. Did anyone see what happened? We haven't got anything to eat. Is there anywhere we can go? C Another use of any We can use any in a positive sentence to mean 'it doesn't matter which'. I'm free all day. Call any time you like. Any student will be able to tell you where the college library is. You can buy these maps at any petrol station. They all have them. We say any petrol station because all petrol stations have the maps. It doesn't matter which one you go to. They are all equally good. Look at these examples with anyone, anything and anywhere. It's a very simple puzzle. Anyone could solve it. (= It doesn't matter who.) What shall we have for lunch? ~ Oh, anything. I don't mind. Where do we have to sit? ~ We can sit anywhere. It doesn't matter. 85A A/an and some 103 Everyone, something, etc 94 Exercises i Basic use (A) Look at the pictures and say what people have or haven't got. Use some or any. Use these words: cats, money, petrol, poison, sandwiches ? They've got some sandwiches. ? She hasn't got any money. 1 …………………………………. 2 ……………………………………… 3 …………………………………. 2 Basic use (A) Justin Cooper is a radio disc jockey. Complete what he is saying. Put in some or any. That was 'I can't find {->)any love' by Arlene Black. Now, I've had (►)some letters asking for something by Express. One listener says she hasn't heard (1)……………. Express songs on this programme for months. Well, I'm going to put that right. And this will be our last track because there isn't (2)……………… more time left. We've had (3)……………. great songs tonight, and I'll be here next week to play (4)…………. more. Now here's (5)……………. music from Express - 'I never have (6)………………luck'. 3 Some, any, someone, anyone, etc (A-B) Complete the conversations. Put in some, any, anyone, someone, something or anything. ► Trevor: We haven't got any bread. Laura: You'd better go to the shop, then. We need some tomatoes, too. 1 Claire: Would you like .............................. cheese and biscuits? Sarah: Oh, no thank you. That was delicious, but I couldn't eat………………………… else. 2 Harriet: There's ................................. at the door. Mike: Are we expecting.................................. visitors? 3 Melanie: Has ................................. offered to help you with the tea? Rita: No, but I'd be very grateful for…………………………..help you can give. 4 Vicky: I was looking for ................................. , and now I can't remember what it was. Rachel: You said you were looking for ........... matches. 4 Another use of any (C) Put in any + noun, anyone or anything. ? The seats aren't reserved. You can have any seat you like. ? I don't mind what we do today. We can do anything you want. 1 If it's your party, you can invite .............. ……………… you like. 2 All the buses go into the town centre. Take………………………….. that comes along here. 3 This carpet is available in lots of colours. You can have…………………………… you like. 4 My father has the television on all the time. He'll watch……………………………. 5 It doesn't matter which day you phone. Ring………………………….. you like. 95 A lot of, lots of, many, much, (a) few and (a) little A Introduction A lot of, lots of, many and much mean a large quantity. Ron Mason owns a chain of supermarkets. He's made a lot of money. A few and a little mean a small quantity. I'd better hurry. My bus goes in a few minutes. Many and a few go before plural nouns. many places many problems a few people a few buildings Much and a little go before uncountable nouns much money much trouble a little sunshine a little food A lot of and lots of go before both plural and uncountable nouns. a lot of tourists lots of games a lot of sugar lots of fun We use these words without a noun if it is clear what we mean. I take photos, but not as many as I used to. At one time I took a lot. Note that we say a lot without of. B A lot of, many and much As a general rule, we use a lot of and lots of in positive statements and many and much in negatives and questions. Positive: We get a lot of storms here. We get a lot of rain here. Negative: We don't get many storms here. We don't get much rain here. Questions: Do you get many storms here? Do you get much rain here? How many eggs do we need? How much salt do we put in? We use many or much (not a lot of) after too, so and as. There are too many cars. I've got so much work. I haven't got as much money as you. In formal English, we can sometimes use many and much in a positive statement. Many students have financial problems. There is much enthusiasm for the idea. But this is less usual in conversation, where we normally use a lot of or lots of. In informal English, you may hear a lot of in a negative or a question. I don't have many friends/a lot of friends. Do you eat much fruit/a lot of fruit? C Few and little with and without a With a the meaning is positive. A few customers have come into the shop. It has been fairly busy. Vicky has made a little progress and so is feeling quite pleased. A few customers ~ some customers, a small number of customers A little progress = some progress, a small amount of progress Without a the meaning is negative. Few customers have come into the shop. It has been quiet. Vicky has made little progress and so is not feeling very pleased. few customers - not many customers Little progress = not much progress Few and little (without a) can be rather formal. In informal speech we can use these structures. Not many customers have come in. Vicky hasn't made much progress. Only a few customers have come in. Vicky has made only a little progress. 95 Exercises 1 A lot of, lots of, many, much, a few and a little (A) Write the sentences correctly. ► Mark was only spending one night away. He -quickly put a little things into a bag He quickly put a few things into a bag. 1 Rachel is learning to drive. She hasn't had much lessons yet. 2 I'm making soup for twenty people, I'll have to make a lot-of. 3 I feel really tired. 1 haven't got many energy. 4 The mixture looks rather dry. Maybe you should add a few water. 5 We're having a big party. We've invited-a lots of friends. 2 A lot of, many and much (A-B) Complete the conversation. Put in a lot of, many or much. More than one answer may be correct. Matthew: There are (►)a lot of athletes taking part in the International Games in London. There's been (1) ................................... coverage in the papers. Daniel: Our runners haven't won (2) ................................... medals, have they? Matthew: No, not as (3)………………………. as last time. But there's plenty of time. There are still (4)……………………… events to come. I'd like to go and see some of the track events, but I haven't got (5)…………………….. ... time at the moment. Daniel: No, not with exams coming up. Matthew: I'm hoping to go at the weekend if I can get a ticket. Apparently there aren't (6) .........................…….. seats left. Daniel: I've heard the cheapest tickets are £25.1 think that's too (7) 3 A few, few, a little and little (C) Put in a few, few, a little or little. ? I don't think I can lift this box on my own. I need a little help. ? Few tourists visited Northern Ireland in the 1980s because of the terrorism there. 1 The postman doesn't often come here. We receive .……………………………… letters. 2 The snow was quite deep. There seemed ............................................. hope of completing our journey. 3 Trevor isn't finding it easy to fix the shelves. He's having ..........……………………….. trouble. 4 Sarah is exhausted. She's having ..........………… ................... days'holiday next week. 5 David quite likes golf, but unfortunately he has……………………………….. ability. 6 I can speak…………………………………words of Swedish, but I'm not very fluent. 4 Many, few, much and little (B-C) Complete this paragraph from a travel book. Put in many, few, much or little. The main town on the island is very small and does not have (►) many important buildings. The islanders do not have (1)…………….money, and they have (2)…………… contact with the outside world. There is not (3)……………..chance of the place attracting large numbers of tourists. The roads are not very good. There are lots of bicycles but not (4)…………… cars. And there are hardly any of the modern facilities which visitors expect. There are (5)…………… shops, and there is (6)……………. entertainment. 96 All, half, most, some, no and none A All, most and some We can use all, most and some before a plural or an uncountable noun. All plants need water. All matter is made up of atoms. Most people would like more money. Some food makes me ill. All plants means 'all plants in general/in the world'. Most people means 'most people in this country/in the world'. Some food means 'some food but not all food'. Here some is pronounced /sA.m/. B All of, half of, most of and some of Laura: Why do you keep all of these clothes? You never wear most of them. You've had some of your jackets for ten years. Why don't you throw them all out? This one is completely out of fashion. Trevor: Well, I thought if I waited long enough, it might come back into fashion. All of these clothes has a specific meaning. Laura is talking about Trevor's clothes, not about clothes in general. We can use all (of), half (of), most of and some of. Have all (of) the plants died? ~ No, not all of them. Most of the people who live around here are students. I've spent most of my money already. Half {of ) the audience left before the end of the film. Some of that food from the party was all right, but I threw some of it away. We can leave out of after all or half, but not before a pronoun. all of these clothes on all the clothes BUT all of them NOT all them half of our group OR half our group BUT half of us NOT half us We can also use all in mid position (see Unit 113B) or after a pronoun. These cups are all dirty. I'll have to clean them all. The guests have all gone now. I think they all enjoyed themselves. We can use most and some on their own. The band sang a few songs. Most were old ones, but some were new. C All meaning 'everything' or 'the only thing' We can use all with a clause to mean 'everything' or 'the only thing'. Tell me all you know. All I did was ask a simple question. Here you know and I did are clauses. We do not normally use all without the clause. Tell me everything, NOT Tell-me-all. D No and none We use no with a noun. We've rung all the hotels, and there are no rooms available. I'm afraid I've got no money. (= I haven't got any money.) We use none with of or on its own. None of my friends will be at the party. Look at these clothes. None of them are in fashion now. I wanted some cake, but there was none left, NOT There-was no left. 86 Cars or the cars? 94 Some and any 103 Everyone, etc 96 Exercises 1 All, most, half, some and none (B, D) Read this advertisement for some new flats and then complete the sentences. Put in all of them, most of them, half of them, some of them and none of them. Hartley House is an old manor house which has been converted into thirty one-bedroom and twobedroom flats. All the flats have a fitted kitchen, bathroom and large living-room. Ten of them have a separate dining-room. Twenty-five of the flats have a view of the sea, and fifteen have a private balcony. All thirty flats are still for sale. Ring us now for more details. ► The flats are modern. All of them have a fitted kitchen. 1 …………………….have two bedrooms. 2 From …………………….. you can see the sea. 3 ……………………….. have a private balcony. 4 …………………………have a large living-room. 5 There's also a dining-room in …………………… 6 ……………………..has been sold yet. 2 All, most, some and none (B, D) There was a quiz evening yesterday. Six friends took part, and they all answered twenty questions. Did they get all, most, some or none of them right? ? Natasha answered all twenty correctly. She got all of them right. ? Daniel's score was fifteen. He got most of them right. 1 Jessica had only eight correct answers. 2 Matthew got them all right except three. 3 Andrew gave twenty correct answers. 4 But poor Vicky didn't get a single one right 3 All, most, no and none (A-D) Complete the conversations. Use the word in brackets with all, all the, most, most of the, no or none of the. ► Andrew: I wonder where they make this milk. Jessica: It isn't made in a factory, Andrew. All milk (milk) comes from animals. ► Rita: What do you usually do on a Sunday? Mike: Not much. We spend most of the time (time) reading the papers. 1 Claire: In general, people aren't interested in politics, are they? Mark: I think ……………………………... (people) are bored by the subject. 2 Vicky: These new flats are supposed to be for students. Rachel: That's ridiculous………………………………….(student) in the world could possibly afford such a high rent. 3 Tom: Who's paying for the new ice-rink to be built? Nick: Well, …………………………………(money) will come from the government, but the city has to pay a quarter of the cost. 4 Melanie: We should ban cars ............................................... (cars) pollute the air, don't they? David: Well, except electric ones, I suppose. 5 Vicky: What kind of fruit should you eat to stay healthy? Natasha: I don't think it matters……………………………….. (fruit) is good for you, isn't it? 6 Tom: I knew there had been a power cut because it was so dark everywhere. Harriet: Yes, ......................................... (lights) in our street went out. 97 Every, each, whole, both, either and neither A Every and each We use every and each before a singular noun to talk about a whole group. The police questioned every person/each person in the building. Every room/Each room has a number. In many contexts either word is possible, but there is a difference in meaning. EVERY Every person means 'all the people', 'everyone'. Every guest watched as the President came in. I go for a walk every day. Every means three or more, usually a large number. There were cars parked along every street in town. (= all the streets) EACH Each person means all the people seen as individuals, one by one. Each guest (in turn) shook hands with him. Each day seemed to pass very slowly. Each is more usual with smaller groups and can mean only two. There were cars parked along each side of the street. (= both sides) We can use each (but not every) on its own or with of. There are six flats. Each has its own entrance, NOT Every has... Each of the six flats has its own entrance, NOT Every of the ... We can also say Each one/Every one has its own entrance. We can also use each in mid position (see Unit 113B) or after a pronoun. We've each got our own desk. They gave us each a desk. Compare every and all before day, morning, week, etc. I travel every day. (= Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,...) I was travelling all day. (= from morning till evening) B Whole We use whole before a singular noun. It means 'all' or 'complete'. The baby cried the whole time. (= all the time) I've spent my whole life waiting for this moment. (= all my life) We'll need a whole loaf to make sandwiches for everyone. C Both, either and neither We use both, either and neither for two things. I've got two bicycles. Both of them are quite old. I've given up cycling, so I don't ride either of them any more. Neither of them is in very good condition, I'm afraid. Both means 'the one and the other'. We can use it in the following structures. We had two letters this morning, and both letters/both the letters/both of the letters/both of them are bills We can also use both in mid position (see Unit 113B) or after a pronoun. The letters are both bills. I've opened them both. Either means 'the one or the other', and neither means 'not the one or the other'. I haven't met either twin/either of the twins/either of them. Neither shoe fits/Neither of the shoes fit(s)/'Neither of them fit(s). We can use both, either and neither on their own. The store has two lifts, and both are out of order/neither is working. 97 Exercises 1 Every and each (A) Complete the dialogue. Put in every or each. Sometimes both are possible. Laura: It's a lot bigger than your last house, isn't it? Did you say there are four people living here? Natasha: Yes, and we (►)each have our own bedroom. Laura: Does (1).............. person pay a quarter of the rent? Natasha: That's right. On the first of (2) …………………month. Laura: It must be fantastic for parties. Natasha: Yes, it is. We don't have one (3)………………..week, but almost! Laura: Isn't that rather expensive? Natasha: Not if (4)……………. guest brings something to eat or drink! Anyway, there'll be no more parties until our exams are over. We're spending (5)…………… moment revising. 2 Every, all and whole (A-B) Put in every, all or the whale and the word in brackets. Sometimes more than one answer is possible. ► Melanie is a religious person. She goes to church every Sunday (Sunday). 1 The weather has been awful today. It's been raining......... ……………….. (day). 2 I just can't sleep. I spent .................................. (night) lying awake. 3 Sarah gets the train at half past seven………………………. (morning). 4 It's eleven o'clock. Are you going to lie in bed…………………………(morning)? 5 Last Saturday Trevor spent ..............................(day) putting up some shelves. 6 Why are you in such a hurry................................ (time) I see you? 3 Both, either and neither (C) There are two pubs in Brickfield, The White Horse and The Ship. Look at the information and then write the sentences. Use both of them, one of them or neither of them. THE SHIP THE WHITE HORSE MEALS BAR SNACKS FAMILY ROOM MEALS SEPARATE RESTAURANT BAR SNACKS NON - SMOKING AREA ► (serve meals) Both of them serve meals. 1 (have a separate restaurant) ... 2 (serve bar snacks) ... 3 (have a family room) 4 (allow pub games) 5 (have live music) 6 (have a non-smoking area)... 4 Every, each, whole, both, either and neither (A-C) Complete the conversation. Put in every, each, whole, both, either or neither. Assistant: These plain sofas come in two different styles. Sarah: I think (►)both styles are rather old-fashioned. (1)……………. of them is really what I want. I don't like (2)……………. of them, I'm afraid. Assistant: What about a patterned fabric? There are some lovely colours here. Sarah: I feel more and more unsure with (3)…………… new fabric I look at. Mark: We haven't got time to look at (4)……………. fabric in the shop. We've been in here a (5)…………… hour already, you know. TEST 16 This, my, some, a lot of, all, etc (Units 91-97) Test 16A Look at what people are saying and choose the correct meaning. ► Polly: Let's sit under these trees, shall we? The trees are a) near Polly. b)a long way away from Polly. 1 Martin: My friend and I ate a whole loaf. Martin and his friend ate a) part of the loaf, b) all the loaf. 2 Nigel: The girls' dog has gone missing. The dog belongs to a) one girl, b) more than one girl. 3 Tessa: My brother has got his own office. Tessa's brother a) works alone in the office, b) shares the office with another person. 4 Nancy: The weather looks a little better, I think. How does Nancy feel about the weather? a) Hopeful, b) Not very hopeful. 5 Ben: I can't answer either of these questions. How many questions is Ben talking about? a) One. b) Two. c) O More than two. 6 Adrian: The children can keep any tennis balls they find. Will they find any tennis balls? a) Yes. b) No. c) Adrian doesn't know. Test 16B Decide which word is correct. ► What colour shall we have? ~ I don't mind. Pick any colour you like. a) any b) some c) that d) what 1 Peter has two brothers, but he doesn't speak to…………………… of them. a) any b) both c) either d) neither 2 ……………….. has left a bicycle outside. a) Anyone b) Anything c) Someone d) Something 3 I like pictures here. ~ Yes, so do I. a) that b) these c) this d) those 4 Would you mind waiting............................. minutes? a) a few b) a little c) few d) little 5 .....………. ......... countries still have a king or a queen, don't they? a) Any b) Half c) Part d) Some 6 Safety should come first…………………… lives shouldn't be put at risk, a) People b) Peoples c) People's d) Peoples' 7 Nigel isn't very well. ~ Oh, I'm sorry to hear .................... a) so b) that c) this d) you 8 Mr Jones is an uncle of ............................... a) Polly b) Pollys c) Polly's d) Pollys' Test 16C Tessa is walking along the street when she sees her old friend Angela. Read the conversation and write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. Tessa: Hello, Angela. How are you? Angela: Tessa! Hello! Shall we have lunch together? Tessa: I was just going to the bank to get (►)some> money. I have to be back at the office in (1)…………….few minutes. My life's one mad rush. Angela: So is (2)……………. . I'm working for Tuffex Plastics now. And my daughter has invited three friends (3)…………. ... hers to stay. I wish I didn't have so (4)…………… things to do at once. I'm glad I've run into you. I never see (5)……………. else from our old gang. (6)…………… of them seem to be around any more. Angela: I think they've (7)…………… moved away, except us two. Carol went to Japan. Tessa: Angela, would you like to come for a meal some time? Angela: Oh, that would be lovely. We'll certainly have a (8)……………. to talk about. Tessa: Maybe we'll need a (9)……………. day. What about the Saturday after next? Tessa: Test 16D Each of the sentences has a mistake in it. Write the correct sentence. ► Are you going an holiday that year? Are you going on holiday this year? I That was a very good idea of you. 2 You've got a lot books, haven't you? 3 I don't know the meeting's time. 4 Nigel has hurt the leg. 5 All rooms in the house were cold. 6 Wear everything it doesn't matter what 7 Every of the four doors was locked. 8 I live my life, and my sister lives her. 9 The both socks have got holes in them. 10 Here's a copy of this week magazine. I1 This sweater is losing it's-color. 12 I want some paper, but there's no in here Test 16E Write a second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► When I was on holiday, it rained all week, (whole) When I was on holiday, it rained the whole week. 1 I've lived here more than half my life, (most) 2 All the hotels were full, (every) 3 The house on the corner is bigger than our house, (ours) 4 I've forgotten my doctor's name, (of) 5 We haven't had much warning of the changes, (little) 6 Such a large number of people have applied for the job. (so) 7 I met one of your old boyfriends at a party, (an) 8 Both the chairs are uncomfortable, (neither) 9 My holiday starts ten days from now. (time) 98 Personal pronouns, e.g. I, you A The meaning of the pronouns Vicky: Andrew: Vicky: Andrew: Vicky: Hello, Andrew. Have you seen Rachel? I don't think so. No, I haven't seen her today. We're supposed to be going out at half past seven, and it's nearly eight now. Maybe she's just forgotten. You know Rachel. We're going out for a meal. Matthew and Emma said they might come too. I hope they haven't gone without me. I/me means the speaker, and you means the person spoken to. We/us means the speaker and someone else. Here, we = Vicky and Rachel. He/him means a male person and she/her a female person. Here, she = Rachel. It means a thing, an action, a situation or an idea. Here, it = the time. They/them is the plural of he, she and it and means people or things. We can also use they/them for a person when we don't know if the person is male or female. If anyone calls, ask them to leave a message. B Subject and object forms FIRST PERSON SINGULAR PLURAL Subject I Object Subject we Object SECOND PERSON you me you you us you THIRD PERSON he/she/it him/her/it they them We use the subject form (I, etc) when the pronoun is the subject and there is a verb. I don't think so. Maybe she's just forgotten. We use the object form (me, etc) when the pronoun is the object of a verb or preposition. / haven't seen her today. I hope they haven't gone without me. The pronoun on its own or after be usually has the object form. Who spilt coffee all over the table? ~ Me./Sorry, it was me. Compare this answer. Who spilt coffee all over the table? ~ I did. C You, one and they We can use you or one to mean 'any person' or 'people in general', including the speaker. You shouldn't believe what you read in the newspapers. OR One shouldn't believe what one reads in the newspapers. You don't like/One doesn't like to have an argument in public. You is normal in conversation. One is more formal. We can use they for other people in general. They say too much sugar is bad for you. We can also use it for people in authority. They're going to build a new swimming-pool here. They is informal and conversational. We use the passive in more formal situations. A new swimming-pool is going to be built here (see Unit 56B). 99 There and it page 380 You and one in British and American English 98 Exercises 1 The meaning of the pronouns (A) Read the conversation between Melanie and Rita. Then say what the underlined pronouns mean. Melanie: Have (►)you been in that new shop? ► you = Rita Rita: No, not yet. Melanie: Nor have I, but (►)it looks interesting. There's a lovely dress ► it = the shop in the window, and (1) it isn't expensive. 1 it = Rita: Laura bought some jeans there. (2) She said (3) they were 2 she = really cheap. 3 they = Melanie: (4) You ought to go along there and have a look, then. 4 you = Rita: (5) We'd better not go now or we'll be late. (6) I told Mike 5 we = and Harriet we'd meet (7) them at half past five. 6 I= Melanie: Oh, Tom said (8) he's coming too. 7 them = 8 he = 2 Subject and object forms (B) Complete the conversation. Put in the pronouns. Nick: Did (>)you say that you and Harriet wanted some coloured lights for your party? Mike: Yes, but (►) it's OK. Melanie's neighbour Jake has got some, and (1) ...................'s going to lend (2) .................... to (3) Nick: Great. Is Rita coming to the party? Mike: We've invited (4)……………. of course, but (5)…………… isn't sure if (6)……………. can come or not. Her parents are flying somewhere on Saturday evening, and she might be taking (7)…………… to the airport. Nick: And what about Laura's friend Emily? Mike: 1 expect (8)………….. ..'11 be there. And her brother. (9)…………… both came to our last party. Nick: Do (10) ................mean Jason? I don't like (11) ................. very much. Mike: Oh, (12)…………… 's OK. But (13)…………… don't have to talk to (14) 3 Subject and object forms (B) Put in the pronouns. ► There's no need to shout. I can hear you. 1 You and I work well together..................... 're a good team. 2 We've got a bit of a problem. Could………….. help .………….. , please? 3 This is a good photo, isn't ...............? ~ Is Jessica in………………. ? ~ Yes, that's .……….. ..., look ................... 's next to Andrew. 4 Who did this crossword? ~ ………….I did…………….. this morning. 5 Is this Vicky's bag? ~ No,……………. didn't bring one. It can't belong to 6 …………..'m looking for my shoes. Have…………… seen…………… ? ~ Yes,…………... re here. 4 You and they (C) Complete the conversation. Put in you or they. Trevor: I'm not going to drive in this weather. It's too icy. Laura: (►) You don't want to take any risks. (1) .....................can't be too careful. Trevor: I've just heard the weather forecast and (2) say there's going to be more snow. (3) ................'re better off indoors in weather like this. Laura: I think (4) ought to clear the snow off the roads more quickly. 99 There and it A There + be Look at these examples. I really ought to phone home. ~ Well, there's a phone box round the corner. Could I make myself an omelette? ~ Of course. There are some eggs in the fridge. There's an important meeting at work that I have to go to. To talk about the existence of something, we use there + be. We usually pronounce there , like the. There's is and there are is . Be agrees with the following noun. There is a phone box. BUT There are some eggs. Here are some more examples. There's a bus at ten to five. There'll be a meal waiting for us. Is there a toilet in the building? Were there any bargains in the sale? There have been some burglaries recently. There might have been an accident. We also use there with words like a lot of, many, much, more, enough and with numbers. There were a lot of problems to discuss. There's too much noise in here. Will there be enough chairs? There are thirty days in April. B Uses of it We use it for a thing, an action, a situation or an idea. You've bought a new coat. It's very nice, (it = the coat) Skiing is an expensive hobby, isn't it? You have to fill in all these stupid forms. It's ridiculous. I find astrology fascinating. I'm really interested in it. We use it to mean 'the unknown person'. Did someone ring? ~ It was Vicky. She just called to say she's arrived safely. We use it for the time, the weather and distance. It's half past five already. It's Sunday tomorrow. It was much warmer yesterday. It's fifty miles from here to Brighton. We also use it in structures with a to-infinitive or a that-clause (see also Unit 67B). It was nice to meet your friends. It would be a good idea to book in advance. It's important to switch off the electricity. It's a pity (that) you can't come with us. This is much more usual than, for example, To meet your friends was nice. C There or it? We often use there when we mention something for the first time, like the picture in this example. There was a picture on the wall. It was an abstract painting. We use it when we talk about the details. It means the picture. Here are some more examples. There's a woman at the door. ~ Oh, it's Aunt Joan. There was a dog in the field. It was a big black one. There's a new one-way traffic system in the town centre. It's very confusing. 99 Exercises 1 There + be (A) Look at the pictures and comment on what you see. Use these words: a balloon, some boxes, the car, a dinosaur, an elephant, some flowers, the garden, her hat, the sky, the water ? There's a dinosaur in the water. ? There are some flowers on her hat. 1 ……………………………………… 2 ………………………………………. 3 ……………………………………… There + be (A) Put in there and a form of be, e.g. is, are, was, have been or will be. ► Victor: Are there any restaurants here that open on a Sunday? Rachel: There's a cafe in the High Street which is open for lunch. 1 Alan: a train at twelve thirty, isn't there? Let's catch that one. Mark: OK…………………… time to finish our discussion on the train. 2 Vicky: What's happened? Why…………………….. so many police cars here? Daniel: ………………………………………… a hold-up at the bank. 3 Tom: Last night..... a party next door. I couldn't get to sleep. Melanie: .................. must ................. a lot of people there. 3 Uses of it (B) Rewrite the sentences in brackets using it. ► We sometimes go surfing. (Surfing is really good fun.) It's really good fun. 1 I bought a shirt in the market. (The shirt was very cheap.) 2 Someone rang. (The caller was Vicky.) ............................................... ……………. 3 Our heating is out of order. (The situation is a nuisance.) ............... ……………….. 4 I've left my coat at home. (The weather is very warm.) ……………………………… 5 Don't lose your credit card. (To keep it somewhere safe is important.) ……………… There or it? (C) Put in there or it. ► Is it the fifteenth today? ~ No, the sixteenth. 1 The road is closed................... 's been an accident. 2 Take a taxi........... 's a long way to the station. 3 ............was a motor bike outside ............... looked very expensive. 4 Will .. be any delays because of the strike? ~ Well,…………… would be a good idea to ring the airline and check. 5 was wet, and……………………. was a cold east wind……………. was after midnight, and were few people on the streets. 100 Reflexive pronouns B Form A Introduction Myself is a reflexive pronoun. In the sentence I've cut myself, the words I and myself mean the same thing. Myself refers back to the subject, I. SINGULAR PLURAL myself ourselves yourself yourselves himself/herself/itself themselves FIRST Compare yourself and yourselves. Emma, you can dry yourself on this towel. Vicky and Rachel, you can dry yourselves on these towels. C The use of reflexive pronouns Here are some examples. Mark made himself a sandwich. Vicky had to force herself to eat. We've locked ourselves out. The children watched themselves on video. We cannot use me, you, him, etc to refer to the subject. Compare these sentences. When the policeman came in, the gunman shot him. (him = the policeman) When the policeman came in, the gunman shot himself, (himself = the gunman) We can use a reflexive pronoun after a preposition. The children are old enough to look after themselves. But after a preposition of place, we can use me, you, him, etc. In the mirror I saw a lorry behind me. Mike didn't have any money with him. Laura thought she recognized the woman standing next to her. D Idioms with reflexive pronouns Look at these examples. We really enjoyed ourselves. (= had a good time) I hope the children behave themselves. (= behave well) ]ust help yourself to sandwiches, won't you? (= take as many as you want) Please make yourself at home. (= behave as if this was your home) / don't want to be left here by myself. {= on my own, alone) E Verbs without a reflexive pronoun Some verbs do not usually take a reflexive pronoun, although they may in other languages. We'd better hurry, or we'll be late, NOT We'd better-hurry-ourselves. Shall we meet at the cinema? I feel uncomfortable. Just try to relax. Some of these verbs are: afford, approach, complain, concentrate, decide, feel + adjective, get up, hurry (up), lie down, meet, remember, rest, relax, sit down, stand up, wake up, wonder, worry We do not normally use a reflexive pronoun with change (clothes), dress and wash. Daniel washed and changed before going out. (See also Unit 54D.) But we can use a reflexive pronoun when the action is difficult. My friend is disabled, but she can dress herself. 100 Exercises 1 Reflexive pronouns (A-C) Look at the pictures and write sentences with a reflexive pronoun. Use these words: dry, introduce, look at, photograph, teach ► He's photographing himself. 1 She ……………………………………………………… 2 They ………………………………………………….. 3 …………………………………………… 4 …………………………………………… 2 Reflexive pronouns (A-C) Complete the ► Matthew: Emma: 1 Olivia: Linda: 2 Rita: Laura: 3 Emma: Matthew: conversations. Put in a reflexive pronoun (myself, yourself, etc). I'll get the tickets, shall I? It's OK. I can pay for myself. I've got lots of photos of my children. Yes, but you haven't got many of ………………………. , Olivia. Did you have a good time at the Holiday Centre? Well, there wasn't much going on. We had to amuse Why has the light gone off? It switches ................................... off automatically. 3 Pronouns after a preposition (C and Unit 98B) Put in the correct pronoun (e.g. me or myself). ? We looked up and saw a strange animal in front of us. ? Don't tell us the answer to the puzzle. We can work it out for ourselves. 1 It's a pity you didn't bring your camera with ........................................ 2 Mark talked to the woman sitting next to ................................. 3 The old man is no longer able to look after ................................... 4 My mother likes to have all her family near .................................... 5 To be successful in life, you must believe in ..................................... 4 Idioms with and without reflexive pronouns (D-E) Rachel and Vicky are at Mike and Harriet's party. Complete the conversation. Put in the verbs with or without a reflexive pronoun. Mike: Have you two (►) met (met) before? Rachel: Yes, we have. Vicky and I are old friends. Mike: Oh, right. Well, I hope you (►) enjoy yourselves (enjoy) tonight. Rachel: I'm sure we will. I (1) ……………………………….. (feel) just in the mood for a party. Mike: Well, please (2) ………………………………… (help) to a drink. Are you OK, Vicky? Vicky: Sorry, I've got this awful feeling that I have to do something very important, and I can't (3) .............................................. (remember) what it is. Rachel: Vicky, you (4) …………………………………. (worry) too much. Come on, just (5) ............................................... (relax). 101 Emphatic pronouns and each other A Emphatic pronouns Trevor and Laura are decorating their living-room themselves. An emphatic pronoun is a word like myself, yourself. It has the same form as a reflexive pronoun (see Unit 100B). Here the emphatic pronoun means 'without help'. Trevor and Laura are decorating the room without help from anyone else. Compare They're having the room wallpapered (by a decorator) (see Unit 58A). Here are some more examples. I built this boat myself. My sister designs all these clothes herself. Are you doing all the painting yourselves? When we say these sentences, we stress self or selves. Now look at these examples. The manager himself welcomed us to the hotel. (= The manager welcomed us, not someone else.) Although she is very rich, the Queen herself never carries any money. The house itself is small, but the garden is enormous. Of course the children have been to the zoo. You yourself took them there last year. Here the emphatic pronoun comes after the noun or pronoun it relates to. B Each other Look at this example. Andrew and Jessica help each other with their work. This means that Andrew helps Jessica, and Jessica helps Andrew. Here are some more examples. Mark and Alan aren't really friends. They don't like each other much. I'm still in touch with Kirsty. We write to each other. One another has the same meaning. We send each other/one another Christmas cards every year. We can also use the possessive form each other's. Tom and Mark wrote down each other's phone numbers. This means that Tom wrote down Mark's number, and Mark wrote down Tom's number. Compare each other and themselves. They're laughing at each other. They're laughing at themselves. 101 Exercises 1 Emphatic pronouns (A) Add a sentence with an emphatic pronoun, e.g. myself. Use these verbs: bake, clean, decorate, develop, grow, paint, service, type ? I don't take the car to the garage. / service it myself. ? Laura didn't buy those pictures. She painted them herself. 1 Tom doesn't have his windows cleaned.............................. 2 My bread doesn't come from a shop. ..................................... 3 My friends eat lots of fresh vegetables. ...................................... 4 We finished the dining-room yesterday. ......................... 5 Mark doesn't dictate his letters to a secretary............................ 6 I don't pay to have my photos done .......................................... 2 Emphatic pronouns (A) Put in an emphatic pronoun, e.g. myself, yourself. ► Of course I know about Matthew and Emma. You told me yourself. 1 The princess...................................visited the children in hospital. 2 The song wasn't very good, but the title of the song became a popular phrase. 3 The visitors were welcomed to the school by the headmaster.......... 4 The pilots ........................... are nervous of flying because of terrorist threats. 5 You all know that no one can take your decisions for you. You will have to decide. 3 Each other (B) David and Melanie are in love. Write sentences about them using each other. ► Melanie often writes notes to David. He also often writes notes to Melanie. They often write notes to each other. 1 David is always thinking about Melanie. She's just the same. She's always thinking about him. 2 Melanie has got lots of photos of David. He's got lots of photos of her, too. 3 They love being together. David enjoys Melanie's company, and she enjoys David's company. 4 Melanie is crazy about David. He feels the same way. He's crazy about Melanie. 4 Each other or a reflexive pronoun? (B and Unit 100) Put in each other, ourselves or themselves. ? We could all do more to keep healthy. We don't look after ourselves properly. ? The hostess introduced the two guests to each other. 1 The two boxers did their best to knock ................................. out. 2 We talk to ................ …………. in French because it's the only language we both know. 3 People who talk to ………………….. ......may get strange looks from other people. 4 We'd better set off early to give .…………………….plenty of time to get there. 5 The guards who shot a gunman claimed that they were defending…………………… 6 Luckily we managed to get two seats next to…………………………………………….. 102 The pronoun one/ones Introduction Trevor: Here's that bottle of mineral water you wanted. Laura: Oh, no, you've got a small one. I wanted a big one. Trevor: They didn't have any big ones at the shop on the corner. Laura: That shop never has what I want. Why didn't you go to the one in the High Street? Here a small one means 'a small bottle', big ones means 'big bottles', and the one in the High Street means 'the shop in the High Street'. We use one for a singular noun and ones for a plural noun. We use one and ones to avoid repeating a noun. We cannot use one or ones with an uncountable noun, e.g. water. There was no hot water. I had to wash in cold. B Structures with one/ones Sometimes we can either put in one/ones or leave it out. These bowls are nice. What about this (one)? We can do this after this, that, these and those; after each or another; after which; or after a superlative, e.g. easiest. 1 don't like these sweaters. I prefer those (ones) over there. I tried all three numbers, and each (one) was engaged. The product is available in all these colours. Which (one) would you like? The last question is the most difficult (one). Sometimes we cannot leave out one/ones. Our house is the one on the left, NOT Our house is-the-on the-left. We cannot leave out one/ones after the or every or after an adjective. The film wasn't as good as the one we saw last week. I rang all the numbers, and every one was engaged. I'd like a box of tissues. A small one, please. I threw away my old trainers and bought some new ones. C A small one and one We can say a small one, a red one, etc but NOT a one. I've been looking for a coat, but I can't find a nice one. I've been looking for a coat, but I can't find one. Here we use one instead of a coat. Here are some more examples. We decided to take a taxi. Luckily there was one waiting. If you want a ticket, I can get one for you. Now look at these examples with one, some, it and them. / haven't got a passport, but I'll need one. (one = a passport) / haven't got any stamps, but I'll need some. (some = some stamps) I've got my passport. They sent it last week. (it = the passport) I've got the stamps. I put them in the drawer, (them = the stamps) One and some/any are like a, but it and they/them are like the. We use one and some/any when we arent saying which, and we use it and they/them to be specific (when we know which). 102 Exercises One (A) Look at the pictures and complete the conversations. ► Emma: Matthew: Emma: Mark: Sarah: Mark: ! Jessica: Andrew: Jessica: ► Sarah: Secretary: Sarah: 4 Vicky: Assistant: Vicky: Can you lend me a pen, please? Do you want a blue one or a black one ? Oh, a blue one, please. I might buy a new jacket. Do you mean ....................................................................................? Oh,..................................................... for when I go on holiday. Could you pass me one of those saucepans, please? Do you need............................................................. ? ................................................. , please. Could I have a small envelope? Yes, of course ..................................................? ..................................................., please. Thanks. I'm looking for a toothbrush, but I can't find any. Do you mean …………………………………….....? Oh, ………………………………………………………… One and ones (A-C) Rewrite the sentences in brackets so that the noun is not repeated. Use one or ones. ► These cups are nice. Each one is hand-painted. (Each cup is hand-painted.) 1 I need to fill in a form about my driving test, but ................ ………………………. (I haven't got a form.) 2 I've watched all these videos. ............................................................ (I must get some new videos.) 3 These photos are good................................................................................. (Have you seen this photo?) 4 I need a dinner-jacket for the party, so ................................................................(I've hired a dinner-jacket.) 5 Those socks are horrible ...................................... …………………………… (Can't you find any nice socks?) 6 This map isn't very good............................................................. …………… ....(The map in the car is better.) 3 One, some, it and them (C) Put in one, some, it or them. ► I don't know if I'll need any money. I'd better take some, I suppose. 1 If you need an umbrella, I can lend you .................... ………………. 2 The radio isn't working. Vicky dropped……………………… on the floor. 3 I'm having a biscuit. Would you like .…………………………. , too? 4 I had the matches a minute ago, and now I can't find………………………………. 5 I haven't got any computer disks, but Emma has got………………………………… 103 Everyone, something, etc A Introduction Look at these examples. Everyone enjoyed the show. It was a great success. The police searched the house but found nothing. Let's find somewhere to eat. Nobody came into the shop all afternoon. With every, some and no, we can form words ending in one, body, thing and where. everyone!everybody = all the people everything = all the things everywhere = (in) all the places someone/somebody = a person something = a thing somewhere — (in) a place no one/nobody = no person nothing /'nA0irj/ = no things nowhere = (in) no places Words ending in thing can also mean actions or ideas. Something awful has happened. You must tell me everything. B Someone and anyone, etc We can also form words with any: anyone, anybody, anything, anywhere. For some and any see Unit 94A. Positive: Negative: Question: Offer/Request: There's someone in the phone box. I looked round the shops, but I didn't buy anything. Has anyone seen today's newspaper? Could you do something for me, please? We can also use words with any in a positive sentence. This door is always left open. Anyone could just walk in here. Where shall we go? ~ Anywhere. I don't mind. In these sentences anyone means 'it doesn't matter who', and anywhere means 'it doesn't matter where'. For more details about any see Unit 94C. C Singular and plural We use a singular verb after everyone, something, anything, etc. Everywhere was very crowded. No one knows how to start the motor. After words with one or body, we normally use they/them/their, even though the verb is singular. Everyone is having their lunch. Nobody wants to have their coffee yet. We can also use he, she, him, her, his, etc with someone/somebody when we know the person's sex. Someone left their/her handbag behind. D Other structures After everyone, something, etc we can use an adjective. Let's go somewhere nice. Is there anything interesting in that magazine? We can also use else. We always play Scrabble. Let's play something else. {= a different game) Henry wore a suit, but everyone else had jeans on. (= all the other people) Words ending in one and body have a possessive form (with 's). Someone's cat is on our roof. I need to be informed about everybody's plans. page 380 Someplace, etc in American English 103 Exercises Everyone, something, etc (A) Complete the conversations. Put in the correct words. ► Melanie: Did you say you found something in the street? David: Yes, a diamond ring. 1 Nick: We all know the man is a thief, don't we? Tom: Yes,…………………………. knows, but………………………. dares to say so publicly. 2 Mark: Were there any calls for me? Secretary: Yes, …………………………..rang while you were out. It was rather strange. He refused to give his name, but he wants to discuss ................………….. with you. 3 Melanie: Do you have any plans for the summer? Tom: I'd like to go away……………………… if I can……………………….. I know has invited me to his villa in Portugal, so I may go there. 4 Daniel: Has Matthew got a job yet? Emma: No, but he's looked ………………………….. He's been to all the job agencies. He hates the idea of sitting around doing ................................………………. 2 Someone and anyone, etc (B) Put in someone, anyone, something, anything, somewhere or anywhere. Rachel: Have you seen my calculator? I can't find it (►) anywhere. Vicky: No, I haven't. Perhaps (1)................................. 's borrowed it. Rachel: I haven't given (2) ............................... permission to borrow it. It must be (3)……………………in this room. Vicky: Things are in such a mess. It could be (4) ..................................... Rachel: I know. I can never find (5) ................…………….. when I want it. Vicky: We'll have to do (6)………………………… about this mess. We'd better tidy it up. 3 Singular and plural (C) Choose the correct form. ► We had to wait because someone had lost its/their ticket. 1 One of the policemen had injured his/their arm. 2 One of the guests had brought something wrapped in brown paper. She put it/them on the table. 3 No one likes/like going to the dentist, do he/they? 4 Everyone have/has to leave his/their bags outside. 4 Other structures (D) Rewrite the sentences using a phrase with everyone, someone, something, nothing and somewhere instead of the phrases in brackets. ? I'd like to buy (a nice thing). I'd like to buy something nice. ? Let's go (to another place), shall we? Let's go somewhere else, shall we ? ► I'll try to remember (the name of everyone). I'll try to remember everyone's name. 1 1 once met (a famous person) ............................................................................ 2 (A person's car) is blocking me in. ..................................................................... 3 I've got (a different thing) to tell you .................................................................. 4 We know (the opinions of all the people) ........................................................... 5 (All the other people) except you are going. .................................................... 6 (No exciting things) ever happen here. ............................................................ TEST 17 Pronouns (Units 98-103) Test17A A group of friends are going on a coach trip together. They're meeting at the coach stop. Complete the conversation. Put in a personal pronoun (I, me, you, etc) or a reflexive pronoun (myself, yourself, etc). Polly: Where's Martin? Rupert: He's ill. I spoke to (►) him yesterday. He was feeling a bit sorry for (1)………………….. Polly: Oh, poor Martin. And what about the twins? Peter: (2) ………………..came with Janet and me. (3) ....... ………...gave (4)………………… a lift. Janet: Yes, the twins came with (5) .......................in the car. Tessa: I hope they're going to behave (6) ......................... Janet: Oh, I'm sure they will. Rupert: (7)………………. '11 be nice to have a day out. (8)……………….... say it's going to stay sunny. Polly: I'm sure we'll all enjoy (9)......................... Peter: Where's Anna? Tessa: Oh, she's here somewhere. I spoke to (10) .................. ……. a moment ago. She was standing right next to (11) ......................... Test 17B Decide which word is correct. ► I can't go to a party. I haven't got anything to wear. a) anything b) everything c) something d) nothing 1 Take care, won't you, Anna? Look after ............................ a) you b) your c) yours d) yourself 2 Yes, .........would be lovely to see you again. a) it b) that c) there d) you 3 If you want some apples, I'll get you .............................at the shop. a) any b) it c) one d) some 4 We've brought some food with............................... a) me b) ourselves c) us d) we 5 Who does this CD belong to? ~............................... I've just bought it. a) I b) Me c) Mine d) Myself 6 The shop doesn't sell new books. It on\y sells old......... a) of them b) ones c) some d) them 7 Is ………….. .......... a post office near here, please? a) here b) it c) there d) this 8 The two girls often wear ..........................clothes. a) each other b) each other's c) themselves d) themselves' 9 Have you had enough to eat, or would you like something…………………… ? a) another b) else c) new d) other Test17C Use a pronoun instead of the words in brackets. ► Michelle is in hospital. She (Michelle) isn't very well. 1 I lost my watch, but it was only a cheap............................. (watch). 2 I have to make tea for ............................ (all the people). 3 Tessa took a photo of ........................(Tessa). 4 My flat is the ………………….. (flat) at the top. 5 6 7 8 9 The phone rang. .......................... (The caller) was Alex. There was ………….............. (a thing) worrying me. I've got some sweets. Would you like ............................ (a sweet)? ………………… (People in general) can't make an omelette without breaking eggs. We decorated the whole house ....................... ……. (without help). Test 17D Complete the text. Write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. (►) It was on 20 September 1973 that Bobby Riggs met Billie Jean King on the tennis court. Of all the tennis matches until then, this was probably the (1)………… . . . that attracted the most attention. Riggs had once been a champion, but at 55 he was getting rather old for top-class tennis. But he considered (2)……………a better player than any woman. In fact, he thought women should go home and find (3)………………. useful to do in the kitchen. Billie Jean King, on the other hand, was a 29-year-old star of women's tennis and a feminist. Riggs thought that (4)……………. would be a good idea to play King. He was sure he could beat (5) ………………….King agreed to play. (6)……………….was a lot of interest in the match, and more or less (7) …………………in the country was looking forward to (8)…………….. On the night of the match, (9) ………………………were over 30,000 people in the Houston Astrodrome. When Riggs and King came face to face with (10)…………………………. other, they had 50 million people watching (11)……………..on TV. The match didn't work out for Riggs, because Billie Jean King defeated (12)………. , 6-4, 6-3, 6-3. Test 17E Each of these sentences has a mistake in it. Write the correct sentence. ► I didn't want the fridge so I sold him. I didn't want the fridge, so I sold it. 1 It's-a-train leaving in ten-minutes, 2 I think someone-are coming-up the stairs. 3 Let's meet ourselves at-eight-o’clock shall-we? 4 We haven't get-a-camcorder-but -we'd-like a. 5 Let's do a different something today. 6 One is going to build a new motorway-through here. 7 I'm-afraid I haven't done something-all -day. 8 Everyone enjoyed themself at the barbecue. 9 If youre buying a loaf of bread, get a nice fresh 10 10 I've looked in-all-places for my-credit card. 11 The two friends-still- see themselves-occasionally. 104 Adjectives A Introduction Henry and Claire are having dinner in a quiet restaurant. It's a warm evening. The food is delicious. Henry is feeling romantic. An adjective is a word like quiet, warm, delicious, romantic. The word quiet describes the restaurant. It tells us what the restaurant is like. B Word order There are two places where we can use an adjective: before a noun {a quiet restaurant) and after a linking verb (feeling romantic). BEFORE A NOUN AFTER A LINKING VERB Claire's got a new car. It was a dark night. This is good coffee. Claire's car is new. It was getting dark. This coffee tastes good. Some linking verbs are: appear, be, become, feel, get, look, seem, smell, stay, taste We can use two or more adjectives together (see Unit 105). It's a quiet little restaurant. Mike was wearing a dirty old coat. We can put a word like very or quite before an adjective. It was a very dark night. Henry was feeling quite romantic. Very and quite are adverbs of degree (see Unit 115). c Adjectives used in one position only We can use most adjectives in both positions - before a noun or after a linking verb. But a few adjectives can go in one position but not in the other. Here are some examples of adjectives which can only go before a noun. Be careful crossing the main road. The only problem is I've got no money. Chess is an indoor game. The former footballer now trains young players. Some more examples are: chief (= main), elder (= older), eldest (= oldest), inner, outdoor, outer, principal (= main), upper Here are some examples of adjectives which can only go after a linking verb. At last the baby is asleep. Emma's two brothers are very alike. I'm really pleased to see you. Vicky looked ill, I thought. Some more examples are: afraid, alone, ashamed, awake, alive, content (= happy), fine (= in good health), glad, unwell, well 82 Two nouns together, e.g. a colour photo 108 Adjective or adverb? 104 Exercises 1 Adjectives (A) Look at the pictures and write a phrase with an adjective and noun. Use these nouns: building, car, cat, chairs, music, power, skirt, weather ? a long skirt ? cold weather 1. ……………………………………………….. 2. ……………………………………………….. 3 .................................................... 4 .................................................. 5 ……………………………….. 6 ………………………………. Adjectives (A-B) Underline all the adjectives in this description of a hotel. This comfortable hotel with its pleasant gardens is ideal for people who want a quiet holiday, yet it is only a short distance from the highly popular attractions of the area. There are lovely views from every room. The atmosphere is very friendly, and the staff are always helpful. A holiday here is very good value for money. You can eat your meals at the hotel, where the food tastes marvellous. Or you can of course try some of the excellent local restaurants. 3 Adjectives used in one position only (C) Look at the notes and write the song titles. Sometimes the adjective comes before the noun, and sometimes you need to use ;5 or are. ? your sister / elder Your elder sister ? this boy / alone This boy is alone 1 the world / asleep 2 my desire / chief 3 my heart / content 4 the thing to remember / main 5 the night / alive 6 secrets / inner the girl tor me / only 105 The order of adjectives A Introduction It's beautiful sunny weather. Nick has got a big black dog. We can use more than one adjective before a noun. There is usually one correct order. We cannot say sunny beautiful weather or a-black big dog B Adjectives and nouns We sometimes use two nouns together (see Unit 82). a glass door a computer program Here we use glass like an adjective, to describe the door. When we use another adjective as well (e.g. heavy), it comes before both the nouns. a heavy glass door a useful computer program C Word order We order adjectives according to their meaning. This is the normal order: EXAMPLES GROUP 1 Opinion (how good?) 2 Size (how big?) wonderful, nice, great, awful, terrible Adjectives that say how good large, small, long, short, tall and how big come first. 3 Most other qualities quiet, famous, important, soft, wet, difficult, fast, angry, warm Most adjectives come next if they do not belong to another group. 4 5 6 7 8 new, old red, blue, green, black American, British, French stone, plastic, steel, paper an electric kettle, political matters, road transport a bread knife, a bath towel Some of these are nouns. Age (how old?) Colour Origin (where from?) Material (made of?) Type (what kind?) 9 Purpose (what for?) Here are some examples. a small green insect (size, colour) Japanese industrial designers (origin, type) a wonderful new face cream (opinion, age, purpose) awful plastic souvenirs (opinion, material) a long boring train journey (size, quality, type) some nice easy quiz questions (opinion, quality, purpose) a beautiful wooden picture frame (opinion, material, purpose) We sometimes put commas between adjectives in Groups 1-3 a horrible, ugly building a busy, lively, exciting city 105 Exercises 1 The order of adjectives (A-C) Describe the pictures. Use these words: boots, building, car, seat, singer ► big leather boots 1. …………………………………………….. 2. …………………………………………….. 3 4 ……………………………………. …………………………………… 2 The order of adjectives (A-C) Write a list of things to be sold at an auction. ► basin / sugar, antique, silver an antique silver sugar basin 1 vase / glass, old, lovely 2 mirror / wall, attractive 3 desk / modern, office 4 chairs / kitchen, red, metal 5 boat / model, splendid, old 6 stamps / postage, valuable, Australian 7 table / small, coffee, wooden 3 The order of adjectives (A-C) Look at each advertisement and write the information in a single sentence. ► This game is new. It's for the family. And it's exciting. This is an exciting new family game. 1 This computer is for business. It's Japanese. And it's powerful. 2 This fire is electric. It's excellent. And it's small. 3 This is a chocolate bar. It's new. And it's a big bar. 4 This comedy is American. It's for television. And it's terrific. 5 These doors are aluminium. They're for your garage. And they're stylish. 6 These shoes are modern. They're for sports. And they're wonderful. This phone is a mobile. It's German. And it's very good. 106 The old, the rich, etc There are some adjectives that we can use with the to talk about groups of people in society, e.g. the disabled, the blind. Here are some more examples. What can we do to feed the hungry? The rich can afford to pay more taxes. The young are usually keen to travel. It is our duty to care for the sick. B What adjectives can we use? These are some of the adjectives and other words that we can use in a phrase with the. To do with social or economic position: the disadvantaged, the homeless, the hungry, the poor, the privileged, the rich, the starving, the strong, the underprivileged, the unemployed, the weak To do with physical condition or health: the blind, the deaf, the dead, the disabled, the handicapped, the living, the sick To do with age: the elderly, the middle-aged, the old, the over-sixties, the under-fives, the young We can sometimes use an adverb before the adjective. The very poor are left without hope. The severely disabled need full-time care. There are some adjectives in this structure that normally have an adverb. The less fortunate cannot afford to go on holiday. Should the mentally ill be allowed to live in the community? C The young or the young people? The young means 'young people in general'. The young have their lives in front of them. When we mean a specific person or a specific group of people, then we use man, woman, people, etc. There was a young man standing on the corner. I know the young woman in reception. She lives in our street. None of the young people in the village can find jobs here. 106 Exercises 1 The old, the rich, etc (A) Write in the missing words. Use the and these adjectives: homeless, hungry, old, sick, unemployed, young ► Better education for the young 1 Food for 2 Homes for 3 4 5 Better hospitals for Jobs for Better pensions for The old, the rich, etc (A-B) Rewrite the sentences using a phrase with the and an adjective instead of the underlined phrases. ► People who have lots of money have comfortable lives. The rich have comfortable lives. 1 We live near a special school for people who can't hear. 2 The old soldiers were holding a service for those who had died. 3 The government should do more for people who do not have enough money. 4 I'm doing a course on caring for people who are mentally handicapped. 3 The young or the young people? (C) Complete these sentences from a newspaper. Use the adjectives in brackets. Put in e.g. the hungry or the hungry people. ? Rich nations can afford to feed the hungry (hungry). ? The homeless people (homeless) whose story appeared in this paper last week have now found a place to live. 1 ………………………..... (sick) need to be looked after, so money must be spent on hospitals. 2 Some of ..............................................(young) at the youth club here are running in a marathon. 3 Life must be hard for......... ……………… ............ (unemployed) in our society today. 4 What is the government doing to help...................... (poor)? 5 There was a fire at a nursing home in Charles Street, but none of………………………………. (old) who live there were hurt. 6 …………………………… (homeless) usually have great difficulty in getting a job. 7 There is a special television programme for.............. ……….(deaf) every Sunday morning. 107 Interesting and interested INTERESTING The book is full of information. It's very interesting. The word interesting tells us what the book does to Mike — it interests him. A book can be interesting, boring, exciting or amusing, for example. INTERESTED Mike is very interested in UFOs. The word interested tells us how Mike feels. A person can feel interested, bored, excited or amused, for example. B Adjective pairs Here are some more examples. ING Tom told us an amusing story. The twohour delay was annoying. I didn't enjoy the party. It was boring. This computer has some very confusing instructions. This wet weather is so depressing. It was very disappointing not to get the job. The game was really exciting. Going for a jog with Matthew is exhausting. I thought the programme on wildlife was fascinating. For one frightening/terrifying moment 1 thought I was going to fall. I just don't understand. I find the whole thing rather puzzling. Lying in a hot bath is relaxing. I think the way Jessica behaved was quite shocking. The test results were surprising. What thrilling news this is! Congratulations! The journey took all day and night. They found it very tiring. ED We were amused at Tom's story. The passengers were annoyed about the delay. I went to the party, but I felt bored. I got very confused trying to make sense of the instructions. This weather makes me so depressed. I was very disappointed not to get the job. The United fans were excited. I'm exhausted after jogging all that way. I watched the programme on wildlife. I was absolutely fascinated. When I got onto the roof I felt frightened/terrified. I must say I'm puzzled. I just don't understand I feel relaxed when I lie in a hot bath. I was quite shocked to see Jessica behaving like that. I was surprised at the test results. We were thrilled to hear your good news. After travelling all day and night they were very tired. 107 Exercises 1 Interesting and interested (A-B) What are they saying? Put in these words: depressing, exciting, exhausted, fascinating, interested ► This is a depressing place. 1 I'm absolutely …………………….... 2 I'm ………………….. . in astronomy. 3 4 Chess is a......... ……………….. game. This is really. … … … … … … … … . ...! 2 Interesting and interested (A-B) Complete the conversation. Write the complete word in each space. Vicky: That was an (►) exciting (excit...) film, wasn't it? Rachel: Oh, do you think so? I'm (1) ………………................(surpris...) you liked it. I thought it was rather (2) .................................... (disappoint...). Vicky: Well, I was (3)………………………….. (puzzl...) once or twice. I didn't understand the whole story. It was (4)…………………………..(confus...) in places. But the end was good. Rachel: I was (5)…………………………… (bor...) most of the time. I didn't find it very (6) ......................................(interest...). 3 Interesting and interested (A-B) Complete the conversations using a word ending in ing or ed. ? David: I'm surprised how warm it is for March. Melanie: Yes, all this sunshine is quite surprising. ? Vicky: I'm not very fit. I was pretty tired after climbing the mountain. Natasha: Yes, I think everyone felt tired. 1 Trevor: I think I need to relax. Laura: Well, lying by the pool should be ............................................................................ 2 Vicky: It was annoying to lose my ticket. Emma: You looked really.…………………….. . . . when you had to buy another one. 3 Sarah: The cabaret was amusing. Mark: Claire was certainly ........... ………………. .She couldn't stop laughing. 4 Daniel: The museum was interesting, wasn't it? Rachel: It was OK. I was quite ..................................... in those old maps. 5 Matthew: I'm fascinated by these old photos. Emma: I always find it ........…………………… to see what people looked like as children. 6 Rachel: Was it a big thrill meeting Tom Hanks? Vicky: You bet. It was just about the most.................... ………………moment of my life. I Sarah: You look exhausted. You should go to bed. Mark: Driving down from Scotland was pretty ......................................... 108 Adjective or adverb? (1) A Introduction Vicky: / like that song that Natasha sang. Rachel: Yes, it's a nice song. And she sang it nicely, too. An adjective (nice) describes a noun (song). The man had a quiet voice. Claire wears expensive clothes. The runners made a slow start. An adverb (nicely) describes a verb (sang). The man spoke quietly. Claire dresses expensively. They started the race slowly. We do NOT say She sang it nice. We can use adverbs in other ways. An adverb like really or very can be combined with an adjective (hot) o another adverb (carefully) (see Unit 115). It was really hot in the sun. Andrew checked his work very carefully. An adverb like fortunately or perhaps says something about the whole situation. Fortunately nothing was stolen. Perhaps Sarah is working late. B The ly ending We form many adverbs from an adjective + ly. For example politely, quickly, safely. But there are some special spelling rules. 1 We do not leave out e, e.g. nice —> nicely Exceptions are true —> truly, whole —> wholly. 2 y—> ily after a consonant, e.g. easy —> easily, lucky —> luckily Also angrily, happily, heavily, etc. 3 le —> ly, e.g. possible —> possibly Also comfortably, probably, reasonably, sensibly, terribly, etc. 4 ic —. ically, e.g. dramatic —> dramatically Also automatically, scientifically, etc. (Exception: publicly) C Looked nice and looked carefully Compare these two structures. LINKING VERB + ADJECTIVE Tom was hungry. The children seemed happy. My soup has got cold. An adjective can come after a linking verb such as be (see Unit 104B). ACTION VERB + ADVERB Paul ate hungrily. The children played happily. The man stared coldly at us. We use an adverb when the verb means that something happens. Some verbs like look, taste and appear can be either linking verbs or action verbs. LINKING VERB + ADJECTIVE Mike looked angry. The medicine tasted awful. The man appeared (to he) drunk. page 380 American English ACTION VERB + ADVERB He looked carefully at the signature. Emma tasted the drink nervously. A waiter appeared suddenly. 108 Exercises 1 Adverbs (A-B) This is part of a story about a spy called X. Put in adverbs formed from these adjectives: bright, careful, fluent, immediate, patient, punctual, quiet, safe, secret, slow The journey took a long time because the train travelled so (►) slowly. It was hot, and the sun shone (1) ………………………… from a clear sky. X could only wait (2)……………………….. for the journey to end. When the train finally arrived, he had no time to spare, so he (3)…………………………. took a taxi to the hotel. Y was on time. She arrived (4)……………………….. at three. No one else knew about the meeting - it was important to meet (5) ..........………………. . 'I had a terrible journey,' said Y. 'But luckily the pilot managed to land (6) .................. …………...' Her English was good, and she spoke very (7) …………………. .........X was listening (8)……………………….. to every word. They were speaking very (9) ................................. in case the room was bugged. 2 The ly ending (B) Look at the information in brackets and put in the adverbs. Be careful with the spelling. ► (Emma's toothache was terrible.) Emma's tooth ached terribly. 1 (Henry was angry.) Henry shouted........................................................................ at the waiter. 2 (I'm happy sitting here.) I can sit here ................................................................for hours. 3 (The switch is automatic.) The machine switches itself off ....................……………………. 4 (The debate should be public.) We need to debate the matter............ ……………………….. 5 (Everyone was enthusiastic.) Everyone discussed the idea ……………………………………… 6 (We should be reasonable.) Can't we discuss the problem ............ ……………………………... ? 7 (The building has to be secure.) Did you lock all the doors .............. …………………………….. ? 3 Adverb or adjective? (A-B) Decide what you need to say. End your sentence with an adverb ending in ly. ► Tell the police that you can't remember the accident. It isn't very clear in your mind. I can’t remember the accident very clearly. 1 Tell your friend that United won the game. It was an easy win. 2 Tell your boss that you've checked the figures. You've been careful. 3 Tell your neighbour that his dog barked at you. It was very fierce. 4 You are phoning your friend. Tell him about the rain where you are. It's quite heavy. 4 Adverb or adjective? (A-C) Vicky is telling Rachel about a dream she had. Choose the correct forms. l had a (►)strange/strangely dream last night. I was in a garden. It was getting (1) dark/darkly, and it was (2) terrible/terribly cold. My head was aching (3) bad/badly. I was walking out of the garden when (4) sudden/suddenly I saw a man. He was sitting (5) quiet/quietly on a seat. He seemed very (6) unhappy/unhappily. He looked up and smiled (7) sad/sadly at me. I don't know why, but I felt (8) curious/curiously about him. I wanted to talk to him, but I couldn't think what to say. I just stood there (9) foolish/foolishly. 109 Adjective or adverb? (2) A Friendly, likely, etc The ending ly is the normal adverb ending (see Unit 108). But a few adjectives also end in ly. Melanie was very friendly. It was a lively party. We had a lovely time. Some more examples are: elderly, likely, lonely, silly, ugly The words are adjectives, not adverbs (NOT She-spoke to us friendly). And we cannot add ly. There is no such word as friendlily. But we can say in a friendly way/manner. She spoke to us in a friendly way. If we need to use an adverb, we often choose another word of similar meaning. It was lovely. Everything went beautifully. B Hard, fast, etc Compare these sentences. ADJECTIVE ADVERB We did some hard work. I came on the fast train. We worked hard. The train went quite fast. We can use these words both as adjectives and as adverbs: deep, early, fast, hard, high, late, long, low, near, right, straight, wrong (For hardly, nearly, etc, see C. In informal English, the adjectives cheap, loud, quick and slow can be adverbs. ADJECTIVE They sell cheap clothes in the market. Back already! That was quick. ADVERB They sell things cheap/cheaply there. Come as quick/quickly as you can. C Hard, hardly, near, nearly, etc There are some pairs of adverbs like hard and hardly which have different meanings. Here are some examples. / tried hard, but I didn't succeed. I've got hardly any money left, {hardly any = very little, almost none) Luckily I found a phone box quite near. I nearly fell asleep in the meeting, {nearly = almost) Rachel arrived late, as usual. I've been very busy lately, {lately = in the last few days/weeks) The plane flew high above the clouds. The material is highly radioactive, {highly = very) We got into the concert free, {free = without paying) The animals are allowed to wander freely, {freely = uncontrolled) D Good and well Good is an adjective, and well is its adverb. The opposites are bad and badly. ADJECTIVE Natasha is a good violinist. Our test results were good. I had a bad night. ADVERB She plays the violin very well. We all did well in the test. I slept badly last night. Well can also be an adjective meaning 'in good health', the opposite of ill. My mother was very ill, but she's quite well again now. How are you? ~ Very well, thank you. 109 Exercises Friendly, hard, hardly, etc (A-C) Decide if each underlined word is an adjective or an adverb. ? That new building is rather ugly. adjective ? I'd like to arrive early if I can. adverb 1 1 haven't seen you for a long time. 2 Why are you wearing that silly hat? 3 Very young children travel free. 4 The temperature is quite high today. 5 We nearly missed the bus this morning 6 Do you have to play that music so loud? 2 Friendly, hard, hardly, etc (A-C) Complete the conversation. Decide if you need ly with the words in brackets. Mark: How did you get on with Henry today? Sarah: Oh, we had a nice lunch and some (►) lively (live)conversation. Henry was charming, as usual. He gave me a lift back to the office, but it was (1)………………. (hard) worth risking our lives to save a few minutes. He (2)....................... (near) killed us. Mark: What do you mean? Sarah: Well, we'd sat a bit too (3)………………... (long) over our meal, and we were (4)……………………..(late) getting back to work. Henry drove very (5)………… (fast). I tried (6) ………………..... (hard) to keep calm, but I was quite scared. We went (7)…………… (wrong) and missed a left turn, and Henry got annoyed. Then a van came round the corner, and it was coming (8)………. ........ (straight) at us. I don't know how we missed it. Mark: Well, I'm glad you did. And next time you'd better take a taxi. 3 Good and well (D) Complete the conversation. Put in good, well (x2), bad, badly and ill. Rachel: How did you and Daniel get on in your tennis match? Matthew: We lost. I'm afraid we didn't play very (►) well. Daniel made some (1)……………. mistakes. It wasn't a very (2)……………day for us. We played really (3)……………………… Andrew: I heard Daniel's in bed at the moment because he isn't very (4)……………… Matthew: Yes, I'm afraid he's been (5)………….... for several days, but he's better now. 4 Friendly, hard, hardly, etc (A-D) Complete the conversation. Choose the correct form. Daniel: Is it true you saw a ghost last night? Vicky: Yes, I did. I went to bed (►) late/lately, and I was sleeping (1) bad/badly. I suddenly woke up in the middle of the night. I went to the window and saw the ghost walking across the lawn. Daniel: Was it a man or a woman? Vicky: A woman in a white dress. I had a (2) good/well view from the window, but she walked very (3) fast/fastly. She wasn't there very (4) long/longly. I'd (5) hard/hardly caught sight of her before she'd gone. I (6) near/nearly missed her. Daniel: You don't think you've been working too (7) hard/hardly? You've been looking a bit pale (8) late/lately. Vicky: I saw her, I tell you. Daniel: It isn't very (9) like/likely that ghosts actually exist, you know. I expect you were imagining it. Test 18 Adjectives and adverbs (Units 104-109) Test 18A Choose the correct word or phrase. ► We walked stew/slowly back to the hotel. 1 We could walk free/freely around the aircraft during the flight. 2 The young/The young man with dark hair is my sister's boyfriend. 3 I'm getting quite hungry/hungrily. 4 The man looked thoughtful/thoughtfully around the room. 5 Have I filled this form in right/rightly? 6 I think Egypt is a fascinated/fascinating country. 7 The two sisters do alike/similar jobs. 8 I'm pleased the plan worked so good/goodly/well. 9 She invented a new kind of wheelchair for the disabled/the disabled people. 10 I'm very confused/confusing about what to do. 11 They performed the experiment scientifically/scientificly. 12 The hostages must be very afraid/frightened people. Test 18 B Put the words in the right order to form a statement. ► a / bought / coat/ I I new / red / bought a new red coat. 1 a / is / nice / place / this 2 biscuit / can't / find /1 / large / the / tin 3 a / behaved / in / silly / Tessa / way 4 coffee / cold / getting / is / your 5 a / house / in / live / lovely / old / stone / they 6 for / hospital / ill / is / mentally / the / this Test 18C Write the words in brackets and add ly, ing or ed only if you need to. Janet: Is this the (►) new (new...) car you've just bought? Nigel: That's right. Well, it's second-hand of course. Janet: It's (►) exciting (excit...) buying a car, isn't it? Nigel: Well, it was a bit of a problem actually because I didn't have much money to spend. But I managed to find one that wasn't very (1) .......................... (expensive...). Janet: It looks very (2) ................................ (nice...), I must say. Nigel: It's ten years old, so I was (3)……………………. (surpris...) what good condition it's in. The man I bought it from is over eighty, and he always drove it very (4)………………………(careful...),he said. He never took it out if it was raining, which I find (5)……………………. (amus...). Janet: I think (6)……………………. (elder...) people look after their cars better than young people Nigel: He was a (7)…………………….. (friend...) old chap. He even gave me all these maps (8) ................................ (free...). Test 18 D Write a second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► Jonathan was stupid, (behaved) Jonathan behaved stupidly. 1 The drink had a strange taste, (tasted) 2 Obviously, sick people need to be looked after, (the) 3 The dog slept, (asleep) 4 The young woman was polite, (spoke) 5 The train was late, (arrived) 6 The film's ending is dramatic, (ends) 7 Polly gave an angry shout, (shouted) 8 Billiards is a game for indoors, (indoor) 9 The clown amused people, (amusing) 10 There was almost no time left, (any) Test 18 E Some of these sentences are correct, but most have a mistake. If the sentence is correct, put a tick (/"). If it is incorrect, cross the sentence out and write it correctly. ? Your friend looked rather ill. V ? It was-a-steel long-pipe. It was a long steel pipe. 1 I tasted the soup careful. 2 It's a beautiful old English church. 3 Are they asleep children? 4 It's a school for the deaf people. 5 It's a leather new nice jacket. 6 The riches are very lucky. 7 You handled the situation well. 8 He used a green paper thick towel. 9 Our future lies with the young. 10 The course I started was bored. 11 I often talk to the two old next door. 12 The smoke rose highly into the air. 13 It feels warm in here. 14 We felt disappointing when we lost 15 Everyone seemed very nervously. 16 Tessa drives too fastly. 17 This scenery is really depressing. 110 Comparative and superlative forms We form the comparative and superlative of short adjectives (e.g. cheap) and long adjectives (e.g. expensive) in different ways. Short word, e.g. cheap: Long word, e.g. expensive: COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE cheaper more expensive (the) cheapest (the) most expensive For less and least, see Unit 112A. There are some less expensive ones here, look. B Short and long adjectives One-syllable adjectives (e.g. small, nice) usually have the er, est ending. Your hi-fi is smaller. Emma needs a bigger computer. This is the nicest colour. This room is the warmest. But we use more, most before words ending in ed. Everyone was pleased at the results, but Vicky was the most pleased. We also use more, most with three-syllable adjectives (e.g. ex-cit-ing) and with longer ones. The film was more exciting than the book. This dress is more elegant. We did the most interesting project. This machine is the most reliable. Some two-syllable adjectives have er, est, and some have more, most. Look at this information. TWO-SYLLABLE ADJECTIVES 1 Words ending in a consonant + y have er, est, e.g. happy * happier, happiest. Examples are: busy, dirty, easy, funny, happy, heavy, lovely, lucky, pretty, silly, tidy 2 Some words have er, est OR more, most, e.g. narrow ► narrower, narrowest OR more narrow, most namt Examples are: clever, common, cruel, gentle, narrow, pleasant, polite, quiet, simple, stupid, tired 3 The following words have more, most, e.g. useful * more useful, most useful. a Words ending in ful or less, e.g. careful, helpful, useful; hopeless b Words ending in ing or ed, e.g. boring, willing; annoyed, surprised c Many others, e.g. afraid, certain, correct, eager, exact, famous, foolish, frequent, modern, nervous, normal, recent C Spelling There are some special spelling rules for the er and est endings. 1 e -> er, est, e.g. nice ~> nicer, nicest, large ~> larger, largest. Also brave, fine, safe, etc 2 y-> ier, iest after a consonant, e.g. happy -> happier, happiest. Also lovely, lucky, pretty, etc 3 Words ending in a single vowel letter + single consonant letter -> double the consonant e.g. hot -> hotter, hottest, big -> bigger, biggest. Also fit, sad, thin, wet, etc (but w does not change, e.g. new -> newer) For more details, see page 371. D The comparison of adverbs Some adverbs have the same form as an adjective, e.g. early, fast, hard, high, late, long, near. They form the comparative and superlative with er, est. Can't you run faster than that? Andrew works the hardest. Note also the spelling of earlier and earliest. Many adverbs are an adjective + ly, e.g. carefully, easily, nicely, slowly. They form the comparative and superlative with more, most. We could do this more easily with a computer. Of all the players it was Matthew who planned his tactics the most carefully. In informal English we use cheaper, cheapest, louder, loudest, quicker, quickest and slower, slowest rather than more cheaply, the most loudly, etc. Melanie reacted the quickest. You should drive slower in fog. Note the forms sooner, soonest and more often, most often. Try to get home sooner. I must exercise more often. E Irregular forms Good, well, bad, badly and far have irregular forms. ADJECTIVE/ADVERB COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE good/well bad/badly far better worse farther/further best worst farthest/furthest You've got the best handwriting. How much further are we going? We can use elder, eldest + noun instead of older, oldest, but only for people in the same family. My elder/older sister got married last year. F Comparing quantities We use more, most and their opposites less and least to compare quantities. I haven't got many books. You've got more than I have. The Hotel Bristol has the most rooms. Trevor spends less on clothes than Laura does. Emma made the least mistakes. 110 Exercises 1 The comparison of adjectives (A-B) Complete the sentences. Use these adjectives: beautiful, expensive, high, interesting, tall ? ? 1 2 3 The giraffe is taller than the man. The CD is more expensive than the cassette. Detective stories............................................................................ than algebra. The top of the mountain................................................................ than the clouds. The acrobat................................................................................... than the clown. 2 The comparison of adjectives (A-B) Tom is a United fan. He never stops talking about them. Put in the superlative form of the adjectives. ? Everyone's heard of United. They're the most famous (famous) team in the world. ? They've got a long history. They're the oldest (old) club in England. 1 They've got lots of money. They're the...................................................... (rich) club in the country. 2 Their stadium is new. It's the ................................................... (modern) stadium in Europe. 3 United are wonderful. They're the…………………………………. (great) club in the world. 4 And what a team! It's the ………………………………………. (exciting) team ever. 5 They've got lots of fans. They're the....................………………….... (popular) team in the country. 6 United have won everything. They're the................. …………………(successful) team ever. 7 They're good to watch. They play the................ ……………….. ........ (attractive) football. 8 United fans are happy. We're the ................ ……………………… (happy) people in the world. 3 The comparison of adjectives (A-C) Complete the advertisements with the comparative form of the adjective. ? Use Get-It-Clean and you'll get your floors cleaner ? Elegant Wallpapers simply look more elegant 1 Watch a Happy Video and you'll feel…………………………….. 2 Wear a pair of Fast Shoes and you'll be a…………………….. runner. 3 Helpful Cookbooks are a..........………. .......... guide to cooking. 4 Wash your hair with Lovely Shampoo for................…………… hair. 5 Try a Big-Big Burger and you'll have a ……………………. meal. 6 Restful Beds give you a...... ………………… night. 7 Wear Modern Fashions for a ............................... look. 4 The comparison of adverbs (D) Put in the comparative form of these adverbs: carefully, early, easily, high, long, loud, often, smartly ? I was too nervous to go higher than halfway up the tower. ? We could have found the place more easily with a map. 1 Do you have to wear those old jeans, Mike? Can't you dress ...... ……………………. 2 You needn't go yet. You can stay a bit ............................................................... 3 There are lots of break-ins. They happen ................. …………………………. nowadays. 4 If you do it again ...................................................... , you won't make so many mistakes. 5 The film starts at eight, but we should get to the cinema a few minutes ................................................................….. 6 We can't hear. Could you speak a bit............................................……….. ? ... ? 5 Irregular forms (E) Matthew and Emma are walking in the country. Put in further, furthest, better, best, worse and worst. Emma: I'm not used to country walks. How much (►) further is it? Matthew: Not far. And it gets better. We've done the (1)......... ………………… part. Look, the path gets easier. It goes downhill from here. I hope you're feeling (2)……………………… now, Emma. Emma: I feel dreadful, actually, (3) ……………………… than before. Matthew: Oh, dear. Do you want to have a rest? Emma: No, the (4) ………………………. thing would be to get home as soon as we can. I'm not very fit, you know. This is the (5) ……………………… I've walked for a long time. 6 Comparing quantities (F) Put in more, most, less (x2) and least. Laura: Our new car is smaller, so it uses (►) less petrol. They tested some small cars, and this one costs the (1)…………………… to run of all the cars in the test. It's very economical, so Trevor likes it. He wants to spend (2).................................. on motoring. Harriet: Can you get three people in the back? Laura: Not very easily. We had (3)………………………... room in our old car. (4)…………………….. cars take five people, but not this one. 7 Comparative and superlative forms (A-F) Write the correct forms. ? You're the lac-kyest person I know. ? The situation is getting difficulter. 1 I was happyer in my old job. 2 I've got the most small office. 3 This photo is the goodest. 4 Last week's meeting was mere-sheFt. 5 Money is the importantest thing. 6 Is Rachel elder than Vicky? 7 This game is exciteger than the last one. 8 Of all the students, Andrew does the mere work. 9 This month has been weter than last month. 10 The prices are mere-low here. 11 I feel mere-bad than I did yesterday. luckiest more difficult 111 Comparative and superlative patterns (1) A Introduction There are a number of different sentence patterns with comparative and superlative forms, e.g. older than me, the sweetest man in the world. B The comparative and than We often use a phrase with than after a comparative. This restaurant is nicer than the Pizza House. I had a bigger meal than you. The steak is more expensive than the fish. C The superlative We normally use the before a superlative. The quickest way is along this path. The last question is the most difficult. Note the pattern with one of. Michael Jackson is one of the most famous pop singers ever. After a superlative we can use in or of. We use in with places and with groups of people, e.g. team. It's the most expensive hotel in Oxford. Who is the best player in the team? This question is the most difficult of all. August is the wettest month of the year. We often use a clause after a superlative. That was the most delicious meal (that) I've ever eaten. Melanie is the nicest person you could meet. D As... as We use as ... as to say that things are equal or unequal. Our house is as big as yours. They're the same size, NOT It is so big as yours. It's warmer today. It isn't as cold as yesterday. In a negative sentence we can also use so ... as, but this is less common than as ... as. This flat isn't as big as/so big as our old one. Here are some more examples of as ... as. The chair is as expensive as the table. We cant do crosswords as quickly as you do. I don't earn as much money as I'd like. Note also the same as. The result of the match was the same as last year. E Than me/than I am Compare than me and than I am. Both are correct, and they have the same meaning. You're twenty years older than me. Harriet's husband isn't as tall as her. After than or as, a personal pronoun on its own has the object form, e.g. me. You're twenty years older than I am. Her husband isn't as tall as she is. But if the pronoun has a verb after it, then we us the subject form, e.g. I. 111 Exercises 1 The comparative and than (B) Comment on these situations. Write sentences with a comparative and than. Use these adjectives: big, expensive, long, old, popular, strong, tall ? The film lasts two and a half hours, but the videotape is only two hours long. The film is longer than the videotape. ? The water-colour is £85, and the oil-painting is £100. The oil-painting is more expensive than the water-colour. 1 The church was built in 1878 and the library in 1925. 2 Daniel can lift 90 kilos, but Matthew can lift 120 kilos. 3 Mike is 1.7 metres tall, but Harriet is 1.8 metres. 4 Andrew hasn't many friends. Claire has lots of friends. 5 Mark's car has room for five people, but Sarah's has room for only four. 2 The superlative (C) Write sentences from the notes. Use the superlative form of the adjective. ► Melanie / kind person /1 know Melanie is the kindest person I know. 1 Friday / busy day / week ………………………………………………………………. of the week. 2 the Metropole / nice hotel / town ……………………………………………………. 3 this watch / one / cheap / you can buy ………………………………………………. 4 this Beatles album / good / they ever made ………………………………………….. 5 Alan / successful salesman / company ………………………………………………… 3 As... as (D) Use the notes and add sentences with isn't as ... as. ► a car / a motor bike / expensive Why don't you buy a motor bike? A motor bike isn't as expensive as a car. 1 metal / plastic / strong I don't like these plastic screws................................................................... 2 the armchair / the stool / comfortable Oh, don't sit there. ..................................................................................... 3 surfing / swimming / exciting I prefer surfing to swimming. ............................................................... 4 the post / e-mail / quick A letter will take two days.......................................................................... 4 Than me/than I am (E) Choose the correct pronoun. Tom: Why is Luke in our basketball team and not me? Aren't I as good as (►) he/him? Is he taller than (1) I/me? Is he a better player than (2) I am/me am? Nick: I don't know. I can't understand why I'm in the team. You and Luke are both better than (3) I/me. Tom: Carl's in the team too, but I've scored a lot more points than (4) he has/him has. 112 Comparative and superlative patterns (2) A Less and least Less and least are the opposites of more and most. We use less and least with both long and short words. A bus is less expensive than a taxi. (= A bus is cheaper than a taxi./A bus isn't as expensive as a taxi.) I feel better today, less tired. I'm the least musical person in the world, I'm afraid. We go out less often these days. You should do less work. You do too much. B Much faster We can put a word or phrase (e.g. much, far, a bit) before a comparative to say how much faster, cheaper, etc something is. Look at these examples. It's much faster by tube. A bus is far cheaper than a taxi. This bed is a bit more comfortable. Business is rather better this year. I got up a little later than usual. This month's figures are slightly less good. I'll need a lot more water. A computer will do it much more efficiently. Before a comparative we can use much, a lot, far; rather; slightly, a bit, a little. We can also use no and any. No has a negative meaning. Your second throw at the basket was no nearer than your first. We can use any in negatives and questions and with if. Your second throw wasn't any nearer than your first. Are you sleeping any better since you've been taking the pills? If we leave any later than seven, we'll get caught in the rush hour. C Faster and faster We use expressions like faster and faster and more and more expensive to say that something is increasing all the time. The caravan was rolling faster and faster down the hill. The queue was getting longer and longer. Prices go up and up. Everything gets more and more expensive. The crowd are becoming more and more excited. The country is rapidly losing its workers, as more and more people are emigrating. The form depends on whether the comparative is with er (e.g. louder) or with more (e.g. more expensive (see Unit 110B). We can also use less and less for something decreasing. As each new problem arose, we felt less and less enthusiastic. D The faster, the better We use this pattern to say that a change in one thing goes with a change in another. Look at these exampleThere's no time to lose. The faster you drive, the better. The higher the price, the more reliable the product. The more the customer complained, the ruder and more unpleasant the manager became. The sooner we leave, the sooner we'll get there. Are you looking for a cheap holiday? ~ Yes, the cheaper the better. 112 Exercises 1 Less (A) Complete the sentences. Use less with these words: attractive, busy, convenient, nervous, optimistic, painful, seriously ► Laura once hated flying, but now she feels less nervous about it. 1 David says his leg really hurt at first, but now it's ................................................. 2 Mark and Sarah normally have lots to do, but they're……………………………. this week. 3 Rita's old flat was near the shops. Her new place is .......................................... for shopping. 4 Claire used to think Henry was very handsome, but now she finds him……………………. 5 Matthew is always exercising. Maybe he should take his fitness……………………. 6 With United's best player injured, Tom feels …………………………... about their chances. 2 Much faster (B) Decide what to say. Use a phrase like a bit better or a lot colder. ► You were feeling unwell earlier. Say that you feel better now. A bit, anyway. 1 feel a bit better now. 1 Mention that yesterday was colder than today. A lot colder, in fact. 2 Say that your coat is longer than is fashionable. A bit, anyway. 3 You left work earlier than usual this afternoon. Slightly, anyway. Tell your friend. 4 Say that the shop is more expensive than the supermarket. Much more. 5 Ask if the new machine is reliable - any more so than the old one. 3 Faster and faster (C) Vicky works very hard at her studies, but she's worried that she's making no progress. Complete her sentences. ? This subject gets harder and harder (hard) all the time. ? I'm just getting more and more confused (confused). 1 It's becoming ……………………………………………… (difficult) for me to keep up. 2 The textbook just gets……………………………………………….. (complicated). 3 I spend .............................................................. (more) time on my work. 4 My list of things to do gets ...........................................…………………. (long). 5 My problems are just getting...................…………………………………. . (bad). 4 The faster, the better (D) Complete each sentence using the information in brackets. ? (The rent is high.) The bigger a flat is, the higher the rent is. ? (You learn quickly.) The younger you are, the more quickly you learn. 1 (The roads are quiet.) The earlier you leave, ...................................... 2 (The choice is wide.) The bigger a supermarket is,………………… 3 (I get confused.) The more I try to work this out,........................... … 4 (You can speak fluently.) The more you practise, ..................……….. 5 (The beaches get crowded.) The better the weather is,……………… TEST 19 Comparative and superlative (Units 110-112) Test 19A Write the comparative form of the words in brackets. ? They've made these chocolate bars smaller (small). ? Sport is more interesting (interesting) than politics. 1 Can't you think of anything ........................................ (intelligent) to say? 2 Well, the place looks............................................... (clean) now. 3 Janet looks ……………………………… (thin) than she did. 4 You need to draw it…………………. .................. (carefully). 5 The weather is getting ............................................. (bad). 6 The programme will be shown at a ........................................... (late) date. 7 I can't stay ........................................(long) than half an hour. 8 A mobile phone would be a ...................................... (useful) present. 9 I'll try to finish the job ....................................... (soon). 10 It was ……………………………… (busy) than usual in town today. 11 I'll be even ……………………………. . (annoyed) if you do that again. 12 Since the break-in I feel .............................................. (nervous). Test 19B Write the superlative form of the words in brackets. ? It's the shortest (short) day of the year. ? It's the most beautiful (beautiful) building in the world. 1 That was the............................................... (funny) film I've ever seen. 2 It was the ……………. ........................ (horrible) feeling I've ever had. 3 Have you read her ………. ................................ (recent) book? 4 It's the .......................................... (large) company in the country. 5 It was the ……………………………….(boring) speech I've ever heard. 6 You've got the ..................................... (far) to travel. 7 That's the .............................................. (helpful) idea so far. 8 The factory uses the ...........................................(modern) production methods. 9 This is the …………………………… (early) I've ever got up. 10 It was the ......... …………....................(sad) day of my life. Test 19C Some of these sentences are correct, and some have a word which should not be there. If a sentence is correct put a tick (/). If it is incorrect, cross the unnecessary word out of the sentence and write it in the space. ? I've got the least powerful computer in the world. V ? London is mere bigger than Birmingham. more 1 Silver isn't as expensive as gold. 2 Indian food is the nicer than Chinese, I think. 3 The telephone is one of the most useful inventions ever 4 I feel a much better now, thank you. 5 The longer you wait, so the harder it'll be. 6 The piano is heavier than the sofa. 7 This is the most quickest way to the hotel. 8 You're taller than he is. 9 Who is the cleverest student in of the class? 10 The weather is getting hotter and more hotter. Test 19 D Read this part of Tessa's letter to her friend Angela about her new job. Then look at the answers after the letter and write the correct answer in each space. My new job is great. I like it (►)much better than my old one. The people here are (1) …………………………than I expected. Luckily my new boss isn't as rude (2) ………………………….my old boss, Mrs Crossley, was. I hated her. She was the (3) ………………………..... friendly person I've ever met. Everyone here is older (4)…………………………. In fact I'm the youngest person (5)……………………………. the office. But I don't mind. The good thing about the job is that I get a (6)…………………………. more money, although not much more than I did before. The bad thing is that the journey isn't (7)…………………………… simple as it was in my old job, where the bus took me straight there. Now I have to change buses. But I'm allowed to start work early. The earlier I leave home, (8) ................…………….. the journey is because the buses aren't so crowded. ► 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a) more a) more nice a) as a) least a) as I a) from a) bit a) as a) more easier b) most b) most nice b) so b) less b) as me b) in b) less b) less b) more easy c) much c) nicer c) than c) less and less c) than I c) of c) lot c) more c) the easier d) very d) nicest d) that d) so d) than me d) out of d) much d) same d) the easy Test 19 E Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► This train is more convenient than all the others, (most) This train is the most convenient. 1 The living-room isn't as big as the kitchen, (bigger) The kitchen ....................................................................................................................... 2 I'm not as fit as you. (am) You're ........................................................................................................................................ 3 The table and the desk are the same size, (big) The table ......................................................................................................................................... the desk. 4 Prices just get higher all the time, (and) Prices.......................................................................................................................................... 5 The dress is cheaper than the skirt, (expensive) The skirt..........................................................................................................................................the dress. 6 This crossword is the easiest, (difficult) This crossword............................... 7 Their excitement was increasing all the time, (excited) They were getting ........................................................................................................................... 8 I've never read a more romantic story, (most) It's the .......................................................................................................................................... read. 113 Adverbs and word order A Where do adverbs go? There are three places in the sentences where an adverb can go. They are called front position (at the beginning of a sentence), mid position (see B) and end position (at the end of a sentence). (But for adverbs of degree see Unit 115.) FRONT MID END Then the ship slowly sailed away. Outside it was obviously raining hard. B Mid position Mid position means close to the verb. Here are some examples of adverbs in mid position. The visitors Andrew We You The pictures I You AUXILIARY ADVERB are has don't should have just always often never definitely been really probably AUXILIARY MAIN VfcRB leaving. liked go take stolen. hate left Jessica. out in the evening. unnecessary risks. housework. the bag on the bus. The adverb comes after the first auxiliary, e.g. are, has, don't. If there is no auxiliary, then the adverb comes before the main verb, e.g. hate, left. Note the word order in questions. Has Andrew always liked Jessica? Do you often go out in the evening? When the verb be is on its own, the adverb usually comes after it. The boss is usually in a bad temper. You're certainly a lot better today. When there is stress on the main verb be or on the auxiliary, then the adverb usually comes before it. You certainly are a lot better today. I really have made a mess, haven't I? C Verb and object An adverb does not usually go between the verb and the direct object. We put it in end position, after the object. VERB OBJECT ADVERB Tom ate his breakfast quickly. NOT Tom-ate-quickly his'-breakfast. We played volleyball yesterday, NOT We played yesterday volleyball. I like classical music very much, NOT I like very much classical music. But an adverb can go before a long object. Detectives examined carefully the contents of the dead man's pockets. D Adverbs of manner An adverb of manner tells us how something happens, e.g. noisily, quickly. It usually goes in end position, but an adverb which ends in ly can sometimes go in mid position. We asked permission politely. We politely asked permission. E Adverbs of place and time Adverbs and adverbial phrases of place and time usually go in end position. Is there a phone box nearby? People didn't have cars then. We're meeting by the entrance. Trevor wasn't very well last week. Did you have a nice time in New York? I'll see you before very long. Sometimes they can go in front position. We're really busy this week. Last week we had nothing to do. Some short adverbs of time can also go in mid position. I'll soon find out. The train is now approaching Swindon. For yet, still and already see Unit 114. F Adverbs of frequency An adverb of frequency tells us 'how often'. It usually goes in mid position (see B). Mark is always in such a hurry. I sometimes feel depressed. I've often thought about getting married. Do you usually work so late? Normally, usually, often, sometimes and occasionally can also go in front or end position. Normally Sarah goes by train. 1 feel depressed sometimes. Phrases like every day, once a week or most evenings go in front or end position. Every day we go logging. Rachel has a driving lesson three times a week. There's a news summary every hour. We watch television most evenings. G Sentence adverbs A sentence adverb is a word or phrase like certainly, perhaps, luckily, of course. It says something about the situation described in the sentence. The adverb can go in front, mid or end position. Sometimes we put a comma after or before the adverb, especially in front or end position. Fortunately, the weather stayed fine. Maybe you'll win a free holiday. We'll probably have to queue for tickets. Rachel was late, of course. In a negative sentence, probably and certainly come before won't, didn't, etc. We probably won't get there in time. I certainly didn't expect a present! Also usually goes in mid position, but too and as well go in end position. Melanie bakes lovely cakes. She also makes bread./She makes bread, too/as well. H End position There can be more than one adverb or adverbial phrase in end position. Usually a single-word adverb (e.g. safely) comes before a phrase (e.g. on a small airfield). They landed safely on a small airfield. I always eat here at lunch-time. When there is a close link in meaning between a verb and an adverb, then that adverb goes next to the verb. For example, with verbs of movement like go, come and move, a phrase of place comes before time. I usually go to bed early. Tom came here yesterday. My parents moved to London in 1993. But often two adverbial phrases can go in either order. The concert was held at the arts centre last night. The concert was held last night at the arts centre. 113 Exercises 1 Adverbs (A-B) Read each sentence and write down the word which is an adverb. ► I'm just finishing an interesting article in this magazine, just 1 We have to leave our dirty shoes outside. 2 Perhaps you have to type a password into the computer. 3 Someone always leaves this door open. 4 Obviously we aren't going to go for a walk in the rain. 5 The car rolled silently down the hill. 6 Your friend Andrew works hard, doesn't he? 2 Adverbs and their position (A-B) Read this true story. Some adverbs are underlined. Say if their position is front, mid or end. Once a man called Alvin decided to rob a bank in Montgomery, Alabama. Alvin's parents had often told him that good manners were important. So Alvin went to the bank and stood in line. He waited patiently Soon it was his turn. He dramatically pulled out a gun and threatened the cashier. She politely told him tl he was in the wrong line and should go to another counter. Alvin immediately went to the correct place a stood in line again. Suddenly the police rushed in and arrested him. Alvin was amazed. They'd caught hir before he'd even done the robbery. The moral of the story is that you shouldn't always do what your pare: tell you. ADVERB ► 1 2 3 4 5 POSITION once front often patiently soon dramatically politely ADVERB POSITION 6 immediately 7 again 8 suddenly 9 even 10 always 3 Mid position (B) Complete the conversations using the words in brackets. Put the adverbs in the best place. ► Emma: Did you know the man who tried to steal your bag? (certainly / recognize / would) Vicky: No, but I would certainly recognize him again. 1 David: That was a goal, wasn't it? (clearly / crossed) Tom: Yes, the ball...................................................... the line. 2 Mark: The weather is a lot better today, (probably / rain / will) Sarah: It said on the radio it ................................................................. later. 3 Tom: How do we get to Mike's place? (didn't / fully / understand) Nick: I don't know. I ..........................................................the directions. 4 Harriet: It's quiet here today, isn't it? (usually / are) Laura: Yes, the neighbours ..................................................out on a Sunday 5 Emma: Have you been to this place before? (it / occasionally / visited) Matthew: Yes, I ........................................................................ as a child 6 Alan: Did the computers crash this morning? (soon / were / working) Mark: Yes, but they ............................................................................. again. 7 Melanie: Your friend's late, Vicky, (forgotten / has / obviously) Vicky: Rachel ........................................................................... that we arranged to go out. 4 Adverbs of frequency (B, F) Look at what people are saying and write the information in one sentence. Put the adverb or adverbial phrase in mid or end position. Choose the best position. ? Vicky: I lose my way in London. It always happens. Vicky always loses her way in London. ? Laura: The birds wake me up. It happens every morning. The birds wake Laura up every morning. 1 David: It rains when I'm on holiday. Well, usually. 2 Rita: My friend visits me. She comes most weekends. 3 Mark: I get a pay rise. I get one every year. 4 Rachel: I don't check my work. 1 never do that. 5 Adverbs and word order (A-G) Put the words in the right order and write the statements. Sometimes there is more than one possible order. ► cleaned / every day / is / the office The office is cleaned every day. 1 always / I've / known / your secret 2 afford / can't / certainly / a new car / we 3 didn't / far / the tourists / walk 4 carefully / cut / the paper / Tom 5 also / can / Natasha / play / the violin 6 I / most days / read / the newspaper 6 Adverbs in end position (H) Complete these sentences from a newspaper. Put the words and phrases in the best order. ► The Queen has visited the show regularly since 1985 (regularly / since 1985). 1 The President died ……………………………………………………(at his home / peacefully). 2 The protesters marched .………………………………………….(through the streets / yesterday). 3 The Prime Minister went .........................................……………………..(last year / to Greece). 4 Henry likes Rome. He spent a week .......................................... ……………………(in June / there). 7 Adverbs and word order (A-H) Read the postcard from Olivia to her friend Kirsty and write the sentences. Put the adverbs in the best place. (►)Thank you for having us (last weekend). (1) We had a lovely time (in the country). (2) We arrived home at about eight (safely). (3) You must come and visit us (before too long). (4) It's nice to see you and Tony (always). (5) You'll be able to come in the new year (maybe). (6) We'll see you (sometime). ► Thank you for having us last weekend. 1 2 3 4 5 6 114 Yet, still and already Yet means that we are expecting something. (It's the time to book a holiday.) Still means 'going on longer than expected'. (It's late to be thinking about a holiday.) Already means 'sooner than expected'. (It's early to have had a holiday.) B Yet Yet usually goes at the end of a negative statement or a question. Vicky has got a present, but she hasn't opened it yet. Wait a minute. I'm not ready yet. Have they sent you your cheque yet? ~ No, not yet. I should get it next week. C Still and already In a positive statement, still and already usually go in mid position (see Unit 113B). Sarah isn't home yet. She's still at work. We wrote a month ago, and we're still waiting for a reply. I've only been at work an hour, and I'm already exhausted. There's no need to tell me. I already know. We can also use still in a negative statement. It goes before haven't, can't, etc. It's nearly lunch-time, and you still haven't opened your mail. My friend is sixteen, and she still can't swim. Compare these sentences. The meanings are similar. Rita hasn't booked a holiday yet. Rita still hasn't booked a holiday. Still is stronger than yet. It often expresses surprise that the situation has gone on for so long. In a question still and already usually go after the subject. Are you still waiting after all this time? Has Tom already been on holiday? D No longer and any longer/any more No longer means that something is finished. It goes in mid position (see Unit 113B). You can't buy these bikes now. They no longer make them. I used to belong to the sports club, but I'm no longer a member. No longer can be a little formal. In informal speech we use not... any longer or not. . . anymore. They don't make these bikes any longer/any more. Rita has moved. She doesn't live here any longer/any more. Any longer/any more comes at the end. 12A Yet and already with the present perfect 114 Exercises 1 Yet, still and already (A) Put in yet, still or already. ► Mark: I know it isn't lunch-time yet, but I'm really hungry. Sarah: It's only eleven. And you've already had two coffees since breakfast. 1 Vicky: You've ……………….. got this library book, and it was due back ten days ago. Rachel: Well, I haven't finished it.................................................... 2 Nick: Tom is a very slow eater, isn't he? He's.........................having his soup. David: And we've ................... started our pudding. 3 Trevor: Has the postman been ....................... ? I'm expecting a letter from the bank. Laura: Yes, he has, but that letter....................... hasn't arrived. 2 Word order with yet, still and already (A) Put the word in brackets into one of the sentences. ? I've bought some CDs. I haven't played them, (yet) / haven't played them yet. ? This calculator works. I've had it for ages, (still) This calculator still works. 1 I owe Emma £20.1 can't ask her for more, (already) 2 We've spent all our money. And we're only halfway through our holiday, (already) 3 I've cleaned this window. But it looks dirty, (still) 4 Our friend took some photos. We haven't seen them, (yet) 5 I can't understand the rules. I know you explained them to me. (still) 3 Still and any more (C-D) Two people are talking about the place they live in. Write the replies using still or not... any more. Old man: Young man: ? There was a church. ~ Well, there's still a church. ? You could see fields. ~ You can't see them any more. Now it's just houses. 1 Children played there. ~ Not now .............................. 2 Boats came along the river. ~ Oh, .......................... . Look at them. 3 The view was beautiful. ~ Well, .......................................... It's awful. 4 It was our home. ~ And................................. \ Yet, still, already, no longer and any longer/any more (A-D) Put in already, any more, no longer, still and yet. ► It's still raining, look. How much longer can it go on? 1 The railway closed down years ago, so there's……………………. a railway station here. 2 They want to build a new hotel here, but they haven't got permission .………………… 3 Rita isn't going out with Nick. She told him she didn't want to see him…………………… 4 Those people moved here only three months ago, and they're…………………..leaving. _ 115 Adverbs of degree, e.g. very, quite Laura is a bit tired. She's been Mark is quite tired. He's been Sarah is very tired. She's had to working all morning. working all day. work late at the office. An adverb of degree makes the meaning weaker or stronger. Here are some more examples. SMALL DECREE (weaker) LARGE DEGREE (stronger) MEDIUM DEGREE a little late slightly complicated fairly unusual pretty good rather nice absolutely sure really ill completely mad extremely cold B Very cold, quite quickly, etc An adverb of degree (e.g. very) goes before an adjective (e.g. cold) or an adverb (e.g. quickly). ADVERB + ADJECTIVE It's very cold today. Rita looked rather upset. This dress is absolutely marvellous. ADVERB + ADVERB The time passed quite quickly. We go on holiday fairly soon. United played extremely well. Before a comparative we can use a bit, a little, a lot, far, much, rather and slightly. See also Unit 112B. I'm feeling a lot better today. These new trains go much faster. C Really hurting, quite enjoys, etc Some adverbs of degree can describe a verb. They usually go in mid position (close to the verb — see Unit 113B). My foot is really hurting. Laura quite enjoys shopping. I rather like this cake. Some adverbs of degree go at the end ol a sentence when they describe a verb. They are a bit, a little, a lot, awfully, much and terribly. Mark travels a lot. I'll open the window a little. The animals suffer terribly. Absolutely, completely and totally can go in mid position or at the end. We completely lost our way/We lost our way completely. I'm afraid I totally disagree./I'm afraid I disagree totally. D Much Now look at these sentences. Positive: I like this town very much, NOT I like this town much Negative: / don't like this town very much, OR I don't like this town much. In a positive statement we use very much. In a negative statement we can use either very much or much. 116 More about quite and rather 117 Too and enough 115 Exercises 1 Very, quite, a bit, etc (A) Write sentences using one of the phrases in brackets. ► (quite hungry or very hungry?) He's quite hungry. 3 ……………… (quite strong or very strong?) 1 (a bit busy or very busy?) ……………………….. 4 ………… (fairly happy or extremely happy?) 2 (a bit thirsty or really thirsty?) .......................... 2 Very, quite and a bit (A) Put in very, quite or a bit. ► The bus service is all right. The buses are quite frequent. 1 I couldn't sleep because of the awful noise. The disco was…………. noisy. 2 The weather was OK - at least it didn't rain. It was .............. good. 3 The train was almost on time. It was just………….. late. 4 Someone paid a great deal of money for the house. It was………….. expensive. 5 There were some very small traces of mud on the boots. They were………….. .. dirty. 6 There was a medium amount of traffic on the road. It was…………….busy. 3 Very cold, really hurting, etc (B-D) Put the adverbs in the right place. Sometimes more than one answer is correct. ? These books are old (very). These books are very old. ? I hate travelling by air (really). I really hate travelling by air. 1 That radio is loud (a bit). 2 1 like my new job (quite). 3 Why don't you slow down (a little)? 4 The rain spoilt our day (completely). 5 We did the job quickly (fairly). 6 I feel better now (a lot). 7 We enjoyed the concert (very much). 8 My arms ached (terribly). 4 Adverbs of degree (A-D) Complete the advertisement for holiday apartments by choosing the correct words. Why not take this opportunity to buy a wonderful Interlux Timeshare apartment in San Manila? These are (►) a bit/rather/really luxurious apartments set in this (1) absolutely/slightly magnificent seaside resort, a (2) fairly/really beautiful and unspoilt place, which you'll like (3) much/very/very much. The apartments are (4) extremely/pretty/quite good value. And we are a company with a (5) fairly/quite/very good reputation. This is a (6) bit/slightly/totally safe way of investing your money. But hurry! People are buying up the apartments (7) a lot/very/very much quickly. 116 Quite and rather A Quite meaning 'fairly' Quite usually means 'fairly' or 'a medium amount' (see Unit 115A). I jeel quite hungry now. Repairing the machine is quite difficult. The talk was quite interesting. We were quite surprised at the result. (But see D for another meaning of quite.) B Stress with quite In speech, whether we stress quite or the adjective makes a difference to the meaning. If we stress quite, it means 'fairly but not very'. The meaning is negative. The exhibition was quite good, but I've seen better ones. I get up quite early, but not as early as you do. If we stress the adjective, the meaning is positive (but not as positive as very). The exhibition was quite good. I enjoyed looking round it. I got up quite early. I had a lot of jobs to do. C Quite or rather? When we make a favourable comment, we usually say quite, not rather. The book was quite interesting. It's quite warm now. It was quite nice walking through the park. In unfavourable comments, we usually say rather, but quite is possible. The book was rather boring/quite boring. It was rather awkward/quite awkward taking my suitcase on the underground. Rather in a favourable comment means 'to a surprising or unusual degree'. It's rather warm for October. (It isn't usually so warm.) / didn't know David can cook. He's rather good at it. I expect Tom's jokes were awful. ~ Actually they were rather funny. We can use rather with a comparative but not quite. The meal took rather longer than we expected. For quite and rather with a/an, see Unit 89B. It was quite an interesting book. D Quite meaning 'completely' With some adjectives, quite means 'completely' or 'totally'. What you said is quite wrong. {= completely wrong) The idea is quite absurd. (= totally absurd) The situation is quite hopeless. Quite means 'completely' with these adjectives: absurd, alone, amazing, awful, brilliant, certain, dead, different, dreadful, extraordinary, false, hopeless, horrible, impossible, perfect, ridiculous, right, sure, true, useless, wrong Compare the uses of quite. I'm quite tired. (= fairly) The advice was quite useful. I got one or two tips. I'm quite exhausted. (= completely) The advice was quite useless. It was absolutely no good at all. 116 Exercises 1 Stress with quite (B) Which word do we stress, quite or the adjective? Underline the stressed word. ? These pens are quite good but not as good as the ones I usually buy. ? This book is quite exciting. I can't put it down. 1 These fashions are quite new but not the very latest thing. 2 It's quite late. We'd better be going. 3 The sums are quite easy. I can do them in my head. 4 The music was quite good, but I wasn't really impressed. 5 The sun is quite bright. You'll need your sunglasses. 2 Quite or rather? (C) Put in these adjectives: better, busy, nice, noisy, popular Use quite or rather with each adjective. Sometimes either is possible. Mark: I didn't like that meal very much. Sarah: The soup was (►) quite nice though, wasn't it? Mark: The food was (1) ................................ the last time we came. Sarah: It's (2)…………………….. in here, isn't it? Everyone seems to be shouting. Mark: I wasn't expecting the place to be so full. It's (3)………………………. for a Monday evening Sarah: This restaurant is (4) .................................., you know. 3 Quite or rather? (C) Add a sentence expressing the idea in brackets. Use quite or rather in your sentence. Sometimes either is possible. ► (It's pleasant by the river.) Let's walk along by the river. It's quite pleasant there. ► (You think Nick is aggressive.) I don't like Nick much. I think he's rather aggressive. 1 (Changing trains twice is complicated.) We have to change trains twice ............................................................................. 2 (Your car is big.) I can give you all a lift ............................................................................................. 3 (The show went on longer than you expected.) It was a good show, but......................................................................................... 4 (You made your decision quickly.) It wasn't a difficult decision................................................................................... 4 The meanings of quite (A, D) Does quite mean 'fairly' or 'completely'? ? Try one of these sweets. I think they're quite nice. = fairly nice ? The driver walked away unhurt. It was quite amazing. = completely amazing 1 I couldn't agree to the idea. It was quite ridiculous. = 2 I need some help with this crossword. It's quite difficult. = 3 That isn't the same thing at all. It's quite different. = 4 I wasn't expecting to get a postcard. I was quite surprised. = 5 I bought this guidebook. It looks quite useful. = 6 Are you sure you want the job? ~ Yes, I'm quite certain. = 117 Too and enough Too short and not long enough both mean the same thing. B Word order with too and enough Too goes before an adjective or adverb. Claire doesn't want to marry Henry. She thinks he's too old. Zedco are in trouble. The company reacted too slowly to the rise in prices. Enough goes after an adjective or adverb. The water isn't hot enough. It needs to be boiling, NOT enough hot You didn't put the screws in tightly enough, NOT enough tightly Too many, too much and enough go before a noun. No wonder you're tired. You've been going to too many parties. Andrew spends too much time working. There'll be fifteen people for coffee. Have we got enough cups? Everything is so expensive. Did you bring enough money? We use many with a plural noun and much with an uncountable noun (see Unit 95A). Compare these examples with enough. After an adjective: The coffee isn't strong enough. Before a noun: You didn't put enough coffee in. We leave out the noun if the meaning is clear without it. Just add a little water. Not too much. We'll need fifteen cups. Have we got enough? C Other structures with too and enough We can use a phrase with for after too or enough. These puzzles are too difficult for children. This coat isn't warm enough for winter. Have we got enough cups for everyone? We can also use a to-infinitive. It's too dangerous to walk home at this time of night. There are too many museums here to visit in a single day. Are you fit enough to run a marathon? I couldn't get close enough to see properly. Vicky didn't bring enough money to buy two CDs. 117 Exercises 1 Too and enough (A-B) Look at the pictures and write sentences with too and enough. Use these nouns and adjectives: big, gate, long, low, plane, sweater, ruler, warm, water, wide ? ? The sweater is too big. The ruler isn't long enough. 1 2 3 ............................. .............................. …………………. Too and enough (A-B) Look at what people are saying and complete the sentences. Use too, too many, too much or enough with these words: clearly, complicated, difficult, expensive, food, hastily, mistakes, rain, sweet, traffic ? You should have stopped to think first. You acted too hastily. ? This quiz is rather easy. The questions aren't difficult enough. 1 Can I have some more sugar in my coffee, please? It isn't 2 I can't afford a new stereo. It would be . 3 There's a water shortage. There just hasn't been 4 I can't read your writing. You don't write 5 Try to be more careful, please. You're making 6 The roads are very crowded. There's simply 7 I can't understand these instructions. They're 8 Thousands of people are starving because they can't get Other structures with too and enough (C) Comment on the situations. Use too or enough and a phrase with jor or a to-infinitive. ? A taxi would have been best. But you didn't have the money. I didn't have enough money for a taxi. ? Sarah can't take a day off. She's very busy. Sarah is too busy to take a day off. 1 A picnic would be nice. But it's wet. 2 All your guests will need chairs. But you haven't got very many. 3 You couldn't carry the equipment. You had such a lot. 4 Natasha wants to be a professional musician. You think she's very good. TEST 20 Adverbs and word order (Units 113-117) Test 20A Put each word in brackets into the sentence. ► Anna arrives for work, (late) Anna arrives late for work. 1 I like old cowboy films, (quite) 2 Have you finished this magazine? (yet) 3 This coat is big. (too) 4 Have the children had their tea? (already) 5 You don't look ill. (certainly) 6 We don't go out. (much) 7 I think everyone works hard, (fairly) 8 I don't know the date of the meeting, (still) 9 The others are getting ready, (just) 10 I have to go to work, (on Saturdays) Test 20B Put the words in the right order to form a statement. ► I / love / really / these trousers I really love these trousers. 1 is / rather / silly / this game 2 already / I've / paid / the bill 3 enough / isn't / loud / the alarm 4 easily / Jonathan / passed / the test 5 a lot / cards / play / the children 6 didn't / enough / sell / they / tickets 7 ask / many / questions / too / you 8 a member / any more / of the club / I'm / not 9 enough / it's / outside / to sit / warm Test 20C Read the conversation. Then look at the answers below and write the correct answer in each space. Martin: Hello, Nancy. (►) How are you? Have you found a job (1)……………….. ....? Nancy: No, I'm afraid not, but I'm (2)........ ………….. ... looking. It's taking (3)…………………… longer than I expected. The problem is there just aren't (4) ......................... jobs. And there are too (5) .......................... people looking for jobs. Martin: I'm old enough (6)…………………….. remember when there was plenty of work. Nancy: There used to be lots of work, but there isn't (7)..............................more. I'm afraid I'm (8)…………………. longer as optimistic as I was a few weeks ago. In fact I feel a (9) .............................depressed about it sometimes. Martin: Don't worry. You'll (10)............................. find something, I expect. ► 1 2 3 4 5 a) How a) longer a) already a) more a) enough a) big b) What c) Who b) soon c) still b) more c) still b) quite c) rather b) plenty c) right b) lot c) many d) Why d) yet d) yet d) some d) several d) much 6 7 8 9 10 a) for b) of a) any b) no a) any b) never a) bit b) piece a) already b) yet d) before very long c) that d) to c) now d) some c) no d) not c) quite d) slightly c) soon Test 20 D Each of these sentences has a mistake in it. Write the correct sentence. ► My friend calls always for me. My friend always calls jor me. 1 I didn't last night sleep very well. 2 1 think I need to rest little. 3 I-don't work for the company-longer. 4 The article is fair interesting. 5 Tessa locked carefully the door. 6 You aren't enough tall to play basketball. 7 We went yesterday to town. 8 Hike this music much. Test 20E Write a second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► It's probable that the strike will be over soon, (probably) The strike will probably be over soon. 1 We often go to the cinema, (a lot) 2 Adrian wears jeans all the time, (always) 3 These shoes are too small, (big) 4 I don't live in Birmingham any more, (no) 5 Polly spent more money than she should have done in the sales, (too) Prepositions of place A Meanings The bird is in/inside the cage. Sarah is diving in/into the water. Tom is getting out of the car. They're waiting outside the bank. The jug is on the table. The case is on top of the wardrobe. Emma is putting her luggage on/onto the trolley. Henry is falling off the horse. Rachel is at the bus stop. The table is by/beside the bed. Jessica is sitting next to Andrew. The airport is near Manchester. The coach is going to London. The letter is from Chicago. Matthew is walking towards the sun. Vicky is running away from the fire. There's a bridge over the river. Tom is under the car. The plane is above the clouds. The temperature is below zero. The cyclist is in front of the bus. The cyclist is behind the tractor. Rita is going up the stairs. Daniel is coming down the stairs. Melanie is running across the road. The cars are going through the tunnel. Trevor is walking along the street. The car is going past the house. The house is among the trees. Jackson is between Memphis and New Orleans. Jessica is sitting opposite Andrew. They're running around/round the track. B Position and movement Most of these prepositions can express either position (where something is) or movement (where it is going). Position: The coin was under the sofa. Movement: The coin rolled under the sofa. Now look at these examples with in and on expressing position. The manager was in the office. The papers were on the floor. To express movement, we use into and onto, but we can also use in and on, especially in informal English. The manager came in/into the office. The papers fell on/onto the floor. At expresses position, and to expresses movement. Position: Vicky was at the doctor's. Movement: Vicky went to the doctor's. > page 380 British and American English Exercises 1 Prepositions of place (A) Put in the prepositions. Sometimes more than one answer is correct. ► Sarah is getting out of the taxi. 3 My friend lives in a flat ............ a shop. 6 We walked ………. the lake. 1 4 David is going........... the ladder. The boss is coming ......................the corridor. 7 There's a statue ................... the museum. 2 The furniture is…….. the van. 5 There's a garage……. the house. 8 Tom and Nick are walking ...................the stadium. 2 Prepositions of place (A) Complete the conversations. Choose the correct preposition. 1 Vicky: I felt really afraid when I was walking home from/off the club. All the time I could hear someone behind/in front of me, but I didn't dare turn round. Rachel: I expect you were imagining it. Vicky: No, I wasn't. I saw him after I'd come in across/through the gate. He was wearing a long black coat that came down well below/under his knees. 2 Daniel: You know Adam, don't you? He's very strange. He walked right along/past me yesterday as I was coming among/down the stairs, but he didn't say hello. Matthew: The other day he was sitting beside/opposite me at lunch, so I couldn't help looking at him, I said hello, but he didn't speak. 3 Between, next to and opposite (A) Look at the plan and explain where things are. Use between, next to or opposite. ► The bank is next to the gift shop. 1 The sports shop is ........................the bank. 2 The travel agency is .............................the sports shop and the art gallery. 3 The restaurant is............................. the art gallery. 4 The gift shop is.............................the bank and the restaurant. 5 The art gallery is............................. the travel agency. 4 Prepositions of place (A-B) Where did the fly go? Put in these prepositions: around, into, on, out of, through, under, up ► 1 2 3 The fly came in through the door. It flew ................ the chair. It crawled ................ the chair leg. It stopped……………the desk for a moment. 4 It went………….. the telephone. 5 It flew………… ...the drawer. 6 It went………….. the window. ; Prepositions of place (A-B). Put in the correct preposition. ► Rachel was lying on the grass reading a book. 1 It's my holiday next week. I'm going .........................Spain. 2 There was a big crowd ........................... the shop waiting for it to open. 3 That man is an idiot. He pushed me ........................the swimming-pool. 4 I went .......................... the chemist's just now, but I didn't notice if it was open. 5 David hurt himself. He fell ........................... his bike. 6 There's a cafe.…………… .........top of the mountain. You can have a coffee there before you go down. 7 The sheep got out ........................ a hole in the fence. 8 Pompeii is quite............................. Sorrento. It's only a short train ride. 9 There's such a crowd. You won't find your friend ………………… all these people. 119 In, on and at (place) Emma is in the phone box. Nick's dog is on the rug. There's someone at the door. IN ON AT in the phone box in the kitchen work in the garden swim in the pool In a town/country Kate lives in York. Atlanta is in Georgia. In a street (GB) in Shirley Road sit on the floor walk on the pavement a number on the door egg on your shirt On a floor (1st, 2nd, etc) on the first floor sit at my desk wait at the bus stop at the crossroads wait at the traffic lights At a place on a journey Does this train stop at York? On a street (US) on Fifth Avenue On a road or river a village on this road Paris is on the Seine. At a house/an address at Mike's (house) at 65 Shirley Road At an event at the party B In and at with buildings IN AT There are 400 seats in the cinema. It was raining, so we waited in the pub. We use in when we mean inside a building. I was at the cinema. (= watching a film) We were at the pub. (= having a drink) But we normally use at when we are talking about what happens there. C Some common phrases IN ON in prison/hospital in the lesson in a book/newspaper in the photo/picture in the country in the middle in the back/front of a car in a queue/line/row on the platform on the farm on the page/map on the screen on the island/beach/coast drive on the right/left on the back of an envelope 87 In bed, at home, etc 123C In the car, on the train, etc AT at the station/airport at home/work/school at the seaside at the top/bottom of a hill at the back of the room at the end of a corridor 119 Exercises 1 Meanings (A) Look at the pictures and write the sentences. Use in, on or at and these words: the bath, the disco, the lights, the roof, the table ► He's on the table. 1 ………………………………………………. 2 .......................................................................... 3 ............................................................................ 4 .......................................................................... 2 In and at with buildings (B) Complete each sentence. Use in or at and these words: the petrol station, the restaurant, the stadium, the station, the theatre, the zoo ► 1 2 3 4 5 There's a huge crowd in the stadium waiting for the Games to start. Sarah's just rung. She's ..................................................... getting some petrol. The children like wild animals. They'd love to spend an afternoon ....... …………………….. It was so hot ........................................................ that I didn't really enjoy the play. We're quite a large group. There may not be enough room ........................ ……………….for all of us to sit together. I saw Daniel while I was.......................................................... waiting for a train. 3 In, on and at (A, C) Put in the preposition in, on or at. ► 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 We spent the whole holiday on the beach. I read about the pop festival …………….a magazine. My parents' flat is ................. the twenty-first floor. Melanie was holding a small bird .............. her hands. I'll meet you.................. the airport. Natasha now lives .............32 The Avenue. I was standing..................the counter in the baker's shop, waiting to be served. London is ..............the Thames. There weren't many books ..................the shelves. The passengers had to stand ................. a queue. The woman sitting next to me left the train ..............Chesterfield. 120 In, on and at (time) A Saying when Look at these examples. IN ON We bought the flat in 1994. AT The race is on Saturday. In + year/month/season in 1988 in September in winter in the 21st century In + a week or more in the Easter holiday in the summer term On + a single day on Easter Monday on Christmas Day In + part of day in the morning in the evening On + day + part of day on Friday morning on Tuesday evening Look at these examples with night. / woke up in the night. (= in the middle of the night) On + day/date on Wednesday on 15 April on that day The film starts at seven thirty. At + clock time/meal time at three o'clock at lunch (-time) at that time at the moment At + two or three days at Easter/Christmas at the weekend (US: on the weekend) It happened on Monday night. I cant sleep at night. (= when it is night) But we do not use in, on or at before every, last, next, this, tomorrow and yesterday. We go to Greece every summer. My brother came home last Christmas. I'll see you next Friday. I leave school this year. The party is tomorrow evening. The group set off yesterday morning. B In time or on time? IN TIME ON TIME In time means 'early enough'. We'll have to hurry if we want to be in time for the show. We got to the airport in time to have a coffee before checking in. I was about to close the door when just in time I remembered my key. (= at the last moment) On time means 'at the right time', 'on schedule'. The plane took off on time. I hope the meeting starts on time. Rachel is never on time. She's always late. C Other uses of in We can use in for the time it takes to complete something. / did the crossword in five minutes. Could you walk thirty miles in a day'? We can also use in for a future time measured from the present. Your photos will be ready in an hour. (= an hour from now) The building will open in six weeks/in six weeks' time. 88 On Friday, etc without the 120 Exercises 1 Saying when (A) Read the information about John F. Kennedy and then answer the questions. Begin each answer with in, on or at. John F. Kennedy was born into a famous American family. His date of birth was 29 May 1917. The year 1961 saw him become the 35th President of the US. Kennedy was killed as he drove in an open car through the streets of Dallas, Texas. Friday, 22 November 1963 was a sad day for America. It was 12.30 when a gunman opened fire and shot the President dead. ► 1 2 3 When was John F. Kennedy born? On 29 May 1917. When did he become President? .................. When was he killed? ……………………. What time was he shot? ………………….. 2 Saying when (A) Mark is arranging a business meeting. Decide if you need in, on or at. If you do not need a preposition, put a cross (X). Mark: I'm sorry I was out when you called (►)/ yesterday afternoon, Alice. Look, I'm free (►)o« the fifteenth of March. Can we meet then? Alice: I'm pretty busy (1)………………next week, I'm afraid. I can't see you (2)…………Friday. Mark: I'd like to have a meeting (3) ..............this month if possible. I'll be very busy (4) …………..April. Alice: I'm going away (5) ............... Easter, so how about the week after? Shall we meet (6)............... the twenty-seventh? That's a Wednesday. Mark: I've got an appointment (7)…………. ... the morning but nothing (8)………….. the afternoon. Let's meet (9)..................Wednesday afternoon (10) .................. half past two. 3 In time or on time? (B) Put in the right phrase: in time or on time. ► If the plane is late, we won't get to Paris in time for our connecting flight. 1 We were up very early,....................................to see the sun rise. 2 How can the buses possibly run ..............................with all these traffic jams? 3 The post goes at five. I'm hoping to get this letter written ................ 4 The coach will be here at 12.13 if it's ................................. 4 In, on or at? (A-C) Complete the conversations using in, on or at. ► Andrew: You only bought that book on Saturday. Have you finished it already? Jessica: I read it in about three hours yesterday evening. 1 Vicky: Will the bank be open .................. half past nine? Daniel: Yes, it always opens absolutely ............ time. 2 Sarah: We're leaving…………….half past, and you haven't even changed. Mark: It's OK. I can easily shower and change……………. ten minutes. 3 Laura: Your mother's birthday is ................. Monday, isn't it? Trevor: Yes, I just hope this card gets there .................time. 4 Harriet: If we ever go camping again, it's going to be ………….. summer, not autumn. Mike: Never mind. We'll be home …………….two days, and then we'll be dry again. 121 For, since, ago and before FOR Mark has spent three hours playing a computer game. He's been sitting there for three hours. SINCE AGO It was two o'clock when Mark started the game. He's been playing since two o'clock. Three hours have passed since Mark and Sarah got up from the lunch table. They finished their lunch three hours ago. B For and since with the present perfect We often use for and since with the present perfect to talk about something continuing up to the present. FOR We use for to say how long something has continued. I've been waiting for forty minutes. We've known about it for two days. Melanie has been living here for a year now. SINCE We use since to say when something began, I've been waiting since ten past six. We've known about it since Monday. Melanie has been living here since last year. We can also use for with other tenses. I'm staying in England for a year. We swam for quite a long time. We can often leave out for (but not from some negative sentences). We've had this car (for) six months. I haven't seen Vicky for a day or two. C Ago with the past We can use the adverb ago to talk about a past time measured from the present. Six months ago means six months before now. I passed my driving test six months ago. NOT since six months Vicky wrote to the company weeks ago. David first met Melanie a long time ago. Have you seen Emma? ~ Yes, just a few minutes ago. We put ago after the phrase of time, NOT ago-six months D Before with the past perfect We use before (not ago) with the past perfect, e.g. had done. I bought a car in August. I'd passed my driving test three months before. (= in May, three months before August) Vicky finally received a reply to the letter she had written weeks before. 121 Exercises 1 For and since (A-B) Put in for or since. Daniel: How long have you been learning English? Ilona: Well, I studied it ->for five years at school, and I've been having evening classes (1) ………………last summer. That's when I left school. Daniel: And you're staying here (2).................. three months? Ilona: That's right. I've been here (3)…………… the end of April. I'm going to London (4) .............. a week before I go home. 2 For and since (A-B) Look at the pictures and say how long people have been there. Use these phrases: at his desk, in bed, in the garden, in the shop, on the road ► 1 2 3 4 She's been in the shop for half an hour. ........................................................................................................................... … ………………………………………………………………………………….. .................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................ 3 For, since or ago? (A-C) Put in a phrase with for, since or ago. ► I got here an hour ago. ~ What! You mean you've been waiting for an hour ? 1 The phone last rang at four o'clock. ~ So you've had no calls ………………... ..? 2 I haven't been to the dentist for ten years. ~ You last went to the dentist…………………......? 3 I last saw Rachel on Monday. ~ Haven't you seen her ..................……………. ...? 4 We've had six weeks without rain. ~ Yes, it hasn't rained.................. ………………. 5 It's three years since Laura got married. ~ Really? Has she been married…………………………? 6 It's eight months since my brother had any work. ~ He lost his job........ …………………...? 7 Mrs Miles was taken ill three weeks ago. ~ You mean she's been ill……………………………, and nobody's told me! 4 Ago or before? (C-D) Put in ago or before. ► This film looks familiar. Didn't we see it at the cinema about two years ago ? 1 The road was wet when the accident happened. It had stopped raining only half an hour…………. 2 My telephone is working now. They repaired it a week .………………….. 3 A young man threw himself off this bridge last year. His girlfriend had left him two days .…………. 122 During or while? By or until? As or like? A During or while? Compare these examples. 1 often read during a meal. It happened during the night. You'll have to be quiet during the performance. During is a preposition (like in). It comes before a phrase like a meal or the night. I often read while I'm eating. It happened while they were asleep. Were there any phone calls while I was out? While is a linking word (like when). It comes before a clause, e.g. I'm eating. B By or until? Compare these examples. I'm very busy this week. I have to finish this report by Thursday. Trevor will be home by half past six. They hope to build the new bridge by next July. The post should be here by now. I'll be busy for most of this week. I won't have any time until Friday. He'll be at work until half past five. We won't have another holiday until next summer. Till is more informal than until. / slept till ten o'clock. We can use by the time or until before a clause, e.g. we arrived. There was no food left by the time we arrived. I'll wait until you're ready. See Unit 27B for the present simple after until, etc. NOT by we-arrived C As, like and as if Compare these examples. She works as a fashion model. (= She is a model.) As a beginner you simply have to learn the basics. I'm using this tin as an ashtray. We use as to talk about a job or function. She dresses like a fashion model. (= Her clothes are similar to a model's.) Mark is a good golfer, but today he played like a beginner. You look like your brother. We use like to talk about things being similar. We can also use as or like before a clause. We drive on the left here, as/like you do in Britain. Mike and Sarah are going to Paris for the weekend, as/like they did last year. Like is more informal than as before a clause. We also use as with verbs of speaking and knowing, e.g. say, know, expect. As I said before, I'm sorry. (= I'm sorry, and I said so before.) I haven't much money, as you know. (— I haven't much money, and you know it.) Rachel arrived late, as we expected. (= We expected her to arrive late, and she did.) We use as if before a clause to say how something seems. Tom looks really awful. He looks as if he's been up all night. Nick can be a difficult person. He sometimes behaves as if he's the only one with problems. 122 Exercises 1 During or while? (A) Put in during or while. ► Did you take notes during the lecture? 1 Shall we have a coffee ................. we're waiting? 2 Try not to make any noise................. the baby is asleep. 3 The fire alarm rang ................. yesterday's meeting. 4 Trevor tried to fix the shelves .................. Laura was out shopping. 2 By or until? (B) Rachel is talking to her teacher. Put in by or until. Mrs Lewis: You'll need to hand your project in (►) by the end of the week. I'd like to have it (1)................. Friday, ideally. Rachel: Well, I'm going on a three-day study trip tomorrow. I'll be away (2)…………….. Thursday. The project will probably take me (3)…………….. the middle of next week. I can't finish it (4)…………….. the end of this week. Mrs Lewis: Well, let me have it (5)……………….Wednesday of next week, please. 3 As or like? (C) Put in as or like. ► Sarah works in here. She uses this room as her study. 1 Matthew worked ......... a waiter last summer. 2 The way your sister plays the violin sounds ................. two cats fighting. 3 Do you mind using this saucer................ a plate? 4 The body sank………….. a stone to the bottom of the river. \ As or as if? (C) Put in as or as if. ► That poor dog looks as if it never gets fed. 1 Rachel failed her driving test,................... she expected. 2 Daniel spends money………….. it grows on trees. 3 We shall deliver the goods on the twenty-seventh, ................... we promised. 4 From what Emma said, it sounds…………… she and Matthew are going to get married. S While, by the time, until, as and like (A-C) Decide what to say. Use the word in brackets to join the two ideas together. ► Tell Matthew he needs to click on the box. You showed him. (like) You need to click on the box, like I showed you. 1 Tell Tom that you arrived at his flat, but he'd left, (by the time) 2 Tell your friend that Rita went to the party with Tom. Your friend predicted this, (as) 3 Tell Claire that you saw her sister. You were shopping in London, (while) 4 Tell Vicky she can keep the book. She can finish it. (until) 123 Preposition + noun, e.g. on holiday A Some useful phrases on holiday, on business, on a journey/a trip/a tour I'm travelling on business. We're on a coach tour of Europe. in cash, by cheque/credit card It's cheaper if you pay in cash. Can I pay by credit card? in writing, in pen/biro/felt-tip/ink/pencil Could you confirm that in writing? I'll write the names in pencil. on television, on the radio/the phone/the Internet / saw the programme on TV. Mark is on the phone at the moment. for sale, on the market The house next door is for sale. It's the best hi-fi on the market. on the whole, in general On the whole it's a good idea, but there are one or two problems. People in general aren't very interested in politics. in advance, up to date, out of date The company wants us to pay for the goods in advance. Oh no! My passport is out of date. These latest figures are up to date. in my opinion, from my point of view All sport is silly in my opinion. Matthew never sees things from Emma's point of view. on purpose, by mistake/chance/accident / didn't spill my drink on purpose. I pressed the wrong button by mistake. We didn't arrange to meet. We met by chance in the street. B Way and end On the way = during the journey. I'm driving into town. I'll get some petrol on the way. In the way = blocking the way. We couldn't get past because there was a parked car in the way. In the end = finally, after a long time. It took Claire hours to decide. In the end she chose a long blue dress. At the end = when something stops. We all left quickly at the end of the meeting, C Transport We use by without a/the when we talk about a means of transport. We decided to go to Brussels by train, NOT go-by the-train We can also use in and on. It'll be quicker to go in the car. Richard came on the train. Note that on foot means 'walking'. We came all the way on foot, NOT by foot BY: air, bicycle/bike, boat, bus, car, coach, ferry, helicopter, hovercraft, plane, rail, sea, ship, taxi, train, tube IN: the/my/your car, a helicopter, a taxi ON: my bicycle/bike, the boat, the bus, the ferry, the hovercraft, the plane, the ship, the train Exercises 1 Preposition + noun (A-B) Put in by, from, in or on. ► There's something I want to listen to on the radio. 1 They've promised me more money, but I haven't got it………….. writing. 2 Why can't you look at the problem………….. my point of view? 3 Would you mind moving? You're rather…………….the way here. 4 I rang the wrong number………….. mistake. 5 I booked our seats more than a month............. …. advance. 6 Sarah's mobile phone was stolen while she was away …………. a business trip. 7 Could you be quiet for a minute, please? I'm………… ... the phone. 8 We've had a few nice days, but …………. general it's been a poor summer. 9 I was lucky. I found the solution ............... accident. 10 It's a long journey. Let's stop somewhere ………….. the way and have a meal. 11 I spent ages looking for a phone box. …………. the end I found one. 12 Are you here .............holiday or.................. business? 2 Preposition + noun (A-B) What would you ask? Use the word in brackets with the correct preposition. You may also need to use the or your. ► Ask if you can book a cabin before you travel, (advance) Can / book a cabin in advance ? 1 Ask if you can pay in notes, (cash) Can................................................................................................................................... 2 Ask if the information is current, (date) Is ............................................................................ 3 Ask your friend if he dropped the ball deliberately, (purpose) Did …………………………………………………………………………………………... 4 Ask if there is anything to watch tonight, (television) Is ………………………………………………………………………………………………... 5 Ask your teacher if he or she will be here on the last day of July, (end) Will .................................................................................................................................. 6 Ask Melanie if she thinks nuclear power is a good idea, (opinion) Is ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Ask Nick if he is selling his car. (sale) Is .................................................................................................................................... 8 Ask Sarah if she approves of the plan in general, (whole) Do ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3 Transport (C) Complete the conversation. Put in by, in or on. Sarah: It's a long way to Glasgow. Why don't you go (►) on the train? Mark: I don't know. I think I'd rather go (1)......... ………car. Sarah: How far is your hotel from the station? Mark: Oh, it's only five minutes (2) ……………..... foot, but with all my luggage, I'd probably go (3) …………. a taxi. Sarah: Well, why not? It's less tiring going (4) …………….train, isn't it? Mark: I could go (5) ……………. air. That would be quickest. 124 Noun + preposition, e.g. trouble with A Introduction Read this true story about a prison escape. Prisoners at a jail in Iowa in the US were trying to think of a way of escaping. At last they found an answer to their problem. They told the governor about their interest in drama and their need for creative activities. They put in a request for some tunnel-digging equipment for a play about coalminers. They knew that the governor felt sympathy for his prisoners and wanted a good relationship with them, but they weren't surprised when he said no. But later, when the prisoners mentioned the importance of physical fitness, the governor agreed to let them use a trampoline. Their skill at trampolining was put to good use when six prisoners bounced over the prison wall and escaped. Some nouns can have a preposition after them, e.g. way of, answer to, interest in. The preposition often has a phrase with a noun after it. the answer to the problem their interest in drama And the preposition can sometimes have an ing-form after it. a way of escaping their skill at trampolining B Noun + preposition Here are some more examples. your ability in maths a cheap alternative to leather an attack on the government my attitude to/towards him a belief in God the cause of the accident the cost of living some damage to the car a difficulty over/with visas an example of this some experience of selling an expert on computers no hope of winning an invitation to a party some knowledge of Italian a lack of money something the matter with you a new method of storing data your opinion of the film the price of food the reason for the delay respect for the environment a student of chemistry a substitute for meat success at golf/in my search a tax on alcohol having trouble with my teeth C Connection, difference; increase, reduction, etc One thing has a link with another. a connection with another crime Matthew's relationship with Emma the contrast with yesterday's weather There is a link between two things. a connection between the two crimes the relationship between Matthew and Emma the contrast/difference between town and country Look at these words for increases and decreases. We use in before the thing that is increasing or decreasing and of before the amount of the increase or decrease. an increase/rise in the price a reduction/fall in the number of unemployed an increase/rise of £10 a reduction/fall of 3% D Need, wish, etc Nouns meaning 'need', 'wish' or 'request' can have for after them. There's a need for more houses. There was no demand for the product. Here are some examples: appetite for, application for, demand for, desire for, need for, order for, preference for, request for, taste for, wish for 124 Exercises 1 Noun + preposition (A-B) Complete the conversation. Put in at, in or of. Daniel: What's the job you've applied for? Vicky: It's with a travel company. But the advert says that you need some experience (►) of work in tourism. I haven't got that. And I don't think my knowledge (1)…………… foreign languages will be good enough. I'm having no success at all (2)…………….my attempts to get a job. Daniel: What about your interest (3)………….. computers? And your skill (4)…………… typing? That's the sort of thing employers are looking for. 2 Noun + preposition (A-B) Complete the sentences. Use a preposition after these nouns: answer, cause, damage, difficulty, invitation, matter, tax, way ► I've had an invitation to Laura's barbecue. 1 The accident caused some .............................................. the car. 2 I'm trying to think of the best ................................................ getting this piano upstairs. 3 I can't think of an .............................................. the problem, I'm afraid. 4 The .............................................. the accident is still unknown. 5 The government has introduced a new ......................................... luxury goods. 6 Unfortunately there was some ................................................. the arrangements. 7 The television won't come on. What's the ................................................ it? 3 Noun + preposition (B-C) Complete the advertisement for a supermarket. Put in between, for, in, of or with. Why not shop at Greenway Supermarket? You'll find the cost (►) of your weekly shopping is much lower. There's quite a contrast (1)................................ other stores. Here's one example (2)................................. this: from today many of our products have a price reduction (3) ………………………. five per cent! But this is not the only reason (4)………………………. Greenway's success. We're proud of our good relationship (5) ……………………… our customers. We believe there is simply no substitute (6) .............................. quality. And there is no lack (7) ………………………. choice at Greenway. That's the difference (8) ……………………… Greenway and ordinary stores. 4 Noun + preposition (A-D) What are they saying? Read about each situation and complete the sentence. ► A motorist has rung the garage and requested a breakdown truck. Mechanic: I've just had a request for a breakdown truck. 1 Claude can answer all the quiz questions. Claude: I can tell you the ................................................................................. 2 Matthew doesn't know any French. Matthew: Unfortunately I have no …………………………………………….. 3 The Prime Minister greatly desires progress. Prime Minister: I have a great ............................................................................. 4 Vicky thinks the two colours are the same. Vicky: I can't see any............................................................................................... 5 Most people say they prefer Zedco products. Zedco: Most people express a ........................................................................ 125 Adjective + preposition, e.g. proud of A Introduction Matthew: Emma: Matthew: Emma: Why are you angry with me, Emma? I'm tired of talking to myself. You never listen. I get annoyed at the way you behave. Sorry, but I have to go now or I'll be late for the basketball game. You aren't interested in us, are you? You never worry about our relationship, do you? Some adjectives can have a preposition after them, e.g. angry with, tired of, late for. The preposition often has a phrase with a noun or pronoun after it. annoyed at the way you behave late for the game angry with me The preposition can sometimes have an ing-form after it. tired of talking to myself B Feelings Here are some examples of adjective + preposition which are to do with feelings. afraid of the dark amazed at/by the changes ashamed of myself bored with doing nothing disappointed with/about the poor figures eager for action excited about the holiday fed up with waiting fond of my sister happy about/with the arrangements keen on sport nervous of flying proud of our work satisfied with the result shocked at/by the violence surprised at/by the reaction tired of housework worried about money Compare these examples. I'm sorry about the mistake. We were angry at/about the delay. We were annoyed at/about the delay. I was pleased about winning. Vicky is anxious about her exam. I feel sorry for poor Melanie. Sarah was angry with Henry. Emma was annoyed with Matthew. The winner was pleased with himself. People are anxious for news. C Good, bad, etc To talk about a person's ability, we use good at, bad at, etc. good at tennis brilliant at crosswords bad at games hopeless at cooking To talk about whether something makes you healthy or ill, we use good for and bad for. Oranges are good for you. Smoking is bad for you. For behaviour towards another person, we use good to, kind to, nice to, polite to and rude to. My friends have been good to me. You were very rude to the waitress. D Other adjectives Here are some more expressions with other adjectives. accustomed to the noise aware of the facts capable of looking after myself different from our usual route (see page 381) famous for her film roles fit for work full of water guilty of murder involved in a project prepared for action ready for the big day 71 Afraid, anxious, ashamed, interested, sorry 72 Used to responsible for running a business safe from attack the same as before similar to my idea typical of David used to the traffic 125 Exercises 1 Feelings (A-B) Say what these people's feelings are. Use the adjectives in brackets and a preposition. ► The children are leaving on a trip to the zoo. (excited) They're excited about the trip to the zoo. 1 Vicky doesn't like the dark, (afraid) She's …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2 Nick was watching a video, but he's going to switch it off. (bored) He's ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3 Emma is reading about computers, (interested) She's ............................................................................................................................................................. 4 Mark has just heard some news that he didn't expect, (surprised) He's .............................................................................................................................................................. 5 United have won a victory, (proud) They're ........................................................................................................................................................ 6 Olivia's children are being very silly, (annoyed) She's ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7 The Zedco staff don't think their pay increase is big enough, (not satisfied) …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2 Good, bad, etc (C) Complete the conversation. Put in at, for or to. Sarah: You were very rude (►) to Henry when you said he needs to lose weight. Claire: Well, it's true. Exercise would be good (1)………… . him. He started jogging and then gave it up. Sarah: Yes, but we can't all be good (2)................ taking physical exercise. Claire: Anyone can do a bit of jogging. You don't have to be brilliant (3)…………… it. And eating so much must be bad (4) ............... you. Sarah: Well, you could have been more polite. Claire: Sorry. I'm not very good (5)................. saying the right thing. I'll try to be nice (6) .............him next time I see him. 3 Other adjectives (A, D) Complete these paragraphs from a letter Emma has received from her brother. Use these adjectives and put a preposition after each one: aware, different, famous, full, interested, late, ready, responsible, similar, used Everything was strange here at first because this new job is (►) different from any I've had before. But I've got (►) used to it now, and I'm really enjoying it. I'm mainly (1)………………………………………. controlling the costs of the project. The work is quite hard, and I must say I feel (2)……………………………………… a holiday. The company expect people to do overtime. I wasn't (3) ....... ………………………… that before I arrived because they hadn't told me at the interview, but I don't mind. I've got a nice flat, which is very (4) .............................................. the one I had in London. The only difference is that my flat here is (5) ............................................. horrible old furniture. I keep falling over it! I live right by the harbour. It's a pity I've never been (6) ………………………………………… boats, because this is a good place for sailing. The noise of the motor boats wakes me up every morning, so I'm never (7) ………………………......................work. The area is (8) ...........…………………….. its seafood, which is great, because I love eating fish, as you know. TEST 21 Prepositions (Units 118-125) Test 21A Write the sentences correctly. ► I'll see you at Monday. I'll see you on Monday. 1 The doctor has been working since twelve hours. 2 We had a great time in the disco. 3 The woman was getting from the car. 4 The players had-numbers at their shirts. 5 The new manager takes over at two weeks' time. 6 Anna drove at the garage to get some -petrel. 7 We were sitting -in the back of the room. Test 21B Read Polly's postcard and write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. Sometimes more than one answer is correct. This is our first real holiday (►) for ages, and I'm enjoying it tremendously. I love being (1)…………… an island. We arrived here almost a week (2) …………, and I can't believe the time is going so fast. We finally completed the journey here (3) ……………..Friday evening (4)………… about eleven o'clock. The journey wasn't too bad, but we had to wait ages (5) ................. the airport for our flight. Our apartment here is fine. It's (6)................. the top floor. The beach isn't far away- we can walk there (7)…………… five minutes. The only problem is that we have to get (8)…………….a busy main road, which can be difficult. We don't do much (9) …………the day, but we go out every evening. Last night's disco went on very late, and today we slept (10)................. eleven. Test 21C Some of these sentences are correct, and some have a word which should not be there. If the sentence is correct, put a tick (V). If it is incorrect, cross the unnecessary word out of the sentence and write it in the space. ? The cat was sitting on top of the shed. V ? Coventry is near by Birmingham. by 1 Luckily our train arrived on the time. 2 People were running away from the gunman 3 It sounds as if the company is in trouble. 4 The car was in the front of a bus. 5 There's a meeting on next Tuesday. 6 Lisa drew a plan on the back of an envelope 7 I'll be exhausted by the time I get home. Test 21D Decide which word is correct. ► I saw a really funny programme on television. 1 You can see all the information .…………. the screen. 2 Are these pictures ............. … sale? 3 Could you let me know …………. Friday at the latest? 4 The audience clapped …………...the end of the show. 5 I've lived here ............ last year. 6 What's the matter ……… ….. your car? 7 We could see the balloon high …………... the town. 8 There was a fall …………... ten per cent in prices. 9 The house was burgled .…………. we were out. 10 What's the difference …………. a boat and a ship? 11 Rupert's new car looks more …………. an aeroplane. 12 We're all bored .……….. this game. 13 I can't find my keys. I had them a minute …………… 14 We get lots of requests ................ help. 15 The babysitter will stay there ………… we get home. 16 I'm going to be late …………. the meeting. 17 We do most of our business ………..summer. 18 The job is similar …………. my old one. a) at b) from c) in d) on a) at b) in c) inside d) on a) at b) for c) in d) to a) by b) to c) up to d) until a) at b) for c) in d) to a) after b) by c) for d) since a) by b) for c) on d) with a) above b) on c) onto d) up a) at b) by c) in d) of a) at b) during c) time d) while a) between b) from c) under d) with a) as b) like c) near d) similar a) about b) at c) for d) with a) ago b) before c) behind d) back a) at b) for c) of d) on a) by b) for c) to d) until a) at b) for c) in d) to a) along b) at c) in d) on a) as b) at c) to d) with Test 21E Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► This is the Glasgow train, (going) This train is going to Glasgow. 1 Scott is a resident of Washington, (lives) 2 I'm travelling to Italy as part of my job. (business) 3 Friday morning is a busy time for me. (I'm) 4 They started playing an hour ago. (been) 5 Jonathan can play tennis very well, (good) 6 I'm rather busy now. (moment) 7 We took a plane to Budapest, (air) 8 Nigel passes the newsagent's every day. (goes) 9 The company is planning to reduce the workforce, (reduction) 10 We got to our guest-house early enough for a meal, (time) 126 Prepositional verbs, e.g. wait for A Introduction A prepositional verb is a verb + preposition. I'm waiting for you. The dog belongs to our neighbours. The preposition always goes before the object. NOT I'm waiting you for. In questions the preposition usually goes at the end of the sentence (see Unit 38). Who are you waiting for? Some verbs can go with a number of different prepositions. I'm looking at these photos. They're really good. I'm looking for my ticket. I can't find it anywhere. I'm looking after the children while their parents are out. The police are looking into the matter. B Some common prepositional verbs Here are some more examples. Yes, I agree with you. Tom's neighbours apologized for the noise. I approve of the new scheme. I think it's a good idea. Have you applied for the job? The patient asked for a glass of water. Do you believe in God? I'm sorry, but I don't care about your problems. Lots of people care for elderly relatives. (= look after) / didn't care for the film. (= like) Please concentrate on your work. The US consists of fifty states. I can deal with any enquiries. Claire finally decided on a holiday in Turkey. Whether we go out will depend on the weather. I feel like a drink. (= want) Everyone laughed at the joke. I was listening to the radio. Did you pay for the coffee? You can't rely on the weather forecast. I'll see to the matter at once. Vicky suffers from headaches. We do not normally use a preposition after these verbs: answer, approach, control, demand, enter, expect, leave, reach, request The President is entering the building, NOT He is entering into the building. C About, of and to We can use about after many verbs. Here are some of them: ask, complain, dream, enquire, hear, know, learn, protest, speak, talk, think, wonder Did you hear about the accident? Mark was talking about golf. We do not use about after discuss. We discussed the problem, NOT We discussed about the problem. Note the meaning of dream of, hear of and think of. I'd never tell you a lie. I wouldn't dream of it. Who's Ron Mason? ~ I don't know. I've never heard of him. Did you like the play? What did you think of it? We can apologize to, complain to, talk to and write to a person. I'm writing to my sister. We talked to Natasha about classical music. We do not use to after phone. I'm phoning the office, NOT I'm phoning to the office. 70 Verb + preposition + ing-form 126 Exercises 1 Prepositions with look (A) Complete the conversation between Laura and her friend Olivia. Put in after, at, far and into. Laura: Did you say you were looking (►)for an au pair? Olivia: Yes, I was just looking (1) ............this advertisement. We need someone to look (2)………………. our children. Laura: Do you have to pay an au pair? Olivia: I'm not sure. I'll have to look (3)………………..how it all works. 2 Some common prepositional verbs (B) This is part of a letter that Melanie has received from an old friend. Put in these verbs and add a preposition after each one: agree, applied, ask, care, caring, concentrate, decided, pay, suffering I'm working in a hospital now. I (►) applied for a nurse's job last July and started in August. I don't earn much money, and I even had to (1)………………………… my uniform out of my own money. Perhaps I should (2) ………………………….. a pay rise. But I don't really (3)…………………………. the money. The work is the important thing. Of course it's very hard work (4) …………………………. the patients, and at the moment I'm (5) …………………………. backache. But 1 knew it would be like this when I (6)………………………..a career in nursing. I just try to forget all the problems and (7)…………………………the job. I think it's a worthwhile thing to do, and I'm sure you (8)………………………….me. 3 Some common prepositional verbs (B) Put in the verbs and add a preposition if necessary. Mark and Sarah had accepted an invitation to Mike and Harriet's party. Sarah had to stay late at work to (►)see to (see) one or two things. Her boss really (1) ........…………………(relies) her. It's usually Sarah who (2)………………… ........... (deals) all the little problems. Sarah didn't really (3) ………………………….. (feel) going to a party but thought she ought to keep Mark company. She decided to go straight to the party instead of going home first. She (4)………………………………(reached) the house just after nine. Mark was sitting in his car outside waiting for her. He was (5) …………………………. (listening) the radio. Sarah (6)………………………… (apologized) being late. At the party Mark talked to a strange woman who (7)……………………………(believed) ghosts. Sarah met a man who kept (8)………………………… (laughing) his own jokes. She managed to get away from him but couldn't avoid a woman who wanted to (9)…………………………. (discuss) house prices. Mark and Sarah (10)………………………… (left) the party early and drove home feeling exhausted. 4 About, of and to (C) Complete the conversation. Put in about, of or to. David: Did you hear about my experience at the Quick Burger cafe? Harriet: No. And I've never heard (►)of the Quick Burger cafe. David: Oh, it's near the station. I was just talking (1)…………… Melanie about it. They took at least twenty minutes to bring me a burger. I don't call that quick. I complained (2) . … … … … . . the waitress, and she poured a can of cola over me. Harriet: Really? She must have had a bad day. David: The manager wasn't there, so I've written (3)…………….. him to complain (4)…………… the service. It was terrible. I wouldn't go there if I were you. Harriet: I wouldn't dream (5)…………….. going there. I hate those burger places. 127 Verb + object + preposition A Introduction We can use some verbs in the structure: verb + object + preposition. VERB OBJECT PREPOSITION People admired Cleopatra for The trees protect the garden from her beauty. the wind. In the passive, the preposition comes after the verb. Cleopatra was admired for her beauty. The garden is protected from the wind. B Verb + object + preposition Here are some more examples. Tom accused Nick of cheating at cards. Can 1 add something to your list? You should never aim/point a gun at someone. The player was arrested/punished for hitting an opponent. Let's ask someone for directions. The passengers blamed/criticized the airline for the delay. I'll have to borrow the money from my parents. If you compare these figures with/to last year, you can see the improvement. 1 congratulated Andrew on his excellent exam results. Melanie cut/divided/split the pudding into four portions. The cameras discourage/prevent motorists from speeding. You should insure your camera against theft. It might get stolen. Harriet has invited us to a party. 1 prefer hot weather to cold. I hate the cold. The hotel provided/supplied us with a packed lunch. Most people regard Picasso as a great artist. The two men robbed the woman of her savings. They stole £2,000 from her. The restaurant was full. We shared a table with a young Swedish couple. Mike doesn't spend much money on clothes. Zedco suspected one of their managers of selling commercial secrets. Don't forget to thank Tom for his help. Victor translated the letter into English. C About, of and to We can use about with tell and ask. Did I tell you about my operation? Ask your travel agent about cheap flights. With inform we can use about or of. You should inform everyone about/of the decision. Look at these examples with warn. A sign warned motorists about/of the danger, (warn of/about a danger) A sign warned motorists about the hole in the road, (warn about something that might be dangerous) With remind, there is a difference in meaning between about and of. Emma reminded me about my appointment. (= Emma told me not to forget.) Emma reminds me of my sister. (= Emma is like my sister.) We can write, describe or explain something to a person. I've written several letters to the company. The woman described her attacker to the police. 3 Give something to someone 126 Wait for, belong to, etc 127 Exercises 1 Verb + object + preposition (B) This is a sports commentary at the Olympic Games. Put in the correct prepositions, e.g. for, from. So Australia's Steve Brearley wins the gold medal ahead of Germany's Klaus Schliemann and Ivan Podorosky of Bulgaria. They're just congratulating Brearley (►) on his victory. His speed over the first kilometre split the runners (1) ................ two groups, and in the end it was a race between the three leaders. Brearley prevented Schliemann (2)…………….. overtaking him in a sprint finish. I've always regarded Brearley (3)……………... a great athlete, and look how well he's done today. I would even compare him (4)…………….. the great Emil Kristo himself. There's no doubt now that Brearley will be invited (5) ………………... . . Oslo for the next World Championships. So the Australian runner adds another medal (6)………………his collection. And Australia are doing really well in the medals table. In fact, they share second place (7)…………..... the United States. 2 Verb + object + preposition (B) People are saying some surprising things. Complete the replies using a verb + object + preposition. ► Andrew: I've bought a lot of books. I've spent £300. Emma: What? Have you really spent £300 on books ? 1 Jessica: I don't like wine. I prefer water. Daniel: I don't believe that. Do you really............................................... 2 Melanie: You heard about David's accident. Well, he's blaming Tom. Rita: But why? Why is he ................................................ 3 Henry: I gave Claire a present, but she didn't thank me. Sarah: Did you say she didn't ........................................................................................................ 4 Tom: The police say it's murder. They're accusing the head teacher. Rita: What evidence do they have? How can they ........................................................... 3 Vicky: We had no towels. The hotel didn't provide them. Rachel: Really? Why didn't they....................................................... 6 Natasha: It's my sister's wedding today, but she didn't invite me. Emma: What! Do you mean she didn't................................................................................. 7 Nick: The team won a great victory, but no one congratulated them. Trevor: Oh? And why didn't anyone............................................. 8 David: A man pointed a gun. Melanie was terrified. Harriet: You mean someone.................................................................. 13 About, of and to (C) Put in about, of or to. ► The interviewer asked Mrs Miles about her parachute jump. 1 I've told the police …………… people throwing stones at our windows. 2 That man over there reminds me ............. … someone I know. 3 The man explained …………… the court that he had some personal problems. 4 Vicky is writing a letter....................her friends in Toronto. 5 There was a poster warning young people …………… the dangers of drugs. 6 Melanie had to remind Nick .................. the money he owed her. 7 We would like to inform our customers …………. . . a number of improvements in the service we offer. 128 Phrasal verbs (1) A Introduction A phrasal verb is a verb + adverb, e.g. come in, sit down, take off. There are very many phrasal verbs in English. Here are some adverbs which are used in phrasal verbs: about, along, around, away, back, behind, by, down, forward, in, off, on, out, over, round, through, up Some of these words can also be prepositions. For prepositional verbs see Unit 126. B Understanding phrasal verbs Some phrasal verbs are easy to understand. Tom asked Melanie to come in. The man in front turned round and stared at me. The meanings are clear if you know the words come, in, turn and round. But many phrasal verbs are idiomatic. The verb + adverb has a special meaning. Fortunately the plan came off. (= succeeded) Why did you turn down such a good offer? (= refuse) I can't make out if it's a man or a woman over there. (= see clearly) Sometimes a phrasal verb has the same meaning as a one-word verb. find out — discover go back = return go on = continue leave out — omit make up = invent (a story) put off— postpone send out — distribute throw away = discard turn up — arrive The phrasal verb is usually more informal than the one-word verb. C Word order with phrasal verbs When a phrasal verb has an object, the object can go either before or after the adverb. VERB OBJECT ADVERB Melanie took her coat off. I wrote the number down. Who let the cat out? VERB OR ADVERB Melanie took off OR I wrote down OR Who let out OBJECT her coat. the number. the cat? A long object goes after the adverb. The gang have carried out a number of bank raids in the last few months. Why don't you try on that dress in the window? A pronoun (e.g. it, them) always goes before the adverb. Melanie felt hot in her coat, so she took it off. NOT She too off it. There have been a number of raids. The police know who carried them out. NOT The police know who caried out them. 128 Exercises 1 Understanding phrasal verbs (A-B) Work out the meaning of these phrasal verbs and put them in the right sentences: come back, come in, cut out, fall over, get on, give away, go away, let in, lie down, pay back, stay in, take back (Use a dictionary if you need to.) ? Hello. Nice to see you. Come in and sit down. ? I didn't have a key, but luckily someone was there to let me in. 1 Can't we go out somewhere? I don't want to ................................ all evening. 2 Could you lend me ten pounds? I'll.................you .............. on Friday. 3 The pavement is very icy. Be careful you don't 4 I was feeling so tired I had to ......................... on the bed for a while. 5 There was an article in the newspaper that I wanted to ……………………. and keep. 6 Mark's gone out, and I don't know when he's going to ................................ 7 The driver unlocked the coach so that the passengers were able to 8 I'll have to .......... these books .………… to the library. 9 Your brother was being a nuisance, so I told him to..................................... 10 In order to get publicity, the company decided to ……………………. ... some of the new sweets free to children. 2 One-word verb and phrasal verb (B) Put in a phrasal verb that means the same as the verb in brackets. Use the correct form of the phrasal verb. Rachel: I've (►) found out (discovered) what the problem is with the exam. Vicky: Oh, good. Tell me. Rachel: When they printed the papers, they (1) ……………………… (omitted) a page. No one noticed until the papers had all been (2) .......……………….. (distributed). Now they'll have to (3) ................................ (discard) all the papers and (4) ………………………. (postpone) the exam. Vicky: Are you sure you haven't (5) .................................. (invented) this whole story? Rachel: It's true, I tell you. And isn't it good news? Vicky: I don't know about that. It means we'll have to (6)…………………………(continue) revising. 13 Word order with phrasal verbs (C) Complete the sentences by putting in the phrasal verbs. Some of the spaces you have to leave empty. Sometimes more than one answer is correct. ? The sweater was full of holes, so I threw it away (threw away). ? I've put up (put up) that picture we bought last week. 1 There's always litter here. No one ever ......................... it............. .(pickup). 2 It's quite cold now. I think I'll ............................my coat……………(put on). 3 I haven't heard from Rita lately. I might........................ her ........... (ring up). 4 Daniel has to go into college to......................... his project ............. (hand in). 5 I can't remember the address. I wish I'd.......................... it …………..(writedown). 6 Nick is trying to ....................... all the money he's just lost ………… (win back). 7 I'm not going to have time to............................. these dishes ..………….. (wash up). 8 If you don't know the number, you can …………………. It……………. (look up) in the phone book. 9 There was an accident which......... …………. ... all the traffic coming into town………… (held up). 10 The words 'expect' and 'except' are so similar that I keep……………….. them …………. (mix up). 129 Phrasal verbs (2) A Everyday situations Here are some phrasal verbs in everyday situations. Come on, we're going now. Trevor dug up an old coin in the garden. You have to fill in your name and address. How did you get on in the test? I usually get up late on Sundays. I'm going out for the evening. Melanie poured tea for the guests and handed the cakes round. Hurry up. We haven't got much time. David hit his head on a lamppost and knocked himself out. Mark picked up the cassette and put it in the player. You have to plug the machine in first. I'm going to throw these old clothes away. We were too tired to wash up after the meal. Sarah woke up suddenly in the night. B Phrasal verbs and one-word verbs Here are some phrasal verbs with the same meaning as a one-word verb (see also Unit 128B). They're going to bring in a new law against drinking and driving. (= introduce) How did the argument come about? (= happen) Emma isn't speaking to Matthew. They've fallen out. (= quarrelled) We've fixed up a meeting for next Tuesday. (= arranged) Trevor gave up playing football years ago. (= stopped) / had a pain in my arm, but it's gone away. (= disappeared) We heard the bomb go off jive miles away. (= explode) The traffic was held up by road works. (= delayed) The United Nations was set up to settle conflicts peacefully. (= established) I'm trying to work out how much money I've spent. (= calculate) C Business situations Here are some examples of phrasal verbs in business situations. If we're spending too much money, we'll have to cut back. (= spend less) Our lawyers will draw up a new contract. (= write) We mustn't fall behind in the race to develop new products. (= be slower than others) The two sides were close to an agreement, but it fell through. (= didn't happen) The company fought off a takeover by ICM Computers. (= managed to stop) / tried to ring Santiago, but I couldn't get through. (= make contact) The company has laid off two hundred workers because of a lack of new orders. The computer will print out the details. The consultants put forward a proposal to reorganize the company. (= suggested) I'll get the information for you. Can I ring you back in half an hour? (= phone again) Sarah paid a visit to the client to try to sort out the difficulties. (= put right) The company boss has stepped down after ten years in charge. (= left the job) We are taking on the challenge of expanding overseas. (= accepting) Large companies sometimes take over smaller ones. (= take control of) Exercises 1 Phrasal verbs in everyday situations (A) Look at the pictures and say what is happening. Use these phrasal verbs: dig up, pick up, plug in, throw away, wash up Use these objects: the armchair, litter, the plates, the road, the television ► They're throwing the armchair away. 1. ……………………………………………….. 3 ………………………………………….. 2. ……………………………………………….. 4 .................................................................... Phrasal verbs and one-word verbs (B) Rewrite the sentences replacing each underlined verb with a phrasal verb. ► We're trying to arrange a holiday together. We're trying to fix up a holiday together.Nick says he's stopped smoking. 1 How did the accident happen? 2 I think Matthew and Emma have quarrelled. i The problem isn't going to just disappear. 5 The government is introducing a new tax on computers. 6 Zedco want to establish a new sales office in Germany. Business situations (C) Complete the news article about Zedco. Put in these words: fallen behind, fell through, fight off, laying off, put forward, sort out, step down, taking over, taken on Zedco Chief Executive Barry Douglas has (►) put forward a new plan designed to (1) ……………………………………………… the company's problems. It is only twelve months since Zedco tried to strengthen its position by (2) ............................................Alpha Plastics. But the deal (3) …………………………………… ......... , and Alpha managed to (4) ..............…………………. Zedco's attempts to take control. Since then Zedco has performed poorly and has (5) ………………………………in the race for market share. Managing Director James Ironside has had to (6) ………………………………, and Barry Douglas has (7) ……………………………… the task of rescuing the company. There are fears that the new plan will mean (8)........................................ staff in order to reduce expenditure. 130 Phrasal verbs (3) Here up has the sense of 'increasing', and on has the sense of connected'. B Adverb meanings Look at these adverbs and their meanings. Remember that an adverb can have a number of different meanings. down = becoming less turn down the music bring down the cost oj living down = completely to the ground knock a house down cut down a tree down = stopping completely the car broke down a factory closing down down = on paper copy down the words write down the message note down the details off = away, departing set off on a journey jump in the car and drive off see Emma off at the station the plane took off the pain is wearing off off = disconnected switch off the heater cut off our electricity the caller rang off on = connected switch on the kettle turn on the TV leave the lights on all night on = wearing put a coat on try the sweater on on = continuing carry on working drive on a bit further hang on/hold on a minute out = away, disappearing wash out the dirt cross out a mistake blow out the candle out = to different people hand out free tickets share out the winnings out = aloud read out the article call out anxiously out = from start to finish write out the whole list work out the answer over = from start to finish check your work over think the problem over up = increasing prices are going up put up taxes speak up so we can hear up = completely eat up these chocolates fill up with petrol count up the money tear up the paper 130 Exercises i Adverb meanings (B) Look back at B and then write the meaning of the underlined words in these sentences. ► I must get these ideas down in writing. on paper 1 Daniel finished all the cake ug. 2 I'm writing in pencil so I can rub out my mistakes. 3 Vicky didn't answer. She just went on reading. 4 I'll just read over what I've written. 5 A woman in the audience shouted something out 6 The water was turned off for about an hour today. 7 Nick's aggressive manner frightens people off. 8 The company wants to keep its costs down. 9 The embassy was burnt down by terrorists. 10 Someone will have to type all these figures out. 11 Social workers were giving out soup to the hungry. 12 Luckily Zedco's sales figures are moving up again. 13 The man was tall and dark. He had a blue jacket on. 14 Business is so bad that many firms have shut down. 2 Adverb meanings (B) Put in the correct adverb. ► Melanie: Everything is so expensive. Prices seem to be going up all the time. David: Yes, and the government is supposed to be bringing inflation down. 1 Laura: Trevor: 2 Vicky: Rachel: Vicky: 3 Sarah: Mark: 4 Emma: Matthew: You shouldn't leave the television. . . ................. all night. Sorry, I forgot. I usually turn it ........................ I've written the wrong word here. Well, rub it I can't. It's in biro. I'll have to write the whole thing ……………. again. They're going to pull …………… this beautiful old build ing. I know. Some p rotesters were handing ……………. leaflets about it. Hold…………… a m i n u t e . I t h o u g h t I h e ar d s o m eo n e c a l l I th ink you mus t have imag ined it. 3 Adverb meanings (B) What are they saying? Put in the phrasal verbs. ► I'm afraid the car has broken down 1 Why don't you………………………… . this coat? 2 Look, the plane is …………………....... 3 I can't hear. Please ……………………….. 4 We're just……………………….. on holiday. 131 Verb + adverb + preposition A Simple meanings Look at these examples. So you've The old man I couldn't David decided to It was nice to We Everyone Vicky VERB ADVERB come fell get get go look looked ran in down through up out out up away PREPOSITION from on to onto into over at from the cold. the pavement. directory enquiries. the roof. the fresh air. the sea. the aeroplane. the fire. B Idiomatic meanings A verb + adverb + preposition often has a special, idiomatic meaning which isn't clear from the individual words. Look at these examples. Tom often calls in on/drops in on us without warning. (= pays short visits) You go on ahead. I'll soon catch up with you. (= reach the same place as) The police are going to clamp down on drug dealers. (= take strong action against) I'm afraid we've come up against another difficulty. (= be stopped by) Did Claire's trip come up to/live up to her expectations? (= Was it as good as she expected?) The country is crying out for a new leader. (= in great need of) We need to cut hack on our spending. (= reduce) I'm trying to lose weight. I have to cut down on puddings. (= reduce) They should do away with these useless traditions. (= abolish) You've got to face up to your responsibilities. You can't just ignore them. {- not avoid) If plan A doesn't work, we've got plan B to fall back on. (= use if necessary) I'm tired, Mark. I don't really feel up to going out. (= have enough energy for) We can't go on holiday together if your dates don't fit in with mine. (= go together with) The thief managed to get away with about £2,000 in cash. (= steal and take away) The goods are damaged. We'll have to get on to our suppliers. (= contact) You haven't packed your suitcase yet. You'd better get on with it. (= start, continue) Mark doesn't really get on with Alan. They're always arguing. (= have a good relationship with) / have lots of little jobs to do, but I can never get round to actually doing them. (= find the right time for) I can't make a promise and then go back on it, can I? (= break, fail to keep) Matthew has decided to go in for the ten-mile 'Fun Run this year. (= enter, compete in) Most of the audience had left in the interval, but the actors decided to go on with the show. (= continue) If you hold on to the rope, you'll be perfectly safe. (= keep your hands around) Daniel was walking so fast I couldn't keep up with him. (= go as fast as) I'm looking forward to the trip. (= thinking ahead with pleasure about) If you're going barefoot, look out for/watch out for broken glass. (= be careful about) I got some money from the insurance company, but nothing could make up for losing my wedding ring. (= compensate for) I'm not going to put up with this nonsense. (= tolerate) We've run out of milk, I'm afraid. (= We have none left.) Are you going to send away for your free gift? (= write to ask for) 131Exercises 1 Simple meanings (A) Put in these words: away from, down on, in from, out into, through to, up at, up onto ► To reach the light bulb, Trevor had to get up onto the table. 1 Nick hurt himself when he was skating. He fell ........................ . the ice. 2 It was a very long tunnel, but we finally came .................................... the sunshine. 3 Wondering if it was going to rain, Vicky looked ............................. the clouds. 4 People were running ................................... the gunman as fast as they could. 5 I'm trying to phone my secretary, but I can't get.................................... the office. 6 When I've come................................ the cold, I just want to sit by the fire. 2 Idiomatic meanings (B) Put in a verb + adverb + preposition which means the same as the expression in brackets. ► I'm afraid this product doesn't live up to (be as good as) the claims made in the advertisement. 1 I'll just call at the garage. I don't want to........... (have none left) petrol. 2 If you want a catalogue, I'll .............................................. (write to ask for) one. 3 We'd better ........................................... (be careful about) sheep in the road. 4 1 ....... (think ahead with pleasure about) seeing you again soon, Emma. 5 The teacher was dictating so fast we couldn't................................................ (go as fast as) her. 6 Why should we have to ........................................... (tolerate) this awful noise? 7 It's half past twelve. I'd better .............................................(start) making lunch. 8 Do you think the committee will ......................................... (change) their earlier decision? 9 There was a problem with the cheque, so I decided to ................................... (contact) my bank immediately. 10 I always like to ………………… .....................(enter) quiz competitions. 11 I'm trying to.................………………. .....(reduce) the amount of coffee I drink. 12 I might lose my job. And I haven't got any savings to ………………………….. (use if necessary). 13 I've been meaning to reply to Rachel's letter, but I haven't managed to ................................. (find the right time for) it yet. 14 An apology alone cannot ...............................(compensate for) all the inconvenience. ] Idiomatic meanings (B) What might you say in these situations? Use the words in brackets. ► You're tired. You can't go jogging, (don't feel up) I don't feel up to jogging. 1 You like Melanie. The two of you are very friendly. (I get) 2 You might go and see David. It would be a short visit, (might drop) 3 You don't mind what you do. You'll do the same as everyone else. (I'll fit) 4 You are too slow. Matthew is too far ahead of you. (can't catch up) 5 The sunny weather is nice. Last week was terrible, (is making up) TEST 22 Verbs with prepositions and adverbs (Units 126-131) Test 22A Put the words in the right order to form a statement. ► I won't forget the titles of the books, down / I've / them / written I've written them down. 1 I'll give you the money, for I I I must / my ticket / pay 2 I have to look smart, going to / I'm / on / put / that expensive grey coat 1 bought 3 Anna rang, invited / lunch / she's / to / us 4 Peter's got the photos, at / he's / looking / them 5 I wasn't allowed to go. from / leaving / me / prevented / the police 6 This programme is boring, going to / I'm / it / off / turn Test 22 B Decide which word is correct. ► I'm not speaking to Oliver. I've fallen out with him. a) away b) back c) out d) through 1 Everyone complained ……………… the awful food. a) about b) for c) on d) over 2 You don't need this word. You should cross it a) down b) out c) over d) up 3 It's late. How much longer are you going to go ………………. working? a) along b) on c) through d) with 4 My shoes are dirty. I'd better take them .……………... before I come in. a) away b) off c) on d) up 5 The bus journey costs more now. They've put the fares .…………. _ a) down b) out c) over d) up 6 We all laughed ..................... the cartoon. a) at b) for c) on d) to 7 We'd all decided to go on holiday together, but the plan fell……………….. , I'm afraid. a) away b) back c) out d) through 8 I suppose you're being nice to make ……………… the awful way you behaved yesterday, a) away of b) down on c) in with d) up for Test 22C Write the correct sentence. ► Could you be a little quieter, please? I'm-trying-to concentrate at- my work. I'm trying to concentrate on my work. 1 You haven't answered all the questions. You've-left one-away. 2 Where is Bigbury? I've-never-heard-about it. 3 The children were frightened of the dog. They ran out of it. 4 Michelle has got the job. You must congratulate her for her success. 5 My sister is in computers. She's going to set out her own company. 6 I like Peter. He reminds me about an old school friend of mine. 7 Adrian has a suggestion. He wants to put it ahead at the meeting. Test 22 D Read the story and write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. This true story is about a policeman in New York City who had a girlfriend he cared ( ►)/(?)' very much. I don't know if you regard New York City (1)………………………… a dangerous place, but the hero of our story certainly did, and he warned his girlfriend (2) ………………………… the danger of walking the streets alone and the need to (3) ……………………….. out for muggers. But as he also believed (4)……………………………..being prepared for the worst, he bought a can of gas that would protect his girlfriend (5)…………………………. muggers. It certainly seemed worth spending a few dollars (6) ………………………….. . The idea is that you point the thing (7)……………………….. your attacker and spray him with the gas, which knocks him (8) ..................……………. . On the day he bought the gas, the policeman and his girlfriend had arranged to go (9)………………………….for the evening. So he was looking (10) ……………………….. to giving her the can later on. When he got home from work, he had a bath and then sprayed some deodorant on himself. He knew nothing more until he (11)…………………………... . . up in hospital the next day. He had picked (12)………………………. the wrong can and sprayed himself with the gas. Test 22E Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Use the word in brackets. ► I'm trying to find my diary, (looking) I'm looking for my diary. 1 You're too young to stop working, (give) 2 This bag is Janet's, (belongs) 3 Everyone continued working as usual, (carried) 4 They talked about the plan, (discussed) 5 I haven't got any money left, (run) 6 I told the police what the problem was. (explained) 7 I wouldn't tolerate such terrible conditions, (put) 8 They'll have to postpone the game, (off) 132 Direct speech and reported speech Direct speech Look at these examples of direct speech. Trevor: I'm tired. Wasn't it Greta Garbo who said, 7 want to be alone'? 'But I don't love you, Henry,' replied Claire. We can show that words are direct speech by putting them in quotation marks (''). See page 373. Sometimes the words are put after the speaker's name, in the script of a play or film, for example. In a picture we can put the words in a speech bubble. B Reported speech In reported speech we give the meaning of what was said rather than The actress Melissa Livingstone and supermarket owner Ron Mason the exact words. have announced that they are Trevor says he's tired. getting married next month. Melissa is sure they will be happy Wasn't it Greta Garbo who said that she wanted to be alone? together, she told reporters. Claire replied that she didn't love Henry. In reported speech we often change the actual words, e.g. 'I'm tired' —> he's tired. Sometimes the verb tense changes, e.g. / want —> she wanted (see Unit 134). In reporting we use verbs such as announce, answer, explain, mention, promise, reply, say, suggest, tell. warn. The most common of these are say and tell (see C). We can also report thoughts. We think the meal was expensive. Nick knew Rita wanted to be with someone else. When we report statements, we often use that, but we can sometimes leave it out. You promised (that) you wouldn't be late. Sarah was saying (that) there's a problem. C Tell or say? TELL SAY We use tell if we want to mention the hearer (the person spoken to). Sarah's boss told her she could leave early. NOT -Sarah's boss told she-could leave-early. Daniel tells me he's ready. We use tell without an indirect object (e.g. her, me) only in the expressions tell a story, tell the truth and tell a lie. When we do not mention the hearer, we use say. Sarah's boss said she could leave early. NOT Sarah's boss-said her she could leave early. Daniel says he's ready. We sometimes use to after say, especially when the words are not reported. The boss wanted to say something to Sarah. What did Matthew say to you? 132 Exercises 1 Reported speech (B) Why are these people at the doctor's? What do they say is wrong with them? ► She says she gets pains in her leg. 1 She says...................................................................... 2 He says ...................................................................... 3 ………………………………… 4 .................................................... Reported speech (B) Who said what? Match the words to the people and report what they said. If you can't match them, look at the answers at the bottom of the page. ► Mrs Thatcher a) 'All the world's a stage.' 1 Stokeley Carmichael b) 'Black is beautiful' 2 Galileo c) 'Big Brother is watching you.' 3 Shakespeare d) 'There is no such thing as society.' 4 George Orwell e) 'The earth moves round the sun.' ► Mrs Thatcher said that there is no such thing as society. 1 2 3 4 Tell or say? (C) Put in tell or say. ? All the experts say the earth is getting warmer. ? Did you tell Mark and Sarah how to find our house? 1 The Sales Manager is going to .................. everyone about the meeting. 2 Vicky, why don't you just…………… what the matter is? 3 They……………. they're going to build a new Disney World here. 4 What did Natasha…………….about her holiday plans? 5 Could you………….. me the way to the train station, please? 6 The company should……………. its employees what's going on. 7 You shouldn't……………..lies, you know, Matthew. 8 Did you …………… anything to Melanie about the barbecue? 133 Reported speech: person, place and time It's Friday afternoon. David is at Tom's flat. Tom has decided to have a party for all his friends. A few minutes later Nick has arrived at the flat. Now David is reporting what Tom said. So instead of Tom's words I'm having, David says he's having. The next day David is talking to Harriet. Now David is in a different place from where Tom first told him about the party. So instead of here, he says at his flat. And a day has passed since he first heard about it. It is now the day of the party. So instead of tomorrow evening, David says this evening. B Changes in reported speech Changes from direct speech to reported speech depend on changes in the situation. We may have to make changes when we are reporting something another person has said, or when we report it in a different place or at a different time. Here are some typical changes. Person 1 my he/she his/her Place: here there, at the flat Time: now then, at the time today yesterday tomorrow this week last week an hour ago that day, on Monday, etc the day before, the previous day the next/following day, on Saturday, etc that week the week before, the previous week an hour before/earlier 133Exercises 1 Changes in reported speech (A-B) Read what each person says and then complete the sentences. ► Vicky: Daniel told me on Friday that he'd had a job interview the previous day. Daniel had a job interview on Thursday. 1 Trevor: Laura tells me I need a haircut. ………………………………….. needs a haircut. 2 Claire: My brother told me in 1997 that he expected to become Manager the following year. Claire's brother expected that he would become Manager in ................................... 3 Alice: I wanted to see Mark in April, but he said he was very busy that month. Mark was very busy in ………………………………………………………… 4 Harriet: I saw Nick last week. He said he'd given up smoking the week before. Nick gave up smoking ................................ ago. 2 Changes of person (A-B) Put in the missing words. 3 Changes of place and time (A-B) Put in here, that day, the day before, the next day, the week before. ► Rachel (a week ago): I'm taking my driving test tomorrow. You (today): When I saw Rachel, she said she was taking her driving test the next day 1 Emma (two days ago): I've only had this new computer since yesterday. You (today): Emma said she'd only had the new computer since 2 Matthew (a week ago): I'm meeting a friend at the station later today. You (today): Matthew said he was meeting a friend at the station later 3 Mark (in the street): I'll see you in the office. You (in the office): Mark said he would see me 4 Sarah (a month ago): The conference was last week. You (today): Sarah told me the conference had taken place 134 Reported speech: the tense change A When do we change the tense? After a past-tense verb (e.g. said), there is often a tense change. 'It really is cold today.' —> Vicky said it was cold. If the statement is still up to date when we report it, then we have a choice. We can either leave the tense the same, or we can change it. You said you like/liked chocolate. Claire told me her father owns/owned a racehorse. Sarah said she's going/she was going to Rome in April. We can say that Sarah is going to Rome because it is still true that she will go there. If the statement is no longer up to date, then we change the tense. Claire once told me that her father owned a racehorse. (He may no longer own one.) Sarah said she was going to Rome in April (Now it is May.) Now Sarah's trip is over, so it is no longer true that she is going to Rome. We usually change the tense if we think the statement is untrue or may be untrue. You said you liked chocolate, but you aren't eating any. The Prime Minister claimed that the government had made the right decision. B Is -> was, like -> liked, etc Look at these examples of the tense change. DIRECT SPEECH REPORTED SPEECH Andrew is working.' 'The windows aren't locked.' 'I've fixed the shelves.' 'Ifs been raining.' 'We've got plenty of time.' 'We like the flat.' Jessica said Andrew was working. Mark told me the windows weren't locked. Trevor said he'd fixed the shelves. We noticed it had been raining. Rachel insisted they had plenty of time. The'couple said they liked the flat. If the verb phrase is more than one word (e.g. is working), then the first word changes, e.g. is workings* was working, have fixed had fixed, don't know ~* didn't know. If the verb is already in the past tense, then it can stay the same or change to the past perfect. 'We came by car.' They said they came/they had come by car. 'Sorry. I wasn't listening! / admitted I wasn't listening/hadn't been listening. If the verb is past perfect, it stays the same. 'My money had run out' Daniel said his money had run out. C Modal verbs: can -► could, etc Can, may and will change to could, might and would. 'You can sit over there.' The steward said we could sit here. 'I may go to Bali again.' Claire said she might go to Bali again. 'I'll help if you like.' Tom said he would help. Could, might, ought to, should and would stay the same. But must can change to have to. 'Sarah would love a holiday.' 'I must finish this report.' Mark thought Sarah would love a holiday. Sarah said she must finish/had to finish the report. 134 Exercises 1 When do we change the tense? (A) Put in is or was. Sometimes both are possible. ? I heard today that the house is for sale. I wonder who will buy it. ? I saw David yesterday. He said he was on his way to visit his sister. 1 This wallet is made of plastic not leather. Why did you tell me it…………….leather? 2 We had to hurry yesterday morning. Just as we arrived at the station, we heard an announcement that the train..................about to leave. 3 I saw Emma just now. She said her tooth ............still aching. 4 I'm surprised Matthew lost. I thought he ………….. much better at tennis than Daniel. 5 When he spoke to reporters yesterday, Mr Douglas said that Zedco …………… now in a much better financial position. 2 The tense change (B) Complete the replies. The second speaker is surprised at what he or she hears. ► Matthew: Emma and I are getting married. Rachel: Really? But you said last week you weren't getting married. ► Rita: I like pop music more than classical music. Laura: I'm sure you told me you liked classical music best. 1 Vicky: I haven't finished my project. Emma: Haven't you? I thought you said ............................................................. ! Rachel: I'm on a diet. Natasha: But you told me ................................................................................. …… i Andrew: I enjoy parties. Daniel: Surely I remember you saying ................................................................... 1 Matthew: I'm applying for the job. Rachel: I thought you told me............................................................................... 3 The tense change (B-C) A comedy show called 'Don't Look Now!' has just closed after five years in London's West End. Here's what the critics said when it opened five years ago. ? ? 1 2 3 'It's a marvellous show.' The Daily Mail 'You'll love it.' The Guardian 'The production is brilliant.' The Sunday Times '1 can't remember a funnier show.' Edward Devine 'It made me laugh.' Robert Walsh Now report what the critics said. ? The Daily Mail said it was a marvellous show. ? The Guardian said people would love it. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 5 6 1 8 'You must see it.' The Evening Standard 'It will be a great success.' The Telegraph 'You might die laughing.' The Express 'It's the funniest show I've ever seen.' Susan Proctor 'You shouldn't miss it.' Time Out 135 Reported questions A Wh-questions We can report questions with verbs like ask, wonder or want to know. Look first at these wh-questions. DIRECT QUESTION 'When did you start acting, Melissa?' 'What's the time?' 'Which way is the post office?' How can we find out?' 'Where can we eat?' REPORTED QUESTION Guy asked Melissa when she started acting. I just asked what the time is. Someone wants to know which way the post office is. I was wondering how we can find out. They're asking where they can eat. Wh-questions have a word like when, what, which or how both in direct speech and in reported speech. B Yes/no questions DIRECT QUESTION 'Has the taxi arrived yet?' ~ 'No, not yet' 'Can we take photos?' ~ 'Yes, of course.' 'Is there a cafe nearby?' ~ 'No.' REPORTED QUESTION Someone was wondering if/whether the taxi has arrived yet. The visitors want to know if/whether they can take photos. Daniel asked if/whether there was a cafe nearby. Reported yes/no questions have if or whether. Word order In a reported question the subject comes before the verb, as in a statement. Guy asked Melissa when she started acting. NOT Guy asked-Melissa-when did she start acting. Someone was wondering if the taxi has arrived yet. NOT Someone was wondering if has the taxi arrived yet. Asking for information To ask politely for information, we sometimes use a reported question after a phrase like Could you tell me ... ? or Do you know ... ? Could you tell me what time the concert starts? Do you know if there's a public phone in the building? Have you any idea how much a taxi would cost? Note the word order a taxi would cost (see C). The tense change: is —► was, etc In reported speech there are often changes to the tense, to pronouns and so on. This depends on changes to the situation since the words were spoken. For details see Units 133 and 134. Here are some examples of the tense change. 'Whafs the problem?' 'How much money have you got, Vicky?' 'Does Nick need a lift?' 'Can you type?' We asked what the problem was. I was wondering how much money Vicky had. Tom asked if Nick needed a lift. They asked me if I could type. 135 Exercises Reported questions (A-C) These people are at the tourist information centre. What do they want to know? ? ? 1 2 3 4 She wants to know what the most interesting sights are. He wants to know if the centre has got a town plan. ……………………………………………………….…. ……………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………... ............................................................................................ Asking for information (D) You need information. Ask for it using Could you tell me ... ? or Do you know . . . ? ► Where are the toilets? (tell) Could you tell me where the toilets are? 1 Can I park here? (know) 2 How long does the film last? (tell) 3 How often do the buses run? (know) 4 Are we allowed to smoke? (know) 5 What time is the flight? (tell) 6 How much does a ticket cost? (tell) The tense change (E) Barry Douglas, Zedco Chief Executive, is talking to a reporter about his business career. He can still remember his first job interview after Interviewer: leaving school. ? 'Where do you live?' Barry: ? 'Have you worked before?' The interviewer asked me where I lived. She 1 'Why do you want the job?' asked me if I had worked before. She wanted 2 'How did you hear about it?' to know I remember she asked 3 'Are you fit?' She wondered 4 'Can you work on Saturdays?' Then she asked me She 5 'How will you travel to work?' wanted to know And she 6 'Have you got a bicycle?' asked me She also asked 7 'How much do you hope to earn?' And finally she asked 8 'When can you start?' 136 Reported requests, offers, etc A Reported orders and requests We can use the structure tell/ask someone to do something. DIRECT SPEECH 'Please move this car.' 'You really must be careful! 'Would you mind turning the music down?' REPORTED SPEECH A policeman told me to move the car. Melanie is always telling David to be careful. We asked our neighbours to turn the music down. The negative is tell/ask someone not to do something. 'You mustn't leave the door unlocked! 'Please don't wear those boots in the house.' Mr Atkins told Mark not to leave the door unlocked. 1 asked you not to wear those boots in the house. We can also use the structure ask to do something. 'Can I see your ticket, please?' The inspector asked to see my ticket. We use ask for when someone asks to have something. 'Can I have some brochures, please?' I asked (the travel agent) for some brochures. It is also possible to report an order or request like this. A policeman told me (that) I had to move the car. We asked our neighbours if they would mind turning the music down. B Reported offers, suggestions, etc We can use agree, offer, promise, refuse and threaten with a to-infinitive. DIRECT SPEECH 'We'll pay for the damage! 'I'll definitely finish it by the end of next week! REPORTED SPEECH We offered to pay for the damage. You promised to finish the work by the end of this week. We can also use an object + to-infinitive after advise, invite, remind and warn. 7 think you should take a taxi! 'Don't forget to ring me! Mark advised us to take a taxi. 1 reminded David to ring me. We can use an ing-form after admit, apologize for, insist on and suggest. 7 really must have a rest! 'Shall we go to a nightclub?' Emma insisted on having a rest. Claire suggested going to a nightclub. C Admit that, insist that, etc We can use a clause with that after admit, advise, agree, insist, promise, remind, suggest and warn. Trevor admitted (that) he had forgotten the shopping. Claire insisted (that) we all went round to her flat for coffee. You promised (that) you would finish the work by the end of this week. I warned you (that) Nick's dog is very fierce. 62 Verb + to-infinitive/ing-form 65 Verb + object + to-infinitive 136 Exercises 1 Tell/ask someone to do something (A) Trevor isn't feeling very happy. Everyone has been telling him what to do. Report the orders and requests. ► His mother: Can you dig my garden, please, Trevor? His mother asked him to dig her garden. 1 The doctor: You must take more exercise. 2 His boss: Would you mind not playing computer games in the office? 3 A traffic warden: You can't park your car in the High Street. 4 Laura: Could you put some shelves up, please, Trevor? 2 Reported offers, suggestions, etc (B) Complete the sentences. Report what was said. ? ? 1 2 3 4 5 6 Sarah invited Claire to stay for lunch. Tom agreed not to talk about football. Matthew advised ................................................................................ Mike apologized .............................................................................. Tom suggested ……………………………………………………… Rachel reminded................................................................................. Mr Atkins admitted ........................................................................ Trevor warned.................................................................................... Admit that, insist that, etc (C) Combine each pair of sentences using that. ► The roads were dangerous. The police warned us. The police warned us that the roads were dangerous. 1 Everything will be ready on time. The builders have promised. 2 We have to check the figures carefully. The boss insists. 3 Tom's story wasn't completely true. He's admitted it. i Emma's train was about to leave. Matthew reminded her. TEST 23 Reported speech (Units 132-136) Test 23A Some of these sentences are correct, and some have a word which should not be there. If the sentence is correct, put a tick (/). If it is incorrect, cross the unnecessary word out of the sentence and write it in the space. ? You promised you wouldn't be late. / ? Susan thought 'That I can't understand what's happening.' that 1 Do you know me what time the coach leaves? 2 Robert wanted to know if did the price included breakfast. 3 Anna insisted on showing us her photos. 4 Someone asked us whether that we had eaten lunch. 5 Nancy told me she had started the job the week before. 6 Nigel said me he wanted to come with us. 7 My friend said she did liked her new flat. 8 Martin asked us for not to wake the baby. Test 23 B Decide which word is correct. ► What did that man say to you? a) at you b) for you c) to you d) you 1 I rang my friend in Australia yesterday, and she said it………………….. raining there. a) is b) should be c) to be d) was 2 The last time I saw Jonathan, he looked very relaxed. He explained that he'd been on holiday the…………. .......... week. a) earlier b) following c) next d) previous 3 I wonder…………………. the tickets are on sale yet. a) what b) when c) where d) whether 4 I told you…………………. switch off the computer, didn't I? a) don't b) not c) not to d) to not 5 Someone………………. .....me there's been an accident on the motorway. a) asked b) said c) spoke d) told 6 When I rang Tessa some time last week, she said she was busy…………………… day. a) that b) the c) then d) this 7 When he was at Oliver's flat yesterday, Martin asked if he………………….. use the phone. a) can b) could c) may d) must 8 Judy ........................ going for a walk, but no one else wanted to. a) admitted b) offered c) promised d) suggested Test 23C Read the news report and write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. Sometimes there is more than one possible answer. Police have warned people (►) to watch out for two men who have tricked their way into an old woman's home and stolen money. The men called on Mrs Iris Raine and said (1)…………………….. ... were from the water company and wanted to check (2) ...........…………… ... her water was OK. They asked if (3) ……………………… would mind letting them into her house. The woman didn't ask (4) ............................... see their identity cards. She said she (5) …………………….. . know about any problem with the water. The men explained that they (6)………………………… just discovered the problem but that it was very simple and (7) ………………………… take long to check. The woman asked (8)………………………… the service was free, and they said yes. They (9)………………………… to know where the water tank was. While one man ran water in the kitchen, the other went upstairs and took several hundred pounds from a drawer in a bedroom. The men then left saying that they would return the ( 1 0 ) … … … … … … … … … . day to have another look. Test 23D Complete each sentence by reporting what was said to you yesterday. Use said and change the tense in the reported speech. ► Polly: I'm really tired. When I saw Polly yesterday, she said she was really tired. 1 Tessa: I feel quite excited. When I saw Tessa yesterday, . 2 Nigel: I can't remember the code word. When I saw Nigel yesterday, 3 Robert: I won't be at the next meeting. When I saw Robert yesterday, 4 The twins: We've got a problem. When I saw the twins yesterday, 5 Michelle: I've been swimming. When I saw Michelle yesterday, 6 Your friends: We would like to be in the show. When I saw my friends yesterday, 7 Adrian: I don't need any help. When I saw Adrian yesterday, . 8 Susan: My sister is coming to see me. When I saw Susan yesterday, Test23E Report the sentences. They were all spoken last week. Use the verbs in brackets. ? Anna to Janet: Don't forget to sign the form, (remind) Anna reminded Janet to sign the form. ? Robert: What time will the office close this evening? (ask) Robert asked what time the office would close that evening. 1 A policeman to Christopher: Stop shouting, (tell) 2 Tessa: It was me. I ate all the cake yesterday, (admit) 3 Adrian: I'm sorry I was rude, (apologize) 4 Simon to Susan: Would you like to join me for lunch? (invite) 5 Martin to Nancy: Did someone ring you an hour ago? (ask) 6 Peter: I really must leave, (insist) 137 Relative clauses with who, which and that A Introduction Emma: / saw Natalie the other day. Melanie: Natalie? The girl who plays the piano? Emma: No, that's Natasha. Natalie is the student who dropped out of college, the one who never did any studying. She's working in Davidson's now, the shop that sells very expensive clothes. The relative clauses in this conversation identify which person or thing we are talking about. The clause who plays the piano tells us which girl Melanie means. The clause that sells very expensive clothes tells us which shop Emma means. Sometimes we can use an adjective or a phrase to identify someone or something. Adjective: the tall girl the new student the red car Phrase: the man in the suit the shop on the corner the woman with red hair But when we need a longer explanation, we can use a relative clause. Relative clause: the woman who gets up early the car that broke down B Who, which and that The relative pronouns who, which and that go after the noun and at the beginning of the relative clause. Who refers to people. Nick is the man who owns that enormous dog. I don't like people who tell jokes all the time. The little girl who sat next to me on the coach ate sweets the whole way. Sarah is pretty annoyed with the person who stole her mobile phone. We can also use that, but it is less usual. Jake is the man that plays the guitar. The woman that lived here before us is a romantic novelist. That and which refer to things. That is more usual than which, especially in conversation. The car that won the race looked very futuristic, didn't it? They've recaptured all the animals that escaped from the zoo. The children saw the actual spacecraft that landed on the moon. Which can be a little formal. There are several restaurants which do Sunday lunches. Is Zedco the company which was taken over last year? We do not use another pronoun like he or it with the relative pronoun. NOT the-man whohe owns-that-enormouts-dog NOT the-actual spacecraft that it landed on the moon In all these sentences who, which and that are the subject of the relative clause. For who, which and that as object, see Units f 38 and f 39. 137 Exercises 1 Identifying (A) Look at the information and identify which one is meant. Use the shortest way of identifying where possible, e.g. the tall boy, not the boy who is tall. ? the boy (he is tall) the tall boy ? the man (he has a beard) the man with a beard ? the woman (she plays golf) the woman who plays golf 1 the young man (he is at the door) 2 the man (he plays his stereo at night) 3 the woman (she is very thin) 4 the girl (she has green eyes) 5 the young woman (she is in the office) 6 the man (he drives a taxi) 7 the young man (he is smart) ..................... 8 the student (she failed all her exams) 2 Who, which and that (B) Complete the conversation. Put in who, which or that. There is always more than one possible answer. Emma: Shall we have something to eat? Matthew: Yes, but not here. I don't like cafes (►) that don't have chairs. I'm not one of those people (►)who can eat standing up. Emma: There's another restaurant over there. Matthew: It looks expensive, one of those places (1)……………. charge very high prices. The only customers (2)…………... can afford to eat there are business executives (3)……………. get their expenses paid. Anyway, I can't see a menu. I'm not going into a restaurant (4)……………. doesn't display a menu. Emma: We just passed a cafe (5)……………….. does snacks. Matthew: Oh, I didn't like the look of that. Emma: You're one of those people (6) ...................are never satisfied, aren't you? 3 Relative clauses (A-B) Combine the information to make news items. Make the sentence in brackets into a relative clause with who or which. Start each sentence with the, e.g. The man ... ► A man has gone to prison. (He shot two policemen.) The man who shot two policemen has gone to prison. 1 A bomb caused a lot of damage. (It went off this morning.) 2 A scientist has won the Nobel Prize. (He discovered a new planet.) 3 A footballer has been banned from playing again. (He took drugs.) 4 A little girl has been found safe and well. (She had been missing since Tuesday.) 5 A company has laid off thousands of workers. (It owns Greenway Supermarkets.) 6 An old lady now wants to swim the English Channel. (She did a parachute jump.) 138 The relative pronoun as object A Subject and object Harriet is showing David her holiday photos. Harriet: That's an old castle that we visited on holiday. And those are some people we met, a couple who were staying at the campsite. David: Mm. They look very friendly. A relative pronoun such as who or that can be the subject of a relative clause. Harriet talked to a couple who were staying at the camp-site. ( Theyi were staying at the camp-site.) The postcard that came this morning was from Harriet. ( It came this morning.) A relative pronoun can also be the object of a relative clause. Mike and Harriet are visiting a woman who they met on holiday. (They met her on holiday.) The old castle that we visited was really interesting. (We visited it. ) We do not use another pronoun like her or it with the relative pronoun. NOT a woman who they met her NOT -the old castle that we visited it B Leaving out the relative pronoun We can leave out the relative pronoun when it is the object of the relative clause. We do this especially in spoken English. Compare these examples. WITH OBJECT PRONOUN The man who Vicky saw at the concert is Sarah's boss. That's an old castle that we visited. WITHOUT OBJECT PRONOUN The man Vicky saw at the concert is Sarah's boss. That's an old castle we visited. Here are some more examples of relative clauses without an object pronoun. We don't know the name of the person the police are questioning. The cakes Melanie baked were delicious. That jacket you're wearing is falling to pieces, Mike. Remember that we cannot leave out a pronoun when it is the subject of a relative clause. The man who spoke to Vicky is Sarah's boss. C Who and whom In formal English, whom is sometimes used when the object of the relative clause is a person. The person who/whom the police were questioning has now been released. But in conversation whom is not very common. 138 Exercises i Subject and object (A) Comment on the conversations. Add a sentence with who or that as the subject of the underlined part. ► She's Tom's new girlfriend. ~ Who is? ~ That girl. She just said hello. That's right. The girl who just said hello is Tom's new girlfriend. 1 The dog has been rescued. ~ What dog? ~ It fell down a hole. Haven't you heard? The ........................................................................................................ 2 The story was untrue. ~ What story? ~ You know. It upset everyone. Yes, the .................................................................................................................................. 3 He's a film producer. ~ Who is? ~ That man. He interviewed Natasha. That's what I heard. The ................................................................................................... Now comment on these conversations. Add a sentence with who or that as the object of the underlined part. 4 The accident wasn't very serious. ~ What accident? ~ Oh, Daniel saw it. Yes, the ................................................................................................................................ 5 He's a millionaire. ~ Who is? ~ That man. Claire knows him. It's true. The .......................................................................................................................... 6 The vase was extremely valuable. ~ What vase? ~ You know. David broke it. That's right. The ............................................................................................................... 7 It's really nice. ~ What is? ~ The jacket. Melanie wore it at the party. Yes, it is. The ........................................................................................................................ 2 Leaving out the relative pronoun (B) Complete the script for these TV advertisements. Use a relative clause without a pronoun. ► Fresho soap. Beautiful people use it. It's the soap beautiful people use. 1 An Everyman car. You can afford it………………………………… 2 'Hijack'. People want to see this film……………………………….. 3 Greenway Supermarket. You can trust it. 4 'Cool' magazine. Young people read it. 5 Jupiter chocolates. You'll love them............................. …………….. 3 Leaving out the relative pronoun (B) Look carefully at these sentences. Are they correct without a relative pronoun? Where you see *, you may need to put in who, which or that. Write the sentences and put in a pronoun only if you have to. ? The man * paid for the meal was a friend of Tom's. The man who paid for the meal was a friend of Tom's. ? The meeting * Mark had to attend went on for three hours. The meeting Mark had to attend went on for three hours. 1 Somewhere I've got a photo of the mountain * we climbed. 2 The man * repaired my car is a real expert. 3 The detective lost sight of the man * he was following. 4 I thought I recognized the assistant * served us. 5 I'm afraid the numbers * I chose didn't win a prize. 139 Prepositions in relative clauses Introduction A relative pronoun (e.g. that) can be the object of a preposition (e.g. for). This is the bus that I've been waiting for. I've been waiting for the bus. The restaurant that we normally go to is closed today. We normally go to the restaurant. In informal spoken English we normally put the preposition at the end of the relative clause. Compare the word order. STATEMENT I've been waiting for the bus. We go to the restaurant. RELATIVE CLAUSE the bus that I've been waiting for the restaurant that we go to We do not use another pronoun like it or her after the preposition. NOT the restaurant that we go to it NOT someone who / work with her B Leaving out the pronoun We often leave out the relative pronoun when it is the object of a preposition. WITH OBJECT PRONOUN The bus that I'm waiting for is late. Is this the article which you were interested in? That's the man who I was talking about. WITHOUT OBJECT PRONOUN The bus I'm waiting for is late. Is this the article you were interested in? That's the man I was talking about. Here are some more examples of relative clauses without an object pronoun. / cant remember the name of the hotel we stayed at. This is the colour we've finally decided on. The shop I got my stereo from has lots of bargains. C A preposition at the beginning These examples are typical of formal English. Was that the restaurant to which you normally go? Electronics is a subject about which I know very little. The Sales Manager is the person from whom I obtained the figures. Here the preposition comes at the beginning of the relative clause, before which or whom. We cannot put a preposition before that or who. a subject (that) I know little about NOT a subject -about that I know little the person (who) I got the figures from NOT the-person from who I got the figures 138C Whom 139 Exercises 1 A preposition at the end (A-B) What are they saying? Put in sentences with a preposition at the end. ► 1 2 3 4 (Mark has been looking for this letter.) This is the letter I've been looking for. (Rachel was talking about that film.) ...................................................... (Laura has decided on this wallpaper.).......................................... (Matthew played tennis with that man.) ................................................ (David fell down those steps.) ........................................................... A preposition at the end (A-B) Match the phrases and write the definitions. Put the preposition at the end of the relative clause. ► a kitchen a cupboard you hit nails with it 1 a hammer the person you keep valuable things in it 2 your destination a piece of furniture you cook in it 3 a safe the place you can either sit or sleep on it 4 your opponent a room you're going to it 5 a sofa bed a tool you're playing against them ► A kitchen is a room you cook in. 1 .................................................................................................................................................. 2 ................................................................................................................................................... 3 ................................................................................................................................................... 4 ..................................................................................................................................................... 5 ............................................................................................................ 3 A preposition at the beginning (C) It's election time. All the politicians are arguing. Rewrite the first sentence using a preposition at the beginning of a relative clause. ► I cannot agree with that statement. I hope I've made that clear. That is a statement with which 1 cannot agree. 1 Our party believes in that idea. I say this from the bottom of my heart. 2 I am strongly opposed to that policy. And I am not afraid to say so ......... 3 No one cares about these people. They are the forgotten people. 4 Your party should be ashamed of those mistakes. And everyone knows that. 5 The government is now dealing with that problem. How many times do I have to tell you? 140 Relative structures with whose, what and it A Whose Vicky: What I'd really like is a job in television. Daniel: The other day I met a man whose sister works in television. Vicky: Who? What's her name? Daniel: Oh, I don't know. She's the woman whose car Tom crashed into. Here whose sister means his sister (the sister of the man Daniel met), and whose car means her car (the car belonging to the woman). Here are some more examples. Someone whose bicycle had been stolen was reporting it to the police. Wayne Johnson is the man whose goal won the game for United. We use whose mainly with people, e.g. someone, the man. But sometimes it goes with other nouns. Which is the European country whose economy is growing the fastest? Round the corner was a building whose windows were all broken. Melanie was looking after a dog whose leg had been broken in an accident. B What We use the relative pronoun what without a noun in front of it. The shop didn't have what I wanted. (= the thing that I wanted) What we saw gave us quite a shock. (= the thing that we saw) We can also use what to give emphasis to a word or phrase, to make it more important. Compare these examples. NEUTRAL Rachel's stereo kept me awake. Vicky is looking for a job in television. I want to make a fresh start. They booked a holiday together. EMPHATIC What kept me awake was Rachel's stereo. What Vicky is looking for is a job in television. What I want to do is make a fresh start. What they did was book a holiday together. C It We also use it + be + a relative clause to give emphasis. NEUTRAL Tom had an accident. The computer gives me a headache. I'm eating chocolate cake. Mike's uncle died on Thursday. EMPHATIC It was Tom who had an accident (not David). It's the computer that gives me a headache. It's chocolate cake (that) I'm eating. It was on Thursday that Mike's uncle died. We must put in a pronoun when it is the subject of the relative clause (e.g. who had an accident). If it is the object (e.g. that I'm eating), then we can leave it out (see Unit 138B). 140 Exercises 1 Who or whose? (A) You are reading a crime story. One of these people has murdered the industrialist Colin Howard. Look at the detective's notes and write a sentence about each person. Use a relative clause with who or whose. ? George Paxton, company director - he had an argument with Colin George is the company director who had an argument with Colin. ? Vera Stokes, politician - her sister once worked for Colin Vera is the politician whose sister once worked for Colin. 1 Felix Reeves, journalist - his tape recorder was stolen 2 Graham Wilshaw, architect - he knew Colin at school 3 Rex Carter, farmer - Colin bought his land 4 Norman Bridge, lawyer - he looked after Colin's interests 5 Sonia Goldman, house guest - her fingerprints were on the door handle 2 What(B) Zedco Chief Executive Barry Douglas is telling a group of managers how to run a business successfully. He emphasizes the underlined words using what. ► You must pay attention to the details. What you must pay attention to are the details. 1 You have to think about your profit. 2 You must know the needs of your customers. 3 You should work towards a realistic target. 4 You need to plan ahead. 3 lt(C) Quiz champion Claude Jennings is answering some questions. Look at each question and answer and write a sentence with it + be + a relative clause. ► Who invented radio? ~ Marconi. It was Marconi who invented radio. 1 When did Columbus sail to America? ~ In 1492. It was in 1492 that ......................................................................... 2 What does Tiger Woods play? ~ Golf. It's ……………………………………………………………….. 3 Where did the Olympic Games first take place? ~ In Greece. 4 Which is nearest the sun, Venus or Mercury? ~ Mercury. 141 The use of relative clauses A Introduction There are two kinds of relative clause. Compare this conversation and newspaper report. Laura: Trevor: Laura: Art Golding has died. Who? You know. The film star who played the ship's captain in 'Iceberg'. Trevor: / don't think I've seen that. Laura: Yes, you have. It's the film we saw on TV the other night. The clauses in this conversation identify which film star and which film Laura means. They are called identifying clauses. ART GOLDING DIES The actor Art Golding, who starred in films such as 'Tornado' and 'Iceberg', has died after a long illness. He was seventy-eight. Art Golding's most famous role was as the scientist in the film 'Supernova', which broke all box-office records. The clauses in this report add information about Art Golding and about 'Supernova'. They are called adding clauses, or sometimes non-identifying clauses. B Identifying clauses and adding clauses IDENTIFYING The man who lives next door to Melanie is rather strange. The river which flows through Hereford is the Wye. The picture which was damaged is worth thousands of pounds. These clauses identify which thing the speaker is talking about. The clause who lives next door to Melanie tells us which man. The clause which flows through Hereford tells us which river. Without the relative clause the sentence would be incomplete. The man is rather strange makes sense only if we know which man. ADDING Jake, who lives next door to Melanie, is rather strange. The Wye (which flows through Hereford) is a beautiful river. This famous picture - which was damaged during the war - is worth thousands of pounds. These clauses add extra information about something which is already identified. The clause who lives next door to Melanie adds information about Jake. But we can say the sentence on its own without the relative clause. Jake is rather strange makes sense because the name Jake identifies who we are talking about. An identifying clause does not have commas around it. An adding clause has commas around it. Instead of commas, we can use brackets ( ) or dashes —. If the adding clause is at the end of the sentence, we need only one comma or dash. That's Jake, who lives next door. Most relative clauses are identifying. We use them both in speech and in writing. Adding clauses can be rather formal. We use them mainly in writing. They are common in news reports. In speech we often use two short sentences. Jake lives next door to Melanie. He's rather strange. 137A Identifying clauses 142A Pronouns in identifying and adding clauses 141 Exercises 1 Adding clauses (A) Match the parts and write sentences with an adding clause. Use who or which. ► 1 2 3 4 5 6 The Grand Canyon He was in prison for 27 years. Nelson Mandela He was killed in 1980. John Lennon It is 140 million miles away. The Titanic It is over 200 miles long. Queen Victoria It sank in 1912. Mars It was built in 1961. The Berlin Wall She came to the throne in 1837. He was one of the Beatles. He became President of South Africa. It is one of the wonders of the world. It is known as the red planet. It stood for 28 years. It was supposed to be unsinkable. She ruled over the British Empire. ► The Grand Canyon, which is over 200 miles long, is one of the wonders of the world. 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 Identifying or adding? (B) Read the news article and then say what each relative clause does. Does it tell us which one, or does it add information? The play (►) that the students put on last week was Oscar Wilde's 'The Importance of Being Earnest' (►) which was written in 1895. The college theatre, (1) which holds over 400 people, was unfortunately only half full for the Friday evening performance. However, the people (2) who bothered to attend must have been glad they did. Lucy Kellett, (3) who played Lady Bracknell, was magnificent. Unfortunately the young man (4) who played lohn Worthing forgot his lines twice, but that did not spoil the evening, (5) which was a great success. ? It tells us which play. ? It adds information about 'The Importance of Being Earnest'. 1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3 ................................................................................................................................................................. 4 ............................................................................................................................................................... 5 ................................................................................................................................................................ 3 Commas in relative clauses (B) Put in the relative clauses. You may also need to put in one or two commas. ? (that Claire drives) This car is a lot cheaper than the one that Claire drives ? (who has twins) Olivia, who has twins, often needs a babysitter. 1 (who took Rita to the party) The person ........................ ………………….was Tom. 2 (who has a bad temper) Henry...........................................…………………….shouted at the waiter. 3 (which Tom supports) The team ......................... …………………………………..is United. 4 (who is afraid of heights) We all climbed up except Vicky …………………………………. 5 (which is on the tenth floor) My new flat .......... ……………………………….has a terrific view. 6 (she bought the sofa from) Sarah can't remember the name of the shop……………………… 142 Relative pronouns and relative adverbs A Pronouns in identifying and adding clauses There are two kinds of relative clause: identifying and adding (see Unit 141). Look at the pronouns in these examples. IDENTIFYING I'm sure I know the person who served us. The pop singer whom Guy invited onto his chat show never turned up. The woman whose flat was burgled spent the night at a friend's house. Towns which/that attract tourists are usually crowded in the summer. In an identifying clause we can use who, whom, whose, which or that. ADDING Natalie, who served us, is a friend of Emma's. Arlene Black, whom Guy invited onto his chat show, never turned up. Natasha, whose flat was burgled, spent the night at a friend's house. Oxford, which attracts many tourists, is often crowded in the summer. In an adding clause we can use who, whom, whose or which. We do NOT use that. B Leaving out the pronoun Sometimes we can leave the pronoun out of an identifying clause (see Unit 138B). The woman (who) you met yesterday works in advertising. Have you seen the book (that) I was reading? Laura couldn't find the box (that) she kept her photos in. We cannot leave the pronoun out of an adding clause. Sarah, whom you met yesterday, works in advertising. That book 'Brighton Rock', which 1 was reading, is really good. Laura had a wooden box, in which she kept her photos OR which she kept her photos in. C The relative adverbs where, when and why Look at these examples. This is the place where the accident happened. Do you remember the day when we moved the piano upstairs? The reason why Nick came was that he wanted to see Rita. We can leave out when or why, or we can use that. Do you remember the day (that) we moved the piano upstairs? The reason (that) Nick came was that he wanted to see Rita. There are also adding clauses with where and when. We went to the Riverside Restaurant, where I once had lunch with Henry. Mark likes to travel at night, when the roads are quiet. D A special use of which In an adding clause, we can use which relating to a whole sentence, not just to a noun. It rained all night, which was good for the garden. Here which means 'the fact that it rained all night'. Here are some more examples. David helped me clear up, which was very kind of him. Sarah had to work late again, which annoyed Mark. Tom pushed Nick into the swimming-pool, which seemed to amuse everyone. 142 Exercises 1 Who, whom, whose, which, where and why (A, C) Complete this advertisement. Put in who, whom, whose, which, where or why. The town of Keswick, (►) which lies at the heart of the Lake District, is the perfect place for a holiday, and the Derwent Hotel, (1)…………… overlooks the town, is the perfect place to stay. Robin and Wendy Jackson, (2)…………….bought this small hotel three years ago, have already won an excellent reputation. Robin, (3)………….... cooking is one of the reasons (4)………… ... the Derwent is so popular, was once Young Chef of the Year. The comfort of the guests, (5)…………… the owners treat almost as members of the family, always comes first. Peter Ustinov, (6)…………….once stayed at the hotel, described it as 'marvellous'. And the Lake District, (7)………….. has so much wonderful scenery and (8)…………… the poet Wordsworth lived, will not disappoint you. 2 Identifying clauses and adding clauses (A-C) Put in the relative clauses. Sometimes there is more than one possible answer. ► Someone knows all about it - the secretary. The person who knows all about it is the secretary. 1 Zedco has 10,000 employees. It's an international company. Zedco, ...................................................................................................... , is an international company. 2 Vicky's name was missed off the list, so she wasn't very pleased. Vicky,...................................................................................................................... , wasn't very pleased. 3 Laura painted a picture, and it's being shown in an exhibition. The picture is being shown in an exhibition. 4 We're all looking forward to a concert. It's next Saturday. The concert ......................................................................................................... is next Saturday. 5 One week Mike and Harriet went camping. It was the wettest of the year. The week ...........................................................................................................was the wettest of the year. 6 Aunt Joan is a bit deaf, so she didn't hear the phone. Aunt Joan, .......................................................................................................... , didn't hear the phone. 7 You'll meet Henry tomorrow. He's also a member of the board. Henry,................................................................................................... , is also a member of the board. 8 I'll see you near the post office. We met there the other day. I'll see you near the post office, ................................................. ... 3 A special use of which (D) Match the sentence pairs and join them with which. ► My phone is out of order. It means he can't get about very easily. 1 Rachel's mother paid for the meal. It's made her very depressed. 2 My brother is disabled. That was rather careless of you. 3 You left the keys in the car. That caused a traffic jam. 4 Vicky didn't get the job. It's a real nuisance. 5 The police blocked off the road. That was very kind of her. ► My phone is out of order, which is a real nuisance. 1 2 ....................................................................................................................................................................................... ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3 ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 143 Relative clauses: participle and to-infinitive A Relative clauses with a participle Read this news report about an accident. Several people were injured this morning when a lorry carrying concrete pipes overturned in the centre of town and hit two cars. Ambulances called to the scene took a long time to get through the rush hour traffic. The accident happened in Alfred Road, where road repairs are under way. People who saw the accident say that the lorry hit the cars after it swerved to avoid a pile of stones left in the road. The traffic chaos caused by the accident has meant long delays for people travelling to work. Carrying concrete pipes, called to the scene, etc are relative clauses: they relate to a noun. Carrying concrete pipes tells us something about a lorry. We can form these clauses with an active participle, e.g. carrying, or a passive participle, e.g. called. The participles can refer to the present or the past. ACTIVE There are delays this morning for people travelling to work. (= people who are travelling to work) A lorry carrying concrete pipes has overturned. (= a lorry which was carrying pipes) the path leading to the church (= the path which leads/led to the church) The active participle means the same as a pronoun + a continuous verb, e.g. which is/was carrying, or a pronoun + a simple verb, e.g. which leads/led. PASSIVE / have a message for people delayed by the traffic chaos. (= people who are being delayed) We noticed a pile of stones left in the road. (= stones which had been left there) food sold in supermarkets (= food which is/was sold in supermarkets) The passive participle means the same as a pronoun + a passive verb, e.g. which is/was sold. But we do NOT use the active participle for a single action in the past. The police want to interview people who saw the accident. NOT people-seeing-the-accident B Relative clauses with a to-infinitive Look at this structure with the to-infinitive. New Zealand was the first country to give women the vote. (= the first country which gave women the vote) Melanie was the only person to write a letter of thanks. (= the only person who wrote a letter of thanks) Here are some more examples. The guest on our show is the youngest golfer to win the Open. Emma Thompson is the most famous actress to appear on stage here. We can use a to-infinitive with these words: first, second, etc; next and last; only; and superlatives, e.g. youngest, most famous. We can leave out the noun (except after only) if the meaning is clear. The captain was the last to leave the sinking ship. 143 Exercises 1 Relative clauses with a participle (A) Complete the definitions. Put in an active or passive participle of these verbs: add, arrive, block, own, play, take, tell, watch, wear ? A competitor is someone taking part in a competition. ? Your property is everything owned by you. 1 Baseball is a game.................................... mainly in the US. 2 A wrist-watch is a watch .................................. on your wrist. 3 A latecomer is a person.................................. late. 4 An instruction is a statement…………………… ...you what to do. 5 A spectator is someone ……………………… a game or an event. 6 An extension is a new part …………………….. on to a building. 7 An obstacle is something . … … … … … … … … . . your way. 2 Relative clauses with a participle (A) Write each news item as one sentence. Change the part in brackets into a clause with an active participle (e.g. costing) or a passive participle {e.g. found). ? A new motorway is planned. (It will cost £500 million.) A new motorway costing £500 million is planned. ? Some weapons belong to the IRA. (They were found at a flat in Bristol.) Some weapons found at a flat in Bristol belong to the IRA. 1 Families have been evicted. (They were living in an empty office building.) Families ......................................................................................................................... 2 A chemical company has gone bankrupt. (It employed 4,000 people.) A chemical company............................................................................... 3 A bridge has been declared unsafe. (It was built only two years ago.) A bridge............................................................................................... 4 People have marched to London. (They are protesting against pollution.) 5 Tennis fans have been queuing all night at Wimbledon. (They hope to buy tickets.) 6 A new drug may give us eternal youth. (It was developed at a British university.) 3 Relative clauses with a to-infinitive (B) Comment on each situation. Use the to-infinitive structure. ► David offered his help. No one else did. David was the only person to offer his help. 1 Olivia's daughter swam a length of the pool. No other girl as young as her did that. Olivia's daughter was ...........................……………………………… 2 The secretaries got a pay rise. No one else did. The secretaries were .......…………………………………………….. 3 The pilot left the aircraft. Everyone else had left before him. 4 Mrs Harper became Managing Director. No other woman had done that before. 5 Daniel applied for the job. No other candidate as suitable as him applied. TEST 24 Relative clauses (Units 137-143) Test 24A Decide which word or phrase is correct. ► What I really need is a long holiday. a) that b) what c) which d) who 1 At last I've found the information that I was looking a) for b) for it c) for that d) it 2 Everyone………………………. the building was searched by the police. a) enter b) entered c) entering d) enters 3 The plane……………………… has just taken off is an hour late. a) it b) what c) which d) who 4 I had just one reply. Abco was the………………………. company to reply to my letter. a) last b) most c) only d) second 5 My friend Nigel,………………………. works in the City, earns much more than I do. a) that b) which c) who d) whose 6 Martin is someone with ..............................I usually agree. a) him b) that c) who d) whom 7 I'd like to see the photo……………….. a) took b) you took it c) that you took d) that you took it 8 Atlanta is the city……………………… the Olympic Games were held in 1996. a) that b) when c) where d) which 9 It rained all the time,...................................was a great pity. a) that b) what c) which d) who 10 We passed shops …………………… ... windows were decorated for Christmas. a) the b) their c) which d) whose Test 24 B Each of these sentences has a mistake in it. Write the correct sentence. ► I've found the magazine who was missing. I've found the magazine that was missing. 1 This isn't the train on that I normally travel. 2 The letter that I opened it wasn't for-me. 3 The reason because I didn't know was that no one-had told me. 4 That we should do is ring the police. 5 I-didn't know the name of the man helped me. 6 Rupert knows the family who's house is for sale. 7 Einstein who failed his university entrance exam discovered-relativity. 8 The person we talked to were very friendly. 9 It's the President makes the important decisions. 10 I can't find my diary, what is real nuisnace. 11 Outside the door was a pair of boots covering in mud, 12 Lake-Suiperior-, that lies-on-the US Canadian-border is the largest-lake in-North-America. Test 24C Complete the story about a thief's punishment. Write the missing words. Use one word only in each space. This is a true story (►) which is supposed to have happened somewhere in the US. A man (1)…………. was accused of housebreaking appeared in court. He had put his arm through the window of a house and stolen some money (2)……………. was lying on a table inside. The argument (3)……………. the man's lawyer put forward wasn't very impressive. He said that (4)............ …….. was the man's arm (5)……………. had committed the crime and not the man himself. 'You cannot punish a man for (6)…………….. his arm has done,' said the lawyer. Now the judge in (7)……………. court the man was appearing wanted to show how stupid the lawyer's argument was. Instead of finding the man guilty, he found the man's arm guilty and sent it to prison. 'He can go with his arm or not, as he chooses,' the judge added, (8)……………... made everyone laugh. But (9)……………. the judge didn't know was that the man had an artificial arm. He took the arm off, gave it to the judge - (10)…………….. could hardly believe his eyes - and walked out of the court. Test 24D Combine the two sentences into one. ► That man was Anna's brother. He just walked past. The man who just walked past was Anna's brother. 1 The plane was twenty-five years old. It crashed. The plane .…………………………………………... . . twenty-five years old. 2 One day Tessa was ill in bed. Martin rang. The day ..........................................................................................................ill in bed. 3 Our offices are in Queen Street. They are new. Our ……………………………………………………………………………..in Queen Street. 4 Some documents have been found. They were stolen from a car. The documents..............................................................................................found. 5 That map is out of date. You were looking at it. The map .………………………………………………………………………out of date. 6 The King's Theatre is in the centre of town. It dates from 1896. The King's.......... ……………………………………………………………………...in the centre of town. I A woman was terribly upset. Her dog was run over. The woman .......................................................................................................................... terribly upset. 8 Janet solved the puzzle. She did it before everyone else. Janet was......................................................................................................the puzzle. 9 A man was standing outside the building. He was selling newspapers. A man ……………………………………………………………………………………..outside the building. 10 The talk was very interesting. Judy gave it. The talk.……………………………………………………………………………………………very interesting. II The house is empty now. I used to live there. The house .……………………………………………………………………………………..is empty now. 144 Conditionals (1) Vicky and Rachel are talking about possible future actions. They may catch the bus, or they may miss it. B Type 1: If we hurry, we'll catch the bus IF-CLAUSE if Present simple If we If we If it If I hurry, miss it, doesn't rain, don't practise my golf, MAIN CLAUSE Will we there we I 'II catch the bus. 'II be another one. 'II be having a picnic. won't get any better. The verb in the if-clause (e.g. hurry) is in the present simple, not the future. NOT If we'll hurry, we'll catch the bus. But we can use will in the if-clause when we make a request. If you'll just wait a moment, I'll find someone to help you. (- Please wait a moment...) We can use the present continuous (e.g. are doing) or the present perfect (e.g. have done) in the if-clause. If we're expecting visitors, the flat will need a good clean. If you've finished with the computer, I'll put it away. The main clause often has will. But we can use other modal verbs (e.g. can). If you haven't got a television, you can't watch it, can you? If Henry jogs regularly, he might lose weight. If Matthew is going to a job interview, he should wear a tie. The if-clause usually comes first, but it can come after the main clause. If I hear any news, I'll phone you./I'll phone you if I hear any news. C More uses of type 1 We can use type 1 conditionals in offers and suggestions. If you need a ticket, I can get you one. If you feel like seeing the sights, we can take a bus tour. We can also use them in warnings and threats. If you go on like this, you'll make yourself ill. If you don't apologize, I'll never speak to you again. D If you heat water, it boils We sometimes use the present simple in both clauses. If you heat water, it boils. If Daniel has any money, he spends it. If you press this switch, the computer comes on. This means that one thing always follows automatically from another. Pressing the switch always results in the computer coming on. 144 Exercises 1 Type 1 (A-C) Read the conversation and then choose the correct forms. Rachel: Have you heard about the pop festival? Vicky: Yes, it's/it'll be good if Express are playing. They're a great band. Rachel: Will you be able to go, Nick? Nick: If (1) I ask/I'll ask my boss, he'll give me some time off work, I expect. Vicky: How are we going to get there? Rachel: Well, if (2) there are/there'll be enough people, we can hire a minibus. Vicky: I won't be going if (3) it's/it'll be too expensive. Rachel: It (4) isn't costing/won't cost much if we all (5) share/will share the cost. Nick: If (6) I see/I'll see the others later on tonight, (7) I ask/I'll ask them if they want to go. 2 Type l (A-C) Comment on the situations. Use if+ the present tense + will/can. ? It might rain. If it does, everyone can eat inside. If it rains, everyone can eat inside. ? The children mustn't go near Nick's dog. It'll bite them. If the children go near Nick's dog, it'll bite them. 1 Rachel might fail her driving test. But she can take it again. 2 United might lose. If they do, Tom will be upset. 3 The office may be closed. In that case Mark won't be able to get in. 4 Nick may arrive a bit early. If he does, he can help Tom to get things ready. 5 The party might go on all night. If it does, no one will want to do any work tomorrow. 6 Emma may miss the train. But she can get the next one. 7 Is Matthew going to enter the race? He'll probably win it. Present simple in both clauses (D) Match the sentences and join them with if ► You lose your credit card. I can't sleep. 1 You get promoted. You get a warning letter. 2 I drink coffee late at night. You have to ring the bank. 3 You don't pay the bill. Your salary goes up. 4 I try to run fast. The alarm goes off. 5 Someone enters the building. I get out of breath. ► If you lose your credit card, you have to ring the bank. 1 ……………………………………………………………………. 2 ………………………………………………………………………………. 3 .......................................................................................................................... 4 ………………………………………………………………………………. 5 .......................................................................................................................... 145 Conditionals (2) A Introduction Rachel: Would you like some cake, Jessica? Jessica: No thanks. If I ate cake, I'd get fat. Rachel: But it's delicious. Jessica: It looks delicious. Ifl had your figure, I'd eat the whole lot. I ate cake and / had your figure are imaginary or unreal situations. Jessica isn't going to eat the cake, and she hasn't got a figure like Rachel's. B Type 2: If I ate cake, I'd get fat IF-CLAUSE if /// If l If we If Rachel MAIN CLAUSE Past simple ate cake, had your figure, didn't have a car, got up earlier, I I we she would 'd get fat. 'd eat the whole lot. 'd find it difficult to get about. wouldn't always be late. Note the past simple (e.g. ate). We do not use would in the if-clause. NOT If I'd-ea^eake. But we can use would in the if-clause when we make a request. If you'd like to come this way, the doctor will see you now. (= Please come this way ...) As well as the past simple we can use the past continuous (e.g. was doing) in the if-clause. If Rachel was playing her stereo, it wouldn't be so quiet in here. In a type 2 if-clause we sometimes use were instead of was, especially in the clause if I were you. If Rachel were playing her stereo, it wouldn't be so quiet in here. If I were you, I'd ask a lawyer for some advice. The main clause often has would. We can also use could or might. If we had a calculator, we could work this out a lot quicker. If Rachel worked harder, she might do even better at her studies. The if-clause usually comes first, but it can come after the main clause. If I knew, I'd tell you./I'd tell you if I knew. C Type 1 and type 2 Compare these examples. Type 1: If you have a lie-down, you'll feel better, (see Unit 144B) Type 2: Ifl had a million pounds, I'd probably buy a yacht. The present tense (have) refers to a possible future action, something which may or may not happen. The past tense (had) refers to something unreal. If I had a million pounds means that I haven't really got a million pounds, but I am imagining that I have. Compare these examples. Type 1: If we take the car, we'll have to pay for parking. Type 2: If we took the car, we'd have to pay for parking. Here both sentences refer to a possible future action. But in the type 2 conditional, the action is less probable. If we took the car may mean that we have decided not to take it. We can use type 2 conditionals in offers and suggestions. If you needed a ticket, I could get you one. If you felt like seeing the sights, we could take a bus tour. Type 2 is less direct than type 1 (Unit 144C). The speaker is less sure that you want to see the sights. 145 Exercises Type 2 (A-B) Comment on these situations. Use a type 2 conditional with would or could. ► Andrew is such a boring person because he works all the time. You know, if Andrew didn't work all the time, he wouldn't be such a boring person. ► You can't take a photo because you haven't got your camera. How annoying. // / had my camera, I could take a photo. 1 You can't look the word up because you haven't got a dictionary. I'm sorry ............................................................................…………........…….. 2 You don't write to your friends because you're so busy. I've got so much to do........................................................................................... 3 You can't play tennis because your back is aching. It's a nuisance. ................................................................................................... … 4 Claire won't marry Henry because she doesn't love him. Of course, .................................................................................................. ………. 5 Nick can't find the way because he hasn't got a map. Nick's lost, but ................. …………………………..............………………… 6 David has so many accidents because he's so clumsy. You know, .............................................................................................................. Type l and type 2 (A-C) Complete the conversation. Put in the correct form of the verb. You may need to use will or would. Matthew: I haven't forgotten your birthday, you know. If you like, (►) I'll book (1 / book) a table for Thursday at our favourite restaurant. Emma: My birthday is on Wednesday, Matthew. You're playing basketball then, aren't you? If you cared for me, (1)…………………………….. (you / not / play) basketball on my birthday. Matthew: What's the difference? If (2)………………………………. (we / go) out on Thursday, it'll be just the same. If (3)………………………………. (I / not / play), I'd be letting the team down. Emma: Yes, I suppose (4)………………………………...(it / be) a disaster if you missed one game. Well, if (5)..........…………………. ....... (you / think) more of your friends than you do of me, you can forget the whole thing. Matthew: I just don't understand you sometimes, Emma. Emma: If (6)………………………........... (you / think) about it, you'd understand. And 1 think (7)………………………………(it / be) better if we forgot all about my birthday. Matthew: Don't be silly, Emma. If you get into one of your bad moods, (8) …………………………………(it / not / do) any good. Emma: If you were interested in my feelings, (9) .................................. ………. (I / not / get) into a bad mood. Type l and type 2 (C) What does the if-clause mean? Write a sentence with isn't or might. ? If this room was tidy, I could find things. The room isn't tidy. ? If we're late tonight, we can get a taxi. We might be late tonight. 1 If the phone was working, I could call you. 2 If it rains, can you bring the washing in? 3 If Mike was here, he'd know what to do. 4 If this spoon was silver, it would be worth a lot. 5 If Sarah calls, can you say I'll ring back? 146 Conditionals (3) A Introduction David: Mike: How was your camping holiday? Well, it would have been all right if it hadn't rained all the time. Harriet: If we'd gone two weeks earlier, we'd have had better weather. If it hadn't rained and if we'd gone two weeks earlier are imaginary situations in the past. It did rain, and they didn't go two weeks earlier. B Type 3: If we had gone earlier, we would have had better weather IF-CLAUSE if If we If Matthew If you If David MAIN CLAUSE Past perfect 'd gone earlier, had phoned her, hadn't made that mistake, had been more careful, we Emma you he would have 'd have had better weather. wouldn't have been so annoyed. 'd have passed your test. wouldn't have fallen. Note the verb in the past perfect (e.g. had been). We do not use would in the if-clause. NOT If David would have been more careful, he would have-fallen. The main clause often has would have. We can also use could have or might have. If I'd had my mobile yesterday, I could have contacted you. We just caught the train. If we'd stopped to buy a paper, we might have missed it. The short form 'd can be either had or would. If you'd rung me, I'd have come to see you. (= If you had rung me, I would have come to see you.) C The use of type 3 We use type 3 conditionals to talk about things in the past happening differently from the way they really happened. This sometimes means criticizing people or pointing out their mistakes. If you'd been a bit more careful, you wouldn't have cut yourself. If Matthew had set his alarm clock, he wouldn't have overslept. We can also use this structure to express regret about the past. If I hadn't fallen ill and missed the interview, I might have got the job. D Type 2 and type 3 Compare these examples. Type 2: If you planned things properly, you wouldn't get into a mess. (You don't plan.) Type 3: If you had planned things properly, you wouldn't have got into a mess. (You didn't plan.) We can mix types 2 and 3. If you had planned things at the start, we wouldn't be in this mess now. If you hadn't left all these dirty dishes, the place would look a bit tidier. If Matthew was more sensible, he would have worn a suit to the interview. If I didn't have all this work to do, I would have gone out for the day. 146 Exercises 1 Type 3 (A-C) Complete the conversation. Put in the correct form of the verb. Use the past perfect or would have. Nick: United didn't play very well today. Tom: We were awful. But if Hacker (►) had taken (take) that easy chance, (►) we would have won (we / win). Nick: We didn't deserve to win. It (1)………………………………. (be) pretty unfair if Rangers (2)…………………………………(lose). Tom: Hacker was dreadful. My grandmother (3) ........................................ (score) if (4) ........................................ (she / be) in that position. Nick: And if Burley (5)...............................................(not / be) asleep, he (6) (not / give) a goal away. Tom: If Johnson (7)....................... ……………… (not / be) injured when we needed him most, (8) ………………………………..(it/be) different. Nick: Yes, (9)………………………………(we / beat) them if (10)………………………… (he / be) fit. 2 Type 3 (A-C) Comment on each situation using a type 3 conditional with if. Use would have, could have or might have. ? In a bookshop yesterday Daniel saw a book he really wanted. The only problem was that he didn't have any money. Daniel would have bought the book if he had had any money. ? Rita often goes to concerts at the town hall, although not to every one. There was one on Saturday, but she didn't know about it. Rita might have gone to the concert if she had known about it. 1 On Sunday the guests had to have their lunch inside. Unfortunately it wasn't warm enough to have it outside ................................................................................................... 2 There was a bomb scare last Tuesday. Sarah wanted to fly to Rome, but she wasn't able to. The airport was closed ................................................................................................ 3 Laura has only met Nick once, and it's possible she wouldn't recognize him. He passed her yesterday, but he had a crash-helmet on ............................................................................... 4 Sarah has been quite busy, and she hasn't watered her plants for some time. As a result, they've died. 5 Nick likes ice hockey, but he didn't have a ticket to the game last week, so unfortunately he wasn't able to get in................................................................................................................ 3 Type 2 and type 3 (D) Complete the conversations. Put in the correct form of the verb. Use the past simple, the past perfect, would, or would have. ► Mike: You look tired. Harriet: Well, if you hadn't woken (you / not / wake) me up in the middle of the night, I wouldn't be (I / not be) so tired. 1 Rita: Is Trevor a practical person? Laura: Trevor? No, he isn't. If ........... ……………………. (he / be) practical, …………………………….(he / put) those shelves up a bit quicker. It took him ages. 2 Tom: Why are you sitting in the dark? David: Let's just say that if ..............................................(I / pay) my electricity bill last month, ........................................... (I / not be) in the dark now. 3 Matthew: Why are you so angry with me? All I did yesterday was play basketball. Emma: If ............................................. (you / love) me, …………………………….(you / not / leave) me here all alone on my birthday. 147 Review of conditionals There are three main types of conditional. Study the examples. Type 1: if... the present simple ... will/can/might, etc If we win today, we'll go to the top of the league. (We may win, or we may not.) Type 2: if ... the past simple ... would/could/might If Johnson was in the team, I'd feel more confident. (Johnson isn't in the team.) Type 3: if ... the past perfect ... would have/could have/might have If Johnson had played, we'd have won. (Johnson didn't play.) Here are some more examples with different verb forms. Type 1 If I'm going shopping, I'll need some money. If the disco has finished, we might be able to get some sleep. You should stay in bed if you feel unwell. Type 2 If I didn't like this pudding, I wouldn't eat it. If the video recorder was working, we could watch a film. The alarm might go off if we tried to get in through a window. Type 3 If we'd dropped the piano, it would have been a disaster. If Vicky had come to the theme park with us last week, she might have enjoyed it. We could have given you a lift if we'd known you were coming this way. B Other conditional sentences As well as the three main types, there are other types of conditional sentence. For example, we can use two present-tense verbs (see Unit 144D). If you ring this number, no one answers. We can also use a present-tense verb and an imperative. If you need any help, just ask. If you drink, don't drive. We can use be going to. If it's going to rain, I'd better take an umbrella. If they try to cut down the trees, there's going to be a big protest. We can mix types 2 and 3 (see Unit 146D). If Matthew had booked a table, we wouldn't be standing here in a queue. If you needed help, you should have asked me. 147Exercises 1 Types 1, 2 and 3 (A) Match the sentences and join them with if. Say what type they are. ► I went to bed earlier. I'll try to follow them. 1 The twins had worn different clothes. You might not be warm enough. 2 You tell me what the instructions say. I wouldn't have bought it. 3 People used public transport. I wouldn't sleep. 4 You don't wear a sweater. There'd be less pollution. 5 I hadn't seen the product advertised. We could have told them apart. ► If I went to bed earlier, I wouldn't sleep. I type 2 2 3 4 5 2 Types l, 2 and 3 (A) Adam is a music student. He rents a room from Mr Day. Put in the correct forms. Mr Day: Can't you stop playing that trumpet? You're making an awful noise. Adam: Well, if (►) I don't practise (I / not practise), I won't pass my exam. Mr Day: But why at night? It's half past twelve. If (1)……………………………….. (you / play) it in the daytime, (2)………………………………. (I / not / hear) you because I'd be at work. If (3)………………………………. (you / tell) me about this trumpet when you first came here, (4)…………………………………( I / not / let) you have the room. I'm afraid it's becoming a nuisance. If (5) .............................................. (you / not / play) so loud, (6) ……………………………….. (it / not / be) so bad. Adam: I'm sorry, but you can't play a trumpet quietly. Mr Day: If (7)………………………………. (I / realize) a year ago what you were going to do, then (8) …………………………. ..... (I / throw) you out long ago. If (9)………………………………..(you / go) on making this noise at night, (10) …………………………....... (I / have) to complain to your college. 3 Conditionals (A-B) What might you say in these situations? Use a conditional sentence. ► You think Emma should book a seat on the train. The alternative is having to stand. If Emma doesn't book a seat on the train, she'll have to stand. 1 You didn't know how unpopular lason was when you invited him to your party. 2 Warn your friend not to put too many tins into the plastic bag or it'll break. 3 You haven't got a pen, so you can't write down the address. 4 You should have started your project earlier. You're so far behind now. 5 Your friend might need some help. If so, tell her to give you a ring. 6 The automatic result of the door opening is the fan coming on. 148 If, when, unless and in case Present simple for the future Look at these examples. You'll be tired tomorrow if you stay up late. Tell me when the water boils. I won't do anything unless you agree. Write the name down in case you forget it. We use the present simple for the future after linking words such as if, when, unless and in case (see also Units 27 and 144B). B If or when? If you hear any news, can you ring me immediately? (You might hear some news.) I'll probably go for a walk later on if it stays fine. (It might stay fine.) We use if for something that we think might happen. When you hear some news, can you ring me immediately? (You will hear some news.) I'll make myself an omelette when I get home tonight. (I will get home tonight.) We use when for something that we know will happen. We use if (not when) for something impossible or imaginary. If I were you, I'd refuse. We can use either if or when in contexts where they mean 'every time'. If you run, you use up energy. When you run, you use up energy. C If and unless If... not means the same as unless. / can't see if I don't wear glasses. The doctor will be here if she isn't called to an emergency. If you can't pay your bills, you'll have to leave. I wouldn't say that if I didn't believe it. I can't see unless I wear glasses. The doctor will be here unless she's called to an emergency. Unless you can pay your bills, you'll have to leave. I wouldn't say that unless I believed it. D In case Look at these examples. Take a sandwich with you in case you get hungry. I'd better reserve a seat today in case the train is full tomorrow. Laura took two photos in case one of them didn't come out. We use in case to talk about doing something to avoid a possible problem later on. (For American English, see page 381.) Compare if and in case. I'll bring in the washing if it rains. (= I'll bring it in at the time it starts raining.) I'll bring in the washing in case it rains. (= I'll bring it in now because it might rain later.) 148 Exercises 1 If or when? (B) Look at the information in brackets and complete the sentences using if or when and a verb in the present simple. ? (I may see Tom tonight.) If I see Tom, I'll tell him the news. ? (Melanie is coming soon.) When Melanie comes, can you let her in, please? 1 (The alarm will ring soon.)……………………………………………….. we all have to leave the building. 2 (I might feel better tomorrow.)……………………………………………… I'll probably go back to work. 3 (This film finishes at ten.) ................... ………………………………………………… I'll stop the video. 4 (The plan may not work.) ………………………………………….. we'll have to think of something else. 2 If and unless (C) Complete the sentences using unless and the information in brackets. ► You won't get there in time unless you hurry, (if you don't hurry) 1 We can't have a picnic …………………………………………………………….( i f it isn't a nice day) 2 Don't leave the TV on ……………………………………………………………… (if you aren't watching it) 3 We can't do the job ……………………………………………………………………. (if we don't get help) 4 I wouldn't have bought the picture .......... …………………………………………(if I didn't like it) 3 If and unless (C) Which word makes more sense? Put in if or unless. ? Rachel will be pleased ij she passes her driving test. ? The bus won't stop unless you ring the bell. 1 I can't read your letters ......... you type them. 2 Emma will be upset .......... she doesn't get the job. 3 You can't go into the reception you've got a ticket. 4 Don't bother to ring me ................ it's important. 4 In case (D) What could you say in these situations? Use in case. ► You think Vicky had better take a coat. It might get cold. You to Vicky: You'd better take a coat in case it gets cold. 1 You think you and Mark had better book a table. The restaurant might be busy. You to Mark: ..................................................... 2 You think Claire ought to insure her jewellery. It might get stolen. You to Claire: ..................................................... 3 You'll leave David your phone number. He might want to contact you. You to David:……………………………………. 5 If, when, unless and in case (B-D) Jake lives next door to Melanie. Complete their conversation. Put in if, when (x2), unless or in case. Jake: A man is delivering a washing-machine this morning, but I have to go to work. I won't be here (►) when he calls. Could you let him in for me, please, (1)………………… you're terribly busy? Melanie: Oh, that's no problem. Jake: Oh, thanks. (2)………………. you could do that, I'd be really grateful. I'll leave a message on his answerphone. And (3)………………… he doesn't get the message, I'll put a note on the door, just to make sure. He'll see it (4) ....................... he comes. 149 Wish and if only We can use I wish or if only to express a wish. Jessica wishes she was slimmer. If only is stronger and more emphatic than wish. We can use a clause with if only on its own, or we can add another clause. If only I wasn't so fat. If only I wasn't so fat, I would be able to get into these trousers. B Wish... would Look at these examples. / wish you would put those shelves up soon. Tom wishes his neighbours wouldn't make so much noise. If only you'd try to keep the place tidy. Wish/If only . . . would expresses a wish for something to happen, or to stop happening. C Wish ... the past Look at these examples. / wish I lived in a big city. It's so boring in the country. We all wish we had more money, don't we? If only I was taller, I might be better at basketball. Wish and if only with a past-tense verb express a wish for things to be different. We can use were instead of was (see also Unit 145B). If only I were taller, I might be better at basketball. We cannot use would in these sentences, but we can use could. / wish I could sing (but I can't). I feel so helpless. If only I could speak the language. Compare wish with would and with the past. I wish something exciting would happen. (I wish for an action in the future.) I wish my life was more interesting. (My life isn't interesting.) D Wish ... the past perfect We use wish and if only with the past perfect to express a wish about the past. / wish you had told me about the dance. I would have gone. I wish I'd got up earlier. I'm behind with everything today. I wish you hadn't lost that photo. It was a really good one. If only David had been a bit more careful, he'd have been all right. We do not use would have for the past, but we can use could have. / wish I could have been at the wedding, but I was in New York. 149 Exercises Wish ... would (B) What might you say in these situations? Begin I wish ... ? to someone who never answers your e-mails I wish you'd answer my e-mails. ? to someone who makes rude remarks about you / wish you wouldn't make rude remarks about me. 1 to someone who won't hurry up 2 to someone who never does the washing-up 3 to someone who isn't telling you the whole story 4 to someone who blows cigarette smoke in your face 5 to someone who won't tell you what he's thinking 2 Wish ... the past (C) Vicky is fed up. What is she saying? Use / wish or if only. ► (She can't think straight.) I wish I could think straight. 1 (She is so tired.) ............................................................................. 2 (She gets headaches.)....................................................................... 3 (Her work isn't going well.) ..................................................... 4 (She can't concentrate.).................................................................. 5 (Life is so complicated.) ............................................................... 3 Wish ... the past perfect (D) Complete the sentences. Use these words: accepted, caught, found, played, saved, stayed ► I spent all my money. I wish now that / had saved it. 1 I missed the train. I really wish .................................................... 2 Rita left the party early. Nick wishes …………………………... 3 Emma refused the offer. But her parents wish .………………… 4 I looked everywhere for the key. 1 wish ………………………… 5 The injured player could only watch. He wishes ……………….. 4 Wish and if only (B-D) Complete the conversation. Claire: Oh, Henry. You're giving me another present. It's very sweet of you, but I wish (►)yoM wouldn't give me so many presents. Henry: Claire, I've been thinking. I shouldn't have asked you to marry me. I wish now that (1) ................................................... Claire: Now you're talking nonsense. I wish (2)……………………………………………, Henry. Henry: I'm not a young man, am I? Of course I wish (3)……………………………………. Claire: Why don't you listen? If only (4) …………………………………………..to me just this once. Henry: Why couldn't we have met twenty years ago? I wish (5) ……………………………you then. Claire: Henry, twenty years ago I was just starting school. TEST 25 Conditionals and wish (Units 144-149) Test 25A Complete the news report about a protest against a new road. Put in the correct form of the verbs. Sometimes you need will or would. Yesterday protesters managed to hold up work on the Oldbury bypass. Protest leader Alison Compton defended the action by members of the Green World group. 'If we don't protest, soon (►) there'll be (there / be) no countryside left,' she told reporters. The bypass is now well behind schedule, and if the protesters had not held up the work so often, (1)………………………. (it / open) two months ago. 'If these fields (2)……………………….... (disappear), we'll never see them again,' said Ms Compton. 'Why can't we use public transport? If more people (3)……………………… (travel) on buses and trains, we wouldn't need new roads. If the motor car had never existed, the world (4)………………………(be) a more pleasant place today.' But many people in Oldbury want their new bypass. 'If (5)………………………. (they / not build) it soon, the traffic jams in the town will get worse,' said Asif Mohammed, whose house is beside the busy A34. 'We just can't leave things as they are. If things remained the same, people's health (6)……………………….. (suffer) even more from all the pollution here. It's terrible. If we don't get the traffic out of the town, (7)………………………. (I / go) mad. If (8)………………………. (I / know) earlier how bad this problem would get, (9)………………………. (I / move) out years ago. But now it has become impossible to sell this house because of the traffic. The government waited too long. If (10)……………………….. (they / do) something sooner, there would be less traffic today' And the protest is making the new road even more expensive. ' If this goes on, (11) …………………….. ... (there / not / be) enough money left to finish the road,' says the Transport Minister. Test 25B Look at the answers below and write the correct answer in each space. ► A: There's always something going wrong with this car. B: If you had any sense, you'd have sold it long ago. a) be selling b) have sold c) sell d) sold 1 A: It's a pity the lake wasn't frozen yesterday. B: Yes, it is. If it ......................... frozen, we could have gone skating. a) had been b) was c) would be d) would have been 2 A: Haven't you got enough money for a holiday? B: Oh yes. I've got some saved up ................ ………… I suddenly need it. a) if b) in case c) that d) unless 3 A: What are you going to do next year? B: I wish I …………………. the answer to that question. a) knew b) know c) could know d) would know 4 A: These figures are too complicated to work out in your head. B: Yes, if ……………………… we had a calculator. a) better b) only c) really d) that 5 A: What are you doing later this afternoon? B: Oh, ………………….......the game finishes, I'll go home, I expect. a) if b) in case c) unless d) when 6 A: Do you think I should take the job? B: You shouldn't do anything……………………… you think it's the right thing to do. a) if b) in case c) unless d) when Test 25C Write a second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. Begin with //... ► I haven't got a key, so I can't get in. If I had a key, I could get in. 1 You talk about football and I'm going to be very bored. 2 The baby didn't cry, so we had a good sleep. 3 You may want a chat, so just give me a ring. 4 Nigel hasn't got satellite TV, so he can't watch the game. 5 You go away and I'll miss you. 6 I'm not rich or I'd have given up working long ago. 7 We should have bought that picture five years ago because it would be quite valuable now. 8 Throw a stone into water and it sinks. Test 25 D Write the sentences correctly. ► There aren't any eggs. If-we have some-eggs I couldmake an omelette. // we had some eggs, I could make an omelette. 1 The weather doesn't look very good. If it'll rain I'll stay here. 2 The programme is starting soon. Can you tell me-if-it starts? 3 Could you just listen? 1 -didn't need-to-repeat-things-all-the time if-you listened. 4 It's a simple law of science, if air will get-warmer-it rises. 5 There's only one key. I'd-better-get another one made-if-I-lose-it. 6 We were really late, I wish we-left home-earlier. 7 I hope the parcel comes today, If it won't arrilve-today,we'll-have-to complain. 8 That radio is on loud. I wish-someone-turns it-down. 9 We must do something. Until-we act quickly it'll-be too late. 10 Of course Martin was angry. But he hadn't been angry if you hadn't damaged his stereo 150 But, although and in spite of A Introduction This is a news report about Zedco. This year's figures show that Zedco has become profitable and is now doing well in spite of its recent problems. Although Chief Executive Barry Douglas has not been in charge for long, there has already been a dramatic upturn. Even though there have been very few job losses at the company, Douglas has managed to reduce costs. Nothing is certain of course, but Zedco can now look forward to a brighter future. The linking words in spite of, although, etc express the idea of a contrast. For example, there is a contrast between Zedco's profits now and its recent problems. B But and although We can join two sentences with but. The cafe was crowded, but we found a table. Nick has a car, but he doesn't often drive it. We can also use although. Although the cafe was crowded, we found a table. Although Nick has a car, he doesn't often drive it. The clause with although can come at the end. We found a table, although the cafe was crowded. C Though and even though Though is informal. It means the same as although. Though/Although I liked the sweater, I decided not to buy it. We can also use though at the end of a sentence. / liked the sweater. I decided not to buy it, though. Even though is stronger, more emphatic than although. Matthew looked quite fresh, even though he'd been playing squash. Even though you dislike Jessica, you should try to be nice to her. D In spite of and despite We use in spite of before a noun or before the ing-form of a verb. Kitty wanted to report on the war in spite of the danger. Mark went on working in spite of feeling unwell. We use despite in exactly the same way as in spite of and with the same meaning. She wanted to go despite the danger. He went on working despite feeling unwell. E In spite of and although IN SPITE OF I'm no better in spite of the pills/in spite of taking the pills. Laura wants to fly in spite of her fear/in spite of feeling afraid. NOT in spite of she feels afraid ALTHOUGH I'm no better, although I've taken the pills. Laura wants to fly, although she feels afraid. We can use in spite of the fact (that) in the same way as although. I'm no better in spite of the fact that I've taken the pills. > page 372 Punctuation 150 Exercises 1 But (B) Complete each sentence with but and one of these clauses: it didn't break, it's really quite modern, no one laughed, she turned it down ► I dropped the dish, but it didn't break. 1 The house looks old, 2 Emma was offered a job, 3 The joke was funny, 2 Although (B) Rewrite the sentences in Exercise 1 using although. ► Although I dropped the dish, it didn't break. 1 2 3 3 In spite of and although (E) Put in although or in spite of. ► My sister got the job, although she didn't expect to. 1……………………..I told the absolute truth, no one would believe me. 2 Daniel forgot his passport…………………………having it on his list. 3…………………………it was sunny, it was quite a cold day. 4 The goods were never delivered…………………………….the promise we had received. 5 Henry asked Claire to marry him……………………………..the fact that he's a lot older than her. 4 But, although, even though, in spite of and despite (A-E) Complete the report by putting in the correct linking words. There is always more than one possible answer. Although the ground was very wet, it was decided to go ahead with United's game against City. United were 1-0 winners (1)…………………………..not playing very well. (2)………………………..the poor conditions, City played some attractive football, (3)…………………………..they just couldn't score. (4)…………………………..they lost, their fans gave them a big cheer. 5 Although, even though, in spite of and despite (A-E) Join each pair of sentences. Be careful where you put the words in brackets. ► Nick used to smoke. He seems to be in good health, (although) Although Nick used to smoke, he seems to be in good health. ► I couldn't sleep. I was tired, (despite) / couldn't sleep despite being tired. 1 Trevor didn't notice the sign. It was right in front of him. (even though) 2 Matthew doesn't know any French. It was one of his school subjects, (although) 3 Henry's friend is a millionaire. He hates spending money, (despite) 4 We couldn't get tickets. We queued for an hour, (in spite of) 151 To, in order to, so that and for We use to, in order to, so that and for to express purpose, to say why we do things. The purpose of stopping is to buy a newspaper. B To We can use the to-infinitive to express purpose. Melanie was hurrying to catch her bus. Most people work to earn money. I rang to find out the train times. We went to the library to get some books. C In order to and so as to In order to and so as to are more formal than to. The government took these measures in order to reduce crime. The staff are working at weekends so as to complete the project in time. We can use the negative in order not to or so as not to. Melanie was hurrying in order not to miss her bus. The staff are working at weekends so as not to delay the project any further. We cannot use not to on its own. She was hurrying to catch her bus. NOT She-was-hurrying not to miss-her bus. D So that Look at this example. I'll post the card today so that it gets there on Daniel's birthday. After so that we use a subject and verb, e.g. it gets. We often use will or can for a present purpose and would or could for a past purpose. I'll give you a map so that you can find/you'll find the way all right. I gave Nick a map so that he could find/would be able to find the way all right. E To or for? We can use for with a noun to say why we do something. The whole family have gone out for a bike ride. Why don't you come over for coffee? To talk about the purpose of a thing, we use either a to-infinitive or for + an ing-form. This heater is to keep/for keeping the plants warm in winter. This machine is used to cut/for cutting plastic. But we do not use for + an ing-form to talk about a specific action. I put the heater on to keep the plants warm, NOT I put the heater-on-for keeping the plants warm. Exercises 1 To(B) Complete each sentence using to and these words: cash a cheque, finance her studies, go to sleep, hear the football results, look smart ► Laura went to the bank to cash a cheque. 1 Mrs Miles sometimes takes a pill ..................................................................... 2 Tom turned on the radio ............................................... 3 Just this once Mike is going to wear a suit............ 4 Jessica is borrowing some money ......... 2 In order to and so as to (C) Alan works for Zedco. He wants to succeed in business, so he is listening to a talk on the subject. Here is what the speaker is showing the audience. ACTION ► 1 2 3 4 study the market get to work earlier work harder take risks think positively PURPOSE be more successful impress the boss achieve more be a winner not miss any opportunities Say what Alan is going to do. Use either in order to or so as to. Both are correct. ► He's going to study the market in order to be more successful. 1 2 ....................................................................................................................................... ………………………………………………………………………………… 3 ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4 ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 To, for and so that (B, D, E) Comment on what each person says. Use the word in brackets. ? Ilona: I'm learning English. I want to get a better job. (to) ? ? llona is learning English to get a better job. Claude: I study encyclopedias. Then I can answer quiz questions, (so that) Claude studies encyclopedias so that he can answer quiz questions. Vicky: I'm saving up. I'm planning a holiday, (for) Vicky is saving up for a holiday. 1 Nick: I keep a dog. It guards the house, (to) 2 David: I'm going to be very careful. Then I won't have an accident, (so that) 3 Jessica: I'm going on a diet. I want to lose weight, (to) 4 Trevor: I often switch off the heating. It saves money, (to) 5 Sarah: I had to go to Birmingham. I had a business meeting, (for) 6 Emma: I wore boots because I didn't want my feet to get wet. (so that) 152 Review of linking words A Time words Look at these examples with when, while, as soon as, etc. My leg hurts when I walk. (when I walk = at the time I walk) Mark heard the news on the radio as/while he was driving home. (as/while he was driving = during the time he was driving) We're going to tidy up after everyone's gone. (after everyone's gone = later than everyone goes) As soon as Laura had left the house, it started to rain. (as soon as she had left = immediately after she had left) / must get to the post office before it closes. (before it closes = earlier than it closes) You have to wait until the light changes to green. (until it changes = up to the time it changes) David hasn't been able to work since he broke his leg. (since he broke his leg — from the time he broke his leg) Remember that we use the present simple for future time after when, etc. We say before it closes, until it changes, etc (see Unit 27). B If, unless and in case We use these words to express a condition (see Unit 148). Rachel might buy a car if she passes her test. (She may or may not pass her test.) You won't learn to use a keyboard properly unless you practise. (unless you practise = if you don't practise) We'd better allow plenty of time for the journey in case there are traffic hold-ups. (in case there are hold-ups = because there may be hold-ups) C But, although and in spite of We use these words to express the idea of a contrast (see Unit 150). The jacket was nice, but it was too small for me. Although the forecast said it would rain, it turned out to be a beautiful day. We still haven't got a sponsor in spite of writing/in spite of the fact that we've written to dozens of companies. D Because and so We use because to express the reason for something and so to express the result of something. / turned the heating on because it was cold. Henry started jogging because his doctor told him to. It was cold, so I turned the heating on. The stereo didn't work, so Vicky took it back to the shop. E To, in order to and so that We use these words to express purpose (see Unit 151). Sarah went to Birmingham to meet a client. We're having to borrow money in order to pay our bills. I took the bread out of the freezer so that it would defrost. 152 Exercises Time words (A) Arlene Black's new CD is now available in the shops. Write the titles of her songs. Use these words instead of the ones in brackets: as soon as, before, since, when, while, until ► Think of me (during the time) I'm away Think of me while I'm away 1 I'll love you (up to the day) I die 2 I hear music (at the time) I see you 3 Come back (earlier than) I forget you 4 I've been sad (from the time) you left me 5 I fell in love (immediately after) we met Linking words (B-E) Put in these words: although, because, but, if, in case, in order to, in spite of so, so that, unless ► Olivia booked a babysitter so that she could go out for the evening. 1 ……………………. it was late, Nick didn't seem in a hurry to leave. 2 They put video cameras in shops ........ ……………. stop people stealing things. 3 We decided not to go out for a meal……………………… we were simply too tired. 4 ………………….. ... you're ready, we can start now. 5 Our room was very small, .................................. we didn't really mind. 6 No one was watching the television,................................... I switched it off. 7 You can't drive a car ................................ you've got a licence. 8 ……………… ........ having absolutely no talent, Guy became a popular TV personality and chat show host. 9 I think my answers are right, but can I just check them with yours ...... I've made a mistake? Linking words (A-E) Complete the conversation. Choose the correct linking word. Daniel: What are you going to do (►) after/befefe you finish college, Rachel? Rachel: Vicky and I will be off to the States (1) as soon as/in spite of this term is over. We're going to travel around, and we may go to Canada (2) so that/to see some friends of Vicky's. We've been thinking about nothing else (3) since/until we bought our plane tickets. Daniel: It sounds great. How are you getting around in the States? Rachel: By Greyhound bus. I know it takes longer than flying, (4) but/in spite of it'll be more interesting. We fly to LA and then we're taking the bus to New York. We're going to buy a special ticket (5) in order/so that we can go anywhere we like on the way. Daniel: Yes, it's better by bus (6) because/unless you can stop off at interesting places. Rachel: Of course the bus will probably be tiring. Daniel: Maybe you should take plenty of money (7) if/in case you decide to fly instead. Rachel: I'll have to be careful with my money. I'm hoping to stay out there (8) unless/until I have to come back and start my job in September. I'm really looking forward to the trip, (9) although/because I'll be sad to leave here. And what about you? What are you doing this summer? Daniel: I'd go away somewhere (10) if/in case I could afford to. But I'm working. I've got no money, (11) because/so I'll have to earn some. Rachel: Have you really got no money (12) although/in spite of the fact that you've had a part-time job this term? Daniel: You know me, Rachel. If I've got money, I spend it. 153 Links across sentences A Introduction Rita: You go to United's games, don't you, Tom? You watch them on TV, too. Tom: Well, I'm a fan. It's wonderful when United win. On the other hand, it's terrible when they lose. Rita: Why not have a change? After all, there are other things in life. Tom: Such as? Rita: There's music, for example. Why don't you go to a concert some time? Tom: But I don't like classical music. Look at the words and phrases too, on the other hand, after all and for example. They all make a link with an earlier sentence. When Rita says There's musk, for example, she is giving an example of other things in life, which she has already mentioned. B Words and phrases meaning 'and', 'but' and 'so' 'And': Sarah often works late. She works on Saturdays sometimes, too/as well. Sarah often works late. She also works on Saturdays sometimes. Arlene Black has a yacht and a helicopter. In addition, she has five cars. I'm not inviting my cousin — I don't like him. Besides, he didn't invite me to his party. The buildings are in a very poor condition. Furthermore, there is no money to repair them. 'But': I haven't been very well recently. Still, it could be worse. Nick is in love with Rita. Rita, however, is in love with Tom. Everyone thought that Emma should accept the offer. Nevertheless/All the same, she turned it down. I don't want to be late for the meeting. On the other hand, I don't want to get there too early. 'So': The holiday had been a complete disaster. We therefore decided to fly home early if we could. Someone switched the freezer off. Consequently/As a result, all the food was spoilt. Some of these words and phrases are rather formal and typical of written English. They are consequently, furthermore, however, in addition, nevertheless and therefore. C Other linking words and phrases Rephrasing: Correcting yourself: Contradicting: Picking up a topic: Jessica isn't the most popular person around here. In other words, no one likes her. We play basketball. I mean/Or rather volleyball. Sarah isn't lazy. On the contrary, she works extremely hard. I like Natasha. I went on holiday with her. ~ Talking of holidays, what are your plans for this year? Changing the subject: It's a lovely day, isn't it? ~ Yes, beautiful. By the way, have you seen Melanie? Supporting a statement: We don't need to drive to the club, do we? After all, it's only about 200 metres from here. Dismissing something: I'm not sure a thank-you letter is really necessary. Anyway, I can't be bothered to write one. Giving an example: Yes, I do think Henry is rude. He shouts at waiters, for example/for instance. 153 Exercises 1 Words and phrases meaning 'and', 'but' and 'so' (B) What do the underlined words mean? Write and, but or so. ► 1 2 3 4 5 6 Daniel's suitcase got left behind. He got it back in the end, however. I'm too tired to go for a walk. Besides, it looks like rain. The road was under water. The police therefore closed it to traffic. We took lots of photos. We videoed the speeches as well. It was a terrible journey. Still, we got there safely in the end. A strike by air traffic controllers has begun. Many flights have consequently been cancelled. The company has spent millions on computers. Nevertheless, it does not seem to have become more efficient. = but = = = = = = 2 Links across sentences (B-C) Complete this letter to a local newspaper. Choose the correct word or phrase. There's been a lot of talk about a 'spaceship' seen over the town at about eleven o'clock on Friday night. (►) As a result/Nevertheless, hundreds of enthusiastic sky-watchers have arrived in town, hoping that it will return. But was it really a spaceship? About twenty people say they saw it. (1) Consequently/Furthermore, there is a photograph which is supposed to show the object in the sky. We know, (2) however/as a result, that trick photos are easy to produce. (3) By the way/In other words, it is almost certainly a fake. But it would be wrong to treat the whole thing as a joke. (4) All the same/On the contrary, all such reports should be carefully investigated. (5) After all/Anyway, the arrival of a spacecraft from another world would indeed be a serious matter. But usually there is a more simple explanation. Many supposed spaceships turn out to be weather balloons, (6) for example/or rather. A similar mistake probably lies behind the belief that someone from another world really did pay us a visit last Friday. 3 Links across sentences (C) What would you say? Give your answer using a linking word or phrase. ► Support Emma's opinion: she might not get another offer. Emma: You're right. Maybe I should accept the offer. After all, you might not get another one. 1 Rephrase what Rita is saying: she doesn't want to see Nick. Rita: I don't know if I'll have time to see Nick. 2 Change the subject and ask what the time is. Tom: I hope Wayne Johnson will be fit to play for United on Saturday. 3 Dismiss the idea of buying a sweater: they haven't got one in your size. Daniel: I'm not sure if that sweater really suits you. 4 Mention Sarah as an example. Claire: Lots of our friends have mobile phones, don't they? 5 Contradict what Nick says. Nick: Sorry. I persuaded you to see that film and you hated it, didn't you? Appendix 1. Word formation A Introduction Look at these examples. Lots of people believe that God exists. Lots of people believe in the existence of God. Exist is a verb and existence is a noun. The word existence has two parts: exist and ence. We call ence a 'suffix'. We add it to end of the verb exist to form a noun. We can also use suffixes to form verbs, adjectives and adverbs. The system is being modernized. (= made modern) I grew up in an industrial town. (= a town where there is a lot of industry) The man was behaving strangely. (= in a strange way) There are many different suffixes, such as ence, ize, al, ly, tion and ment. Some of them can be used to form many different words. For example, there are a lot of nouns ending in tion: action, education, explanation, information, instruction, etc. There are no exact rules about which suffix you can add to which word. Adding a suffix can also involve other changes to the form of a word. industry —> industrial repeat —> repetition science —> scientist. Now look at these examples. They're going to play the match on Wednesday. They're going to replay the match on Wednesday. We can add re to the beginning of the verb play. We call re a 'prefix'. A prefix adds something to the meaning of a word. The verb replay means 'play again'. We can also add prefixes to nouns and adjectives. See G and H. B Noun suffixes ment ion/tion/sion ation/ition ence/ance ty/ity ness ing the prospects for employment reach an agreement take part in a discussion increase steel production ask for permission an invitation to a party people's opposition to the idea a preference for houses rather than flats a distance of ten miles no certainty that we shall succeed keep the door locked for security people's willingness to help recovering from an illness enter a building reach an understanding C Nouns for people er/or ist ant/ent an/ian ee the driver of the car a newspaper editor a place full of tourists a scientist doing an experiment an assistant to help with my work students at the university Republicans and Democrats the electrician rewiring the house an employee of the company (= someone employed) notes for examinees (= people taking an exam) We also use er for things, especially machines. a hair-dryer a food mixer a cassette player D Verb suffixes Many verbs are formed by adding ize or ise to an adjective. Some are formed by adding en. ize European safety rules are being standardized. They privatized the company. en They're widening the road here. Meeting you has really brightened my day. E Adjective suffixes Most of these adjectives are formed from nouns. al a professional musician Britain's coastal waters ic a metallic sound a scientific inquiry ive an informative guidebook an offer exclusive to our readers ful a successful career feeling hopeful about the future less feeling hopeless about the future (= without hope) powerless to do anything about it ous guilty of dangerous driving luxurious holiday apartments y a rocky path the salty taste of sea water ly > 109A a friendly smile a very lively person able/ible an acceptable error (= an error that can be accepted) a comprehensible explanation a valuable painting (= worth a lot of money) a comfortable chair F Adverbs ly>108 He looked around nervously. I moved here quite recently. G Some common prefixes anti (= against) inter (= between) mini (= small) mis (= wrongly) multi (= many) over (= too much) post (= after) pre {— before) re (— again) semi (= half) super (= big) under (= too little) anti-roads protestors anti-government troops an international match interstate highways in the US a minicomputer the minibar in your hotel room mishear what someone says miscalculate the amount multicoloured lights a multimillionaire too fond of overeating overcrowded roads the post-war world a postgraduate student pre-match entertainment in prehistoric times a reunion of old friends reread a favourite book semi-skilled work sitting in a semicircle a huge new superstore a supertanker carrying oil thin and underweight underpaid work H Negative prefixes We can also use a prefix to form an opposite. For example, the opposite of clear is unclear (= not clear). Un is the most common negative prefix. dis a dishonest way to behave can't help being disorganized dislike the idea disappear from the scene a disadvantage of the plan il (+ 1) an illegal drug an illiberal attitude im (+ m or p) an impossible task an impolite question in an indirect route the invisible man a great injustice ir (+ r) an irregular shape an irrelevant remark non non-alcoholic drinks a non-stop flight un an uncomfortable chair an unusual event an undated letter uncertain what to do unpack your suitcase unzip the bag Appendix 2: The spelling of endings A Plural nouns 3 We add s to a noun to form the plural. a car —> two cars a name —> some names 1 After s, sh, ch and x we add es /iz/. glass —> glasses dish —> dishes match —> matches box —> boxes 2 A few nouns ending in o have es. heroes potatoes tomatoes But most have s. discos kilos photos pianos radios stereos studios zoos 3 When a noun ends in a consonant + y, the y changes to ies. penny —> pennies story —> stories We do not change y after a vowel. day —> days journey —> journeys D The ing-form 1 We normally leave out e when we add ing to a verb. take —> taking drive —> driving But we keep a double e before ing. see —> seeing agree —> agreeing 2 When a verb ends in ie, it changes to ying. die —> dying lie —> lying But y does not change. hurry —> hurrying 3 Sometimes we double a final consonant. This happens when a one-syllable verb ends with one vowel and one consonant, e.g. win, put. win —> winning put --> putting For more details about doubling, see G. B The present simple s ending In the third person singular, a present simple verb ends in s. (See Unit 5B.) I know —> he knows I work —> she works 1 After s, sh, ch and x we add es /iz/. pass —> passes wash —> washes catch —> catches mix —> mixes 2 Some verbs ending in o have es. go —> goes do —> does 3 When a verb ends in a consonant + y, the y changes to ies. hurry --> hurries copy —> copies We do not change y after a vowel. stay —> stays enjoy —> enjoys E Adverbs We form many adverbs from an adjective + ly. slow —> slowly calm —> calmly 1 We do not leave out e before ly. safe —> safely strange --> strangely But there are a few exceptions. due —> duly true —> truly whole —> wholly 2 When an adjective ends in a consonant + y, the y changes to ily. angry —> angrily happy —> happily An exception is shy --> shyly. 3 When an adjective ends in a consonant + le, the e changes to y. probable —> probably sensible —> sensibly 4 When an adjective ends in ic, we add ally. automatic —> automatically romantic --> romantically But there is one exception. public —> publicly C The ed ending Most verbs have ed in the past tense. (See Unit 8B.) Most past participles also end in ed. (See Unit 1 IB.) look --> looked call -> called 1 If the verb ends in e, we add d. hope —> hoped save —>saved 2 When a verb ends in a consonant + y, the y changes to ied. hurry —> hurried copy —> copied Sometimes we double a final consonant. This happens when a one-syllable verb ends with one vowel and one consonant, e.g. beg, plan. beg —> begged plan —> planned For more details about doubling, see G. F The comparison of adjectives We form the comparative and superlative of short adjectives with er and est. See Unit 110. old —> older, oldest quick —> quicker, quickest 1 If the adjective ends in e, we add r and st. late —> later, latest fine —> finer, finest 2 When an adjective ends in a consonant + y, the y changes to ier or iest. heavy —> heavier, heaviest lucky —> luckier, luckiest 3 Sometimes we double a final consonant. This happens when a one-syllable adjective ends with one vowel and one consonant, e.g. big, flat. big —> bigger, biggest flat —> flatter, flattest For more details about doubling, see G. G The doubling of consonants 1 When we add ed, ing, er or est to a word, we sometimes double a final consonant. This happens when a one-syllable word ends with one vowel and one consonant, e.g. stop, get, thin, sad. stop —> stopped get —> getting thin —> thinner sad —> saddest 2 We do not double y, w or x. play —> played new —> newest fax —> faxing We do not double when there are two consonants. ask —> asking short —> shortest rich —> richer And we do not double when there are two vowels. seem —> seemed shout—> shouting fair —> fairest 3 The rule about doubling is also true for words of more than one syllable (e.g. permit = per + mit), but only if the last syllable is stressed. per'mit —> per'mitted prefer —> preferring We do not usually double a consonant when the syllable is unstressed. 'open —> opened 'enter—> entering An exception is that in British English 1 is usually doubled, even if the syllable is unstressed. travel ~> travelled (US: traveled) Appendix 3: Punctuation A Full stop (.), question mark (?) and exclamation mark (!) A sentence ends with one of these punctuation marks. Full stop: It's cold today. The office was closed. Please be careful Question mark: Who's that? Did you see the show? Could you wait, please? Exclamation mark: Oh, no! I don't believe it! In the US a full stop is called a 'period'. B Semi-colon (;) We can use a semi-colon between two separate statements which are linked in meaning. Melanie is a very kind person; she visits David in hospital every day. We could also use a full stop here. C Colon (:) We can use a colon before an explanation or before a list. Vicky felt nervous: she hated the dark. There wasn't much in the fridge: a couple of sausages, some butter, half a bottle of milk. D Dash (-) A dash is rather informal. It is sometimes used instead of a colon or a semi-colon. I'm having a great time - there's lots to do here. Vicky felt nervous - she hated the dark. E Comma (,) We often use a comma when we link two statements with and, but or or. Daniel was tired, and his feet were hurting. It's a really good camera, but I can't afford it. Note the two subjects in each sentence: Daniel... his feet and It... I. When there is only one subject, we do not use a comma. Daniel sat down and took his shoes off. We can also use a comma when a sentence has a linking word like when or although. When the office is busy, Sarah has to work late. For commas with relative clauses, see Unit 141. Sometimes a comma can separate off an adverb or a phrase. Sarah, unfortunately, has to work late. On busy days, Sarah has to work late. Here the commas separate off on busy days and unfortunately. The rules about commas are not very exact. In general, commas are more likely around longer phrases. With a short phrase there is often no comma. On busy days Sarah has to work late. Sometimes she has to work late. It is less usual to separate off something at the end of the sentence. Sarah has to work late when the office is busy. She stayed late to get the work done. We do not usually put a comma before to expressing purpose. We also use commas in a list of more than two. The last two are linked by and, often without a comma. I went out with Rachel, Vicky, Emma and Matthew. F Quotation marks (") We put direct speech in quotation marks. Laura said, 'You haven't put those shelves up yet.' 'I haven't had time,' replied Trevor. We normally use a comma to separate the direct speech from the rest of the sentence. The comma comes before the quotation mark. Quotation marks are also called 'quotes' or 'inverted commas'. Double quotation marks are sometimes used. Laura said, "You haven't put those shelves up yet." We can put quotation marks around titles. Do you watch that American comedy series called 'Roseanne'? We often use quotation marks when we mention a word or phrase. What does 'punctuation' mean? Rap music is also called 'hip hop'. G Hyphen (-) We sometimes use hyphens in these structures. Compound noun: eating ice-cream Compound expression before a noun: an oven-ready meal Noun formed from a phrasal verb: ready for take-off Noun + ing-form: interested in rock-climbing Before the last word of a compound number: a hundred and twenty-six people After some prefixes: anti-aircraft guns Letter + noun: sending an e-mail The rules about hyphens are not very exact. For example, you may see a compound noun written as phonecard, phone-card or phone card. Hyphens are not very frequent in British English, and they are used even less in American English. If you are unsure, it is usually safer to write two separate words. H Apostrophe (') Look at these examples. Today we're going for a drive in the country. Everyone is looking at Nick's car. We use an apostrophe (') in short forms, when there is a missing letter, e.g. we're (= we are). See Unit 32. We also use an apostrophe with s to form the possessive of a noun, e.g. Nick's car. See Unit 93. I Capital letters There are two capital letters (big letters) in this sentence. The boss said I could leave early. We use a capital letter at the beginning of a sentence and for the word I. We also use a capital letter to begin the names of people, places, companies, etc. Mark and Sarah New Orleans the High Street Somerset House General Motors This includes the names of books, films, magazines, etc. All the important words start with a capital letter. The Spy Who Loved Me Four Weddings and a Funeral Newsweek We also use a capital letter for days of the week, months of the year, holidays and festivals, historical times, nationalities and most abbreviations. Monday August Easter the New Year the Industrial Revolution some Italian wine the UN (= the United Nations) Appendix 5: American English The differences between British and American English are mainly matters of pronunciation and vocabulary. There are also a few spelling differences such as British centre and colour and American center and color. There are some grammatical differences. Although they are not very great, those points that are most relevant to learners of English are explained here. A Seem, look, etc Compare these examples. BRITISH AMERICAN In British English there can be a noun (e.g. pilot) after appear, feel, look, seem and sound. She seemed (to be) a good pilot. Americans do not say She seemed a good pilot. They use to be or like after these verbs. She seemed to be a good pilot. OR She seemed like a good pilot. It looks to be a lovely evening. OR It looks like a lovely evening. I felt like a fool. It looks (to be) a lovely evening. I felt a fool. B Present perfect and past simple (Units 11-15) The British use the present perfect for recent actions, and especially with just, already and yet. Bob has washed the dishes, look. We've already eaten our lunch. I've just seen Elaine. Have you corrected your work yet? The British normally use the present perfect with ever and never, not the past simple. Have you ever played cricket? The child has never seen snow before. Americans can use either the present perfect or the past simple in these sentences. Bob has washed the dishes, look. OR Bob washed the dishes, look. We've already eaten our lunch. OR We already ate our lunch. I've just seen Elaine. OR I just saw Elaine. Have you corrected your work yet? OR Did you correct your work yet? Americans normally use the past simple with ever and never, but the present perfect is possible. Did you ever play baseball? OR Have you ever played baseball? The child never saw snow before. OR The child has never seen snow before. C Shall (Unit 23D) The British use will for the future, but they can also use shall in the first person. I will/I shall be here tomorrow. We will/We shall contact you. Americans do not normally use shall for the future. I will be here tomorrow. We will contact you. The British use shall to make an offer. Shall I make the coffee? Americans normally use should. Should I make the coffee? The British can use Shall we ...? for a suggestion. Shall we go for a walk? Americans do not normally use shall in suggestions. How about a walk? Would you like to take a walk? D Got and gotten Both have and have got are used in Britain and in the US. He has a lot of money./He's got a lot of money. (= He is rich.) The British do not use gotten. He's made a lot of money from his business activities. Your driving has got better. In the US, have gotten expresses an action. He's gotten/made a lot of money from his business activities. Americans also use gotten meaning 'become'. Your driving has gotten better. E Negatives and questions with have (Unit 31) In Britain there are two different structures. I haven't (got) enough time. OR I don't have enough time. Has Carol got a computer? OR Does Carol have a computer? Americans normally use the auxiliary do. I don't have enough time. Does Carol have a computer? In the past tense, did is usual in both countries. We didn't have tickets. F Emphatic do (Unit 33C) The British can use do with an imperative for emphasis. Have a piece of cake. OR Do have a piece of cake. Do with an imperative is less common in the US. Have a piece of cake. G Do for an action The British can use do to refer to an action already mentioned. I don't practise as often as I should (do). You'd better take your pill. ~ I already have (done). Americans do not use do in this way. I don't practice as often as I should. You'd better take your pill. ~ I already have. H Question tags (Unit 42) Both the British and the Americans can use question tags when talking about facts. Blackpool is in Lancashire, isn't it? Las Vegas is in Nevada, isn't it? But in general Americans use tags much less often than the British. They do not use tags to persuade or to argue. A sentence like You aren't listening to me, are you? is British but not American. But Americans often use right? and OK? as tags. I'll bring the luggage in, shall I? I Can't and mustn't (Unit 46C) The British use can't to say that something is impossible. I rang, but there's no reply. They can't be at home. J I'll bring the baggage in, OK? Americans can also use mustn't to say that something is impossible. I called, but there's no reply. They can't be home./They mustn't be home. Needn't and don't need to (Unit 48) The British can use either form. You needn't see the inspector. OR You don't need to see the inspector. Americans do not normally use needn't. You don't need to see the inspector. K Group nouns (Unit 81B) In Britain a group noun can usually take either a singular or a plural verb. The crowd was/were getting restless. Sweden plays/play Germany tomorrow. In the US a group noun takes a singular verb, The crowd was getting restless. Sweden plays Germany tomorrow. L The (Unit 86C and 87A) The British use the with a musical instrument. / can play the piano. Americans can leave out the. I can play piano/play the piano. The British say in hospital. My sister is still in hospital. Americans say in the hospital. My sister is still in the hospital. M Numbers The British use and between hundred and the rest of the number. six hundred and twenty Americans can leave out and. six hundred twenty OR six hundred and twenty N Dates There are a number of different ways of writing and saying dates, but these are the most common. BRITISH 23 June 'the twenty-third of June' 'June the twenty-third' AMERICAN June 23 'June twenty-third' The British write 23.6.98, and Americans write 6.23.98. 0 You and one (Unit 98C) The British use you for people in general, including the speaker. In more formal English they can use one. You/One can't be too careful Americans use you for people in general. One is unusual, You can't be too careful. P Somewhere and someplace (Unit 103) In informal American English, everyplace, someplace, anyplace and no place can be used as well as everywhere, somewhere, etc. Let's find somewhere to eat. Let's find somewhere/someplace to eat. Q Adjectives and adverbs (Unit 108) In informal speech we can sometimes use an adjective form instead of an adverb. Americans do this more than the British. We had some really nice weather. It certainly doesn't make things any easier. We had some really nice/some real nice weather. It certainly/sure doesn't make things any easier. R Prepositions (Units 118-126) There are some differences in prepositions. BRITISH round/around the village towards/toward the west looking out of the window outside the town AMERICAN around the village toward the west looking out the window/out of the window outside the town/outside of the town In American English there is a special use of through as a preposition of time. He'll be on the road from Tuesday to/till Friday. They will stay in Brighton until the end of April. He'll be on the road (from) Tuesday through Friday. They will stay in Miami through April. Note the prepositions after different. BRITISH This cup is differentfrom/to the others. AMERICAN This cup is different from/than the others. Compare these expressions. BRITISH in Bond Street at the weekend, at weekends stay at home a player in the team ten minutes past four twenty to seven write to me talk to someone meet someone AMERICAN on Fifth Avenue on the weekend, on weekends stay home a player on the team ten minutes past/after four twenty to/of seven write me/write to me talk to/with someone meet with someone S In case (Unit 148D) In case can have different meanings. BRITISH Take an umbrella in case it rains. (= because it may rain) AMERICAN In case you're sick, you should call the office. (= if you're sick) T Go and... Americans can leave out and from this structure. I'll go and buy the tickets. I'll go buy/I'll go and buy the tickets. U The subjunctive We can use expressions like I suggest that ... and It's important that ... to talk about what we want to happen. Look at these examples. BRITISH Tim's parents have suggested that he gets a job/that he should get a job. It's important that everything goes/everything should go according to plan. The British normally use the present simple or should. (They use the subjunctive only in formal English.) AMERICAN Tim's parents have suggested that he get a job. It's important that everything go according to plan. Americans normally use a form called the 'subjunctive', e.g. get, go. V Irregular verbs In the past tense some verbs can have either an irregular t ending or the regular ed ending. These verbs are burn, learn, smell, spell, spill and spoil. The British prefer the t ending, although ed is also possible. They burnt/burned the old sofa. You've spelt/spelled this word wrong. Americans normally use the ed ending, They burned the old sofa. You've spelled this word wrong. But we say e.g. a slice of burnt toast in both British and American English. In Britain the verbs dream, lean and leap can be regular, or they can have a t ending. I dreamt/dreamed about you. I dreamed about you. These three forms ending in t have the vowel sound /e/. For example, dreamt is pronounced /dremt/, and dreamed is pronounced /dri:md/. The verb dive is regular in Britain but can be irregular in the US. Craig dived into the water. Craig dived/dove into the water. Appendix 6: Irregular verbs VERB PAST TENSE PAST/PASSIVE VERB PAST TENSE PAST/PASSIVE find flee fly forbid found fled flew forbad(e) found fled flown forbidden forget forgive freeze get forgot forgave froze got forgotten forgiven frozen got give go grind grow hang have hear hide hit hold hurt keep kneel know lay lead lean gave went ground grew hung had heard hid hit held hurt kept knelt knew laid led leant PARTICIPLE arise be bear beat become begin bend bet arose was, were bore beat became began bent bet arisen been borne beaten become begun bent bet bind bite bound bit betted bound bitten bleed blow break breed bring broadcast build burn bled blew broke bred brought broadcast built burnt burst buy catch choose come cost creep cut deal dig dive burst bought caught chose came cost crept cut dealt dug dived do draw dream did drew dreamt dreamed drank drove ate fell fed felt fought drink drive eat fall feed feel fight bit bled blown broken bred brought broadcast built burnt burned burned burst bought caught chosen come cost crept cut dealt dug dived dove (us) done drawn dreamt dreamed drunk driven eaten fallen fed felt fought PARTICIPLE leap learn leave lend let lie light lose make mean meet mow leapt learnt learned left lent let lay lit lighted lost made meant met mowed gotten (us) given gone ground grown hung had heard hidden hit held hurt kept knelt known laid led leant leaned leaned leapt leaped leaped learnt learned left lent let lain lit lighted lost made meant met mown mowed VERB PAST TENSE PAST/PASSIVE PARTICIPLE pay put read ride ring rise run say see seek sell send set sew paid put read rode rang rose ran said saw sought sold sent set sewed paid put read ridden rung risen run said seen sought sold sent set sewn shake shine shoot show shook shone shot showed sewed shaken shone shot shown shrink shrank shut sing sink sit sleep slide smell shut sang sank sat slept slid smelt speak speed spoke sped spell spelt spend spill spent spilt spin spit split spoil spun spat split spoilt spoiled spread sprang spread spring showed shrunk shrunk shut sung sunk sat slept slid smelt smelled smelled spoken sped speeded speeded spelt spelled spelled spent spilt spilled spilled spun spat split spoilt spoiled spread sprung VERB PAST TENSE PAST/PASSIVE PARTICIPLE stand steal stick sting stink stood stole stuck stung stank stride strike swear sweep swim swing take teach tear tell think throw tread understand wake wear weave weep win wind write strode struck swore swept swam swung took taught tore told thought threw trod understood woke waked wore wove weaved wept won wound wrote stood stolen stuck stung stunk stunk stridden struck sworn swept swum swung taken taught torn told thought thrown trodden understood woken waked worn woven weaved wept won wound written The verbs in this list are also irregular when they have a prefix, e.g. overtake - overtook - overtaken, foretell - foretold - foretold. A few verbs have irregular present simple forms: VERB be do go have say PRESENT SIMPLE I am; you/we/they are; he/she/it is he/she/it does he/she/it goes he/she/it has he/she/it says For burnt/burned, dreamt/dreamed, etc in British and American English see page 382. For gotten see page 378. Key to the starting test The number after the answer tells you which unit of the book has information and practice on that grammar point. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 c) c) d) a) a) d) c) d) b) d) b) d) d) a) a) b) b) d) c) b) d) b) a) c) 3 4,6 5,6 7 8 9 9,10 11 12,13 14 15 16 17 18,19 20 23 24,25 26 27 28 31 33 34,36 37 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 c) b) b) b) b) d) b) c) c) d) b) b) b) b) d) c) a) c) d) d) a) b) c) c) 49,53 54 55,56 57 58 60,62 61,62 64 65 66 68 70 72 73 74 76,77 78 80 81 83,84 86 87 89 90 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 b) a) d) b) d) b) c) d) c) d) c) c) a) c) d) d) d) c) a) c) d) d) b) c) 106 108 109 110,111 112 113 114 115 118 119 120 121 123 124, 125 126, 127 128-130 131 132 133 134 136 137 139 140 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 c) b) d) d) c) d) b) c) a) b) 38 40 41 42 43 44 46 47 48 51,52 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 c) d) b) d) d) d) a) b) c) a) 91 92 94 95 96 99 100, 101 102 103 105 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 c) b) a) b) d) d) d) d) 141,142 143 144,147 145, 147 146,147 149 150 151 Key to the exercises Unit 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 determiner verb pronoun adverb pronoun verb adjective 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 1 them to the bottle bank. 2 me a job. 3 them to the police. 4 you my umbrella. 1 1 They're/They are playing basketball. 2 She's/She is taking a photo. 3 He's/He is painting a picture. 4 They're/They are carrying a parcel. 2 1 2 3 4 are trying are you finding is helping We're/We are getting verb verb noun adjective verb 3 1 2 3 4 5 it's/it is raining. I'm/I am working. you're/you are sitting on my coat. I'm/I am writing an important letter. I'm/I am getting/feeling better. adverbial object complement 1 1 a feeling 2 a repeated action 3 a fact 4 a fact 5 6 7 8 a thought a feeling a repeated action a thought 2 1 2 3 4 5 doesn't speak walk needs love doesn't eat 6 7 8 9 10 don't look doesn't work don't like wins don't own 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I go comes we travel don't you come doesn't make do you take I love 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 does it cost I don't know that doesn't matter I don't want Does that annoy it doesn't annoy find l 1 He's/He is talking 2 I think 3 they're/they are discussing lives 4 Are you looking 5 Do you know 6 works 7 She doesn't work preposition linking word adverb determiner adjective linking word noun Verb: is, loves Noun: Claire, cafe Adjective: wonderful, old, romantic Adverb: madly, unfortunately, rather Preposition: of, for, at Determiner: a, their, some Pronoun: He, her, they Linking word: and, but, so 1 2 3 4 5 verb noun adjective verb noun 6 7 8 9 10 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 2 1 1 2 3 subject verb complement 2 1 e) 2 a) 3 c) 4 d) 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 5 6 Tom likes football. David had an accident. We moved the piano. Harriet is a tall woman. Everyone sat on the floor. Mike's friends gave him some help. 4 1 also, with several young people 2 first, in 1994 3 naturally, without help 4 fortunately, from the National Lottery 1 1 2 3 4 David gave Melanie a sweater. Laura gave Trevor a scarf. Emma gave Matthew a tennis racket. Henry gave Claire a necklace. 1 2 3 4 sold her bike to her sister. told the joke to all his friends. gave her neighbour some help. wrote her teacher a letter. Unit 3 2 3 5 We aren't spending 6 It isn't taking 7 are you waiting 8 I'm/I am correcting 1 for 2 to 3 to 4 for 5 for 6 to Unit 6 8 You know 9 1 give 10 she gives 11 She 12 It saves 13 I agree 14 I'm/I am wasting 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 It's/It is snowing, It's/It is coming I start, I'm/I am starting I'm/I am going, I drive rises, we're/we are travelling I'm/I am writing, I promise I want, I'm/I am saving 3 1 2 3 4 she always takes She's/She is always missing do you always go They're/They are always arguing. 3 Unit 10 1 1 state 2 action 3 state 4 5 action state 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 you're having you're thinking I come It weighed 3 1 are being 2 's/is 3 're being/are being 4 5 're/are 's being/is being 4 1 2 3 4 5 I think I have it didn't fit I see 5 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 We lost it came was coming went fell 3 1 The train was waiting when we arrived at the station. I was reading a library book when I found a £10 note in it. Sarah had an electric shock when she touched the wire. When the doors opened, the crowd rushed in. When the campers woke, they saw that the sun was shining. 2 And I've still got a chance to win. It's too expensive to buy. It uses so much petrol. I think it's going to be perfect for me. I've never wanted to change it. 3 4 5 She swam in the sea. She had a picnic. She played volleyball. She went out dancing. 1 2 3 4 5 6 were started saw called tried was 7 8 9 10 11 arrived fought brought entered found 1 2 3 4 We didn't try did you see I didn't know did you go 5 6 7 I didn't like did Sarah enjoy I didn't want Unit 9 1 2 3 4 2 1 were you doing 2 I was taking 3 She was coming 6 7 8 9 10 were playing I was working I lost I got did Unit 11 1 2 3 4 1 He sat down on a chair while I was painting it. As he was running for a bus, he collided with a lamppost. His hair caught fire when he was cooking chips. When he was holding a beautiful vase, he suddenly dropped it. He was sitting in the garden when a wasp stung him on the nose. 2 Unit 8 1 1 2 3 4 Unit 7 1 11 was making phone calls all evening. 2 I was waiting in the rain for half an hour. 3 I was making sandwiches all afternoon. 4 I was sitting in a traffic jam for two hours. 5 My neighbour was playing loud music all night. were watching television were dancing in the street was driving his taxi was writing an essay 4 5 6 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 1 He's/He has broken his leg. 2 They've/They have built a house. 3 They've/They have seen a film. 4 She's/She has caught a fish. 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I was going You weren't looking you were going She's/She has repaired it. I've/I have opened the window. They've/They have arrived. He's/He has moved it. We've/We have watched all these. I haven't done hasn't made You haven't put I've/I have hurt you've/you have had have you put It's/It has disappeared 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 I've/I have looked have you done I've/I have painted I've/I have cleaned We've/We have made has that brush gone you've/you have left 2 Unit 12 1 2 3 4 1 1 just tidied it. 2 He's/He has just made some/it. 3 I've/I have just eaten it. 4 she's/she has just checked them. 5 I've/I have just rung her. 1 1 haven't started it yet. 2 I've/I have just seen Andrew 3 he's/he has already done 4 I haven't finished my plan yet. 5 You've/You have already begun 6 We've/We have already spent 7 I haven't done any real work yet 8 I've/I have just realized 9 I've/I have just decided 1 2 3 4 5 He hasn't had any fun for a long time. He's/He has had a cold for a week. He hasn't seen his friends for ages. He hasn't done any sport since last year. He's/He has been busy with his studies for months. 1 rung her since 2 seen them for 3 watched one for 4 5 had one since played (it) since 2 3 4 5 3 1 haven't taken a photo since 2 weeks since I last saw 3 was the last time we played 4 haven't eaten anything for 1 1 has stood 2 was 3 stayed 2 1 b) 2 b) 3 a) 3 Unit 15 1 been 2 been 3 gone 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 've/have lived 've/have known were 1 this, last 2 today, yesterday 3 4 last, this this, yesterday What's/What has happened He's/He has had He fell broke did it happen told 7 8 9 10 11 12 You knew you didn't tell I didn't see I haven't seen He's/He has had He did 4 1 Unit 13 1 Have you ever been to San Francisco? No, I've never been to San Francisco I've been to Los Angeles. Have you ever played basketball? No, I've never played basketball I've played volleyball. Have you ever seen/read (the play) 'Hamlet'? No, I've never read/seen 'Hamlet' I've read/seen 'Macbeth'. 3 1 the second time I've lost my bank card. 2 This is the third time the washing-machine has broken down. 3 This is the first time I've been in/to England. 4 This is the second time I've stayed in this hotel. 5 This is (about) the fifth time I've missed the bus. 4 1 I haven't seen her today. 2 we haven't been there this weekend. 3 we haven't had one this term. 4 has rung this evening. 1 1 have arrived 2 repaired 3 I've/I have lost 4 has started 5 ran 6 earned Unit 14 7 8 9 10 11 12 We planted have gone has turned I phoned I've/I have made broke The train drivers have gone on strike. They stopped work(ing) at twelve o'clock. The Queen has arrived in Toronto. She flew there in an RAF aircraft. Two men have escaped from Parkhurst Prison. They got away during the night. The actor Howard Bates has died in a car accident. His car crashed into a wall. Linda Jones has won the women's marathon. She ran it in 2 hours 27 minutes. 2 3 4 5 6 Unit 16 1 1 2 3 4 5 have you been doing She's/She has been helping have you been studying I've/I have been trying it's/it has been getting 2 1 they've/they have been arguing 2 he's/he has been cooking 3 he's/he has been driving 4 He's/He has been waiting 3 1 Matthew has been swimming for an hour. 2 My friends have been travelling (around the world) for three months. 3 Mark has been working for ten hours. 4 Melanie and Rita have been talking for forty minutes. 5 How long have you been reading the/that/your book? Unit 17 1 1 2 3 2 3 1 2 's/has left, He's/He has been cleaning, he's/he has finished I've/I have been working, You've/You have done I've/I have heard, have you been doing, We've/We have done 3 4 How many miles have you walked? How long have they/the workmen been digging up the road? How many photos have you taken? How long has it been raining? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I've/I have been clearing I've/I have found You've/You have been sitting I've/I have been watching You've/You have been I've/I have had They've/They have been I've/I have never had 13 14 15 16 1 b) 2 a) 3 a) 4 b) 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The train had just gone. The rain had stopped. I'd/1 had forgotten my ticket. They'd/They had stolen it a week before. I hadn't seen her for ages. I'd/I had just cleaned it. I'd/I had already eaten my sandwiches. 3 1 2 3 4 5 had left 've/have finished Ve/have eaten 'd/had ordered 've/have made 17 were sitting 18 they saw 19 started Unit 20 1 1 I'd/1 had been working 2 I hadn't been looking 3 she'd/she had been dealing 4 I'd/I had been waiting 5 I'd/I had been reading 2 1 2 3 4 She'd/She had been crying. He'd/He had been driving too fast. They'd/They had been playing with matches. He'd/He had been standing under a tree. 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 had been watching 'd/had been playing, hadn't won 'd/had been walking, 'd/had walked 'd/had stopped, was smoking has been aching was lying, 'd/had bought, 'd/had been reading 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 1 I haven't seen you for months. 2 I'm/I am waiting for a (phone) call. 3 I like your (new) jacket. 4 It's/It has been snowing since yesterday. Unit 18 1 We had I'd/I had said I ran I got Unit 21 6 7 8 9 10 had told 'd had/had had 's/has started 've/have turned 'd/had made She uses it She's/She has lost it We're/We are getting them She's/She is enjoying it I hate it I've/I have checked them They play it You haven't watered them Unit 19 3 1 a) 2 b) 3 a) 4 b) 5 a) 6 b) 1 1 a) 2 a) 3 b) 4 a) 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 I've/I have been working she went You've/You have been writing They moved he stopped, I was waiting 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 you know David told haven't been I started have you sold I've been learning had I've had 2 3 4 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 When Nick had saved enough money, he bought a motor bike. Mark put all the dishes away when he'd/he had dried them. When I'd/I had looked both ways, I pulled out into the road. The golfers went into the clubhouse when they'd/they had played the last hole. had decided We were waiting I realized I'd/I had forgotten It was I hurried 7 8 9 10 11 12 rang They were working heard They found drove I met 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 I don't often drive 1 don't like I ride bought was working I'd been doing I'd earned 6 1 I'm/I am speaking 2 knows 3 had heard 4 he'd/he had been taking (Also possible: he's/he has been taking) 5 he's/he has answered 6 he arrived 7 were waiting 8 has been reading 3 Unit 25 1 1 's/is going to read 2 '11 have 3 '11 video 4 are you going to buy 2 1 2 3 4 It's/It is going to attack us/me. aliens will land on the earth in the next ten years. she's/she is going to get married. I'll invite her for a meal. 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 We're/We are going to build will be (Also possible: is going to be) will like (Also possible: are going to like) will be (Also possible: are going to be) We aren't going to cut (Also possible: We won't cut) We're/We are going to have will be (Also possible: is going to be) We're/We are going to stop (Also possible: We will stop) 1 1 2 3 future future present 2 1 2 3 She's/She is working on Saturday. She's/She is flying to Cairo on 15 May. He's/He is seeing his boss at four o'clock this afternoon. They're/They are playing tennis tomorrow afternoon. Unit 22 1 1 2 3 4 I'll be leaving here at the end of the month. Luckily they'll find a flat for me. The training programme finishes next summer. They'll decide about that next year. 2 1 future 2 future 3 future 3 l a ) 2 a ) 3b) 4b) 5a) 1 1 future 2 decision 3 future 2 1 I'll answer it/the phone. 2 I'll have (the) chicken (, please). 3 I'll carry the/your bag (for you). 4 I'll post it/the letter (for you), 4 5 future present 4 5 decision future Unit 23 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 Tom will watch the match. Harriet's party will be fun. Trevor won't put up the shelves. Laura will be annoyed. Andrew will study all weekend. Rachel won't do any work. 1 will 2 Shall 3 will 4 5 6 will will Shall Unit 26 4 1 2 3 4 He's/He is going to light the firework. She's/She is going to hit the ball. They're/They are going to catch a bus. She's/She is going to answer the phone. 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I'm/I am going to lend He's/He is going to take It's/It is going to be is he going to keep are we going to get He's/He is going to have We're/We are going to get it isn't going to get 4 5 future present 3 1 I'm/I am going 2 He's/He is staying 3 gets 4 are you doing 5 6 7 I'm/I am going finishes we're/we are going 4 1 's/is about to win 2 are to go 3 is to visit 4 5 're/are about to move are to take 1 1 When Mark sees the boss, he's/he is going to discuss his problem. 2 When Rachel uses the computer (later), she's/she is going to send an e-mail. 3 When Tom visits David in hospital, he's/he is going to tell him about United's win. 4 When Matthew's/Matthew is in town tomorrow, he might buy some new trainers. Unit 24 1 1 I'm/I am going to get wet. 2 I'm/1 am going to be sick. 3 I'm/I am going to lose. 4 It's/It is going to crash! 5 It isn't going to stop. Unit 27 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 you need you get I hire it'll/it will be I'll/I will get there's/there is I arrive I'll/I will ring 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 I'll/I will be 1 hear I'm/I am I'll/I will lie I go You'll/You will be you don't get 1 2 3 4 5 6 I'll/I will be earning I'll/I will be doing will you be doing I'll/I will be giving who'll/who will be doing you'll/you will be playing 2 1 I'll/I will be seeing her 2 I'll/I will be going there next summer 3 I'll/I will be playing (it/badminton) next weekend. 4 I'll/I will be having lunch/it in the canteen tomorrow, OR I'll/I will be having lunch/it there tomorrow. 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 It will/It'll be 2 who will/who'll answer OR who will/who'll be answering 3 will be answering 4 he'll/he will still be giving 5 he'll/he will have replied 6 he won't/will not be eating OR he won't/will not eat 7 will be 8 he'll/he will have earned 9 we'll/we will be returning OR we'll/we will return 10 he'll/he will have got 2 1 2 3 4 5 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 She's/She has got a map. OR She has a map. 2 He hasn't got an umbrella, OR He doesn't have an umbrella. 3 They've/They have got a rabbit, OR They have a rabbit. 4 They haven't got a car. OR They don't have a car. 2 1 Has ... got 2 hasn't got 3 didn't have 4 5 didn't have haven't got 3 1 played 2 drinks 3 4 spent received Will you be going to the library today? Will you be writing to Vicky soon? Will you be using your calculator this afternoon? Will you be seeing Daniel tomorrow? Will you be driving to the festival? Will you be phoning your sister soon? Unit 29 1 2 3 1 1'll/1 will have had 2 I'll/I will have been the subject of a TV documentary 3 I'll/I will have become world-famous 4 I'll/I will have made millions of pounds from my pictures 1 twenty 2 She will/She'll have travelled two hundred miles. 3 He will/He'll have done a/one hundred and fifty (press-ups). 1 were going to go 2 was going to pick 3 were going to see 1 I was going to paint the door, but I didn't feel very well. 2 I was going to repair the lamp, but I forgot. 3 I was going to wallpaper the bedroom, but I didn't have time. Unit 30 1 You shouldn't decide until you've/you have thought about it (first). 2 I'll think of you next week when I'm/I am lying on the beach. 3 We ought to/We can leave as soon as I've/I have paid the bill. 4 We can discuss it (later) while we're/we are sitting on the plane together. 5 You can use the computer when I've/I have finished with it. Unit 28 1 4 'm/'arn going to get up early tomorrow. arrives at ten thirty. I'm/I am seeing my bank manager tomorrow. I'm/I am about to go out. There's/There is going to be trouble. I'm/I am spending OR I'm/I am going to spend I'm/I am going to look OR I'll/I will be looking That'll/That will be OR That's/That is going to be I'll/I will be OR I'm/I am going to be Are you staying/Are you going to stay OR Will you be staying/Will you stay 6 I'm/I am staying OR I'm/I am going to stay OR I'll/I will be staying 7 I'm/I am going to see OR I'm/I am seeing OR I'll/I will be seeing OR I'll/I will see 8 I'm/I am going OR I'll/I will be going 9 we might see OR we'll/we will probably see OR we're/we are probably going to see 10 do you leave OR are you leaving OR will you be leaving 11 is 12 I'll/I will see Unit 31 4 I we're/we are having 2 you've/you have got OR you have 3 it hasn't got OR it doesn't have 4 Did you have 5 I had 6 Have you got OR DO you have 7 have 8 1 didn't have Unit 32 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 It's a difficult problem. I've seen the results. I don't have any information. We haven't reached a decision. I'm very excited about it. You needn't decide now. It isn't yet certain, OR It's not yet certain. We'll be pleased to see you. Don't worry. I'd like to buy a new computer. We're willing to help. We won't know the result for some time. 2 1 Where's, It's 2 don't, isn't OR 'S not 3 What's, He's 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 I would like a coffee, please. There has been an accident. That is correct. I had seen the film before. Who has got the key? We would have stopped if we had seen you. Unit 33 1 1 I am smiling. 2 I do like my new portrait. 3 It is foggy today. 4 Yes, I did remember the water. 2 1 it did cost 2 you do look 3 it does stop 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 5 I did go they do quarrel I did finish the crossword today. my room does need tidying up. I do find the work difficult. I did want to give the course up. Do have a chocolate. this place does depress me. Unit 34 1 1 offering 2 making a suggestion 3 asking for information 4 requesting 5 inviting 6 asking for information 7 asking permission 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Are you a rich man? Are quizzes your only hobby? Did you work hard at school? Have you got/Do you have any other interests? Is it an interesting life? Does your wife ask you quiz questions? Do you answer questions in your dreams? 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Are you going to America? Does Laura play tennis? Did you enjoy your holiday? Shall we (both) go for a walk? Will you be at the club tonight? Is the train on time? Do Mike and Harriet go camping? Could I/Can I/May I borrow your squash racket? Have you got/Do you have a motor bike? 1 1 Yes, I can 2 Yes, it is 3 No, he hasn't 4 Yes, I did 5 6 7 8 No, they aren't Yes, I do No, he isn't No, I haven't 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Yes, she does No, we aren't No, we can't No, I'm/I am not 3 1 b) 2 b) 3 b) 4 a) 5 b) 6 a) 7 b) 8 b) 1 1 2 3 4 5 What's/What is the date (today)? When does the course finish? Who have you invited (to your party)? How can I/we get tickets (to the concert)? Where are we going to have lunch? OR Where shall we have lunch? 2 1 2 3 4 5 Where How many When Who What Unit 35 No, we won't Yes, I did Yes, she has No, I didn't Unit 36 6 7 8 9 How far How often What kind How long 3 I where do you record 2 How many programmes have you done? 3 How much money do you earn? 4 When did you start acting? 5 What are your plans for the future? Unit 37 1 1 a) Rita b) Rita 2 3 a) a/the lorry b) a/the car 2 1 Who is/Who's having a party? 2 What were you reading? 3 What have you learnt? 4 what should we do? 5 Who is/Who's looking for me? 6 Who are you looking for? 7 What is she planning? 8 Who has/Who's moved in next door? 9 What is/What's worrying you? 10 Who do you want to meet? 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 1 Who 2 Which 3 What 4 5 6 What Which Who 1 1 wasn't 2 had 3 don't know 4 didn't land 5 6 7 has didn't know isn't 2 1 can't 2 doesn't 3 didn't 4 weren't 5 6 7 8 wasn't isn't don't haven't 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 1 no 2 no 3 not 1 1 Can't you drive, Melanie? 2 Won't you be at the disco, Rachel? 3 Haven't you got/Don't you have a television, Nick? Unit 40 a) Mark b) a bus photos can I keep? flowers look lovely? (money) went missing? house did you pass (earlier)? children has the doctor got?/does the doctor have? (money) do doctors earn? uncle has died? wife is coming (later)? doesn't get headaches. can't relax. didn't miss a lecture. isn't a nervous person. doesn't lose things. wasn't a happy child. hasn't decided on a career. 4 5 6 no No not Unit 41 Unit 38 1 1 What are you looking at? 2 What are you talking about? 3 What are you waiting for? 4 What are you pointing at? 2 1 Don't you feel well? OR Aren't you feeling well? 2 Haven't they arrived yet? 3 Didn't she say hello? 4 Can't you swim? 2 1 2 3 4 5 What are you ashamed of? What is she famous for? What is he going to complain about? What is she going to be late for? What do you feel nervous about? 3 1 No 2 Yes 3 Yes 4 No 4 1 2 3 4 5 What for What like what 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 a comment 2 a comment 2 1 isn't it? 2 are there? 3 aren't you? 4 didn't you? 5 6 7 don't they? can't we? was it? 3 1 don't you? 2 haven't 1? 3 aren't you? 4 do you? 5 6 7 does it? is there? can you? 3 6 7 8 9 for What like how Unit 39 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Which flight did you take? Which hotel did you stay at? What music do you like? What magazine did you buy? What company do you work for? What language are you learning? 1 Which 2 Which 3 What 4 5 What Which Why didn't the staff know what to do? Why couldn't they stop the ride? Why aren't they trained in first aid? Why wasn't the ambulance called immediately? Why didn't the doctor have a mobile phone? Unit 42 3 a question 4 a question 4 1 Let's listen to some music, shall we? 2 Don't do anything silly, will you? 3 You haven't got a train timetable, have you? 4 Pass me the salt, can you?/could you? OR YOU couldn't pass me the salt, could you? Unit 43 1 1 2 3 2 1 neither does Emma. 4 2 so has Emma. 5 3 neither can Mark. 6 neither is Melanie. so does Emma. so does Claire. 1 I don't expect so 2 I suppose so 3 I hope not 1 don't think so I'm afraid not 3 neither am 1 Neither can I so am I 4 5 6 4 5 Unit 46 1 (May and might are both possible.) 1 she might be 4 She may be having 2 She may be 5 You might find 3 She might be sitting 6 She might know 2 1 2 3 4 5 3 1 mightn't 2 mightn't 3 couldn't 4 5 couldn't mightn't 4 1 can't 2 must 3 might 4 5 6 can't might must so do I Neither have I so would I Unit 44 1 2 Unit 47 1 She can't play the violin. 2 He can climb trees. 3 She can juggle. 4 They can't lift the weights. 11 can walk (Also possible: I'm able to walk) 2 1 can go/I'll be able to go 3 to be able to get 4 been able to do 3 1 c) 2 a) 4 1 was able to 2 could 3 could/was able to 4 5 were able to couldn't/wasn't able to 1 1 1 had to pay, did you have to pay 2 You have to slam, You'll have to fix 3 do you have to take, I'll have to take 4 We had to move, We didn't have to look, We've/We have had to do 5 has to start, does he have to get 2 1 2 3 4 3 1 must 2 has to 3 have to 4 must 1 1 2 3 4 must, mustn't, needn't mustn't, must mustn't, needn't mustn't, must, needn't 2 1 2 3 4 5 didn't have to wait ages to cross the road. don't have to work long hours. doesn't have to work in a factory. didn't have to lock their doors. don't have to wash their clothes by hand. 3 1 we didn't need to borrow any money. 2 I needn't have bothered. 3 We needn't have left/We didn't need to leave so early. 4 I didn't need to pay to go in. 5 you needn't have tipped/you didn't need to tip the waiter. Unit 45 1 2 3 4 (Can, could and may are all possible.) 1 Can I borrow your calculator? 2 May I join you? 3 Could I look at your notes? 1 2 3 4 5 You can have a picnic. You can't drop litter. You can turn left. You can't play ball games/football. You can't smoke. 1 I wasn't allowed to have 2 we're/we are allowed to have 3 we're/we are allowed to do 4 we'll/we will be allowed to hold 1 Am I allowed to 2 May l 3 Am 1 allowed to 4 5 He may/might win. I may/might have one. We may/might get one. She may/might be late. They may/might be visiting me. Am I allowed to May I You must get to work on time. has to keep his dog under control. You must listen carefully. visitors have to report to the security officer. 5 6 7 have to must must Unit 48 Unit 49 1 1 2 3 shouldn't ought should 2 1 2 3 4 5 We'd better wait (for Rachel). You'd better lock it/lock your bike. I'd better tidy my room. You'd better not drive/We'd better not go too fast. We'd better do some revision. 3 1 I'm/I am supposed to take two before meals. 2 They're/They are supposed to report to the police. 3 You're/You are supposed to stand in a queue. 4 They aren't supposed to watch it. 4 1 2 3 4 5 4 5 6 3 1 Would you like a cup of tea? OR Will/Won't you have a cup of tea? 2 What shall/can/should I say in my letter? 3 Let's have/We could have a cup of coffee, OR Shall we have a cup of coffee? 4 I'll/I can walk home with you. OR Shall/Can I walk home with you? 5 Would you like to visit me one weekend? (Also possible: Will/Won't you visit me one weekend?) 1 1 will 2 won't 3 would 4 will 5 6 7 would wouldn't would 2 1 will help 2 wouldn't let 3 will give 4 won't go 5 6 7 would like wouldn't open won't stand 3 1 2 3 4 5 shouldn't should oughtn't We had/We'd better hurry. (Also possible: We should hurry./We ought to hurry.) We had/We'd better not be OR We oughtn't to be/We shouldn't be should arrive/ought to arrive You shouldn't take/You oughtn't to take We aren't supposed to get Unit 52 Unit 50 1 1 Can I have a fork, please? 2 Could I have a towel, please? 3 Would you mind answering the phone? 2 1 must 2 have 3 like 4 want 3 5 6 7 8 Can/Could Would wonder Can/Could 1 Can I have a receipt, please?/Can you give me a receipt, please? 2 Could you tell me the time, please? 3 Can you help me, please? 4 Could I have a bag, please?/Could you give me a bag, please? 5 Would you mind clearing a space (on the table), please? 6 Could I speak to the manager, please? Unit 53 1 1 b) 2 a) 3 b) 2 1 2 3 4 1 Shall we stop for a minute? 2 Would you like a game? 3 I'll post that letter for you. 2 1 Shall 2 Shall 3 could 4 5 6 Would Will Would They shouldn't have left/oughtn't to have left litter everywhere. She should say/ought to say hello to people. He shouldn't have been/oughtn't to have been late for the interview. She should have looked./She ought to have looked. 3 1 he shouldn't have left 2 might have taken 3 You must have been 4 he can't have rung 4 1 someone must have posted it. 2 she may/might not have heard the alarm. 3 he shouldn't have driven/oughtn't to have driven at 100 miles an hour/so fast. 4 He can't/couldn't have failed the exam. Unit 51 1 Shall we go to the swimming-pool? I won't take any risks. I'd/I would like a shower (, please). You shouldn't decide in a hurry. (I think) the world will end in the year 3000. Unit 54 1 1 Dinner is being served. 2 Some houses are being built. 3 The seals are being fed. 4 A flag is being raised. 2 1 is owned 2 was being used 3 was bought 4 5 6 hadn't been looked has been done is used 3 4 1 2 3 4 will be done/are going to be done will ... be called can't be bought should be sold 1 got hurt 2 get lost 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 swept burst were rescued received reached 2 1 my brother 2 The water 3 terrorists 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 3 6 7 8 9 4 5 6 were blocked were brought is being done said the alarm The guide The dog was won by Claude Jennings. did a parachute jump last week. been attacked by a bull. being built. likes Jessica. been thrown away. been kidnapped by Martians. was seen by five people. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 was taken was done was interviewed by a very nice young police officer fingerprints were found (by detectives) burglar was identified (by the police computer). has been arrested (he) is being questioned jewellery hasn't been found 2 1 didn't produce many cars for sale. 2 production was started by a German called Karl Benz. 3 is now seen as the father of the motor car. 3 1 People should use them/bicycles for short journeys. 2 someone has discovered a new source of energy? 3 they're/they are going to knock it down/knock down this building. 4 you shouldn't keep them/eggs in a freezer. 5 people put it/litter in the bin? Unit 57 1 1 New employees are given special training. 2 Extra payments are given to staff who perform well, j 3 Most employees are offered company shares. 4 All Zedco staff are allowed six weeks' holiday. 5 A full salary is paid to women who leave to have children. expected that the soap opera 'Round the Corner' will end next year. It is supposed that the footballer Wayne Johnson is earning £10 million a year. It is believed that the Prime Minister and his wife have separated. 1 is expected to end next year. 2 The footballer Wayne Johnson is supposed to be earning £10 million a year. 3 The Prime Minister and his wife are believed to have separated. Unit 58 1 1 had his car repaired. 2 is having her photo taken. 3 had his windows cleaned. 4 is having her eyes tested. 2 1 David (has) had his arm bandaged. 2 Daniel is going to have his tooth filled. 3 Laura is having her photos developed. 3 1 did you get your arm bandaged, David? 2 did you get your tooth filled, Daniel? 3 did you get your photos developed, Laura? 4 1 Tom had his car stolen from outside his house. 2 Rita had her rent increased by ten per cent. 3 David has had his electricity cut off. Unit 56 1 1 2 get broken got divorced Unit 55 1 2 Unit 59 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 He is afraid of being sent away. He doesn't want to be misunderstood. He hopes to be offered a job. He doesn't mind being paid low wages at first. He is willing to be re-trained. He would like to be given a chance. 2 1 being used 2 working 3 to be treated 4 5 6 to give to be invited being taken 3 1 to write 2 to be tidied 3 hoovering/to be hoovered 4 to do 5 ironing/to be ironed 6 7 8 9 10 to finish missing to be handed to be being told Unit 60 1 1 Trevor promised to put up the shelves/to put the shelves up (soon). 2 Claire decided to buy both the dresses. 3 Melanie offered to cook the meal. 4 Tom threatened to shoot Nick's dog/the dog. 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 They seem to believe it seems to have improved She doesn't seem to like He seems to be working He doesn't seem to have made (Also possible: He seems not to have made) 1 to hang 2 to come 3 to be having 4 5 6 to invite to take to have left 3 1 2 3 4 I've/I have given up trying, OR I gave up trying. I can't imagine being I enjoy watching it on TV. suggested having a party. 2 1 2 3 4 can't stand lying couldn't/can't resist having couldn't face doing can't help feeling 3 1 2 3 4 trying walking ringing waiting 5 6 7 8 getting changing missing discussing 1 to get 2 to leave 3 staying 4 sitting 5 touring 6 7 8 9 10 to go to hire driving to spend taking 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 to repair waiting to have to accept saying 3 1 I don't mind asking to see the manager. 2 Matthew admitted promising to go to Scotland. 3 the band happened to finish playing. taking losing to insist arguing to be 1 2 3 4 mentioning agreeing to call to lock 5 6 7 to lock looking to look 2 1 2 3 4 5 running to make spending watching to work 6 7 8 9 10 to tell to disappoint phoning to explain going 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 Harriet didn't even try to move the piano. Mike will never forget seeing a spaceship. The walls need painting. Natasha didn't mean to be unkind to Jessica. Andrew went on studying through the night. Mark stopped to make a phone call. 1 1 Guy invited Kitty to come on his chat show. 2 Sarah reminded Mark to get the theatre tickets. 3 The dentist told Daniel to give up eating sweets. 4 The police ordered the gunman to come out with his hands up. 2 1 don't want her to do a parachute jump 2 doesn't want him to fall in love with her 3 would like/'d like her to go (on holiday) with them 3 1 The police must stop the suspects leaving the country. 2 The President didn't expect Congress to oppose him. 3 The terrorists forced the hostages to lie down. 4 The government doesn't mind the pound falling in value. 4 1 to travel 2 buying Unit 65 1 I'd like to buy this tin. 2 I like driving this car. 3 I'd like to see the manager. 4 I like chasing rabbits. 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 he loves watching/to watch I wouldn't like to work I'd like to see I'd prefer to come/go I hate queuing He doesn't like cooking I'd love to fly I like to have 3 4 to use to take Unit 66 Unit 63 1 to go/going to search 1 Unit 62 1 3 4 Unit 64 Unit 61 1 1 to drive/driving 2 to make 1 1 He can't think what to say. 2 They're not sure/They aren't sure where to go. 3 She doesn't know how to stop. 2 1 what to expect 2 where to go 3 how to find 3 1 2 3 4 5 4 5 what to do who to contact whether to do how much (money) to spend whether to join which route to take which (lottery numbers) to choose Unit 67 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 1 to visit 2 to see 3 to have 4 buy 5 to read 6 read 7 feel 1 1 of buying 2 for breaking 2 1 blamed Trevor for forgetting the tickets. 2 succeeded in saving the driver's life. 3 The customers complained about not receiving the goods. 4 Emma has accused Matthew of breaking his promise. 5 Melanie is insisting on cooking a meal for David. 6 A new traffic scheme has stopped cars from going into the town centre. 7 Everyone congratulated Claude on winning the quiz competition. 8 Some football fans were arrested for attacking a policeman. simple to use the computer. difficult to understand the handbook. It's easy to run any kind of software. It's absolutely fascinating to explore the world of Compex. Are you ready to try the ultimate computer experience? 1 is very simple to use. 2 isn't difficult to understand. 3 Any kind of software is easy to run. 4 The world of Compex is absolutely fascinating to explore. 8 9 10 11 12 13 look get to leave to change forget to get 3 4 on buying like arguing Unit 70 3 1 it's/it is likely to be pretty crowded. 2 she's/she is certain to be there. 3 you're/you are unlikely to find it. OR you'll be unlikely to find it. 4 1 of 2 for 1 1 2 3 (just) can't wait for it to arrive. It would be a mistake for him to marry her. It's important for advertisements to tell the truth. 2 1 2 3 4 There's a fun pool for children to swim in. There are quiet areas for you to relax in. There are regular shows for you to enjoy. There's a giant roller-coaster for you to ride on (if you dare). 3 1 2 3 4 3 1 It's/It is too high for her to reach. 2 It's/It is too difficult for us to understand. 3 It wasn't loud enough for them/everyone to hear. 4 It wasn't hot enough for him to drink. 1 1 2 of falling of dropping them 2 1 2 3 Nick was afraid to jump. Daniel was afraid to argue with the policeman. Matthew is afraid of getting sunburnt. 3 1 to buy 2 of getting 3 of being 4 1 about being so rude 2 about losing my temper 3 to interrupt you 1 1 We used to like 4 2 used to be 5 3 we didn't use to have 2 1 2 3 3 1 to living 2 to stop 3 to work 4 to be 3 of 4 of 5 for Unit 68 4 1 difficult for the town to attract new industry. 2 very generous of the council to give the land to Sanko. 3 is eager for production to begin soon. Unit 69 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 have something to eat. nice to have a rest. wants Rita to speak to him. Daniel doesn't know how to repair the video. Claire and her sister have decided to go to Bali. Melanie has gone to the hospital to visit David. (Unfortunately) Vicky has to do some studying. It's important for Sarah to ring the office. 1 see/read 2 drive/go 3 cry/weep 4 5 6 lie/sit/stay snow see/visit about seeing about/at getting on travelling for not writing 5 6 7 8 from doing like writing with doing of/about going 3 to move Unit 71 4 5 to read to book Unit 72 did you use to help 1 used to look 's/is used to flying planes. used to play badminton. 's/is used to climbing mountains. 5 6 7 to drinking to being to have 3 Unit 73 1 g°- 1 by staying up all night. 2 on waking (in the morning). 3 without using a calculator. 4 for carrying the food. 5 in spite of having it on his list. 6 as well as doing the typing. 2 1 before signing 2 after eating 3 Before leaving 3 4 5 6 after using before changing before opening 1 He thought carefully before deciding to buy it. 2 He bought the shop despite having little money of his own. 3 He became successful by giving the customers what they wanted. 4 He put the profit back into the business instead of spending it on himself. 5 He was happy when running his own business. 6 He fell ill as a result of working too hard. 7 He has made a lot of money since buying his first shop ten years ago. 2 3 4 l l 2 3 saw him take it. I watched him leave (the restaurant). I heard him drive away. 2 1 I can hear it ringing. 2 I can see her waving. 3 1 can hear them barking. 4 I can smell it burning. 3 1 2 3 4 5 She felt the building shake. He heard people shouting. She could hear an alarm ringing. They saw the police arrive. He saw a woman crying. Unit 76 1 uncountable 2 countable 3 countable 4 uncountable 2 1 2 3 4 5 some biscuits 6 a light bulb 7 some wine 8 some mineral water 9 a banana some soap a lemon some butter some eggs 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 a computer essays hours many money food much a job some a few pictures 2 1 2 3 4 broke his leg skiing. cut his finger opening a tin. injured her toe running. hurt his back lifting weights. 1 Taking a gun out of the drawer, he put it in his briefcase. (Also possible: Having taken a gun ...) Having left the office, he (then) had to wait a while for the lift. Reaching the ground floor, he hurried outside to a taxi. (Also possible: Having reached the ground floor ...) Pulling out a gun, the taxi driver shot Mitchell. (Also possible: Having pulled out a gun ...) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 uncountable uncountable countable countable Unit 77 1 1 a jar of jam 2 a box of matches 3 two loaves of bread 4 a bar of chocolate 5 five kilos of potatoes 6 a box/packet of breakfast cereal 7 two bottles of mineral water 8 a tube of toothpaste 2 1 2 3 4 3 1 beautiful scenery 2 good weather 3 a meal Unit 75 1 Feeling cold, Harriet turned on the heating. Not knowing French, Daniel found it hard to communicate. Having finished the book, Andrew took it back to the library. 1 Unit 74 i 1 Having studied the map, Trevor knew which way to some some some a 5 6 7 8 4 5 some some a some fun an awful journey Unit 78 1 1 2 3 4 5 sport some potatoes painting a noise cheese 6 7 8 9 10 a conversation some chicken war life some egg 2 1 2 3 4 5 some business an iron a glass, a light a business, some time some experience, an experience 3 1 2 3 1 time an experience a painting 4 5 6 a paper an orange fruits 1 is 2 are 3 look 4 are 5 6 7 8 has costs have weren't 1 was 2 were 3 was 4 were 5 6 7 8 were were was was/were 3 1 is 2 isn't 3 are 4 work 5 6 7 8 have is is has 4 1 Fifteen miles is a long walk. 2 Eight students are travelling on the bus. 3 Three people were waiting for the museum to open. 4 Twenty kilos is the baggage allowance. 1 1 thanks 2 damages 3 pain 4 belongings 5 saving 2 1 mathematics/maths 2 history 3 athletics 4 1 team is 2 choir are 3 crew are 4 orchestra is 1 1 a tennis-racket/a tennis racket 2 a television camera 3 an alarm clock 4 a motor cycle 5 a luggage trolley 2 1 Have you got any cotton shirts? 2 What shall I do with this lemonade bottle? 3 Have you got a shopping bag? 4 Is there a shoe shop near here? 5 I'd like a corner table, please. 6 I'll need some climbing boots. 7 Are you a computer operator? 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Unit 79 2 4 5 goods damage savings pains economics geography 3 1 are 2 is 3 were 4 seem 5 6 7 is was were 4 1 was 2 outskirts 3 headquarters 4 savings 5 damage 6 7 8 9 aren't crossroads is gives 1 don't 2 go 3 is 4 fit 5 6 7 8 look suit some a 2 1 some 2 pairs 3 4 pair some 3 1 are 4 are 2 3 5 6 want has have know a stone wall a tourist information centre a bath-towel/a bath towel working clothes a city centre office block a sales graph a credit card a horse-race/a horse race the Marketing Director a weekend bicycle tour Unit 83 1 1 a 2 the 3a 4 the 5 The 6 the 7 the 8a 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 the the the a the the an the 9 The 10 the 19 the 20 the 2 1 Matthew won the race easily. 2 Suddenly a child ran into the road. 3 She was watching a film on television. 4 The bus was half an hour late. 5 The camera videoed the thief. 3 1 a, the, the 2 a, the, a 3 the, the 4 a, the, The Unit8i 1 police are cattle are population is Unit 82 Unit8o 6 7 8 9 5 6 7 5 6 7 a, the a, the a, the 4 5 6 an, the a, the the, a Unit 84 1 1 2 3 an, the The, a The, an 2 3 1 a, a 2 a, a, the, a 3 the, a 4 5 6 a, the, an, the the, a, the, the, a, The, a the, a, a, the, the 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 an LA suburb a UFO an AGM an MP a DJ a VIP an IRA member a PC Unit 85 1 1 some luggage 2 some flowers 3 a cat 2 1 a 2 One 3 One 4 a 3 1 2 3 4 4 5 1 some nuts 2 mineral water 3 some clothes 1 1 He likes chips. 2 She likes dogs. 2 1 2 3 4 4 5 lovely bread (university) students 3 4 He likes art. She likes chemistry. Unit 86 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 Thanksgiving, November the weekend, Saturday Christmas, a white Christmas the summer, 1997 the afternoon, the year night, the dark, the day 2 1 2 3 breakfast lunch the lunch 3 1 2 3 4 5 breakfast midnight Christmas Wednesday the morning 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 so 2 such 3 such 4 so 5 such 6 so 3 1 some birds some fruit A violin is a musical instrument. A queue is a line of people. An atlas is a book of maps. A spade is a tool for digging. 4 Unit 88 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 the dinner a marvellous meal night the day Wednesday the Wednesday February Unit 89 2 dogs, the dogs cars, pollution, cars, aeroplanes, the pollution the birds, birds, wildlife history, the history, museums, old buildings 1 the atom 2 football 3 the guitar 4 5 3 4 television the telescope 5 a very grand hotel quite a tiring journey a really big flat quite a nice meal The piano was so heavy (that) Mike and Harriet couldn't move it. Tom was so annoyed about United losing (that) he wouldn't speak to anyone. The band was such a big attraction (that) all the tickets sold out. Vicky had such a lot of work to do (that) she was sure she'd never finish it. The party made such a (lot of) noise/so much nois (that) it kept all the neighbours awake. Unit 87 4 1 what 2 What a 3 What 1 church, the church 2 the cinema, the pub 3 hospital (In American English: the hospital), the hospital 4 school, college 1 1 2 3 4 5 college the cinema the station sea home 6 7 8 9 bed work the church prison 1 2 3 4 Lake Michigan Italy The Andes The United Kingdom 2 1 2 3 4 5 at home in bed to the hospital to church to work 6 7 8 9 to the library in prison at college in the factory 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 the Thames Hyde Park Heathrow Airport Trafalgar Square Westminster Bridge the Houses of Parliament Buckingham Palace West London The Ml motorway The Ritz Unit 90 5 6 7 8 9 Tasmania the West Indies The River Nile Brussels the North 3 I New York 2 the Statue of Liberty 3 Central Park 4 the Metropolitan Museum of Art 5 Broadway 6 Macy's 7 Washington Square 8 New York University 9 the Paramount 10 Broadway 3 1 the 4 2 her 5 3 the (Also possible: her) 4 1 2 3 4 5 4 1 the Little Theatre 2 Kingston House 3 Wood Lane 1 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 is in George Street. The Odeon Cinema is in the Avenue. The Clarendon Art Gallery is in Newton Lane. King Edward College is in College Road. St John's Church is in South Street. Webster's department store is in the High Street. The Bristol Hotel is in Westville Way. 1 the boy's bike 2 the girls' tent 3 the children's skateboards 4 the girl's cat 5 the boys' trophies 2 1 the twins' 2 Luke's 3 Jason's 4 Debbie's 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 A day at Blenheim Palace A train journey in North Wales A tour of the White House A beach on the Riviera A shopping trip to Harrods A small town in France A trip across the Severn Bridge A walk around Lake Windermere A visit to Tower Bridge A journey across the Rockies A look around the National Gallery A boat trip along the Oxford Canal 1 2 3 4 5 6 Mr Hillman's Gun The Smell of Blood The Terrorist's Car The Middle of the Night The Death of Someone Important The Gangsters' Money 4 1 2 3 4 yesterday's paper (a) five minutes' rest this month's special offer in a week's time 1 1 She's/She has got some cats. 2 He hasn't got any petrol. 3 He's/He has got some poison. 2 1 any 2 any 3 some 3 1 2 3 4 4 1 anyone 2 any bus 3 any colour 1 1 She hasn't had many lessons yet. 2 I'll have to make a lot (of it). 3 I haven't got much energy. 4 Maybe you should add a little water/a few drops of water. 5 We've invited lots of friends/a lot of friends. 6 4 5 the High Street the Royal Hotel Near Singular Plural Further away that those these 2 1 these flowers 2 this parcel 3 those trees 4 that dog 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 that This this, That These 5 6 7 8 yours mine hers her That these this this those 1 2 3 4 our his his their 2 1 its 2 it's 5 6 7 her children's the Lanskys' Olivia's Unit 94 Unit 92 1 Harriet introduced me to a friend of hers. They've got their own pool. It's a favourite hobby of mine. I've got some CDs of his. I'd like my own room. Unit 93 Unit 91 1 their your, your 4 5 6 some some any some, anything someone, any/some anyone (Also possible: someone), any something, some 4 5 anything any day Unit 95 3 it's 4 its 2 1 a lot of 2 many/a lot of 3 many 4 a lot of 5 6 7 much/a lot of many/a lot of much 3 1 few 2 little 3 a little 4 5 6 a few little a few 4 1 much 2 little 3 much 4 5 6 many few little Unit 96 1 2 3 1 Some of them 2 most of them 3 Half of them 4 5 6 All of them some of them None of them 1 She got some of them right. 2 He got most of them right. 3 He got all of them right. 4 She got none of them right. 1 most people 2 No student/No students 3 Most of the money 4 All cars 5 All fruit/Most fruit 6 All (of) the lights 2 1 he 2 them 3 us/me 4 her 5 she 6 she 7 them 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 she They you him he you/we him 3 1 We 2 you, us 3 it, it, her, She 4 5 6 Me, it she, her I, you, them, they 4 1 You 1 each 2 each/every 3 2 3 4 5 1 all day/the whole day 2 all night/the whole night 3 every morning 4 all morning/the whole morning 5 all day/the whole day 6 every time 4 they 1 1 There's/There is a balloon in the sky. 2 There are some boxes on the car. 3 There's/There is an elephant in the garden. 2 1 There's/There is, There'll be 2 are there, There's/There has been OR There was 3 there was, There ... have been 3 1 It was very cheap. 2 It was Vicky. 3 It's/It is a nuisance. 4 It's/It is very warm. 5 It's/It is important to keep it somewhere safe. 4 1 There 2 It 3 There, It 1 1 Vis looking at herself ( in the mirror). 2 're/are introducing themselves. 3 He's/He is teaching himself Arabic. 4 She's/She is drying herself (on/with a towel). 2 1 yourself 2 ourselves 3 1 you 4 her 2 3 5 yourself 4 5 worry relax each/every every every 3 You Unit 99 Unit 97 1 2 They 4 5 there, it It, there, It, there Unit 100 him himself 3 itself 1 One of them has a separate restaurant. 2 Both of them serve bar snacks. 3 One of them has a family room. 4 Neither of them allows/allow pub games. 5 Neither of them has/have live music. 6 One of them has a non-smoking area. 4 4 1 Neither 4 every 2 either 5 whole 3 each (Also possible: every) 1 1 1 the dress 2 Laura 3 the jeans 4 Rita 1 He cleans them himself. 2 I bake it myself. 3 They grow them themselves. 4 We decorated it ourselves. 5 He types them himself. 6 I develop them myself. 2 1 herself 2 itself 3 himself Unit 101 Unit 98 5 6 7 8 Rita and Melanie Rita Mike and Harriet Tom 1 feel 2 help yourselves 3 remember 4 5 themselves yourselves 3 1 2 3 4 They're/They are always thinking about each other. They've/They have got lots of photos of each other. They enjoy each other's company. They're/They are crazy about each other. 4 1 each other 2 each other 3 themselves 4 5 6 ourselves themselves each other 1 1 a smart one or a casual one, a casual one 2 a big one or a small one, A big one 3 A white one or a brown one, A brown one 4 an ordinary one or an electric one, an ordinary one 2 11 2 3 4 5 6 Unit 102 3 haven't got one. I must get some new ones. Have you seen this one? I've hired one. Can't you find any nice ones? The one in the car is better. 1 one 2 it 3 one 4 5 Inner secrets The only girl for me Unit 105 1 1 a small white car 2 an attractive old building 3 an expensive wooden garden seat 4 a famous Italian opera singer 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a lovely old glass vase an attractive wall mirror a modern office desk red metal kitchen chairs a splendid old model boat valuable Australian postage stamps a small wooden coffee table 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 This is a powerful Japanese business computer. This is an excellent small electric fire. This is a big new chocolate bar. This is a terrific American television comedy. These are stylish aluminium garage doors. These are wonderful modern sports shoes. This is a very good German mobile phone. 1 1 the hungry 2 the homeless 3 the sick 2 1 2 3 4 We live near a special school for the deaf. The old soldiers were holding a service for the dead. The government should do more for the poor. I'm doing a course on caring for the mentally handicapped. 3 1 2 3 4 The sick the young people the unemployed the poor 1 1 exhausted 2 interested them some Unit 106 Unit 103 1 6 7 1 everyone/everybody, no one/nobody 2 someone/somebody, something 3 somewhere, Someone/somebody 4 everywhere, nothing 2 1 someone 2 anyone 3 somewhere 4 5 6 anywhere anything something 3 1 his 2 it 3 4 likes, they has, their 4 1 I once met someone famous. 2 Someone's car is blocking me in. 3 I've got something else/something different to tell you. 4 We know everyone's opinions/opinion. 5 Everyone else except you is going. 6 Nothing exciting ever happens here. 1 modern chairs 2 a black cat 3 solar power 4 5 6 classical music an old car a tall building 2 pleasant, ideal, quiet, short, popular, lovely, friendly, helpful, good, marvellous, excellent, local 3 1 The world is asleep 2 My chief desire 3 My heart is content 4 The main thing to remember 5 The night is alive 5 6 7 the unemployed the old the old people The homeless the deaf Unit 107 3 fascinating exciting 4 2 1 surprised 2 disappointing 3 puzzled 4 5 6 confusing bored interesting 3 1 relaxing 2 annoyed 3 amused 4 interested 5 6 7 fascinating thrilling exhausting 1 1 brightly 2 patiently 3 immediately 4 punctually 5 secretly 6 7 8 9 safely fluently carefully quietly Unit 104 1 4 5 Unit 108 2 1 angrily5 enthusiastically 2 happily 6 reasonably 3 automatically7 securely 4 publicly 3 1 United won the game easily. 2 I've/I have checked the figures carefully. 3 Your dog barked at me very fiercely. 4 It's/It is raining quite heavily (here). 4 1 2 3 4 5 dark 6 terribly badly suddenly quietly 7 1 happier 2 smallest 3 best 4 shorter 5 most important 6 older 1 1 The church is older than the library. 2 Matthew is stronger than Daniel. 3 Harriet is taller than Mike. 4 Claire is more popular than Andrew. 4 Mark's car is bigger than Sarah's. 2 1 Friday is the busiest day 2 The Metropole is the nicest hotel in (the) town. 3 This watch is one of the cheapest (watches) you can buy. 4 This Beatles album is the best (one) they ever made. 5 Alan is the most successful salesman in the company. 3 1 Plastic isn't as strong as metal. 2 The stool isn't as comfortable as the armchair. 3 Swimming isn't as exciting as surfing. 4 The post isn't as quick as e-mail. 4 1 me 2 1 am 3 me 4 he has 1 1 2 3 2 1 Yesterday was a lot colder than today. 2 My coat is a bit longer than is fashionable. 3 I left work slightly earlier than usual this afternoon. 4 The shop is much more expensive than the supermarket. 5 Is the new machine any more reliable than the old one? 3 1 2 3 4 5 more and more difficult more and more complicated more and more longer and longer worse and worse 4 1 2 3 4 5 the quieter the roads (are). the wider the choice (is). the more confused I get. the more fluently you can speak. the more crowded the beaches get. Unit 109 1 adjective 2 adjective 3 adverb 4 adjective 5 adverb 6 adverb 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 hardly nearly long late fast hard wrong straight 1 bad 2 good 3 badly 4 well 5 ill 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 badly good fast long hardly nearly hard lately likely Unit 112 Unit 110 1 1 are more interesting 2 is higher 3 is more beautiful 2 1 richest 2 most modern 3 greatest 4 most exciting 5 6 7 8 1 happier 2 faster 3 more helpful 4 lovelier 5 bigger 6 more restful 7 more modern 4 1 more smartly 2 longer 3 more often 4 more carefully 5 earlier 6 louder/more loudly 5 1 worst 2 better 3 worse 4 best 5 furthest 3 6 most popular most successful most attractive happiest 1 least 2 less 3 more 4 Most more exciting most wetter lower worse Unit 111 unhappy 7 sadly 8 curious 9 foolishly 1 7 8 9 10 11 less painful less busy less convenient 4 5 6 less attractive less seriously less optimistic Unit 113 1 1 outside 2 Perhaps 3 always 4 5 6 Obviously silently hard 2 3 1 mid 2 end 3 front 4 mid 5 mid 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 mid end front mid mid clearly crossed will probably rain didn't fully understand are usually occasionally visited it/ visited it occasionally were soon working has obviously forgotten 4 5 3 1 They/Children don't play there any more 2 they/boats still come along the river 3 it/the view isn't beautiful any more 4 it's/it is still our home (Also possible: it's/it is our home still) 4 I no longer 2 yet 1 1 She's very busy. 2 She's a bit thirsty. 2 1 very 2 quite 3 a bit 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 I've always known your secret. We certainly can't afford a new car. (Also possible: Certainly we can't afford a new car.) The tourists didn't walk far. Tom cut the paper carefully./Tom carefully cut the paper. Natasha can also play the violin. (Also possible: Natasha can play the violin also.) I read the newspaper most days./Most days 1 read the newspaper. 6 1 peacefully at his home 2 through the streets yesterday 3 to Greece last year 4 there in June 7 1 We had a lovely time in the country. 2 We arrived home safely at about eight. 3 You must come and visit us before too long. (Also possible: Before too long you must come and visit us.) 4 It's always nice to see you and Tony. 5 Maybe you'll be able to come in the New Year./You'll be able to come in the New Year maybe. (Also possible: You'll maybe be able to come in the New Year.) 6 We'll see you sometime. 2 1 I already owe Emma £20. 2 We've already spent all our money./We've spent all our money already. 3 But it still looks dirty. (Also possible: But it looks dirty still.) 3 4 4 5 6 He's very strong. He's extremely happy. very a bit quite 8 That radio is a bit loud. I quite like my new job. Why don't you slow down a little? The rain completely spoilt our day./The rain spoilt our day completely. We did the job fairly quickly. I feel a lot better now. We enjoyed the concert very much. (Also possible: We very much enjoyed the concert.) My arms ached terribly. 4 1 2 3 4 absolutely really very much extremely 1 1 quite 2 late 3 easy 2 1 rather better 2 rather noisy 3 rather/quite busy 4 quite popular 3 1 2 3 4 It's/It is rather/quite complicated. My car is quite big. it went on rather longer than I expected. I made it quite quickly. 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 completely ridiculous fairly difficult completely different fairly surprised fairly useful completely certain 5 6 7 5 6 7 very totally very 4 5 quite bright Unit 116 Unit 114 1 still, yet 2 still, already 3 yet, still 3 any more 4 already Unit 115 1 It usually rains when David is on holiday. 2 Rita's friend visits her most weekends. 3 Mark gets a pay rise every year. 4 Rachel never checks her work. 3 4 1 We haven't seen them yet. (Also possible: We haven't yet seen them.) I still can't understand the rules. Unit 117 1 1 The plane is too low. 2 The gate isn't wide enough. 3 The water isn't warm enough. 2 1 sweet enough. 2 too expensive. 3 enough rain. 4 clearly enough. 3 5 6 7 8 too many mistakes. too much traffic. too complicated. enough food 1 It's too wet for a picnic/too wet to have a picnic. 2 I/We haven't got enough chairs for all my/our guests. 3 I had too much equipment to carry. 4 (I think) Natasha is good enough to be a professional musician. 2 1 X 2 on 3 X 4 in 5 at 6 7 8 9 10 on in in on at 3 1 in time 2 on time 3 4 in time on time 4 1 at, on 2 at, in 3 on, in 4 in, in 1 1 since 2 for 3 since 4 for 2 1 2 Unit 121 3 4 Unit 118 1 1 up 2 in/inside 3 above/over 4 along (Also possible: down) 2 1 behind, through, below 2 past, down, opposite 3 1 2 3 opposite between opposite 4 5 between next to 1 1 while 2 while 3 during 4 while 2 1 by 2 until 3 until 4 by 5 by 1 2 3 under up on 4 5 6 around into out of 3 1 as 2 like 3 as 4 like 4 1 as 2 as if 3 as 4 as if 5 1 2 3 4 5 to outside in/into past/by off 6 7 8 9 on through near among 1 By the time I arrived at your flat, you'd/you had left. 2 Rita went to the party with Tom, as you predicted. 3 I saw your sister while I was shopping in London. 4 You can keep the book until you've/you have finished it OR you finish it. 4 5 5 6 7 8 by/beside/next to around/round in front of away from/out of He's/He has been in bed for three days. They've/They have been in the garden since breakfast. He's/He has been at his desk since nine o'clock. She's/She has been on the road for five hours. 3 1 since four o'clock 2 ten years ago 3 since Monday/ since then 4 1 before 2 ago 3 before for six weeks for three years eight months ago for three weeks Unit 122 Unit 123 Unit 119 1 1 He's/He is on the roof. 2 They're/They are at the disco. 3 He's/He is in the bath. 4 She's/She is at the lights 2 1 at the petrol station 4 2 at the zoo 5 3 in the theatre 3 1 in 2 on 3 in 4 at 5 at 6 at 7 on 8 on 9 in 10 at 1 1 2 3 in the restaurant at the station 1 1 in 2 from 3 in 4 by 5 in 6 on 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 1 by 2 on 3 in 4 by 5 by Unit 120 In 1961. On 22 November 1963. At 12.30. 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 10 11 12 on in by on In on, on I pay in cash? the information up to date? you drop the ball on purpose? there anything (to watch) on television tonight? you be here at the end of July? nuclear power a good idea in your opinion? your car for sale? you approve of the plan on the whole? Unit 124 1 1 of 2 in 3 4 in at (Also possible: in) 2 1 damage to 2 way of 3 answer to 4 cause of 5 6 7 tax on difficulty with matter with 3 1 2 3 4 with of of for 5 6 7 8 with for of between 1 2 3 4 5 answers to all the (quiz) questions knowledge of French desire for progress difference between the (two) colours preference for our/Zedco products 4 2 1 2 3 4 5 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 afraid of the dark. bored with the video. interested in computers. surprised at/by the news. proud of the/their victory. annoyed with her/the children. They're not/They aren't satisfied with their pay increase. 2 1 for 2 at 3 at 4 for 5 at 6 to 3 1 2 3 4 responsible for ready for aware of similar to 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 1 left out 2 sent out 3 throw away 3 1 2 3 4 5 come back get on take ... back go away give away 4 5 6 put off made up go on /carry on picks ... up put on/put ... on ring ... up hand in/hand ... in written ... down 6 7 8 9 10 win back wash up/wash ... up look ... up held up mixing ... up 2 1 2 3 4 5 3 1 2 3 4 1 pay for 2 ask for 3 care about 4 caring for 5 6 7 8 suffering from decided on concentrate on agree with 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 apologized for believed in laughing at discuss left 1 to 2 to 3 to 4 about 5 of Unit 127 1 into 2 from 3 as 4 with/to 6 7 8 9 10 1 She's picking litter up./She's picking up litter. 2 They're digging the road up./They're digging up the road. 3 He's washing the plates up./He's washing up the plates. 4 She's plugging the television in./She's plugging in the television. 2 1 stay in pay ... back fall over lie down cut out 1 Unit 129 Unit 126 4 about/of about about/of full of interested in late for famous for 1 at 2 after 3 into relies on deals with feel like reached listening to 5 6 7 5 6 7 8 1 3 about of to to Unit 128 Unit 125 1 prefer water to wine? blaming Tom for the/his accident? thank you for the/her present? accuse him/the head teacher of murder? provide you with towels? (Also possible: provide towels for you?) 6 invite you to her wedding? 7 congratulate them on the/their (great) victory? 8 pointed a gun at Melanie? 5 6 7 to to with Nick says he's/he has given up smoking. How did the accident come about? I think Matthew and Emma have fallen out. The problem isn't going to just go away. The government is bringing in a new tax on computers. 6 Zedco want to set up a new sales office in Germany. sort out taking over fell through fight off 5 6 7 8 fallen behind step down taken on laying off Unit 133 Unit 130 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 completely away/disappearing continuing from start to finish aloud disconnected away/departing becoming less completely to the ground from start to finish to different people increasing wearing stopping completely 2 1 on, off 2 out, out 3 1 try on 2 taking off 1 1 Trevor 2 1998 3 4 April (about) two weeks 2 1 you 2 he, your 3 he, you 3 1 the day before/the previous day 2 that day 3 here 4 the week before/the previous week Unit 134 3 4 down, out on, out 3 4 speak up setting off 1 down on 2 out into 3 up at 4 5 6 away from through to in from 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 go back on get on to go in for cut down on fall back on get round to make up for 1 1 was 4 2 was 5 3 is (Also possible: was) 2 1 you had finished it/your project. 2 you weren't on a diet. 3 you didn't enjoy them/parties. 4 you weren't applying for it/the job. 3 1 Unit 131 1 2 3 run out of send away for look/watch out for look forward to keep up with put up with get on with 1 1 get on (well) with Melanie./Melanie and I get on (well). 2 I might drop in on David. 3 I'll fit in with everyone else. 4 I can't catch up (with) Matthew. 5 The sunny weather is making up for last week. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 she can't sleep. he's/he has hurt his back. She says she feels sick all the time. He says he fell over and hurt himself. 2 1 2 3 4 Stokeley Carmichael said (that) black is beautiful. Galileo said (that) the earth moves round the sun. Shakespeare said (that) all the world's a stage. George Orwell said (that) Big Brother is watching you. 1 2 3 4 tell say say say 3 5 6 7 8 tell tell tell say The Sunday Times said the production was brilliant. Edward Devine said he couldn't remember a funnier show. Robert Walsh said it (had) made him laugh. The Evening Standard said you/people had to see it. (Also possible: The Evening Standard said you/people must see it.) The Telegraph said it would be a great success. The Express said you/people might die laughing. Susan Proctor said it was the funniest show she'd/she had ever seen. Time Out said you/people shouldn't miss it. Unit 135 1 3 4 She wants to know how she can find out about the area. He wants to know if/whether there are any guided tours. They want to know where they can stay. They want to know what shows there are. 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Do you know if I can park here? Could you tell me how long the film lasts? Do you know how often the buses run? Do you know if we are/we're allowed to smoke? Could you tell me what time the flight is? Could you tell me how much a ticket costs? 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 why I wanted the job. how I (had) heard about it. if/whether I was fit. if/whether 1 could work on Saturdays. how I would/I'd travel to work. if/whether I had (got) a bicycle. how much I hoped to earn. when I could start. 2 Unit 132 1 was was (Also possible: is) 6 7 vase that David broke was extremely valuable. jacket Melanie wore at the party is really nice. 2 1 2 3 4 5 It's/It is the car you can afford. It's/It is the film people want to see. It's/It is the supermarket you can trust. It's/It is the magazine young people read. They're/They are the chocolates you'll love. 3 1 Somewhere I've got a photo of the mountain we climbed. The man who/that repaired my car is a real expert. The detective lost sight of the man he was following. I thought I recognized the assistant who/that served us. I'm afraid the numbers I chose didn't win a prize. Unit 136 1 1 2 4 The doctor told him to take more exercise. His boss asked/told him not to play computer games in the office. A traffic warden told him not to park his car in the High Street. Laura asked him to put some shelves up. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Andrew to take a break. for forgetting the shopping. singing a few songs. Vicky to post a/the letter. making a mistake. Laura not to touch the electric wires. 3 2 3 1 The builders have promised that everything will be ready on time. 2 The boss insists that we (have to) check the figures carefully. 3 Tom has admitted that his story wasn't completely true. 4 Matthew reminded Emma that her train was about to leave. 2 3 4 5 Unit 139 1 2 3 Unit 137 1 2 3 1 the young man at the door 2 the man who plays his stereo at night 3 the very thin woman 4 the girl with green eyes (Also possible: the green-eyed girl) 5 the young woman in the office 6 the man who drives a taxi 7 the smart young man 8 the student who failed all her exams 1 that/which 2 who/that 3 who/that 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 5 6 that/which that/which who/that The bomb which went off this morning caused a lot of damage. The scientist who discovered a new planet has won the Nobel Prize. The footballer who took drugs has been banned from playing again. The little girl who had been missing since Thursday has been found safe and well. The company which owns Greenway Supermarkets has laid off thousands of workers. The old lady who did a parachute jump now wants to swim the English Channel. Unit 138 1 1 dog that fell down a hole has been rescued. 2 story that upset everyone was untrue. 3 man who interviewed Natasha is a film producer. 4 accident that Daniel saw wasn't very serious. 5 man who/that Claire knows is a millionaire. 1 4 That's/That is the film (that/which) I was talking about. This is the wallpaper (that/which)I've/I have decided on. That's/That is the man (who/that) I played tennis with. Those are the steps (that/which) I fell down. 2 1 A hammer is a tool (that/which) you hit nails with. 2 Your destination is the place (that/which) you're/you are going to. 3 A safe is a cupboard (that/which) you keep valuable things in. 4 Your opponent is the person (who/that) you're/you are playing against. 5 A sofa bed is a piece of furniture you can either sit or sleep on. 3 1 That is an idea in which our party believes. 2 That is a policy to which I am strongly opposed. 3 These are people about whom no one cares. 4 Those are mistakes of which your party should be ashamed. 5 That is a problem with which the government is now dealing. 1 1 Unit 140 2 3 4 5 Felix Reeves is the journalist whose tape recorder was stolen. Graham Wilshaw is the architect who knew Colin at school. Rex Carter is the farmer whose land Colin bought. Norman Bridge is the lawyer who looked after Colin's interests. Sonia Goldman is the house guest whose fingerprints were on the door handle. 2 3 1 What you have to think about is your profit. 2 What you must know are the needs of your customers. 3 What you should work towards is a realistic target. 4 What you need to do is (to) plan ahead. 1 Columbus sailed to America. 2 golf that Tiger Woods plays. 3 It was in Greece that the Olympic Games first took place. 4 It's/It is Mercury that is nearest the sun. 3 4 5 Unit 143 1 1 2 3 4 played worn arriving telling 2 1 living in an empty office building have been evicted. employing four thousand people has gone bankrupt. built only two years ago has been declared unsafe. People protesting against pollution have marched to London. Tennis fans hoping to buy tickets have been queuing all night at Wimbledon. A new drug developed at a British university may give us eternal youth. Unit 141 1 1 Nelson Mandela, who was in prison for 27 years, became President of South Africa. 2 John Lennon, who was killed in 1980, was one of the Beatles. 3 The Titanic, which sank in 1912, was supposed to be unsinkable. 4 Queen Victoria, who came to the throne in 1837, ruled over the British Empire. 5 Mars, which is 140 million miles away, is known as the red planet. 6 The Berlin Wall, which was built in 1961, stood for 28 years. 2 1 2 3 4 5 It adds information about the college theatre. It tells us which people. It adds information about Lucy Kellett. It tells us which young man. It adds information about the evening. 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 who took Rita to the party , who has a bad temper, which Tom supports , who is afraid of heights. , which is on the tenth floor, she bought the sofa from Unit 142 1 1 2 3 4 which who whose why 2 1 2 3 4 which has ten thousand employees whose name was missed off the list (that/which) Laura painted (that/which) we're/we are all looking forward to OR to which we're/we are all looking forward (that/when) Mike and Harriet went camping who is a bit deaf whom/who you'll meet tomorrow where we met the other day 5 6 7 8 3 1 2 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 3 5 6 7 watching added blocking 1 the youngest girl to swim a length of the pool. 2 the only people to get a pay rise. 3 The pilot was the last person to leave the aircraft. 4 Mrs Harper was the first woman to become Managing Director. 5 Daniel was the most suitable candidate to apply for the job. Unit 144 1 1 1 ask 2 there are 3 it's 4 won't cost 5 6 7 share I see I'll ask 2 1 If Rachel fails her driving test, she can take it again. 2 If United lose, Tom will be upset. 3 If the office is closed, Mark won't be able to get in. 4 If Nick arrives a bit early, he can help Tom to get things ready. 5 If the party goes on all night, no one will want to do any work tomorrow. 6 If Emma misses the train, she can get the next one. 7 If Matthew enters the race, he'll probably win it. 3 1 2 3 4 5 whom/who who which where Rachel's mother paid for the meal, which was very kind of her. My brother is disabled, which means he can't get about very easily. You left the keys in the car, which was rather careless of you. Vicky didn't get the job, which has made her very depressed. The police blocked off the road, which caused a traffic jam. If you get promoted, your salary goes up. If I drink coffee late at night, I can't sleep. If you don't pay the bill, you get a warning letter. If I try to run fast, I get out of breath. If someone enters the building, the alarm goes off. Unit 145 1 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 If I had a dictionary, I could look the word up. If I wasn't so busy, I'd/I would write to my friends. If my back wasn't aching, I could play tennis. if Claire loved Henry, she'd/she would marry him. if he had a map, he could find the way. if he/David wasn't so clumsy, he wouldn't have so many accidents. 2 1 2 3 4 5 you wouldn't play we go I didn't play it'd be/it would be you think 3 1 2 3 4 5 The phone isn't working. It might rain. Mike isn't here. The/This spoon isn't silver. Sarah might call. 5 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 you played I wouldn't/couldn't hear you'd/you had told I wouldn't have let you didn't play it wouldn't be/it might not be I'd/I had realized I would have thrown you go I'll have 3 1 If I'd/I had known how unpopular Jason was, I wouldn't have invited him (to my party). If you put too many tins into the plastic bag, it'll break. If I had a pen, I could write down the address. If I'd/I had started my project earlier, I wouldn't be so far behind (now). If you need some/any help, give me a ring. If the door opens, the fan comes on. 6 you thought 7 it'd be/it would be 8 it won't do 9 I wouldn't get 2 3 4 Unit 146 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 would have been had lost would have scored she'd been/she had been hadn't been wouldn't have given hadn't been it would have been we'd have beaten/we would have beaten he'd been/he had been 1 The guests could/would have had their lunch outside if it had been warm enough/if it hadn't been so cold. 2 Sarah could/would have flown to Rome if the airport hadn't been closed/had been open. 3 Laura might have recognized Nick if he hadn't had a crash-helmet on. 4 Sarah's plants wouldn't have died/might not have died if she'd/she had watered them. 5 Nick could/would have got in (to the ice hockey game) if he'd/he had had a ticket. 5 6 Unit 148 1 1 2 3 4 When the alarm rings, If I feel better tomorrow, When this film finishes, If the plan doesn't work, 2 1 2 3 4 unless it's/it is a nice day. unless you're/you are watching it. unless we get help. unless I liked it. 3 1 unless 2 if 3 unless 4 unless 4 1 2 3 1 he was/were, he'd/he would have put 2 I'd/I had paid, I wouldn't be 3 you loved, you wouldn't have left 5 Unit 147 1 up. 1 2 3 If the twins had worn different clothes, we could have told them apart, type 3 If you tell me what the instructions say, I'll try to follow them, type 1 If people used public transport, there'd be less pollution, type 2 If you don't wear a sweater, you might not be warm enough, type 1 If I hadn't seen the product advertised, I wouldn't have bought it. type 3 We'd/We had better book a table in case the restaurant is busy. You ought to insure your jewellery in case it gets stolen. I'll leave you my phone number in case you want to contact me. 1 unless 2 If 3 in case 4 when Unit 149 l 2 3 4 5 I wish you'd/you would hurry I wish you'd/you would do the washing-up. I wish you'd/you would tell me the whole story. I wish you wouldn't blow cigarette smoke in my face. I wish you'd/you would tell me what you're thinking. 2 1 I wish/If only I wasn't so tired. 2 I wish/If only I didn't get (these) headaches. 3 I wish/If only my work was going well/better. 4 I wish/If only I could concentrate. 5 I wish/If only life wasn't so complicated. 3 1 2 3 4 5 I'd/I had caught it. she'd/she had stayed (there). she'd/she had accepted it. I'd/I had found it. OR I could have found it. he could have played 4 1 2 3 4 5 I hadn't asked you (to marry me) you wouldn't talk nonsense I was a young man you would/you'd listen I'd/I had met you OR I could have met you 3 4 3 1 Nick keeps a dog to guard the house. 2 David is going to be very careful so that he doesn't/won't have an accident. 3 Jessica is going on a diet to lose weight. 4 Trevor often switches off the heating to save money. 5 Sarah had to go to Birmingham for a business meeting. 6 Emma wore boots so that her feet wouldn't get wet. 1 1 I'll love you until I die 2 I hear music when I see you 3 Come back before 1 forget you 4 I've been sad since you left me 5 1 fell in love as soon as we met Unit 152 Unit 150 1 2 1 2 3 but it's really quite modern. but she turned it down. but no one laughed. 2 1 Although the house looks old, it's really quite modern. Although Emma was offered a job, she turned it down. Although the joke was funny, no one laughed. 1 2 3 4 5 Although in order to because If but 6 7 8 9 so unless In spite of in case 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 as soon as to since but so that because 7 8 9 10 11 12 in case until although if so in spite of 1 1 and 2 so 3 and 4 5 6 but so but 2 1 Furthermore 2 however 3 In other words 4 5 6 On the contrary After all for example 3 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 3 1 Although 2 in spite of 3 Although 4 1 in spite of/despite 2 In spite of/Despite 3 but/although/though 4 Even though/Although/Though 5 He's/He is going to take risks in order to/so as to be a winner. He's/He is going to think positively in order not to/so as not to miss any opportunities. 1 2 3 4 4 5 in spite of in spite of Trevor didn't notice the sign even though it was right in front of him. Matthew doesn't know any French although it was one of his school subjects. Despite being a millionaire, Henry's friend hates spending money. We couldn't get tickets in spite of queuing for an hour. Unit 151 1 1 to go to sleep. 2 to hear the football results. 3 to look smart. 4 to finance her studies. 2 1 2 He's/He is going to get to work earlier in order to/so as to impress the boss. He's/He is going to work harder in order to/so as to achieve more. Unit 153 In other words, you don't want to see him. By the way, what's the time/what time is it? Anyway, they haven't got one in my size. Sarah ('s got one/has one), for example. On the contrary, I loved/liked it. Key to the tests The number after the answer tells you which unit of the book has information and practice on that grammar point. The letter after the number tells you which section of the unit to look at. Test1 lA 1 aren't 4B 2 does 5C 3 Do 5C 4 don't 5C 5 6 7 are 4B doesn't 5C isn't 4B lB 1 is 4B 2 do 5C 3 sitting 4B 4 don't 5C 5 doesn't 5C,7A 6 go 5A-B 7 8 9 10 11 12 being 7B get 5B gets 5B means 5B,7A always 6D costing 4B,7C lC 1 The girls are playing tennis at the moment. 4B 2 Both my brothers like sport. 5B 3 Anna is wearing her new coat today. 4B 4 What colour do you like best? 5C 5 My suitcase weighs ten kilos. 7B 6 At the moment I'm staying at a hotel. 6C 7 Robert catches the same bus every morning. 5B 8 What does this word here mean? 5C, 6B lD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I'm thinking 7B, cost 7C, It's/It is getting 4C look 7B, they don't fit 7B, I don't know 7B are you doing 6A, I'm/I am weighing 7B, I need 7A I think 7B, is going 6A, I agree 5A I like 7C, Are you enjoying 7C, I'm/I am loving 7C I'm/I am always falling 6D, do you go 6A, it doesn't make 6A I'm living 6C, I'm looking 4C, I promise 5A do you want 6B, I don't understand 6B, you're/you are being 7B Test 2 2A 1 left 8B 2 were 8B 3 died 8D 4 had8B 5 didn't like 8C 6 7 8 9 went 8D happened 8B wasn't 8C knew 8D 2B 1 I was wearing my old coat. 9B, 9C 2 We were (both) on holiday. 8B 3 I didn't make a mistake. 8C 4 The boys were playing (a game of) cards. 9B, 9C 5 I didn't know about the change of plan. 8C, 8D 6 My friend won the competition. 8B 7 Did the Romans build this wall? 8C 2C 1 shining 9A 9 had 8B, 8D 2 was 9B 10 was 9B 3 wasn't 9B 11 took 8B, 8D 4 didn't 8C 12 didn't 8C 5 hated/detested 13 wanted/hoped/had/ 8B,8D intended 8B, 8D 6 walked/went 8B, 8D 14 When 1 OB 7 were 9B 15 was 8B 8 sat 8B, 8D 2D 1 It was peaceful and the birds were singing. 9B 2 I was washing my hair when the phone rang. 10B 3 You didn't come to the club last night. 8C 4 It took ages to get home. 8B 5 We tried to keep quiet because the baby was sleeping. 9B 6 As I was watching him, the man suddenly ran away. 10B 7 We passed a petrol-station two minutes ago. 8B 8 Everything seemed OK. 10A 9 Where did you buy that bag? 8C 10 When I heard the alarm, I left the room immediately. 10B 2E 1 was lying 10B, rang 10B, stopped 10A 2 was 10A, left 10B, was falling IOC 3 came 10A, seemed 10A, enjoyed 10A 4 saw 10B, was standing 10B, had 10A 5 opened 1 OB, fell 10B 6 was walking 10B, felt 10B, didn't know 10A 7 were going 10A, heard 10A, drove 10A 8 happened 10A, was driving 10A, saw 10A Test 3 3A 1 washed 1 IB 2 eaten 1 ID 3 opened 1 IB 4 written 11C 5 made 11C 6 had 11C 7 8 9 10 11 12 scored 1 IB landed 11A broken 1 ID been 11C sold 11C finished 1 IB 3B 1 's/has opened 1 IB 2 's/has drawn 11C 3 's/has broken 11C 4 have won 11C 5 've/have drunk/finished 11C, 11B 6 've/have washed/cleaned 1 IB 7 've/have learnt/learned 11C, 1 IB 8 have arrived/come 11B, 11C 9 haven't finished 12A 3C 1 already 12A 2 yet 12A 3 been 13A 4 ever 13B 5 this 13D 6 7 8 9 10 long 12B gone 13A since 12B time 13C never 13B 3D I have 14A 2 V 14A 3 have 14C 4 V 14C 5 V 14A 3E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 6 7 8 9 10 has 14A V 14A V 14A has 14B have 14B went 14C Ve/have never seen 15B did 14C has won 14A worked 15A did you get 15C has been 15B has come 14A did you get 14C haven't ridden 14C was 15B Have you ever baked 15B was 15A rang 14B Have you seen 15C 've/have been 15A Test5 5A 1 I'm/I am living 21B, I've/I have found 21C 2 I think, it belongs 21B 3 I'm/I am using 21B, I want 21B, I've/I have started 21C 4 You leave 21B, I've had/I have had 21D, I've/I have been rushing 21D Test 4 4A 1 been 16B 2I' vel8C 3werel9C 4 been 20B 5 hadn't 18C 4B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 6 7 8 9 4D 1 I've/I have finished 18C 2 have we been waiting 17A, We've/We have been 17B 3 we'd/we had drunk, she hurried 19D 4 I was having, I heard 19C 5 have you been doing 16D, We've/We have done 17A 6 she'd/she had been crying 20C, she'd had/she had had 18A 7 heard, threw 19D Have 18C was 19B went 19B I've 16B The doctor has been working since six o'clock. 16C Rupert had forgotten his credit card. 18A I didn't want to go until I'd/I had taken a photo. 19D Nancy has written the report. 17A I've/I have been waiting in the queue (for) forty minutes (so far). 16C When we arrived, everyone was dancing. 19C I've had/I have had the computer for four years. 17B When we were having/eating lunch, there was a knock at the door. 19C Nigel felt sick because he'd/he had eaten too many cakes. 20C I'd/I had been on holiday. 19D I've/I have been playing badminton. 16C I'd had/1 had had a shock. 17A How long have you been working? 16D Lots of people were walking along the street outside. 19B She's/She has been practising her English since last summer. 16C I've/I have passed my exam. 17A She'd/She had been lying in the sun for too long. 20C But the coach had already gone. 18A 5B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 heard 21E thought 21E was 2IE called/rang/phoned 21F stopped 21F was 21E had21F knocked 2IF got/come 2IF been 21G 5C 1 It's/It has been raining for ten hours. 2ID 2 I think it's the right thing to do. 21 B 3 We've moved our/the sofa. 21C 4 I was having/eating (some/my) breakfast when Susan rang. 21E 5 They always play badminton on Tuesday. 21B 5D 1 I was looking 21E 4 2 I'm going 21B 5 3 I've been trying 21D 5 6 7 8 I'd spent 21F They opened 21C 5E 1 2 3 4 V 21B been21G was21E are21B have 21C V 2lG been 2ID V 21F 5F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 failed 21C lives 21B left 21C had made 21G were walking 21E saw21E has seen 21D hadn't arrived 21F had been waiting 21G/were waiting 2IE have been trying/have tried 2ID have had 21D are taking 21B believe 2IB want21B Test 6 6A 1 going 24A 2 will 23B (Also possible: won't) 3 see 27A 4 not 23C 5 to 26C 6 Shall 23D 7 is 24B 8 getting 26A 9 has 27C 10 about (Also possible: going/ready) 6B 1 What time does it get to London? 26B 2 I'll tell her when T see her this evening. 27A 3 He's about to fall asleep. 26C 4 We're/We are meeting in town later, OR We're/We are going to meet in town later. 26A 5 I'll send you a postcard. 23B 6 I can read a book while I'm waiting. 27C 7 I'm/I am going to lie down. 24A 8 All your friends will be there. 23D 9 No one can go into the building until the police have searched it. 27C 6C 1 will 25A 2 is 27A 3 will 25A 4 going 24A 5 to 24B 6 7 8 9 10 have 27C will 25A having/holding 26A starts/begins 26B will25A 6D 1 leaves 26B 2 I'm going to apply 25A 3 I'll help 25B 4 it's about to open 26C 5 I go 27A 6 Are you doing 26A 7C 1 '11/will be having 28B 2 was going to drive 29B 3 '11/will be working 28B 4 '11/will have done 29A 5 were going to buy 29B 6 '11/will have had 29A 7D 1 I'm/I am going 26A OR I'm/I am going to go 24A 2 I'm/I am leaving 26A OR I leave 26B OR I'm going to leave 24A 3 I'm/I am visiting 26A OR I'm/I am going to visit 24A 4 That'll/That will be 25A 5 starts 26B/is starting 26A 6 you get 27B 7 I'll/I will send 23B 7E 1 We'll wait for you. 23B 2 This train stops at Bath. 26B 3 My friend was going to meet us. 29B 4 Adrian is having a job interview on 17 October. 26A 5 We'll/We will have finished our meal by eight o'clock. 29A 6 I might go on the trip. 30C 7 The fire is about to go out. 26C 7F 1 I'm going to move 24A 2 I'll take 23B 3 we're going 26A 4 He's going to jump 24C 5 I'll be using 28C Test 8 6E 1 I'm/I am going to have a rest. 24A 2 (The) term starts on 6 September. 26B 3 There will be a world war in five years' time. 23B 4 Judy and I are/We're playing tennis tomorrow. 26A 5 Prices will probably fall. 25C (Also possible: Prices are probably going to fall.) 6 The car is/We're going to crash! 24C Test 7 7a 1 going 24C 2 be 28C 3 will 23A 4 don't 26B 5 6 7 8 was 29B are 26A to 24B about 26C 7B 1 is26B 2 V2 6 C 3 be 23C 4 for 26C 5 6 7 8 V 28c V29b will 27B to 29A 8A 1 Where have you been? 36B 2 Do you sell postcards? 34B 3 Who does this calculator belong to? 39A 4 How long are you staying here? 36C 5 What is your new office like? 38B 6 Which of the flights are full? 39B 7 What time does the carnival start? 36C 8 What holiday has Nancy decided on? 38A 8B 1 How old 36C 2 What colour 36C 3 Whose 37B 4 How much 36C 5 Which 39A 6 What kind 36C 7 8 9 10 11 Who 39B How 38B How far 36C How often 36C What 39A 8C 1 Are you a student here? 34B 2 How many cakes have you eaten? 37B 3 Did you enjoy your walk? 34B 4 Where have your friends gone? 36B 5 What kind of music do you like? 36C 6 Does Peter play tennis? 34B 7 What are you talking about? 38A 8 What has happened? 37A 8D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Where did you buy your coat? 36B Can Amy swim? 34B Which band do you like best? 37B Who am I speaking to? 38A How much do video recorders cost? 36C May/Can I come in (, please)? 34A How long does the journey take? 36B What did you lock the door for? 38B What happens next? 37A Shall we (all) go out together? 34A 8E 1 How many cars have the Smiths got/do the Smiths have? 36C Where does Janet work? 36B Why is Andrea learning English? 36A What was the film like? 38B When will the meeting take place? 36B Who switched off the computer? 37A Whose burglar alarm was ringing? 37B Who did Anna go to the dance with? 38A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Test 9 9A 1 Who's 37A 2 don't 42B 3 not40B 4 has 35B 5 Haven't 41B 6 so43B 7 8 9 10 11 12 they 42B Which 39B don't 40B neither 42A doesn't 41B Let's 42C 9B 1 Where do you live? 36B 2 What are you thinking about? 38A 3 Would you like to come to my room? 34A 4 Didn't you watch the football match on television? 41C 5 May I take a photo (, please)? 34A 6 Have you seen Polly? 34B 7 How many letters have you written? 37B 8 Who is/Who's coming to your party? 37A 9 How often does Martin cook? 36C 10 What will the weather be (like) tomorrow? 38B 9C 1 No, it hasn't. 35B 2 No, 1 hate it/Yes, 1 love it. 41D 3 Yes, I expect so. 43B 4 It isn't very nice, is it? 42B 5 Yes, please. 35C 6 So am I./I am too. 43A 7 I hope not. 43B 8 Neither did the second. 43A 9D 1 2 3 4 5 How old are you? 36C Did you go to college? 34B What are your interests? 39A Which company do you work for? 38A What don't you like about your job? 41E 9E 1 2 3 doesn't 40B course 35C neither/nor 43A 4 5 6 No 41D for 38B did 42B 7 8 9 10 11 won't 35B not 43B will 42C far36C so43B 12 don't 41E 13 Which 39A 14 so 43A 15 hasn't 41E 16 Which 40B Test 10 10A 1 mustn't 48A 2 Would 51C 3 might 46B 4 would 52A 5 6 7 8 needn't 48A Shall 51B had 49C wouldn't 52C 10BI V5IC 2 V 47A 3 to 44C 4 for50A 5 be46A 6 V52A 7 been 53B 8 V 49D 9 V 48B 10 be 45C 10C 1 We ought to be careful. 49B 2 I was able to finish all my work. 44C 3 It must have been a terrible experience for you. 53D 4 Players aren't allowed/are not allowed to have a drink. 45C 5 You'd/You had better sit down. 49C 6 The report has to be on my desk tomorrow morning. 47A 7 Joanne mightn't have/might not have received my message. 53C 8 Martin can't be jogging in this weather. 46C 9 Tessa would like a cup of coffee. 52B 10 Nancy didn't need to clean the flat. 48C 10D 1 asking permission 45A 2 giving an order 50B 3 asking for advice 49B 4 inviting 51C 5 offering to help 5IB 6 making a suggestion 51A 7 refusing permission 45B 8 making a request 50A 9 expressing a wish 47B 10E 1 have/need 48B 2 may/might (Also possible: could) 46A 3 has 47A 4 can 44A 5 allowed 45C 6 supposed 49D 7 shouldn't 49B (Also possible: mustn't 48A) 8 able 44B Test 11 11A 1 The film may be banned. 54C 2 Nancy was offered a pay increase. 57A 3 The mistakes need correcting/need to be corrected. 59B 4 The situation was reported to be under control. 57C 5 The new drug is being tested. 54B 6 The machine hasn't been used for ages. 55B 11B 1 is 54B 2 by 55B 3 be 54C/get 54D 4 were 54B 5 it 57B 6 7 8 9 been 54B have 58B to 57C being 59A llC 1 The song was sung by Pavarotti. 55B 2 Nigel had his passport stolen. 58D 3 Doctors are paid a lot of money. 57A 4 1 hope to be interviewed for the job. 59A 5 The floor was being cleaned. 54B 6 Judy is having her car repaired. 58B 7 Tessa got lost. 54D 8 It was agreed that the plan should go ahead. 57B 9 When did you get your kitchen decorated? 58C 10 Exercise is said to be good for you. 57C llD 1 b) 55A 2 b) 55A 3 a) 55A 4 5 a) 55A b) 55A llE 1 The story was written by Agatha Christie. 55B 2 Baseball is played at this stadium. 54B 3 This shirt needs ironing/needs to be ironed. 59 B 4 I got my hair cut yesterday. 58C 5 It is believed that there is going to be a war. 57B 6 My parents got divorced last year. 54D 7 I've got a report to write. 59B 8 The winner was given a prize. 57A 9 This man on TV is supposed to be the tallest person in the world. 57C Test 12 12A 1 to organize 62B 2 wearing 62B 3 to approve 62B 4 to be 62B 5 reminding 62B 6 7 8 9 to be 62B working 62B to buy 62B waiting 62B 12B 1 We must avoid wasting so much time. 61A 2 Sometimes a country refuses to take part in the Olympics. 62B 3 I'd/I would like to see the Rocky Mountains some day. 63B 4 I meant to give Judy a nice welcome yesterday. 64E 5 I always like to see my doctor once a year. 63A 6 The buses usually stop running before midnight. 64D 7 I can't face getting up at five tomorrow. 61C 8 Last year we made an agreement to work together. 60D 9 Yesterday you promised to carry on shooting the film. 62B 10 My father seems to be getting better now. 60B 12C 1 wait 62C 2 to 60A 3 seeing/meeting 61A 4 would 63B 5 6 7 8 9 12D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 need 64G (Also possible: have/ought) not61A help 61C (Also possible: stop 64D) to 62D on61D We've finished decorating the flat. 61A I regret saying what I did. 63B Tessa decided not to go to work. 60A Do you mind helping me? 61B I'm beginning to get worried. 63C I can't afford to buy a new car. 60A I hope to avoid making things worse. 62E Peter seems to have gone away already. 60B 12 E 1 The children couldn't wait to see their presents. 62C 2 I can't stand getting up in the dark. 61C 3 I happened to see your brother yesterday. 62D 4 The shop tends to open ten minutes late. 60C 5 Do you fancy going for a walk? 62C 6 The police carried on watching the house. 61D 7 I'll/I will never forget seeing Nelson Mandela. 64A Test 13 13A 1 for67B 2 in 75A 3 V 70C 4 V 66C 5 V65D 6 to 69B(3) 7 enough 68C 8 for 74C 9 them 67C 10 V 73B 13B 1 to get 71B 2 making 70B 3 reaching 70B 4 running 65D 5 dreaming 73A 6 to happen 65C 7 ordering 73B 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 13C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 to follow 68B to be 67D to do 65B respect 69B(3) to do 65B buying 65E order 69B(2) We saw Rupert looking in a shop window. 74A I remember the clown falling over. 65D Tessa wasn't sure which way to go. 66C The porter just stood there expecting a tip. 75A How about going to the barbecue? 73B Susan is used to (always) living in the country. 72B I'm afraid of hurting myself. 71A Christopher apologized for forgetting to pay. 70B The food was too cold for Michelle to eat. 68C It was silly of Polly to give away the secret. 67E (Also possible: Polly was silly to give away the secret.) 13 D 1 after 73C 2 to 65B 3 used72A 4 to71B 5 having/eating 70B 6 of67E 7 to 68D 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 to 72B how 66B of71A for68A by 73B Having 75B put 74D 13E I breaking 70C, knock 74D 2 to see 69A(8), to forget 68D 3 doing 73C, to write 69A(2) 4 to bother 71C, to ask 66B 5 to play 72A, watch 69B(2) Test 14 14A 1 a 77B 2 V76A 3 V 77B 4 a 76A 5 6 7 8 V 77B some 77A an 78C an 78C 14B 1 much 76C 2 clothes 80A 3 pairs 81A 4 fun 76A 5 is/was 79E 6 7 8 9 10 saving 80A doesn't 79C was 79A was 79A piece/slice 78A 14C 1 Every window was broken. 79B 2 My earnings aren't enough to live on. 80A 3 There was litter everywhere. 77B 4 We went to the hotel to get some food. 76A 5 Judy bought a pair of binoculars. 81A 6 1 need a new cheque book. 82B 7 I'll have a glass of orange juice, please. 78C 8 The reporter needed two pieces/bits/items of information. 77B 14D 1 We can't sit here because the grass is wet. 79A 2 Do you want (some) butter on your bread? 76A 3 All my belongings were stolen. 80A 4 Do you have any information about hotels? 77B 5 The police are questioning two men. 81C 6 Can we have two coffees/two cups of coffee, please? 78D 7 The news isn't very good, I'm afraid. 80B 8 I just want to go into this shoe shop. 82B 9 It's only a short journey by train. 79B 14E 1 wears 79B 2 a piece of advice 77B 3 the football match 82A 4 customs 80A 5 are 8IB 6 many76C 7 is 79E 8 these glasses 81A 9 steelworks 80C 10 any 77B 11 meat 76A 12 were 80A 13 A noise 78 B 14 were81C 15 is 79C 16 light 78C 17 sports club 82B 18 means 80C 19 woods 78D 20 has 79B Test 15 15A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a 83B the84C the88B The 83B the90E a 85C The83B the 83B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 the 84B the 83B a 89B a 83B one 85B the 83B The 83B 15B 1 work 87B 2 quite a difficult 89B 3 Golf 86B 4 School 87A 5 a really nice 89B 6 some photos 85D 7 the violin 86C 8 breakfast 84F 9 an X-ray 84D 10 the radio 86C 1 1 the environment 84B 12 such terrible 89C 15C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 X 86B a89B X 88B an 84D a 83B the 90C X90F a83B X 88D some 85D/the 83B (Also possible: X) a 83B a84C one85B a 83B (Also possible: one) the83B What 89D (Also possible: Such) so 89C the 84C 15D 1 V 87B 2 V 88F 3 The 86B 4 the89D 5 V 85D 6 the 88E 15E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 V 87A A 85B V 89C V 90 J V 86C a beautiful city 84C The weather 84B Easter 88C Princes Street 90G the Royal Scottish Museum 901 the Highlands 90D mountains 86B a thing 89C the sea 87B Corfu 90B some sunshine 85D (Also possible: sunshine) beach holidays 88B Test 16 16A 1 2 3 b) 97B b) 93A a) 92D 4 5 6 a) 95C b) 97C c) 94A 16B I either 97C 2 Someone 94B 3 these 91A 4 a few 95C 5 6 7 8 Some 96A People's 93A that 9IB Polly's 92E l6C 1 a 95C 2 mine92A 3 of92E 4 many95B 5 anyone 94B 6 7 8 9 None 96D all 96B lot95A whole 97B l6D 1 That was a very good idea of yours. 92E 2 You've got a lot of books, haven't you? 95A 3 I don't know the time of the meeting. 93B 4 Nigel has hurt his leg. 92C 5 All (of) the rooms in the house were cold. 96B 6 Wear anything - it doesn't matter what. 94C 7 Each of the four doors was locked. 97A 8 I live my life, and my sister lives hers. 92A 9 Both socks/Both the socks/Both of the socks have got holes in them. 97C 10 Here's a copy of this week's magazine. 93C 11 This sweater is losing its colour. 92B 12 I want some paper, but there's none in here. 96D l6E 1 I've lived here most of my life. 96B 2 Every hotel was full. 97A 3 The house on the corner is bigger than ours. 92A 4 I've forgotten the name of my doctor. 93A 5 We have had/We've had little warning of the changes. 95C 6 So many people have applied for the job. 95B 7 I met an old boyfriend of yours at a party. 92E 8 Neither of the chairs is/are comfortable. 97C 9 My holiday starts in ten days' time. 93C Test 17 17A 1 himself 100C 2 They98B 3 We 98B 4 them98B 5 us98B 6 themselves 100D 7 8 9 10 11 It 99B They 98C ourselves 98D her 98B me98B 17B 1 yourself 100C 2 it 99B 3 some 102C 4 us 100C 5 Me 98B 6 7 8 9 ones 102B there 99A each other's 101B else 103D 17C 1 2 3 4 17D 1 2 3 one 102C 5 everyone/everybody 6 103A 7 herself 100C 8 one 102B 9 It 99B something 103A one 102C You 98C ourselves 101A one 102C himself 100D something 103A it 99B her 98B There 99A 4 5 6 7 8 9 everyone/ everybody 103C it 99B there 99A 10 each 10 IB 11 them 98B 12 him 98B 17E 1 There's/There is a train leaving in ten minutes. 99C 2 I think someone is/someone's coming up the stairs. 103C 3 Let's meet at eight o'clock, shall we? 100E 4 We haven't got a camcorder, but we'd like one. 102C 5 Let's do something different/something else today. 103D 6 They are/They're going to build a new motorway through here. 98C 7 I'm afraid I haven't done anything all day. 103B 8 Everyone enjoyed themselves at the barbecue. 100B, 100D 9 If you're buying'a loaf, get a nice fresh one. 102B 10 I've looked everywhere for my credit card. 103A 11 The two friends still see each other/see one another occasionally. 101B Test 18 18A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 freely 109C The young man 106C hungry 104B thoughtfully 108C right 109B fascinating 107B similar 104C well 109D the disabled 106B confused 107B scientifically 108B frightened 104C 18 B 1 This is a nice place. 104B 2 I can't find the large biscuit tin. 105B 3 Tessa behaved in a silly way. 109A 4 Your coffee is getting cold. 104B 5 They live in a lovely old stone house. 105C 6 This hospital is for the mentally ill. 106B 18C 1 expensive 104B 2 nice 104B 3 surprised 107B 4 carefully 108A 18 D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 6 7 8 amusing 107B elderly 109A friendly 109A free 109C The drink tasted strange. 108C Obviously, the sick need to be looked after. 106A The dog was asleep. 104C The young woman spoke politely. 108A The train arrived late. 109C The film ends dramatically. 108B Polly shouted angrily. 108B Billiards is an indoor game. 104C The clown was amusing. 107B (Also possible: People found the clown amusing.) 10 There was hardly any time left. 109C 18E I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 I tasted the soup carefully. 108C V 105C Are the children asleep? 104C It's a school for the deaf/for deaf people. 106C It's a nice new leather jacket. 105C The rich are/Rich people are very lucky. 106A V 109D He used a thick green paper towel. 105C V 106A The course I started was boring./I was bored with the course I started. 107B I often talk to the two old people/men/women next door. 106C The smoke rose high into the air. 109C V 104B We felt disappointed when we lost. 107B Everyone seemed very nervous. 108C Tessa drives too fast. 109B V 107B Test 19 19A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Test 20 20A 1 2 3 4 I quite like old cowboy films. 115C Have you finished this magazine yet? 114B This coat is too big. 117B Have the children already had their tea?/Have the children had their tea already? 114C 5 You certainly don't look ill. 113G 6 We don't go out much. 115D 7 I think everyone works fairly hard. 115B 8 I still don't know the date of the meeting. 114C 9 The others are just getting ready. 113B 10 I have to go to work on Saturdays./On Saturdays I have to go to work. 113H 20B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 more intelligent HOB cleaner HOB thinner HOC more carefully 110D worse 11OE later HOC longer 110D more useful 11 OB sooner HOD busier HOC more annoyed HOB more nervous HOB 19B 1 funniest HOC 2 most horrible HOB 3 most recent HOB 4 largest HOC 5 most boring 11 OB 6 7 8 9 10 farthest/furthest 110E most helpful 11 OB most modern HOB earliest HOD saddest HOC 19C 1 2 3 4 5 V 111D the 11 IB V lllC all2B s oll 2D 6 7 8 9 10 V 111B mostllOA V 111E of 111C more 112C 19D 1 2 3 4 nicer 111B as 111D least 112A than me 111E 5 6 7 8 in 111C bit 112B as 111D the easier 112D 19E 1 is bigger than the living-room 11 IB 2 fitter than I am 11OC, 111B 3 is as big as 111D 4 just get higher and higher 112C 5 is more expensive than 110A, 111B 6 is the least difficult 112A 7 more and more excited 112C 8 most romantic story I've ever 111C This game is rather silly. 115B I've already paid the bill./I've paid the bill already. 114C The alarm isn't loud enough. 117B Jonathan passed the test easily./Jonathan easily passed the test. 113C The children play cards a lot. 115C They didn't sell enough tickets. 117B You ask too many questions. 117B I'm not a member of the club any more. 114D It's warm enough to sit outside. 117C 20C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 yet 114B still 114C rather 116C enough 117B many 117B toll7C any 114D noll4D bit 115A soon 113E 20DI I didn't sleep very well last night./Last night I didn't sleep very well. 113E I think I need to rest a little. 115C I don't work for the company any longer. 114D The article is fairly interesting. 115A Tessa locked the door carefully./Tessa carefully locked the door. 113C You aren't tall enough to play basketball. 117B We went to town yesterday./Yesterday we went to town. 113H I like this music very much./I very much like this music. 115D 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20E 1 2 3 4 5 We go to the cinema a lot. 115C Adrian always wears jeans. 113F These shoes aren't big enough. 117A I no longer live in Birmingham. 114D Polly spent too much money in the sales. 117B Test 21 2lA 1 The doctor has been working for twelve hours. 121B 2 We had a great time at the disco. 119B 3 The woman was getting out of the car. 118A 4 The players had numbers on their shirts. 119A 5 The new manager takes over in two weeks' time. 120C 6 Anna drove to the garage to get some petrol. 118B 7 We were sitting at the back of the room. 119C 2lB 1 on 119C 2 ago 121C 3 on 120A 4 at 120A/by 122B 5 atll9C 6 on 119A 7 in 120C 8 across 118 A 9 during 122A/in 10 until/till 122B 2lC 1 the 120B 2 V ll8A 3 V 122C 4 thell8A 5 6 7 on 120A V 119C V 122B 2lD 1 o n l l 9 C 2 for 123A 3 by 122B 4 at 123B 5 since 121B 6 with 124B 7 above 118A 8 ofl24C 9 while 122A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 between 124C like 122C with 125B ago 121C for 124D until 122B for 125A in 120A to 125D 2lE 1 Scott lives in Washington. 119A 2 I'm travelling to Italy on business. 120A 3 I'm busy on Friday morning. 120A 4 They've/They have been playing (for) an hour. 121A 5 Jonathan is very good at tennis. 125C 6 I'm rather busy at the moment. 120A 7 We went/travelled to Budapest by air. 123C 8 Nigel goes past the newsagent's every day. 118A 9 The company is planning (to make) a reduction in the workforce. 124C 10 We got to our guest house in time for a meal. 120B Test 22 22A 1 2 3 4 5 6 22B 1 2 3 4 I must pay for my ticket. 126B I'm going to put on that expensive grey coat I bought. 128C She's invited us to lunch. 127B He's looking at them. 126A The police prevented me from leaving. 127B I'm going to turn it off. 128C about 126C out BOB on 128B offl28A 5 6 7 8 up 130B at 126B through 129C up for l31B 22C 1 You've left one out. 128B 2 I've never heard of it. 126C 3 They ran away from it. 131A 4 You must congratulate her on her success. 127B 5 She's going to set up her own company. 129B 6 He reminds me of an old schoool friend of mine. 127C 7 He wants to put it forward at the meeting. 129C 22DI 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 as 127B about/of 127C look/watch 13 IB in 126B from 127A on 127B at 127B out 129A (Also possible: over) out 125A forward 13IB woke 129A up 129A 22E 1 You're too young to give up working. 129B 2 This bag belongs to Janet. 126A 3 Everyone carried on working as usual. 130B 4 They discussed the plan. 126C 5 I've/1 have run out of money. 13 IB 6 I explained the problem to the police./I explained to the police what the problem was. 127C 7 I wouldn't put up with such terrible conditions. 131B 8 They'll have to put off the game/put the game off. 128B Test 23 23A 1 me 135D 2 did 135C 3 V 136B 4 that 135B 5 6 7 8 V 133B me 132C did 134B for 136A 23B 1 2 3 4 was 134B previous 133B whether 135B not to l36A 5 6 7 8 told 132C that 133B could 134C suggested 136B 23C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 they 133B that/if/whether 132B she 133B to 132A didn't 134B had 134B wouldn't/didn't 134C if/whether 135B wanted/needed/had 135A next/following/same 134B 23D I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 23E 1 2 3 4 5 6 she said she felt quite excited. 133B, 134B he said he couldn't remember the code word. 133B, 134C he said he wouldn't be at the next meeting. 133B, 134C they said they had/they'd got a problem. 133B, 134B she said she'd been swimming/she had been swimming. 133B, 134B they said they would like to be in the show. 133B, 134C he said he didn't need any help. 133B, 134B she said her sister was coming to see her. ] 33B, 134B A policeman told Christopher to stop shouting. 136A Tessa admitted eating all the cake/having eaten all the cake the day before/the previous day. 133B, 136B Adrian apologized for being rude/for having been rude. 136B Simon invited Susan to join him for lunch. 133B, 136B Martin asked Nancy if/whether someone rang her/someone had rung her an hour before. 133B, 135B Peter insisted on leaving. 136B Test 24 24A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 for 139A entering 143A which 136B only 143B who 142A whom 139C that you took 138A where 142C which 142D whose 140A 24B 1 This isn't the train on which I normally travel. 139C/ This isn't the train (that/which) I normally travel on. 139B The letter that I opened wasn't for me. 137B The reason (why/that) I didn't know was that no one had told me. 142C What we should do is ring the police. HOB I didn't know the name of the man who/that helped me. 138B Rupert knows the family whose house is for sale. 140A Einstein, who failed his university entrance exam, discovered relativity. 141B The person we talked to was very friendly./138B The people we talked to were very friendly. It's the President who makes the important decisions. 14OC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 I can't find my diary, which is a real nuisance. 142D 11 Outside the door was a pair of boots covered in mud. 143A 12 Lake Superior, which lies on the US-Canadian border, is the largest lake in North America. 142A 24C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 who 133B (Also possible: that) that/which 133B that/which 135A it 136C that/which 133B what 136B whose 136A which 138D what 136B who 138A 24DI that/which crashed was 137B/, which crashed, was 142A 2 (when/that) Martin rang (,) Tessa was 142C 3 new offices are 133A/offices, which are new, are 142A 4 stolen from a car have been 143A / that/which were stolen from a car have been 137B 5 (that/which) you were looking at is 139A-B 6 Theatre, which dates from 1896, is 142A 7 whose dog was run over was 140A 8 the first (person) to solve 143B/the first (person) who solved 137B 9 selling newspapers was standing 143A / who was selling newspapers was standing 137B 10 (that/which) Judy gave was 138A-B/, which Judy gave, was 142A 11 where I used to live is 142C/(that/which) I used to live in 139A-B/in which 1 used to live 139C Test 25 25A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 it would have opened 146B disappear 144B travelled 145B would be 147B they don't build 144B would suffer 145B I'll go 144B/I'm going to go 147B I'd/I had known 146B I'd/I would have moved 146B they'd/they had done 147B there won't be/there might not be 144B 25B 1 had been 146B 2 in case 148D 3 knew 149C 4 only 149A 5 when 148B 6 unless 148C 25C I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 If you talk about football, I'm going to be very bored. 147B If the baby had cried, we wouldn't have had a good sleep. 146B If you want a chat, just give me a ring. 147B If Nigel had satellite TV, he could watch/would be able to watch the game. 145B If you go away, I'll miss you. 144B If I was/were rich, I'd/1 would have given up working long ago. 146D If we'd/we had bought that picture five years ago, it would be quite valuable now. 146D If you throw a stone into water, it sinks, OR If you throw a stone into water, it'll/it will sink. 144D 25D 1 If it rains, I'll stay here. 144B 2 Can you tell me when it starts? 148B 3 I wouldn't need to repeat things all the time if you listened. 145B 4 If air gets warmer, it rises. 144D 5 I'd better get another one made in case I lose it. 148D 6 I wish we'd/we had left home earlier. 149D 7 If it doesn't arrive today, we'll have to complain. 144B 8 I wish someone would turn it down. 149B 9 Unless we act quickly, it'll be too late. 148C 10 But he wouldn't have been angry if you hadn't damaged his stereo. 146B 17 Our friends ............. meet us at the airport tonight. a) are b) are going to c) go to d) will be to 18 a party next Saturday. We've sent out the invitations. a) We had b) We have c) We'll have d) We're having 19 I'll tell Anna all the news when ............................................her. a) I'll see b) I'm going to see c) I see d) I shall see 20 At this time tomorrow .......................................... over the Atlantic. a) we flying b) we'll be flying c) we'll fly d) we to fly 21 Where's Robert? .............. .......... a shower? a) Does he have b) Has he c) Has he got d) Is he having 22 I ....................... like that coat. It's really nice. a) am b) do c) very d) yes Questions, negatives and answers 23 What's the weather like in Canada? How often ........................................... there? a) does it snow b) does it snows c) snow it d) snows it 24 Which team ......................................... the game? a) did it win b) did they win c) won d) won it 25 What did you leave the meeting early ....................................... ? ~ I didn't feel very well. a) away b) because c) for d) like 26 Unfortunately the driver........................................... the red light. a) didn't saw b) didn't see c) no saw d) saw not 27 You haven't eaten your pudding. .......................................... it? a) Are you no want b) Do you no want c) Don't want you d) Don't you want 28 I really enjoyed the disco. It was great,........................................ ? a) is it b) isn't it c) was it d) wasn't it 29 Are we going the right way? ~ I think a) indeed b) it c) so d) yes ......................................... Modal verbs 30 The chemist's was open, so luckily I ................................................ buy some aspirin. a) can b) can't c) did can d) was able to 31 Susan has to work very hard. I ............................................... do her job, I'm sure. a) can't b) couldn't c) don't d) shouldn't 32 We had a party last night ...............................................spend all morning clearing up the mess. a) I must have b) I've been to c) I've had to d) I've must 33 There was no one else at the box office. I..................................................in a queue. a) didn't need to wait b) mustn't wait c) needn't have waited d) needn't wait 34 ....................I carry that bag for you? ~ Oh, thank you. a) Do b) Shall c) Will d) Would Adjectives and adverbs 68 The house was ......................................building. a) a nice old stone b) a nice stone old c) a stone old nice d) an old nice stone 69 The government is doing nothing to help.......................................... a) poor b) the poor c) the poors d) the poor ones 70 The young man seems very......................................... a) sensible b) sensiblely c) sensibley d) sensibly 71 I.......................................missed the bus. I was only just in time to catch it. a) mostly b) near c) nearest d) nearly 72 This detailed map is ...................................... the atlas. a) more useful as b) more useful than c) usefuller as d) usefuller than 73 This place gets....................................... crowded with tourists every summer. a) always more b) crowded and more c) from more to more d) more and more 74 Yes, I have got the report ....................................... it. a) I just am reading b) I'm just reading c) I'm reading just d) Just I'm reading 75 I've read this paragraph three times, and I ..................................... understand it. a) can't still b) can't yet c) still can't d) yet can't 76 We're really sorry. We regret what happened......................................... a) a bit b) much c) very d) very much Prepositions 77 The village is.......................................Sheffield. It's only six miles away. a) along b) by c) near d) next 78 You can see the details ..................................... the computer screen. a) at b) by c) in d) on 79 I've got a meeting ..................................... Thursday afternoon. a) at b) in c) on d) to 80 We've lived in this flat ...................................... five years. a) ago b) already c) for d) since 81 This car is ......................................, if you're interested in buying it. a) for sale b) in sale c) at sale d) to sell 82 Polly wants to cycle round the world. She's really keen ....................................... the idea. a) about b) for c) on d) with Verbs with prepositions and adverbs 83 I prefer dogs .................................... cats. I hate cats. a) from b) over c) than d) to 84 My father used the money he won to set ...................................... his own company. a) forward b) on c) out d) up 85 Don't go too fast. I can't keep ......................................you. a) on to b) on with c) up to d) up with Reported speech 86 Someone ........................... the tickets are free. a) said me b) said me that c) told me d) told to me 87 Last week Justin said 'I'll do it tomorrow.' He said he would do it ................................................ a) the following day b) the previous day c) tomorrow d) yesterday 88 I don't know why Nancy didn't go to the meeting. She said she ......................................... a) be b) is c) was d) would definitely going. 89 The librarian asked us ......................................... so much noise. a) don't make b) not make c) not making d) not to make Relative clauses 90 What's the name of the man............................................ gave us a lift? a) he b) what c) which d) who 91 What was that notice............................................? a) at that you were looking b) you were looking at c) you were looking at it d) which you were looking 92 Susan is the woman ........................................... husband is in hospital. a) her b) hers the c) whose d) whose the 93 York, ........................................last year, is a nice old city. a) I visited b) that I visited c) which I visited d) whom I visited 94 The accident was seen by some people ........................................... at a bus stop a) waited b) waiting c) were waiting d) who waiting Conditionals and wish 95 If ................................ my passport, I'll be in trouble. a) I lose b) I'll lose c) I lost d) I would lose 96 I haven't got a ticket. If .........................................one, I could get in. a) I'd have b) I had c) I have d) I've got 97 If the bus to the airport hadn't been so late, we ....................................... a) caught b) had caught c) would catch d) would have caught the plane. 98 If only people ...................................... keep sending me bills! a) don't b) shouldn't c) weren't d) wouldn't Linking words 99 I just had to take the dog out ..................................... a) although b) despite c) even though d) in spite of the awful weather. 100 Anna put the electric fire on ......................................... warm. a) for getting b) in order get c) so she gets d) to get 

Peterson’s MASTER TOEFL READING SKILLS About Peterson’s Peterson’s (www.petersons.com) is a leading provider of education information and advice, with books and online resources focusing on education search, test preparation, and financial aid. Its Web site offers searchable databases and interactive tools for contacting educational institutions, online practice tests and instruction, and planning tools for securing financial aid. Peterson’s serves 110 million education consumers annually. For more information, contact Peterson’s, 2000 Lenox Drive, Lawrenceville, NJ 08648; 800-338-3282; or find us on the World Wide Web at www.petersons.com/about. © 2007 Peterson’s, a Nelnet company Portions of this book were previously published as Reading and Vocabulary Workbook for the TOEFL® Exam Editor: Wallie Hammond; Production Editor: Bernadette Webster; Manufacturing Manager: Ivona Skibicki ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by the copyright herein may be reproduced or used in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, Web distribution, or information storage and retrieval systems—without the prior written permission of the publisher. For permission to use material from this text or product, submit a request online at www.petersons.com/permissions. ISBN-13: 978-0-7689-2327-8 ISBN-10: 0-7689-2327-1 Printed in the United States of America 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 06 05 04 Petersons.com/publishing Check out our Web site at www.petersons.com/publishing to see if there is any new information regarding the test and any revisions or corrections to the content of this book. We’ve made sure the information in this book is accurate and up-to-date; however, the test format or content may have changed since the time of publication. OTHER TITLES IN SERIES: Peterson’s Master TOEFL Vocabulary Peterson’s Master TOEFL Writing Skills Contents ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Before You Begin .................................................................................. vii How This Book Is Organized ................................................................... vii Special Study Features ............................................................................ vii You’re Well on Your Way to Success ....................................................... viii Give Us Your Feedback ........................................................................... viii Top 10 Strategies to Raise Your Score ....................................................... ix PART I TOEFL READING BASICS Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Reading .................................................... 3 What Does the Reading Section Contain and How Long Does It Last? ..... 3 To Read or Not To Read .............................................................................. 4 Summing It Up .......................................................................................... 14 PART II DIAGNOSING STRENGTHS AND WEAKNESSES Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ............................................... 19 PART III TOEFL READING REVIEW Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ................... 33 Finding Main Ideas and Supporting Details ........................................... 33 Skimming for Specific Information .......................................................... 37 Making Inferences .................................................................................... 39 Understanding Advertisements ............................................................... 45 How Thoughts Are Related ....................................................................... 54 Understanding Contemporary Reading Passages ................................... 67 Reading History Textbooks ....................................................................... 79 Summing It Up ........................................................................................ 103 v ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ vi Contents ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ PART IV TWO PRACTICE TESTS Practice Test 2 ..................................................................................... 109 Practice Test 3 ..................................................................................... 123 PART V APPENDIXES APPENDIX A: A Helpful Word List ....................................................... 137 APPENDIX B: Applying to Colleges and Universities in the U.S. ..... 177 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ Before You Begin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ HOW THIS BOOK IS ORGANIZED If you are preparing for any version of the TOEFL, you are not alone. Almost a million people all over the world took the TOEFL last year. A high score on this test is an essential step in being admitted to graduate or undergraduate programs at almost all colleges and universities in North America. But preparing for this test can be a difficult, often frustrating experience. Peterson's Master TOEFL Reading Skills, used as a self-tutor, will help you improve your reading skills. You’ll find: • • Top 10 Strategies to Raise Your Score gives you test-taking strategies. • Part II provides the basic reading comprehension review. The reading passages progress from relatively simple to relatively difficult as you continue through the book. Various skills, such as finding the main idea and supporting details, are reviewed. • Part III includes three additional practice reading tests. They will show you how well you have mastered the reading skills presented in this book. Part I provides a “mini” diagnostic test to determine your strengths and weaknesses. SPECIAL STUDY FEATURES Peterson's Master TOEFL Reading Skills is designed to be user-friendly. To this end, it includes features to make your preparation much more efficient. Overview The reading review chapter begins with a bulleted overview, listing the topics to be covered in the chapter. This will allow you to quickly target the areas in which you are most interested. Note Notes highlight critical information about improving your reading skills. vii ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ viii Before You Begin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Tip Tips draw your attention to valuable concepts, advice, and shortcuts for tackling the reading passages. Summing it up The review chapter ends with a point-by-point summary that captures the most important concepts. They are a convenient way to review the chapter's key points. Practice tests The three practice tests, including the diagnostic test, are designed to help you prepare with little anxiety. YOU’RE WELL ON YOUR WAY TO SUCCESS Remember that knowledge is power. By using Peterson's Master TOEFL Reading Skills as a supplement to your other TOEFL test preparation, you will fine tune your reading comprehension skills. GIVE US YOUR FEEDBACK Peterson's publishes a full line of resources to help guide you and your family through the college admission process. We welcome any comments or suggestions you may have about this publication and invite you to complete our online survey at http://www.petersons.com/booksurvey. Or you can fill out the survey at the back of this book, tear it out, and mail it to us at: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Your feedback will help us to provide personalized solutions for your educational advancement. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Publishing Department Peterson's 2000 Lenox Drive Lawrenceville, NJ 08648 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Before You Begin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ix ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Top 10 Strategies to Raise Your Score 1. As with other sections of the TOEFL, be familiar with the directions and examples so you can begin work immediately. 2. For each passage, begin by briefly looking over the questions (but not the answer choices). Try to keep these questions in mind during your reading. 3. Scan passages to find and highlight the important facts and information. 4. Read each passage at a comfortable speed. 5. Answer the questions, referring to the passage when necessary. 6. Eliminate answers that are clearly wrong or do not answer the question. If more than one option remains, guess. 7. Mark difficult or time-consuming answers so that you can come back to them later if you have time. 8. Timing is an important factor. Don’t spend more than 10 minutes on any one passage and the questions about it. 9. Concentration is another important factor. The reading section is one of the longer sections of the test. Your practice and hard work will help you. 10. Relax the night before the exam. www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ PART I ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ TOEFL READING BASICS ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ CHAPTER 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ All About TOEFL Reading ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ All About TOEFL Reading ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ • What does the reading section contain and how long does it last? • To read or not to read • Summing it up WHAT DOES THE READING SECTION CONTAIN AND HOW LONG DOES IT LAST? The Reading section contains passages on a variety of subjects. Following each passage are several questions about the passage. You will answer from 36 to 70 questions in this section, and you will have 60 to 100 minutes to read the passages and answer the questions. Before you begin this section, you will be shown how to answer the questions with the computer screen and mouse. The reading passages are similar to the ones you will probably read and study in North American universities and colleges. There are three important differences between the Reading section and the other sections of the exam: • The Reading section is not computer adaptive. When you answer question number 1, the computer does not select a more difficult (or less difficult) question for number 2. • In the Reading section, you are allowed to return to questions you have already answered and can change your answers. You are also permitted to skip a question and return to it later, which you can’t do in the other sections of the exam. • You will see the Reading passage and the question on the monitor screen at the same time. The Reading passage will appear on the left side of your screen, and the questions will appear on the right side of the screen. 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ chapter 1 OVERVIEW ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4 PART I: TOEFL Reading Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ TO READ OR NOT TO READ You will not be scored on whether you read the entire passage. You will be scored on whether you answer the question correctly. It is not only probable that you can answer all questions correctly without reading the entire passage; it is imperative that you read only what is necessary to answer the questions. So that you do not underestimate the importance of this advice, it will be repeated: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Most questions will indicate which part of the reading passage is being asked about. Work through each passage answering the questions, using the process we describe in the following pages. Read the First Sentence of Each Paragraph and the Last Sentence in the Passage In the following passage, read only the sentences in boldface. (5) The American composer, George Gershwin, was born in 1898 in Brooklyn, New York, the son of Russian-Jewish immigrants. He began his musical education at age 11, when his family bought a second-hand piano. The piano was not bought for him, but for his older brother, Ira. However, George surprised everyone when he played a popular song, which he had taught himself by following the keys on a neighbor’s player piano, and his parents decided that George should receive lessons. He studied piano with a famous music teacher at the time, Charles Hambitzer. He was so impressed with Gershwin’s talent that he gave him lessons for free. Gershwin dropped out of school at age 15 and earned a living by making (10) piano rolls for player pianos and by playing in New York nightclubs. His most important job in this period was his work as a song plugger, who promoted interest in the sheet music of popular songs by playing and singing those songs in stores. At that time, sheet-music sales were the measure of a song’s popularity, and song pluggers had to work long hours for the music publishers who employed them. (15) As a result of his hard work, Gershwin’s piano technique improved greatly, so much so that, while still in his teens, Gershwin became known as one of the most talented pianists in New York City. As a result, he worked as an accompanist for popular singers and as a rehearsal pianist for Broadway musicals. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ DO NOT READ THE ENTIRE PASSAGE BEFORE YOU START ANSWERING THE QUESTIONS! ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ His knowledge of jazz and popular music grew quickly, and one of his (20) songs was included in the Broadway musical The Passing Show of 1916. George became friends to many prominent Broadway composers. He particularly admired the music of Irving Berlin whom Gershwin called “America’s Franz Schubert.” Jerome Kern, another Broadway composer, demonstrated to George how popular music was inferior to material in Broadway shows. In 1919, enter(25) tainer Al Jolson performed Gershwin’s song Swanee in the musical Sinbad. The song became a hit, and Gershwin became an overnight celebrity when his song sold more than 2 million recordings and a million copies of sheet music. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Reading ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ TIP Main idea questions ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The correct answer is (C). By reading those four sentences in bold type, you have not only saved yourself time, you have also learned what the passage is about. In addition, you have gotten the information necessary to answer the question. ○ ○ ○ (D) Musical training on Broadway did not prepare the Gershwins for success. ○ ○ (C) George Gershwin became a famous composer before he was 30. ○ ○ (B) The Gershwins were school dropouts who became successes in show business. ○ ○ Which of the following statements best expresses the main idea of the passage? (A) Russian immigrants in America were all musical and creative. ○ ○ ○ After you have read the sentences in boldface type, answer the following question: ○ ○ ○ ○ Questions About the Main Idea of the Passage ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary questions are found in the parts of the reading passage that will be highlighted to correspond with a question. This is another reason why it is unnecessary for you to read the entire passage. See the following examples: ○ ○ ○ ○ Vocabulary Questions ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Look at the word highlighted in the text. Click on the answer choice that is closest in meaning to the words dropped out of . ○ ○ Gershwin dropped out of school at age 15 and earned a living by making piano rolls for player pianos and by playing in New York nightclubs. His most important job in this period was his work as a song plugger, who promoted interest in the sheet music of popular songs by playing and singing those songs in stores. At that time, sheet-music . . . ○ ○ You will answer three kinds of vocabulary questions. In the first kind, you will see a word or phrase highlighted in the text on the screen. This highlights the word or phrase that is the subject of the question. Look at the example. You will see the passage and the question on the monitor screen arranged this way: ○ ○ ○ ○ Highlighted Words ○ ○ (A) Graduated from college ○ ○ (B) Stopped attending secondary school ○ ○ ○ (C) Scattered sheet music on the street ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) Dropped by his school frequently are usually asked first. ○ 6 PART I: TOEFL Reading Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ “Dropped out of” is an idiomatic expression, and if you are not acquainted with it, you can still figure out the correct answer by looking at the other words in the sentence. You can do this by mentally removing the words “dropped out of” from the sentence and reading the sentence this way: Gershwin __________ school at age 15 and earned a living by making piano rolls for player pianos and by playing in New York nightclubs. Then, you fill in the blank with a verb that completes the sentence so that it is logical and grammatically correct. The other words in the sentences contain clues. Look at the words: school at age 15 and earned a living by making piano rolls for player pianos and by playing in New York nightclubs. A 15-year-old person who earns a living by playing in New York nightclubs is not likely to stay in high school at the same time. So, you choose a word or words that will finish the sentence correctly. It’s not important what the words are; they can even be words in your native language. The word or phrase you came up with is probably “quit” or “withdrew from.” Then, you compare your word to the answer choices: (A) Graduated from college (B) Stopped attending secondary school (C) Scattered sheet music on the street (D) Dropped by his school frequently The correct answer is (B). The answer closest in meaning to “quit” or “withdrew from.” Choice (A) is incorrect, because college is not mentioned in the sentence. Choice (C) is incorrect, because the sentence is not about sheet music. Choice (D) is incorrect and a tricky one, because “dropped out” is close in sound to “dropped by,” which means visited. Highlighted Sentences Another type of vocabulary question asks you to read a boldface sentence, and choose the correct definition of the highlighted word or phrase in that sentence. Gershwin dropped out of school at age 15 and earned a living by making piano rolls for player pianos and by playing in New York nightclubs. His most important job in this period was his work as a song plugger, who promoted interest in the sheet music of popular songs by playing and singing those songs in stores. At that time, sheet-music sales were the measure of a song’s popularity, and song pluggers had to work long hours for the music publishers who employed them. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Reading ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Look at the words “promoted interest in the sheet music” in the passage. Click on the word or phrase in the bold text that the words refer to. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) Sheet music sales ○ ○ (B) A song’s popularity ○ ○ (C) Song plugger ○ ○ ○ ○ On the computer screen, you will highlight those words and click them as your choice. Which words would you choose? ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) Music publishers ○ ○ (A) Sheet music sales ○ ○ (B) A song’s popularity ○ ○ (C) Song plugger ○ ○ ○ ○ The correct answer is (C). The highlighted words “who promoted interest in sheet music” identify what song pluggers do. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) Music publishers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Look at the highlighted word. Click on the word or phrase in the bold text that the word refers to. ○ ○ However, George surprised everyone when he played a popular song, which he had taught himself by following the keys on a neighbor’s player piano, and his parents decided that George should receive lessons. He studied piano with a famous music teacher at the time, Charles Hambitzer. He was so impressed with Gershwin’s talent that he gave him lessons for free. ○ ○ Another kind of Reading question deals with pronouns. You will see a sentence in boldface with a highlighted pronoun, and you will be asked to identify the noun that the highlighted pronoun refers to. Look at the example: ○ ○ ○ ○ Pronouns ○ ○ (A) Piano ○ ○ (B) Charles Hambitzer ○ ○ (C) The Time ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The correct answer is (B). The pronoun “he” refers to a person, not to a thing (“piano” and “time” are things). “He” also does not refer to Gershwin, because Gershwin did not give lessons to himself, so “he” must refer to Charles Hambitzer. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) Gershwin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8 PART I: TOEFL Reading Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Detail Questions You will have to answer detail questions at least twice per reading passage. In these types of questions, you are asked about specific information in the text. First, read the question to find out what information you have to find. Then, search for it in the text. (5) The American composer, George Gershwin, was born in 1898 in Brooklyn, New York, the son of Russian-Jewish immigrants. He began his musical education at age 11, when his family bought a second-hand piano. The piano was not bought for him, but for his older brother, Ira. However, George surprised everyone when he played a popular song, which he had taught himself by following the keys on a neighbor’s player piano, and his parents decided that George should receive lessons. He studied piano with a famous music teacher at the time, Charles Hambitzer. He was so impressed with Gershwin’s talent that he gave him lessons for free. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ According to the passage, who did the Gershwin parents buy the piano for? (A) George Gershwin ○ ○ (B) Charles Hambitzer ○ ○ (C) Other Russian immigrants ○ ○ ○ (D) Ira Gershwin Look for the Important Words Detail questions contain important words that will lead you to the answer. They are not words such as “George Gershwin” or “composer.” They are words that specify the information that will answer the question for you. In the question, the words “buy the piano” are the most important words to help you find the answer. Instead of reading the entire passage, scan the passage for those words. You find it at the end of the second sentence and see that the correct answer is (D). Look at the next example: (5) The American composer, George Gershwin, was born in 1898 in Brooklyn, New York, the son of Russian-Jewish immigrants. He began his musical education at age 11, when his family bought a second-hand piano. The piano was not bought for him, but for his older brother, Ira. However, George surprised everyone when he played a popular song, which he had taught himself by following the keys on a neighbor’s player piano, and his parents decided that George should receive lessons. He studied piano with a famous music teacher at the time, Charles Hambitzer. He was so impressed with Gershwin’s talent that he gave him lessons for free. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The correct answer is (D). In lines 3–4 above, the passage states that Gershwin’s parents bought the piano for George’s brother Ira. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Reading ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 9 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ DO NOT READ THE ENTIRE PASSAGE BEFORE YOU START ANSWERING THE QUESTIONS! ○ ○ Once again, repeat to yourself the most important strategy of answering questions in the reading section: ○ ○ ○ The correct answer is (B). The most important words in the question are “lessons for free.” When you scan for those words, you will find them in the last sentence of the paragraph. ○ ○ ○ (D) Popular music was more important than classical music. ○ ○ (C) Famous piano teachers never received money from their students. ○ (B) The teacher was impressed with George’s talent. ○ ○ According to the passage, why did George’s piano teacher give him lessons for free? (A) His parents were too poor to pay for the lessons. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Questions with Except and Not ○ ○ ○ ○ All of the following are mentioned as members of the French Impressionist group EXCEPT (A) Edgar Dégas. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The following is an example of “Except/Not” questions: ○ ○ ○ (B) Camille Pissaro. ○ ○ (C) Rembrandt van Rijn. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ (5) The American composer, George Gershwin, was born in 1898 in Brooklyn, New York, the son of Russian-Jewish immigrants. He began his musical education at age 11, when his family bought a second-hand piano. The piano was not bought for him, but for his older brother, Ira. However, George surprised everyone when he played a popular song, which he had taught himself by following the keys on a neighbor’s player piano, and his parents decided that George should receive ○ ○ These kinds of questions will be asked at least four times per passage. Look at the following example: ○ ○ ○ Whenever you see this kind of question, remember that the answer is the one that is different from the others. Sometimes an answer has nothing to do with the main topic. In the above example, choice (C) might have been “Honore de Balzac,” who was French but not a painter. ○ ○ ○ In this question, you look for the answer that names a painter who is NOT a French Impressionist. In this case, it is choice (C), Rembrandt van Rijn. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) Mary Cassat. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10 PART I: TOEFL Reading Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (10) (15) (20) (25) lessons. He studied piano with a famous music teacher at the time, Charles Hambitzer. He was so impressed with Gershwin’s talent that he gave him lessons for free. Gershwin dropped out of school at age 15 and earned a living by making piano rolls for player pianos and by playing in New York nightclubs. His most important job in this period was his work as a song plugger, who promoted interest in the sheet music of popular songs by playing and singing those songs in stores. At that time, sheet-music sales were the measure of a song’s popularity, and song pluggers had to work long hours for the music publishers who employed them. As a result of his hard work, Gershwin’s piano technique improved greatly, so much so that, while still in his teens, Gershwin became known as one of the most talented pianists in New York City. As a result, he worked as an accompanist for popular singers and as a rehearsal pianist for Broadway musicals. His knowledge of jazz and popular music grew quickly, and one of his songs was included in the Broadway musical The Passing Show of 1916. George became friends to many prominent Broadway composers. He particularly admired the music of Irving Berlin whom Gershwin called “America’s Franz Schubert.” Jerome Kern, another Broadway composer, demonstrated to George how popular music was inferior to material in Broadway shows. In 1919, entertainer Al Jolson performed Gershwin’s song Swanee in the musical Sinbad. The song became a hit, and Gershwin became an overnight celebrity when his song sold more than 2 million recordings and a million copies of sheet music. All of the following are reasons that George Gershwin became a success while he was young EXCEPT (A) He studied piano with a famous teacher. (B) He learned about jazz and popular music while he worked as a song plugger. (C) He graduated from high school when he was only 15. (D) He worked as an accompanist for popular singers in New York. The correct answer is (C). To answer this question correctly, you have to determine the time period of each answer. In the text, in what order were the answers stated? If you scan the passage you will see that the order is (A), (C), (B), and (D). Choices (A) and (C) appear in the first paragraph, where you read that Gershwin studied with a famous teacher, which is the statement in choice (A). You also read that Gershwin’s parents bought a piano for his brother, which means that Gershwin’s parents did NOT give him a piano. Choices (B) and (D) give reasons why Gershwin became a success while he was young. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Reading ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 11 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ To imply something is to “communicate an idea without stating it directly.” To infer something is to “understand the idea that is being communicated by another person, even though the other person does not say it directly.” ○ ○ ○ ○ Questions with “Imply” and “Infer” ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ During the Reading section, you will be asked questions that begin in the following way: ○ ○ ○ ○ Mildred implied that Harry would have to learn Japanese. Mark inferred that Harry would have to learn Japanese. ○ ○ Mildred said to Mark, “Harry is moving to Japan permanently, but he doesn’t know how to speak Japanese.” ○ ○ ○ For example: ○ ○ ○ It can be inferred from the passage that . . . ○ ○ ○ The author implies that . . . ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ To answer these questions, first eliminate as a possible correct answer anything that is ridiculous and illogical. Also, eliminate any answer choice that introduces material not discussed in the passage. Answer choices that contain words such as “always,” “never,” and “completely” are usually incorrect, so you can eliminate them. If an answer choice simply repeats word-for-word a lot of material from the passage, you can eliminate that answer as well. Answer choices that are longer than the other answer choices are often a trap. ○ ○ ○ The answer to these questions is always in the form of a paraphrase. It repeats an idea found in the passage but expresses it in a different way. ○ ○ Based on the information in the passage, what can be inferred about . . . ○ ○ ○ ○ The passage suggests that . . . ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ (10) ○ (5) His knowledge of jazz and popular music grew quickly, and one of his songs was included in the Broadway musical The Passing Show of 1916. George became friends to many prominent Broadway composers. He particularly admired the music of Irving Berlin whom Gershwin called “America’s Franz Schubert.” Jerome Kern, another Broadway composer, demonstrated to George how popular music was inferior to material in Broadway shows. In 1919, entertainer Al Jolson performed Gershwin’s song Swanee in the musical Sinbad. The song became a hit, and Gershwin became an overnight celebrity when his song sold more than 2 million recordings and a million copies of sheet music. ○ ○ ○ Answer the following question: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 12 PART I: TOEFL Reading Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ It can be inferred from the passage that (A) Gershwin became a famous jazz pianist in Russia. (B) Gershwin admired the music of Franz Shubert. (C) Gershwin disliked music by Kern and Berlin. (D) Gershwin never became a well-known musician. The correct answer is (B). Choices (A), (C), and (D) are not true. Gershwin compared the music of Jerome Kern, who was his friend, to that of Franz Shubert’s. Questions with Black Squares During the reading section of the computer-based test, you will have to answer questions with black squares. On the left side of the screen, you will see the reading passage with the following black-square mark located throughout the text: ■ On the right side of the screen, you will read a sentence followed by the question: Where in the passage would the sentence best fit in the passage? Click on the square ■ to add the sentence in the passage. When you point to the square and click the mouse, the sentence in the question will appear in the passage. This is a very difficult kind of question to answer, and you should not answer it until you have answered all other kinds of questions! To answer this kind of question, carefully read the sentence and determine the most important words, usually found at the end of the sentence. Then, scan the passage for the squares. Look at the sentences before the square and particularly after the square. You will find that in the sentence to be inserted, the words at the end contain information that introduces ideas in the beginning of the next sentence that is in the passage. The American composer, George Gershwin, was born in 1898 in Brooklyn, New York, the son of Russian-Jewish immigrants. He began his musical education at age 11, when his family bought a second-hand piano. The piano was not bought for him, but for his older brother, Ira. However, George surprised everyone when he (5) played a popular song, which he had taught himself by following the keys on a neighbor’s player piano, and his parents decided that George should receive lessons. ■ He studied piano with a famous music teacher at the time, Charles Hambitzer. He was so impressed with Gershwin’s talent that he gave him lessons for free. Gershwin dropped out of school at age 15 and earned a living by making piano (10) rolls for player pianos and by playing in New York nightclubs. His most important job in this period was his work as a song plugger, who promoted interest in the sheet music of popular songs by playing and singing those songs in stores. At that ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 1: All About TOEFL Reading ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ of his hard work, Gershwin’s piano technique improved greatly, so much so that, while still in his teens, Gershwin became known as one of the most talented pianists in New York City. As a result, he worked as an accompanist for popular singers and as a rehearsal pianist for Broadway musicals. His knowledge of jazz and popular music grew quickly, and one of his songs was (20) included in the Broadway musical The Passing Show of 1916. George became friends to many prominent Broadway composers. He particularly admired the music of Irving Berlin whom Gershwin called “America’s Franz Schubert.” Jerome Kern, another Broadway composer, demonstrated to George how popular music (25) was inferior to material in Broadway shows. In 1919, entertainer Al Jolson performed Gershwin’s song Swanee in the musical Sinbad. ■ The song became a hit, and Gershwin became an overnight celebrity when his song sold more than 2 million recordings and a million copies of sheet music. ○ time, sheet-music sales were the measure of a song’s popularity, and song pluggers (15) had to work long hours for the music publishers who employed them. ■ As a result ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Where would it best fit in the passage? Click on the square ■ to add the sentence to the passage. ○ ○ However, Gershwin’s income rose, and he worked harder and harder. ○ ○ ○ ○ The following sentence can be added to the passage: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ At that time, sheet-music sales were the measure of a song’s popularity, and song pluggers had to work long hours for the music publishers who employed them. However, Gershwin’s income rose, and he worked harder and harder. As a result of his hard work, Gershwin’s piano technique improved greatly, so much so that, while still in his teens, Gershwin became known as one of the most talented pianists in New York City. ○ ○ This sentence best fits at the place marked by the second square. With the new sentence inserted, the passage would read as follows: ○ ○ However, Gershwin’s income rose, and he worked harder and harder. ○ ○ ○ Look at the ideas at the end of the sentence: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14 PART I: TOEFL Reading Basics ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Do not read the entire passage. Begin each passage by reading the first sentence in each paragraph and the last sentence of the last paragraph. You should answer the questions not in numerical order but in the following order (as they were presented in this chapter) according to kind of question: • All vocabulary questions • All questions that ask you to identify a noun or a pronoun • All questions that ask for detailed information in the passage • All questions that ask about the main idea of the passage • All questions with EXCEPT and NOT • All questions with IMPLY and INFER • All questions with black squares ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ SUMMING IT UP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com PART II ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ DIAGNOSING STRENGTHS AND WEAKNESSES ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ CHAPTER 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 17 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com answer sheet ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ✁ ANSWER SHEET PRACTICE TEST 1: DIAGNOSTIC Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 19 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ PRACTICE TEST 1: DIAGNOSTIC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) He was the richest man in the town. ○ ○ (C) He was chosen by the town’s wealthy citizens. ○ (B) He was appointed by the king. ○ (A) He was elected by the council. ○ 4. According to the passage, how was a local judge in Hispanic America selected? ○ ○ ○ (D) Suggesting an odor ○ ○ (C) Suggesting a small village ○ ○ (B) Suggesting a schedule or agenda ○ ○ (A) Suggesting something in the past ○ ○ 3. Which of the following answer choices is closest in meaning to the word “reminiscent” as used in lines 11–12? ○ ○ ○ (D) In Spanish provinces ○ ○ (C) In Roman provinces ○ ○ (B) In Spanish colonies ○ ○ (A) In Roman colonies ○ ○ 2. Where was the cabildo used as a form of government? ○ ○ (D) Surrounding ○ ○ (C) Tradition ○ ○ (B) Government ○ ○ (A) Fundamental ○ ○ 1. Which choice does the word “paramount” as used in line 6 refer to? ○ ○ ○ became very important to the movement for the independence of Hispanic America in the early nineteenth century. ○ (40) important matters. Such open meetings ○ QUESTIONS 1–10 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE. The cabildo, which is Spanish for “municipal council,” was the fundamental unit of local government in colonial Spanish America. Following a tradition going (5) back to the Romans, the Spanish considered the city to be of paramount importance, with the surrounding countryside directly subordinate to it. In local affairs, each municipality in (10) Hispanic America was governed by its cabildo, or council, in a manner reminiscent of Castilian towns in the late Middle Ages. A council’s members and magistrates, together with the local judge ap(15) pointed by the king, enjoyed considerable prestige and power. The size of a council varied but was always small. The cabildos of important cities, such as Lima and Mexico, had about 12 members. The cabildo was in charge of all ordi(20) nary aspects of municipal government— e.g., policing, sanitation, taxation, the supervision of building, price and wage regulation, and the administration of (25) justice. To assist them in these responsibilities, the city councilors appointed various officials, such as tax collectors, inspectors of weights and measures and the markets, and peace officers. In spite (30) of royal decrees to promote honest and efficient city government, the cabildos were often corrupt and rapacious. By the mid-sixteenth century, appointments to cabildos were ordinarily made (35) by the Spanish crown and sometimes became hereditary. Occasionally, the propertied class in a city elected some of the councilors. Sometimes citizens were asked to attend a open town meeting on ○ ○ ○ Directions: Each passage is followed by a series of questions. Answer the questions based on the information you gathered from the passage. Choose the best answer to each question and answer each question based on what is stated or implied in the passage. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 50 Questions • Time: 25 Minutes diagnostic test ○ ○ ○ ○ 20 PART II: Diagnosing Strengths and Weaknesses ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5. According to the passage, how many councilors did Lima have? 10. Where can the following sentence best be added to the passage? (A) Ten (B) Eleven (C) Twelve (D) Thirteen Debates were sometimes heated, and the wealthy landowners had to defend their positions by arresting their opponents. 6. From the passage it can be inferred that some cabildos were (A) poorly educated (B) important (C) corrupt (A) At the end of paragraph 1 (B) At the end of paragraph 2 (C) After the words “peace officers” in paragraph 3 (D) After the words “important matters” in paragraph 4 (D) independent 7. What word does the phrase “peace officers” as used in line 29 refer to? (A) Sanitation (B) Policing (C) Assist (D) Tax collectors 8. Which is closest in meaning to the word in the passage “responsibilities” as used in lines 25–26? (A) Duties (B) Wages (C) Sanitation (D) Inspections 9. From the passage it can be inferred that by the mid-sixteenth century, the cabildo was all of the following EXCEPT: (A) Elected by all registered voters (B) Appointed by the king (C) Came from the propertied class (D) Was an inherited office ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com QUESTIONS 11–20 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE. Annie Oakley, an intriguing figure in American entertainment, was a markswoman who starred in Buffalo Bill’s Wild West Show, where she was (5) often called “Little Sure Shot.” She was born in 1860 in Darke County, Ohio, and her original name was Phoebe Ann Moses. As a child, she hunted game with such success that, according to legend, (10) by selling it in Cincinnati, Ohio, she was able to pay off the mortgage on the family farm. When she was 15 she won a shooting match in Cincinnati with Frank E. Butler, a vaudeville marks(15) man, and they were married a year later. For the next ten years they toured the country and performed in theaters and circuses as “Butler and Oakley.” In April 1885, Annie Oakley, now under her (20) husband’s management, joined “Buffalo Bill” Cody’s Wild West Show. Billed as “Miss Annie Oakley, the Peerless Lady Wing-Shot,” she was one of the show’s star attractions for sixteen years. (25) Oakley never failed to delight her audiences, and her feats of marksmanship were truly incredible. At 30 paces she could split a playing card held edge-on, and she hit dimes tossed into the air. (30) She shot cigarettes from her husband’s lips, and, when he threw a playing card into the air, she would shoot it full of holes before it touched the ground. She was a great success on the Wild West (35) Show’s European trips. Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 21 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) Fascinating (C) Displays (C) Fabulous (D) Mistakes ○ ○ (B) Accomplishments ○ ○ (A) Frightening ○ ○ ○ (A) Jokes ○ 17. Which of the following is closest in meaning to the word “feats” as used in line 26? ○ ○ ○ (D) Annie Oakley’s manager ○ ○ (C) Annie Oakley’s teacher ○ ○ (B) Annie Oakley’s husband ○ ○ (A) Annie Oakley’s assistant in her act ○ 11. Which of the following is closest in meaning to the word “intriguing” as used in line 1? 16. According to the passage, Frank E. Butler was all of the following EXCEPT: (C) Little Sure Shot ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) After the phrase “Little Sure Shot” in paragraph 1 (D) A piece of furniture loaned to a neighbor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) Buffalo Bill Cody ○ (D) Princess Anne ○ ○ ○ (A) Annie Oakley was a talented and popular entertainer. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ (D) 1876 (D) Buffalo Bill Cody was not as good a marksman as Annie Oakley. ○ (C) 1875 (C) Queen Victoria was brave when she held a cigarette for Annie Oakley. ○ (B) 1874 ○ (A) 1873 (B) Frank E. Butler was jealous of his wife’s talent and popularity. ○ 15. The passage implies that Oakley and Butler were married in ○ ○ (D) Mortgage ○ (C) Legend 20. Which of the following can be inferred from the passage? ○ (B) Game ○ ○ (A) Child ○ (B) Crown Prince Wilhelm 14. What does the word “it” as used in the phrase “by selling it” in line 10 refer to? ○ ○ (A) Queen Victoria ○ ○ 19. According to the passage, who performed the cigarette trick with her in Europe? ○ (C) A measurement of debts owed (D) At the beginning of paragraph 4 ○ (B) A bank-loan contract using property as security (C) At the end of paragraph 3 ○ (A) A debt left by a deceased property owner (B) After the phrase “Butler and Oakley” in paragraph 2 ○ 13. Which of the following is the closest in meaning to the word “mortgage” as used in line 11? ○ ○ (D) Little Phoebe Butler ○ (B) Little Phoebe Ann Her story was made into a Broadway musical called Annie Get Your Gun, but the real life of Annie Oakley is just as interesting. ○ (A) Little Orphan Annie ○ 12. What was Oakley often called while performing in Buffalo Bill’s Wild West Show? 18. Where can the following sentence best be added to the passage? ○ (D) Funny ○ ○ ○ In 1887, she was presented to Queen Victoria, and later in Berlin she performed her cigarette trick with, at his insistence, Crown Prince Wilhelm (later (40) Kaiser Wilhelm II) holding the cigarette. A train wreck in 1901 left her partially paralyzed for a time, but she recovered and returned to the stage to amaze audiences for many more years. diagnostic test ○ ○ ○ ○ 22 PART II: Diagnosing Strengths and Weaknesses ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ QUESTIONS 21–30 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE. Edward Patrick Eagan was born April 26, 1897, in Denver, Colorado, and his father died in a railroad accident when Eagan was only a year old. He and his (5) four brothers were raised by his mother, who earned a small income from teaching foreign languages. Inspired by Frank Merriwell, the hero of a series of popular novels for boys, (10) Eagan pursued an education for himself as well as an interest in boxing. He attended the University of Denver for a year before serving in the U.S. Army as an artillery lieutenant during World War (15) I. After the war, he entered Yale University and, while studying there, won the U.S. national amateur heavyweight boxing title. He graduated from Yale in 1921, attended Harvard Law School, (20) and received a Rhodes scholarship to the University of Oxford where he received his A.M. in 1928. While studying at Oxford, Eagan became the first American to win the Brit(25) ish amateur boxing championship. Eagan won his first Olympic gold medal as a light heavyweight boxer at the 1920 Olympic Games in Antwerp, Belgium. Eagan also fought at the 1924 Olympics (30) in Paris as a heavyweight but failed to get a medal. Though he had taken up the sport just three weeks before the competition, he managed to win a second gold medal as a member of the four-man (35) bobsled team at the 1932 Olympics in Lake Placid, New York. Thus he became the only athlete to win gold medals at both the Summer and Winter Olympics. Eagan was a member of the first group (40) of athletes inducted into the U.S. Olympic Hall of Fame in 1983. Eagan became a respected attorney, serving as an assistant district attorney for southern New York and as chairman of the New (45) York State Athletic Commission (1945– 51). He married soap heiress Margaret Colgate and attained the rank of lieutenant colonel during World War II. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com 21. What is the main idea of the passage? (A) Eagan’s life shows how a wealthy student can achieve as much as a poor one. (B) Eagan’s life shows that military experience makes athletes great. (C) Eagan’s life shows that a man can be an athlete and a well-educated person. (D) Eagan’s life shows how easy it is to win two gold medals in different Olympic sports. 22. According to the passage, who was Frank Merriwell? (A) A teacher at Yale (B) A fictional character (C) A student at Oxford (D) A bobsledder at the Olympics 23. According to the passage, how did Eagan’s mother earn a living? (A) Renting rooms to immigrants (B) Teaching foreign languages (C) Doing laundry and cleaning (D) Writing fiction for women’s magazines 24. Which of the following is the closest in meaning to the word “artillery” as used in line 14? (A) Large weapons such as cannons (B) Small weapons such as pistols (C) Shoulder weapons such as rifles (D) Tension weapons such as crossbows 25. According to the passage, Eagan won all of the following EXCEPT: (A) Light heavyweight boxing, Olympic gold medal (B) U.S. national amateur heavyweight boxing title (C) British amateur boxing championship (D) Heavyweight boxing, Olympic gold medal Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 23 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) He received a gold medal in four-man bobsledding. (D) He was appointed assistant district attorney for Southern New York. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) He was promoted to lieutenant colonel in the U.S. Army. ○ (A) He was inducted into U.S. Olympic Hall of Fame. ○ 30. According to the passage, what special honor did Eagan receive in 1983? ○ (D) He was president of Colgate. ○ (C) He was an army officer. ○ (B) He was an attorney. ○ (A) He was a boxing trainer. ○ 29. According to the passage, what was Eagan’s profession? ○ (D) Summer Olympics ○ (C) 1932 Olympics ○ (B) Gold medals ○ (A) Sport ○ 28. Which word or phrase does the word “competition” as used in lines 32–33 refer to? ○ (D) At the end of paragraph 4 ○ (C) After the phrase “get a medal” in paragraph 3 www.petersons.com ○ (B) After the word “boxing” in paragraph 2 ○ (A) At the end of paragraph 1 ○ He continued to be active in amateur athletics for the rest of the decade. ○ 27. Where can the following sentence best be added to the passage? ○ (D) Lake Placid, New York ○ (C) London, England ○ (B) Paris, France ○ (A) Antwerp, Belgium QUESTIONS 31–40 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE. The first folio edition of the collected works of William Shakespeare was originally published in 1623 as Mr. William Shakespeares Comedies, Histories & (5) Tragedies. This folio edition is the major source for contemporary texts of his plays. The publication of drama in the early seventeenth century was usually left to (10) the poorer members of the Stationers’ Company and to outright pirates. The would-be publisher only had to get hold of a manuscript, legally or illegally, register it as his copy, and have it printed. (15) Sometimes the publisher dispensed with the formality. Such a man was Thomas Thorpe, the publisher of Shakespeare’s sonnets in 1609. Titus Andronicus was the first play by (20) Shakespeare to be published and was printed by a notorious literary pirate, John Danter, who also brought out, anonymously, a defective Romeo and Juliet, largely from shorthand notes (25) made during performance. Eighteen of Shakespeare’s plays were printed in quartos (books about half the size of a modern magazine) both “good” and “bad” before the First Folio (a large-format (30) book) was published in 1623. The bad quartos are defective editions, usually with badly garbled or missing text. For the First Folio, a formidable project of more than 900 pages, five men formed (35) a partnership, headed by Edward Blount and William Jaggard. The actors John Heminge and Henry Condell undertook the collection of 36 of Shakespeare’s plays, and about 1,000 copies of the First (40) Folio were printed by Isaac Jaggard, William’s son. In 1632, a second folio was issued and in 1663, a third. The latter included Pericles and several other plays that may not have been written by (45) Shakespeare. These included The Two Noble Kinsmen, which is now thought to have been a collaboration of Shakespeare and John Fletcher. ○ 26. According to the passage, where were the 1920 Olympic Games held? diagnostic test ○ ○ ○ ○ 24 PART II: Diagnosing Strengths and Weaknesses ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 31. From the passage it can be inferred that the First Folio of Shakespeare’s plays is important because it 36. Which word is closest in meaning to the phrase “brought out” as used in line 22? (A) Published (A) was registered at the Stationer’s Office by Thomas Thorpe (B) Printed (B) is the major source for contemporary texts of Shakespeare’s plays (D) Defect (C) Performed (C) is twice the size of the quarto editions that were badly printed by many publishers 37. According to the passage, how many of Shakespeare’s plays were printed in quartos? (D) was published three years after the establishment of the Plymouth Colony (A) 17 32. Which of the following is closest in meaning to the word “outright” as used in line 11? (C) 19 (B) 18 (D) 20 (A) Unfairly judged as something (B) Proved to be something without question (C) Imprisoned without a trial (D) Opposing the rights of an enemy 33. The passage implies that many publishers (A) were unsuccessful authors themselves (B) printed the work of only the best writers. (C) used an author’s work without permission 38. The passage implies that John Danter acquired the text of Romeo and Juliet by (A) paying an actor for a copy of the script (B) buying the copyright from Shakespeare (C) taking notes during a performance (D) hiring an actor to recite the lines to him 39. According to the passage, all of the following were involved in the publishing of the First Folio EXCEPT: (D) paid the author very well for his writing (A) Edward Blount (B) Henry Condell 34. Which of the following is closest in meaning to the phrase “dispensed with” as used in line 15? (A) Gave away to customers (D) Compensated another’s loss ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) Wrote a denial to an accusation 35. According to the passage, when were Shakespeare’s sonnets published? ○ ○ (D) John Danter 40. Where can the following sentence best be added to the passage? (A) 1609 They sold quickly to a public anxious to have accurate copies of the master dramatist’s plays. (A) At the end of paragraph 1 (B) After the word “formality” in paragraph 2 (B) 1610 (C) 1611 (D) 1612 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) William Jaggard (B) Managed without something ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com (C) After the word “performance” in paragraph 3 (D) After the phrase “William’s son” in paragraph 4 Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 25 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 43. According to the passage, in what year were steamboats operating regularly on the Mississippi? ○ ○ ○ (D) A state that has a border on three other states ○ ○ (C) A three-wheeled vehicle ○ ○ (B) A stream that flows into another ○ ○ (A) A party honoring a famous person ○ ○ 42. Which of the following is closest in meaning to the word “tributaries” as used in line 6 of the passage? ○ ○ (D) in the Mississippi River valley ○ ○ (C) along the Hudson River ○ ○ (B) in Washington, D.C. ○ ○ (A) in New Orleans ○ ○ 41. In the passage, it is implied that steamboats were used mainly ○ ○ the vessels were poorly constructed and maintained. They sank after hitting sand bars and hidden rocks in the river, and many of their boilers exploded, causing (55) many deaths among their passengers. By the 1870s, railroads had become more efficient modes of transport and gradually caused the retirement of almost all the steamboats from the river. ○ ○ (A) 1810 ○ ○ (B) 1811 ○ ○ (C) 1812 ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) Steamboat ○ ○ 44. Which of the following does the phrase “means of transportation” as used in line 9 refer to? ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) 1813 ○ (C) Built specifically ○ ○ ○ (B) America ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) Travel ○ QUESTIONS 41–50 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE. Steamboats were shallow-draft boats propelled by steam-driven paddle wheels. In the nineteenth century, they could be seen every day on rivers, par(5) ticularly on the Mississippi River and its principal tributaries in the United States. The development of the steamboat as a practical means of transportation began (10) in America in 1787, but it wasn’t until 1811 that a steamboat was built specifically to travel along the lower Mississippi River. The boat, called appropriately the New Orleans, was built at (15) Pittsburgh, Pa., for Robert Fulton and Robert R. Livingston. In 1812, the two men began operating a regular steamboat service between New Orleans and Natchez, Mississippi. Their vessels trav(20) eled at eight miles per hour downstream and three upstream. In 1816, Henry Miller Shreve launched his steamboat Washington, and soon became known as the father of Missis(25) sippi navigation, because he adapted steamboat design to fit the shallow waters of the river. He installed the engine high up above the water line and mounted it on a hull that was as shallow (30) as that of a barge. He also added a tall second deck, and afterwards all Mississippi steamboats copied Shreve’s design. From then on and until about 1870, the steamboat dominated the economy, ag(35) riculture, and commerce of the middle area of the United States. By 1834, there were 1,200 steamboats, carrying not only cotton and sugar, but also passengers who enjoyed luxuriously (40) appointed lounges with rich rugs, oil paintings, and chandeliers. Many steamboats were famous for their chefs, orchestras, and large staffs of maids and butlers to assist their cabin passengers. (45) Steamboat pilots had to memorize or guess at the depths of the river and its potential obstacles along long stretches of river in order to navigate safely. The average life span of a steamboat was (50) only four to five years, because most of diagnostic test ○ ○ ○ ○ 26 PART II: Diagnosing Strengths and Weaknesses ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 45. According to the passage, how fast did the New Orleans travel downstream between New Orleans and Natchez? 48. According to the passage, after the 1830s, steamboats had all of the following EXCEPT: (A) 3 miles per hour (A) Orchestras (B) 8 miles per hour (B) Chefs and maids (C) 13 miles per hour (C) Chandeliers (D) 18 miles per hour (D) Air conditioning 46. According to the passage why was Henry Shreve called the “father of Mississippi navigation”? 49. According to the passage, how long did the average steamboat remain afloat? (A) Two to three years (A) He designed a steering mechanism that other steamboats used. (B) Three to four years (B) He was born and raised in a small village on the banks of the Mississippi. (D) Five to six years (C) Four to five years (C) He printed maps for the steamboat captains and pilots. 50. Where can the following sentence best be added to the passage? (D) He adapted steamboat design to fit the shallow waters of the river. Mark Twain, a steamboat pilot who became one of America’s greatest writers, told about his brother’s death in a steamboat explosion in his book Life on the Mississippi. 47. Which of the following is the closest in meaning to the phrase “from then on” as used in line 33 in the passage? (A) Subsequently (B) Consequently (C) Apparently (D) Thoroughly ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) After the words “Mississippi River” in paragraph 2 (B) After the phrase “Shreve’s design” in paragraph 3 (C) After the word “chandeliers” in paragraph 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) After the phrase “their passengers” in paragraph 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 27 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ A 11. B 21. C 31. C 41. D 2. B 12. C 22. B 32. B 42. B 3. A 13. B 23. B 33. C 43. C 4. B 14. B 24. A 34. B 44. D 5. C 15. D 25. D 35. A 45. B 6. D 16. C 26. A 36. A 46. D 7. B 17. B 27. D 37. B 47. A 8. A 18. A 28. C 38. C 48. D 9. A 19. B 29. B 39. D 49. C 10. B 20. A 30. A 40. D 50. D The correct answer is (B). The answer is stated in the first paragraph. 3. The correct answer is (A). The other answer choices do not relate to the meaning of the word. ○ 2. are only two of the various responsibilities that cabildos might be in charge of. ○ The correct answer is (A). The other choices are incorrect definitions. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 15. The correct answer is (D). Sentence 2 of the first paragraph states that Oakley ○ ○ 14. The correct answer is (B). Omit the phrase “according to legend” and it is easier to see that the antecedent is game. www.petersons.com ○ The correct answer is (A). Only choice (A) makes sense and is general enough in the context of the sentence. Choice (B) does not make sense. Choices (C) and (D) 13. The correct answer is (B). ○ 8. The correct answer is (B). A police officer keeps the peace. 12. The correct answer is (C). The answer is stated in the first paragraph. ○ 7. 11. The correct answer is (B). Fascinating means to hold the attention of someone by being interesting. Fabulous means hard to believe or incredible. Neither choices (A) or (D) are correct definitions. ○ The correct answer is (D). Choice (D) can be inferred from the final two sentences in the passage. There is nothing in the passage to indicate the educational level of cabildos, so choice (A) cannot be inferred. The work of cabildos was important, so there is no basis to consider that only “some” cabildos were important. Choice (C) is directly stated in the third paragraph. ○ 6. ○ The correct answer is (C). The answer is stated in the second paragraph. ○ 5. 10. The correct answer is (B). Paragraph 2 describes the functioning of cabildos, so it is the best place to add a sentence that provides more details about this aspect. Choice (A), paragraph 1, discusses the background of cabildos, not their functions. Inserting the sentence into paragraphs 3 or 4 would interrupt the flow of ideas in either paragraph. ○ The correct answer is (B). The answer is stated in the second paragraph. The correct answer is (A). It is NOT true. Sentence 2 in the fourth paragraph disproves this answer. ○ 4. 9. ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ANSWER KEY AND EXPLANATIONS answers diagnostic test ○ ○ ○ ○ 28 PART II: Diagnosing Strengths and Weaknesses ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ was born in 1860. The final sentence in the paragraph states both that she was 15 when she worked with Butler and that she married him a year later. Add 15 plus 1 to find that she was 16 when she married Butler. Sixteen plus 1860 equals 1876 when they married. 16. The correct answer is (C). It is not true. Choice (A) can be inferred from the third paragraph. Choice (B) is stated in the first paragraph. Choice (D) is stated in the second paragraph. 17. The correct answer is (B). Substitute the answers into the sentence and answer (B) makes the most sense in context. 26. The correct answer is (A). The answer is stated in the third paragraph. 27. The correct answer is (D). Adding the sentence to the end of paragraph 4 picks up and adds to the information in the preceding sentence. There is no reference to athletics in the first paragraph, so adding the sentence there makes no sense. The sentence would interrupt the sense of the paragraphs if added where either choice (B) or (C) indicate. 28. The correct answer is (C). The answer is stated at the end of the sentence. 29. The correct answer is (B). The answer is stated in the fourth paragraph. 18. The correct answer is (A). The sentence sums up Oakley’s life. If it were inserted in any of the other choices, it would not make sense because it would interrupt the description of what she did in her life. 19. The correct answer is (B). The answer is stated in the fourth paragraph. 20. The correct answer is (A). There is no information in the passage to support either choices (B) or (D). Choice (C) is contradicted in the fourth paragraph. 21. The correct answer is (C). Only choice (C) includes both Eagan’s education and athletic ability. Choice (A) is not supported by information in the passage. Choices (B) and (D) are misreadings of the passage. 22. The correct answer is (B). The answer is stated in the second paragraph. 23. The correct answer is (B). The answer is stated in the first paragraph. 24. The correct answer is (A). Eliminate choice (D) immediately because Eagan served in World War I. 25. The correct answer is (D). It is NOT true. Paragraph 3 states that Eagan did not win this medal. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com 30. The correct answer is (A). The answer is stated in the first sentence of the fourth paragraph. 31. The correct answer is (C). The First Folio had twice as many plays as had been printed previously and the inclusion of the two actors in the publishing team implies that good texts were used. Choice (B) is stated in the first paragraph and the question asks for an inference. There is no information to support either choices (A) or (D). 32. The correct answer is (B). The other answer choices are incorrect definitions. 33. The correct answer is (C). Statements in the second and third paragraphs support this answer. 34. The correct answer is (B). The other answer choices are incorrect. 35. The correct answer is (A). The answer is stated in the final sentence of the second paragraph. 36. The correct answer is (A). To publish means to issue books, whereas to print means to imprint letters onto paper. [Very fine distinction and difficult for an ELL person to figure out from the context which uses both publish and print in the same sentence.] Chapter 2: Practice Test 1: Diagnostic ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 29 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 50. The correct answer is (D). Adding the sentence as indicated in choices (A), (B), and (C) would interrupt the flow of thought. Choice (D) inserts the sentence as an example to illustrate the detail about explosions on steamboats. ○ ○ 49. The correct answer is (C). The answer is supported by the phrase “average life span of a steamboat” in line 49. ○ ○ 48. The correct answer is (D). It is NOT true. The other answer choices are supported by information in paragraph 3. ○ 42. The correct answer is (B). The other answer choices use some form of the word tributary, but only choice (B) is correct. Choice (A) refers to tribute, choice (C) refers to tricycle, and choice (D) refers to tri-state. 47. The correct answer is (A). The other answer choices do not make sense. ○ 41. The correct answer is (D). The first paragraph supports this inference. Also, mention is not made in the passage of the other areas. 46. The correct answer is (D). The answer is stated in the third paragraph. ○ 40. The correct answer is (D). The word “they” is a clue to the best place to insert this sentence. The antecedent for choice (A) is “folio edition,” which is singular. The antecedent for choice (B) is singular, “formality,” which also does not make sense. The antecedent for choice (C) is Romeo and Juliet, which is also singular. Only choice (D) provides a plural antecedent “1,000 copies” and also makes sense. 45. The correct answer is (B). The answer is stated in the second paragraph. ○ 39. The correct answer is (D). It is NOT true. Paragraph 4 supports this answer as being not true, but correct. 44. The correct answer is (D). Substitute the answer choices into the sentence and the only one that makes sense is choice (D). ○ 38. The correct answer is (C). The answer is supported by sentence 1 of the third paragraph. 43. The correct answer is (C). The reference in lines 17–18 to “regular steamboat service” supports this answer. ○ 37. The correct answer is (B). The answer is stated in the third paragraph. answers diagnostic test ○ ○ ○ ○ PART III ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ TOEFL READING REVIEW ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ CHAPTER 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ • Finding main ideas and supporting details • Skimming for specific information • Making inferences • Understanding advertisements • How thoughts are related • Understanding contemporary reading passages • Reading history textbooks • Summing it up FINDING MAIN IDEAS AND SUPPORTING DETAILS The most valuable reading comprehension skill is probably the ability to determine the most important thing an author is saying. Read the following paragraph to see if you can distinguish between essential and nonessential information and between the main idea and the supporting details. Sample Reading Passage 1 (5) Left-handed people suffer more from stress than their right-handed peers, according to a study of 1,100 adults by University of Michigan researchers. As a result, they smoke and drink more. Fifty-five percent of the lefties smoked, whereas fewer than half of the righties smoked. Furthermore, the lefties consumed more alcohol per year than their right-handed counterparts. The main idea is _______________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ Notice that in this paragraph, it was the first sentence that told you the main idea. This sentence, called a “topic sentence,” usually appears at the beginning. Sometimes, however, the paragraph’s main idea is expressed in the last sentence, and sometimes readers must determine the main idea of a paragraph by summarizing the author’s message themselves. 33 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ chapter 3 OVERVIEW ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 34 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Answer The main idea of the passage is that left-handed people suffer more from stress than right-handed people. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Sample Reading Passage 2 (5) You ought to know what to do to help a person who is choking. First, you stand behind the choking victim and put your arms around his or her waist. Second, you make a fist and place the thumb side against the person’s stomach just above the navel, but below the ribs. Third, grasp your fist with your other hand and press into the victim’s abdomen with a quick upward thrust. Repeat this action if necessary. Main idea: ____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________ Supporting details: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Underline the main idea and circle the supporting details as you read the paragraph below. Then write them in note form in the space provided. ○ ○ ○ (A) ____________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ (B) _____________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ (C) _____________________________________________________________________ Answer Main idea: You should know how to help a person who is choking. Supporting details: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) _____________________________________________________________________ Now, read the following paragraph to determine what the main idea means to a passage. Sample Reading Passage 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) Stand behind the victim and put your arms around his or her waist. (B) Make a fist and place the thumb side against the person’s stomach. (C) Grasp your fist with your other hand and press into the abdomen with a quick upward thrust. (D) Repeat if necessary. (5) What’s the best way for you, as an employer, to deliver bad news to an employee? First of all, you have to break the news yourself, face to face with the recipient. You can’t write memos to tell people they will not get raises this year or that they have made an error or are not performing as well as expected. You ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 35 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (10) have to show them how you feel about the matter and that you are personally sorry and sympathize with them. If you indicate that you are ready to listen to their reactions to your bad news, you will undoubtedly save yourself from their wrath. Above all, you must be ready for an emotional reaction from the recipient of bad news. Give people time to digest your news and to control the emotion they invariably feel. Although it is never easy to break bad news, if you follow these steps, you will at least soften the blow. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The author’s main idea is that (A) bad news is hard to impart ○ 1. ○ ○ (B) all employers have to criticize their employees ○ ○ (C) there are ways of softening the impact of bad news ○ ○ ○ (D) people respond emotionally to bad news ○ ○ ○ Where is the main idea expressed? (A) In the first sentence ○ 2. ○ ○ (B) In the last sentence ○ ○ ○ (C) In the middle of the paragraph ○ ○ ○ The main idea is supported by (A) examples of employers giving bad news ○ 3. ○ ○ ○ (D) Nowhere ○ ○ (B) a list of reasons for having to break bad news ○ ○ (C) sympathy for both the employer and employee ○ ○ ○ (D) instructions on how to soften the blow of bad news 2. The correct answer is (B). 3. The correct answer is (D). ○ The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Understand what the author is saying ○ ○ Distinguish fact from opinion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Determine the author’s attitude toward the topic ○ • • • ○ ○ In addition to finding the main idea and supporting details in a reading passage, it is also important to understand an author’s intent or purpose. When you read critically, you must: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 36 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Read the paragraphs that follow. Then answer the questions about the author’s intent and attitude. Sample Reading Passage 4 Yogurt has as much nutritional value as a glass of milk, yet dieters and health food fanatics claim that yogurt will prolong your life and reduce your girth. Their claims are backed by reports that yogurt eaters over the years have lived longer and healthier lives than non-yogurt eaters. However, what proof is there that rural life and its ensuing greater physical activity rather than consumption of yogurt are not the cause of these people’s longevity? (5) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The author’s intent is to show that (A) yogurt is good for your health ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ (B) eating yogurt will prolong your life ○ ○ (C) yogurt is the same as milk ○ ○ ○ (D) there is no proof that yogurt increases longevity The paragraph advises the reader that (A) yogurt will help a person to live to be 100 ○ ○ ○ ○ 2. ○ ○ (B) the author has little faith in yogurt lovers’ claims ○ ○ (C) yogurt may be harmful to dieters and health food lovers Answers 1. The correct answer is (D). 2. The correct answer is (B). Sample Reading Passage 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) people in rural areas eat a lot of yogurt (5) 1. The main idea is that (A) men live longer than their wives (B) widowers live longer than single men (C) remarriage after a spouse’s death prolongs men’s lives ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Most of us believe that the death of a spouse often leads to the premature death of the bereft partner. After twelve years of study involving 4,000 widows and widowers, Johns Hopkins University researchers have perceived that it is the husbands, and not the wives, whose lives are shortened by the loss of their spouses. However, the study indicates that widowers who remarry enjoy greater longevity than men the same age who continue to live with their first wives. (D) the death of a spouse shortens the life of the surviving partner ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 37 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The author’s intent is to (A) discuss a medical discovery ○ 2. ○ ○ ○ (B) make a conjecture regarding death ○ ○ (C) correct a generally held misconception ○ ○ ○ (D) advise widowers to live alone The correct answer is (C). 2. The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Here are the opening paragraphs of some news items. Scan them for information about who, what, where, when, and why. ○ ○ ○ The readings you will encounter in the next few pages are the kinds of things you are likely to find in a newspaper. News items are usually set up in such a way that each sentence is its own paragraph; they normally follow the pattern who, what, where, when, why. ○ ○ ○ It is not always necessary to read every word of a passage. Your purpose for reading something determines how closely you should read it. Once you know what your purpose is, skimming is a valuable procedure. Skimming through a passage involves reading very fast in order to recognize main ideas and supporting details while skipping (not reading) parts that are not relevant to your reading purpose. Although skimming should never replace careful reading, it can save you time in deciding what or what not to read, in getting the general content of a passage, and in finding the author’s main point without having to deal with details. You read the morning newspaper, for example, quite differently from the way you read a detective story, an assignment for a class, or a letter from a friend. Skimming to find a specific piece of information such as a number or the answer to a question is often called scanning. ○ ○ ○ ○ SKIMMING FOR SPECIFIC INFORMATION ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Why ___________________________________________________________ ○ When __________________________________________________________ ○ Where _________________________________________________________ ○ ○ What __________________________________________________________ ○ ○ Mexican conservationists are wondering how to get rid of killer piranhas that were found yesterday in a lake near Puebla. Who ___________________________________________________________ ○ A. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Sample Reading Passage 6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 38 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ B. The Commodities Futures Trading Commission today designated four commodities exchanges to trade options on futures contracts, as part of a three-year pilot program beginning October 1. Who ___________________________________________________________ What __________________________________________________________ Where _________________________________________________________ When __________________________________________________________ Why ___________________________________________________________ C. On October 14, workers at the Lenin shipyard in the Baltic seaport of Gdansk put down their tools in protest against poor working conditions. Who ___________________________________________________________ What __________________________________________________________ Where _________________________________________________________ When __________________________________________________________ Why ___________________________________________________________ ○ ○ A. Mexican conservationists are wondering how to get rid of killer piranhas that were found yesterday in a lake near Puebla. Who ___________________________________________________________ Mexican conservationists ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Answers ○ ○ What __________________________________________________________ trying to get rid of piranhas ○ ○ Where _________________________________________________________ in a lake near Puebla ○ ○ When _________________________________________________________ yesterday B. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ killers Why ___________________________________________________________ The Commodities Futures Trading Commission today designated four commodities exchanges to trade options on futures contracts, as part of a three-year pilot program beginning October 1. Who _________________________________________________________ the Commodities Future Trading Commission ○ ○ ○ What ________________________________________________________ designated for commodities exchanges ○ ○ Where _______________________________________________________ information not given ○ ○ When ________________________________________________________ today C. On October 14, workers at the Lenin shipyard in the Baltic seaport of Gdansk put down their tools in protest against poor working conditions. workers Who _________________________________________________________ put down their tools What _________________________________________________________ in Baltic seaport of Gdansk Where _________________________________________________________ October 14 When _________________________________________________________ to protest against poor working conditions Why __________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ to trade options on Futures’ contracts Why _________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ article is about. ○ indicators of what the ○ Titles are often useful ○ ○ ○ NOTE ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 39 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ When you have found the who, what, where, when, and why information in the beginning of a news story, decide whether or not to continue reading. If you do read the rest of the article, skim it by skipping to places where words are capitalized or where there are numbers, or to any points that particularly interest you. Most importantly, don’t get lost in all the words; practice reading only what you need to read within a selection. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ MAKING INFERENCES Sometimes, however, the information is not directly stated, so you must infer a meaning using your own reasoning and logic. This type of understanding is sometimes referred to as inferential comprehension. ○ 2. ○ When you are able to use the author’s words to answer a comprehension question, it is your factual comprehension that is being tested. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow. ○ ○ ○ ○ Daily newspapers publish advice columns for everything from successful vegetable gardening to curing yourself of high blood pressure. The following passage answers questions about car problems. ○ ○ ○ Imagine that you are at a friend’s house. It is 11:00 p.m. and your host starts to look at his watch and yawn out loud. Although he never actually tells you to leave, he implies and you infer that it is time for you to go home. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ There are two basic kinds of reading comprehension. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ Have someone crank the engine. (Be sure you keep your hands away from the ○ 1 inch away from a metal engine part. 8 ○ Hold the shank of the screwdriver about ○ spark plug boot away from its plug. Push an insulated screwdriver into the boot. ○ If the wires look all right, make a detailed check for a spark. Twist one ○ ○ for loose or broken spark plug wires. Fix what you can. (15) ○ ○ Q. My engine cranks all right. But why won’t it start up? A. Think twice. Are you following the exact starting procedure given in your owner’s manual? Next, pin down the trouble area by checking these possibilities: (1) gasoline, (2) spark, and (3) air-gasoline ratio. (5) 1. First make sure you have gasoline in the tank. If that’s not the problem, maybe you have flooded the engine. Hold the gas pedal to the floor for 10 seconds (do not pump it) as you crank the engine. Still no start? Maybe the problem is a stuck needle valve. Tap the carburetor bowl lightly near the gas line, using pliers or a screwdriver handle. This should free the (10) valve so you can start. But if nothing has done the trick so far, move to the next step. 2. Check to see if the engine is getting the spark it needs to start. First look ○ ○ ○ ○ Sample Reading Passage 7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 40 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ screwdriver shank and the wire to avoid shock.) You’ll see a small spark if the ○ ○ ignition system is working. No spark? Get help. (Caution: If there is any gasoline (20) spark, you have eliminated that as a possibility. Move on to the next step. 3. Finally, find out if the carburetor is feeding sufficient air and gasoline to the engine. Remove the top of the air cleaner so you can see the choke plate. If the plate is stuck open, push it shut (only if the engine is cold) and try to start again. Still no start? Hold the choke wide open and peer deep inside as someone else (25) pumps the gas pedal. (Make sure he doesn’t crank the engine.) If you can’t see gas squirting, you need professional help. 1. This type of passage can be described as (A) scientific reading ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ on the engine, be sure you let it evaporate before you try this test.) If you see a ○ ○ ○ (B) a “how-to” article ○ ○ (C) editorial writing 2. The author’s intent in this article is to (A) explain why cars break down ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) automobile advertising ○ ○ (B) warn you about the dangers involved in do-it-yourself car repairs ○ ○ (C) describe the method of checking spark plugs 3. From the context of the word crank (line 16) it must mean (A) complain ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) instruct you how to deal with a car problem ○ ○ (B) start ○ ○ (C) turn around 4. List briefly the steps involved in checking the starting mechanism. (A) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) shut off ○ ○ (B) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ (C) ________________________________________________________ 5. If you check for a spark and don’t get one, what should you do? (A) Check the carburetor next. (B) Get an auto mechanic. (C) Clean the gas off the motor. (D) Get a shock. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 41 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ What is the first thing to do when your car doesn’t start? (A) Check your gas. ○ 6. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) Flood the engine. ○ ○ If you are testing for a spark, gas on the engine is dangerous (A) because it might start the car ○ 7. ○ ○ ○ (D) Be sure you’re following the rules for starting the car. ○ ○ ○ (C) Contact your automobile salesperson. ○ ○ (B) when it has evaporated ○ ○ (C) after it leaks out of the carburetor ○ ○ ○ (D) because the spark might ignite the gas ○ ○ ○ You should use an insulated screwdriver to (A) protect the engine ○ 8. ○ ○ (B) avoid scratching the metal ○ ○ (C) avoid getting a shock ○ ○ ○ (D) twist the spark plug boot ○ ○ ○ You can unstick a valve by (A) taking it out ○ 9. ○ ○ (B) hitting it ○ ○ (C) loosening it ○ ○ ○ 10. You have to hold the screwdriver shank away from metal to (A) prevent fire ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) twisting it ○ ○ ○ (B) avoid cutting yourself ○ ○ (C) avoid getting a shock ○ ○ ○ (D) check for a bad spark plug ○ ○ ○ ○ 11. Presumably a spark plug boot (line 14) is a (A) covering ○ ○ (B) shoe ○ ○ (C) trunk ○ ○ ○ (D) plug ○ ○ ○ ○ 12. It can be inferred that a carburetor (A) is connected to the spark plugs ○ ○ (B) cranks the engine ○ ○ (C) regulates gas and air flow ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) has an open plate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 42 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13. If the engine is cold, it is all right to (A) try to start the car ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) close the choke plate ○ ○ (C) take off the air cleaner 14. The choke plate is (A) next to the gas tank ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) pump the gas pedal ○ ○ (B) above the air cleaner ○ ○ (C) beneath the air cleaner 15. Do you think a person with no understanding of the mechanism of a car could follow these instructions? ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) inside the spark plugs ○ ○ ○ Why or why not? ______________________________________________ Answers 1. The correct answer is (B). 2. The correct answer is (D). 3. The correct answer is (C). 4. (A) Make sure you have gasoline. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ______________________________________________________________ ○ ○ (B) Check the valves. ○ ○ (C) See if the engine is getting a spark. Check the spark plugs. 5. The correct answer is (B). 6. The correct answer is (D). 7. The correct answer is (D). 8. The correct answer is (C). 9. The correct answer is (B). 10. The correct answer is (C). 11. The correct answer is (A). 12. The correct answer is (C). 13. The correct answer is (B). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) Find out if the carburetor is feeding enough air and gas to the engine. 14. The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 15. The correct answer is no. The author assumes that the reader knows something about a car’s mechanism. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 43 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Sample Reading Passage 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Little Old San Juan, 62 Fortaleza Boulevard ✩✩✩ A cozy Spanish decor, enhanced by mellow, red clay floor tiles, wrought-iron street lanterns, and walls lined with rows of painted pottery, gives this 100-year-old landmark an aura of romantic old Spain. Gazpacho sprinkled with chopped onion, green pepper, rice and garlic croutons, and an irresistible array of Spanish dishes are exceptional. The paella laden with shellfish is more than worth the 30-minute wait. Wines both fine and ordinario from the vineyards of Spain. Entrées from $20. Closed Sundays. ○ ○ ○ Café Henri, 17 Lorraine Street ✩ Soft lighting and muted decorator shades of beige and bronze give the dining room an intimate atmosphere. Basically French, the cuisine represents aromatic country fare, with rich, nutritious soups and assorted platters of sausages, patés, and cheeses. Wholesome fare at reasonable prices. Entrées $12.50 to $20.75. ○ ○ The Boathouse, 433 River Road ✩ A delightful, convivial eating place decorated with sea urchin lamps, fishermen’s nets, and seaweed wall coverings. Very informal atmosphere. A lighthouse bar. Specialties are, of course, seafood, my favorite being the moules marinières served in steaming black pots. A five-course dinner at $11. Open daily. ○ ○ ○ The Banyan Tree, 2 East Monopoly Street ✩ A small sidewalk restaurant on a peaceful back street with a green and white striped awning, rattan chairs, and glasstopped tables. The menu is limited to exotic East Indian specialties, savory curries of all varieties being featured. Full luncheon comes to about $25. Open daily for lunch only. ○ ○ ○ ○ Questions 1–10 refer to the following restaurant review. ○ You may infer that this guide is ○ ○ (A) a paid-for advertisement ○ ○ ○ (B) written by a restaurant critic ○ ○ (C) an introduction in a cookbook ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) None of the above. ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ No stars—Fair ✩ Good ✩✩ Very good ✩✩✩ Excellent ✩✩✩✩ Extraordinary ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 44 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2. The author’s intent is to (A) describe gourmet restaurants ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) give the reader a price list for dining out ○ ○ (C) recommend good places to eat 3. Which restaurant serves the least expensive meals? ___________________ 4. Which restaurant is recommended most highly? ______________________ 5. Which restaurant is the most expensive? _____________________________ 6. Where could you get Indian food? ____________________________________ 7. Where would you go for shrimp au gratin? ____________________________ 8. Which restaurant would most likely have a guitarist? __________________ 9. Which restaurant sounds like a good place for lovers? _________________ 10. You would infer that these restaurants are (A) in the United States ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) warn people about restaurants ○ ○ (B) in Europe ○ ○ (C) for the wealthy only Answers 1. The correct answer is (B). 2. The correct answer is (C). 3. The correct answer is The Boathouse. 4. The correct answer is Little Old San Juan. 5. The correct answer is Little Old San Juan. 6. The correct answer is The Banyan Tree. 7. The correct answer is The Boathouse. 8. The correct answer is Little Old San Juan. 9. The correct answer is Café Henri. 10. The correct answer is (A). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) informal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 45 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ List all the places you can think of where you see and hear advertisements for products and services. Do you have a favorite television commercial? Why do you like it? ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ As you read the following advertisement from the 1980s, look for the means, both overt and subtle, employed to sell an expensive car. ○ ○ ○ Writers of advertising copy are amateur psychologists. They know just what will appeal to our instincts and emotions. In general, there are three major areas in our nature at which advertising aims—preservation, pride, and pleasure. Preservation, for example, relates to our innate desire to live longer, know more, and look better. Pride encompasses all sorts of things—our desire to show off, to brag about our prosperity or our good taste, to be one of the élite. We all want to enjoy the fruits of our labors, and this is where the pleasure principle comes in. We want to be entertained, to eat and drink well, and to relax in comfortable surroundings. ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ Make a list of at least three features that you consider necessary for a good television commercial. ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ Is there a commercial that you particularly dislike? What is it that bothers you about the commercial? ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ 2. ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ Did you name advertising billboards and posters? Where might you see them? ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ UNDERSTANDING ADVERTISEMENTS ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 46 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ A CAR SO SWIFT, SILENT AND LUXURIOUS, THAT IT IS, IN EVERY SENSE . . . BEYOND COMPARISON This car stands alone as a class of one. It is, to begin with, the only V-12 powered motorcar for sale in America. Car and Driver described the engine this way: “Its turbinelike smoothness and awesome torque simply set it apart from everything that might attempt to compete, even at half again the price. The dramatically powerful engine is teamed with sports car engineering. Power rack and pinion steering is quick and precise. Four wheel independent suspension maintains balance and stability. And four wheel power disc brakes are both smooth and decisive. The inner world offers an experience of luxury on a level that few drivers will ever know. From the exotic burled elm veneers that enhance the dashboard and doors to the supple hides that cover virtually all of the passenger compartment, opulence is everywhere. Electronic conveniences pamper you: self adjusting heating and air conditioning; power window, doorlocks and antenna; cruise control and a stereo with signal scanning tuner are all standard. Standard too is the best warranty we have ever offered. For two years or 36,000 miles, whichever comes first, we will replace or repair any part which proves defective. The tires are covered by the tire manufacturer’s warranty. Your dealer has full details on the limited warranty. Now look back at the advertisement and use note form to fill in the specific things offered to the purchaser of this car. __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ 1. Show others your wealth. 2. Show your good taste. 3. Get a quality product. 4. Save money. 5. Look beautiful. 6. Be comfortable. 7. Enjoy entertainment. Advertisements for exotic places to go on your vacation are very different from ads for luxury cars. They must appeal to another side of your nature. After reading the following ad by the Jamaica Tourist Board, answer the questions. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 47 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Courtesy of the Jamaica Tourist Board ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Questions 1–2 refer to the following advertisement. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Sample Reading Passage 9 ○ ○ ○ The ad implies that you (A) require entertainment by well-known singers ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ (B) enjoy sightseeing in foreign places ○ ○ (C) don’t want to spend a lot of money ○ ○ ○ (D) need a lot of excitement on your vacation ○ ○ ○ The ad appeals to your need for (A) quiet pleasure ○ 2. ○ ○ (B) delicious food ○ ○ (C) relaxation ○ ○ ○ (D) All of the above. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ 2. ○ The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 48 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Sample Reading Passage 10 Directions: Questions 1–5 refer to the following advertisement. Respond to the questions according to the nature of each item. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Courtesy of the New York Health & Racquet Club ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 49 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The advertisement emphasizes (A) locations ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ (B) a trial membership ○ ○ (C) reduced cost ○ ○ ○ (D) opening hours ○ ○ ○ It can be inferred that if you join the club (A) the sale ends on August 31 ○ 2. ○ ○ (B) you will go to all five club locations ○ ○ (C) your body will improve ○ ○ ○ (D) you will get a refund ○ ○ ○ This ad appeals to people’s (A) pleasure ○ 3. ○ ○ (B) pride ○ ○ (C) preservation ○ ○ From the context of the expression free clinics, it must mean (A) cost-free medical care ○ 4. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) All of the above. ○ ○ (B) no charge for lessons ○ ○ (C) liberated movement ○ ○ Membership in the club enables you to enjoy ________ in winter. (A) the cold ○ 5. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) games ○ ○ ○ (B) a full refund ○ ○ (C) dropping by ○ ○ ○ (D) swimming The correct answer is (C). 2. The correct answer is (C). 3. The correct answer is (D). 4. The correct answer is (B). 5. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 50 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ EXERCISES: READING COMPREHENSION SKILLS Directions: The passages are followed by questions based on their content. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in the passages. QUESTIONS 1–5 ARE BASED ON THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE. The business of tennis clothes has grown astoundingly in the past few years. Over $250 million is spent annually on the trappings of tennis. Apparently ev(5) eryone wants to look like a pro, even though 20% of the clientele has never even played the game. Manufacturers pay the stars lucrative fees for wearing their brands of clothes (10) and wielding their racquets on center court. Chris Evert-Lloyd, for example, was rumored to have signed a five-year contract for $5 million with Ellesse, a producer of fancy, expensive tennis wear. (15) John McEnroe received a reported $600,000 for playing with a Dunlop racquet, $330,000 for sporting Tacchini clothes, and $100,000 for tying his Nike tennis shoes. Obviously, in a bad year, (20) these stars would have made more as fashion models than as athletes. Not only tennis players get free clothing, but also all the people involved in the game—the referees, linespeople, ball (25) boys and girls—are living advertisments for tennis wear producers. Where, traditionally, conservative white clothing was required for the entire tennis coterie, changing times have seen a new vogue (30) in tennis outfits. Flamboyant colors, designers’ nameplates, geometric figures, and bold lines distinguish the new tennis togs from their predecessors. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) describe the means of advertising expensive tennis clothes (D) describe the new tennis clothing 3. A good title for this passage would be (A) The Stars at Play (B) Big Business in Tennis Wear (C) The High Cost of Playing Tennis (D) Tennis Stars’ Flamboyant Clothes 4. It is stated that John McEnroe (A) wore flamboyant clothing on the court (B) must have earned over $1 million for endorsing tennis products (C) was a fashion model more than he was a tennis player (D) had had a bad year in tennis competition 5. It is implied that (A) tennis clothing is bought by the wellto-do (B) everyone who wears expensive tennis wear plays tennis (D) fashion models wear tennis clothing (B) tennis stars get huge sums for endorsements ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) defend tennis wear manufacturers from complaints about their high prices (A) tennis clothing appeals to the wealthy (C) the price of tennis racquets has remained stable ○ ○ ○ (A) explain why the cost of tennis clothes has risen (C) tennis officials would prefer to wear traditional white clothing (D) bright colors entice people to buy tennis wear ○ ○ 2. The author’s intention is to 1. It can be inferred from the passage that ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 51 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) a pertinent use of fuel consumption ○ ○ (C) a computer that saves gas and helps create cleaner emission ○ (B) a major turnaround in American car manufacturing ○ ○ (A) responsible for the American car industry’s rejuvenation ○ ○ 8. The microprocessor is ○ ○ (D) All of the above. ○ (C) Americans will not buy uncomfortable small cars ○ ○ (B) American auto manufacturers had been indifferent to the need for smaller cars ○ (A) Americans love large cars ○ 7. In the second paragraph, there is a statement that implies that ○ ○ ○ (D) Americans continued to drive American cars. ○ (C) The Japanese exported cars to America. ○ ○ (B) Automobile manufacturers had to make smaller cars. ○ ○ (A) Car manufacturers worldwide had to produce fuel-efficient automobiles. ○ ○ 6. What significance did oil embargoes have in the automobile industry? ○ ○ claim that all the buyer has to pay for is gas. To fight corrosion, new coatings have been developed that protect against the havoc caused by road salts, gravel, (55) and other materials. Hence, when car owners are ready to turn in last year’s car for a new one, they will find that their well-preserved used cars will have an unusually high trade-in value. Fuel efficient, safe, emission free, eco(60) nomical, and beautiful, today’s cars are better bargains than any ever produced before. ○ costs of maintenance inthe buyer’s pur(50) chase price. New car advertisers now ○ QUESTIONS 6–13 ARE BASED ON THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE WRITTEN IN THE 1980S. The oil embargoes of 1973–1975 caused vast chagrin among the manufacturers of automobiles around the world. In particular, American companies were (5) obliged to create innovations in producing small cars that would compete in the market with those flowing into the American market from Japan and Europe. No longer could Americans afford (10) ostentatious, gas-guzzling vehicles. Of paramount importance to today’s car owner is the cost of gasoline. American manufacturers have collaborated to supply their clientele with small cars (15) that provide the amenities of the stereotyped large American car, yet get better mileage than any other car in the history of American car production. It has become a question of ardently compet(20) ing with foreign car manufacturers or succumbing to the intense competition and losing a lucrative business through apathy. The American car industry has been rejuvenated. The fuel consumption (25) of the new cars has decreased by 49% since 1977; mileage has risen from an average 17.2 miles per gallon to 25.6 miles per gallon. These figures are indicative of a major turnaround in engi(30) neering, manufacturing, and design. The industry has made pertinent use of the computer by installing a microprocessor, a thin piece of silicon about the size of an aspirin, in new cars. This minia(35) ture computer measures engine speed, engine load, and other functions, and sends messages to the fuel system and other parts of the car’s mechanism, thus producing lower gas consumption and (40) cleaner exhaust. By designing sleek, roomy, beautiful, sporty models, the automobile industry has enticed both the average-income and the affluent car buyer into purchasing (45) small cars. In addition to saving on gas, today’s car is built to save on maintenance and repair expenses. Furthermore, the manufacturer is including the exercises ○ ○ ○ ○ 52 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 9. According to the passage, small American cars are being bought (A) by middle-class and rich clientele 12. From the passage you can infer that (A) new cars are fuel efficient, sleek, and beautiful (B) because they save fuel (C) because of inflation (D) by Americans who want to help American business 10. According to the passage, new cars are a better bargain than those manufactured in years past because they (A) cost less to run and are built to last longer (B) have a built-in computer (C) save fuel, have more safety features, cost less to maintain, and have a higher trade-in value (D) are a lot smaller and don’t rust because of better coatings 11. From the information given in the reading, you can infer that anticorrosive coatings will not only protect a new car’s body, but also (A) make the car run better (B) increase the trade-in value of the car (C) increase the car’s mileage (D) make the car safer to drive ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com (B) Americans want their cars to be both beautiful and practical in terms of comfort and cost (C) Americans will continue to buy European and Japanese cars because they are cheaper (D) if oil becomes plentiful and cheap again, Americans will not return to buying large cars 13. Another inference from the article is that (A) the most important consideration in buying a car is the cost of gas (B) gas shortages caused American manufacturers to change their production methods (C) today’s cars are more sensible buys than those in the past (D) large cars are more comfortable than small cars Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 53 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ B 6. A 11. B 2. C 7. D 12. B 3. B 8. C 13. C 4. B 9. A 5. A 10. C ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ANSWER KEY answers ○ ○ ○ ○ 54 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ HOW THOUGHTS ARE RELATED In the preceding section, we talked about various aspects of reading comprehension: finding the main idea and supporting details, getting meaning from context, determining the author’s intent or purpose, scanning for specific information, and vocabulary building through knowledge of common word elements and recognition of synonyms. Besides providing you with a thorough review, this section of readings will concentrate on thought relations within sentences, paragraphs, and longer passages. It is important to be able to recognize and understand signal words or connectives, which introduce, connect, order, and relate individual ideas to larger and often more general concepts. Study these connectives, paying close attention to their function. Connectives Function and, also, as well as, besides, finally, furthermore, in addition to, in conclusion, moreover more information will follow examples, for example, kinds, types, sorts, ordinal numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.), others, several, some, such as, the following, ways examples will follow even if, however, in spite of, instead of, nevertheless, on the other hand, rather, still, yet, despite an opposite idea will follow all but, except exceptions will follow as a result of, because, due to, in order to, on account of, since cause as a consequence, as a result, consequently, so, so as to, so that, therefore effect after, as soon as, before, if, provided that, should, while, without, unless, until, following conditions to be met as, before. . .after, like some. . .other, than, once. . .now comparison Look at the following example. Note that the connectives are underlined and the ideas connected are boxed. Can you determine the function of each connective? If necessary, refer back to the table. Mr. Green had sent his secretary to pick up his car, which he had taken to the garage in order to have the brakes repaired. While returning with Mr. Green’s car, the secretary, driving on Main Street, entered the intersection at Elm after the light changed from green to red. She sounded her horn but nevertheless collided with a car that had entered the intersection from Elm Street after the light had turned green. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 55 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Answer the following questions about main ideas and supporting details. ○ ○ ○ ○ As you read the following passage, underline the signal words and box the related ideas. Then give the function of each. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ When a death occurs, the family has religious, social, and legal responsibilities. If the deceased has left an explicit set of papers in an accessible file, arrangements will be much easier for the family to make. For example, such papers should include the deed for a burial plot (if there is one), a statement as to whether (5) cremation or burial is desired, a copy of the birth certificate, and the names and addresses of all family members and friends who should be notified. Furthermore, the papers should include information on bank accounts, safe deposit boxes, and insurance policies, as well as the will. The person in charge of the funeral will need to know how much money is available in order to determine the expenses he or she (10) may reasonably incur for the family. If feasible, the person who makes the funeral arrangements should not be one of the bereaved. A melancholy widow may not be able to make objective decisions regarding expenses, such as for a coffin. Whoever makes the funeral arrangements realizes that he or she is deputized to make legally binding contracts with a funeral (15) director and others, which will probably be honored some months later when funds from the estate are released. One of the duties of the person in charge of the funeral is to prepare a death notice for the newspapers. Often the mortician arranges for the insertion of the notice. Included in the information should be the date of death, the names of the family (20) members, and the time and place of the forthcoming interment. ○ ○ ○ Sample Reading Passage 11 ○ ○ ○ The main idea of paragraph 1 is that (A) funerals are melancholy occasions ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) explain why a birth certificate is an important requisite for a death certificate ○ (B) specify the types of papers required to make funeral arrangements simpler ○ ○ The supporting details of paragraph 1 (A) give instructions about making funeral arrangements ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) None of the above. ○ 2. ○ ○ ○ (D) all friends and relatives of the deceased should be advised of the funeral arrangements ○ ○ (C) everybody should put important papers together for his or her survivors ○ ○ (B) everybody should leave a will so that survivors will know how much property they inherit ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 56 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The main idea of paragraph 2 is (A) in the first sentence ○ ○ ○ ○ 3. ○ ○ ○ (B) implied ○ ○ (C) in the last sentence ○ ○ ○ (D) not clearly stated The supporting details in paragraph 2 (A) tell why widows spend too much on funeral arrangements ○ ○ ○ ○ 4. ○ ○ (B) explain the duties of a funeral director ○ ○ (C) emphasize the unpleasant nature of funeral arrangements ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) explain why a disinterested person should make funeral arrangements ○ ○ ○ ○ 5. What is the main idea of paragraph 3? Is it stated or implied? __________________________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6. List the supporting details of paragraph 3. (A) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ (B) ________________________________________________________ Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ 1. The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ 2. The correct answer is (B). ○ ○ ○ 3. The correct answer is (A). ○ ○ 4. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ ○ ○ 5. The person in charge of the funeral should prepare a death notice for the newspapers. (It is stated.) (A) Information should include date of death. ○ ○ ○ 6. ○ ○ (B) Information should include names of the family members. Sample Reading Passage 12 Questions 1–10 are based on the following passage. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) Information should include time and place of the interment. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (5) Divorce settlements attempt to make an equitable distribution of a couple’s assets. Wrangles are common over who gets the car, the furniture, or the dog, but people overlook future needs and income. Two important issues will have to be decided by the courts. Can the divorced wife continue to have health coverage under her former husband’s policy? Is the divorced wife entitled to a share of her ex-husband’s pension? ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 57 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ __________ In the emotional atmosphere of getting a divorce, wives seldom plan for the distant future. _______________ 3. __________ Health insurance companies cover ex-wives in the workers’ policies. _______________ 4. __________ A divorced man can continue his wife’s health insurance coverage by observing the “silence is golden” rule. _______________ 5. __________ The author of this selection has no sympathy for divorced women and their demands. _______________ 6. __________ Sailors’ former wives will get some health insurance benefits under any conditions. _______________ 7. __________ Ex-wives have gone to court and have failed to get a share of their ex-husbands’ pensions. _______________ 8. __________ There is a specific law that prohibits ex-wives from legally attaching their former husbands’ pensions. _______________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2. ○ __________ Divorce settlements make fair distributions of couples’ property. _______________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Directions: Mark the following statements true or false. Then, indicate how you got your answer by adding on the blank line stated, implied, or no info if there is no information given. ○ ○ (25) ○ (20) ○ (15) ○ (10) So far the subject of health insurance has created much dissension. Most insurance companies exclude former wives from their definition of a worker’s dependents. In order to circumvent his ex-wife’s exclusion from his health plan, many a husband has concealed his divorce from his employer. Divorced spouses of military men anticipate that a newly approved bill will allow them 180 days’ medical coverage and continued coverage for serious ailments if they were married for at least 20 years during their husbands’ service career. Ex-wives are faring better in the pension-sharing dilemma than they are in obtaining health coverage. The courts have set a precedent in awarding pension funds to divorced women, particularly if there are defaults in alimony and childsupport payments. Nevertheless, the Employee Retirement Income Security Act prohibits the payment of a pension to anyone other than the worker. Litigation of ex-wives seeking a share in their former husbands’ pensions contends that the ERISA was passed for the purpose of protecting workers from creditors’ attempts to attach pensions, not from their ex-wives. In a recent decision, the Supreme Court gave exclusive pension rights to the military retiree whose retirement plan is not under the jurisdiction of state property laws. On the other hand, the former wives of retired foreign service personnel are legally entitled to a share of these retirees’ pensions in proportion to the length of their marriage. Obviously, there is no panacea for the ills besetting the legal system. Divorced women can only pray for significant benefits from future legislation. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 58 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 9. __________ A pension must be paid to the retired person and to no other person. _______________ 10. __________ Some laws regarding pensions favor ex-wives while other laws discriminate against them. _______________ Answers 1. The correct answer is false/implied. 2. The correct answer is true/implied. 3. The correct answer is false/stated. 4. The correct answer is true/stated. 5. The correct answer is false/implied. 6. The correct answer is false/stated. 7. The correct answer is false/stated. 8. The correct answer is no information given. 9. The correct answer is true/stated. 10. The correct answer is true/implied. Now read these short passages for general comprehension and vocabulary practice. Sample Reading Passage 13 The 1982 baptism of His Royal Highness Prince William Arthur Phillip Louis of Wales was a brief, quiet ceremony at Buckingham Palace in London. The little prince shared the honors of the day with his great-grandmother, who was celebrating her 82nd birthday. Thousands of her ardent admirers outside the palace sang “Happy Birthday” to the accompaniment of the Coldstream Guards band. (5) Clad in a lace and silk christening dress first worn by the future Edward VII in 1841, Prince William affably responded to the baptismal water poured over his head by the Archbishop of Canterbury. Instead of the fierce cry that the superstitious believe expels the Devil from the infant, the prince managed only a squeak (10) or two. His parents and godparents promised to bring him up “to fight against evil and follow Christ.” Following a session with photographers, the baby was removed from the scene by his nanny. The parents and guests celebrated with a palatial luncheon of champagne and christening cake, the top layer of Prince Charles and Princess Diana’s (15) wedding cake. Godparents include ex-King Constantine of Greece, Princess Alexandra, Lord Romsey, the Duchess of Westminster, Sir Laurens de Post, and Lady Susan Hussey. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 59 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ __________ The baptism was a lengthy ceremony. __________ The baby cried when the baptismal water was poured on him. ○ __________ Crowds outside the palace sang to celebrate the baby’s baptism. __________ The Coldstream Guards band played “Happy Birthday.” ○ __________ The prince wore a new christening robe. ○ __________________________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ 5. ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ 4. ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ 3. ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ 2. ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ Directions: Mark the following true or false according to the article. If the statement is false, go back to the reading and find the word or words that make it false and write the word or words in the space provided. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ __________ The ceremony was very private. ○ ○ __________ The christening cake was made especially for the baptismal ceremony. __________ A nanny is a person who takes care of children. ○ __________________________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ 8. ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ 7. ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ 6. ○ __________ The prince’s godparents are titled people. ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ 10. __________ It is a superstition that godparents bring a child up to fight against evil and follow Christ. ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ 9. ○ ○ ○ Answers The correct answer is false. Brief 2. The correct answer is false. Affably responded—only a squeak or two. 3. The correct answer is false. They sang “Happy Birthday” to the prince’s great-grandmother. 4. The correct answer is true. 5. The correct answer is false. First worn by Edward VII in 1841. 6. The correct answer is true. 7. The correct answer is false. Top layer of Prince Charles and Princess Diana’s wedding cake. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 60 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8. The correct answer is true. 9. The correct answer is true. 10. The correct answer is false. Not a superstition—part of the ceremony. Sample Reading Passage 14 Questions 1–10 are based on the following announcement. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Two well-known residents of Forest Hilltop, Flora Jones and Francis Smith, were married in a meadow near Smith’s cabin on Sunday, August 4. The double-ring nuptials were performed by Horace Dooley, minister of his own Church of the True Faith. (5) The bride was attended by Colleen Jones, the bride’s daughter by a previous marriage, and Kristina Svenson, a longtime resident of Forest Hilltop. Verity Smith, the groom’s daughter by a previous marriage, acted as flower girl. The duties of best man were shared by Daniel Lion and Rory Whitney. Mr. Lion read a selection of poetry by Shakespeare, and Mr. Whitney read a selection from (10) Wordsworth’s Prelude. Music for the ceremony was provided by the bride’s brother, James, from London, who accompanied vocalist Marilyn Horn, a Forest Hilltop neighbor. Also performing at the ceremony was Samuel Cantor, a friend of the groom from Los Angeles, who sang several of his own compositions, accompanied by James (15) Guidry, of Washington, D.C., and William Morris, of New York City. Playing the flute, James Guidry led a procession of wedding guests and the groom’s party from the groom’s cabin to the meadow site of the wedding. Following the ceremony, the wedding party and guests strolled back to the cabin, where a reception was held for over 100 guests. 1. What type of place is Forest Hilltop? (A) Urban ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Flora Jones Wed in Forest Hilltop to Francis Smith ○ ○ (B) Suburban ○ ○ (C) Rural 2. This wedding would be considered (A) traditional ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) Metropolitan ○ ○ (B) original ○ ○ (C) lovable 3. The wedding was performed by (A) a man who has formed his own sect ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) familial (B) a friend of the family (C) the bride’s brother (D) the bride and groom ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 61 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Apparently a vocalist is a (A) female ○ 4. ○ ○ ○ (B) wedding guest ○ ○ (C) singer ○ ○ ○ (D) neighbor ○ ○ ○ Apparently Mr. Cantor is noted for (A) his friendship with the groom ○ 5. ○ ○ (B) his attendance at the wedding ○ ○ (C) writing music ○ ○ ○ (D) his residence in Los Angeles ○ ○ ○ Included in the wedding ceremony was a (A) dance ○ 6. ○ ○ (B) cabin ○ ○ (C) welcome speech ○ ○ ○ (D) poetry recital ○ ○ ○ The wedding took place (A) in a cabin ○ 7. ○ ○ (B) in a church ○ ○ (C) outdoors ○ ○ ○ ○ The reader knows that this is not the first marriage for both bride and groom because (A) it included two daughters ○ 8. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) in a city ○ ○ (B) the guests came from many different places ○ ○ (C) it took place in a meadow ○ ○ Because a cabin is usually a small building, the reader infers that (A) it is constructed of wood ○ 9. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) the minister was of the Church of the True Faith ○ ○ (B) the reception was held outside the cabin ○ ○ ○ (C) it was a temporary residence ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) alumni bulletin ○ 10. Presumably this wedding announcement appeared in a(n) (A) metropolitan newspaper ○ ○ ○ (D) the bride and groom will not live in it ○ ○ (C) musical review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) small-town newspaper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 62 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Answers 1. The correct answer is (C). 2. The correct answer is (B). 3. The correct answer is (A). 4. The correct answer is (C). 5. The correct answer is (C). 6. The correct answer is (D). 7. The correct answer is (C). 8. The correct answer is (A). 9. The correct answer is (B). 10. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 63 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) built for children ○ ○ (B) damp and dirty ○ ○ (A) rugged but comfortable ○ ○ 3. Presumably the camp’s facilities are ○ ○ ○ (D) inclined to spend too much time instructing ○ (C) trained in nature subjects ○ (B) middle-aged ○ (A) young people ○ 2. The instructors at the camp are ○ ○ _____________________________________ ○ ○ _____________________________________ ○ ○ Why or why not?______________________ ○ ○ ○ 1. Would the Audubon camp be a good place for a devoted bird watcher to go? ○ ○ day seated placidly before a blazing fire, discussing their life together in the great outdoors. ○ to” courses complement the day’s adven(45) tures. Compatible campers end their ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ _____________________________________ ○ ○ _____________________________________ ○ ○ 6. Why are there so few puffins on Eastern Egg Rock? ____________________________ ○ ○ _____________________________________ ○ ○ 5. Where is there a multitude of lobsters? ○ ○ (D) provide for adults ○ (C) take boat trips to islands ○ (B) take turns doing household work ○ (A) separate the instructors and campers ○ 4. A common practice at a summer camp is to ○ ○ ○ (D) modern ○ QUESTIONS 1–12 ARE BASED ON THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE. The Audubon Society operates a summer camp for adults on Hog Island, Maine, a 333-acre wildlife sanctuary. Singing paeans to nature and the wilds (5) of Maine, campers delight in meandering down nature trails overhung with spruce and moss. The average age of the campers is 45–50, but the amenities provided are reminiscent of those at (10) summer camps for children—dormitories divided for men and women, wakeup bells at 6:30, sharing chores, and communal meals in a dining room overlooking the rugged Maine coast. (15) A routine day of exploration begins at 8:30, when instructors, all qualified naturalists, lead small groups of campers around Muscongus Bay, the habitat of prolific lobsters and the site of island (20) homes for terns, gulls, and cormorants. Deer, seals, and occasional whales and porpoises enliven the scene. Each daytrip encompasses a specific theme in nature, such as the weather, birds, or animal (25) and plant ecology. Most of the campers are not stereotyped ecology fanatics but, rather, city dwellers exhilarated by this opportunity to gain a rudimentary insight into the wonders of the natural (30) world. An all-day boat trip to Eastern Egg Rock, a remote island, elicits the campers’ greatest enthusiasm. Once the habitat of innumerable puffins whose eggs (35) were pilferred by poachers, the island currently has very few birds. Since 1974, the Audubon Society has been bringing puffins from Newfoundland to augment the population, but it wasn’t until 1981 (40) that any produced young. The campers’ program continues without cessation into the evening hours. Lectures, slide shows, films, and “how- ○ ○ ○ Directions: The passages below are followed by questions based on their content. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in the passages. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ EXERCISES: HOW THOUGHTS ARE RELATED exercises ○ ○ ○ ○ 64 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7. How successful has the Audubon Society been in increasing the puffin population? ____________________________________________________ 8. True or false? The campers eat dinner and then relax after the day’s exploration. __________ 9. True or false? There are numerous whales and porpoises along the coast of Maine. __________ 10. At the end of a busy day in the outdoors, most campers are (A) ready for bed (B) eager for more information (C) cold and hungry (D) stereotyped ecology fanatics 11. We may infer that Newfoundland is (A) distant from Maine (B) only an all-day boat trip from the camp (C) increasing its population (D) a habitat for puffins 12. We may infer that puffins (A) augment their numbers regularly (B) take a long time to get used to a place (C) are native to Maine (D) emigrate from Newfoundland every spring Earlier on we talked about signal words or connectives. The author of the next selection makes frequent use of pronouns and other words that refer to something mentioned in another part of the text. Note that the style of this selection is very different from the others presented in this book, so don’t worry if you don’t understand everything in it. After all, the paragraph was taken from a novel by Anthony Trollope entitled The American Senator. Trollope was a prolific British writer known for his satirical novels, in which he criticized the upper middle class in England. The American Senator was first published in 1877. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com QUESTIONS 13–24 ARE BASED ON THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE. On the Monday afternoon the Trefoils arrived. Mr. Morton, with his mother and both the carriages, went down to receive them—with a cart also (5) for the luggage, which was fortunate, as Arabella Trefoil’s big box was very big indeed, and Lady Augustus, though she was economical in most things, had brought a comfortable amount of (10) clothes. Each of them had her own lady’s maid, so that the two carriages were necessary. How it was that these ladies lived so luxuriously was a mystery to their friends, as for some time (15) past they had enjoyed no particular income of their own. Lord Augustus had spent everything that came to his hand, and the family owned no house at all. Nevertheless Arabella Trefoil (20) was to be seen at all parties magnificently dressed, and never stirred anywhere without her own maid. It would have been as grievous to her to be called on to live without food as to go (25) without this necessary appendage. She was a big, fair girl whose copious hair was managed after such a fashion that no one could guess what was her own and what was purchased. She certainly (30) had fine eyes, though I could never imagine how any one could look at them and think it possible that she should be in love. They were very large, beautifully blue, but never bright; and (35) the eyebrows over them were perfect. Her cheeks were somewhat too long and the distance from her well-formed nose to her upper lip too great. Her mouth was small and her teeth excel(40) lent. But the charm of which men spoke the most was the brilliance of her complexion. If, as the ladies said, it was all paint, she, or her maid, must have been a great artist. It never betrayed (45) itself to be paint. But the beauty on which she prided herself was the grace of her motion. Though she was tall and big she never allowed an awkward movement to escape from her. She cer(50) tainly did it very well. No young woman ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 65 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) discusses her attitude toward her maid ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 23. Miss Trefoil considers her maid more essential than her ○ (D) clothes ○ 17. What nasty remark do the women make about Arabella Trefoil? ○ (B) fiancé ○ (A) mother 16. True or false? The author thinks Miss Trefoil’s eyes are beautiful._______________ ○ ○ (C) dinner ○ ○ (D) very fashionable ○ ○ (D) position (B) not entirely natural (C) dyed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) money ○ (A) exceedingly pretty ○ ○ (A) new clothes (B) love 15. Miss Trefoil’s full hair, it is implied, is ○ ○ 22. The reader can infer that Miss Trefoil is planning to marry for ○ ○ (D) two carriages were needed to transport the group ○ (C) adds something to negate their beauty (C) a large group visited the Mortons ○ (B) makes us admire her ○ ○ (B) the ladies are wealthy (A) tells us how beautiful they are ○ ○ (D) Miss Trefoil has a maid 14. After describing each of Miss Trefoil’s features, the author ○ ○ (A) the ladies are helpless without service ○ (C) Miss Trefoil is very rich ○ ○ 21. Presumably the ladies’ maids show that ○ ○ (D) become a mystery to his friends ○ (C) wasted his inheritance ○ (B) moved from the family home ○ (A) provided his wife and daughter with luxury ○ ○ 20. Lord Augustus, it is implied, has ○ ○ ○ (D) have limited wardrobes ○ ○ (C) like to visit friends ○ (B) the author does not especially like Miss Trefoil (B) live beyond their means ○ (A) Arabella Trefoil is the heroine of Trollope’s novel (A) have plenty of money ○ 13. After reading this passage, we can infer that 19. Apparently Miss Trefoil and Lady Augustus (A) her clothes are expensive ○ (D) she does not love her fiancé ○ (B) is a horseback rider ○ ○ ○ (A) gets plenty of fresh air (C) she and her mother do not get along well ○ ○ (B) she did not want to visit the Mortons ○ ○ (C) is a great artist ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) uses makeup skillfully ○ 18. Miss Trefoil’s complexion appears brilliant because she ○ ○ _____________________________________ ○ ○ 24. The reason Miss Trefoil is unhappy is that ○ could walk across an archery ground with a finer step, or manage a train with more perfect ease, or sit upon her horse with a more complete look of being at (55) home there. No doubt she was slow, but though slow she never seemed to drag. Now she was, after a certain fashion, engaged to marry John Morton and perhaps she was one of the most unhappy (60) young persons in England. exercises ○ ○ ○ ○ 66 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ANSWER KEY 1. ✻ 7. ✻ 13. B 19. B 2. C 8. True 14. C 20. C 3. A 9. False 15. B 21. B 4. B 10. B 16. False 22. C 5. ✻ 11. D 17. ✻ 23. C 6. ✻ 12. B 18. D 24. D ✻ 1. Yes. The passage mentions several kinds of birds: terns, gulls, and cormorants. ✻ 5. Muscongus Bay ✻ 6. The puffin eggs were pilferred by poachers. ✻ 7. The Audubon Society had very little luck until 1981, when the puffins brought from Newfoundland began to produce young. ✻ 17. They said her brilliant complexion was due to paint (make-up). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 67 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ In this section you will encounter various styles of writing about contemporary health issues. Note that you will be given the opportunity to review a great many of the concepts you have learned thus far. ○ ○ ○ It is impossible to open a newspaper or magazine today without finding information pertaining to our health. Changes and developments in almost every area, from the social sciences and economics to science, medicine, and technology, are related to the condition of the human body and mind. ○ ○ ○ UNDERSTANDING CONTEMPORARY READING PASSAGES ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ A person who exceeds the recommended dosage of aspirin (A) is guilty of drug abuse ○ 1. ○ ○ Drug abuse is the taking of any substance for any purpose other than the one for which it was intended and in any way that could damage the user’s health. The most generally used drugs are the most generally abused. Many people treat aspirin, for example, as if it were candy. On the principle that if two aspirins are recommended to make them feel (5) better, four will give them even more relief, people exceed the recommended dosage—no more than two tablets every 4 hours and eight within 24 hours. Without question, aspirin is a widely abused drug. Cold capsules, laxatives, cough syrups—all the drugs sold in drugstores and supermarkets—are frequently abused, but their use, when compared to that of other drugs, does (10) not incur the public’s concern. The major source of drug abuse is alcohol, a common and easily acquired drug. A group of prohibitionists once asked Abraham Lincoln to support their cause. Sagely, he refused, replying that drunkenness is rooted not in the use of a bad thing, but in the abuse of a good thing. ○ ○ ○ Sample Reading Passage 15 ○ ○ (B) likes candy ○ ○ ○ (C) is taking aspirin for a headache ○ ○ ○ If a person takes a dozen aspirins within 24 hours, he or she (A) is aiding the aspirin manufacturers ○ 2. ○ ○ ○ (D) is in for a treat ○ ○ (B) can relieve the pain ○ ○ (C) is endangering his or her health ○ ○ ○ (D) is concerned with his or her health ○ (B) emphasizes the relation between alcohol and alcoholism ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The author’s reference to Abraham Lincoln (A) shows that Lincoln was a wise man ○ ○ (C) conveys the idea that alcohol may be harmless ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) indicates that alcohol leads to drunkenness ○ 3. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 68 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4. True or false? The public is not concerned with addiction to nonprescription drugs. _______________ 5. Presumably, this selection comes from a (A) scientific journal ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) health book ○ ○ (C) drug company advertisement Answers 1. The correct answer is (A). 2. The correct answer is (C). 3. The correct answer is (C). 4. The correct answer is true. 5. The correct answer is (B). Sample Reading Passage 16 Vitamins are complex compounds that the body requires to function normally. The word vitamin was coined in the 1990s, but the therapeutic value of certain foods in combating disease was recognized as early as 3,000 years ago by the ancient Egyptians. They knew that night blindness could be circumvented by (5) eating liver, a source of vitamin A. In the 1700s, an Austrian doctor discovered that eating citrus fruits sufficed to cure scurvy, a disease that affects the blood. In 1795, the British Navy began to give sailors lime juice to prevent scurvy. The Japanese Navy learned that too much polished rice in the diet causes beriberi, a painful nerve disease, and that meat and vegetables, which contain thiamine, (10) prevent the disease. In the early 1900s, as the causes of an increasing number of diseases were identified as vitamin deficiencies, vitamins were labeled with the letters of the alphabet. Researchers discovered more than twenty-six vitamins, which are now referred to by both letter and chemical names. For example, the vitamin B (15) complex includes twelve vitamins. 1. True or false? Vitamin deficiencies first developed in the twentieth century. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) psychology textbook 2. If you were planning to cross the ocean in your own boat, what would you take with you to prevent beriberi? _________________________________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ _______________ 3. Name a food other than liver that will prevent night blindness because it contains vitamin A. _______________ 4. True or false? Some diseases are caused by vitamin deficiencies. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ _______________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 69 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Answers ○ ○ 1. The correct answer is false. ○ 3. The correct answer is milk, eggs, butter, vegetables. Answers will vary. ○ ○ ○ 2. The correct answer is meat and vegetables. ○ ○ ○ 4. The correct answer is true. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Joan is fourteen years old, a bright student, and suffering from self-imposed starvation. She has anorexia nervosa. Anorexia means “without appetite,” and nervosa means “of nervous origin.” One morning six months ago Joan looked at herself in the mirror and decided she needed to lose a few pounds. Then five feet three inches (5) tall and weighing 110 pounds, she presently weighs 81 pounds and is in the hospital where she is undergoing psychiatric treatment and being fed intravenously. What happened to Joan? Why has she ruthlessly starved herself nearly to death? Joan is a typical anorexic—an adolescent girl who refuses to eat for the purpose of rebelling against the pressures imposed upon her by the adult environment. (10) Family members—sometimes the mother, sometimes the father, sometimes both—require her to achieve more than they have in their lives. In her mind, school unites with her family to push her forward. Submissive for years, what does she finally do? She refuses food, says no to the two forces that are pushing her. Instead of growing into a mature woman, she holds back her physical growth by self(15) imposed starvation. In fact, she regresses to childhood, to the stage when she lacked curves, no one expected much from her, and she was dependent upon adults who gave her love and approval without demanding anything from her in return. Anorexia nervosa, formerly not recognized as a disease, has become common among adolescent girls. Today the cure is prolonged treatment by a psychiatrist (20) who initiates discussion among family members and the patient to determine the causes and ways to eliminate them in the future. ○ ○ ○ Sample Reading Passage 17 ○ ○ ○ The main purpose of paragraph 1 is to (A) define and describe anorexia nervosa ○ 1. ○ ○ (B) tell what caused Joan’s starvation ○ ○ ○ (C) give Joan’s past and present weight ○ (B) an anorexic is in rebellion against pressures in her environment ○ ○ ○ ○ The main idea of paragraph 2 is (A) an anorexic is most likely to be an adolescent ○ 2. ○ ○ ○ (D) suggest a cure for anorexia nervosa ○ ○ (C) Joan regressed to childhood ○ ○ ○ (D) Joan’s parents wanted her to succeed ○ (C) the cure of anorexia involves time, discussion, and professional help ○ ○ (B) the family of an anorexic must agree to see a psychiatrist ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The main idea of paragraph 3 is (A) an anorexic can cure herself ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) anorexia is now considered a disease ○ 3. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 70 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4. List the details in paragraph 2 that support the main idea. (A) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ (C) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ (D) ________________________________________________________ 5. Describe Joan before and after she developed anorexia nervosa. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (E) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ 6. Anorexia nervosa is currently recognized as a (A) mystery ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ (B) cure ○ ○ (C) disease 7. The cure for anorexia nervosa is (A) forced feeding ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) regression ○ ○ (B) psychiatric treatment ○ ○ ○ (C) intense discussion Answers 1. The correct answer is (A). 2. The correct answer is (B). 3. The correct answer is (C). 4. (A) Joan refuses to eat to rebel against the pressures imposed upon her by her environment. (B) Family members require her to achieve more than they have. (C) School unites with her family to push her forward. (D) She holds back her physical growth by self-imposed starvation. (E) She regresses to childhood when no one expected much from her and she was dependent upon adults who gave her love without demanding anything from her in return. 5. Before Joan developed anorexia nervosa, she weighed 110 pounds; now she weighs 81 pounds and is in the hospital, where she is undergoing psychiatric treatment and being fed intravenously. 6. The correct answer is (C). 7. The correct answer is (B). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) dependence upon the family ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 71 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The attitude of the author of this passage toward the salt controversy is that (A) we must stop eating salt immediately ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ (30) ○ (25) ○ (20) ○ (15) ○ (10) Fortunately there are still a few tasty things for us gourmands to enjoy in relative security. Their numbers, however, are depleted almost daily, it seems, by ruthless proclamations from the ever-vigilant Food and Drug Administration and its allies, our doctors. The latest felon to face prosecution is the salt of life, sodium chloride. Ostensibly, overuse of salt causes high blood pressure and hypertension. A few years ago the antisalt campaigners raised such a rumpus that salt was banned from baby food. Pressure was being applied to food manufacturers to oblige them to label their products to show sodium content. Because doing so would cost manufacturers money, they argued that they had no idea how much salt remains on such things as potato chips and how much sticks to the bag. Furthermore, salt isn’t the only harmful ingredient in food. The debate at the time was if the manufacturer has to provide sodium content, why not require him to list every ingredient and specify which are detrimental to our health? Cigarettes have a warning printed on them. Shouldn’t the same type of warning appear on canned foods that are notoriously oversalted? There are endless ifs and buts in the controversy, but the most telling of these is the questionable proof of salt’s diabolic effect upon the blood pressure. True, people who cut their salt intake lowered their blood pressure, but where is the scientific proof that something other than salt didn’t do the trick? The most common means of providing dubious proof that salt causes hypertension is to compare societies that use little salt with those that use mountains of salt in their daily diets. Which group has the higher rate of hypertension? Whose blood pressure is lower? What happens when salt is introduced into a group where salt is a novelty? Does the blood pressure rise significantly? Studies of Japanese salt-intake indicated that as the world’s greatest salters, they suffer the most from hypertension. On the other hand, the simple, salt-free cuisine of several tribes in the Solomon Islands has kept older members of the tribe from developing hypertension and high blood pressure. No account is taken of the effects of inflation, recession, pollution, crime, and sundry other ills to which Americans, unlike people on underdeveloped islands, are exposed. To salt or not to salt? That is the question. Now that the question has arisen, it must not be treated with levity but, rather, with searching scientific investigation so that those of us who are preoccupied with both savory food and longevity may decide which of the two is worth its salt. ○ (5) ○ Sample Reading Passage 18 ○ ○ (C) the Food and Drug Administration works well with doctors ○ ○ ○ (B) she is still not convinced that salt is harmful ○ ○ (D) soon there won’t be anything tasty left to eat ○ ○ ○ ○ The author’s approach to the topic is (A) angry ○ ○ ○ (B) humorous ○ ○ (C) scientific ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) sympathetic ○ 2. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 72 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3. Presumably a gourmand is a (A) person ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) theory ○ ○ (C) food 4. Some food manufacturers did not want to label packages with sodium content because (A) they disagree with the FDA ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) protest ○ ○ (B) salt doesn’t stick to potato chips ○ ○ ○ (C) they would have to spend more money 5. True or false? At present baby food contains salt. _______________ 6. Canned goods should have the same type of warning as cigarettes because (A) both contain salt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) it isn’t important to single out salt ○ ○ (B) the author likes to smoke and eat ○ ○ ○ (C) the cigarette warning reduces smoking 7. True or false? Comparing societies is a scientific means of determining the dangers of salt consumption. _______________ 8. According to the passage, the Japanese use a lot of salt (A) but they suffer from hypertension ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) both are harmful to your health ○ ○ (B) and they suffer from hypertension ○ ○ (C) because they suffer from hypertension 9. True, false, or information not given? People in societies that use little salt never have high blood pressure. _______________ 10. The author suggests that Americans suffer from hypertension as a result of (A) too much salt ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) when they suffer from hypertension ○ ○ (B) emotional stress ○ ○ (C) salt-free cuisine Answers 1. The correct answer is (B). 2. The correct answer is (B). 3. The correct answer is (A). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) ailments ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 73 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5. The correct answer is false. 6. The correct answer is (D). 7. The correct answer is false. 8. The correct answer is (B). 9. The correct answer is information not given. ○ The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. The correct answer is (B). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ What is the main idea of paragraph 1? Is it stated in a specific sentence or is it implied? _____________________________________________________ List the supporting details of the main idea in paragraph 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ____________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ ____________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ What is the main idea of paragraph 2? Is it stated or implied? ○ 3. ○ ○ (C) _______________________________________________________________ ○ ○ (B) _______________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ (A) _______________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ 2. ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ Most people are unaware of the fact that an ailment has developed among subway users. Called “subway syndrome,” it causes people to turn pale and cold and even to faint. Commuters misdiagnose the symptoms—acute chest pains and nausea— and rush to hospital emergency rooms in the belief that they are about to succumb (5) to a heart attack. Hearing that their heart attack is only a case of nerves makes them feel better. What makes people get sick on subways? Various and sundry things. One is that they rush off to work in the morning without having eaten a proper breakfast. Sudden dizziness attacks them. A second cause is the overcrowding and ensuing (10) feeling of claustrophobia, which brings on stress and anxiety. In addition, they are so afraid of mechanical failure, fire, and/or crime that they show signs of panic— men by having chest pains and women by becoming hysterical. Contributing especially to their stress are other factors: overcrowding of both sexes, continual increase in the numbers of passengers, and people’s inability to avoid interacting (15) with strangers. Noise, lack of space, summer heat, fear of entrapment underground—it is a wonder that more people don’t have subway syndrome. What therapeutic measures can a commuter take to inoculate himself or herself from the disease? Eat a good breakfast, concentrate on pleasant thoughts as you stand surrounded, bounce a bit (20) on your toes, and roll your head. Thus, mind and body will be restored to a semblance of normality despite the adverse conditions of subway transportation. ○ ○ ○ Sample Reading Passage 19 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 74 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4. List the supporting details in paragraph 2. (A) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ (C) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ (D) ________________________________________________________ 5. What is the main idea of paragraph 3? ______________________________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (E) ________________________________________________________ 6. List the supporting details in paragraph 3. (A) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ __________________________________________________________________ ○ ○ (B) ________________________________________________________ ○ ○ ○ (C) ________________________________________________________ 7. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) ________________________________________________________ Why do subway riders think they might be having a heart attack? (A) They are overcrowded. ○ ○ (B) They are afraid. ○ ○ (C) They suffer from chest pains. 8. According to the passage, if you don’t have a good breakfast, you might get (A) cold ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) They don’t eat breakfast. ○ ○ (B) pale ○ ○ (C) afraid 9. The author suggests that subway riders will feel better if they (A) exercise a little (B) think about pleasant things (C) eat breakfast (D) All of the above. 10. A good title for this passage might be (A) How to Ride the Subway (B) A Case of Nerves (C) The Subway Syndrome (D) Overcrowding on the Subways ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) dizzy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 75 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) New ailment called subway syndrome. ○ 2. ○ A new ailment has developed among subway users. It is stated in the first sentence. Various and sundry things make people sick on subways. It is stated. 4. (A) Dizziness is caused by not having eaten a proper breakfast. (A) Eat a good breakfast. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6. ○ There are measures commuters can take to protect themselves from subway syndrome. ○ ○ ○ 5. ○ ○ (E) Overcrowding of both sexes, continual increase in the number of passengers, and people’s inability to avoid interacting with strangers contribute to stress. ○ ○ (D) Men show panic by having chest pains, women by becoming hysterical. ○ ○ (C) People are afraid of mechanical failure, fire, and/or crime, so they panic. ○ ○ (B) The overcrowding causes claustrophobia, which brings on stress and anxiety. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3. ○ ○ ○ (C) Commuters rush to the hospital, thinking they are having a heart attack. ○ ○ (B) Causes people to turn pale and cold and even to faint. ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Answers ○ ○ (B) Concentrate on pleasant thoughts. ○ ○ (C) Bounce a bit on your toes. The correct answer is (C). 8. The correct answer is (D). 9. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 7. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) Roll your head. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 76 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ EXERCISES: UNDERSTANDING CONTEMPORARY READING PASSAGES Directions: The passages below are followed by questions based on their content. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in the passages. QUESTIONS 1–5 ARE BASED ON THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE. Not since Americans crossed the continent in covered wagons have they exercised and dieted as strenuously as they are doing today. Consequently, they do (5) not only look younger and slimmer, but feel better. Because of increased physical fitness, life expectancy in the nation has risen to seventy-three years, with fewer people suffering from heart dis(10) ease, the nation’s number one killer. Jogging, the easiest and cheapest way of improving the body, keeps more than 30 million people of all ages on the run. For the price of a good pair of run(15) ning shoes, anyone anywhere can join the race. Dieting, too, has become a national pastime. Promoters of fad diets that eliminate eating one thing or another, (20) such as fats or carbohydrates, promise as much as 20-pound weight losses within two weeks. Books describing such miraculous diets consistently head up the best-seller lists because (25) everybody wants to lose weight quickly and easily. Nevertheless, both jogging and dieting, carried to extremes, can be hazardous. Many confused joggers overdo and (30) ultimately suffer from ankle and foot damage. Fad dieting, fortunately, becomes only a temporary means for shedding a few pounds while the body is deprived of the balanced nutrition it (35) requires, so most dieters cannot persevere on fad diets. Above all, common sense should be the keystone for any dieting and exercise scheme. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. The main idea of paragraph 1 is (A) Americans got exercise when they crossed the continent in covered wagons (B) exercise and diet are more widespread in America than ever before (C) heart disease is the number one killer among Americans (D) Americans live longer than they did before 2. The main idea of paragraph 2 is (A) jogging as an exercise appeals to a large number of Americans (B) joggers have to buy special shoes (C) joggers must be a certain age (D) jogging is inexpensive 3. The main idea of paragraph 3 is (A) people are so eager to lose weight that they will try any kind of diet (B) fad diets are so popular because they are on the best-seller lists (C) eliminating fats or carbohydrates will cause drastic weight loss (D) diet books guarantee 20-pound weight losses 4. The main idea of paragraph 4 is (A) it’s good for you to jog and restrict your eating (B) improperly controlled, diet and exercise harm rather than benefit your health (C) jogging can damage the body because it is too strenuous an exercise ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) in the long run, dieting doesn’t help people reduce because they don’t stay on a diet ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 77 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5. You can infer from this passage that ○ ○ ○ ○ (A) a person’s life expectancy depends upon diet ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) inactive and corpulent people are prone to heart disease ○ ○ ○ (C) more people succumb to heart disease than to any other ailment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. Medical plans pay up to _______________ in reimbursements to participants. ○ ○ 9. The average cost per person in the United States for medical care was _______________. ○ ○ 8. Medical costs in 1981 rose ____________. ○ ○ ○ 7. The rate of inflation in 1981 was ______. ○ ○ 6. _______________ of all Americans have health insurance. ○ ○ ○ ○ The cost of medical services has a direct influence upon the cost of other things Americans purchase. Large companies provide health plans for their employees, and, as the premiums rise (40) for those plans, the manufacturers must cover their expenses by increasing the sales price of their products. One automobile manufacturer, for example, estimates that the soaring costs of health (45) insurance have added $350 to the cost of a car. Health costs are not isolated but, rather, have had an increasingly appalling effect upon the rate of inflation. (35) ○ QUESTIONS 6–10 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE, WRITTEN IN 1983. The statistics relating to the skyrocketing costs of treating the sick indicate that there is no easy cure for inflation in America. Health costs rose 15.1% in (5) 1981, whereas the inflation rate was only 8.9%. The entire nation spent approximately $287 billion on health care, an average of $1,225 per person. Since 85% of all Americans are covered by (10) health insurance and get reimbursements of up to 75%, there are no incentives for reducing costs. Medicare and Medicaid, programs for the poor and the elderly, paid out $73 billion in 1981, (15) an increase of $30 billion over the cost in 1976. Between 1972 and 1982, hospital care costs quadrupled to $118 billion; doctors’ services tripled to $54.8 billion; and (20) nursing home costs quadrupled to $24.2 billion. A day in a hospital cost $133 in 1975; in 1982, the price was $250. There are multiple causes for soaring medical costs. New construction, particularly (25) when special highly technical areas like burn centers are required, has escalated in cost. To keep a patient alive with modern mechanisms like the kidney dialysis machine costs an added $9 million (30) a year nationwide. The more highly technical treatment becomes, for example for heart and other organ transplants, the more impossible it becomes to halt the inflationary rise of medical costs. ○ ○ ○ Directions: Scan the passage as quickly as possible to get the information required to fill in the blanks in the following sentences. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) All of the above. exercises ○ ○ ○ ○ 78 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ANSWER KEY 1. B 6. 85% 2. A 7. 8.9% 3. A 8. 15.1% 4. B 9. $1,225 5. D 10. $287 billion ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 79 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ When reading historical material, it is crucial to understand cause and effect relations, chronological sequence, and comparison/contrast. As you work through these passages and accompanying exercises, keep in mind that it is not necessary to remember the specific information given here. Your purpose should be to develop the skills and strategies necessary for effective study reading. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ READING HISTORY TEXTBOOKS ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The Olympic Games originated in 776 B.C. in Olympia, a small town in Greece. Participants in the first Olympiad are said to have run a 200-yard race, but as the Games were held every four years, they expanded in scope. Only Greek amateurs were allowed to participate in this festival in honor of the god Zeus. The event (5) became a religious, patriotic, and athletic occasion where winners were honored with wreaths and special privileges. There was a profound change in the nature of the Games under the Roman emperors. After they became professional circuses and carnivals, they were banned in 394 A.D. by Emperor Theodosius. The modern Olympic Games began in Athens in 1896 as a result of the initiative (10) of Baron Pierre de Coubertin, a French educator whose desire was to promote international understanding through athletics. Nine nations participated in the first Games; over 100 nations currently compete. The taint of politics and racial controversy, however, has impinged upon the Olympic Games in our epoch. In 1936, Hitler, whose country hosted the Games, (15) affronted Jesse Owens, an African American runner, by refusing to congratulate Owens for the feat of having won four gold medals. In the 1972 Munich Games, the world was appalled by the deplorable murder of eleven Israeli athletes by Arab terrorists. The next Olympic Games in Montreal were boycotted by African nations; in addition, Taiwan withdrew. In 1980, following the Soviet invasion of (20) Afghanistan, sixty-two nations caused great consternation to their athletes by refusing to participate in the Games. The consensus among those nations was that their refusal would admonish the Soviets. ○ ○ ○ Sample Reading Passage 20 ○ ○ ○ The first Olympic Games were held (A) for political reasons ○ 1. ○ ○ (B) as an international competition ○ ○ (C) as a religious festival ○ ○ ○ (D) as a professional athletes’ competition ○ ○ ○ ○ Why were the Games discontinued? (A) They had ceased to be sports events. ○ ○ (B) The Romans did not enjoy them. ○ ○ (C) The emperors hated athletes. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) Winners were getting special privileges. ○ 2. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 80 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3. Olympic Games are held (A) every decade ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) biannually ○ ○ (C) every four years 4. The Greek Olympic Games were __________ in nature. (A) religious ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) perennially ○ ○ (B) national ○ ○ (C) athletic 5. The Games were resumed in modern times for the purpose of (A) giving amateur athletes a chance to participate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) All of the above. ○ ○ (B) promoting goodwill among nations ○ ○ (C) creating an apolitical arena 6. You can infer that the athletes in sixty-two nations in 1980 were (A) terribly disappointed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) None of the above. ○ ○ (B) very happy ○ ○ (C) participants 7. The last three Olympic Games mentioned in the passage were notorious for their (A) racial discrimination ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) boycotted ○ ○ (B) triumphant victories ○ ○ (C) fidelity to the goals of the Olympic Games Answers 1. The correct answer is (C). 2. The correct answer is (A). 3. The correct answer is (C). 4. The correct answer is (D). 5. The correct answer is (B). 6. The correct answer is (A). 7. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) political controversy ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 81 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (30) ○ (25) ○ (20) ○ (15) ○ (10) When Christopher Columbus landed on America’s shores, he encountered copper-skinned people whom he promptly called “Indians.” Mistaken in his geography, he believed he had reached India. Current estimates indicate that there were over a million Native Americans inhabiting North America then. There are approximately 800,000 Native Americans today, of whom about 250,000 live on reservations. The early settlers had an amicable relationship with Native Americans, who shared their knowledge of hunting, fishing, and farming with their uninvited guests. Antipathy developed between the Native Americans and the settlers, whose encroachment on Native American lands provoked an era of turbulence. As early as 1745, Native American tribes coalesced to drive the French off their land. The French and Indian War did not end until 1763. The Native Americans had succeeded in destroying many of the Western settlements. The British, superficially submissive to the Native Americans, promised that further migrations west would not extend beyond a specified boundary. However, there was no holding back ardent adventurers like Daniel Boone, who ignored the British covenant with the Native Americans and blazed a trail westward. Evicted from their lands or, worse still, ingenuously ceding their property to the whites for a few baubles, Native Americans were ruthlessly pushed west. Tempestuous wars broke out, but lacking their former stamina and large numbers, the Native Americans were doomed to capitulation. The battle in 1876 at Little Big Horn River in Montana, in which Sitting Bull and the Sioux tribes massacred General Custer’s cavalry, caused the whites to intensify their campaign against the Native Americans. The battle at Wounded Knee, South Dakota, in 1890 rescinded the last vestige of hope for amity between Indians and whites. Thenceforth Native Americans were relegated to their own reservations, lands allotted to them by the federal government. Although the Bureau of Indian Affairs has operated since 1824, presumably for the purpose of guarding Native Americans’ interests, Native Americans on reservations lead notoriously deprived lives. Poverty, unemployment, high infant mortality, and deficient medical care have maimed a once proud race. In recent times, irate Native Americans have taken a militant stand and have appealed to the courts and the American people to ameliorate their substandard living conditions. ○ (5) ○ Sample Reading Passage 21 ○ ○ ○ You can infer that the author of this passage (A) works for the Bureau of Indian Affairs ○ (B) thinks Native Americans are satisfied living on reservations. ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ (C) admires the settlers for their endurance ○ ○ ○ (D) sympathizes with Native Americans ○ ○ ○ ○ The early settlers in America (A) had to fight Native Americans ○ ○ (B) found the Native Americans very helpful ○ ○ ○ (C) went hunting and fishing ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) were indifferent to the Native Americans ○ 2. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 82 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3. The French and Indian War (A) was quickly terminated ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) caused great destruction among the French forces ○ ○ (C) lasted eighteen years 4. The British made an agreement with the Native Americans to (A) treat them fairly ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) led to westward migration ○ ○ (B) get the Indians’ land ○ ○ (C) stop westward migration 5. The Indians sold their land (A) for huge profits ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) send Daniel Boone across the continent ○ ○ (B) for a few trinkets ○ ○ (C) because they didn’t understand the language 6. At Little Big Horn River the Indians were (A) defeated ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) because they believed it was infertile ○ ○ (B) the victors ○ ○ (C) forced to retreat 7. The battle at Wounded Knee (A) marks the end of the Indian wars ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) massacred ○ ○ ○ (B) occurred on the Indian reservation ○ ○ (C) caused great hope among Native Americans 8. Apparently, the author feels that the Bureau of Indian Affairs (A) has been of great help to the Native Americans ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) was won by the Native Americans ○ ○ (B) was established in the nineteenth century ○ ○ (C) deprived the Native Americans Answers 1. The correct answer is (D). 2. The correct answer is (B). 3. The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) has never done much for Native Americans ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 83 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 5. The correct answer is (B). 6. The correct answer is (B). 7. The correct answer is (A). 8. The correct answer is (D). ○ The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (25) ○ (20) ○ (15) ○ (10) On July 4, 1776, a conclave of insurgent colonists in America passed the Declaration of Independence. War against the British had already been going on for over a year, so the Declaration came as the culmination of years of tempestuous events in America. The impetus for the American Revolution was the Treaty of Paris in 1763, which ended the struggle between the British and the French for control over North America. Since the colonists no longer were intimidated by the French, they ceased to rely upon the British for protection and were not as submissive as they were formerly. On the other hand, the British regarded the colonies as a source of revenue and began to impose inequitable taxes upon them. The Sugar Act in 1764 and the Stamp Act in 1765 were so vehemently opposed by disgruntled colonists that rioting broke out. The Stamp Act was repealed in 1766 as a result of the riots. The British continued their policy of taxation without collaboration with their once docile subjects. The Townshend Acts (a series of taxes on glass, lead, paper, and tea) created such antipathy that the citizens of Boston attacked British soldiers who fired upon them. That was the Boston Massacre of 1770. After the repeal of the Townshend Acts, a new tea tax in 1773 again consolidated Boston residents’ dissension. About fifty men disguised as Indians boarded British ships and jettisoned their cargo of tea in protest against the tea tax. That was the famous Boston Tea Party. In reprisal, the British abolished the Bostonians’ right to selfrule, and by passing what were referred to as Intolerable Acts in Boston, they infuriated all of the colonies and caused them to unite in protest. Representatives from twelve colonies gathered in Philadelphia in 1774 to plan a stratagem to circumvent British interference in trade and to protest the infamy of taxation without representation. The British responded that the colonies were in rebellion, and, since nothing would appease either side, both sides prepared for war. ○ (5) ○ Sample Reading Passage 22 ○ ○ ○ The author’s intent in this passage is to (A) tell about the American Revolution ○ 1. ○ ○ (B) describe the temperament of the colonists ○ ○ (C) give the causes of the American Revolution ○ ○ ○ (D) describe the effects of the American Revolution ○ ○ ○ ○ You may infer that the Treaty of Paris (A) gave the French control of Canada ○ ○ (B) gave the control of North America to the British ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) had an immediate effect upon colonists’ desire for independence ○ ○ ○ (C) made the colonists in America very angry ○ 2. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 84 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 3. The colonists after the Treaty of Paris did not need the British because they (A) were independent ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) didn’t like to pay taxes ○ ○ (C) didn’t need protection from an enemy 4. The Sugar Act and Stamp Act were (A) passed in 1765 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) made a treaty with the French ○ ○ (B) taxes upon the colonists ○ ○ (C) repealed 5. The first violent protest against the British was made in (A) 1764 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) equitable ○ ○ (B) 1765 ○ ○ (C) 1770 6. You can infer that in the Boston Massacre in 1770 (A) Boston was a battlefield ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) 1773 ○ ○ (B) Boston residents wanted independence ○ ○ (C) colonists were killed 7. The Boston Tea Party was (A) a celebration in Boston ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) British soldiers sided with Boston residents ○ ○ ○ (B) an Indian rebellion ○ ○ (C) held on board a British ship 8. You can infer that the Intolerable Acts (A) were repealed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) an act of aggression by the colonists ○ ○ (B) infringed upon colonists’ rights ○ ○ (C) displeased the British 9. You can infer that the meeting in Philadelphia in 1774 (A) was a very important social event (B) took place to discuss taxes (C) was a conclave of the British and the colonists (D) was the first time the colonists united to protest British injustice ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) were entirely related to taxes ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 85 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) colonists objected to taxation without representation ○ ○ (C) Bostonians dumped tea in the sea at the Boston Tea Party ○ (B) British fired at the Bostonians in the Boston Massacre ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. The British and the colonists went to war because the (A) colonists wanted independence from their rulers The correct answer is (C). 2. The correct answer is (B). 3. The correct answer is (C). 4. The correct answer is (B). 5. The correct answer is (B). 6. The correct answer is (C). 7. The correct answer is (D). 8. The correct answer is (B). 9. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ 10. The correct answer is (D). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ The Titanic was the last “unsinkable” ship ever to set sail. Built in 1912 for the British White Star Line, she was a colossal ship for the times—882 feet long, 46,328 tons, and capable of doing 25 knots an hour. Acclaimed as the zenith of luxury liners, the ship had been fitted out with palatial accoutrements. Her (5) sixteen watertight compartments, her builders claimed, guaranteed that nothing could sink her. April 10, 1912, was a glittering occasion as the Titanic began her maiden voyage from England to New York with 2,207 people on board, some of whom were American tycoons whose estimated worth was over $250 million. At 11:40 p.m. on April 14, many of the sleeping passengers were awakened by a (10) slight jolt. The ship had struck an iceberg, incurred a 300-foot gash in her side, and five compartments were flooded. “Unsinkable,” however, meant the ship could float if two, not five, compartments were inundated. Ten miles away from the Titanic was another ship, the Californian, which had stopped because of ice fields (15) and which had wired six explicit warnings to nearby ships. Unfortunately, the Titanic’s wireless, a new invention on shipboard, was being employed for frivolous messages to and from the passengers. The tired wireless operator had worked long hours and impatiently told the Californian’s operator to shut up and stop annoying him. By 12:05 a.m. officers and crew fully comprehended that something was seriously (20) amiss. Lifeboats were uncovered, and passengers and crew were mustered to the boat deck. Ten minutes later a “CQD” sent out to summon help was received by ships too distant to be of immediate help. The Californian might as well have been in the South Seas for all the assistance she ever gave. Her wireless operator, ○ ○ ○ Sample Reading Passage 23 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 86 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (25) unfamiliar with the new equipment, had failed to wind up the mechanism that (30) (35) (40) (45) (50) (55) kept the set running. At about 11:40 he tuned in, heard nothing from his dead set, and went to bed. Secure in the knowledge that their ship was unsinkable, the White Star Line had provided enough lifeboat space for only 1,178 people. There were sixteen wooden lifeboats and four collapsible canvas boats on board for 2,207 people. The crew’s efforts to load the lifeboats in the midst of chaos and bitterly cold weather were heroic but disorganized. Women and children were supposed to be first in the lifeboats, but no matter how chivalrous the men, the women were querulous about leaving the ship for a cold, open boat and had to be cajoled into the boats. At 12:45 the Californian crew watched the Titanic’s rockets overhead and regarded them as “strange.” The first boat was being lowered into the icy sea at the same moment; with a capacity for forty, it contained twelve. Throughout the fiasco of lifeboat loading, the ship’s orchestra played ragtime, the lights blazed, and the Titanic continued to slip downward at the bow. Meanwhile, three ships had received an SOS, the first time that signal had ever been used, and they were confused. All had been advised that the Titanic was sinking. The Carpathia was fifty-eight miles away. The Californian watched the last rocket go off at 1:40. At 2:05 the last boat was lowered as the band played an Episcopal hymn, “Autumn,” not “Abide with Me,” as is usually believed. With the ship standing at a 90° angle, perpendicular in the water, at 2:10 the last SOS was sent out. At 2:20 A.M. on April 15, 1912, the Titanic sank. The crew of the Californian believed that the disappearing lights indicated that the ship was leaving the area. At 4:10 the Carpathia was the first ship to reach the scene. The Californian arrived at 5:40, too late to rescue any survivors. From eighteen boats 705 people were rescued. Following inquiries regarding the disaster, it was revealed that very few of the third-class passengers had been saved. Of 143 women in first class, 4 were lost; of 93 women in second class, 15 were lost; of 179 women in third class, 81 were lost. All but one child in first and second class were saved, but of the 76 children in third class, only 23 survived. 1. You can infer that “the Titanic was the last ‘unsinkable’ ship” means that (A) the Titanic was not unsinkable ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (B) the Titanic would not have sunk if only two compartments had been flooded ○ ○ ○ ○ (C) nobody ever believed in an “unsinkable” ship after the Titanic disaster 2. You can infer from the statistics regarding the number of third-class passengers who survived that (A) they did not know the ship was sinking (B) they ignored the crew’s calls to the lifeboats (C) they courteously allowed the first- and second-class passengers to leave the ship first (D) there was class distinction in the filling of the lifeboats ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) nobody ever built a ship like the Titanic again ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 87 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ You can infer that the Californian crew (A) callously ignored the Titanic’s plight ○ ○ (B) could have saved many if it had heeded the rockets ○ ○ 3. ○ ○ (C) didn’t want to lose any sleep ○ ○ You can infer that many of the Titanic’s male passengers (A) succumbed quickly in the icy sea ○ 4. ○ ○ ○ ○ (D) did its best to aid the Titanic ○ (C) saved themselves instead of the women and children ○ ○ ○ (B) were frivolous ○ ○ ○ (D) were very rich ○ ○ ○ The first SOS signal was called (A) a wireless ○ 5. ○ ○ (B) a warning ○ ○ (C) CQD ○ ○ ○ (D) a message The correct answer is (C). 2. The correct answer is (B). 3. The correct answer is (D). 4. The correct answer is (A). 5. The correct answer is (C). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ Answers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 88 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ EXERCISES: READING HISTORY TEXTBOOKS Directions: The passages below are followed by questions based on their content. Answer the questions on the basis of what is stated or implied in the passages. QUESTIONS 1–7 ARE BASED ON THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE. When Franklin D. Roosevelt was elected President of the United States in 1932, not only the United States but also the rest of the world was in the throes of (5) an economic depression. Following the termination of World War I, Britain and the United States at first experienced a boom in industry. Called the Roaring Twenties, the 1920s ushered in a num(10) ber of things—prosperity, greater equality for women in the work world, rising consumption, and easy credit. The outlook for American business was rosy. October 1929 was a month that had (15) catastrophic economic reverberations worldwide. The American stock market witnessed the “Great Crash,” as it is called, and the temporary boom in the American economy came to a standstill. (20) Stock prices sank, and panic spread. The ensuing unemployment figure soared to 12 million by 1932. Germany in the postwar years suffered from extreme deprivation because (25) of onerous reparations it was obliged to pay to the Allies. The country’s industrial capacity had been greatly diminished by the war. Inflation, political instability, and high unemployment (30) were factors conducive to the growth of the embryonic Nazi party. Germans had lost confidence in their old leaders and heralded the arrival of a figure who would lead them out of their economic (35) wilderness. Roosevelt was elected because he promised a “New Deal” to lift the United States out of the doldrums of the depression. Following the principles advocated (40) by Keynes, a British economist, Roosevelt mustered the spending capacities of the federal government to provide welfare, work, and agricultural ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com aid to the millions of down-and-out (45) Americans. Elected President for four terms because of his innovative policies, Roosevelt succeeded in dragging the nation out of the Depression before the outbreak of World War II. 1. A good title for this selection would be (A) The Twenties (B) The End of World War I (C) The Great Crash (D) The Depression 2. The 1920s were called the Roaring Twenties because (A) social and economic affairs were prospering (B) women were advancing in the fight for equal rights (C) there was little unemployment (D) people were celebrating the end of World War I 3. When Roosevelt was elected, (A) the nation was in a deep depression (B) there were 12 million unemployed workers (C) the nation needed help from the federal government (D) All of the above. 4. The “Great Crash” refers to (A) the end of World War I (B) the Great Depression (C) a slump in the stock market (D) high unemployment figures Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 89 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (70) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ (65) ○ (60) ○ (55) ○ (50) ○ QUESTIONS 8–15 ARE BASED ON THE FOLLOWING PASSAGE. On September 2, 1945, the Communist Viet Minh party took over Vietnam and declared the country autonomous. The French, however, backed by the British, (5) returned to Vietnam and forced the Viet Minh to attend the Fountainebleau Conference in 1946. Ho Chi Minh, the Viet Minh leader, was inflexible in his demands for unification of his country. (10) The French had divided it into three parts: Cochin China in the south, Tonkin in the middle, and Annam in the north. A French decree making Cochin China a separate republic closed the door on any (15) possible negotiations at the conference. War broke out between the French and the Viet Minh. In the conflict the United States supported the French, while the Chinese (20) and the Soviets backed the Viet Minh. By 1954 public disapproval of the war and its financial burden forced the French to withdraw. At a peace confer- ○ (D) until he dies in office ○ (45) ○ (C) sixteen years in office ○ (B) four years in office ○ (A) eight years in office ○ (40) ○ 7. Four terms of office as President of the United States would mean ○ (D) All of the above. ○ (C) government aid to farmers www.petersons.com ○ (35) ○ (B) providing support for the poor and unemployable ○ (A) government spending to provide employment ○ 6. Roosevelt’s “New Deal” advocated ○ (30) ○ (D) None of the above. ○ (C) was optimistic about the future take place by elections two years later. The Communists in North Vietnam and the anti-Communists in South Vietnam refused to collaborate. Led by Ngo Dinh Diem, whose regime was backed by the United States, the South Vietnamese prevented unification elections and persecuted Communists in their region. In January 1959, militant Hanoi Communists again declared war, this time against their own neighbors in the south. The United States’ involvement in Vietnam’s internal affairs increased as President Kennedy sent military advisers in 1961 to assist the South Vietnamese. The war continued. President Johnson ordered American bombing of North Vietnam on February 8, 1965. Ground fighting intensified early in 1968. Neither side appeared to have gained ascendancy over the other, and the American people were fed up with human and financial losses in Vietnam. President Johnson ordered a cutback in the bombing. His successor, Richard Nixon, continued to support South Vietnam but ordered the withdrawal of American combat troops. Peace negotiations between the United States and North Vietnam began in Paris in May 1968, but were not terminated until January 27, 1973. Fighting had reached a deadlock, and the Americans had renewed their bombing offensive in December 1972. With Communist forces remaining in South Vietnam after the American withdrawal, the fighting was renewed immediately after the peace conference. South Vietnam was defeated on April 30, 1975. The following year Hanoi united North and South Vietnam. The conflict had lasted thirty chaotic years. The United States had supported the losing side with over half a million troops and billions of dollars. ○ (B) had difficulty paying reparations ○ (A) had a booming industrial program (25) with the proviso that reunification would ○ ence in Geneva, Vietnam was divided 5. In the postwar years, Germany exercises ○ ○ ○ ○ 90 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8. You can infer from the fact that the United States supported South Vietnamese leader Ngo Dinh Diem that 12. The apparent cause of the entire Vietnam conflict was (A) French refusal to allow unification (A) he was a poor leader (B) he was anti-Communist (B) Communists’ demands for possession of North Vietnam (C) he was supportive of French colonization (C) South Vietnam’s withdrawal from the northern leaders (D) the United States opposed the French (D) social upheaval throughout Vietnam 9. The author’s final statement in this passage implies that 13. In 1959, the war in Vietnam was (A) an international struggle for power (A) Americans ought to have stayed out of Vietnam (B) expected to last a long time (B) Americans should have put more effort into winning the war (D) an internal struggle (C) almost over (C) Americans have a tendency to interfere in other nations’ affairs 14. After seven years of conflict in Vietnam, the American people (D) the cost to the Americans was worthwhile (A) favored increased efforts to win the war 10. The French withdrew from Vietnam because (A) they were weak (B) the people at home did not sanction fighting the war (C) they wanted to divide the country (B) paid little attention to the war (C) protested against the waste of the war (D) supported the South Vietnamese 15. You can infer that the renewed bombing of North Vietnam at the end of 1972 (D) the Vietnamese hated them (A) destroyed North Vietnam’s forces 11. Negotiations at the Fontainebleau Conference broke down because the (A) Viet Minh attended it (B) French couldn’t make up their minds (C) Americans interfered (D) French made Cochin China a separate state ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com (B) contributed to ending the conflict (C) made the Americans seek peace (D) caused very little damage Chapter 3: Developing Reading Comprehension Skills ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 91 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ D 6. D 11. D 2. A 7. C 12. A 3. D 8. B 13. D 4. C 9. A 14. C 5. B 10. B 15. B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ www.petersons.com ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ANSWER KEY answers ○ ○ ○ ○ 92 PART III: TOEFL Reading Review ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○